Tektronix_Catalog_1982 Tektronix Catalog 1982
User Manual: Tektronix_Catalog_1982
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 374
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
1l!kI:ronix·
DON BRIDGE
Measurement Products Sales Engineer
Instrument Division
Tektronix, Inc.
7830 Freeway Circle, Middleburg Heights, Ohio 44130
Phone: 216-243-8500
TEK PRODUCTS
1982
REFERENCE
IEEE-488
2
An overview of some of the important factors
involved in selecting products to meet your
needs.
Tektronix GPIB product systems are described, as well as individual waveform measurement instruments, graphic controllers, and
peripherals.
Introducing a year of 50 new
products and a new company
structure.
Tek's 1982 Catalog is thicker by some 60
pages. Over 50 new products are being offered this year providing the superior performance , increased productivity and
unmatched value you expect from
Tektronix. Each major product introduction
is marked ~ for easy reference .
And, there 's more news.
This year's catalog is organized to reflect
Tek's new decentralized, divisional structure . Each Division is virtually a selfcontained entity with its own engineering,
manufacturing , marketing and sales
responsibilities.
MICROCOMPUTER
DEVELOPMENT PRODUCTS
12
The 8500 Series offers the broadest range of
quality multiple microprocessor and microcomputer development support available
today.
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
PRODUCTS
67
A wide range of computer display terminals,
desktop computers. graphic peripheral products and supporting software.
Each Tektronix Sales Engineer now
specalizes in the products and applications
for a major area of customer activity: digital
design and test, computer graphics, communications, and general test and
measurement.
You can receive additional product information by calling your nearest Tektronix Sales
Office listed on pages 366-368 or by returning the reply card attached between pages
208 and 209 .
TELEVISION PRODUCTS
103
TEKTRONIX Television Products time, test,
measure, correct and display the television
signal world-wide .
Tektronix~
SIGNAL PROCESSING
SYSTEMS
143
Waveform Digitizing Instruments and Systems,
practical solutions to measurement problems
and analysis through the use of specifically
designed digitizers , systems and software.
LABORATORY AND PORTABLE 148
OSCILLOSCOPES
Versatile, easy-to-operate oscilloscope famCOPYright
© 1981 . TektronIX . Inc
Atl rights reserved
POWER SOURCE
CONSIDERATIONS
10
Material on power sources and power cord
/plug options.
ENVIRONMENTAL
CHARACTERISTICS
10
Information about how to interpret environmental specifications .
DATA COMMUNICATION
ANALYZERS
26
The 830 Series family of Data Communications
Testers are designed to identify faulty elements
in a data communications network . The 834
offers a high degree of programmability which
allows easy go/no-go testing.
The 851 Digital Tester is a first-line, multifunctional service instrument developed to meet the
needs of the digital service industry.
OEM IMAGING
PRODUCTS
SERVICE & SUPPORT
351
INDEXES
357
Details about ordering , training , calibration,
maintenance, repairs , parts, service, terms of
sale and warranty.
Functional and alphanumeric indexes for quick
easy access.
TERMS OF SALE
A complete listing of Tektronix worldwide sales
and service offices. Consult the listing for the
one nearest you .
356
Information on prices , terms, shipping estimates, and best method of transportation on
Tektronix products, accessories and replacement parts.
SEMICONDUCTOR
TEST SYSTEMS
36
Tektronix offers comprehensive solutions for
automated test and measurement problems
encompassing linear and digitallCs, LSI devices, Microprocessors and discrete
components.
SALES & SERVICE OFFICES
LOGIC ANALYZERS
366
43
Tektronix Logic Analyzers save time and money in designing, evaluating, manufacturing and
servicing digital products. From 8 to 104 channels with sophisticated modules for high speed
timi ng analysis, stimulation of the ci rcuit under
test, and microprocessor analysis.
94
For both OEM and end-users, we offer a wide
range of display monitors for direct viewing or
photography ; X-Y (random dot scan or vector)
and raster scan (video) displays. Modular Packaging is available on many instruments.
CABLE TESTERS/TOR
1 16
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS
118
These TOR cable testers provide installation
and maintenance people with fast , accurate,
portable tools for checking the internal condition of cables and locating faults .
High performance 490 Series Compact Spectrum Analyzers covering 50 kHz to 220 GHz
with full programmability/GPIB option and ease
of operation features . 7000 Series compatible,
lab grade plug-in spectrum analyzer family covering 20 Hz to 60 GHz.
ilies, with your choice of plug-in or portable
configurations . From 500 kHz to 1 GHz bandwidth. Conventional, dual beam oscilloscopes .
Multimode, variable perSistence storage, waveform digitizers, realtime and sampling, choose
the configuration that fits your application.
bus, and provides state-of-the-art calibration
standards.The new programmables are compatable with over 40 TM 500 manual instruments. You link together literally hundreds of
customized systems. Programmable, manual,
or mixed.
A lightweight, portable digital photometer/radiometer with probes for measuring luminance,
illuminance, irradiance, light-emitting diode ou~
put, and relative intensity.
IEEE-488 PROGRAMMABLE
AND MANUAL GENERAL
PURPOSE INSTRUMENTS
CURVE TRACERS
g~~f:~~t2g~~~SORIES
250
The TM 5000 introduces a new group of products, fully programmable via the IEEE-488
301
Curve Tracers can deliver comprehensive information about a multitude of semiconductor
devices and integrated circuits.
PHOTOMETER /RADIOMETER
311
315
Extend your measurement capabilities. Contains selection guides, charts, descriptions, and
specifications.
IEEE·488
TEK PRODUCTS
As measurement needs grew in number and
complexity over the past few decades, people
began to realize that traditional design and test
procedures were becoming inadequate. When
the inadequacies became intolerable, special interfaces were designed and various instruments
were connected to controllers to form specialized
test systems. From these beginnings, some major
benefits of automated test and measurement
were quickly realized :
•
Test and measurement labor costs were
reduced .
•
Human error decreased through precise and
repeatable automation of measurements.
•
•
2
Skilled people were released from mundane or
repetitive procedures to pursue more creative
research and design activities.
Sophisticated analysis techniques could routinely be applied to provide greater insight into
devices and processes.
But, for all their benefits, automated test and
measurement systems still had some significant
problems. Mostly, these stemmed from each
system being unique, custom built. The automation need had to be severe to justify custom
design costs. Systems and data formats were not
generally compatible with each other. And changing the system or adding instruments meant
another custom design effort.
Test and measurement automation was still too
fragmented and costly for general use, even
though the benefits were generally needed. A
standard interfacing system providing across-theboard compatibility for a variety of instrumentation and instrument controllers seemed to be the
solution.
GPIB-The First Step Toward Compatibility
In 1975, the first major step toward general
compatibility in electronic instrumentation for systems use was taken. This step was IEEE publication of the 488 standard defining an interface and
communications bus for programmable instruments. This standard bus is commonly called the
GPIB--the General Purpose Interface Bus.
IEEE Standard 488, which was further refined in
1978, defines an interfacing system that has
become a widely accepted instrument industry
standard. The major areas it specifies are:
1.
Mechanical --the interface connector and
cable.
2.
Electrical--the logic signal levels and how
the signals are sent and received.
3.
Functional-- the tasks an instrument's interface may perform-osuch as sending data,
receiving data, triggering the instrument,
etc.--and the protocols to be used.
Today, a wide variety of instruments include
interfaces conforming to this mechanical, electrical , and functional standard. These GPIB-compatible instruments and instrument controllers
make it possible to achieve the benefits of automated test systems without paying the previous
price of custom system design. With GPIB compatibility, measurement capability can be chosen
off-the-shelf and simply cabled with standard bus
cables in either a linear or star configuration.
TEK
Interface Functions Defined by IEEE·488
1978
Inatrumln'
a
Abf.to
control, talk
a U,tln
Function
Description
Talker (T)
Allows instrument to send data
Listener (L)
Allows instrument to receive data
Source
Handshake
(SH)
Synchronizes message
transmission
Acceptor
Handshake
(AH)
Synchronizes message
reception
Remote-Local Allows instrument to select
(RL)
between GPIB interface
front-panel programming
Insb'ument
b
and
TeAk . net
listen
Device Clear
(DC)
Puts instrument in
initial state
Device Trigger Starts some basic operation
(DT)
of the instrument
Inltrumln'
C
Ultln only
Parallel
Poll (PP)
Allows up to eight
instruments simultaneously to return a status bit to the controller
Controller (C)
Sends device addresses and other interface messages
. .;"'W; _ _-INTERFACE MANAGEMENT BUS
(5 signal lines)
0101
Inatrument
Dl02
Dl03
d
Talk only
0104
010 5
010.
0107
DlO.
-
__.......___ IFC . IntlrfKI CI•• r
'-~==:e~~ ATN
=::=
E
GPIB HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS
•
•
•
Cable length of up to 20 meters (approximately 66 feet) with a device load for every 2
meters of cable (i.e., cable length ".;;;2X number of instruments).
Up to 15 devices (1 controller and 14 instruments) may be connected in linear or star
configurations.
Voltages are generally TIL-compatible .
•
SAO . h"'ci
Aequest
Al1ontlon
REN . Remot. Enabl.
EO. . End or Idlntlfy
Tektronix' Systems Experience
DAY • Data V.nd
NRFD - Nol Roedy For Dolo
Long before publication of the IEEE-488 Standard, Tektronix had entered the test and measurement systems business. The measurement
speed and capabilities of the Tektronix automated oscilloscope and Tektronix semiconductor test
systems quickly highlighted the benefits to be
gained from measurement automation. And just
as quickly came the realization that a system
interfacing standard was needed. But what
standard?
NDAC · Not Data Acclpted
GPIB signal and data lines are asserted (or
true) when pulled low ("';;; +0.8 V) and released
(or false) when pulled high (;;;.. +2.0 V).
Maximum data rate of up to 250
kilobytes/second over a distance of 20 meters
with 2 meters per device or faster with some
special restrictions (refer to IEEE Standard
488-1978 for details).
The possibilities of the proposed IEEE-488 standard were recognized . And, when the IEEE·488
standard became reality , GPIB compatibility was
already an integral part of Tektronix product
planning and engineering. The result is that
Tektronix is now a recognized major supplier of a
full line of GPIB system components--a supplier
that puts more than a decade of systems planning , design, and implementation experience into
each product.
3
IEEE-488
TEK PRODUCTS
The software and the program in the controller
make the system do what the user wants. The
GPIB interface allows users to plug system components together, but without software, the system can do nothing.
In programmable instrument systems, the "language" of the software or program has several
meanings:
Linear Configuration
1. The controller has its own language, such as
BASIC, and users must express their intentions in this language.
2. Within the context of the controller's language, the intrument's commands (or "language") have to be sent over the GPIB.
GPIB
L:J'"'
3. The actual control of the GPIB interface is
transparent to the user with Tektronix instrument controllers and software .
In order to make the system operate, the user has
to:
a
1. Know what tasks the system is to perform-the system can do nothing by itself.
Star Configuration
2. Know the controller's language.
3. Know the kind of data or language the
instruments are designed to exchange.
GPIB System Components
An automated test and measurement system
usually consists of the following components:
•
Multiple instruments: these are either stimulus
instruments, such as frequency generators,
pulse generators, and power supplies, or measurement instruments, such as counters,
waveform digitizers, and multimeters.
•
Controller with software: this tells the instruments what to do, collects the results , and
processes them. The system controller is generally a small computer. The software or
firmware operating system must have a powerful , flexible 1/0 structure to handle GPIB bus
traffic. It must also have processing power for
waveform manipulation and graphics power
for display.
•
Computer peripherals: these are devices such
as tape drives, printers, and plotters that store
or display the results of the tests.
•
A keyboard: this enables the user to send
commands or information to the system.
•
A display: the display allows the user to review
intermediate results and to monitor system
operation.
For smaller systems, these last three components
are often incorporated in the system controller--a
desktop computer, such as the TEKTRONIX 4050
Series, that is specifically designed for use with
instrument systems. Larger, more powerful systems, however, may be minicomputer-based ,
augmented by one or more high-speed mass
storage devices, a graphic display terminal, and
run under specialized instrument control and signal processing software such as TEK SPS BASIC.
4
All these components can be easily
interconnected if the standard GPIB interface has
been built in and appropriate functions made
programmable. Before GPIB, most measurement
systems were operated by controllers that required a separate connector (port) for each instrument. With the GPIB this is no longer a
requirement. Users can directly link up to 14
instruments with the controller via the bus, and
set up the systems in linear or star configurations.
Additionally, some controllers can drive more than
one GPIB port. The TEKTRONIX 4041 has an
option for a second port, allowing control of up to
28 instruments. Or, if you need more, TEK SPS
BASIC operated with a properly optioned DEC
PDP-11 minicomputer can drive up to four GPIB
ports, providing a total system potential of 56
instruments.
All these devices--the controller, measurement
instruments, and peripherals--comprise the hardware. The system cannot operate, however, unless it is driven by software.
There are two levels of software necessary, the
operating system software and the user written
application programs. The operating system software provides a set of commands and functions
that the user combines into a program that
delineates the measurement and processing task
to be performed . The software, guided by the
user program, works through the controller to tell
the instruments what signals to generate, what
measurements to make, and tells the controller
what to do with the results .
To make these tasks easier for you, Tektronix has
taken several steps beyond simple IEEE-488 compatibility. Consistency has been designed into
each system component for the greatest degree
of compatibility. Intelligence has been designed
in to relieve you from niggling interfacing details.
And firmware and software have been designed
and written to provide the maximum in programming ease and measurement capability.
Consistency Makes a Big Difference
Tektronix GPIB products are designed and thoroughly evaluated for compliance with IEEE-488
and for compatibility with one another. Because
these products are designed to be compatible
(i.e., meet the same standards), users usually
won 't need to make hardware and software
modifications for each new addition or deletion to
the configuration. Many software routines need to
be written only once, after which only minor
modifications are needed with the addition of
new instruments.
TEK
A status check routine , for instance, will work on
all Tektronix GPIB Instruments A message terminator common to all Tektronix GPIB Instruments IS
a further benefit But , since the IEEE-488 Standard allows several optional message terminators, Tektronix Instruments go an extra step by
providing a sWitch for selecting optional terminators. These features provide users With the capability of quickly configuring and reconflguring
Interactive and automated measurement
systems
The result IS a line of products that
GPIB compatible--but are capable
ments With the features that make
and the compatibility that makes
together.
are not only
GPIB instruthem useful
them work
Tektronix Codes and Formats
Means Programming Ease
Standard
case letters. And , since truncated numbers can
drastically affect measurements, Tektronix GPIB
instruments round off rather than truncate: e.g., a
value of 2.49 becomes 2.5 rather than 2.4. In
short, the bUilt-In intelligence is used to make
intelligent decisions. That makes your programming Job much less rigid and substantially easier.
GPIB ADDRESS
lFOREOI~
TAlKONlY:-=I
LISTEN ONl ~~ ._ I
1 )
1-
0-
168 4 2
IIIII
•
111 ~J,III
EOI Each GPIB Instrument or peripheral, called a deVIce. must be
ass'9neci a different system address, thiS can be done simply
by setting SWitches, usually located on the back panel of the
devICe.
The IEEE-488 Standard specifies the hardware
Interface and its basic functional protocol. It also
specifies a set of codes called Interface messages that control Interface functions. However,
the IEEE-488 Standard does not specify the syntax or coding of device-dependent messages-the messages that control the programmable
features of the instrument.
The benefits of the TektroniX Codes and Formats Standard are numerous. Codes and Formats is a major feature of the Tektronix GPIB
communications protocol. Because of their natural English-like structure, Instrument control commands and messages are easy to use. The result
IS a GPIB Implementation that is specifically designed to overcome the programming rigidity and
cumbersome procedures of other GPIB systems.
Since the device-dependent messages are not
specified, Instruments that conform to the IEEE488 Standard may use inconvenient or even
incompatible message formats. It's much like a
telephone system--the hardware link is well defined , but unless both parties speak the same
language, communication is impossible. That's
why Tektronix developed a Codes and Formats
Standard that specifies the syntax and coding of
deVice dependent messages, while retaining full
IEEE-488 compatibility. The Tektronix Codes and
Formats Standard specifies message coding to:
ASCII Data Standard. Since most controllers
accept ASCII data directly, Tektronix GPIB instrument commands are coded in ASCII. This eliminates the need for error-prone data conversions
or byte-by-byte encoding. For example, to set the
center frequency of the 492P Spectrum Analyzer
at 1.75 MHz, the command is Simply written FREO
1.75 MHz--no more calculated percentages of fullscale or BCD eqUivalents. Settings for TektroniX
GPIB Instruments are sent as ASCII data in human
readable form
•
be Simple and unambiguous
•
use commands that are common among similar deVices
•
use Simple, easy-to-remember mnemonics.
Common Messages. To make things even easi·
er, Tektronix Codes and Formats also specifies
messages that are to be common to all Tektronix
programmable Instruments. For example, you can
program your system to learn the current settings
of any Tektronix GPIB instrument by sending the
Instrument the SET? message. Any GPIB compatible Instrument from Tektronix--whether it is a
waveform digitizer, a programmable power supply, or a function generator--interprets SET? the
same way. The instrument firmware gathers the
instrument's settings together and assembles
them into a human readable message to be sent
over the bus to the controlling software. If you
know how to operate a function generator, then
you already know how to read a settings message from a Tektronix GPIB compatible function
generator
BASIC Languages. Because users are increasingly interacting with GPIB systems at the controller keyboard rather than at instrument panels,
GPIB systems must be as friendly as possible.
This means, too, that the controller languages
should be Simple, logical, and easy to interpret
and implement. That's why Tektronix Codes and
Formats specifies BASIC as the language of
preference for Tektronix instrument controllers.
Flexible Formats. Many minor format items that
are aggravations in other systems are also taken
care of by TektrOniX Codes and Formats. For
example, TektroniX GPIB Instruments accept negative zeros and leading and trailing spaces; they
also overlook inconsistent use of upper and lower
rlNTERFACE FUNCTIONS---1
~--------------~I---'
II
~--~I-----------------'
ATN
I
I
DEVICE -DEPENDENT MESSAGES
DEVICE
FUNCTIONS
e.g. 76120
ATN
DEVICE
FUNCTIONS
e.g. CP4165
Controller
(with IEEE 488
Interface)
INTERFACE MESSAGES
5
IEEE-488
TEK PRODUCTS
BASIC is an established language with wide use
and familiarity . It is also an English-like language
that is easy to leam and understand. So, combined with the English-like messages used with
Tektronix GPIB instruments, it becomes a consistent and familiar means of communicating with
your system . And your program listings are easy
to read and follow, with very little interpretation
required . (For more details on Tektronix Codes
and Formats, ask your Tektronix Sales Engineer
or Representative for Application Note 99AX4607, "Tektronix Codes and Formats for GPIB
Instruments .")
Controllers to Match Your Needs
With the introduction of the new 4041 System
Controller, Tektronix now offers three controllersoftware packages to meet varying GPIB system
needs. These packages are:
•
the 4041 System Controller, optimized for instrument control in a variety of situations
•
the 4050 Graphic Computing Systems, optimized for desk-top instrument control and
computing with full graphics capabilities
•
TEK SPS BASIC software with the DEC PDP11 Series minicomputer, optimized for systems
with full waveform acquisition , processing, and
graphics.
The 4041 System Controller. The 4041 System
Controller is a compact, modular controller designed for rackmount , bench-top, or portable use.
Its operating system language is an extended
BASIC designed for use by both the casual and
the sophisticated programmer.
The 4041 controller contains three microprocessors, with the CPU being the powerful 16-bit 6800.
Standard memory is 32 kilobytes with optional 32kilobyte increments to a maximum of 160
kilobytes. A 2O-character alphanumeric LED display, a 20-character thermal printer, a DC-l00
cassette drive, 18 function keys , an IEEE-488 port,
an RS-232 port , and a real-time clock and calendar capability are all standard . An additional IEEE488/RS-232 port pair is optional, with the second
IEEE-488 port having Direct Memory Access capability. With 14 GPIB instruments per IEEE-488
port , the 4041 System Controller offers the capability of controlling up to 28 GPIB instruments.
Also optional are an 8-bit parallel TIL port, program development ROMs with a carrier , and a
detachable program development/debug
keyboard .
The program development ROMs and keyboard ,
or an RS-232 terminal , give the engineer or production test programmer access to the system
language. This language is an extended version
of BASIC designed for use by all skill levels. Its
English-like commands, simple syntax, and lineby-line interpreter implementation combine for a
friendly and interactive system. A variety of other
features are also included to increase friendliness. For example , variable names may be up to
eight characters long, allowing meaningful names
such as RISETIME , VOLTAGE 1, or DELAY . And ,
as another example, subprograms and program
lines can be named- e.g ., 1000 SRQPOLL: or
200 RMS VOLTS:-for quick and easy access.
Beyond enhancements for simplicity, 4041 BASIC
also has enhancements that make it a powerful
tool for sophisticated programmers, too. It includes capabilities for FORTRAN -like
subprograms, variable passing from main to
subprograms, declaration of local and global
variables, and many other features .
Yet, for all its sophistication , the 4041 is still
particularly desirable for use by low-skill operators
in a production environment. Instrument control
programs can be designed and written to print
user prompts on the 4041 display and the programs can be assigned to any of the ten userdefinable keys on the 4041 front panel. Then the
6
4041 program development keyboard and ROM
pack carrier can be removed from the controller.
This puts the 4041 into an execute only mode
with its programs protected. The low-skilled user
need only follow the front-panel display prompts
and press the designated keys to execute
programs.
To retum to the engineering or program development mode, simply plug the program development ROM pack carrier and keyboard or an RS232 terminal back into the 4041 . You again have
access to all of the ease and power of 4041
BASIC programming.
The Tektronix 4050-Series Graphic Computing Systems. The 4050-Series systems are especially convenient for engineering bench or laboratory support of GPIB compatible instruments. The
typewriter keyboard , built-in calculator keypad ,
and special programmable keys provide easy
operation. In addition, the IEEE-488 interface port
provides for control of up to 14 GPIB instruments
at a time.
TEK
TEKTRONIX 4050 Series Systems have an exclusive high-resolution storage display for unexcelled
graphic clarity and detail. There is no distracting
screen flicker. All lines are continuous, never
detracting from or distorting information.
This built-in graphics capability allows interactive
graphic manipulation to help visually analyze
waveform data before it is processed. A user can
often gain valuable insights or decide to investigate a new direction once the acquired data is
graphically displayed.
Supporting the advanced , interactive graphics
capability is powerful computer performance.
Features such as full array processing , an invaluable tool for handling whole waveforms, and
dynamic memory allocation , both reduce the worry about data movement in the system.
Additionally , a range of peripheral products are
available with TEKTRONIX 4050 Series Desktop
Computer Systems to provide analysis records in
many sizes and formats . Tektronix peripheral
products include hard copy units, digital plotters,
graphic input tablets, and disc memory systems.
With 4050 Series Systems, you can immediately
start using a high-level extended BASIC. This
universal technical language is well adapted to
technical needs of the user and includes extensions for increased computation power and further ease of use.
Tektronix also supplies general utility software
programs for various communication routines,
such as bi-directional transferring of waveform
data, test results, and instrument settings. And
acquired data can be quickly graphed on the
display screen. Graphic waveform handling is
enhanced by built-in features such as auto-scaling, where unknown quantities of waveform data
can be scaled into a defined set of graphic
coordinates by a few key-stroke operations. Coordinates may be defined for Log-Lin, Log-Log, or
even Smith Chart and Bode plots--whichever is
relevant to your application. Any of the displays
can be quickly copied to paper.
Some of the more common signal processing
tasks can be accomplished using firmware supplied by Tektronix. Plug-in ROM packs for the
4050 Series controllers provide specialized
waveform processing commands. For example,
the Signal Processing ROM Packs use versatile
English-like commands to handle data arrays or
whole waveforms.
TEK SPS BASIC Software with DEC PDp· 11
Minicomputers. When equipped with Tektronix
supplied IEEE-488 interfaces, all PDP-l1 series
minicomputers can be operated with TEK SPS
BASIC software to provide the most powerful of
big-system instrument control and signal processing. A wide variety of peripherals can be handled,
including plotters, line printers, graphic terminals ,
magnetic tapes, and single or multiple disk storage systems. Additionally with the proper options,
up to four IEEE-488 interface ports can be supported. This means control of and data collection
from up to 56 GPIB instruments.
-
Other ROM pack capabilities include fast Fourier
and inverse Fourier operations to make harmonic
analysis of waveform data. The fast Fourier can
transfer whole waveforms from time domains to
frequency domains in a matter of seconds; they
are always under the user's direct control.
Still other ROM packs offer a real-time clock,
advanced graphic handling features , data conversion packages, and other computational tools.
TEKTRONIX WP3202 Signal Processing System using TEK
SPS BASIC and a DEC PDP- II Minicomputer
Two versions of TEK SPS BASIC are available, the
standard version and the extended memory version. The extended memory version permits processing of very large arrays in computers having
up to 128 k of memory with memory
management.
Other than memory differences, both versions of
TEK SPS BASIC software have the same major
features _ These include a modular architecture
consisting of a resident monitor and an expandable library of over 100 nonresident commands.
This unique design lets you configure a software
system to meet your specific needs yet leaves
the system open for adding new commands and
processing modules.
TEKTRONIX 4054 Desktop Computer
7
IEEE-488
TEK PRODUCTS
Measurement data can be stored and accessed
in a variety of ways. Information can be read or
written in either ASCII or binary. Named files can
be accessed on hard or flexible disks, magnetic
tape, cassettes, or paper tape. Information can
be read from files either sequentially or randomly.
TEK SPS BASIC commands give you complete
file management capability.
Comprehensive graphics permit waveform plots
and X-V plots between waveforms. Either can be
done with single commands. The output is complete with scaled and labeled axes and can be
hard-copied to paper.
There 's also data logging capabilities for automated waveform capture. And the software's
better than 7·digit precision means much higher
resolution than possible in conventional oscilloscope measurements. Plus, there are special
data structures to retain both numeric and literal
information (scale factors and units) associated
with a given waveform. This waveform data structure, as well as numeric arrays or portions of
numeric arrays, can be operated on arithmetically
as easily as can simple numeric variables.
Beyond extending the standard mathematical
operations and functions to include waveform
processing, TEK SPS BASIC also provides special
waveform processing functions . Waveforms can
be integrated , differentiated, convolved, correlated, and fast Fourier transformed--all with single
commands. Polar conversions can also be performed with a single command to present results
in either complex form or as magnitude and
phase.
With its large array size capabilities (limited only
by memory in most cases), advanced signal
processing, and program and instrument tasking
capabilities (including error control for independent operation), TEK SPS BASIC offers all of the
flexibility and power necessary to control anything from the simplest to the most sophisticated
test and measurement system.
8
Guide for Selecting GPIB Instruments
When selecting GPIB instruments for a specific
application, be sure to check several key specifications for suitablity in the configuration.
First , make sure that the instrument can make the
desired measurements. Next, determine that the
interface functions are compatible with the proposed usage and with other instruments in the
GPIB configuration. The following items should be
used as a checklist with your Sales Engineer
when considering instruments to be used in GPIB
configurations:
1.
Is the instrument intended for interactive
measurement analysis or automated measurement; i.e., are all necessary instrument
functions remotely programmable, or will an
operator be available to adjust settings?
2. Does the instrument 's GPIB interface have
the necessary set of functions implemented
at the desired level (e.g., AH1 is needed for
any useful interaction)? SH1 is required for
instruments supplying measurements to the
controller.
3.
Are diagnostics available to check out the
instrument from the front panel or over the
GPIB interface?
4. Does the instrument use standard codes and
formats conventions for terminators, numeric
formats , etc.?
5. Can the instrument's front panel setting be
read from the controller and saved for later
automated set up?
6. Can the front panel be "locked out" via the
GPIB?
HANDSHAKE is a newsletter forum for users of
Tektronix programmable instruments and systems. Published quarterly, HANDSHAKE has articles of interest concerning applications of stimulus, measurement , and analysis techniques.
SPS PROGRAMMING UPDATE is published periodically and sent to users of TEKTRONIX Signal
Processing Systems. It contains information to
help maintain software and firmware system components. It also contains useful programming
hints and software and firmware product
information.
Tektronix offers complete training in the operation
and maintenance of signal acquisition systems
and other Tek GPIB products. Classes are also
available on Tek SPS Basic software.
TEK
WAVEFORM ACQUISITION PRODUCTS
Page
468
Option 02
Digllal
storage
Oscilloscope
A new portable 10 MHz oscilloscope wilh
the accuracy and convenience of digital Storage.
Designed for interactive applications.
243
492P
Programmable
Spectrum
Analyzer
50 kHz to 220 GHz, full programmal1i1ity, GPIB Interface capability, waveform transfer, Internal processing. Designed for Interactive and automated
applications.
122
496P
Programmable
Spectrum
Analyzer
1 kHz to 1.8 GHz, full programmability, GPIB interface
capability, waveform transfer, Internal processing.
Designed for Interactive and automated applications.
120
-7912AD
Programmable
Digitizer
Digilizes waveforms as high as 1 GHz to as low as
10kHz, and stores dala Indefinitely in 4096 word
memory. Designed for InteraClive and automated
applications.
181
"76120
Programmable
Digitizer
2-channel, 8 bit , 200 MHz sample rate with seiectable record length and variable sample rates within
records . Designed for interactive and automated
applications.
179
5223
Option 10
Digitizing
10 MHz
Oscilloscope
Capture and store single-shot dala up to 100 kHz ,
unattended. Expand or reposition stored data.
Simultaneously display stored and real-time signals.
Designed for Interactive applications.
208
Digital Storage
400 MHz Plug-In Oscilloscope with optional memory,
programmable measurement routines , high performance. Designed for interactive applications.
177
"7854
and Waveform
Processing
Oscilloscope
LOGIC ANALYZERS
A General Purpose, conflgurable and user
upgradable logic analysis system allowing
sampling speeds to 660 MHz, acquisition data
widths to 104 channels , 25 MHz pattern
stimulation , up to 80 separate points, local tape
storage, or full remote programmability.
47
DAS 9109
Option 02
and
DAS 9119
logic Analyzer
DC 5009
Programmable
Universal
Counter/Timer
Frequency and period measurements to
135 MHz using the powerful reciprocal
counting technique.
258
DC 5010
Programmable
Universal
Counter/Timer
Reciprocal frequency . period , ratio. and events B
260
during A measurements to 350 MHz.
GENERAL PURPOSE INSTRUMENTS
PS 5010
FG 5010
Programmable
Triple Power
Supply
Three defined modes, voltage regulated ,
current limited and unregulated for each of
its three supplies (0 to minus 32 V, 0 to plus 32 V,
and plus 4.5 to 5.5 V).
265
274
Programmable
Phase-lock mode automatically scans
Function
Generator
and locks to any supplied input signal
between 20 Hz and 20 MHz.
CG 551AP
Programmable
Calibration
Generator
Computerized System for Calibration
and verification of major oscilloscope parameters.
280
MI5010
Multifunction
Interface
Has its own intelligence which may be programmed to
perform a task or conduct a sequence of events.
290
SI5010
RF Scanner
Two-wide TM 5000 plug-in capable of scanning and switching 16 different signal channels , or a combination of signal
channels under program control.
291
4041
System
Controller
Optimized as an instrument controller.
Configurable for production lines or research labs, and for
the occask>nul programmer or sophisticated programming team.
Easy-to-use BASIC language with extensions. Up to 160k byte memory.
4051
Desktop Computer
System
Powerful, easy-to-use desktop computing with
graphics and extended BASIC.
80
"4052
Desktop Computer
System
High performance, personnally manageable desktop
computing with graphics and extended BASIC .
80
4054
Desktop Computer
System
19 inch screen desktop computing system with
enhanced graphics and powerful BASIC.
79
4662
Interactive Digital
Plotter
Compatible in all RS-232C ASCII and GPIB
environments; and with PLOT 10 and PLOT 50
Graphic Software.
86
4663
Digital Plotter
Interactive
C size. 420 mm x 594 mm (17 in x 22 in)
87
4924
File Manager
Low cost mass storage, compatible with 4050 Series
Desktop Computer Systems and the 4041 Syslem Controller.
92
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
292
PERIPHERALS FOR IEEE-488 SYSTEMS
"See pages 143-147 for Tektronix configured systems using these products.
9
INFORMATION
TEK REFERENCE
POWER SOURCE CONSIDERATIONS
In general, instruments are factory wired for the
nominal voltage of the country of manufacture.
Most Tektronix instruments provide wide-range
regulated supplies, or quick change line-voltage
selectors for convenient selection of line-voltage
operating ranges . Transformer taps in other instruments can be changed to accommodate
specific line-voltage operating ranges or can be
factory wired for a specific range if specified on
the purchase order.
Many Tektronix instruments are designed to operate from a power source that will not apply more
than 250 Volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and
ground.
Standard
North American
120 V/ 15A
Option A I
During the life of this catalog the power cord/plug
options will be made available on additional instruments. Refer to the individual product ordering information for those products offering these
options as of publication date.
Option A2
Universa l Euro
UK
220 V/ 16A
240 V/ 13A
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The environmental characteristics listed in instrument specifications may include some or all of
the following : temperature, altitude, humidity, vibration , shock, and electromagnetic compatibility
(emc previously rfi or emil.
The specifications for humidity, vibration, shock,
and transportation are intended to be beyond
what can be expected in use , and operation at
these extremes may cause minor physical dete-
10
Many Tektronix instruments can be fitted with one
of the power cord/plug options listed below and
wired for the voltage as indicated,if specified on
the purchase order.
North American
120 V/ 15A
Standard
Option A1
Universal Euro
220 V/ 16A
United Kingdom
240 V/ 13A
Option A2
Option A3
Australian
240 V/ l0A
North American
240 V/ 15A
Option A4
Switzerland
220 V/ l0A
Option A5
Option A3
Australian
240 V/ l0A
rioration . Such operation , however, should not
cause electrical performance to deteriorate outside specifications.
The specifications for temperature and altitude
are such that continual use at the limits will not
cause significant short-term deterioration. Naturally , higher temperature operation can be expected to reduce long term reliability and should
be avoided if possible. The emc test is completely nondestructive.
Except for some double-insulated instruments,
most Tektronix instruments are equipped with
either a three-conductor attached power cord or
a three-terminal power-cord receptacle . The third
wire or terminal is connected directly to the
instrument chassis to protect operating
personnel.
Power-cord coding follows one of the two following schemes:
Scheme 1
Scheme 2
Line
Black
Brown
Neutral
White
Light blue
Green-yellow Green-yellow
Ground
(sa fety earth)
Option A4
North American
240V / 15A
Option AS
Switzerland
220V / l0A
Sample production instruments are tested periodically as part of a continual quality-control
process. Complete tests on every production
instrument are undesirable as well as
uneconomical.
For more specific information on the environmental characteristics and how they apply to given
instruments, please refer to the page covering
that instrument.
TEK
MICROCOMPUTER
DEVELOPMENT
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
Microcomputer Development Labs
8540
8560
8550
13
14
16
Emulator Processor and
Prototype Control Probe
Support Packages
18
Trigger Trace Analyzer
High Level Language .
21
22
System Peripherals and Workshops
.. 23
Matrix and Ordering Information ................ 24
MOL Now Supports
8088
8086
8085A
8080A
8048
8049
8035
8039
8021-6
8022
8041A
68000
6800
6801
6802
6803
6808
F8
3870
3872
3874
3876
Z-80A
Z8001
Z8002
TMS9900
SBP9900
1802
... with more to come
Tektronix Microcomputer Development Products offer the broadest range of quality
multiple micro-processor support available
today. Tektronix won 't lock you into one
microprocessor family or vendor. Plus , every
Tektronix MOL is backed with over 30 years
of design experience . We test our Development Labs thoroughly to ensure performance and reliability . Each one provides
complete development capability and the
Tektronix committment that guarantees
you 'll keep abreast of the fast paced microprocessor technology.
Call your local specialist today to find out
more about the Tektronix 8550 MOL System s.
12
TEK
MICROCOMPUTER
INTEGRATION UNIT
prototype which now handles all clock and 1(0
fllnctlons Code can now be mapped over to the
prototype In manageable blocks from the 8540 's
program memory DUring the third and final mode ,
all code reSides In the prototype , as well as the
clock and I/O functions Only the emulator control
probe remains In place to provide debugging
control dUring program execution
DUring all three modes of real-time emulation ,
prototype code execution takes place under the
control of the 8540 's powerful debug software
For easy reference , key breakpOints may be
entered uSing mnenomlc labels Instead of
numeric addresses. At each breakpOint, the sta '
tus of all the processor's key registers IS diSplayed It IS also possible to display the processor 's register status and associated code
execution on a cycle -by-cycle baSIS. All registers
and memory locations can be modified to observe the consequent effect on program flow
mil
8540
Multiple Microprocessor Support
Real -Time Emulation
Trigger Trace Analysis
8560 Compatible
The TEKTRONIX 8540 Integration Unit provides
complete coverage of the hardware/software Integration process dUring microcomputer deSign
By uSing Interchangeable emulator modules , the
8540 allows maximum flexibility In chip support ,
with more support constantly being added as
new chips gain acceptance In the microcomputer
Industry Current support Includes Z-80A , 8085A ,
Z8OO1 , Z8OO2, 6809, 8035, 8039, 8041A, 8048,
8049, 8086, 8088, 68000, 6800, 6802, 8080. The
8540 IS deSigned for use with the TEKTRONIX
8560 Multi-user Software Development Unit or a
general host computing system In 8560 configurations the 8540 connects to the system via a
bUilt-In high-speed Interface (HSI) For general
host environments, the Option 01 Communications Interface IS available It will readily Interface
the 8540 to host computer through a standard
RS-232C ASCII communications port.
All major Interface parameters are software
selectable through the 8540's operating system,
and a complete communications package is Included to cover Individual situations
Once the prototype microcomputer software has
been refined Into executable object code by the
host computer, or 8560, it is ready for transfer to
the 8540 to begin debugging At the same time, a
symbol table may be transferred so program
tables can be used Instead of address data to
reference key locations in prototype memory The
8540 can provide up to 128k bytes (64k words) of
program memory that can be used In place of
prototype memory, and With the optional Memory
Allocation Controller, it can be distributed
throughout the prototypes address space, up to
64 megabytes-a valuable asset when working
With large programs
Three Modes of Real-time Emulation, To
achieve hardware/software Integration, the 8540
employs a technique called real-time emulation ,
which uses an emulator processor Identical In
function to the one targeted for the prototype.
Under control of the 8540 's debug firmware , the
emulator processor can execute prototype code
at the full specified operating speed of the target
processor, With no walt states added or clock
pulses stretched
Emulation takes place In three progressive modes
that allow gradual Introduction of hardware and
software. DUring the first mode , the emulator
processor uses the 8540 exclUSively as the
source of program memory, I/O and clock , allowIng debugging to begin even before the prototype hardware IS available DUring the second
mode , the emulator processor IS connected via
probe to the vacant processor socket on the
Trigger Trace Analyzer. Many debugging SitUations demand detailed observation of real-time
code execution on the prototype bus, and ItS
effect on other key pOints In the hardware A
modular option to the 8540 IS the Trigger Trace
Analyzer , which allows real-time data acqUisition
from both 8 bit and 16-bit prototype systems. Its
trace memory can capture up to 255 bus transactions of plus logiC states from eight hardware
pOints selected by the user. Included are four
separate trigger channels , each With a word
recognizer that monitors up to 16 data bitS, 24
address bitS, 14 processor-dependent control
bits and 8 external probe bits Each trigger
channel also has a 16-blt counter for timing and
counting These four channels may be used
either independently or Interactively to construct
powerful data acquIsition triggers Either Single or
multiple breakpOints can be set , With the option
to halt or continue program execution after they
occur
PROM Programmer. Many deSigns require that
the prototype code be burned Into a PROM
which IS then Installed aboard the prototype and
used as a program memory source dUring
debugging The 8540 Includes an optional PROM
Programmer, which allows code reSident In the
8540 's program memory to be burned Into a
PROM IndiVidual card modules are supplied that
adapt the PROM Programmer to any PROM
family the deSigner may be working With
8540/ Host Communications Package (Option
01). ThiS package provides all the features necessary to Interface the 8540 with nearly any host
computer that supports RS-232, ASCII terminal
communications. The 8540 has bUilt-In software
that allows the user to modify major communlca·
tlon parameters, such as parity, echo, turn-around
delay Data rates from 110 to 9600 baud can also
be selected The package also makes allowance
for data set as well as "In line" interface configurations between the 8540 and a host computer.
13
USER
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT LAB
TEK MULTI
•
8560
Multi-Chip Design Support For Up to 8 Users
TNIX Operating System
The TEKTRONIX 8560 MOL is a multi-user development system that when used in conjunction
with an 8540 Integration Unit covers the entire
microcomputer design process, from software
development through hardware/software integration. At the same time, it allows maximum design
flexibility by supporting a broad range of chips at
both the 8-bit and 16-bit levels. The 8560's multiuser capability offers numerous advantages,
such as lower cost per user, shared software and
hardware resources , unified project management
and enhanced security.
14
System Architecture. At the heart of the 8560
system is a powerful 16-bit CPU, backed by an
I/O processor for every four users and 64k words
of RAM (expandable to 128k words). This CPU
uses a time-shared operating system to supervise
up to eight work stations plus mass storage and
printing. Workstation terminals can be any standard RS-232 terminal, such as the TEKTRONIX
CT8500. Hardware/software integration stations
use the TEKTRONIX 8540 Integration Unit, which
allows for several different terminal configurations. In this manner, a terminal used for software
development can also double as a control terminal for hardware/software integration.
For mass storage, the 8560 uses an 8 inch 35.6
megabyte Winchester hard disc unit, and a 1
megabyte flexible disc unit. Storage capacity can
be expanded by adding additional 35.6 megabyte
hard disc units. The 8560 also will support two
spooling line printers.
UNIX Based Operating System. The 8560 uses
a powerful operating system called TNIX, which is
derived from the UNIX operating sys tem , created
by Bell Laboratories and widely used throughout
the compu ter world . TNIX uses timesharing to
apportion system resources among up to eight
workstations plus system utilities. Also used is a
hierarchical filing system that allows both files
and direc tories to be logically grouped and easily
accessed . Each file carries a date/time attribute
to quickly verify which version the user is
accessing
TEK
Users may also access each other'S hies If no
restriction has been placed on them, thus allowIng files to be eaSily grouped according to current
project needs Each file can be assigned read ,
write or execute protection that can be applied to
the owner, the owner's project group or system
users at large BeSides proViding security, thiS
protection feature allows "work copies " of files to
stay private until they are completed and ready
for release to the project For additional security,
TNIX employs a user password system
TNIX Includes several powerful methods of
manipulating system commands . One is
plpelinlng , which allows the output of one pro·
gram to prOVide the Input for another In thiS
manner, the user may create strings of commands that qUickly accomplish complex tasks
Without user Intervention. Command files can also
be created that allow commands to be controlled
through structures such as case statements and
conditional branching It IS also pOSSible to subs\!tute parameters Within command statements
when creating command files
Several features are Included which optimize the
user's time One IS multi' taSking, which allows one
user task , such as a compilation, to run In the
background , while another, such as editing a
source file , IS being entered at the terminal TNIX
Includes a special utility program that automates
much of the work necessary to combine separate
code modules into a single program . Another
utility IS provided that allows system users to
communicate directly With each other, or through
"electrOniC mall" , which IS a valuable aid when
workstations are at separate phySical locations
Software Development Tools. As a series of
optional packages, TektroniX Will offer Assem blers and Pascal compilers for many of the major
chips In current use among microcomputer de'
signers All Assemblers Include macro capability
for the creation of high level·type constructs
Assembled code IS relocatable so that object
modules can be moved throughout the available
memory space And to support the large address
space capability of many 16-blt processors, a 32·
bit address range IS prOVided, which gives over
four billion bytes of addressable memory.
Through a conditional assembly feature , one
source file can be Instructed to generate multiple
versions In the form of different object modules.
Also , external source files can be pulled Into the
program dunng assembly Strings can be manlpu'
lated to accomplish tasks such as basing a
conditional assembly on a string comparison .
The 8560 's Pascal compilers are all compatible
With the ISO standard for Increased portability All
have a common set of features to enhance the
power of Pascal In microcomputer applicalions
Bit manlpulalion IS Included to allow access to
prototype hardware logic. Variables can be as·
Signed to speCifiC memory addresses, allOWing
memory mapped 1/0 Re·entrant code can be
used In applications requiring Interrupt handling .
Literals, constants and Instructions can be separated from variables so they can be Installed In
ROM DUring compilation , external source files
can be pulled into the program Also indiVidual
modules can be compiled separately for simpli·
fled debugging .
Other software tools Include both language-directed and CRT-Oriented editors, and a text
processing
package
for
Improved
documentation
Hardware/ Software Integration. To handle
hardware software Integration tasks, the 8560
uses the TEKTRONIX 8540 Integration unit as a
peripheral work station Once code targeted for
the prototype has been assembled or compiled
Into executable object modules , It can be
downloaded to the 8540 's program memory via
high speed Interface The code can now be
gradually Introduced to the hardware uSing real·
time emulation, a powerful debugging method
that employs a processor Identical In function to
the one targeted for the prototype.
Real·tlme emulalion takes place In three progreso
slve modes, all under the control of the 8540's
debug software DUring the first mode, all code IS
executed out of th.e 8540 's program memory, with
110 simulated by software Inserllons and clock
signal supplied by the 8540 In thiS manner,
prototype software debugging can begin even
before the hardware becomes available DUring
the second mode, 1/0 and clock functions are
transferred to the prototype, and code can be
mapped over to the prototype memory In man·
ageable blocks A control probe connects the
emulator processor to the vacant processor sock·
et on the prototype board DUring the final mode,
all code IS Installed In the prototype memory, as
well as clock and 1/0 functions Through the
control probe, the 8540 can now exercise proto'
type hardware In the same manner that It Will
function when standing alone
DUring all three modes of emulation, the 8540's
powerful debug software can be applied .
Breakpoints can be set uSing mnemonic symbols
for key program localions The status of processor registers can be examined on a cycle-by'
cycle basIs. All registers and memory locations
can be examined and modified . And for detailed
analYSIS of real· time execution on the prototype
bus and selected hardware pOints, an optional
Trigger Trace Analyzer IS available With four powerful trigger channels that allow highly selective
data acquIsition
15
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT
TEK LAB
8550
Multiple Microprocessor Support
In-Circuit Emulation
Real-Time Prototype Analysis
The TEKTRONIX 8550 Microcomputer Development Lab IS a versatile software development
and hardware fsoftware Integration system for
microcomputer-based product design The system
supports man y 8 - and
16-blt
microprocessors , allowing the user to configure
the 8550 for a wide variety of design types
The 8550 Development Lab offers resources for
editing facIlities to support both assembly-level
and high-level languages , as well as linking capabilities The optional Advanced CRT-Oriented Edi tor speeds the task of program entry and editing
With the appropriate assembler and emulator
options for the target microprocessor, the user
can execute software In the 8550 for full program
debugging
The Lab also offers complete In-Circuit emulation
and hardware testing capabilities With the appropriate prototype control probe for the target
microprocessor, the user can transfer control
from the 8550 to the prototype block by block,
dedugglng at every stage The Trigger Trace
Analyzer option provides an Invaluable tool for
verifying and correcting execution of the program
In real time
The basIc 8550 system consists of two major
components , the 8301 Microprocessor Development Unit and 8501 Data Management Unit The
Microprocessor Development Unit houses the
operating system software, DOS/50; 32k bytes of
program memory; language processor; emulator
controller, and hard-ware opllons such as
emulator processors and prototype control
probes for selected microprocessors , Optional
32k, 64k , or 128k static RAM modules, the Trigger
Trace Analyzer, Real Time Prototype Analyzer ,
and the PROM programmer. Opllonal system
software Includes assemblers for all supported
microprocessors, Pascal and MDLlIl compilers for
several supported microprocessors , and the Advanced CRT-Oriented Editor
The Data Management Unit handles flies and
aUXIliary 110 for DOS/50 and manages the movement of user files between ItS dual-sided, doubledenSity fleXible diSCS and the Microprocessor
Development Unit DISC memory capacity IS 2
megabytes
Multiple Microprocessor Support
A key feature of the 8550 IS ItS ability to support
many microprocessor ChiPS , Including the 8086,
8088, 8085A, 8080A, 8048, 8049, 8035, 8039,
8039-6, 8021 , 8041A, 8022 , 68000, 6800, 6802,
6805, 6808, 6809, F8, 3870, 3872, 3874 , 3876,
ZSOOt , ZSOO2. Z-80A, TMS9900, SBP9900, 1802
and 6500/ 1
Program Development
Under the supervIsion of the operating system
software , the Microcomputer Development Lab
aids the deSigner In all phases of program development and debugging
16
DOS 50 supervises the follOWing tasks
• General Input and output
• File creation and maintenance
• Program assembly and com pilation
• Program execu tion , monitoring , and symbolic
debugging
Program entry and editing IS accomplished via
the standard line-Orien ted edi tor or the opllonal
Advanced CRT-Oriented Editor, which allows
both line-and screen-orien ted edi ting Complete
symbolic debugging with versa tile output formats
speeds the so ft ware debugging process
Data management IS Simplified through a tree-like
structure format , which allows the user to specify
one main sys tem directory, one root directory for
each diSC , and any number of sub-directOries
under the root directory Data flies may be created and en tered directly Into the root directory
As files are accumulated , the user may organize
them Into speci fic groups, each under ItS own
specific directory ThiS allows the user to create
directOries within direc tOries to any level of nestIng needed
The assembler processor, with the appropriate
diSC Inserted In the fleXible diSC drive, performs
program assembly functions for each microprocessor supported by the 8550
The powerful macro capabilit y allows the deSigner to access frequently used sets of code by
referenCing the macro by name The linker, workIng with the relocating fea tures of the Assembler,
links and locates multiple code segmen ts Into a
complete executable program Additionally, the
conditional assembler capability of the 8550 allows the deSigner to customize the final program
by testing conditions to determine which of certain code segments are to be assembled Into the
final program Code management IS further enhanced by the Assembler' S versa tile string handling capability ExtenSive English language
diagnostics of the 8550 proVide easy to understand error messages and loca te the line In which
the error has occurred When assembly IS completed . the assembled object code IS stored on
diSC In a newly created binary format file
Three Emulation Modes
Aft er an error-free assembly listing has been
ob tained , the resul ting object code may be execu ted In sys tem emulation mode 0 on the
optional emulator processor The emulator processor IS Identica l to the microprocessor that will
finally be Installed In the user's prototype Execu tion IS performed under control of the debug
system. dUring execution, program steps can be
traced , sof tware breakpOints can be set , and
memory can be examined and changed as reqUired Should an error be discovered, that portion of the program can be corrected at the
source level uSing the text editor It can then be
reassembled and executed again ThiS procedure
continues un til the program IS correct
After the software has been debugged , It may be
exerCised on the prototype circuitry In the partial
emulat ion mode (mode 1) DUring partial emula tion , control may be released from the 8550 to the
prototype In stages The developmental software
runs uSing 8550 memory space and prototype I 0
and clock The 8550 memory mapping feature
allows memory to be gradually mapped over to
the prototype In blocks Throughout partial emulation , the user has access to prototype circuitry
through the debugging sys tem , which enables
him , as before, to trace , set break-pOints , examIne and change memory and register con tents
In full emulation (mode 2) the program IS run on
the prototype , but program execu tion IS stili under
the complete con trol of the debug system All I/O
and timing function s are directed by the prototype, all memory has been mapped over to the
prototype, and only the prototype control probe IS
stili In place , emulating the target microprocessor.
Although the prototype IS effec tively free-standIng , then, the user may stili direct program activity
from the 8550
TEK
MICROCOMPUTER
DEVELOPMENT LAB
8550
Parts
and
Functions
System
Terminal
HSI
J101
8301
Host
8501
Data
Microprocessor
Development
Unit
Interface
PROM
Programmer
Trigger
Tl'llce
Analyzer
TTA
Reel-TIme
Prototype
Analyzer
Management
Unit
Program
Memory
Emulator
Proceuor
RTPA
Probe
Probe
u....
Prototype
r.;::;;;:,
t..=!...J
8550 CHARACTERISTICS
8301 MICROPROCESSOR DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Dimension
mm
in
Height
280
11
Width
430
17
Length
585
23
Weight
Ib
kg
Net
27
60
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating
Temperature
32 " F to 122" F (O"C to 50 " C)
Humidity
90% @ 86 " F to 140" F (30" C to 60 " C)
Altitude
Operating
Storage
4.500 m (0 to 15.000 It)
15.000 m (0 to 50.000 It)
Dimension
Height
Width
Length
Weight
Net
Outputs
5.2 V dc + 1%/- 2% @ 35.0 A
+ 12 V dc + 0/- 5% @ 1.7 A
- 12 V dc + 0/- 5% @ 1.7A
in
10.5
16.8
23.5
Ib
55
Output Ripple
24 V dc
± 12 V dc
15 V de
15 V dc
100 mV (p-p)
120 mV (p-p)
50 mV (p-p)
100 mV (p-p)
Overload Protection
Automatic current limit foldback .
ENVIRONMENTAL
FLEX DISC CHARACTERISTICS
Operating
Temperalure
50" F to 104 " F (10 " C to 40 "C)
Humidity
20% to 80% relative noncondensing
Altilude
Operating
o to 2500 m (8.000 It) Derate max
Diskette Type -
operating temp by l "C for
each 300 m above 2400 m
o to 15.000 m (50.000 It)
Capacity -
Storage
POWER REQUIREMENTS
115 V ac (90 V ac-132 V ac) @ 4810 66 Hz .
230 V ac (180 V ac-250 V) @ 48 to 66 Hz .
8501 DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT
mm
267
424
597
kg
25
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Encoding - IBM compatible single or double density. Format
must qualify as follows : MFM sectors-256 bytes. FM sec..
tors - 128 bytes.
Single or double sided , solt sectored.
Double sided. double density 1,021 .696 bytes.
Single sided . double density 509.184 bytes.
Single sided . single density 256.256 bytes.
115 V sc (90-127 V RMS) @ 50 Hz ± 1% or 60 Hz ± 1%.
230 V ac (180-250 V RMS) @ 50 Hz ± 1% or 60 Hz ± 1%.
Outputs
24 V de ± 5% @ 2 A
12Vdc ± 3% @4A
- 12Vdc ± 5% @540mA
5 V dc ± 5% @ 20 A
15Vdc ± 10%@ 20mA
17
EMULATOR PROCESSOR AND
TEK PROTOTYPE
CONTROL PROBE SUPPORT PACKAGES
8041 A PROTOTYPE CONTROL PROBE
(Typical, worst case)
Emulation Interlace Delays
tPlH (ns )
tPHl (ns
Itvp WC)
(typWCI
SYNC
1420
PROG
1420
1420
1420
Tl
27 ,39
PIO-PI7
TO
Symbol
Emulators to support the 8550 are currently available for the Intel 8088, 8086, 8085A , 808OA , 8048,
8049 , 8039, 8039-6, 8035 and 8021 , Motorola
68000, 6800, 6802, and 6809, Texas Instruments
TMS9900, Zilog Z-80A, Z8OO1
and Z8OO2,
Fairchild Fa, RCA 1802, the Mostek 3870 and
3872 , and Rockwell 6500/ 1. Emulators to support
the 8540 are currently available for the Intel 8086,
8088, 808OA , 8085A , 8048, 8049 , 8039, 8039-6,
8035 , and 8021 , Motorola 68000, 6800, 6802, and
6809, and Zilog Z8OO1A , Z8OO2A and Z -80A.
8048. 8049, 8039, 8039-6. 8035, 8022 , 8041A and 8021 are
trademarks of Intel Co,,~oration , Tektronix , Inc., does not guaranlee that other vendors versions of Ihese microcomputers will
be compalible with Tektronix Microprocessor Labs.
22
22.34
Parameter
Min
Max
Units
tACC
DACK to WR or RD
54
tCAC
RD or WR to DACK
71
tACD
DACK to data valid
tCRO
RD orWR to
DRO cleared
tAW
CS.AO Setup to WR
tWA
CS ,AO Hold
afterWR
24
ns
tWW
WR Pulse Width
250
ns
tDW
Data Setup to WR
150
ns
tWD
Data Hold
after WR
70
ns
8049, 8035, 8039, 8039-6, 8022, 8041A,
8048/8021 EMULATOR SUPPORT
PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
The 8550 and 8640 Microcomputer Development
Labs support a wide variety of different
microprocessors and microcomputers .
2.2
29,45
ns
ns
225
ns
200
ns
ns
0
8022 PROTOTYPE CONTROL PROBE
8022 Timing Characteristics With
Emulation Interlace Delays
tPLH (ns)
tPHL (ns)
typoWorst Case
I tvD. Worst Case
ALE
24 .34
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
POO-P07
54.87
Lenglh - 1.8 m (6 ft)-of cable from the emulator processor
to the interlace assembly. 45.8 em (1 .5 ft)-of cable from the
interface assembly to the 40-pin plug (or 28-pin plug for 8021 ).
PIO-PI7
32 ,46
57,91
1.3 s
1.31 S
tl-CPU to USER
PIO-PI7
I
2.2
2.2
t2- USER to CPU
Cable Configuration - 1.8 m (6 ft)-two 40 conductor ribbon
cables with alternating ground and signal paths.
for OUTl inst: data
valid before ALE after
the next instruction fetch.
t3-MOVD P2 . A
13.18
t4- MOVD A. P2
I 13.18
IN A, P2
45.8 cm (1 .5 ft)-two laminated 40 conductor cables made up
of signal-ground pairs.
EMULATION INTERFACE (TYPICAL WORST CASE)
DELAYS FOR THE 8048 (8021 IF DIFFERENT)
tPLH (ns)
tPHL (ns)
Typ.Worst
Typ.Worst
Case
Case
PROG
13.18
TO
17,24
17.24
ALE
14,20
14,20
T1
102,182
102,182
The emulator processor, which resides on a plugin circuit module along with controlling logic cir-
PSEN
22,32
22,32
ANO.ANI
336444
336444
RD,WR
18,26
15,22
XTAlI
21 .33
29,45
cuitry , enables the user to execute and debug the
program on a microprocessor identical to the one
which will be used in the prototype , while giving
him access to the full 64k bytes of Microprocessor Lab program memory.
PROG
14,20
14,20
D80-D8]" "
(POO-P07)
User to
CPU
t,-fetch cycle
t2-execute
cycle
.90
26,38
.90
26,38
The prototype control probe ; which links the
emulator processor to the prototype system , allows partial and full in-circuit emulation .
D80-D87
(p00-P07)
cPu to
User
t, - Address Out
t.-Ext Data Out
Is-OUTL. ANl.
ORl, data out
26.38
26,38
14,20
26,38
26.38
14,20
2,2
2,2
Emulator packages for the 8550 and 8540 may
be ordered as system options. These options
provide the capabilities necessary to fully emulate
the target microprocessor in a user's prototype
system .
All emulation operations are controlled by the
powerful Microprocessor Lab system software .
The user is able to monitor program execution ,
set software breakpoints , examine and change
memory and register contents . Debug trace information is displayed in a format unique to the
microprocessor , with instruotion fetches disassembled into mnemonics for easy interpretation .
Pl0-P17
P24-P27
8080 and 8080A refer to microprocessors manufactured by Intel Corporation. Tektronix. Inc .. does not guarantee that other
vendors ' verSions of the 8080 will be compatible with the Tektronix Microprocesser Labs.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
1.8 m (6 ft)-of cable from the emulator processor
to the interface assembly.
out/in
11 ,15
11 .15
102,82
INT
8048(80211
21 ,32
21 ,32
(120,2121
69.122
SS
22,32
22 ,32
ClK
29.47
31 ,52
'INTEL 8099 chip specifications.
"for clock in to 8039 > 6 MHz and memory mapped
to 8550. TO out is divided by 2.
"'tRD' ~ t 1.2 + t user mem access.
18
17,24
' Inputs must be present until read by an input instruction (In tel
Specification).
Length -
Tl
RST
17,24
17.24
8080A EMULATOR SUPPORT PACKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS
P20-P23
TO"
P20-P23
45.8 cm (1.5 II)-of cable from the interface assembly to the 40
pin plug.
Cable Configuration - 1.8 m (6 ft)-two 40-conductor ribbon
cables with alternating ground and signal paths.
45 .8 cm (1 .5 II)-two twisted pair 40 conductor cables.
Termination -
1.8 m (6 ft)- interlace assembly contains reSistive termination and receivers for data, address, and control
from the emulator processor module.
45 .8 cm (1 .5 ftl-not terminated.
40 pin plug- 40 pin spring plate protected plug . When used
With a zero Insertion force socket. an included 40 pin low profile
DIP socket must be used between the zero insertion force
socket and the 40 pin probe plug.
TEK
EMULATOR PROCESSOR AND
PROTOTYPE CONTROL PROBE SUPPORT PACKAGES
TIMING CH ARACTERfSTICS
Emulation Interface Delays'
To 8080A from
Max fin nsl
Interface Assemblv
TVD
6800 /6802 EMULATOR SUPPORT
PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Cable Configuration - 1,8 m (6 1I)-lwO 40-conduclor ribbon
cables with chassIs ground plane and signal paths,
6800 and 6802 refer to microprocessors manufactured by Motorola Corporation, Tektronix, tnc, does not guarantee that other vendors ' versions of the 6800 or 6802 will be compatible
With the Tektronix Microprocessor Labs,
30 cm (1 ft)-two 22-conductor teflon cables with alternating
grounds ,
01
44
60
02
HOLD
44
44
60
67
RESET
44
67
ROY"
35
40
INT
63
104
DATA
44
53
30 cm (1 II)-of cable from the interface assembly to the 40 pin
plug,
30 cm (1 ft )-probe assembly contains an oscillator circuit to
drive and buffer the 6809 clock input pins, Input lines are not
terminated. All output or bidirectional lines are series terminated With 100 II,
Typ
Max (In nsl
Cable Configuration - 1,8 m (6 It)-two 40-conductor ribbon
cables With alternating ground and signal paths,
Z-80A EMULATOR SUPPORT PACKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS
30 cm (1 II)-two tWiSted pair 40 conductor cables made up 01
s'9nal/ground paIrs.
Z-80 and Z-80A reler to microprocessors manufactured by Z,log Corporation, Tektronix, Inc does not guarantee that other
vendor's versIOnS of the Z-80 will be compatible with the Tektronix Microprocessor Labs,
From 8080A to
Interface A ssembly
HOLDA'"
39
55
SYNC
37
45
WAIT
37
45
WR
37
45
DBIN
37
45
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Length - 1,8 m (6 II)-of cable Irom Ihe emulalor processor
10 the Interface assembly.
6800 PROTOTYPE CONTROL PROBE
Read/ Write Timing (In ns)
Symbol
Characteristic
INTE
39
55
ADDRESS
27
35
Peripheral Read
Access Time
DTACC
DATA
50
63
Address Setup Time
DTDA
'Assumes 6 ft of cable at 1,5 ns/ ft.
" RDY IS I'Jnored unless user memory or I/O
control mode 2 or special mode,
IS
accessed in
•• 'The equatlOfl for HOLDA to tristate timing IS as follows :
HOLDA' DBIN - FLOAT, Tristate of data and address follows the tr8l1ing edges of DBIN or WR by ~ 20 ns.
808SA EMULATOR SUPPORT
CHARACTERISTICS
R/W Setup Time
DR/WSU
VMA Selup Time
DEVMA
Data Setup Time /Read
DTDDR
Data Delay Ti
(relative to 01
TDDW
)
0
Delay for DBE RiSing,
Edoe Irelatlve to 01
Input Data Hold Time
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Length - 1,8 m (6 ft)-of cable from the emulator processor
to the interface assembly,
Address Hold Time
30 cm (1 II)-two 40-conductor twisted pair cables,
Output Data: rOld Time
laller DBEll
506
350
365
119
DOBER
DHRD
DTDWH
444
29
20
VMA Hold Time
DVMAH
68
R/W Hold Time
DR/WH
61
10
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
The Z·80A Emulator Processor was designed to match the ac
characte"stlcs of the Z-80A and Z-80 Microprocessors,
Z800 1/Z8002 Emulator Support
Package Characteristics
Z800t , Z8002, Z8001A , and Z8002A refer to microprocessors
manufactured by Zilog Corp and AMD Inc, Tektronix does not
guarantee that other vendors' versions will be compatible with
the TektroniX Microcomputer Labs,
6802 PROTOTYPE CONTROL PROBE
Read /Write Timing (in ns)
Svmbol
Min
TVD
Max
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DTACC
408
DTDA
367
Length - 1,8 m (6 It) 01 cable from the Emulator Processor to
the Interface assembly ; 45 em (1 ,5) II of cable from the interlace assembly to the 40- or 48-pin plug.
Termination - t ,8 m (6 tl)-interface assembly contains receivers for data, address , and control from the 8085 emulator
processor module ,
VMA Setup Time
DEVMA
365
R/W Setup Time
DR /WSU
392
30 em (1 II)-not terminated,
Data Setuo Time tRead
DTDDR
Data Delav Time (W"te
TDDW
Input Data Hold Time
DHRD
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Emulation Clock
Mode t or Mode 2
(user's clock), With
808SA Prototype Control Probe
6,25 MHz max ; crystal ,
RC timing network or
TIL input to XI.
Mode 0 (system clock)
6,25 MHz :!: 0,01 %
Output Data Hold Time
DTDWH
127
527
40"
10
39
DADH
63
VMA Hold Time
DVMAH
66
R/W Hold Time
OR/WH
70
Address Hold Time
Termination - 1,8 m (6 II)-interface assembly contains receIVers for data , address and control Irom the Z-80 Emulator
Processor module,
30 cm (1 II)-not terminated,
40"
65
Address Setup Time
Cable Configuration - 1,8 m (6 ft)-2 40-conductor ribbon
cables With chassis ground plane and signal paths,
30 cm (1 II)-two 40-conductor twisted pall cables,
513
DADH
Characteristic
Length - 1,8 m (6 fl)-of cable from the emulator processor
to the Interface assembly,
30 cm (1 ft)-ol cable from the interface assembly to the 40 pin
plug,
375
DTDWH
Pe"pheral Read
Access Time
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Max
tl
Output D~tt) Hold Time
(aller 01
Cable Configuration
18m - (6 ft)-two 40-conductor ribbon cables with chassis
ground plane and Signal paths,
Tvo
(Write)
8085 and 8085A refer to microprocessors manufactured by Intel Corporation, Tektronix, Inc, does not guarantee that other
vendors ' versions of the 8085 will be compatible with the Tektronix Microprocessor Labs,
30 cm (1 ft)-of cable from the interface assembly to the 40 pin
plug,
Min
Termination - 1,8 m (6 ft)-Interface assembly contains receivers for data, address, and control from the 68XX emulator
processor module,
"Although data should remam valid at least 40 ns after Enable,
typiCally 10 ns will be sufficient,
6809 EMULATOR SUPPORT PACKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS
6809, 68A09 and 68B09 refer to microprocessors manufactured by Motorola, Inc, Tek tronix does not guarantee tha t other vendors ' versions will be compatible with the Tektronix
Microcomputer Labs.
Cabte Configuration - 1.8 m (6 ft)-two transmission line
cables , each 40 signal lines and 80 signal return lines terminated to 40-pin connector.
For Z800! - 45 cm (1 ,5 ft)-two transmission line cables,
each 40 signal lines and 80 signal return lines terminated to 40-
pin connector.
For Z8OO2 - 45 cm (1.5 II)-two transmission line cables,
each 25 Signal hnes and 52 signal return lines terminated to 26-
pin connector.
Termination - 1.8 m (6 ttl- interlace assembly contains receivers lor data, address, and control lrom the Z8OO0 emulator
processor module.
30 cm (1 ft)-address and data lines terminated with Schottky
diodes. Control lines driven by pod are source termina ted, Input line to the emulator are received with PNP inputs , Clock,
Walt, Stop, and Reset inputs are buffered in the probe to maintain Signal Quality,
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Length - 1,8 m (6 ft)-ol cable from the Emulator Processor
to the interface assembly,
30 cm (1 11)-01 cable from the Interface assembly to the 40-pin
plug,
19
TEK
TMS9900 EMULATOR SUPPORT PACKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS
6500/ 1 EMULATOR SUPPORT PACKAGE
CHARACTERISTICS
TMS9900 relers to microprocessors manufactured by Texas
Instruments Corporal ion. Tektronix. Inc. does not guarantee
Ihat olher vendors versions of the TMS9900 will be compatible
With the TEKTRONIX Microprocessor labs.
of these microcomputers will be compatible with Tektronix
Microprocessor labs.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
length - 1.8 m (6 fl)-of cable from the emulator processor
to the interlace assembly.
24 .2 cm (9 .5 In)-of cable from the Interface assembly to the
64 pin plug .
Cable Configuration - 1.8 m (6 ttl-two 40-conductor ribbon
cables With chassis ground plane and signal paths.
650011 is a trademark of Rockwell International Corporation.
TektroniX, Inc. does not guarantee that other vendor 's verstOns
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
length - 1.8 m (6 ttl-of cable from the emulator processor
to the interface assembly . 45 cm (1 .5 tt) of cable from the Intertace assembly to the 40-pin plug.
Cable Configuration - 1.8 m (6 ttl-two 40 conductor nbbon
cables with alternating ground and signal paths.
45 cm (1 .5 ttl-two laminated 40 conductor cables made up ot
signal-ground pairs.
24 .2 cm (9 .5 In)-two 32-conductor twisted pair cables.
Termination - 1.8 m (6 fl)-the interface assembly contains
receivers for data. address. and control from the TMS9900
RISING EDGE
emulator processor module.
24 .2 cm (9 .5 In)-not terminated.
Output
Orivin!!
1 ClK
CYCLE
+ 300
Input
Receiving
100
PAO-PA7
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
To TMS9900 from
Interface As sembly
RISING EDGE
1 ClK
CYCLE
+ 300
300
FALLING EDGE
RISING EDGE
30
100
100
FALLING EDGE
20
20
FALLING EDGE
Emulation
Typical
Interface Delays '
Maximum (in ns)
/61
/62
/63
/64
CRUIN
INTREQ
lCO
ICI
IC2
IC3
41
41
41
41
12
12
12
12
12
12
59
59
59
59
23
18
23
23
23
23
HOLD
READY
12
12
18
18
lOAD
RESET
DATA
12
68
14
18
98
21
PBO-PB7.
PCO-PC7 .
PDO-PD7.
100
From TMS9900 to
DB I N
MEMEN
WE
CRU CK
CRUOUT
HO LD A
WAIT
l AO
ADDRE SS
DATA
Typical
24
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
14
14
Maximum (In nil
41
18
18
23
23
23
23
23
21
21
' Ass umes 1.5 ft of ca ble at 1.5 ns llt.
Note: All inpu ts and o utputs of th e 64 pin plug at
the en d of the proto type con tro l pro be are
buffered by 74LSXXX type devices. In all
cases, data and control should not chan ge
d uring clock 8 1.
20
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
length - 6 tt (1 .8 m) of cable from the emulator processor to
the interface assembly. 1.5 tt (45 cm) of cable from the interface assembly to the 40-pin plug.
Cable Configuration - 6 tt (1 .8 m)-two 40-conductor ribbon
cables with alternating ground and signal paths.
1.5 tt (45 cm)-two laminated 40-conduclor cables made up of
slgnal-ground pairs.
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
The 1802 Prolotype Control Probe is designed to meet all the
ac characteristics of the 1802 Microprocessor-Vcc ;;. 4.0 V.
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Emulation Clock
Mode 1 or Mode 2
(user clock) with 1802
Prototype Control
Probe.
5.0 MHz max at 10 Vee.
2S " C. this can be
crystal. or external input
to clock in 1 .
Tracking power supply
to monitor user voltage
(Vcc) and run the probe
at the same voltage
(4VtoI2V).
2.5 MHz
CNTR
-Gated in only during a read instruction from 81. 82. 83.
F8, 3870, 3872 EMULATOR
SUPPORT PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
F8 reters to microprocessors manufactured by Fairchild 's Corporation : the 3870 and 3872 refer to microcomputers manufactured by Mostek Corporation. Tektronix . Inc. does not guarantee that other vendor 's versions of the F8. 3870. or 3872 will be
compatible with the Tektronix Microprocessor Labs.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
length - 6 tt (1 .8 m)-of cable from emulator processor to
the interface assembly.
Interface Allembly
1802 EMULATOR SUPPORT
PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS
1 ft (30 cm)-of cable from the interface to 40 pin plug.
Cable Configuration - 6 tt (1 .8 m)-two 40-conductor ribbon
cables with chassis ground plane and signal paths.
1 ft (30 cm)-two 40-conductor twisted pair cables.
Termination - 6 tt (1 .8 m)-interface assembly con tains receivers for data. address . and control from the F8/3870/3872
Emulator Processor module.
1 ft (30 cm)-not terminated.
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
3870 /3872 - The 3870/3872 Prototype ContrOl Probe was
designed to meet ali the ac characteristics of the 3870 and
3872 Microcomputers .
F8 (3850) - The F8 Prototype Control Probe meets all of the
F8 ac characterlSltcs with the following exceptions: (1) the
worst-case delay trom the falling edges of WRITE to the
ROMC hnes being vahd is 650 ns (compared to 550 ns for the
F8 CPU) : (2) the worst-case skew between an external clock
Input IS 0 to 90 ns longer than that specified tor the F8.
INPUT I OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Variable Threshold
Range
>+ 10Vdcto <- 10Vdc
Preset TTL Voltage
+ 1.4 V dc :t 200 mV
Event Trigger Out
High level voltage out (when
Vee - Min . Vi - O.S.
Ro - SO Il to GN D) is > 2 V dc.
Adjustments
..... + 10 V de
acceSSible at
voltage must
impedance of
- Variable Threshold may be adjusted from
to < - 10 V de with a screwdriver adjustment
the rear panel of the Microcomputer Lab. This
be monitored with a voltmeter having an input
at least 10 Mil.
Jumper. - With the internal jumper in position '0-3' the clock
threshold IS deSignated to be the same as channels 0-3. In
position -4-7" the Jumper deSignates the clock threshold to be
the same as channels 4-7 .
Cable length -
50 cm (19.5 in).
TRIGGER
TRACE ANALYZER
TEK
In addilion to prototype bus Information, the ITA
can acquire up to eight channels of hardware
logiC through a TEKTRONIX P6451 probe with
Inputs that are either ITL and plus or minus 10
volt compatible or up to plus or minus 10 volt
variable threshold . This probe is part of the ITA's
optional acquisition interface. The Acquisition Interface Includes a BNC input for an event qualifier
Signal that is assignable to any of the ITA's four
trigger channels. Also Included are BNC outputs
for the ITA's four trigger signals.
TRIGGER TRACE ANALYZER
The TEKTRONIX Trigger Trace Analyzer is designed specifically for use with either the
TEKTRONIX B550 Microcomputer Development
Lab or the B540 Integration Unit. As such, it is
totally compatible with B-blt and 16-bit support
offered for either of these B500 Series systems .
The primary function of the Trigger Trace Analyzer IS to capture the real-time execution of code on
the bus of the prototype system under design.
ThiS capture Includes all address and data flow
plus control information specific to the processor
to be used for the prototype. In addition , an
external acquiSition probe allows up to eight
channels of prototype hardware logic to be captured and displayed along with the bus
information .
To capture specific bus transactions and hardware events, the Trigger Trace Analyzer has four
trigger channels that simultaneously monitor prototype software execution and other logic transactions These channels can be used independently or Interactively to initiate a trigger upon
detection of pertinent data generated from interaction of the emulator processor and prototype.
For user convenience when programming the
Trigger Trace Analyzer, address Information can
be represented by a series of symbolic labels and
expressions determined by the user. Also, information acquired from the prototype address and
control buses is displayed in disassembled mnemonics native to the processor in use.
62 Channels of real -time data acquisition
The Trigger Trace Analyzer (ITA) is a modular
option used to monitor and store real-time execution of code on the prototype bus as generated
by the emulator processor. ThiS processor may
be anyone of the 16-bit or 8-bit processors
supported by the TEKTRONIX B500 Series systems . On each cycle the ITA can acquire up to
16-bits of data bus information, up to 24-bits of
address information and up to 11 control bits. The
particular nature of the control bits is dependent
on the specific emulator being used . Each 8500
Series Emulator package defines and identifies
the signals that are supported.
Real-time data acquired from the prototype bus
and/or hardware points is captured by a highspeed buffer, the acqulsilion trace memory. This
memory IS up to 62-bits wide and 255 words
deep, and is able to resolve bus cycles up to 125
nanoseconds. To optimize the capability of the
acquisition trace memory, the ITA also allows
data storage qualification based on the event
defined by trigger channel four.
Four trigger channels
Each of the ITA's four trigger channels consists
of a word recognizer and 16-bit counter that may
be used together or Independently to produce a
trigger. Each channel 's word recognizer simultaneously monitors all of the emulator bus and
external hardware acquisition bits plus four more
bits representing feedback from each channel's
counter output. On each bus cycle, the word
recognizer looks for a specific value that has
been programmed by the user. The data and
address portions of the word recognizer will
accommodate a range (e .g., 01237H to 35798H)
as well as an indiVidual value, and also a NOT
range or Individual value. Any of the address,
data, and probe Signals may also be set to a
"don 't care" value.
When the data present during a prototype bus
cycle agrees With the preprogrammed word
recognizer value, the word recognizer outputs an
active EVENT signal. If the channel 's counter
output IS also in an active state , the channel will
produce a trigger signal. An active EVENT signal
can also be used to Increment/decrement any
channel's counter.
Each channel 's counter is 16-bits (64k) and will
operate up to 5 megahertz. The counter can be
programmed to access 17 different counting
sources Including five clock speeds and trigger
Signals from other channels, It may be programmed to count up or down to a maximum of
64k, and can be reset during operation . This
counting function can be enabled immediately or
disabled by an active trigger from its own channel
or the prevIous channel; or by an active counter
output from the previous channel. When the
counter reaches its preset value, it can be used in
conJunclion With an active EVENT signal to
produce a trigger; or to enable the next channel's
counter.
When a given channel's pre programmed word
recognizer and counter values come true, the
channel produces an active trigger output. The
word recognizer and counter can both be used
independently to produce a trigger by setting the
value of the other to "don't care". Also the user
may program the counter output to be constantly
active , allowing the word recognizer to independently produce a trigger,
Any channel's active trigger output can cause a
program execution breakpoint and halt data acquisition by the ITA's acquisition trace memory.
Once the breakpoint has occurred, prototype
code execution may either be stopped or allowed
to continue through ITA breakpoint commands,
Multiple breakpoints are possible by programming different triggers on different channels and
setting each to cause a breakpoint.
Up to four prototype evens occurring on consecutive bus cycles can be linked to form a single
trigger. Each even is assigned to a different
channel 's word recognizer and then linked
through a CONS command, that also specifies
the type of bus cycle. When the prototype events
occur in the order specified , the last event
causes a trigger.
BeSides triggering capabilities, two other items
extend control over data acquisition, One is data
qualification, which uses the event programmed
into channel four as a determinant for data
storage in the acquisition trace memory. When
the acquired prototype information agrees with
event four programming , it is committed to memory. Another command allows pre-, center-or
post-trigger triggering , which determines the position of the trigger event in relation to the
acquired data, In this manner the user can acqUire events leading up to the trigger, following
the trigger, or evenly distributed on either side of
the trigger.
The ITA package Includes a powerful command
set Similar to UNIX and a display capability to
enhance the user 's speed and efficiency. The TS
command (trigger status display) gives a full
display of the current programming content for
each trigger channel. It provides a full breakdown
of all values associated with both the word
recognlzers and counters, and also shows each
channel's breakpoint programming, In addition,
this command shows whether or not the trace
acqUisition memory IS being qualified by the
channel four event.
AcqUired data including bus status information is
displayed on a cycle-by-cycle basis in the disassembled mnemonics of the emulator processor in
use . The breakpoint display identifies which trigger channel caused the break to occur and
shows the status of all key registers within the
processor at the breakpoint. Symbolic representation of prototype address simplifies the implementallon of ITA commands.
21
HIGH LEVEL
TEK LANGUAGE
MODULAR DEVELOPMENT LANGUAGE
MDL/"
MDU" is a high level language designed specifically for use in microprocessor-based design. Its
parent language is ANSI Minimal BASIC, a widely
used and well understood programming format.
MDU" offers an extensive number of enhancements from BASIC that make this new language
an extremely effective design tool while retaining
the advantages of simplicity and easy learning
found in BASIC.
One essential advantage of MDU" is that it uses
a compiler instead of an interpreter. Each program statement is translated to machine code
only once, instead of every time the statement is
executed. The result is faster, and often more
compact code for final program execution.
MDU" allows a module-oriented approach to
software development. Two statements, USES
and PROVIDES, allow variables, functions and
procedures to be shared by programmers working on different modules of an overall program.
The USES statement also allows direct access to
absolute memory locations, I/O ports and
interrupts-all essential for proper control of
hardware/software integration .
Variable names and strings have been considerably expanded with MDU". Variable names can
contain up to six characters, the first alphabetic
and the others alphanumeric, for easy identification during program development. Strings can
vary in length from 1 to 255 characters instead of
the unalterable 18 used in minimal BASIC.
Substring replacement is also enhanced to assist
in character manipulation.
I/O features include access to ports and absolute
addressing of memory, which allows variables to
be assigned a specific address. Both ASCII and
general purpose binary file manipulations are
possible through a series of I/O statements Including OPEN, CLOSE, RESTORE, READ, WRITE ,
PRINT and INPUT.
Among many other MDU" enhancements to BASIC are logical operators (AND, OR , XOR , NOT)
plus shift and rotate operations for bit manipulation DISABLE and ENABLE to turn the interrupt
off ~nd on and a built-in code optimization.
The conversion of MDUI' source code to actual
machine code is a three-step process. The first
step converts MDU" source code into assembly
language source code which is stored on a file or
device. The assembly source code contains the
original MDU" statements as comments preceding each block of assembly source code. At thiS
stage, the assembly language can be further
optimized by using the 85SO's powerful editor. In
the second step the assembler converts the
assembly language source into object code. The
third step is to link the object code with the run
time support library and any other assembled
object code modules.
PASCAL: HIGH-LEVEL PROGRAMMING
LANGUAGE
Pascal, a high-level programming language, is
receiving much attention in the electronics industry. Features such as program structure, strong
data typing , and readability greatly enhance programmer efficiency, and thereby reduce software
development and maintenance costs . The
TEKTRONIX Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler is designed specifically for those who are writing
programs for the 8080 or 8085 microprocessors.
The TEKTRONIX Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler is a
super-set of the ISO draft standard Pascal. A true
compiler rather than a P-code interpreter, the
Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler generates object
code directly. Each program statement is translated to machine code only once instead of every
time the statement is executed, resulting in faster
and often more compact code.
Linkage to Assembly Routines
Speed-critical or timing-critical applications are
likely to require some program segments to be
written in assembly language. Because the code
generated by the Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler is
compatible with the 8550 linker, assembly code
can be linked to Pascal code.
Standard Pascal Features
Pascal is a block-structured language that allows
the program to be divided into sub-programs
called procedures and functions. This block structure encourages programmers to logically plan
and construct programs, so debugging time is
greatly reduced . The block structure also requires
that all variable declarations occur prior to executable code.
Input/Output
Pascal 's six control structures correspond closely
with flowchart elements and make algorithm coding very natural. All control structures have a
single entrance and exit unless GOTO's are used ,
so program modifications are unlikely to introduce
errors into the program.
Pascal allows programmers to use many flexible
forms of data representations and to define data
types that accurately express their particular
problems. Pascal also has strong data typing,
which means that each variable must be defined
as a single data type prior to its use and used
consistently with its definitions.
Pascal programs are easy to read , and thus to
maintain . Pascal differs from most line-oriented
languages by allowing extra spaces, tabs, and
carriage returns almost anywhere. Variable, procedure, and function names can be meaningful
and easily understood because they are not
restricted in length . However, identifiers used by
DOS/SO must be unique in the first eight characters, other identifiers , in the first 19.
TEKTRONIX Pascal 8080/8085 Complier
Major Extensions
Separate Compilations
Separate compilations are supported by the Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler. The main program module 's first word is the keyword "PROGRAM ."
Submodules to be separately compiled begin
with the keyword "MODULE". Global variables,
procedures, and functions can be referenced
between separately compiled modules and the
main program via PUBLIC and EXTERN
attributes.The PUBLIC and EXTERN attributes are
associated with variables, procedures, and functions and cause the compiler to generate the
appropriate linker text.
Interrupt Handling
The Pascal 8080/ 8085 Compiler supports full use
of the 808O's and 8085's interrupts. The interrupts
are supported by writing the interrupt service
routine as a separate procedure having the INTERRUPT attribute. Separate routines are required to connect a specific interrupt vector to
the appropriate interrupt service routine. The
interrupt service routines are included as convenience routines with the compiler. Procedures are
also supplied to set (SIM) and read (RIM) the
8085's interrupt mask.
Included with the Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler are
several predefined procedures and functions
used for chip-level I/O. A procedure to send data
to a specified port and function to read data from
a specified port are included. These procedures
and functions are analogous to the standard
Pascal WRITE , WRITELN, READ, READLN procedures, which are available for 85SO mode 0
operation when using DOS/SO I/O. All of the
85SO's I/O capability is available to a Pascal
program running in emulation mode 0, so the
Pascal program can access the console terminal,
discs, line printer, and auxilliary I/O ports. The
Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler also allows an ORIGIN
attribute to be associated with variables. The
ORIGIN attribute assigns variables to specific
memory addresses and is very useful for memory
mapped I/O.
Non-decimal Integers
In many microcomputers applications, programmers want to use non-decimal integers. The
Pascal 8080/8085 Compiler supports binary, octal,
and hexadecimal integers for input and output.
ROM/ RAM Applications
ROM/RAM applications are facilitated by controlsection typing. Control-section typing means that
the compiler gives the user the information he
needs to allocate program variables into a linker
section separate from literals, constants, and
instructions, which are put into a second linker
section .
Structured Constants
Standard Pascal allows only constants of type,
Integer, real , boolean , and text char. The Pascal
8080/8085 Compiler also provides constants
which are arrays, and records . The most common
application of structured constants is to initialize
structured variables (arrays and records) that
must reside in potentially volatile RAM .
Metacommands
Metacommands are compiler directives that
cause the compiler to do such things as format
the listings or generate run-time debugging code .
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on Micro·
processor Development Labs and a variety of user work·
shops featuring microprocessor. ~ard.ware a~d software
design concepts. For further training Information, conta~t
your local Sales Ollice or request a copy 01 the TektronIX
Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
22
TEK
SYSTEM PERIPHERALS
AND WORKSHOPS
MOL WORKSHOPS
Tektronix offers Microcomputer Development Lab
Workshops in a number of locations throughout
the year. The courses are intensive , hands-on
workshops designed to help the attendee meet
the demanding challenges of the growing microcomputer development market.
m 4643 LINE PRINTER
The 4643 Line Printer is an optional system
peripheral for use with the 8550, 8540, or 8560
Microcomputer Labs,
The 4643 Line Printer is RS-232C compatible and
supports baud rates of 110 to 9600, Printing is bidirectional at 350 character per second, With a
full 132 character line, speeds of 125 lines per
minute are nominal the 7 by 7 format print font
permits easy reading of both upper and lower
case, and the operator can specify condensed ,
expanded, or standard characters, In the condensed format, the 4643 prints out a 132-character line on an 8 112 by 11 inch sheet.
4643 Printer (2400 Baud Standard) ... $4200
8550 MOL OPERATIONS WORKSHOP
The 8550 MOL Operations Workshop covers all
functions of the 8550 Microprocessor Development lab, a design tool used for both software
development and hardware/software integration,
The 855O 's features are explored in-depth and
applied to a typical microcomputer design cycle,
Throughout the course, the attendee gets intensive, hands-on experience for an in-depth understanding of all 8550 operations,
The course introduces the design process, flow
charting a simple system and writing assembler
source code for the ZOO microprocessor, Then
with this background, the attendee learns to use
the text editor, macro assembler, linker, 1/0 simulation with service calls, communication to remote
computers, and the real-time software/hardware
debugging tools, The 8550 MOL Operations workshop is a five-day course,
EVALUATION AND SELECTION
OF 16-BIT
MICROPROCESSORS WORKSHOP
The Evaluation and Selection of 16-Sit
Microprocessors Workshop provides an in-depth
examination
of
three
major
16-Sit
Microprocessors currently available for design
implementation, the Intel 8086, Zilog Z8000 and
the Motorola 68000, Each is considered in terms
of hardware and software characteristics,
MICROPROCESSOR HARDWARE!
SOFTWARE INTEGRATION TECHNIQUES
The Microprocessor Hardware/Software Integration Techniques Workshop examines various aspects of the microcomputer design cycle and the
role of each in the overall development scheme,
Throughout the course, the participant will work
with a number of design tools commonly used in
developing microprocessor-based systems, Included are the 8550 MOL, logic analyzers,
oscilloscopes and data communications testers,
Extensive hands-on experience is provided for
each tool. The Microprocessor Hardware/ Software Integration Techniques Workshop is a Rveday course,
MICROPROCESSOR SOFTWARE
DEVELOPMENT WITH PASCAL WORKSHOP
The Microprocessor Software Development with
Pascal Workshop is an intensive examination of
Pascal and its relationship to microcomputer software development. 1\ emphasizes how to "think"
in Pascal program structure and looks at the
philosophy behind the language, In addition to
defining the language in terms of the ISO Pascal
standing, the course introduces Tektronix 's special extensions aimed specifically at developing
code at the microprocessor level. Also considered are tradeoffs between using assembly or
high level language for micro software development, and the process of linking Pascal modules
with assembly-written modules to form a complete program , The Microprocessor Software Development with Pascal Workshop is a Rve-day
course ,
For detail information on Tektronix Microcomputer
Development Workshops and Workshop schedules, contact your local Tektronix Sales Engineer,
To provide a thorough orientation, lab sessions
require the participant to write a program for each
processor that solves a given application problem. Program development is accomplished using
the TEKTRONIX 8550 Microprocessor Development System , Questions on processor selection,
software development, prototyping, program size
and through-put considerations will also be
discussed ,
CT8500 CRT TERMINAL
The CT8500 CRT Terminal is an optional peripheral recommended for use with the 8550, 8540 or
8560 Microcomputer Labs,
The CT8500 is serially interfaced through an EIA
standard RS-232C port, The 30 cm (12 in) diagonal CRT displays up to 25 lines at 80 characters
per line, and the keyboard contains a full ASCII
set of characters in upper and lower case, Other
key features include eight programmable function
keys , split screen capability, multimode editing,
scrolling, paging , and visual display attributes,
The evaluation and selection of 16-bit
Microprocessors workshop is a three-day course,
INTRODUCTION TO
MICROPROCESSOR SOFTWARE
DESIGN WORKSHOP
The Introduction to Microprocessor Software Design Workshop is a comprehensive look at microcomputer software development , from
flowcharting through hardware/software integration , It includes hands-on experience with the
8550 Microcomputer Development Lab, a selfcontained microcomputer design tool. The introduction to Microprocessor Software Design Workshop is a Five-day course,
Order CT8500 CRT Terminal .............. $2700
23
INFORMATION
TEK ORDERING
AND MATRIX
8540 Integration Unit
~
Factory
Configuration
Field Number
8300E04 Opt 01
8300E06 Opt 01
8300E20
8300E28
8300P04
8300P06
8300P20 Opt 0 I
8300P22 Opt 0 I
8300P28 Opt 01
8540FOI
8540F03
8550F04
8550F05
8550F06
8550F30 Opt 01
8550F31
8550F32
040-1020-00
Emulators:
Z-80A Emulator and ROM
8085 Emulator and ROM
Z8001 /Z8002 Emulator
68XX Emulator
Probes:
Z-80A Prototype Control Probe
8085A Prototype Control Probe
Z8oo1 Prototype Control Probe and ROM
Z8002 Prototype Control Probe and ROM
6809 Prototype Control Probe and ROM
Sy stem Options:
Comm Interlace Package
Tngger Trace Analyzer and ROM
64k Program Memory (Factory Installed)
64k Program Memory (Field Installed)
t 28k Program Memory (Factory Installed)
128k Program Memory (Field Installed)
Memory Controller
PROM Controller
2716/32 PROM Module
8748/41 A55 PROM Module
Rackmount VerSion
Universal Euro 220 V
UK 240 V
Australia 240 V
North Amencan 240 V
Number
Option 2C
Option 2E
Option 2M
Option 20
Price
52950
$2950
$4050
$3450
3D
3F
30
3S
3V
$1050
$1050
52250
$2250
$1750
Option
OptIOn
Option
Option
Option
Option 01
Option 03
Option 04
$400
$4550
$3450'
$6550
Option 05
$6350'
$9450
Option 06
$2500
Option 30
$1650
$650
Option 31
OptIOn 32
$650
OptIOn 47
$250
Opllon Al
NC
Option A2
NC
Option A3
NC
Opllon A4
NC
'ThiS pnce Includes credit lor 32k byte standard
memory module .
Ac cessories:
Interface Cables 8540 to 8560
HSI Cable. 2.44 m (8 ft)
HSI Cable. 6. I m (20 ft)
HSI Cable. 15.24 m (50 ft )
HSI Cable. 76.2 m (250 ft)
Interface Cables 8540 to Dataset
R S-232C Interface Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) blank line
8560 Multi-User Software
Oevelo~ment
012-1009-00
012-1008-00
012-1007 -00
012-1010-00
012-0757 -00
Unit
$55
$90
$125
$395
$140
$27.500
Assemblers:
Option
Option
OptIOn
Option
Option
Option
Option
8560BOI
8560B02
8560B04
8560B15
8560B16
8560B17
8560B18
8080A/8085A Assembler
6800/6801/6802 Assembler
Z-80A Assembler
8086/8088 Assembler
Z800 1/Z8002 Assembler
68000 Assembler
6809 Assembler
8560F21
Advanced CRT-Onented Editor
tA
lB
lC
lJ
lK
lL
1M
$1500
$1500
S1500
$1500
$1500
$1500
$1500
Edito r:
Option 21
$500
Option 4A
Option 4B
Option 4C
$950
$950
$500
Software Utilitie s:
8560UOI
8560U02
8560U03
Text Processing Package
Native Programming Package
AUXiliary Utilities Package
8560FOI
8560F03
64k Word System Memory
5-8 Port Mux/Llcense
Universal Euro 220 V
U.K. 240 V
Australia 240 V
North Amencan 240 V
System Options:
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
01
03
Al
A2
A3
A4
$4500
$4500
NC
NC
NC
NC
~950
8550 Microcom
Assemble rs:
(ReqUIres Software License)
8300AOI
8300A02
8300A04
8300A05
8300A07
8300A09
8300AtO
8300A 14
8300B 15
8300B20
8300B26
8300A28
8300EOI
8300E02
8300E04
8300E05
8300E06
8300E07
8300E09
8300El0
8300E14
8300E20
8300E28
24
8080A/8085A Assembler
6800/680 1/6802 Assembler
Z-80A Assembler
TMS9900 Assembler
3870/3872/F8 Assembler
1802 Assembler
8048/8021/8041 A/8022 Assembler
6500/1 Assembler
8086/8088 Assember
Z8000 Assembler
68000 Assembler
6809 Assembler
Emulators:
8080A Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
6800/6802 Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
Z-80A Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
TMS9900 Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
8085A Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
3870/3872/F8 Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
1802 Emulator Processor and Emulator Control Software
8048/8021 /8041 N8022 Emulator Processor and Emulator Control
Software (requires 8300PtO . 8300P12 . or 8300P13)
6500/1 Emulator Processor. Prototype Control Probe
Z8001/Z8002 Emulator
68XX Emulator
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
lA
lB
lC
10
IE
IF
lG
lH
IT
lU
IV
1M
$950
$950
$950
$1050
$950
$950
$950
$950
$1200
$1200
$1200
$950
Option
OptIOn
Option
Opllon
Option
Option
Option
2A
2B
2C
20
2E
2F
2G
$2650
$2650
$2650
$3465
$2650
$3150
$3465
Option 2H
$2950
$3340
$4050
OptIOn 2M
O(1tlon 20
~3450
TEK
8550 Microcomputer Development Lab (Cont.)
Factory
ConfiguratIon
Field Number
Number'
Price
Probes:
8300P01
8300P02
8300P03
8300P04
8300P05
8300P06
8300P07
8300P08
8300P09
8300P10
8300P11
8300P12
8300P13
8300P20
8300P22
8300P28
8300GOI
8300HOI
8300H02
8300COI
8550F01
8550F02
8550F03
8550F04
8550F05
85500F06
8550
8550
8550
8550
8550
4643
CT8500
8080A Prototype Control Probe
6800 Prototype Control Probe
6802 Prototype Control Probe
l-80A Prototype Control Probe
TMS9900 Prototype Control Probe
8085A Prototype Control Probe
3870/3872 Prototype Control Probe
F8 Prototype Control Probe
1802 Prototype Control Probe
8048 Prototype Control Probe
8021 Adapter (requires 8300P 10)
8041 A Prototype COnlrol Probe
8022 Prototype Control Probe
l8001 Prototype Control Probe and Emulator Software
l8002 Prototype Control Probe and Emulator Software
6809 Prototype Control Probe and Emulator Soflware
Language Products:
(Requires Software License)
Pascal 8080/8085"
Modular Development Language . 8080/808Sll-80"
Modular Development Language. 6800/6802"
Editor
(ReqUIres Software License)
Advance CRT - Onented Editor'
System Options:
Real Time Prototype Analyzer
32k Static Memory Board
Tngger Trace Analyzer
64k Program Memory (Ordered With system)
64k Program Memory
128k Program Memory
128k Program Memory (Ordered With system)
Memory Allocation Controller
UnIVersal Euro 220 V/ 16A Power
U.K. 240 V(13A Power
North Amencan 240 V/ 15A Power
SWitzerland 240 V/15A Power
Editor
(Requires Software License)
Advance CRT - Onented Editor'
System Options:
Peripherals:
OpllOn
Option
Option
Option
Option
Opllon
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
3G
3H
3J
3K
3L
3M
3N
30
3S
3V
$1050
$1050
$1050
$1050
$1280
$1050
$1050
$1050
$1050
$1250
$375
$1250
$1250
$1850
$1850
$1450
Option 1P
Option 10
Option 1R
$1950
$1100
$1100
Option 01
Option 02
OpllOn 03
05
06
A1
A2
A4
A5
$2700
$3100
$4150
$6550
$3450
$9450
$6350
$2500
NC
NC
NC
NC
OpllOn 1S
$500
$500
Option 04
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
OpllOn
$4200
$2700
Une Printer
CRT Terminal
Accessories:
RS-232
Null-Modem
Interconnecting cable 012-0757-00 (300 cm Interconnecting cable 012-0820-00 (150 cm -
• 'Order the products •• 8540 or
$140
$80
10 ft)
5 ft)
asso oplionl to heve the Iystem f.ctory configured and le.led.
"RequI'.s 64'" Progrem memory .
ORDER MATRIX
To use the matn. below
A) Identify the mainframe (8540 or 8550)
B) Select a processor (8080. 8085. l-80 . 6800. etc.)
C) Select a level of support (assembler. emulator. probe. HLL. Prototype Debug).
D) Order mainframe and options for deemed level of support:
8540
Processor
8080
8085
l-80
Emulator
8550
Probe
Option 2E
Option 2C
Option 3F
Option 3D
Option
Opllon
Opllon
Option
Opllon
Option
OpllOn
Opllon
Option
Opllon
Option
OpllOn
6800
6802/6808
TMS9900
3870/72(74 /76
F8
1802
8048/8035/8039-6
8021
8041A
8022
6500(1
6809
8086
8088
l8001
l8002
68000
'Requires Option 3K
20
2K
2K
2M
2M
2P
3V
3P
3X
30
3S
3U
8560
Assembler
Emulator
Probe
HLL
OpllOn
OpllOn
Option
OpllOn
OpllOn
OpllOn
OpllOn
Option
Opllon
Option
Opllon
Opllon
Option
Opllon
OpllOn
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
OpllOn
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
2A
2E
2C
2B
2B
20
2F
2F
2G
2H
2H
2H
2H
2J'
20
Option 3A
Option 3F
Option 3D
OpllOn 3B
Option 3C
Option 3E
Option 3G
Option 3H
Option 3J
OpllOn 3K
Option 3L'
Option 3M
Option 3N
Option
Option
OpllOn
Option
OpllOn
Opllon
Option
Option
Option
2K
2M
2M
3P
Option
Option
Option
Option
1A
1A
lC
1B
1B
10
1E
1E
1F
1G
1G
1G
1G
1H
1M
1T
1T
lU
1U
1V
Option 3V
3X
30
3S
3V
Assembler
lP . 10
lP . 10
10
1R
lR
Option 1A
Option lA
Option 1C
Opllon 1M
Option lJ
Option lJ
Option 1K
Option 1K
'Includes Probe
'NOTE If this support IS to be added to a preViously purchased mainframe. use the eqUivalent product nomenclature. I.e . FIELD NUMBER (NOT the factory conltguratlon option number) when plac'"g your order
2S
TEK
DATA COMMUNICATION
ANALYZERS
CONTENTS
834 Programmable Data
Communication Tester .. ......
.
834RDA ROM Development Aid ....................
ROM Packs ... ........ ...... .........
.
833/832 Data
Communication Tester ................. .
...
830 Series Line Comparison
............
851 Digital Tester ....................... .
27
29
30
32
34
35
Bisynchronous System Exercising
Communications Equipment Check-out
Data Link Testing
26
TEK
834
Programmable
Allows Automation of Tests
Easy to Operate
PROGRAMMABLE
DATA COMMUNICATION TESTER
The 834, like our 833, monitors and is compatible
with EIA RS-232, and cCln V.24 interfaces (optional interfaces also available); provides DTE and
DCE simulallon to evaluate the entire network; Bit
Error Rate Testing for analyzing phone lines and
modems; the ability to calculate and confirm
block check characters; and internal selfdiagnostics.
19.2 k Baud Data Transfer
Handles ASYNC /BISYNC/HDLC
2699 Character Buffer
16 Character Display
Bit Error Rate Testing
Portable and Lightweight
The TEKTRONIX 834 Programmable Data Communications Tester is a powerful network
troubleshooter designed to meet the demand for
cost and time-effective first-line field service. The
834's portability (5.5 kg , 12 Ib), ruggedness , and
ease of use gives you a welcome independence
from bulky, expensive equipment.
The fast 19.2 kilobaud rate lets you test the most
modern networks. The bright 16 character front
panel display is fully decoded in ASCII, EBCDIC,
HEX, or your own character set.
Modem (DCE) Simulation
In this mode , the 834 functions as Data Communications Equipment (DCE) or modem simulator for
testing the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). Messages can be sent to the unit under test (UUT),
and messages received from the UUT can be
examined for trigger events which can cause
further action by the 834. The sequence of events
is controlled by a stored program (in the 834)
which can be manually entered or stored in a user
defined ROM (refer to Programmability).
Terminal (DTE) Simulation
We 've programmed common test messages and
setups into a series of optional User ROM Packs
that field personnel easily slip into the 834 to
quickly isolate faults . The Packs can set up the
front panel controls automatically, or allow the
user to execute specific test programs for special
on-site applications.
In this mode, the 834 performs as Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) or terminal simulator for testing
the Data Communications Equipment (DCE) side
of the interface. Otherwise, operation is similar to
the modem (DCE) simulator mode described
above.
MODES OF OPERATION
In this mode the 834 performs bit and block error
rate testing using the 511 bit cCin standard
pseudo-random pattern.
Bert Mode
Monitor
The 834 monitors and records activity occurring
on the RS-232 interface without interfering with
data transmission . Trigger capability allows
selective capture of data (refer to Triggering).
Self Test Mode
In this mode, internal diagnostics and excercising
routines can be called up by the operator to verify
that the instrument is functioning properly.
27
DATA COMMUNICATION TESTER
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
INTERFACE COMPATIBILITY
The 834 is compatible with EIA RS-232 and CCID V.24 interfaces (optional interfaces also available).
Synchronous and
Hall or full-duplex .
Communications Mode -
Bits Per Character - 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5 biVcharacter cannot be
selected with parity : 9 biVcharacter cannot be selected without
parity and in the asynchronous mode only.
Codes - ASCII , EBCDIC, HEX standard. Space available for
user defined codes in an optional USER ROM .
DATA TRANSFER RATES
Internal (crystal controlled) - 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200,
300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, and 19,200 bits
per second . (Synchronous full-duplex restricted to ",9600 bits
per second).
External - Limited to maximum of 19,200 bits per second.
Synchronous full-dupl~. restricted to .. 9600 bits per second.
Parity -
None, Odd , Even, all Mark, all Space.
RTS/CTS Delay (Half-Duplex Mode Only) - Programmable
from 0 to 9999 ms. If not programmed, defaults to 200 ms.
Accuracy -
+ 5, - 15 ms.
Block Check Characters -
99 steps available.
Message Lengths -
Temperature - Operating : O· to + 50 · C (+ 32 · to + t22 · F).
Nonoperating: - 40 · to + 75 · C ( - 40· to + 167· F).
50 messages totaling 3000 bytes.
Data Captured - Always the last 2699 characters received
before the program stops or before STOP is pressed.
ELECTRICAL
Data Transmiss i on Timing Asynchronous.
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROGRAMMABILITY
Program Steps -
CRC-16, CRC-CCID, LRC .
Bit Error Rate/ Block Error Rate Tests - Utilizes the 5"-bit
CCID standard pseudo-random pattern sent in blocks of 1000
bits ; errors are counted continuously or over a total test length
01 10' or 10' bits : stores bits in error, blocks sent, blocks in
error and sync faults . (See 834R03 link test ROM pack for
additional capabilities).
SET-UPS
30 · to 60 · C, 95% relative humidity .
Instruction Set -
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating : to
15,000 m (50,000 It).
HALT: mm
Shock -
Stop and display message MM .
50 gs, 1/2 sine. 11 ms duration, in each major axis.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
SEND : mm
RS-232 cable assembly, Jumper set (198-4006-00), power cord
- US, 115 V (other optional) (161 -0066-00).
Send contents of message buffer MM as a frame.
RECEIVE
Obtain next complete data frame for processing.
COMPARE: mm
ORDERING INFORMATION
834 Programmable Data
Communications Tester .u ... uu ... uu..... $3990
Search frame for a match with message buffer MM.
JUMP EQ: ss
Jump to step SS if a match is found .
Option 02 Current Loop Interface ........................ Add 5300
JUMP NE: ss
Option 03 RS449 (RS422 /RS423) Interface ......... Add 5750
Jump to step SS if a match is not found .
Option 04 MIL. STD. 188C .................................... Add 5350
JUMP: ss
INTERNATtONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Jump to step SS.
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V / 16 A ............... No Charge
IF TIME: ss
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13 A ..... ........ .. .. .... ........ .... .. No Charge
Jump to step SS if the timer expires.
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ 10 A ....................... No Charge
TIME OUT # pp
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15 A
Start limer with value parameter PP.
No Charge
ROM PACKS
MASK: mm
834RO 1 General Purpose ROM Pack ........................... $280
Use message MM for mask during COMPARE operation.
834R02 Bisynchronous ROM Pack ............................... 5320
WAIT #pp
Start time with value in parameter PP and do not proceed to
following step until timer expires (10 to 9999 ms), (additional
instructions available in ROM packs).
834R03 Link Test ROM Pack ......................................... $370
834R04 HDLC/ X25 ROM Pack ....................................... 5450
834R05 Extended Instruction Set ROM Pack .............. 5240
834R07 PARS /IPARS ROM Pack ................................... 5375
ASYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
Stop Bits -
Humidity -
834RDA ROM Development Aid ROM Pack .............. 51200
BREAKOUT PANEL
Transmits " 1.5 or 2. Responds to 1.
End of Frame - One programmable character (any bit combination). Defaults to OA. (ASCII New line).
Probe -
Timing -
Mark : - 25 V ,,;; Vin ,,;; - 3 V.
Current Loop Pod Accessory 015-0361-00 ....... .......... 5325
Normal or Isochronous.
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
Space: + 3 V ,,;; Vin ,,;; + 25 V.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Input Impedance: ;;. 50 kll.
RS449 Interface A6741 ................................................. 5750
Synchronizing Character - Programmable to require any 1
or 2 characters (if 2, they may be different). Defaults to 32 32.
Marker-
User ROM Pack (empty) 020-0607-00 ............................ 580
Mark or Off: - 25 V ';; In .;; + 0.8 V.
End of Frame - Programmable to recognize any of a number
of idle conditions (Mark , Space, Syn) and/or a single character
(defaults to 37, EBCDIC EOT).
Diagnostic ROM Pack 067-0986-00 .............................. 5480
Space or On : + 2 V .;; in .;; + 25 V (Schmitt Input).
Carrying Case 016-0672-00 ..... ....................................... 570
Clock -
Normal, Derived, DTE.
HDLC OPERATION
NRZI Clock -
+ 12 Volt Source - + 12 V :t 1 V (no load). Output impedance ~ 3 kit (each pin).
- 12 V Source - - 12 V :t 1 V (no load). Output impedance
~ 3 kll (each pin).
On or Off.
DISPLAY
Normal, Derived , DTE.
TRIGGERING
Trigger Location in Buffer -
Start, Center, End .
Alphanumeric Display - 16-digit fluorescent display. Each
digit is a 5 x 7 dot matrix 9 mm (0.35 in) high. LED status
indicators for control lines.
Match - Source 01 data being searched lor trigger events:
(NONE , OTE, DC E).
Trigger Sequence - Programmable to require a sequence of
0-25 characters (0-5 if no mask programmed).
Mask Sequence trigger sequence.
Programmable to mask a 0-25 character
Error Conditions - In Async: A parity or frame error. In Sync:
A parity error. In HDLC : A CRC error, an abort sequence, or a
short frame «32 bits).
Marker - Low-to-high or high-to-low transition of marker input can be selected.
Buller Capacity -
2699 characters.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions and weights (approx.)
Dimensions
mm
102
Height
Width
305
Length
306
Weight
Net
kg
5.5
Ib
12
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges to 250 V.
Line Frequency Range -
28
in
4.0
12.1
12.4
115 V -
90 to 132 V. 230 V -
48 to 440 Hz.
180
REFERENCE
TEK GPIB
a simple method of capturing user setups, programs and message strings, particularly those
which involve more than one simple setup or
program entry. This method of development also
enables the user to optimize memory utilization in
the ROM image.
834RDA
The System For Developing Customer User
ROMs For 834 ROM Packs
The 834RDA ROM Development Aid , when used
in conjunction with an 834 Programmable Data
Communications Tester, enables the development of new, custom EPROMs for automating or
preprogramming unique customer applications in
834 ROM Packs.
The 834RDA supports the generation and editing
of user-defined programs, setups and messages.
The 834RDA also aids the user in extending the
BAUD, CODE, IDLE and transfer function DIRECTORY menus by adding new menu entries.
PROM's are developed by building a ROM image
in the 834 system. The 834RDA uses the RS-232
port for external communications. This communi cation port can be interfaced to anyone of the
following devices: (1) An external PROM Programmer: (2) A Printer or Terminal: (3) A unit under
test. The 834RDA and 834 are used with an
external PROM programmer to write and read
PROMs. A terminal or printer may also be used
with the system to produce formatted listings of
the ROM Image contents. With the 834RDA system connected to the unit under test, the ROM
image can be executed to verify operation and
correctness.
A ROM header name is generated from the user's
input. All other header and trailer information are
automatically supplied for individual entires and
for the entire ROM image.
The 834RDA Includes two additional CODE menu
items. The KEYS translation code produces a
one-character representation of each key, and IS
used when editing key sequences. The DISPLAY
translation code makes all display characters of
the 834 available to the user for building new
code translation tables.
Extended instructions that are included in most
other 834RXX ROM Packs are available to the
user in the 834RDA (see page 30).
FUNCTIONS OF THE ROM DEVELOPMENT
AID
Record Mode - The Record Mode of the
834RDA enables the user to record keystrokes. In
this mode, all keystrokes are recorded in the
order in which they are entered until the exit
command is executed. Afterwards , the keystroke
sequences may be edited and non-key functions
(such as mode changes) added. Record mode is
Save-Setup Function - The Save-Setup Function generates a sequence of keystrokes which
will recreate any of the 834 menu listings: Setup
menus, Simulation Programs (including message
strings and parameters), Trigger Strings, Monitor
Programs, Bit Error Rate Test setups and message strings. The Save-Setup function is the
easiest and most precise method of creating and
storing key sequences which contain only a
single menu list.
FORM Entry Functions - New entries may be
added to the ROM image using the form Entry
Functions. The types of entries which can be
added are:
Keystroke Sequences
Character Strings (messages)
Directory Entries
Baud Rates
Sync Idle Characters
Translation Code Tables
Power-Up Key Sequences
Input-Output Functions - The 834RDA system
can accept input from any PROM burner that
supports the TEKHEX format . Error detection
checks are made to assure correct image transfer from the burner to the 834. The ROM image
contains all of the completed entries plus the
appropriate "overhead " data such as header,
trailer, byte counts and checksum information.
Upon completion of new entries or changes to
the ROM image contents, the 834RDA system
can send the completed ROM image back to a
PROM burner.
A listing of the entire ROM image or of individual
entries can be sent to a printer or terminal for
documenting purposes. The printout contains key
sequences (e .g., designation of keys) , or function
definitions (e,g., new baud rate) and other appropriate information as required .
The 834 must be in DTE SIM or DCE SIM mode
when using external equipment. The mode setting should be compatible with the equipment
being used , ie" DCE SIM when Interfacing a
printer, PROM burner or DTE under test: DTE SIM
when interfacing modems or other DCE.
Program Debug Functions - The Program
Debug Functions contained in the 834RDA enable
the user to: Interrupt an executing 834 program:
Display program steps, parameters, and messages: Cause single step program execution: Set
a breakpoint: Change program steps , parameters, and messages.
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE IN
834RDA
Insert program step at location currently shown
on 834 display
Delete program step at location currently shown
on 834 display
Start 834RDA Recording Mode
Stop 834RDA Recording Mode
Save program or setups
Enter RDA Mode at initial location
Setup 834 with RDA setup parameters
Setup 834
parameters
with
normal
834
default
setup
Display RDA Directory
TRANSFER KEY - Enter RDA mode at location
from which last existed.
(Above list does not include functions available in
834).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The 834RDA should be used with an 834 having
level 04 or greater software. This can be verified
by placing the 834 in self-test mode: scrolling
down two levels to the LlST-DSROM display: then
over one entry to LlST-CSROM,,: Press the start
key: the display will read "CSRM[6:PN = {i!836-[84:
or similar. This is the part number of the ROM
containing the pertinent 834 software, and the
last two digits should be 04 or greater.
A level 04 or greater ROM is supplied with each
RDA in case it is needed . If it is not, the ROM can
be erased and used for recording your custom
routines.
If additional information or updates are required ,
contact your local Tektronix Sales or Service
Center.
The 834RDA system is compatible with several
PROM burners. The PROM burners must have an
RS-232 Interface port, and must support Tektronix
Hexadecimal (TEKHEX) transmission formatting .
Some examples of 834RDA compatible PROM
burners are:
Data 1/0 System 19
Data I/O System 17 (with either
TEKHEX transmission formatting , or remote-control setup capability)
PRO-LOG , M980 (requiring an RS-232
adapter)
TEKTRONIX 8550 Microprocessor Development Lab
Order 834RDA ROM Pack Development Aid
ROM Pack ............................................ $1200
Program Enhancement Capability Two
new functions are available for assistance when
creating simulation programs with the 834RDA
systems. One function enables the user to insert
a step in a program: the second will delete a
step, In both cases , the remaining program steps
will be renumbered , and all jump instructions will
be adjusted accordingly.
29
TEK ~2~s
834 ROM Packs
These products are firmware extensions of the
834 Programmable Data Communications Tester.
These ROM Packs (834R01 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 7) all
contain the extended instruction set listed at the
right side of this page. They also include program
debug and edit functions plus the unique capabilities listed for each individual ROM Pack. (Except as noted").
In each ROM Pack a certain number of ROM
spaces are reserved for customer use. Each
ROM space can accommodate a 2k or 4k ROM or
EPROM . The custom ROM area of the ROM Pack
can be programmed using 2716, 2732, 2516 or
2532 single power supply EPROMs or combination of the above.
As new ROM Packs have been introduced and
existing ROM Packs enhanced, the firmware in
the 834 has been expanded. The description for
each ROM Pack includes the 834 firmware revision level required to make available all the
capabilities of the ROM Pack. New 834 's are
shipped with the latest firmware and will support
all the B34 ROM Packs in this catalog.
EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET
1 1 LOAD " PP
Load register with value in parameter PP
12 STORE " PP
Store register value In parameter PP
The software level of older B34s can be easily
verified as follows :
13 COMPARE " PP
Place 834 in Self-Test mode.
Scroll down two levels (press
LIST DSROM display.
14 INCRMNT " PP
j
key twice) to the
Press the ~ key once to obtain the LIST CSROM(8
display.
Press START key.
The display will read CSROMf8= PN=~-XX .
The last two digits indicate the software level of
the B34 Data Communications Tester.
Contact your local Tektronix Sales or Service
Center if additional information or updates are
required .
Compare register value to value In parameter PP
Increment value in parameter PP by one
15 DECRMNT " pp
Decrement value in parameter PP by one
18 DISPLAY " PP
Display value in parameter PP
17 LOAD: mm
Load register with character from message MM
18 STORE: mm
Store register value in message MM
19 DISPLAY: mm
Display message MM
20 CLEAR: mm
Clear message MM
2 1 TRANSFR " pp
Invoke key sequence described by value in parameter PP
22 SETEIA - nn
Set EIA RS-232 control line specified by value NN
23 TESTEIA - nn
Test EIA RS-232 control line specified by value NN
24 TESTFRM - nn
Test for type of frame indicated by value NN
25 TESTKEY - nn
Test for keyboard input indicated by value NN
28 BREAK " pp
Send BREAK for length of time specified in parameter PP
" 27 BCC: mm
Calculate and Insert BCC for message MM
834R01
General Purpose ROM Pack
This ROM Pack simplifies and expands operation
of the 834 Data Communications Tester for use
with asynchronous systems.
The capabilities programmed into the B34R01 are
as follows :
S~ts
"29 BLOCK: mm
Compare frame to message buffer MM and count bit
errors
"30 CLEAR " PP
Set contents of parameter PP to zero
up conditions for asynchronous operation upon Instrument power up.
The capabilities programmed into the 834R02 are
as follOWS :
"31 CALL- ••
The addition of correspondence and baudot
character decode tables.
Monitor Routines:
"32 RETURN If PP
Program execution continues at step number contained In
parameter PP
Additional idle menu selection.
Trigger on NAK.
Split baud rate capability allowing the change
of either the transmit or receive oaud rate.
Trigger on RVI.
Basic printer tasks:
Attribute Exercise Pattern.
Program execution continues at step SS after placing the
number (SS + 1) in the register .
"33 OVERLAY" pp
Invoke transfer function xx, where xx is the contents of
parameter PP
"E" Alignment Pattems.
A colon (:) indicates that the argument to be specified is a
message.
New Line/End-of-Message Pattern.
A pound sign (II') indicates that the argument to be specified is
a parameter.
81 Character Stairstep Pattern.
An equal sign (=) indicates the value to be specified is to be
used in the execution of the instruction.
Repeat mode (with and without trigger).
Control Key Response Test.
An arrow ( .) indicates transfer to another program step.
" Not in 834R01
Correspondence code set-up. (This sets the
834 to the most common asynchronous
setups available).
Calculate BCC (STX to ETX or SOH to ETX).
Baudot code set-up. (This sets up the 834 for
the most common Baudot code set-up.)
Read and Display Terminal Status.
Tester sends a message in lines of increasing length to a DTE to verify that
characters are positioned and printed
properly. Test also evaluates DTR response and X-on, X-off feature .
Block asynchronous setup. (This sets up the
834 to operate in the block-asynchronous
mode.)
Graphic test patterns. This program is useful
for calibrating screen attributes in TEKTRONIX
4010 Series Terminals.
Level 3 or higher 834 software required .
30
Bisynchronous ROM Pack
This ROM Pack extends and simplifies use of the
834 in exercising components of the IBM 3270
Information Display System family and compatible
terminals manufactured by other companies.
"28 PROTOCOL
Enables customized BCC calculation for particular protocols and translation codes
Terminal Startup.
Setup for ASCII Bisync.
Setup for EBCDIC Bisync.
Load Common Protocol Messages and
Parameters.
Level 3 or higher B34 software required.
TEK
TERMINAL SIMULATION - Responds to: Direct
polls; write. erase/write commands ; unsolicited
message commands
ASCU SET-UPS - For communicating to Agent
Set Control Unit Equipment
Level 4 or higher 834 software required .
834R03
Link Test ROM Pack
This ROM Pack affords an extended set of transfer functions especially designed for testing Data
Communication Links. and an extended variety of
test patterns and lengths for Bit Error Rate
testing.
834R03 additions to basic 834:
Extra patterns 63. 2047 . 1:1. 1:0. 0:1. 3:1. 1:3. 7:1.
1:7.
Extra test lengths 10'. 107 .
Alternate block size-511 bits (V.52).
Alternate test-bias distortion .
Alternate termination- minutes.
Split baud rates.
834R05
Extended Instruction Set ROM Pack
This ROM Pack is for users with unique application requirements that cannot be fulfilled by the
standard application programming included in
other ROM Packs. The 834R05 contains the extended instruction set and program debug and
edit functions . The remainder of the ROM Pack is
reserved for user application ROMs.
ORDERING INFORMATION
834R01 General Purpose ROM Pack .. $280
834R02 Bisynchronous ROM Pack ._ ... _ $320
834R03 Link Test ROM Pack ... _._ .. __ ..... _ $370
834R04 HDLC/ X_25 ROM Pack ___ .. _....... $450
834R05 Extended Instruction
Set ROM Pack ................... .................... $240
834R07 PARS/ IPARS ROM Pack .......... $375
The 834R05 reserves room for three user ROMs.
Level 4 or higher 834 software required .
Simulation tests
-Handshake test.
-Ping-pong test (half and full duplex).
-Half duplex BERT (V.52 compatible).
Over and Under baud rate test ± 1. 2.5%.
Block compare simulation instruction.
Level 3 or higher 834 software required .
Additional ROM Packs will become available
through the year to handle a wide variety of
applications.
PARS/ IPARS ROM Pack
This ROM Pack expands the operation of the 834
Data Communications Tester for testing Programmed Airline Reservation Systems.
Included in the ROM Pack are the following :
SABRE Translation
Reversed Hexidecimal Translation
834R04
HDLC/ X.25 ROM Pack
This ROM Pack expands the operational scope of
the 834 Data Communications Tester to include
monitoring and simulating HDLC and X.25 packet
switching networks and their components. It provides the user with frame-by-frame or packet-bypacket analysis of data exchanges and the ability
to construct HDLC-formatted frames under application control.
Included in 834R04 are:
HDLC frame analysis and mnemonic summary.
X.25 packet analysis and mnemonic summary.
HDLC frame assembly instruction (PACKFRM).
Frame parameters available for program-controlled variations.
Level 5 or higher 834 software required .
Inverted Data Capabilities
DIRECT POLL which continually sends a GO
Ahead message and looks for replies after each
poll
768 E·Pattern (64 X 12) for terminal alignment
960 E-Pattern (64 X 15) for terminal alignment
65 Character Print (64 X 12) "Stairstep" pattern
RESET TERMINAL - Sends terminal reset command (3E HEX) to interchange unit to effect
erasure of all terminal screens
TERMINAL ECHO - Polls an interchange and
when text message is received . echoes that
message back to the originating terminal
PRINTER TEST - Tests new line function
3
DATA COMMUNICATION
TEK TESTERS
833
256 Character Buffer
Bit Error Rate Testing
CRC Character Calculation
String Search
Easy to Operate
833 /832 PROM OPTIONS
The 833/832 user PROM feature gives the firstline
service force a pre-programmed series of tests.
This PROM is user-defined for specific applications so the 833/832 can be customized to fit
particular service needs. Use this PROM to perform frequently used standard test sequences,
and then , if necessry, create test sequences
directly in the 833/832 to make more specific
tests and further isolate faults .
833 Oata Communications Tester operates on
RS-232, cCin V.24, or current loop (option)
interfaces. The 833 can MONITOR the OCE and
OTE in synchronous, asynchronous, and HOLC
modes. HOLC data streams can be either standard or NRZI-encoded . The 833 can SIMULATE
the OCE in synchronous and asynchronous
modes and can also calculate and verify CRC-16,
CCln-CRC and LRC-8 block check characters.
For checking modems and phone lines, the 833
features bit error rate testing capabilities.
ECHO and REPEAT modes are also part of the
833's capabilities.
Built in, self diagnostic routines can assure you at
any time that the 833, like the 834 and 832, is
operating properly.
32
Low Cost
256 Character Buffer
Easy to Operate Key Pad
Portabte and Lightweight
The TEKTRONIX 832 Oata Comm Tester is a
portable digital service instrument which can be
used to direct the user to possible problems in
data communications systems. It can monitor,
analyze, test and trouble-shoot data communications interfaces that conform to EIA standard RS232-C, cCin V.24 or current loop (option). The
832 operates as a serial data transmission monitor or as a modem simulator for off-line testing of
data terminal equipment (OTE).
Portable and Lightweight
The TEKTRONIX 833 Oata Communications Tester is a high-performance, first-line service tool that
provides the service technician with the means to
locate problems in a data communications network . The 833 is lightweight (under 5.5 kg/12
pounds), compact, and portable . Keypad entry
and an easy to understand front panel simplify
learning to use the 833. A string search function
permits automatic examination of stored data.
832
Support materials (manuals, user's guides) and
video tape training aids are available for all Oata
Communications Testers.
For more information about how Oata Communications Testers can help you identify problems in
data communications systems, contact your
Tektronix Sales Engineer.
In the U.S., write Tektronix, Inc., U.S. Marketing ,
P.O. Box 1700, Beaverton , OR 97075. In Africa,
Europe, Middle East write Tektronix Europe BY
European Headquarters, Postbox 827, 1180 AV
Amstelveen , The Netherlands. In Asia , Australia ,
Japan , Central and South America write
Tektronix, Inc., Export Marketing, P.O. Box 500,
Beaverton , OR 97077.
In MONITOR mode the 832 reads and selectively
records OTE data and Oata Communications
Equipment (OCE) data, as well as recording the
status of key interface lines.
In SIMULATE mode the 832 simulates the operation of a modem . The 832 can send a message
to the OTE and record its response . This data can
be sent directly from the 832 or can be transmitted upon receipt of an expected trigger from the
OTE .
ECHO mode is the same as SIMULATE, except
the 832 sends back to the OTE (echoes) any
character sent by the OTE .
In REPEAT mode the 832 can send data repeatedly to the OTE, or the 832 can be programmed
to repeat the transmission only upon receipt of an
expected trigger from the OTE.
In each of these modes, the 832 can operate at
data rates from 50 to 9600 baud; full or half
duplex; synchronously or asynchronously; with
odd, even or no parity; and with characters from 5
to 8 bits long. HOLC and current loop options are
available.
TEK
Other
833/832 CHARACTERISTICS
Pin 1 Ground -
ELECTRICAL
Data Transm i ss i on
asynchronous.
Ti m i ng
Communications Mode -
-
Synchronous
and
Half- or lull- 300 ns. Channel to chan·
nel delay mismatch : < 100% of setting,
Ma. Sale Input Voltage kHz)
± 500 V (peak) ACV/DCV «1
Resistance
200 I!, 2 kll , 20 kll, 200 kll, 2 MI1, 20 MI1, and 50
PEAK VOLTS
Range -
± 30V,
Ranges MHz.
100 kHz (1 Hz resolution), 1 MHz , 10 MHz, and 35
Accuracy -
± 0.005% of reading ± 1 count.
TIME MEASUREMENTS
2 V and 20 V:
:!: 0.5% or reading ::!: 4 counts. 40 Hz to 1 kHz.
! 2"10 of reading :!: 4 coun ts, 1 kHz to 25 kHz.
> 9% lull scale.
(Penod, pulse Width, translhon time, time interval, and coincidence time,)
Ranges and 10 s,
200 V and 350 V:
i 0.5% of reading ± 4 counts, 40 Hz to 1 kHz.
1 ms (IOns resolutIOn) , 10 ms, lOOms, 1 s,
Minimum Time Interval -
Ex tended temperature range : add :!: 0.2%.
Accuracy -
13
COUNTING
2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 500 V.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Range -
0 to 99,999.
Max Input Frequency tlon counting).
35 MHz (except 17,5 MHz for transi.
Accuracy - i 1 count , ± A Input event or transition frequen.
cy multiplied by lhe Time Interval Trigger Error.
LINE VOLTAGE
90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V.
Range TEMPERATURE
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Operating : + 15·C to + 40 · C.
Altitude -
Operating: to 10,000 ft . Nonoperating: to 35,000 ft.
Vibration - Operating : 15 minutes along each of the 3 major
axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz In 1 minute cycles. After cycle vibration in each
axis , hold frequency steady at 55 Hz for 10 minutes. All major
resonances must be above 55 Hz,
Humidity - To 900/0 at 30· C Tektronix Test Method Nl 90%
relative humidity at 30'C for 4 hours,
EMC - Reference Mil Standard 461 A-462 susceptibility as
specified. Conducted emission, relax 10 d B. Radiated emis·
sion, relax 15 dB < 100 MHz and relax 25 dB ;;. 100 MHz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Three slQnal probes (010.0280·00), two DMM probes (012.
0732.00),
ORDERING INFORMATION
851 Digital Tester ................................ $2920
Input Freq Range -
_ 55 · to + 150· C.
INSTRUMENT OPTION
0 to 100%.
Min Pulse Width (HI and LO portions) -
(3 probes : one for each channel A, B, C.)
10 Mil and
~
12 pF.
± 500 V at probe tiP « 50 kHz).
50 ns.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
READOUT
Type -
INPUTS
Option 01 (with temperature probe) .................... Add 5160
40 Hz to 10 MHz.
Accuracy - :!: 2· C (0,01· resolution) . Extended temperature
range : add ! PC .
Ma. Sale Input Voltage -
57 watts max.
DUTY FACTOR
± 3% of reading .
Resistance and Capacitance -
90 to 132 V or 180 to 250 V.
48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Ambient Temperature -
(Totalize, frequency ratio , events count, and transitions count.)
Accuracy 2 V, 20 V and 200 V: ± 0.1% of reading ± 3 counts.
500 V : :!: 0.15% of reading ± 3 counts.
Extended temperature range : add ± 0.05%.
18
Shock - Two shocks at 30 g 's, 1/2 sine, 11 ms duration, each
direc1lon along each major axis. Total of 12 shocks.
20 ns.
! 0.005% of reading ± 1 count :!: Trigger Error.
DC VOLTS
Range -
Ib
6
31
In
13
12
7
Nonoperating : - 40·C to + 75·C. Extended operating range :
+ 5· C to + 50· C.
FREQUENCY
2 V, 20 V, 200 V, and 350 V.
Accuracy -
kg
Power Consumption -
Accuracy -
Range -
Weight
Net
Frequency -
Accuracy - ± 2% of reading :!: 3% of p-p signal ± 90 mV.
Max time between recurrent peaks, 25 ms. Peak amplitude
must be maintained for at least 25 ns. Extended temperature
range : add ± 1% of reading ± 1% of p-p signal ± 10 mV.
AC VOLTS
(Average responding RMS calibrated for slnewave,)
Ranges -
em
33
Line Voltage Range -
Resistance and Capacitance - 10 MI1 ± 1% and ~ 100 pF.
Red to black terminal. (Volts only.)
Ranges -
Dimension. (app rox)
Width
Height
Depth
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE
(ACV. DCV , II)
Ranges Mil,
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Input A LO + 0.7 V : HI
Input Filter (Narrow pulse rejection) pulse relection - 20 MHz.
INPUTS
Threshold Lock Indicator (LO > HI) - Red LED Indicates
when CH A LO and HI thresholds are locked together (LO
threshold setting is higher than the HI setting).
5 digits, fully buffered 7 segment, 0.5 in LEOs.
Polarity Indication readings .
Temperature Probe Rain Jacket -
010· 6430·00 .... ,............ ,.....,..... 5180
016·0639.()() .......... ,...... ,........ ,.... ,........... 51S
+ lor positive readings , - for negatIVe
Overrange Indication -
Display flashes ,
35
TEK
SEMICONDUCTOR
TEST SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
S-3275 Automated
Semiconductor Test System .................
...
S-3250 Automated
......
Semiconductor Test System
S-3270 Automated
Semiconductor Test System ..... .. .. .. .. . ...........
S-3280 Automated Eel Test System .
37
38
39
40
Need to test complex
devices?
Tektronix has the solution.
At Tektronix, we 've looked to the future to
see what test problems the new device
technology will create. Problems like increased complexity, faster speeds and
higher pin count are only a few which continue to shape the rapidly changing device
technologies. We 've created a complete
line of automated test systems to be ready
to solve the problems of today ... and
tomorrow.
The 5·3200 Series can solve
your device testing problems
Tektronix is ready now to proVide the expertise, people, systems and software to tackle
your existing test problems as well as the
future problems you 'll encounter. New or unusual device parameters do not present an
impossible task. The versatility that's built
into every S-32OO system is based upon
field proven hardware and software that
gets the job done.
Only one software language
to learn ...
TEKTEST
Each system uses the same highly advanced software ... TEKTEST. Using
TEKTEST, the test engineer can easily and
quickly generate, edit, and debug programs
for device testing or characterization and
then transfer these programs from one system to the other. And , using our foregroundbackground capability, up to four users can
36
be programming or compiling data in the
background while testing occurs uninterrupted in the foreground . Also , Terminal
Control Mode, our powerful debug tool ,
gives the test engineer total control of the
test problem . Ease of operation simplifies
testing . And , all the systems feature highly
sophisticated data reduction and graphics,
making the test results manageable and
easily understood.
New devices present new challenges
New devices such as codecs, linears, and
the ever-changing digital ICs present contin ual evolving complexity in device testing .
And , the increasing amount of both analog
and digital on the same chip continues to
push technology. Tektronix offers the analog and digital capability to meet these
unique test requirements . In fact , captive
manufacturers of devices buy Tektronix systems for this advantage . Tektronix, also a
captive device manufacturer, has been testing their own hybrids over the years, and
this expertise provides an in'depth under·
standing in device testing.
At Tektronix , we 've built on our past exper·
ience and knowledge about device testing
to create a total , compatible line of LSIIVLSI
test systems that can help solve your test
problems - now and in the future.
TEK
S-3275.
TEKTEST
nSuperior
hardware and
software to meet
the challenge of
LSI/VLSI memory
device
technology"
Independent I/O Control on a Cycle-by-cycle
Basis at Each Pin
16 Programmable Driver/compare Phases
16 Programmable Timing Sets Each Available on a Cycle-by-cycle Basis (Split-cycle)
Full Functional Data (Force, Inhibit, Compare, Mask) to all Pin Electronics Cards at 20
MHz Test Speed
Versatile Driver Formats
Test Devices with Up to 128 Pins
Single-shot Timing
Advanced Graphics and Data Reduction
Uses TEKTEST III ~ , a Device-oriented Test
Language with Networking Capability
Up to 64 070 Pin Electronic s Card s
Each with:
Independent I and 0 Pins
Independent drive and compare levels
4 k shift register pattem memory
Dc and 50 II access to I and/or 0
Independent I/O switching control
16 Phlse Clock Generator
125 ps resolutIOn on clock pulse width and edges
Cycle period - 500 Hz to 20 MHz in 2 ranges
Cycles may be generated In a free-running mode or by external
synchronization to the OUT, and the mode may be switched on
a cycle-by-cycle basis by the Pallern Controller
Clock Phases In any given set may be programmed to be always on or always of(
Up to 20 MHz maximum clock rate
Memory Pattern Processor
Pattern Sequencing
Utilizes loops, subroutines, and list pointers to control program flow
Branches on condition and interrupts
Subroutines and loops with single or multiple pattern vectors may be nested up to 15 deep
Interrupts from ERROR conditions , a programmed time interval or CYCLE count , and the system controller may be
utilIZed to modify program flow
Algorithmic Pattern Generator
Separate, but identical , X and Y address generators each 12 bits wide
Each generator contains a 16 word register file piUS 12 bit
maximum address . minimum address, and base address
registers
The address generator output is computed in an ALU, using an instruction word as operands
X and Y addresses may be scrambled by the contents of
the Topological Memory (12 bits by 4k words)
The data generator produces 16 FORCE and 16 COMPARE bits
A control (l-axis) generator is used to provide forcing data
for R/W , chip selects, etc.
Normal stored pattern memory data or APG data may be
selected each cycle at full clock rate
NetWOrking, Operating System Software
Enables multiple test systems to communicate with a host
computer , intermediate processor, or among themselves ;
Allows more efficient operation of the test systems due to the
sharing of resources ; and
PrOVides error.free transfer of data for storage or processing.
Dc Paramatric Stimulus System
Force VOltage 0 to ± 100 V in 10 mV increments
OptIOnal force voltage 0 to ± 10 V in 1 mV increments
6 OUT power supplies with programmable current limit and
KelVin sensing
Force current from 0 to ± 200 rnA in 1 .A Increments
Optional force current ± 1 nA full scale
Full User Support Program
VERDICT system diagnostic and verification package
RECAL computer guided system recalibration package
Spares kits for system items and options
90 days on-site warranty (parts and labor)
Applications training credits
Maintenance training credits
Dc Parametric Measurement System
DifferentlBl or single ended voltage measurements
Measure VOltage range from ± 100 mV full scale to ± 100 V full
scale
Measure current range from ± 100 nA Full scale to ± 450 rnA
full scale.
Optional current measurement range from ± 100 pA to ± 100
nA full scale
Optional Waveform Digitizer
2 channels simultaneously digitized
2 mV per division to 25 V per division
100 ps per division to 500 ms per division
Tnggerable with system clock or external instruments
Software for signal averaging, pulse analysis , Fast Fourier
Transform. harmonic distortion. etc.
Vertical and horizontal internal references
Single -Shot Time Measurement System
Triggerable to allow functional preconditioning
Uses functional comparators for strobing and level detection
50 ps resolution (100 ns range)
50 II Switching Matrix
4 channels standard
High fidelity analog stimulus path to OUT
High fidelity analog measurement path from OUT, direct or
buffered
Foreground/Background Disk Operating System
Floating point hardware for calculating speed
Multi-user environment for program development and data
analysis
TEKTEST III high level software language
Interactive Program Debugging Mode (PDM)
Terminal Control Mode (TCM)
Graphics data capability in user programs
Complete utility program library
Optional Instrumentation
IEEE-488 bus interface
Digital voltmeters
Digital counters
Pulse generators
Waveform synthesizers
37
TEK SEMICONDUCTOR
TEST SYSTEMS
5-3250
TEKTEST
UFast,
efficient,
accurate,
production
test system."
Interfaces with Popular Handlers and
Probers
20 MHz Clock Rate
High Through-put
Minimum Operator Interface
Fast Change-over
Uses TEKTEST III '
Easy to Program and Edit
Maximum System Run-time, Since Programming can Occur During Testing.
Up to 64 070 Pin Electronics Cards
Each with :
Independent I and
pins
Independent dnve and compare levels
4 k shift register pattern memory
Dc and 50 II access to I and/or
Independent I/O switching oontrol
a
a
7 Phase Clock Generator
Free running or externally synchronized modes
1 ns positioning resolution of all edges
Up to 20 MHz maximum clock rate
Optional 14 phase clock
Dc Parametric Stimulus System
Force voltage to :!: 100 V in 10 mV increments
Optional force voltage to :!: 10 V in 1 mV increments
6 OUT power supplies with programmable current limit and
KelVIn sensing
Force current and 0 to ::!:. 200 rnA in 1 IJ.A increments
Optional force current :!: 1 nA lull scale
a
a
50 II Switching Matri.
2 channels standard , 4 channels optional
H'9h fidelity analog stimulus path to OUT
High fidelity analog measurement path from OUT, direct or
buffered
Dc Parametric Measurement System
Differential or single-ended voltage measurements
Measure voltage range from ± 100 mV full scale to ± 100 V full
scale
Measure current range from ± 100 nA full scale to ± 450 mA
full scale
Optional current measurement range from ± 100 pA to ± 100
nA full scale
38
Foreground /Background Disk Operating System
Floating point hardware for calculating speed
Multi-user enVIronment for program development and data
analysis
TEKTEST III High level software language
Interactive Program Debugging Mode (PDM)
Terminal Control Mode (TCM)
Graphics data capability In user programs
Complete utility program library
Full User Support Program
VERDICT system diagnostic and verilication package
RECAL computer gUided system recalibration package
Spares kits for system items and options
90 days on-site warranty (parts and labor)
Applications training
Maintenance traIning
Optional Single-Shot Time Measurement System
Tnggerable to allow functional preconditioning
Uses functional comparators for strobing and level detection
50 ps resolution (100 ns range)
Optional PaUern Random Access Memory (PRAM)
1 k or 4 k memory depth
32 bits control and 64 bits pattern data
Match mode (start when ready)
Pattern source selection (S/R or PRAM) on-the-fly
Loop and subroutine capability for pattern compression
Optional Instrumentation
IEEE Bus Inlerface
Digital voltmeters
DIgItal counters
Pulse generators
Waveform synthesIZers
Optional Wavelorm Digitizer
2 channels simultaneously digitized
2 mV per dIvision to 25 V per division
tOO ps per divIsion to 500 ms per division
Tnggerable with system clock or external instruments
Software for Signal averaging. pulse analysis. Fast
Founer Transform , harmonic dIstortion, etc.
Vertical and honzontal Internal references
Optional Memory PaUem Generator
Independent X and Y address generators. up to 12 bits each
Data generator up to 32 bits
Algorithmically programmed
Stores error addresses as test proceeds at clock rate
TEK
TEKTEST
S-3270
Field proven
device
characterization/
production
test system."
U
Uninterrupted Error Storage at 20 MHz
Multiple Pattern Sources
Versatile Driver Formats
14 Programmable Channels of Timing
Information
Test Devices with Up to 128 Pins
Single-shot Timing
Advanced Graphics and Data Reduction
Uses TEKTEST III >. a Device-oriented
Test Language
Easy to Program and Edit
True Foreground /Background Timesharing
Up to 64 070 Pin Electronics Cards
Each wIth :
Independent I and 0 PIns
Independent dnve and compare levels
4 k shllt regIster pattern memory
Dc and 50 \I access to I and/or 0
Independent I/O sWItchIng control
14 Phase Clock Generator
Free runmng or externally synchrOnized modes
t ns positIoning of all edges
Up to 20 MHz maximum clock rate
Pattern Random Access Memory (PRAM)
1 k memory depth (4 k optional)
32 bits control and 64 bits patlern data
Match mode (start when ready)
Pattern source selection (S/R or PRAM) on-the-fly
Loop and subroutine capability for pallem compression
Dc Parametric Stimutus System
Force voltage 0 to
~
100 V in 10 mV increments
OpllOnal force voltage 0 to ± 10 V in 1 mV increments
6 OUT power supplies with programmable current limit and
KelVin sensing
Force current from 0 to ± 200 mA in 1 ~A increments
Optional force current ± 1 nA full scale
Dc Parametric Measurement System
Differential or Single ended voltage measurements
Measure voltage range from ± 100 mV full scale to ± 100 V full
scale
Measure current range from ± 100 nA full scale to ± 450 rnA
full scale
OpllOnal current measurement range from ± 100 pA to ± 100
nA full scale
Single-Shot Time Measurement System
Tnggerable to allow functional preconditioning
Uses functional comparators for strobing and level detection
50 ps resolution (100 ns range)
50 II Switching Matrix
4 channels standard
High lIdelity analog sllmulus path to OUT
H'9h fidelity analog measurement path from OUT. direct or
buttered
Foreground /Background Disk Operating System
Floating point hardware for calculating speed
Multi-user environment for program development and data
analYSIS
TEKTEST III high level software language
InteractIVe Program Debugging Mode (PDM)
Terminal Control Mode (TCM)
GraphiCS data capability In user programs
Complete utility program library
Full User Support Program
VERDICT system diagnostic and verification package
RECAL computer guided system recalibration package
Spares kits for system Items and options
90 days on-site warranty (parts and labor)
Appllcallons training credits
Maintenance training credits
Optional Waveform Digitizer
2 channels Simultaneously digitized
2 mV per diVision to 25 V per diVision
100 ps per diVISion to 500 ms per diVision
Tnggerable With system clock or external instruments
Software for signal averaging. pulse analysis. Fast Fourier
Transform , harmonic distortion, etc.
VertIcal and honzontal internal references
Optional Memory Pattern Generator
Independent X and Y address generators. up to 12 bits each
Data generator up to 32 bits
AlgOrithmically programmed
Stores error addresses as test proceeds at clock rate
Option at tnstrumentation
IEEE-488 bus Interlace
Digital voltmeters
Digital counters
Pulse generators
Waveform syntheSIzers
39
TEST SYSTEMS
TEK SEMICONDUCTOR
TEKTEST
S-3280
nUltra
high-speed
logic device
testing with
superb
accuracy. "
100 k ECl Testing
Precision Fixturing
Sub-nanosecond Measurements
Full Graphics and Data Reduction Package
High Speed Drivers
Sampling for Waveform Analysis
Uses TEKTEST III
Simple to Program and Edit
Tests High Speed Logic
CML Capability
TYPICAL DRIVER WAVEFORM
1/
0-80 Pin Electronics
>
r
'-
\
=s
......
I
(leading Edge)
il
>
Dc Parametric Stimulus System
Force voltage from 0 V to ± 40 V in 10 mV steps
Force voltage from 0 V to ± to V in 1 mV steps
6 OUT high resolution power supplies with programmable current limit and Kelvin sensing
Force current 0 A to ± 200 mA in 1 ~A steps
Optional CF-1 force current from 0 A to 200 ~A; 0 .05%
resolution
E
o
Dc Parametric Measurement System
o
N
\/
J..
ge
T a l l t Ei
)
1 ns/div
Up to 64 080 Pin Electronics Cards
Each with :
Sub-nanosecond driver
High accuracy 50 II comparators
Independent drive and compare levels
4 k local memory pattern
Dc and 50 II access to I and/or
Independent I/O switching control
a
7 Phase Clock Generator
Free running or externally synchronized modes
1 ns resolution 01 all edges
Up to 20 MHz maximum clock rate
Pattern Random Access Memory (PRAM)
1 k memory depth ( 4 k optional)
32 bits con trol and 64 bits pattern data
Match mode (start when ready)
Pattern source selection (local memory or PRAM) on-the-fly
Loop and subroutine capability for pattern compression
40
Differential or single ended voltage measurements
Measure voltage range from ± 200 mV full scale to ± 40 V full
scale
Measure current range from ± 100 nA full scale to ± 450 mA
full scale
Optional current measurement range from ± 100 pA to ± 100
nA full scale
Single-Shot Time Measurement System
Trlggerable to allow functional preconditioning
Uses functional comparators for strobing and level detection
50 ps resolution 11 00 ns range)
SO II Switch ing Matrix
2 channels for external access to/from each OUT pin under
programmable con trol
High f.delity analog stimulus path to OUT
H.gh fidelity analog measurement path from OUT
Foreground/ Background Disk Operating System
TEKTEST III high level software language
Multi-user environment for program development and data
analys.s
Interact.ve Program Debugging Mode (PDM)
Terminal Control Mode (TCM)
Floating point hardware for calculating speed
Graphics data capability in user programs
Complete ut.lity program library
.
Full User Support Program
VERDICT system diagnostic verification package
RECAL computer gu.ded system recalibration package
Spares parts kits available for system items and options
90 days on-site warranty (parts and labor)
Applications training
Maintenance training
Optional Waveform Digitizer
2 channels simultaneously digitiZed
2 mV per division to 200 mV per division
100 ps per d.vision to 500 ms per division
Trtggerable from system clock or external instruments
Software for signal averaging, pulse analysis, Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), harmonic distortion , etc.
Vertical and horizontal internal references
Optional Memory Pattern Generator
Independent X and Y address generators, up to 12 bits each
Data generator up to 32 bits
Algortthmlcally programmed
Stores error addresses as test proceeds at clock rate
Optional Instrumentation
IEEE-488 bus interface
Pulse generators
Digital voltmeters
Waveform synthesizers
Digital counters
100 k Series ECl Filturing
Accurate measurements on 100 k ECL devices
Standard ECl Filturing
Individually wired for specific device type
Accepts Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) sockets
Optional SO II Prober Interface
Accurate measurement on EeL devices at wafer level
50 \I impedance maintained up to prober pins
Optional Current Mode Logic (CMl) Test Capability
TEK
Training & Support
Graphics
When you purchase your S-32OO system, we'll
train your test engineers for you. We'll give you
plenty of documentation to give your engineers
continuous support. We 'll show them how to get
the most out of this advanced software system ,
and we 'll show them how to save time on the
system . When future testing problems get really
tough-and they will-you'll have engineers who
know how to cut your test time by using the
S-3200 systems .
... ..... ....
. 'TS
0."""
L.~u...t.I( .""~
"I~wu.t: ·
UWVIIILt,I(
KIQ4\a..t.I( _
-,...~
TeklronlX offers basIc and advanced Iraining classes In both
programming and maintenance 01 Ihe S-3200 Series of Semiconductor Test Systems , For further training Information , contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of the TektroniX
TO"'''
The language of these systems is TEKTEST III. It's
a device-oriented language, and is easy to read
and understand since it's very close to English.
The architecture of the system was designed so
that programming, editing and debugging all use
TEKTEST III. When making corrections in a program, there is no need to use a "bridge" language
between the source language and the machine
language. Everything is written in TEKTEST III.
This capability, which we call Terminal Control
Mode, gives the test engineer total control of the
program. When editing a program during the test,
the test engineer can hold power to the device,
make the change, and continue the test . There 's
no need to re-sequence the program. And , since
Customer Training Catalog on the return card .
the systems also feature true foreground/backgound timesharing , up to four test engineers can
be uSing terminals that can be interfaced to the
system, and the system will continue to test
devices without any through-put loss_ Terminal
Control Mode and true foreground/background
make the S-3200s simple and fast to program and
edit.
The more complex a device, the more information
you need about that device. But with complexity
can come confusion ... unless your test system
makes the picture clearer.
The S-32OO Series systems provides you with the
graphics capability to reduce testing data to
manageable , usable form .
41
SEMICONDUCTOR
SYSTEMS
TEK TEST
Serious
about reliability?
Then you need
to know about
Tektronix
test systems.
At Tektronix , new product designers team up with
specialists in IC technology and testing known as
Component Evaluation Engineers. Using their
combined expertise, the team compiles informahon on the devices that seem to fit the application and then narrow the list to a few good
candidates. Now, Component Evaluation Engineers begin their most important function ; thoroughly evaluating the performance and reliability
of each candidate device.
The evaluation process begins by investigating
those device parameters and functions most
critical to the intended application. This sometimes leads to a complete device characterization, a process that requires exhaustive testing.
When an IC is characterized, every measurable
parameter and function is tested, actual limits of
performance are determined , and then device
behaviour is documented for all the various sets
of input conditions in all their combinations and
permutations. That 's a lot of testing and it can
quickly build mountains of test data. A system
that performs accurate and reliable tests is not
enough. The Component Evaluation Engineer
must also have the tools to reduce the data mass
Into a usable form . For device characterization ,
the engineer needs a combination general purpose IC test system and a data processing
system - a totally integrated package that both
acquires and processes test and measurement
data.
Tektronix Component Evaluation Engineers find
all the qualities described above in TEKTRONIX
S-3200 Series semiconductor test systems. These
systems are used for device characterization,
field failure analysis, Ie process evaluation, and
incoming inspection.
Tektronix LSIIVLSI test systems are used by the
world 's leading telecommunications companies,
aerospace contractors, computer manufacturers,
semiconductor manufacturers , and by the military. Serious about reliability? Then you should
know about Tektronix test systems.
For more information about the S-3200
semiconductor test systems, contact the Test
Systems Specialists located in the following
offices:
Portland , OR
Los Angeles , CA
Boston, MA
Philadelphia, PA
Woodbridge, NJ
SI. Paul , MN
Tektronix U.K., Ltd.
Harpenden, England
Tektronix
Orsay, France
Tektronix AB
Solna, Sweden
Tektronix Holland N.,V.
Badhoevedorp, The Netherlands
Tektronix GmbH.
Koln , Germany
Tektronix SpA
Milano, Italy
Tektronix International A.G.
Zug, Switzerland
SonyfTektronix Corporation
Tokyo, Japan
Tektronix Canada Inc.
Montreal , Canada
Tektronix Europe B.v.
Amstelveen , The Netherlands
42
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
CONTENTS
Intro to Logic Analysis ....................................
OAS Products ...............................
..........
308 Oata Analyzer .......
...........
70 02 Logic Analyzer
...
Personality Modules
............................. ...
.............................
7001 Logic Analyzer
Logic Analyzer Accessories ..................... .......
44
47
56
58
60
64
66
DAS 9100
Digital AnalYSis System
132 state-of-the-art logic analyzers in
one. Now you can have a single logic analysis system that is configurable, affordable
and easy-to-use. The new DAS 9100 contains your selected configuration of acquisition and pattern generation modules, allowing you up to 104 input channels, up to 80
pattern generation channels, up to 330
MHz synchronous acquisition and up to 660
MHz asynchronous acquisition!
Tektronix logic analyzers provide you with
the unprecedented speed and versatity of
the DAS 9100, the microprocessor analysis
capability of the 7002 and a combination of
features in the portable 308 Data Analyzer.
You'll find that a Tektronix logic analyzer
can save you time and money.
Companion instruments include the 7011
Digital Delay for 7000 Series Oscilloscopes
(page 195), the DO 501 Digital Delay and
WR 501 Word Recognizer for TM 500 Series (page 267), and the A6701 18-Bit Word
Recognizer (page 348) .
43
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
-
To
Circuit
Under
Test
REFERENCE
Pattern
Generator
-
Instrument Control
1
From
Circuit
Under
Test
I
)
Input
r---
Real-Time
Preprocessing
Memory
r---
Display
Clocking and
Triggering
Figure 1. Logic Analyzer Block Diagram
Tektronix offers a broad range of logic analyzers,
for use in design, manufacturing and service. This
section of the catalog includes descriptions of
these products and appropriate accessories.
Although the products differ somewhat, depending upon the specific applications for which they
were designed, there are some basic architectural components of logic analysis described below.
Also we have provided a selection guide to help
you locate the best set of features for your
specific application.
WHY LOGIC ANALYZERS?
As electronic designers have moved from primarIly analog designs to circuit designs with many
digital Signals, the reqUirements for test and
measurement eqUipment have also changed For
digital CirCUitS the logic analyzer has assumed a
role similar to that of the OSCilloscope for analog
circuits. Like the scope It IS a highly fleXible
Instrument which can be connected to many
different CIrCUit pOints relatively eaSily, and It
prOVides a clear Visual display for the user
Logic analyzers come In a variety of sizes and
shapes to fulfill different reqUirements . There are
portable, light-weight logic analyzers for field
service and larger, more versatile benchtop Units
for use In laboratories and manufactUring areas.
The logiC analyzer IS continUing to evolve as new
applications are Identified and new features are
reqUIred As you can see from reviewing the
Tektronix logiC analyzer deSCriptions , we are com mitted to prOViding you outstanding value in the
form of performance today and flexibility for the
future
44
ARCHITECTURE OF LOGIC ANALYZERS
Now let's look at the basic parts of a logic
analyzer, as shown in figure 1. There are six main
sections in conventional analyzers: input, realtime preprocessing , memory, clocking and triggering, display, and control. In the new DAS 9100
Tektronix has introduced a seventh basic section:
pattern generation. Let's consider the requirements of each section.
Input
Today logiC analyzers have from 8 to more than
100 parallel inputs. Typically the inputs are
grouped in 8 or 16 channels per probe. The
threshold voltage for the inputs is variable to
allow for the wide variety of logic devices available. Each pod also includes an external clock
input andl or a qualifier input , as well as ground
reference lines.
Because of the special needs for various signal
types, a variety of probe and accessory hardware
has been developed. For very high speed signals,
short leads are connected to hybrid input circuits
for maximum signal fidelity . To analyze complex
parts such as microprocessors, personality modules monitor the device and decode the binary
patterns into meaningful mnemonics.
Real-Time Preprocessing
Because of the large amount of data in a digital
system it is often necessary to preprocess the
data. Clock qualification is the process of sorting
data In real time based on the state of a control
signal. Clock qualification sorts the data according to the time relationships to other bus signals.
Data qualification is the process of sorting the
data in real time based on the content of the
data. Clock and data qualification increase the
effective size of the acquisition memory and
reduce analysis time. Personality modules often
contain hardware to synthesize clocks, predict
instruction fetches and decode control lines as
well.
Memory
LogiC analyzers may have two separate memories. The acquisition memory stores the data
acquired from the circuit under test. Data IS
acquired and loaded into memory continuously,
writing over previous data until a trigger event
terminates the acquisition .
Reference memory is used to store a pattern for
comparison. Such a pattern could either be acquired from a circuit operating properly or from an
off-line source such as a simulator. When the
contents of the acquisition memory are compared
with the contents of reference memory, the differences are highlighted to enable the operator to
see the errors easily.
TEK
Clocking And Triggering
The clocking and triggering area contains word
recognizers and qualifiers which define the trigger event. The trigger event stops the data acquisition and serves as a reference point in the
acquired data. This part of the analyzer also contains circuitry to clock the data acquisition . In
logic analyzer terminology there are two modes
of clocking: synchronous and asynchronous. In
synchronous mode the analyzer is clocked from
the circuit under test. Since in most digital systems today events in the circuit are driven by a
system clock, the logic analyzer must also be
able to use the system clock in order to know
when to detect events. In asynchronous mode
the analyzer clock is provided by the analyzer,
so there is no synchronization (except the trigger
event) with the circuit under test. Asynchronous
clocking allows the logic analyzer to sample the
data at faster rates than the system data rate
and thereby provide time resolution of events occurring faster than the system clock rate. Synchronous clocking is usually used for watching
state flow related to software . Asynchronous
clocking is usually used to acquire hardware tim ing information .
There are four types of word recognition : simple,
sequential, nested, and non-sequential.
Simple word recognition is the ability to recognize a single event defined by a word made up
of selected input channels. For example, a 64
channel logic analyzer can have a word
recognizer register of up to 64 bits which describe an event.
Sequential word recognition is the natural extension of simple word recognition. Simple events
are combined sequentially to define a compound
event. For example, if you expect events A, B,
and C to occur in that order, you can set the
trigger to look for a valid output from word
recognizer A, followed by a valid output from
word recognizer B, followed by a valid output
from word recognizer C to trigger and end the
acquisition. The trigger will occur only after all 3
events have occurred in the proper order.
Nested word recognition introduces the ability to
monitor conditional branching . For example ,
event A might occur, followed by event B, followed by either event C or event D. Program
flow might often include events A and B, with
the choice between C and 0 determining the
next sequence of events. The branching must
be monitored , since the flow of the program depends on it .
Non-sequential word recognition is similar to sequential and nested word recognition except
that the trigger can follow a software algorithm
where the next event depends upon the result of
a test. For example, a command parsing algorithm is non-sequential.
Event counters and delay timers increase the
versatility of the logic analyzer trigger. An event
counter counts the number of occurrences of an
event. Using the event counter, you instruct the
logic analyzer to trigger only after the nth occurrence of the event. A delay timer works similarly,
except that the trigger is delayed a given length
of time rather than waiting for the nth event.
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
Trigger arming allows a logic analyzer to acquire
data based on two different clocks. One section
of the analyzer monitors data lines at the system
clock rate until a trigger event is found . It then
arms another section of the analyzer running at a
high asynchronous clock rate to allow it to trigger and acquire high speed timing information.
The event which triggers it could be a trigger
event detected Independently or it could be a
programmed delay from the arming signal , or a
combination of both.
An example of arming is when you want to investigate high speed hardware phenomena such as
control pulses to a microprocessor but you want
to monitor address lines to determine when to
investigate the control lines. When the analyzer
section monitoring the address lines at slower
speed finds the proper trigger event , it enables
the other analyzer section running at higher
speed to take a high-resoolution look at the control lines. Note that the analyzer section monitoring the address lines must be clocked synchronously , while the other section is clocked
asynchronously.
Display
If you think for a moment about how much data
you can acquire with a logic analyzer, you will
quickly realize that it is extremely important to
manipulate and display the data carefully to be
able to find the significant pOints quickly and reliably. Tektronix logic analyzers give you considerable flexibility, so that you can see the data you
need the way you want to see it.
There are three basic types of output display:
timing diagram , state table, and mnemonic disassembly . For the timing diagram the data
stored in memory are used to construct a multitrace waveform drawing which looks a lot like a
multi-channel display on an oscilloscope. The
timing diagram is usually the preferred method
to observe data acquired asynchronously at high
speeds. It helps the user locate hardware faults.
The state table allows the user to observe data
describing the state of the circuit under test in
tabular form . It is the preferred output for data
acquired synchronously. The data is much more
readable if it can be grouped into fields and displayed in octal or hexadecimal format, as well as
in binary. Also the ability to group the data in
fields relating to the circuit under test rather than
to the logic analyzer probes makes it easier to
understand what is really happening.
Mnemonic disassembly allows the user to observe the data in the state table in much more
readable form . For example , it is much easier to
understand the event flow of a microprocessor
when the instruction codes are shown rather
than the numerical machine code. That is also
true for messages in a character code such as
ASCII and for transactions on a bus such as the
GPIB. Some mnemonic disassembly tables may
be built into the hardware of the logic analyzer
as you purchase it, but it is also helpful if you
can define your own mnemonics.
Instrument Control
As you can appreciate from the descriptions
above, the logic analyzer offers you great flexibility. To use this flexibility you must set up the instrument to acquire data in the manner you desire and you must be able to display it the way
you want. To do all this with conventional knobs
and switches would be very cumbersome. So
Tektronix has proVided the ability to deal with
each logic analyzer in the optimum way for the
application. Since the 7001 is intended for hardware oriented people, it looks more like a hardware controlled box. The 7002 programming is
optimized to allow you to follow the program flow
of a microprocessor. Through extensive use of
menus the DAS 9100 allows you to specify a
large number of parameters quickly and easily.
The 308 is four instruments in one, compact in
size, useful in both design and service .
An important aspect of control of logic analyzers
is the interface to external controllers and
peripherals . The user of instrumentation can
save significant time as intelligent instruments
talk to each other to speed up the testing process. Also, the ability to work with controllers allows the same instrument to be used in both design and manufacturing .
Pattern Generation
The traditional logic analyzer observes the circuit
under test. Obviously, to observe the circuit and
acquire meaningful data, something meaningful
must be happening at the circuit. In the past the
user has had to set up a separate stimulus instrument to drive the circuit in some known way
in order to collect meaningful data. Often a lot of
effort and time is expended in developing a suitable fixture . This is true especially during the early stages of design when the circuit to be tested
cannot be tested in the environment of other
known good circuitry.
The DAS 9100 is the first logic analyzer to have
both stimulation and observation capability in the
same instrument. It saves significant time for the
designer, since he can set up a program to stimulate his circuit in the same way that he sets up
the rest of the logic analyzer .. with prompted
menus . Since the pattern generator allows
algorithmic generation of data, a relatively short
program can create a much larger sequence of
data to drive the circuit under test. The pattern
generator can be programmed to behave like
the environment in which the circuit is to be
used, so that the designer can test parts of a
circuit design before all the prototypes are
ready .
In addition, the tests created for the pattern generator can ultimately form the basis for evaluation and manufacturing tests. The pattern generator stimulates the circuit under test, the data is
acquired in the acquisition memory and then
compared to the contents of the reference memory to identify errors.
45
ANALYZERS
TEK LOGIC
SELECTION
GUIDE
LOGIC ANALYZER SELECTION GUIDE
The guide which follows helps you to locate
which Tektronix logic analyzers are best suited
to your specific needs for applications and features. Since the guide is only a summary of the
most salient points, you will find more information
in the product descriptions which follow. Or call
your Tektronix representative for assistance.
APPLICATION/ FEATURE
Bus Measurements:
Trigger on siml2le I2rogram execution
Trigger on com~lex ~rogram execution
Measure execution time interval and state count
Data gualification
Stimulate bus transfers
Relate ~rogram execution to data
Relate ~rogram execution to as~nchronous control
Anal~ze serial data transfers/communications interface
Simultaneous state & timing
Time aligned state & timing
Anal~ze as~nchronous timing ana glitches
Micro~rocessor mnemonics
User defined mnemonics
Analyze GPIB transactions
308
7002
9101
9102
9103
9104
9109
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hardware Debugging:
Glitch cal2ture
Glitch triggering
Synchronous acquisition speed
Asynchronous acquisition speed
X
~
~
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
46
X
~
~
~
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
~
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
X
X
X
~
X
X
X
X
20 MHz
10 MHz
100 MHz
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
1.5 ns timing resolution
Simultaneous state & timing acquisition with time alignment
Test fixture elimination
System Capabilities:
Mass storage
Programmable via RS-232C
Programmable via GPIB
Disela~ hard coe~
Trigger outeut
Tngger Ineut
Modular and expandable
7000 Series compatible
DL2
X
Stimulation Capabilities:
Pattern comeression
Synchronous clock output
Programmable strobe outputs
External control lines
Tn-state caeabilit~
Level swings selectable by pod
Service:
On-site
Depot level
Remote control
7B~~
X
X
X
X
25 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
25 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
25 MHz 50 MHz
100 MHz
330 MHz
25 MHz 100 MHz
100 MHz
330 MHz
660 MHz
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TEK
DAS 9100
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
Data Analysis System
Up to 104 Acquisition Channels
Synchronous Acquisition to 330 MHz
Asynchronous Acquisition to 660 MHz
Up to 80 Channels of Pattern Generation to
25 MHz
An Architecture for Future Growth
Easy to Learn and Easy to Use
Affordable
The digital evolution, especially microprocessor
technology, has touched every facet of electronic
instrumentation. Bus structures have become
wider, faster, and more complex. This has led to
an increase in total hardware and software design complexity. These events created a need for
a new state-of-the-art general purpose logic analyzer. The DAS 9100 is that logic analyzer. Its
configurable capabilities allow for data acquisition, stimulation and remote control to provide
optimum performance in a broad range of test
situations.
For high speed data acquisitions, the DAS 9100
provides clock rates to 330 MHz synchronous and
660 MHz asychronous. Also, data storage can be
up to 4096 bits per channel to capture the data
you want.
To accommodate wider, more complex bus applications, the DAS 9100 provides up to 104 channels of data acquisition. Also, glitch capture, split
clocking, up to 7 clock qualifiers, and multiple
levels of sequential triggering help you pinpoint
problem areas in your system. For extra difficult
problems, the trigger arms mode provides the
capability to look at address/data bus transactions and asynchronous handshaking events simultaneously. And, the DAS 9100 goes one step
further by displaying the data time aligned in both
timing and state table displays.
If you 're doing prototype debugging , the DAS
9100 lets you define your own mnemonic labels
for monitoring data flow. With pattern generation
you can stimulate the prototype with a known
pattern up to 80 channels width plus
programmable strobes , and truly analyze the
results.
And, best of all it's easy to use. A straight forward
menu-driven user interface let's you concentrate
on solving your problem, not on learning how to
operate the DAS 9100.
DAS 9100 A New Concept in Logic
Analysis
Modularity is the key to the DAS 9100. The
mainframe accommodates plug-in card modules,
chosen by you according to your specific needs.
In all , you 've got over 132 modular combinations
with which to work.
Four data acquisition card modules combine to
offer asynchronous acquisition speeds up to 660
MHz and synchronous acquisition speeds up to
330 MHz. Timing resolution down to an unprecedented 1.5 ns. And, data widths from 8 channels
at 660 MHz, to 104 channels at 25 MHz.
TABLE I
DATA ACQUISITION MODULES
Characteristics
'91A32
91ADB
91A04 & 91AE04-Full Channel
Mode
High Resolution
Mode
Number of
Channels Per
32
B
4
2
Resolution/
Sample Freq
40 ns/25 MHz
10 nsl100 MHz
3 ns/330 MHz
1.5 ns/660 MHz
Modules Per
System
3
4
191A04
391AE04
191A04
391AE04
Channels Per
System
96
32
16
8
512
512
2048
4096
Module
Memory Deplh
Triggering
Multiple Clocks
Synchronous
"'nA-B ~ C
1 level plus arms mode
With 91A32
3
YES
YES
NO
YES
Qualtflers Per
Board
2
1
Set-up Times
Hold Times
29 nslO ns
9 nslO ns
Asynchronous
Glitch Triggering
Number of Probes
YES
NO
YES
4
3 ns resolution
1.5 nanosecond resolution
0
2 nslO ns
1
'Data and clock thresholds selected independently.
"The 91 A04 is a master card, channel expansion requires one or more 91 AE04 's.
'''n occurrences of A followed by B, reset on C.
Table I summarizes the characteristics of Data AcqUISition Modules.
47
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
, ._ _ MENU SEUCTtON . - -_ _
CHANHIlL
~c
T1IItOGlA
Sl"fC
IN,.UT
OUTI"\IT
---•
........
•
1
Figure 1. The layout of the DAS 9100 keyboard makes it easy to learn and easy to use.
DAS 9100Select YOUR
Configuration
The DAS 9100 has four different data acquisition
modules. Each has its own data width and maxi·
mum speed: 32 channels at 25 MHz ; 8 channels
at 100 MHz with glitch memory; 4 channels at 330
MHz or two channels at 660 MHz . Modules can
be combined to give you the logic analyzer you
need .
Need high speed performance? One module can
track your system clock (synchronously) at
speeds to 330 MHz or provide asynchronous
sampling to 660 MHz. The eight channel module
proVides both synchronous and asynchronous
sampling at 100 MHz . And the 32 channel module
can be used to arm the trigger on those modules
with higher acquisition rates
To back It all up, there 's powerful triggering , clock
and trigger qualification , programmable reference
memory and multiple clocks. There is glitch triggering, .with a separate glitch memory for
unambiguous glitch detection and our unique,
new "arms mode" which allows precise timing
correlation between synchronous and asynchronous data.
Arms mode allows the DAS 9100 to capture
synchronous and asynchronous data simultaneously and the da ta are displayed in the correct
time relationship for easy analysis in either Timing or State display mode. To obtain the data
width and speed your application requires , simply
select the appropriate combination of modules
and add on later as your needs change.
48
For operator convenience , there is a mnemonics
menu which permits definition of up to 256 separate mnemonics. These can be assigned to a
particular group of data channels for display
formatting (all 256) or spread over 16 different
groups . The mnemonics display for each group
can be turned on or off as desired. The assigned
mnemonic can be up to 10 characters in length. A
trailing words feature allows you to specify that
mnemonic disassembly is to be skipped on a
certain word or group of words , up to nine.
At last , you can have the tool that covers your
digital system debugging needs. By combining
pattern generation and data acquisition modules,
you can stimulate your prototype while simultaneously analyzing its operation; allowing you to
enter a whole new dimension of design analysis
and verification
Pattern generation makes it possible to start
debugging hardware before your software , or
even all of your hardware, IS available.
Pattern generation capability is built around a 16
channel , 25 MHz controller module . Through additional expansion modules, you can increase the
total up to 48 or 80 channels while maintaining full
system speed. The pattern generator allows interaction With the prototype through clock outputs,
data strobes, an external clock , and external
control inputs , including an interrupt line. And , the
pa ttern generated can even be changed , based
on the data acquired by the logic analyzer,
through the external control lines.
Table II summarizes capabilities of the two Pattern Generator Modules.
TABLE II. PATTERN GENER ATOR SUMMARY
Pattern
Modules
Generator
Characteristics
91P32
91P16
..1Con1roller)
Modules
Per Sys tem
1
2
Channels
Per Module
16
32
Strobes
Per Module
2
4
Clock
Frequency
25 MHz
25 MHz
2
8 Channels!
Probe
4
8 Channelsl
Probe
254
254
Number of
Probes
per Modules
Number of
Program Steps
MaXimum Number of Channels is 80.
For you to make good use of an instrument , It
needs to be easy to use . The logical grouping of
the keyboard on the DAS 9100 simplifies the operator 's task considerably (figure 1). The Menu
Selec tion and Pattern Generator keys are used
for setting up a specific task . The Data Entry keys
are used to enter values . The operator uses the
Editing , Cursor and Scroll keys to interact with the
display. The System Con trol keys allow control of
overall system operation.
The DAS 9100 also offers you powerful 1/0 options, including a built-in magnetic tape cartridge
drive (option 01) to create files of instrument set
ups, pattern sequences, mnemonics and refer·
ence memory. The Option 02 RS-232 and GPIB
interface
offers
comple te
remote
programmability. And , a hard copy interface is
also included.
TEK
CAS 9100 -
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
High-Speed Timing Analysis
The trigger specification menu (figure 1) lets you
choose either synchronous or asynchronous timing acquisition. Normally, you will be using asynchronous sampling to see control signal operations (handshaking, interrupts, read/write) which
do not occur synchronously with the same edge
of the master clock. For tracing timing bugs, the
DAS 9100 combines flexible triggering with glitch
triggering to capture and display rapidly changing
data.
When the trigger event is recognized , acquisition
is completed and the data recorded in memory is
displayed.
In the timing diagram display (figure 3) the information can be easily analyzed. The channels are
labeled for convenient identification and the trigger event is displayed at the top and highlighted
in the display by the vertical line labeled I!J . The
glitches display is ON and the glitches are presented. If there is any concern about differentiating glitch from data, simply turn the glitch field to
OFF to remove glitches. Also, the cursor location
(labeled 1Cl) is displayed at the top of the screen.
CAS 9100 -
Bus Analysis
When the DAS 9100 is used to analyze a bus
structure, the synchronous mode will normally be
used. The 91A32 module with 32 channels and up
to a 25 MHz sample rate, is ideal for bus analysis.
If 91A08 or 91A04 modules, which are ideal for
asynchronous acquisition, are added, the DAS
9100 will provide synchronous and asynchronous
data acquisition Simultaneously to uncover asynchronous faults while monitoring synchronous execution (Arms Mode). The data are then displayed in a time correlated format for easy
analysis.
When looking at data/address bus transactions, it·
is convenient to be able to group channels to
allow for display formatting of acquired data.
Figure 2_ Trigger Specification menu
For high-speed timing, your mode would be
91A08 only or 91A04 only. This parameter sets up
the DAS 9100 for acquiring data only with 91A08
or 91A04 modules. Parameters are selected via
the trigger spec menu .
A typical example (figure 2) is for 100 MHz
sampling on 16 channels of data using the two
91A08 modules plugged into mainframe slots 5
and 6. The glitch trigger is enabled and the
sample rate is set to 10 ns using the internal
clock. The trigger event is shown and the desired
trigger position is centered to view data on both
sides of the trigger event . The qualifiers, "store
only If", are all set to X (don't care.) Also , the
threshold is set for TIL on both modules.
Hexadecimal radix is selected for state table
viewing .
Figure 3. Timing diagram with glitches
The 91A08 module samples up to 100 MHz and
uses glitch triggering to capture narrow pulses.
The 91A04/91AE04 module is a high-speed module that samples synchronously to 330 MHz and
asynchronously to 660 MHz. By using the
91A04/91AE04 module, you can view "glitches·
with 1.5 ns resolution and truly analyze where
those errant pulses originated.
As a timing analyzer , the DAS 9100 is
unsurpassed in performance. You can label all
sixteen timing channels with signal names of your
choice, thereby taking the guesswork out of data
identification. Data resolution can be selected
from 40 ns to an unprecedented 1.5 ns to help
you isolate very high-speed digital transactions on
synchronous and asynchronous data lines.
Figure 4. Channel Specification Menu
The Channel Specification Menu (figure 4) is used
to group the probe channels into logical display
groups in any order for convenient analysis. You
can also select thresholds , logic polarity, radix,
and the order in which the groups should be
displayed.
49
ANALYZERS
TEK LOGIC
Oefine Mnemonics
To make data easy to interpret, the DAS 9100
provides a Define Mnemonics Table (figure 7),
which lets you define your own language of
events by labeling data input words. The DAS
9100 can match each data word sampled to an
assigned mnemonic and display them in the
State Table. By assigning mnemonics to a set of
events as you expect them to occur, a quick verification is achieved.
Figure 5. State Table Display
Figure 8. Refetence Memory
Figure 7. Define Mnemonics Table
Reference Memory
Figure 6. Timing Diagram of data acquired in
arms mode
In the State Table (figure 5), as in the Timing dia·
gram, the trigger word is displayed . The memory
location or sequence numbers that correspond
to the recorded events are also listed. To look at
dif ferent sections of memory , either use the
scroll keys or enter the sequence number you
want.
The State Table lets you easily follow synchro·
nous transactions which occurred on the bus
around a specified event. With the arms mode,
(figure 6) you can also observe control signal
transactions to determine if their asynchronous
activity is proceeding correctly.
50
For intermittent problems, the reference memory
provides the means for tracking down unwanted
random transitions. By pressing the Store key,
acquisition memory from the State Table is copied into reference memory (figure 8). Now, to
track down an intermittent, press Compare '*
and the DAS 9100 will begin acquiring data,
based on the specified parameters, and compare it with known correct reference memory
data. If the data is different, the DAS 9100 halts.
By selecting the Acquisition and Reference
Memory , the intermittent will be shown as a
highlighted difference and also a flag ('*) will be
present beside the sequence number where the
intermittent occurred .
To allow the DAS 9100 to help uncover specific
intermittents within a small number of events, a
programmable compare window is provided .
With the data masking plus the compare window , comparison testing can be done on as little
as a single bit.
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
The program menu allows a pattern to be entered as a sequentially executed program. Instruction steps may be labeled for either program looping or comments . and a strobe or
group of strobes may be output at each instruction execution. With pattern depth of 254 vectors. coupled with looping and 16 levels of subroutine nesting. a complex digital circuit can be
effectively stimulated without on-board firmware .
To connect the pattern generator output signals
to your circuit. you use the P6455 Probe for TIL
or MaS signals and the P6456 Probe for ECl
signals . Thus data levels and strobes are
programmable over a wide range of values to
cover all logic families .
The clocking can be provided either internally
from the time base module or externally via the
External Clock probe.
To use the Generator Patterns. you may need to
synthesize control signals to strobe the information into the circuit under test. The DAS Pattern
Generator provides strobes that can be delayed
in 40 ns increments from the system clock to
provide gating signals.
With pattern generation and data acquisition in a single instrument. the DAS 9100 is useful in manufacturing test areas.
CAS 9100 -
TABLE III
PATTERN GENERATOR
INSTRUCTION SUMMARY
Pattern Generation
The DAS 9100 Pattern Generator provides up to
80 data signals and 10 programmable strobes at
data rates up to 25 MHz. You can use these signals to stimulate your circuit either directly or
with a minimal fixture of your own design. By
stimulating the circuit from the pattern generator.
you can start debugging parts of your circuit before all the other parts are ready . The ability to
use a single logic analyzer to both stimulate and
acquire data from a digital circuit is truly a new
dimension in logic analysis.
The Pattern Generator is controlled by 7 powerful Instructions (table III) . Each of the instructions
is a familiar word with a logical function performed by the DAS 9100.
INSTRUCTION
ACTION
COUNT
Increment Pattern by one
clock cycle (256 max)
REPEAT
Repeat pattern output
at this step up to
256 clock cycles
HOLD
Hold pattern and clock
outputs at this step up to
256 clock cycles
HALT
Stop
GO TO
Go to designated
Label
CALL
Jump to designated
Subroutine
Label
RETURN
Return from
Subroutine
The DAS 9100 Pattern Generator can also be
controlled externally by the test circuit in any of
three ways. Three external signals from the External Clock probe allow the pattern generator to
be made to PAUSE. INHIBIT (tri-state) or INTERRUPT the program sequence and transfer execution to a subroutine pattern.
One of the best features of the DAS 9100 Pattern Generator is that it's easy to use. Since it is
contained in your DAS 9100 Mainframe and you
program it using the same menu approach as
the rest of your DAS 9100 functions. you save
time and money in getting your designs up and
running . Moreover. you can easily save a complete stimulation acquisition test sequence for
later use in evaluation. manufacturing. or service.
51
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
CAS 9100 -
Storage and 1/0
The DAS 9100 includes several optional storage
and I/O capabilities. Using these features you can
easily store and retrieve instrument set-ups and
reference patterns, and control the instrument
remotely.
Magnetic Tape Option
The DAS 9100 Option 02 includes a GPIB interface on RS-232C interface and a composite video
output. These I/O ports provide a variety of useful
possibilities for interfaCing your DAS 9100.
GPIB
Master-Slave
The second mode using the RS-232C port is
Master-Slave operation. Using the DAS 9100 console (designated as Master), you can completely
control a remote DAS 9100 (designated as Slave).
The GPIB port on the DAS 9100 is a standard
IEEE-488 interface port and conforms to the IEEE488 1978 standards and to the Tektronix Codes
and Formats standard.
Using the English-like commands of the Codes
and Forma ts, you can remotely control all of the
capabilities of your DAS 9100.
Menus can be programmed, output patterns generated , data acquired and compared with reference patterns, and any results (acquisition memory for example) returned to the controller for
further analysis.
Figure 12. I/O Menu RS-232C SLAVE
NDAC
I
NRFD
Figure 9.
The DC magnetic tape storage system , Option
01 , (figure 9) can store a variety of status files
from the DAS 9100, as shown in Table IV.
SRD
DAY
Table IV. MAGNETIC TAPE FILES
File Type
Description
Patgen
Pattern Generator
Menu and Memory
Figure " . Rear I/ O panel
Define
Define Mnemonics Menu
And Mnemonic Tables
Ref Mem
Reference Memory
Contents
The DAS 9100 operates via the GPIB port as
either a talker or a listener, and is compatible with
controllers such as the Tektronix 4041 , 4051 , 4052
or 4054.
Data Acq
Channel Spec.,Trigger Spec
And Timing Diagram Menus
All
All of The Above
The file directory (figure 10) allows 32 files per
cartridge. Each tape can hold 6 ALL files with
some space left for other files . Each file includes
a header (figure 10) of up to 180 characters,
which you can use for file description or usage
instructions.
Figures 10. I/ O Menu and File Directory
52
The controller commands the DAS 9100 to perform all the functions which can be accessed
from the DAS 9100 keyboard. LEARN mode
allows the user to send individual keystroke sequences to the controller. This mode can be a
real timesaver to modify previously stored DAS
9100 setup programs, when just a few changes
are needed.
RS-232C
The first mode using the RS-232C port is essentially the same as the GPIB mode. The controller
commands the DAS 9100 to perform the desired
functions using the same commands as for GPIB.
The RS-232C hardware interface works with standard modems.
Any keystroke command that is executed by the
Master is transmitted to the Slave and implemented as if the remote user entered it on the Slave's
keyboard. Screen contents on the Slave are
transmitted automatically to the Master DAS 9100
screen.
For instance, you can use a MASTER in your
engineering lab to control a SLAVE via telephone
lines, thus saving travel and/or time to analyze a
tough problem at a remote location.
CompOSite Video Output
The video out jack (figure 11) is part of Option 02
and provides a composite video signal to drive a
video hardcopy unit or an external video monitor.
Recommended hardcopy units are TEKTRONIX
4612 and 4632 Video Copiers, which provide
crisp , clear permanent copies of DAS 9100
screen contents .
LOGIC
TEK
ANALYZER
Trigger Modes (Word Recognition) 3 Word recognizers
Word 1 (N)times
Word 1 FOLLOWED BY word 2
Word 1 THEN NOT word 2
RESET on word 3
External Tngger Enable (TTL)
Word Recognizer Output (TTL)
91A32 arms 91AOe or 91 A04191AE04
Compare until equal or not equal
Glitch Recognizer (91 AOa only)
Enable by channel
OR 'ed with 91 AOe tngger word
Clocks -
Up to 4 split clocks (multiple 91 A32 modules).
Clock Qualifier. -
Up to 7.
DATA ACQUISITION DISPLAY MODES
Screen Size characters.
22.9 cm (9 in) diagonal. displays 24 lines of eo
Timing Diagram Features
Simultaneous display of 16 user selectable channels
User definable 6-character trace labels for each displayed
channel
Data magnification factors from Xl to Xl 0.000
Cursor position and word readout in binary
Search word
Time aligned data display lor arming mode
Glitch display select (91 AOe only)
Honzontal data scrolling
Memory display window
State Table Features
Hex , Binary. Octal, or ml)ced radix
User definable mnemonics displayed by group in acquisition/reference memory displays
Search word
Time-aligned data display lor arms mode
Vertical or block scrolling
Cursor posItion
The ability to call up stored files for instrument set-up and the remote I/O capability allow the
OAS 9100 to support a variety of service strategies.
Up to 512 bits by 96 channels reference memory display,
With or Without data acquisition display
Relerence memory edIting
Programmable compare Window
CHARACTERISTICS
CAS 9100
-
Compare mode -
The Logic Analysis System for You.
The DAS 9100 Digital Analysis System combines
powerful data acquisition and pattern generation
modules with an easy-to-use human interface to
create a unique, state-of-the-art logic analysIs
system. You select the proper configuration for
your present application today and select additional capability for future needs when the need
occurs. The optional magnetic tape provides
easy storage and recovery of instrument set-ups.
And flexible 1/0 interfacing allows the DAS 9100
to be configured optimally in your environment.
Reference memory mask word capability
highlighted and flagged lor differences
DATA FORMATTING
Group Designations group)
Up to 16 Groups (1 to 32 channels per
Display Order Table
DeSignate Group Display Order for State
Channet Order -
DeSignated channel order within a group
Rad ix Potarity -
KEYBOARD
The DAS 9100 keyboard IS diVided into four sections for ease
of use and funcliOnality . Menu keys. data entry keys . edit and
cursor conlroi. and system control keys provides total control
at your fingertips .
Octal, Binary , or Hexadecimal.
Positive or Negative (Comptement).
Threshold -
Select TTL or Vanable.
USER DEFINABLE MNEMONICS
Up to 256 Mnemonic Delinitions by Group
1O-Character Mnemonic Field
TRIGGERING SPECIFICATIONS
Synchronous or Asynchronous
Trigger Word Position - Begin, Center, End 01 Memory
Trigger Delay Irom 1 to 32,767 Clock Samples
Displays Trigger Word in Hex , Binary or Octal, or
mixed radix , any b its allowed as don't care (X)
53
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZERS
91P16 AND 91P32 PATTERN GENERATOR MODULES
DATA ACQUISITION PROBES
CHARACTERISTIC
P6452
P6453
P6454
Up to 80 Programmable Data Output Channels.
Module used With
91A32. 91AOa
Trioaer/Time Base
91A04/91AE04
91A08
IN PUTS
8 Data
1 Qualilier
1 GN 0 or Relerence
4 Data
1 Clock
5 Reference
1 Clock
1 Reference
1 MO :t 1%
1 Mil ± 5%
5 pF (NOM)
1 Mil ± 5%
Instruction Set Count(N) - Increment N values.
Goto - Label and output vector (pattern).
Hold(N) - Hold output and inhibit clock for N cycles.
Repeat(N) - Hold output while generating N clock cycles ..
Call - Call subroutine.
Return - Return from subroutine.
Halt - Ou tput vector and inhibit clock.
- 2 V to + 5 V
(dc + peak ac)
- 2.5 V to + 5 V
(de + peak act
Input Impedance
Without lead set
5 pF (NOM)
Operating Input
Range
- 40 to threshold
voltage + 10 V
not to exceed 40 Vj9c + ~k
Threshold Range
(p!QQrammabl~
- 2.5Vto + 5V - TTL
- 10 V to + 20 V - MaS
Threshold Accurracy
(Ref to Programmed
Threshold)
± 100 mV ± 2'10 · TTL
500 mV pop
Max Non.oestructive
~
± 40 V
91A32 DATA ACQUISITION MODULE
Maximum Number 01 Inputs - 32 data channels. expandable
to 96 channels with 3 modules.
Maximum Sampling Rate clock (40 ns cycle time).
Clock Qualilier. -
25 MHz with internal or external
512 bits/channel.
Data Set-Up Time edge) 29 ns. min.
Data Hold Time -
(Period data valid prior 10 external clock
0 ns , min.
2 per module. 6 max. selectable polarity.
Qualilier Set-Up Time Qualilier Hold Time -
29 ns. min.
0 ns. max .
Clock Internal - 5 ms to 40 ns ± 1% ± 1 ns.
External - Up to three external sources.
Selectable rising or falling edge.
Trigger 91A04 .
1, 2 and 3 level word recognition arms 91 A08 or
Sequence Comparison Probe -
- 2.5Vto + 5V
- 2.5 to +5 V
± 50 mV :t 3 %
i 50 mV :t 3%
700 mV pop
700 mV pop
+ 25 V
± 25 V
5 to 10 pF.
DATA ACQUISITION MODULES
Memory Depth -
a~
+ 160mV + 4% - MOS
Sensitivity
(Centered on
Threshol<1L
• Lead set adds
5.2f~OM~
Compare until equal or not equal.
P6452 . 4 per module. See table.
91A08 DATA ACQUtSITION MODULE
Malimum Number 01 Inputs - 8 data channels expandable
to 32 channels data with 4 modules.
Maximum Sampling Rate clock (10 ns cycle time).
100 MHz with internal or external
Clock Selectable from two internal and two external
sources.
Internal- 5 ms to 10 ns, ± 1%, ± 1 ns.
External - Selectable rising or lalling edge.
Probes -
Compare until equal or not equal.
P6452. 1 per module. See table.
P6454, 1 per DAS 9100; external clock lor 1 to 4 91 A08
modules).
91AD4 AND 91AE04 DATA ACQUISITION MODULE
Maximum Number 01 Inputs - 4 data channels expanoable
to 16 channels with 4 modules ; In high resolution mode 2 channels expandable to 8.
Maximum Sampling Rate - 330 MHz with internal or external
clock . 660 MHz with internal clock.
Memory Depth mode .
2048 words ; 4096 words in high resolution
Data Set-up Time Oat. Hold Time -
2.0 ns, min.
0.0 ns, min.
54
0 ns. max.
.. IOns.
Pattern Memory Depth unlimited pattern length).
254 instructions or words (virtually
Number 01 Nested Subroutines -
16 max.
32 max.
Number 01 Strobes - 1 strobe per probe, expandable to 10
strobes (3 modules . 10 probes).
Strobe Start Time ns steps.
Selectable Irom 70 ns to 40.91 .s in 40
Strobe Pulse Width 40 ns steps.
Strobe Pulse Polarity -
Selectable from 40 ns to 40.880 .s in
Selectable: positive or negative.
Clock Output - One clock line per probe (rising edge signifies
beginning of cycle).
Skew Between Different Probe Output Clocks -
::t 5
ns.
Clock Internal - 3 ns to 5 ns , ± 5% ; 10 ns to 5 ms. ± 1%.
External - Clock Input channel Irom P6453 probe, 330 MHz,
max .
Clock - Selectable external or internal.
Internal Clock - 40 ns to 5 ms ± 1% ± 1 ns.
External Clock - 40 ns min. Cycle time; selectable rising or
laillng edge.
Pause Input -
Probe -
Qualilier Hold Time -
25 MHz max (40 ns cycle time).
Output Data Skew -
Number 01 Labels -
1 per module. 4 max .
Qualilier Set-up Time - .. 9 ns using one 91 A08 .
... 10 ns using multiple 91A08 modules.
Pattern Data Width -
Operating Rate -
Up to 32 bits using lour modules.
Sequence Comparison -
0 ns. max.
5 ns min glitch width.
Data Set-up Time - .. 9 ns using one 91 A08.
", ,0 ns using multiple 91A08 Modules.
Inhibit - Tri-state all ou tputs while asserted.
Inhibit Input - Selectable high or low true.
Inhibit Oelay Time - 70 ns max ;
Word Width -
Data Hold Time -
Glitch Storage -
Pause - Hold temporarily while asserted.
Pause Input - Selectable high or low true.
14 ns alter pattern external clock
Pause Holdtime transition.
Pause Pulse Width - 19 ns, min .
Word RecognitIOn - Single-level data or glitch word. externally armable (Irom 91 A32 trigger using arms mode).
Clock Qualil iers -
512 bits/channel.
From trigger-timelbase probe.
91P16 - 16 parallel channels (2 8-channel probes).
91 P32 - 32 parallel channels (4 8-channel probes).
Expandable to 80 channels (1 91 P16. 2 91 P32's and 10
probes).
Trigger -
Trigger - Word recognition or pattern sequence comparison
Word Recognition - Single-level data word. externally armabie (Irom 91 A32 trigger).
Oelay - Selectable Irom 60 to 65541 sample periods alter
trIgger.
Pattern-Sequence Comparison - Compare until equal or
not equal.
Memory Depth -
External Control Lines -
Interrupt - Jump to subroutine.
Interrupt Input - External clock probe selectable rising or
failing edge.
Interrupt Setup Time - 7 ns min relative to EXT Clock In.
72 ns min relative to clock output.
Interrupt Processing Delay - 4 clock cycles (Response
Time).
P6453. See table.
Selectable high or low true.
Probes - See table.
P6455 TTUMOS pattern generator probe.
P6456 ECL pattern generator probe.
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
TEK
PATTERN GENERATOR PROBES
Option 04 Two Additional Power Supplies ......... Add$15oo
Option 05 Rackmount Hardware .......................... Add $500
Option 88 Mainlrame shipped with Modules Installed and
checked out as part 01 the Malnlrame .............. No Charge
CHARACTERISTIC
P6455
P6456
Modules used wllh
91P16 91P32
91P16 91P32
OulpulS
8 Data
1 Clock
1 Strobe
8 Data
1 Clock
1 Strobe
Inputs
V H - high user supply rail voltage
VL - low user supply rail voltage
V H - high user supply rail voltage
V L - low user supply rail voltage
MaXimum user
VH - :t 20V
Vv - 20Vto + 5V
V H -:t IS V
V L - :t 15V
VDIFF - 25 V
VDIFF - 10 V
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ l0A ........................ No Charge
Supply levels
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A ............... No Charge
FIELD INSTAlLABlE OPTIONS
DAS 91Fl Field Installed Option. DC- loo Tape Drive
(Includes Installation In Service Center) ................... $1500
DAS 91 F2 - Field Installed Option. GPIB Interface. RS-232
Hardcopy ...................................................................... $1100
Output dnve current
min source or Sink
3 VDIFF to 5 V - 20 mA
5 V to 25 V - 10 mA
5011 load to VH - 2 V
Leakage
(outpUt inhibited)
.,- 100 "A
ECL output in low state
Capacitance
10 pF nominal
!lead set adds ,, 10 of)
10 pF nominal
{lead set adds " lO.J1!l
User current drain
MaXimum
120 mA
VH 130 mA
V~ t30 mA
VDIFF - 5.2 V :t 5°
Output LogiC Levels
VOH ;- + 1.6 V @20mA
VO L "'- + 0.5 V @ 10 mA : + 0.6 @ 20 mA
VO H -·6VtO - IV
VOL - 1.65 to - 2 V
with 50 II load to VH - 2 V
LogiC Family
TIL- MOS
EClonly
MODULES
91A32 Data Acquisition Module
uu . u.
$4500
u •• u u
$3500
(32 Channels at 25 MHz , Including Probes)
91A08 Data Acquisition Module
(8 Channels at 100 MHz , including Acquisition Probes, P6454
Clock Probe ReqUired With First Module lor Synchronous
Operation)
91A04 Data Acquisition Module
uu_u.
91AE04 Data Acquisition Module
Over 160k Bytes Stores 6 full configuration Instrument set-ups
Stores 30 lull acquiSition set-ups
Stores 30 pattern generator files
Stores 30 define mnemoniCS files
Stores 15 reference memory files
Directory space for 32 Iiles
I/O INTERFACE OPTION 02
Selectable Baud Rate s -
91 P16 Pattern Generator Module
9.5
(16 Channels at 25 MHz . Including Probes)
Weight
kg
Ib
(Without accesones)
22
48.0
17.0
23.5
Operating Storage -
O' C to , 50 ' C.
- 40' C to
+ 65 ' C.
Altitude Opera ling Storage -
3000 m (10.000 It) max .
15,000 m (50,000 It) max .
ORDERING INFORMATION
STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS
DAS 9101 Digital Analysis System $11 ,700
(16 Channels at 100 MHz)
Master/ Slave Remote control 01 DAS 9100 by a DAS 9100.
Full duplex , asynchronous via RS -232 .
GPIB
The Opl1on 02 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978 and with
TektrOniX Codes and Formats standard . (Talker and Listener
only).
Capacitive Load Due to this Device -
100 pF per signal line
max .
Lockout and Remote Lights Provided on Keyboard
Selectable Address
Selectable Controller Type
Four Rear-Panel LED' s Provide Observabte Handshake
Lines - SRO, NDAC , NRFD, DAV
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT
1.4 V to 1.6 V.
0.3 V to 0.7 V.
a V to 0.1 V.
$4950
91 P32 Pattern Generator Module
uu.
$3700
Uuu
$5900
(32 Channels at 25 MHz , Including Probes. ReqUires 91 P16)
NOTES .
When selecting modules, check that you do not exceed the
folloWing maXimum numbers 01 modules or channels per
Instrument :
1.000 VA max.
Temperature Range -
Other - Pin 1 Ground .
Pin 7 Signal Ground
VSYNC -
in
24 .1
43.2
59.7
300. 600. 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
Outputs - Pin 2 Transmitted Data .
Pin 4 Request to Send
Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready
VOFF -
cm
Height
Wid th
Lenath
RS-232
Inputs - Pin 3 Received Data ,
Pin 5 Clear to Send
Pin 6 Data Set Ready
Pin 8 Data Carner Detect
VON -
Dimension s
Power -
uu.
(4 Addllional Channels at 330 MHz, Including Probe. Requires
9tA04)
MISCELLANEOUS
DC- l00 TAPE DRIVE OPTION 01
$7950
(4 Channels at 330 MHz, Including Probes)
DAS 9102 Digital Analysis System
$12,900
(32 Channels at 25 MHz. 16 Channels of Pattern Generat"'")
DAS 9103 Digital Analysis System
$16,900
(32 Channels at 25 MHz , 8 Channels at 100 MHz , 16 Channels
Pattern Generation)
DAS 9104 Digital Analysis System
$26,900
(64 Channels at 25 MHz , 16 Channels at 100 MHz, 16 Channels of Pattern Generation)
NOTES :
All Data AcqUltlslon Modules , Pattern Generator Modules.
and Malnlrame Opl1ons are also available lor the standard
configurations With the exception of those already included in
the configuratIOn : I.e. DAS 9104 Includes the Option 01 , DC100 Tape Dnve.
2 II standard configurations are ordered with additional mod~
ules , check that the correct number 01 power supplies are
Included
MAINFRAMES
DAS 9109 Mainframe ....
DAS 9119 Mainframe
(ATE Version) _._.............
u
u •• u •••••••••• u . u
• •• • • • _ • • • • • • • • • • • • •
$4950
$5400
THSYNC -
63.5"s ± 0.1 "so
(Deletes CRT and keyboard , adds Oplion 02)
TVSYNC -
16.5 ms :t o.l ms.
OPTIONS
Option 0 1 DC-l 00 Tape Drive ............................ Add $1250
Option 02 RS-232.
GPIB and Hardcopy Interface ............................... Add $950
Option 03 Add itional Power Supply ................ ..... Add $750
TOTAL PER
INSTRUMENT
OTY
Modules
91A32
91A08
91A04
91AE04
91P 16
91P32
Data AcqUlsllion Ch's
6
SPECIAL
REOUIREMENTS
3
1
3
ReqUires 91 A04
ReqUIres 91 P16
104
When adding modules , check that the correct number 01
power supplies are also selected. The mainframe Includes
suffiCient power for 2 modules. One additional power supply
(Option 03) IS reqUired lor 3 or 4 modules. Two (Option 04)
additional power supplies are required for a total of 5 or 6
modules.
ADDITIONAL PROBES
P6452 8 Channels Data Acquisition Probe
(010-6452 -01) ............................................... ................. $700
P6453 4 Channels 330 MHz High Speed
Data Acquis ition Probe (010-6453-01) ...................... $1500
P6454 100 MHz Clock Probe (010-6454 -01) ............... $250
P6455 8 Channels TTL /MOS Pattern Generator Probe
(010 -6455-01) ................................................................ $550
P6456 8 Channels ECl Pattern Generator Probe
(010 -6456-01) ................................................................ 5550
ACCESSORIES
DC- loo Tape Cartridge (119- 1350-01) (Pkg 01 5) ...... $120
GPIB Cable . 2 Meter (012 -0630-03) .............................. $90
GPIB Cable, 4 Meter (012-0630-04) ............................. $135
RS-232 Cable. 2 Meter (012-0815-00) ........................... 555
Hardcopy Unit Cable : 75 Ohm. 42 in Coax. BNC
(012 -0074 -00) ................................................................... $17
Hardcopy Unit Cable: 75 Ohm. 10 in Coax. BNC
(175-2753-00) .............................................................. $13.50
Additional Power Supply (020-0707 -00) ...................... $750
DAS Set-Up and Hold Fixture (067 - 1037-00) ............ $1200
Carrying Case lor Probes (016-0672-00) ....................... $70
Rackmount Hardware (016-0463-00) ........................... $500
55
SONY@
ITEKTRONIX@
~~~~YZER
308
Data Analyzer
The 308 is a 20 MHz,
Analyzer. It provides
State, Serial State and
easy to use convenient
four-in-one portable Data
Parallel Timing, Parallel
Signature Analysis, in an
package.
With the color coded keyboard you can easily
control all the functions of the 308 Data Analyzer.
The 308's unique menu readout displays all of the
status and operator mode information on its selfcontained CRT. The status information is always
displayed as the first line in all modes of operation. This provides you with instant identification
of what you 're dOing before, during and after
data acquisitions.
The 308 Data Analyzer provides data acquisition
via one 8 channel high impedance probe (1 MI!, 5
pF) for parallel timing and parallel state modes.
For serial and signature acquisitions a single
channel high impedance probe (10 MI!, 13 pF) is
used. All four modes are provided with a
selectable threshold, TIL or Variable (+ 12 to
-12 V), to allow data acquisitions from any digital
logic family.
Input formats are selectable between Hexa-decimal, Binary, Octal or Decimal. For the Parallel
State Mode direct display of acquisition memory
is provided in Hex , Binary and Octal
simultaneously.
In the Serial State Mode the display provides
readout in Hex, Binary and ASCII simultaneously,
plus parity error indication .
In the Parallel Timing mode a unique selectable
Memory Window is provided to allow you to
select the section of acquisition memory you wish
to view. The window size is programmable for 42,
84, or 168 bits of display width.
A cursor mode is provided for Parallel Timing,
Parallel State and Serial State that gives word
position information with respect to the delayed
trigger word. For Parallel Timing the cursor provides decoding of the timing diagram in anyone
of the four formats .
The 308 Date Analyzer comes with an 8 x 252 bit
Reference Memory to provide compare and "Restart If" functions. The Reference Memory "Restart If" function can be used in both Parallel
modes and the Serial State mode.
The 308 can have up to 16 bits of external word
recognition with an optional probe. The 308 provides a Word Recognizer Trigger Out signal (TIL)
to trigger other external equipment. An external
qualifier input, selectable for trigger or clock, is
provided; and when used in conjunction with the
8 channel data probe, plus the word recognizer
probe, yields a total of 25 bits of word recognition
for triggering.
The 308 Signature Analysis portion gives signatures in two different modes, Repeat and Hold. In
the Repeat mode, a signature is taken and
displayed; once displayed the 308 takes another
signature. This process repeats until the stop key
is pressed. In the hold mode the 308 allows the
acquisition of signatures manually. By pushing
the Hold Key the 308 will acquire and display up
to eight signatures simultaneously on the screen.
56
Selectabte Parity -
CHARACTERISTICS
SIGNAL INPUTS
Parallel Timing & State clock & 1 ground lead.
Multiline probe-tip, 8 data lines , 1
Maximum Number of Inputs -
Selectable Input Logic -
Minimum - 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage p-p.centered
on threshold voltage.
Maximum -
± 40 V or less, to at least threshold voltage.
Maximum Non-destructive Input Voltage -
5, 6, 7 or 8 bits (includes
Positive or negative (at probe tip).
Synchronizing Word (Synchronous mode only) - Programmable to require two equal words. If not programmed defaults
to ASCII word SYN .
8.
1 Mil,S pF.
Input Impedance Logic Swing
ODD, EVEN or NONE.
Selectable Bits Per Character parity if active).
- 40 V to + 40
Hunt Word (Synchronous Mode only) - Programmable to
require one word. If not programmed. defaults to "XXXXXXXX"
(Not defined). One Hunt word is equal to 3 Hexadecimal "FF"s
(Line Idles).
Stop Bits (ASYNC ONLY) -
Responds to one or more.
V.
Width of Data Input threshold voltage.
Min 10 ns, with 400 mV overdrive from
Threshold Voltage -
Selectable.
TTL -
+ 1.4 V to + 0.2 V.
VAR -
- 12 V to + 12 V.
Input Mode -
Selectable.
Sample or Latch (to 5 ns w ith 500 mV overdrive voltage).
Serial State
Single channel probe Input.
Input Impedance -
10 Mil, 13 pF.
Non-destructive max input voltage 500 V peak at probe tip,
250 peak at BNC inpu t connector.
Logic Swing
Minimum - 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage, p-p centered
about the threshold.
Maximum -
± 30 V peak .
Signature Analyzer
Single channel data Input via probe 10X - 10 Mil ; 13 pF Clock
start, and stop inputs provided by Data Acquisition probe. Slipon tip to allow characterization of tri-state buss lines.
SONY@
ITEKTRONIX@
LOGIC
ANALYZER
CLOCK
Parallel Timing & State
External Clock: Period -
Min -
50 ns.
Pulse Width, Minimum:
High· Logic Level -
24 .5 ns.
Low· Logic Level -
24.5 ns.
Data Setup Time, Minimum Data Hold Time, Minimum -
25 ns.
0 ns.
Internal Clock: 20 MHz.
Sample Interval, Minimum -
50 ns.
Data Pulse Width to Ensure Sampling,
Minimum -
1 sample interval + IOns.
Sampl e Intervals sequence.
50 ns to 200 nsl sample in 1· 2·5
Qualil ier Input
Selectable· Trigger or Clock
Input Threshold -
TIL Level + 1.4 V ± 0 .2 V.
Maximum Input Voltage -
- 5 V to + 10 V peak.
Serial State
Synchronous or Asynchronous
Paraltel State
Internal Clock lor Asynchronous Mode Selectable Via Key·
board - 50. 75, 11 0, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200,1800,
2400. 4800 and 9600 bits per second (baud rate) .
Displays Hex, Binary & Octal simultaneously lor Quick decode.
Internal Clock Accuracy -
Compare Mode - Inverse video highlighting of differences
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
± 0 .02%.
External Clock lor Asynchronous Mode External Clock lor Synchronous Mode -
Up to 9600 baud.
12 Word Display Table.
Search Mode -
Inverse video highlighting.
Up to 9600 baud.
Signature
MEMOR Y
8 • 252 bits Data Acquisition Memory.
8 • 252 bits Reference Memory.
Parallel Timing & State
Synchronous or Asynchronous.
E.ternal Qualifier.
Displays He •. Binary. & ASCII simultaneously.
8 Ch programmable in He., Binary,
Trigger Delay clocks.
16 Ch, programmable in
TIL level ( + 1.4 V ± 0.20).
Programmable from 0·65535 delay by
Data Position - Selectable in Pre· or Post·Trigger Positions,
First Trigger Mode (Internal Select).
Serial State
Data Word Recognizer - Programmable to require a se·
Quence of two words (or characters).
External Trigger -
Programmable lor one bit 0, 1. or · X·.
Trigger oeley - Programmable Irom 0 to 65535 delay by
word count (character).
Data Position -
12 Word or Character Display.
Search Mode, Inverse Video Display of Word.
Compare Mode ; Inverse Video Display 01 Differences.
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
TIL ( + 1.4 V + 0.2V).
Word Recognizer Trigger Out -
0 · 9. A , C, F, H. p . U.
Serial State
External Word Recogn izer Probe He •. Binary, Octal or Decimal.
Input Threshold -
Displays a 4 digit Signature.
Displays Characters -
TRIGGER
Data Word Recogn izer Octal or Decimal.
Displays the edge selects for clock, start and stop. Also dis·
plays each signature taken simultaneously.
Selectable for Pre· or Post.Triggering .
Framing Error Detection - When a valid stop bit is not de·
tected. data acquisition Is stopped.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Heights
Width
Depth
cm
11 .7
23.7
35.9
in
4.61
9.30
13.90
kg
3.7
4.5
Ib
8.0
10.0
Weight
Without Probes
With Probes
Power Hz.
90 V to 132 V ac, 180 V to 250 V ac, 48 Hz to 440
Consumption -
40 W ma • .
Temperature Range -
O· C to 50·C, operating.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Each 308 Data Analyzer comes with an accessory pouch , one
8 channel Data acquisition probe. with harmonica connector.
plus springed hook clips, a power cord and slip-on tip.
DISPLAY
Status information of the 308 is always displayed at the top 01
the screen. Also, the menu of the 308 is displayed with all lields
visible. In the Serial State the 308 provides an extended menu
lor additional Serial capabilities.
308 Data Analyzer "." .. "., ... " ..... " .. "... $3950
Timing Diagram
Option 01 P6406 Word Recognizer Probe ........... Add $420
ORDERING INFORMATION
Includes P6451 Parallel Data Acquisdltion Probe and P6t07
Serieal Probe.
Programmable Window Memory Size.
1105 Battery Power Supply"."""" "" $1240
Cursor POSition Pointer and Word Decode.
1105 Power Supply provides 1.5 to 2 hrs. of nominal operation.
Positive or Negative Display Logic.
Option 01 , 230 V Operation ................................ No Charge
The SONY" /TEKTRONIX· 308 is manulactured and marketed
in Japan by Sonyrrektroni. Corporation, Tokyo Japan. Out·
side 01 Japan the 308 is available Irom Tektroni., Inc. , its mar·
keting subsidiaries and distributors.
57
LOGIC ANALYZERS
TEK MICROPROCESSOR
7002
Microprocessor Analyzer
Unprecedented Triggering Power in Both the
State and Timing Modes of Data Acquisition
Disassembled Mnemonics for Fast, Simplified Interpretation of State Information
Up to 52 Data Channels
A Unique Configurable Menu to Enhance
Testing Power
Synchronous (External Clock) and Asynchronous (Internal Time Base) Operation
Configurable to Individual 8 and 16 Bit
Microprocessors
The 7002 Logic Analyzer can acquire up to 52
channels of state information in the synchronous
mode, using the clock of the system under test.
The basic instrument contains 28 channels, with
an expansion option (03) increasing this to 44. A
timing option (01) provides 8 additional channels
for a total of 52 synchronous channels .
Alternatively, the Timing Option provides 8 channels of asynchronous information, using the
7oo2's own clock. The state and timing sections
can be operated independently, or used as a
trigger source for one or the other.
All the 7oo2's data acquisition resources are
under the control of a unique user language,
which allows them to be configured according to
the needs presented by a particular situation.
Through user programming , almost any combination of resources can be employed to construct
specific triggers or data qualifiers.
Synchronous resources include four independent
word recognizers up to 48 bits each, two universal time/event counters which can interact with
each other and may be reset on the fly, and
several modes of clock qualification. Asynchronous resources include a word recognizer, and an
8-channel glitch recognizer with an independent
memory.
A series of Personality Modules can adapt the
7002 to the specific characteristics of individual
processors, both 8- and 16-bit. Once data is
acquired , it can be displayed in the disassembled
mnemonics of the processor in use, as well as
hex, octal, ASCII and binary formats . Also available will be a general purpose Personality Module
which will enable the user to support those
microprocessors not specifically supported by
the 7002, or for other general purpose logic
analysis tasks.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Type - State Table: Raster scan - 24 lines x 32 characters
per line. Number of Channels Displayed : (Basic 7002) - 28.
Data - 8. Address = 16. Control - 4. Max Number Acquisition: Memory Locations Displayed - 19.
Radices Available Data: M nemonic disassembly for each supported microprocessor. ASCII. Hex. Binary. Octal.
Address: Hex . Binary. Octal. ASCII.
Control: Mnemonic Disassembly. Binary.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Signal inputs for the 7002 are obtained through optional Personality Modules. These Personality Modules. aiong with Op!IOn 03 determine the number of channels that will be input to
the 7002.
Basic 7002 - Data - 8. Address - 16. Control - 10. Ext
Trigger - 1: Total = 35.
Input Impedance - Determined by the Personality Module
(PM) used.
External Trigger - Input Impedance - 1.0M ± 2% compatible with a 10X coded probe. Threshold - 1.4 V. Setup TIme =
10 ns at BNC. Hold TIme - 18 ns at BNC.
TRIGGER OUT
TTL compatible. capable of driving a 50 {l un terminated transmission line. Accuracy - 1 qualified clock + 86 ns ± 3S ns
after event occurs at Probe TIp.
MISCELLANEOUS
CLOCK
Synchronous Only - Maximum Raw Clock Input 20 MHz .
Minimum time between qualified clocks - 100 ns. Setup/Hold
Time - Determined by PM used. Qualifiers - Max Number =
6. 7002 is capable of shifting or dividing qualified clocks by up
to four positions or times respectively.
DATA QUALIFICATION
Complex Data Qualification allows the acquisition memory to
be turned on and off at any time through use of Word Recognlzers and Counters. This simulates large acquisition memory
and pattern search capability.
MEMORY SIZE
Acquisition Memory (Basic 7002) -
28 x 256.
Storage Memory (Basic 7002) - 28 x 256.
COUNTERS
2 Universal Counters - Counting Mode: Time Mode : Resolution - 1 ms or 1 ~s . Accuracy - ( ± 1 count) x (number 01
start/stop cycles) ± 0 .01 % of value. Maximum count 65.534 . Events Mode: Maximum count - 65.534. Control
Mode: Time Mode: Resolution - 1 ms or 1 I's. Minimum interval generated - 2. Maximum interval generated - 65.534.
Accuracy of generated interval - (- 0/ + 1 count) x (number of
start/stop cycles) ± 0.01 % of value + (- 0 to 0.2 "s) Events
Mode: Minimum interval generated = 2. Maximum Interval
generated = 65.534 .
WORD RECOGNIZERS
Number of Word Recognlzers - 4. Number of Channels (Basic
7002) = 32. Data - 8. Address - 16. Control - 6. Ext.
Trigger - 1. Timing Option link - 1 (if timing option installed).
TRIGGERING
The 7002 can be triggered Irom any of the Word Recognlzers
or from either of the Counters. in the Control mode. This gives
the 7002 the ability to track and trigger on very complex program flows .
58
TRIGGER POSITION
Number 01 qualilied clocks displayed after the trigger point:
Trigger Before Data - 240. Trigger Centered - 128. Trigger
Alter Data = 16. Zero Delay - O.
PROCESSOR HALT
The Processor can be halted when the 7002 stops acquisition.
Processor Halt Delay - (2 qualified state clocks after the 7002
stops acquisition) + PM Delay TIme.
Size -
Three wide 7000 Series Plug-in.
Weight -
3.6 kg (8 Ib).
Power - line Voltage Ranges - Determined by the 7000
Series Mainframe. Power Consumption Max - 49 W at nominal hne voltage. Includes all options.
Temperature Range - Operating - O· C to 50· C. Nonoperating - - SS · C to + 7S · C.
Altitude -
Operating - 15.000 ft . Nonoperating - 50.000 ft.
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
OPTION 01 -
TIMING OPTION
The Timing Option provides the 7D02 user with 8 additIOnal
channets of asynchronous data acquisitIOn at sample rates of
up to 50 MHz.
StGNAL tNPUTS
Number of Channell - 8 (using a P6451 Data Probe). Input
Impedance - 1 Mil shunted by .. 5 pF.
Logic Swing - Min - 500 mV + 2% of threshold voltage
centered on threshold voltage. Maximum - - 15 V to at least
threshold voltage + 10 V. Max Non-Destruct Input Voltage - 40 V to at least + 40 V.
Threshotd Voltage 50 mV increments.
Programmable from - 6.35 to + 6.35 In
Data Setup/ Hold Time 2 ns.
Data Setup -
20 ns. Data Hold -
CLOCK
Asynchronous - Sample Rates - 20 ns to 5 ms In a 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy - ± 0.01 %.
Synchronous - Max raw input clock frequency 20 MHz. Obtained from system under test via the Personality Module. (Min
time between qualified clocks - lOOns.)
MEMORY SIZE
Acquilition Memory - 8 x 255. Glitch Memory -
8 x 255.
WORD RECOGNIZERS
One Data Word Recognizer - 8 channets (ANDed together).
One Glitch Word Recognizer - 8 channets (ORed together
but ANDed With the Data Word Recognizer).
Ext Trigger In.
TRIGGERING
The Timing OptIOn can be triggered from any or all of the following sources: ,. TIming Option Data Word Recognizer; 2.
TIming OptIOn Glitch Word Recognizer; 3. Main SectIOn (7002)
Word Recognizers; 4. Extemal Trigger In.
Maximum Delay -
The 7002 has a conf,gurable menu
ThiS example, useful for
Debugging Real· Tlme.P Programs.
Will tflgger If Address F820 IS
NOT FOUND Within tOO ms ~fthe
occurrance of Address BOoo
All test parameters supplied
by prompts - - - - - IF clause defines a data
stream event. whICh may be
e1ther Single or compound
The 7D02 may simultaneously
monitor up to 4 Word RcognlZers
and 2 Counters
THEN clause defines a
response to the event In thl5
case, setting counter If 1 to
zero and then Incrementing
every millisecond - - - - - - - '
At the same time the counter
IS set , branch to the second
test (bracketing allows
Simultaneous achons).
Sequenllal ActiVities are monitored
uSing multiple ' tests '
The 7D02 now monitors the data
stream for an event to satISfy
the second test s IF clause
DIGITAL DELAY
65.534 Sample Clocks.
GLITCH LATCH
Min. Pulse Width -
5 ns. ASYNCH RONOUS Mode Only.
DISPLAY
Timing Diagram Mode - Number of Channels - 8, Window
Size - 124 words in X 1 mode or 31 words in X4 mode. Data
channels can be relocated by the user. Numeric Formats: Hex,
Octal, Binary, ASCII. Glitch displayed as a - In the table beside
DATA . Timing Display: Glitches are displayed by an I above
the line where the glitch occured. Max Number of Words Displayed - 19. Numeric Formats: Hex, Binary, Octal ASCII.
Number of Words Scrolled - 255. Trigger PositIOn Accuracy
- ± I -bit (ASYNCH RONOUS Mode).
If the event occurs. then branch
back to test If 1 and start the program over Concurrent measurements are In the same test
Or If counter If 1 has reached
100 ms. then actIvate the tngger
MISCELLANEOUS
The P6451 Data Acquisition Probe comes standard with an
Option 01.
OPTION 03 -
EXPANSION OPTION
The Expansion Option provides the 70 02 with the ability to
support most IS-bit microprocessors.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Adds an additional 16 bits to the 7D02. Data = 8; Address - 8.
WORD RECOGNITION
Maximum Number of Channels - 48. Data - 16. Address
- 24. Control - 6. Ext.Trigger - 1. Timing Option - 1 (if
liming optIOn Installed).
DISPLAY
Maximum Number of Channels - 44, Data - 24, Control - 4.
Acquilition Memory 256.
16, Address
MEMORY SIZE
44 x 256. Storage Memory -
44 x
ORDERING INFORMATION
7002 Logic Analyzer .......................... $4400
Option
Option
Option
Option
01 (timing) ................................................ Add
7D02FOI (timing. lIeld-lnstalled) ....................
03 (expansion) ......................................... Add
7D02F03 (expanelon. lield-Installed) .............
By uSing the proper per
sonallty module, software
flow can be displayed uSing
the mnemonics of the chip
under test. here the Motorola
MC6802
S1700
S2050
S1200
S1400
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
016-0669-00 - (fits any 7600 or 7400 mainframe) Hardware
ki t, Electrical equipment : Logic Analyzer securing ........... S10
067-0939-00 - Service Maintenance Kit ...................... 5450
. I
59
LOGIC ANALYZERS
TEK MICROPROCESSOR
7002
MICROPROCESSOR
PERSONALITY
MODULE
MICROPROCESSOR
SUPPORT
Processors
Supported
TektroniX will support all popular
MICroprocessors with the 7002 Logic
Analyzer. The following support is
now available:
Microprocessor
Type
·7002 Support
Features
8-BIT
8080
8085
Z80
6800
680216808
6809/6809E
6502
1802
8031
8039/8035
8048/8049
8051
8748
8751
6801 /6803
FM
FM . P-C
FM . P-C
FM. P-C
FM . P-C
FM. P-C
FM
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
16 BIT
8086
8088
Z8001
Z8OO2
68000
9900 TMS/SBP
· FM - Full Mnemonic
Disassembly
7002 Personality Module
Requ ired
PM101
General Purpose
Logic Analysis
Including
8 & 16 Bit I'P
Option 0 t 8080
mnemonics
Option 02 6502
mnemoOics
PM10l
PM10l
PM10l
PM 101
PM101
PM 101
PM 101
PM101
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
PM101 OPT 01
PM104
PM105
PM102
PM103
PMll1
PM10l OPT 02
062-6001-00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-5999-00 (Application
062-6003-00 (Application
062-6000-00 (Application
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
Manual)
REQUIRES 7002
Optton 03
44 Stored Channels
w/Option 03
28 without
SIGNAL INPUTS
Address
Data
Control
w/Option 03
24
16
10
Impedance
(nominal)
1/2 LSTTL
25 pF
Vln low minImax
o V/0.5 V
V In high min/max
Maximum Input
Non-destructlve
PM106
PM107
PMll0
PM108
PM109
PM10l and 062-6002-00 (Application Manual)
FM. P-C
FM . P-C
FM . P-C
FM. P-C
FM . P-C
STD
P-C - Pre-Configured .
Single Plug. Interconnection
STD - Standard Radices
(Hex. Binary. Octal)
For those 8-Blt and 16-Blt microprocessors not currently supported by specific personality modules. and for general purpose applications. the PM101 General Purpose Personality Module is available. See Data Sheet AX-4489 for details.
PM 1 00 Series
Microprocessor Personality Modules
The PM100 Personality Modules are high performance data acquiSition modules designed for
use with specific microprocessors.
PM102 through PM111 interface with the system
under test through a single plug for error free
connection. The PM101 provides general purpose logic analysis capability through individual
acquisition leads. The interface to the logic analyzer is also a single plug for easy change of processor type.
The modules. operating synchronously with the
system under test , demultiplex busses, synthesize signals necessary to track processor status.
and transfer data to the logic analyzer memory.
Word recognizer displays are formatted in the
mnemonics of the processor control signals. A
synthesized control function allows triggering or
data qualification on instruction fetches. The Personality Module also provides full mnemonic disassembly and formatting for the display.
2.4 V/7 V
- 7 V to + 15 V
1.4 V
Threshold
Voltage
HysteresIs (nominal)
0.4 V
DISPLAYED CHANNELS
Address
Data
Control
w/Option 03
24
16
4
CLOCK
Max Input
Frequency
PM101
20 MHz
(100 ns MIN
between
Qualified Clocks)
General Purpose Personality Module
M inimum Pulse
Width-High/Low
25 ns/25 ns
Data Acquisition and Display FormaHing for
any Type of 8- or 16-bit Microprocessor
Input Impedance
(nominal)
50 kU
15 pF
The PM101 Personality Module offers data acquIsition capabilities designed to fit any type of
synchronous digital system including those with
8- or 16-blt microprocessors.
PROCESSOR HALT DELAY
2 Ouallfled Clock
Cycles Plus .
58 ns
• Except Min/Max. HOLD. Reset. 2.0 to 5.5 V.
.. Except min/max . Hold . Reset . - 1 to + 5.5 V.
••• ReqUIres user modification to enable.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP /HOLD TIMES
Clock /Qualifier Inputs Selup - 55 ns max . 35 ns tYPical.
Hold - 0 ns max.
Addre ss and Data Inputs Setup - 45 ns max. 25 ns nominal.
Hold - 0 ns ma x.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM 101 General Purpose Personality
Module ................................................. $1400
PM 10 1 Option 01 8080 Mnemonics ..................... Add $300
The processor may be halted by the personality
module when the 7002 triggers.
60
PM 10 1 Option 02 6502 Mnemonics ..................... Add $300
PMtOt General Purpose Pesonality Modu/e
PERSONALITY MODULES
FOR lOGIC ANALYZERS
TEK
PERSONALITY MODULE SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
PM102
PM103
PM104
PM10S
PM106
PM107
PM108
PM109
PM110
PM111
6800
68AOO
68BOO
6802
68A02
6B08
8085
80BSA
B08SA-2
Z-80
Z-80A
Z-80B
80B6
B086-2
80B6-4
BOB8
ZBOO2
68000L4
68000L6
6BOOOL8
68000L10
Z8001
Z8001A
6B09,68A09
68B09,6809E,
6BA09E,68B09E
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
9
9
10
10
20
16
15
20
8
15
16
16
15
24
16
10
16
16
17
16
9
1/2 LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL
1/2 LSTTL 40 pF
40 pF
40 pF
40pF
37 pF
1 LSTTL
70 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
1/2 LSTTL
40 pF
40 pF
Except PHALT
l-LSTTL
8
8
o V/0.6 V
o V/0.6 V
o V/0.6 V
o V/0.6 V
- 0 .5 V/+ 0.5 V
- 0.5 V/+ 0.5 V
o V/0 .5 V
- 0 .5 V /+ 0.5 V
o V/0.5 V
o V/0 .6 V
2.0 V /7.0 V
2.0 V/7.0 V
2.0 V/7 .0 V
2.0 V /7 .0 V
2.0 V/7 .0 V'
2.0 V/7 .0 V'
2.4 V /7.0 V
2.0 V/5 .5 V
2.0 V/7 .0 V
2.0 V/7 .0 V
± 15 V
± 15 V
- 7 V to + 15 V
- 7Vto + 15V
- 5 V to + 7 V"
- 5 V to + 7 V"
- 7Vto + 15V
- 7 V to + 15 V
± 7V
- 7to + 15V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
1.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.4 V
OV
0.4 V
0.4 V
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
R/W,NMI ,IRQ,
FETCH
R/W,NMI,IRQ,
FETCH
R/W ,I/O MEM ,
INRQ (any
interrupt)
IFC (FETCH)
R/W,(INTER REO),
1/0 MEM ,
FETCH
20
16
8 (see text)
20
8
8 (see text )
16
16
R/W ,I/O MEM ,
INTREQ,IFC
(FETCH)
24
16
4 (see text)
16
16
(see text)
16
8
R/W.lIFC ,
(lIFC + IFC2).
INT
2 MHz
6 MHz
10 MHz
6 MHz
8MHz
5 MHz
4 MHz
10 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
180 ns/180 ns
180 ns/180 ns
70 ns/40 ns
70 ns/70 ns
50 kll
35 pF
50 k!l
35 pF
50 kll
40 pF
50 k!l
40 pF
50 kll
40 pF
50 k!!
40 pF
50 kll
37 pF
50 k!!
55 pF max
50 kll
40 pF
50 k!!
35 pF
90 ns
90 ns
63 ns
60 ns
80 ns'"
80 ns'"
65 ns
50 ns
73 ns
50 ns
113 Clock Penod + 2nsl
213 Clock period - 15 ns
105 ns/ l05 ns
44 ns/44 ns
70 ns/70 ns
220 ns/21 0 ns
For complete Information and data sheets on microprocessor analysis products described , contact your nearest Tektronix Sales Office.
PM 102 6800 Personality Modules
PM 103 6802 Personality Modules
SYSTEM CHARACTERISITCS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES
Data Input. Setup - 40 ns max .
Hold - 0 ns max .
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM102 .. ................... ............................. $1400
PM103 .................. ...... .......................... $1400
.
+
lIF
1 WORD "COGNIZER •
1 DATA:
I
I
I I
0
ADORE m ! 1 FETC 1=
CHi 2=
R/ W:
SA:
1 1NT:,I;I, I VAL.OP=' elT. TRI!.
1 TIMInG WR=.
lTHEN 1)0
1 TRI,GER .-MAIN
1
-BEF~RE DATA
1
-SYSTEM UNDER TEST CONT .
1
-STANDARD CLOCK QUAL.
END EST 1
1
IN:I
•
l'
' l ,I .
•
F
~'
Ir P .. H1
PM 103 Default Tngger Menu
PM103 MnemOniC Display
61
lOGIC ANALVZERS
TEK MICROPROCESSOR
__
m:~IIIIIRU~a_
~~ _ ~m~~
--- TFEBFA I N AL.DX
FEBFS CHPB AL. I SS
0~9 FEBFC
96
CODE FETCH
FEBFD JA FEC00
010 0FFE4 00
I / O READ
011 FEBFE 01
CODE FETCH
FEJ3FF RET
012 FEC00~HOVB AL. I E2
FEC01
E2
C0~E FETCH
013 0047A EEED MEMORY READ
014 FESED ORE AL , AL
Ol~ FEBEE
CO
CODE FETCH
FESEF JNS FEBEA
016 FEBFO F9
CODE FETCH
FEaFl ? AN~B AL · . 7F
Ol~ FEBF2
7F
CODE FETCH
FEBF3~CALL •• •••
~lA FE~EA ~A1L
FF9F7
_._aW_a.._
PM 104 8085 Personality Module
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP/HOLD TIMES
Data and Addr... Input. Setup - 50 ns max.
Hold - 0 ns max.
ALE InputSetup - 40 ns max .
Hold - 0 ns max.
HOLD InputSetup - 120 ns (measured to trailing edge 01 CLK. t2. or
TWAIT).
Hold - 0 ns.
READY Input Setup - 135 ns max (referenced to rising edge of T2·
Hold - 0 ns.
Order PM104 •.• " .....•..•........ "." ............ $1400
PM 1 05
~
Z-80 Personality Module
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAX
Parameter
Setup
Hold
Units
ns
Address 0-15
50
5
lOa
ns
Data 0-7
35 a
Ml
18
ns
39
OD
22D
MREO
ns
22b
ns
IORO
ob
Sa
ns
WR
90a
BU SAK
46
4
ns
ns
HALT
46
4
c
c
4
ns
INT
35
74
ns
NMI
0
ns
WAIT
od
50d
aRelative to rising edge of clock on T3 for Ml cycle or to the
trailing edge of T3 for memory or 1/0 cycles.
bRelative to rising edge of clock on T1 for MREO and to rising
edge of clock on IW for 10RO.
cRelative to rising edge of the clock of the last T state prior to
an Ml cycle.
dRelative to trailing edge of the clock of T2 state lor a memory
cycle or to TW for an 00 cycle.
This 8086 mnemonic display shows disassembled instructions entering the 8086 queue. In
this illustration instructions that enter the
queue but are not executed are flagged with
question marks. Operands for which there is no
data (as when the instruction is flushed before
the operand is retrieved) are marked with
asterisks.
-~
--- T
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
016
019
020
021
022
02 3
FESFA
FEBFC
CFFE4
FEBFE
FEC00
0047A
FEBED
FEBEE
FEBFO
FEBF2
FEBEA
FESEC
FEBEE
FEBF7
~04~A
FEBF9
0 ·? ~
J:E"RF"r:
~2 4
s
FEBF~
8086 Personality Module
8088 Personality Module
m
When used with the TEKTRONIX 7002 Logic Analyzer. the PM106/PM107 solves the major problem
encountered when debugging an 8086/8088
based design; that is understanding what is happening in the instruction queue. The logic analyzer acquires all the information transmitted across
the data bus. Queue status is decoded to determine which instructions were actually executed
and which were fetched but not executed.
QFILL ~ 2 0
LS1- .. ~ 3 0
10 P. L 3 0
LST-" ~ 2 0
LST-" ~ 2 "
HEHP. ~ 2 0
ODUHP H 1 0
LST-F ~ 2 0
LST-F ~ 2 0
2LS-F ~ 3 e
ODUHP ~ 2 0
2LS-F ~ 2 0
OFILL ~ 3 0
ODUMP H 1 ~
HEH~ ~
1 0
LST-F ~ 2 e
OFILL ~ 2 0
t ';T
";'7~f;
-~:
U
~
iidfi"~'"
Clock
Qualifier
Word
ReCOil
X
:~ot~~ w7;~ th~~~~~
~~e.:';.:.~~~~::~s.~~X!e of
Cl Mi lO 12LS + Fl· When C2
is lOW . (;1 Indicates whelher present operation is a
memory or i~t-outPU t
access. When 2 is high.
C1 goes high. when the
second to the last byte of
the instruction queue was
~ei~~~:.~ri~n~f
X
X
X
X
X
X
an execut-
C2 Code fetch goes to a high
:::~~~~;,::rtruction is
C3 :~~A ~n~h~~mbination of
ic;ij]nn
X
X
C5 HOLD Acknowledoe
~ s Ieode fAt h
C7 HOLD acknowledge line
provides visual indication
01 a HOLD acknowledge
condition on the screen
when 7002 is runninn
C8 Machine state 1
C9/Wait
A20-23 provide queue level information and BHE.
Inm x i
X
X
X
X
"
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM106 ........ " ........ "" ............................ $1800
MAXIMUM SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (Min and Ma. Modes)
PM106 Option 01 With Service Test Unit ............ Add S500
PM107 ................................... "."."." .... $1800
P.rameter
Setup
Notes
Hold Units
Address
45
20
Data
30
0
Ready
80
0
ns I =tive to falling
of ALE
ns
Relative to failing
edge of clock
on T. state
ns
Relative to falling
edge of clock at
T, or T.
TRYLCL. TRYHCH.
TCHRYX
All Maximum Mode Status Lines . Series Resistance: 10 II
additional.
SIGNAL TIMING, MINIMUM MODE (Synthesized)
Typical
Ma.
ALE falling edge (TCHLL)
ALE width (TLHLL)
Mi lO (TCHTCV)
INTA (TCHCTV)
DT/R (TCHCTV)
40
55 a
DEN (TC VCTV)~CVCTX
63
WR ~CVCTV) (TCVCTX)
HLDA
45
d
Para mete'·
33
68
b
Min Unit.
60
110
110
c
80
80
e
'Names Given by Intel 8086 Users Manual.
a. 0 ns after lalling edge of clock lor T2 cycle.
b .. Clock high width plus 33 ns.
c. Clock high width plus lOOns.
d. Equal to or greater than 1 clock width plus 33 ns.
e. Greater than 1 clock width plus 100 ns.
62
'3
Control Name
and Function
Stored
X
CO R/W tLST- F) . When C2 Is
low. 0 indicates R/W status - when C2 is high CO
8086 State Table Display
Order PM105 •• " •• "." .•.••.•.••.•• " ••.••.•. "". $1400
PM 1 06
PM 107
II;
.~!
ATll_
3CEC
7796
FFOO
C301
E2B0
EBED
0AFF
79C0
24F9
E97F
0AE9
~A00
79C0
BAFF
EBED
FFE4
3CEC
8086 Default Trigger Menu
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
PM 107 Option 0 1 with Service Test Unit ............. Add S500
Or Service Test unit may be ordered separately:
067- 1024-00 without power supply .............................. " S500
PM 1 08
IIIJj1
Z8002 Personality Module
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAX
Parameter
Address 0-15
Data 0-15
READ/wRITE
10/MEM
INTREO
IFC
I BUSAK
I MREO
I RESET
I PHALTED'
l AS
IWAIT
Setup
Min Ma.
- 34 c
-
-
160b
-
-
40'
40a
40a
-
40 a
40 a
40 a
40 a
40a
40'
Hold
Min M..
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Units
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
a. Referenced to falling edge of T3.
b. Latched at falling edge of T2. Held until
cleared by interrupt acknowledge cycle.
c . Latched at rising edge of l AS .
'The ' OR ' of Z8002 stopped and 7002 HALT.
Order PM108 ....................................... $1800
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
~
PM 1 09
68000 Personality Module
The PM 109 solves the ma jor problem in
debugging 68000 based systems by flagging
pre fetched but unexecuted instructions.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAX)
(With RelPect to Fallina Edae of Clock)
Parameter
Setup
Hold
Units
45
20
50
40
25
40
30
40
20
20
20
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
na
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Address
Dala
IUDS
IIPLO/IPL l /IPL2
IDTACK
IHALT
l AS
IBGACK
IReset
Control Name
and Function
Stored
Word
Rec
Clock
Qualifier
CO (FL-IACK) LOS
X
X
Cl (OPC/EXT) R/W
X
X
C2 (Fetch)
X
X
C3 SUPER/USER
X
X
C4 IBGACK
X
C5 IINTR
X
C6 l AS
C7 IHALT
C8 IDTACK
C9 I As sampled
-Note: Not recommended that these lines be used for
qualification.
X
X
X
X
cklck
Control Name
and Function
Stored
N/S Normal/Svstem
X
X
CO Encoded - Read/W"te Low on writes. refresh
and Interrupt ACK Cycles
Cl Encoded - H~h on I/O.
X
Interrupt AC and Fetch n.
Low on memory, Fetch "
EPA transfer, reserved
in ternal operation and re
fresh cYCles
C2 Encoded - High on
X
Fetches, Interrupt ACK
and refresh cycles
C3 Interrupl request X
combined NMI , VI. NVI
and SEGTfactive hioh)
C4 Low on EPA. EPN and
IMO read or write cycles
CS True l8001 R/W sional
C6 Low on internal
operations, refresh
and bus acknowledge
cycles
C7 Halt-Low indicates the
processor is halted. The
PMll0 uses the proces
sor/stop signal and the
l8001 continues to ex
ecute refresh cycles
C8 /Wait - used to qualify
out walt states
C9 General clock qualifier generated
by the PMll 0 (active high)
Word
RecoQ
Clock
Qualifier
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6809 DefalJlt Trigger MenlJ
Control Name
and Function
x.
X
X
When ordenng, please use the exact nomenclature given here:
Stored
CO READ/WRITE
X
Cl /l FC
X
C2 I(IFC + IFC2)
X
C3 INT
X
C4 BA
C5 /l OCO
C6 /VMA
C7 (HALT)o(DMNBREO)
C8 DMA + DEAD
'NOTE : This line useful for word recognition
mended for clock qualification purposes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
only ; not recom-
Order PM110 ....................................... $1800
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here :
PM 109 .................................................. $2000
For PMl 09 and Service Test Unit:
PM109 Opt 01 .................. .................................... Add $1200
Or the Service Test Unit can be ordered separately:
067-1025-00 ................................................................. $1200
PM 11 0
~
Z8001 Personality Module
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAX)
Data
Setup
32 ns
Hold
3 ns
Address
15 ns
23 ns
SNO-SN6
(segment
Inouts)
N/S (normal
Isystem)
2S ns
2S ns
86 ns
o ns
AS
78 ns
R/W
6S ns
STO · ST3
6S ns
o ns
o ns
Wait
55 ns
24 ns
Relative to the falling
edQe of clock at T3
Relative to rising edge
of AS
Relative to rising edge
of AS
Relative to the falling
edge of the clOCk at T3
Relative to the rising
edoe of the clOCk at T2
Relative to the rising
edQe of the clock at T2
Relative to the rising
edge of the clOCk at T2
Relative to the trai lin~
~f the clOCk at 2
A for me~ or I/O
~IeS , and at TW 3 or
or
AS for acknowledQe cycles
MO,BUSAK
8S ns
o ns
Relative to the traili~
edge of the clock at 3
VI.NVI
110 ns
o ns
=~Ii~r t~ t~~~a~irh
SEGT
85 ns
o ns
Relative to the tra ili~
edge of the clock at 3
NMI
110 ns
..
Notes :
' mlnimum pulse width - 42 ns.
"minimum pulse Width - 28 ns.
PM 111
6809/6809E Personality Module
lID
6809 Mnemonic Display
The TEKTRONIX PM 111 Personality Module is a
dedicated acquisition module designed for use
with 6809 microprocessor-based systems. By
using the convenient Tektronix Low Profile Dip
Clip Adapter, the PMll1 will also support the
6809E -based systems.
When ordering, please use the exact nomenclature given here.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PM111 ................................................. $1600
40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip Adapter Numbers 10 em Version
015-0339-00 (Recommended) ......... _........ _..................... 540
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
SETUP AND HOLD TIMES (MAX)
Parameter
Setup
Hold
Unit
ADDRESS
220
ns
0
DATA
40
10
ns
R/W
140
ns
0
BA
190
ns
0
BS
160
0
ns
I(BMNBREO)
120
ns
0
INMI
ISS'
ns
0
/lRO
9S'
ns
0
IFIRO
9S'
ns
0
All lines are measured from the source of the signal with respect to the falling edge of E at the llF socket.
'NOTE : All PM111 Interrupt lines are sampled on the failing
ed~e of E In contrast to the Motorola spec of sampling on the
falling edge of O.
Female Adapter 380-0647-01 ......................................... 525
40 Pin Dip Socket 136-0623-00 ..................... _............. 52.40
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature - - 15 to + 5S · C except for PM109
which IS 0 to 50 · C.
Storage Temperature - - 62 to + 8S · C except for PM109
whICh IS - 55 to + 7S· C.
Operating Altitude - 4.5 km (1S ,OOO It).
Storage Altitude - IS km (50,000 It).
Size - 12 em X 20.3 cm X 4.3 em except for PM106, 107,
PM109 and PM111 which are 12 cm X 20.3 cm X 4.8 cm.
Weight - ,, 1.2 kg.
Cable Length Module to 7002 - 122 :t 2.5 cm.
Module to.p - 33 cm :t 1.2 cm except for PM101 which is
3S em and PM111 which is 47 em :t 1.3 cm
63
ANALYZERS
TEK LOGIC
Display Formatters
There are two Display Formatters available with
the 7001 Logic Analyzer- the DF1 and DF2. Both
offer Timing , Mapping, and State Table Displays
in Binary, Hexadecimal and Octal formats . The
DF2 offers additional formats for IEEE-488/GPIB
and ASCII.
The Display formatters are dedicated for use with
the 7001 . They provide complete alphanumeric
character generation , so that the logic analysis
package can be used in mainframes without CRT
readout (mainframe Option 01) .
There are also two modes of automatic data
acquisition in the DF1 and DF2 which compare
the entire 7001 memory to the reference memory.
If a difference is detected, the difference and
location will be intensified in the display, read out
at the top of the CRT, and the number of resets
required to find the error will be displayed . This
function , called RESET IF 7001 = REF, allows full
comparison of stored and newly acquired data.
To compare only the tables selected by the
cursor control, use RESET IF TABLES = .
7D0 1TRIG
+24
REF
TPIG
+1 9
?91E
CS63
21564
F93F
~56tl
AS6!!
6!566
E56 7
1:568
9569
,"6A
1156B
8561
4562
[:563
2564
A~6~
6566
356C
£567
S56D
756£
P.56F
1568
9569
eD7e
D56B
~6A
3!5 lie
B56D
7:5 liE
aD?1
4D12
CD 13
DI28
TRIG
[l1 211
Digital Latches
The DL2 and DL502 Digital Latches extend the
7001 Logic Analyzer's measurement capabilities
by detecting narrow pulses in a data stream that
cannot be captured by a logic analyzer alone.
Operating in an asynchronous mode, the 16
channel Digital Latches can detect spikes or
glitches between system clock edges that are
narrower than the sample clock interval or as
narrow as 5 ns.
Df2 DISPLAY
'OJIIMATTUI
7001 General Purpose
Logic Analyzer
16 Stored Channels
Up to 1024 Words Deep
State or Timing
Up to 100 MHz Sample Rate
High Impedance Probes
1 B Bit Word Recognizer
Clock Qualifier
64
The 7001 is a dual-wide, plug-in instrument which
occupies one vertical amplifier compartment and
an adjacent time base compartment in any 7000
Series Oscilloscope Mainframe. With this compatibility, you can configure a total logic analysis
system. Using a four-wide mainframe oscilloscope, you can combine your logic analyzer with
your analog oscilloscope and display the outputs
of both at the same time.
TEK
LOGIC
ANALYZERS
Da ta sampling can be asynchronous (internal clock) or synchronous (external clock). In asynchronous modes. sampling
rates can be selected up to 100 MHz in the 4 Ch mode. up to
50 MHz in the 8 Ch mode. or up to 20 MHz In the 16 Ch mode.
External sampling clocks up to 50 MHz can be used in the 4
and 8 Ch modes. and up to 25 MHz in the 16 Ch mode.
Characleristlc
Tim e Requlremenl
Minimum Setup Time
12.5 ns or less
Minimum Hold Time
8.5 ns or less
Async Filter - Rejects recognized words that remain true for
less than an operator selected time period. Period is vanable
from 10 ns to 300 ns.
W.R. Out Connector - A recognized word produces a displayed trigger marker and a front panel output for triggering
external Circuitry.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Clock . Qualifier. and Data Input Source-Two multi-lead
P6451 Probes provide connections for 9 Ch (9 input and
ground) each. Ch 0-7 and clock are through probe 1. and Ch 815 and qualifier are through probe 2. Each probe attaches
through a 25 pin oonnector at the 7001 front panel.
Clock QUllifier P6451
·External
Selup
Hold
20 ns
a ns
11 ns
7 ns
' Measured at external BNC jack . For
BNC ooaxial cable Is recommended.
Inpul Impedance -
a ns hold time. 42 inch
1 Mil paralleled by 5 pF (at probe head).
Minimum Logic swing - 500 mV plus 2% of threshold voltage
pop or less. centered on the threshold voltage.
Maximum Logic Swing - - 40 V or less. to at least threshold
voltage pius 10 V. (Max non-destructive input ± 40 V.)
Characlerlstlc
Requlremenl
HI Level
;,: 1.9 V
LO Level
", 0.1 V
Impedance (RISing Edge)
50 II ±10%
Format -
Front panel selectable.
Blls per
Channal
Dill Channal.
Displayed
508
254
SAMPLING RATE
Asynchronous (inlernal clock) - Sampling Intervals are selectable from IOns to 5 ms in 18 steps using a 1-2-5 sequence.
Dati
Chlnnel.
Olspllyed
Maximum
Slmpling
Rite
Minimum
S.mpllng
Int.rvll"
Min. Oal.
Plus.
Width"
0-3
0-7
0-15
100 MHz
50 MH z
20 MHz
10 ns
20 ns
50 ns
15 ns
25 ns
55 ns
'Minlmum data pulse width to insure recording is one sample
interval + 5 ns.
Synchronous (external clock) - + or - edge of clock pulse
can be selected to initiate sample.
Dati
Oil.
Oltl
MIX.
Minimum
Set·up
Hold
Chlnnll.
Clock
Clock
Tim.
Tim.
Olspllyed
Freq.
Width"
Required Required
0-3
0-7
0-15
50 MHz
50 MHz
25 MHz
10 ns
10 ns
20 ns
20 ns
20 ns
23 ns
0
0
0
' Hlgh and low clock width.
WORD RECOGNIZER
Word Recognizer - 16 data inputs. Probe Qualifier and External Qualifier. Output is true when input oonditions match set·
tlngs (HI . X. LO).
Asynchronous Mode
Format
Minimum
Inpul Pulse Wldlh
(Asynchronous Mode)
Any Single Channel
10 ns or less
Channels 0·3
15 ns or less
Any Other Combination
20 ns or less
40 · C. Nonoperating:
Operating : to 15.000 feet. Nonoperating: to 50.000
Vibration - With the 7001 and OFl or OF2 oombined. frequency swept from 10 to 50 cps at one minute pe; sweep.
Vibrate for 15 minutes along each of the 3 major axes at 0.015
inch total displacement. Hold 3 minutes at any major resonance. or If none. at 50 cps. Total time. 54 minutes.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g·s. 1/2 sine 11 s
duration. 2 shocks in each direction along 3 major axes. for a
total of 12 shocks.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two. P6451 Data Input Probes (010.6451 .03).
DF1 CHARACTERISTICS
The oFl reformats the output of the 7001 in a choice of five
display formats including TIming . Mapping and state tabie displays in Binary. Hexadecimal and Octal. It Imposes no significant electrical characteristics on the 7001 which affect mea·
surement parameters.
Channel 0 -
Triggers on rising edge of CH
a data.
External Trigger/Qualifier Input Connector (EXT TRIG/·
QUALIFIER INPUT) Characlerl stlcs
Requiremenl
Threshold
+1 .4 V. ± 0.2 V
(TTL Level)
M inimum Pulse Width
15 ns
Maxim um Safe Input
Voltage
- 5 V or less.
Triggered Light -
to at least
+ 10
DF2 CHARACTERISTICS
The OF2 reformats the output of the 7001 in a choice of seven
display formats including TIming . Mapping and state table displays in Binary . Hexadecimal . Octal . ASCII and IEEE488/GPIB. It imposes no significant electrical characteristics on
the 7001 which affect measurernent parameters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
V
Indicates display trigger has occurred.
GPIB Probe Adapter for the P6451 (103-0209-00). (A 24 pin
IEEE Standard Connector with quick connection to the P6451
Probe Head.)
CURSOR
DL2 CHARACTERISTICS
Word Selection - Cursor appears as a movable second intenSified spot on the CRT display. It is used to select and mark
a word.
The 16 channel 0L2 aids the 7001 measurement capabilities
by detecting narrow asynchronous pulses of less than one
sample interval or as narrow as 5 ns in a data stream. The 0L2
plugs into any compartment of a 7000 Series Mainframe. Two
25 pin connectors connect the 0L2 with the 7001. Data is
acquired via two P6451 Probes which plug into the front panel
of the OL2.
Coarse and Fine Position Controls - Coarse control moves
cursor in increments of 16 sample intervals. Fine control moves
cursor in increments of 1 sample interval.
1016
0·3
0-7
0·15
Altitude feet.
+
TRIGGER
MEMORY
4096 bits.
Temperature - Operating : O' C to
40' C to + 75 · C.
Source - Three-positlOl1 switch provides selection of trigger
source from among channel O. external (External Trigger/Qualifier Input). or internal word recognizer. A display can also be
obtained with front panel MANUAL TRIGGER pushbutton.
Threshold al Probe Tips - Front panel switch selects fixed
TIL ( + 1.4 V ± 0.2 V). variable ( ± 12 V) or split (variabie for top
probe. TIL for bottom probe). Front panel jack monitors variabie threshold only.
Storage -
ENVIRONMENTAL
Sync hronous Mode
7001 CHARACTERISTICS
The 7001 acqUires 4. 8. or 16 Ch of data and stores the data In
a 4 k memory. Data storage format is selectable as 4 Ch X
1016 bits. 8 Ch X 508 bits. or 16 Ch X 254 bits.
Cursor to Trigger Position CRT Readout - The difference in
sample interval bits between cursor position and trigger posi.
t,on is displayed by the CRT readout at the top. right-hand
portion of the CRT graticule (e.g .. TRIG ± XXX).
Cursor Position Binary Dala - The logic state of each dis·
played channel coincident with the cursor position is displayed
in Binary by the readout at the bottom of the CRT (HI = 1. LO
Minimum Pulse Width to Initiate Latch Minimum Ampl itude to Initiate Latc h threshold.
Minimum Sample Interval Asynchronous Clock -
Intensified Zone
Locallon
Dala Position
Swllch Seltlng
Pre·trlgger
Center·trigger
Post·trigger
Near extreme right of display
Near center of display
Near extreme left of display
50 ns.
ORDERING INFORMATION
= 0).
Trigger Intensified Marker - Intensified zone indicating the
tngger point. selectable by a switch (DATA POSITION).
5 ns.
500 mV centered at
7D01F LogiC Analyzer (7001 and
OFl Display Formatter) ••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••• • $5600
7D01F2 Logic Analyzer(7DOl and
OF2 Display Formatter) ••••• ••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••• $6200
7001 Logic Analyzer ... ......... ... ........... $4200
DF1 Display Formatter •••••••••••••••• ••••••• $1700
DF2 Display Formatter •••• ••••••••••••••••••• $2300
DL2 Digital Latch ...................... .......... $1800
Trigger Intensified Marker Accuracy - Position of intensified
zone with respect to word recognizer output.
Sample Inle",al
Control SeIling
Maximum
BII Error
10 ns
± 4 bits
± 3 bits
,, 1 bit
20 ns
50 ns to 5 ms
POWER
DL 502 Digital Latch . ...... .. .. ...... .......... $1600
7603 Oscilloscope· ............................ $2555
Option 01 (Deletes one readoul board) ................ Sub $300
7704A Oscilloscope· •• ••••••••••• ••••••• •••••• $3995
Option 01 (Deletes one readout board) ................ Sub $300
To modify your present 7001 to include the new clock qualifier
feature order clock Qualifier' modifICation kit.
Line Voltage Ranges loscope Mainframe.
Determined by the 7000 Series Oscil-
040-0891 -00 ............................................................... $170"
Power Consumption -
32 W at nominal line voltage.
· See pages 155 through 175 in this catalog for details on these
and additional 7000 Series Mainframes. See pages 183
through 204 for details on complementary 7000 Series PluginS.
··Price does not include installation.
65
LOGIC
TEK ANALYZER
ACCESSORIES
DIP CLIP ADAPTERS
ACQUISITION PROBES
40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip - 10 ern cable (order M/F adapter
below.)
(015-0339-00) ................................................................... $40
40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip - 30 ern cable (order M/F adapter
below)
(015-0339-02) ................................................................... $40
Mate Adapter for 40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip - For use with
PM 10l 7002 General Purpose Personality Module (or with individualleads such as the 10-wide comb set 012-0747-00)..
380-0560-05 ...................................................................... $15
P6406 Replacement Word Recognizer Probe For SONY /TEKTRONIX· 308 only
(010-6406-01) ................................................................ $490
Female Adapter for 40 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip - For use
with dedicated 7002 Personality Modules.
380-0647-01 ..................................................................... $25
SPECIAL PURPOSE LEAD SETS
P6107 Replacement Serial Data Probe For SONY-/TEKTRONIX· 308
010-6107-03 ................................................................... $105
P6451 Replacement ActiYe Probe (010-6451 -03) For 7002 Option 01. WR 501 , 7001, 7D0 1F,
7D01 F2. Two probes are needed for 16 channel
operation ......................................................................... $525
•
P64528 Channels Data Acquisition Probe. For DAS 9100.
010-6452-01 ................................................................... $700
P6454 100 MHz Clock Probe. For 91 A08.
010-6454-01 ................................................................... $250
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Flying Lead Set, 5 In
012-0987-00 (P6452) ....................................................... $40
Flying Lead Set, 10 In (P6452)
012-0746-00 ..................................................................... $ 15
3
7
Package of 10 ground (or VH) sense leads, 5 in green with
Pomona Hook Tip
012-0990-01 (P6455, P6456) ........................................... $50
T
P6456 8 Channel ECL Pattem Generator Probe
010-6456-01 ................................................................... $550
Pattem Generator Lead Set, 9 in
012-0926-00 (P6455, P6456) ............................................ $65
High Speed Pattem Generator Lead Set, 5 in harmonica
012- 1001-00 (P6455, P6456) .......................................... $SO
•
2
± 150 V (de or RMS).
Max Safe Strobe Input Strobe Input Impedance -
1. 10 Wide Comb - 10 in leads - grabbers not included.
(012-0747-00) ................................................................... $46
2. 20 cm Individual Connectors - Grabbers not included.
(012-0655-02) ................................................................... $70
5. GPIB Connector (103-0209-00) ................................................................. $180
6. 16 Pin Low Profile Dip Clip - Can be used with 14 or 16
pin IC's.
(015-0330-00) ................................................................... $35
7. Grabber Tip (206-0222-00) ................................................................ $3.00
8. 40 cm, Color Coded Replacement Lead Set" - For the
P6450 Probe or the P6451 Probe. 10 leads/set connects probe
lead to 0.025 in, square pins.
(012-0655-01 ) .................................................................. $40
9. 40 cm IndlYidual Connector" - 10 wire with Pomona
Grabbers.
(012-0670-00) ................................................................... $65
'Note: EMI can exist with the 40 ern length. This can be a
problem if using a digital latch.
Probe Hotder - Cllp-on holder accommodates probe pod for
P6451.
(352-0473-01 ) ................................................................ $3.00
BNC Cable - Used with the Digital Latch
(012-0118-00) .................................................................. $16
66
10 ns.
",,7.5 kll paralleled by ",,6 pF.
Minimum Recognizable Strobe Pulse Width -
4. Clothes Pin IC Clip (003-0709-00) ................................................................... $29
P6455 8 Channel TTL/MOS Pattem Generator Probe
010-6455-01 ................................................................... $550
2.175 V + 0.1 25 V to Vcc.
Max Safe Input -
Package of 12 grabber tips
020-0720-00 (P6451 , P6452, P6455, P6456) .................. $33
Package of 10 flat pick high speed gripper.
195-1943-06 (P6453, P6454) ........................................... $75
PATTERN GENERATOR PROBES
0 V to + 0.7 V ± 0.125 V.
High Stete Input Voltage Range -
Minimum Circuit Reslstence for Open Circuit Indication 10 kll.
3. 10 Wide Comb - With Harmonica Connector.
(012-0800-00) ................................................................... $30
BNC Cable - 50 II, 8 in
(012-0076-00) (connect 700 1 to DL2) ............................. $17
CHARACTERISTICS
Low Stete Input Voltage Range -
Impedance -
Package of 2 leads with grabber tips
195-3659-00 (P6454) ....................................................... $15
Package of 10 dip pack high speed gri ppers
195-2234-06 (P6453, P6454) ........................................... $75
Two bright lights in the probe tip indicate condition of the logic signal.
Minimum Recognizable Pulse Width -
4
Diagnostic Lead Set,
012-1000-00 (P6452, P6455, P6456) .............................. $75
Package of 10 ground (or VL) sense leads, 5 In, black with
Pomona Hook Tip
012-0989-01 (P6452, P6455, P6456) .............................. $50
Logic Probe
Power may be obtained from the unit under test
or any 5 V supply.
(010-6451-05) For SONY· /TEKTRONIX· 308 only, with rightangle connector ............................................................... $525
P6453 4 Channels 300 MHz High Speed Date Acquisition
Probe. For 91A04/91 AE04 .
010-6453-01 ................................................................. $1500
P6401
The small, lightweight, hand-held P6401 indicates
the state of logic levels in TIL, DTL, or any other
system with threshold between 0.7 and 2.15 volts.
A strobe input can be used to detect the coincidence of logic signals at two pOints. An indication
of whether a logic pulse has or has not occurred
can be obtained in a "store" mode.
20 ns .
± 30 V (de or RM S).
5.6 kll within 20%.
Included Accessories - Hook Tip (206-011 4-00). Strobe
Lead (175-0958-01), Strobe Lead (175-0958-00), Probe Tip to
0.025 in square pin adapter (206-0 137-01), White Plug (3480023-00), 2 Alligator Clips (344-0046-00). Accessory Pouch
(016-0537-00).
Order P6401 Logic Probe
(010-6401-01) ................................... _... $135
OSCILLOSCOPE PROBE
ACCESSORIES
Accessories to aid in probing digital circuits with standard oscilIosocpe probes may be found on pages 338 and 339.
TEK
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
"The Graphic Standard"
Computer Display Terminals
4112 .......................................................... .. .......
41 14 ................................................................
4014-1/401 5-1 ...... .. .... .. ....................................
4016-1 ................................................................
4027A Color Graphics Terminal .......................
4025A .................................................................
4006/4010-1/4012 ........ .. .... .............................
PLOT 10 Graphics Software ...........................
4041 Computer Controller ............................. ...
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Desktop Computers
4054 .. ............ .. ................................................
4052/4051 .................................. .......................
ROM Packs .......................................................
PLOT 50 Graphics Software ...........................
79
80
81
82
Peripherals
4909 Multi User File System .............................
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter .........................
4663 Interactive Digital Plotter .........................
4611 Hard Copy Unit .............. ..........................
4612 Hard Copy Unit ........................................
4631 Hard Copy Units ......................................
4632 Video Hard Copy Units ...........................
4642 Matrix Printer .. .... .. .. ..................................
4643 Matrix Printer ............................................
4923, 4924 Digital Recorders ..........................
4953, 4954, 4956 Graphic Tablets ................
4952 Joystick ...... .. .. .... ..... .. ...............................
4907 File Manager ............................................
4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit .........................
68
84
85
87
88
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
92
92
93
Tektronix has set the standard in computer
graphics for the past 13 years. We continue
in the same tradition with the introduction of
new products like the 4110 Series. Designed to be compatible with existing product lines, the 4110 Series offers enhanced
communications and local intelligence for
maximum efficiency. These new products
join a broad range of graphics equipment
including desktop computers, color and
monochrome display terminals , hard copy
and storage devices, graphics software and
peripherals .
For additional product information and details on interfacing, software and accessory
support, please indicate your interest on the
reply card enclosed in your catalog.
TEK
DISPLAY TERMINALS
TEK COMPUTER
Secondly, the memory planes can be used to
create gray scale effects, with up to eight shades
of gray/displayable at once. A panel flooding
feature enables easy fill·in of closed figures with
gray scale or with patterns.
Definable dialog area. At any time. the user
can specify the size and position of the region
where communications between terminal and
host are displayed. This dialog area is scroll able
by the thumbwheels, allowing for easy recall of
previous communications.
Memory. The standard 4112 memory consists of
32k bytes of RAM and 72k bytes of ROM. It is
expandable incrementally up to a total of 672k
bytes RAM.
An optional , integral flexible disk drive can be
specified to add a total 494k bytes per disk of off·
line mass storage with disk drive.
mm
4112
Raster Scan Monochrome Display
Local Picture Segments
2-D Transforms, True Zoom and Pan up to 3
Memory Planes
Compatible with TEKTRONIX 4010 Series
New economies of communications traffic
and CPU time. The 4112 capitalizes on many
conveniences and special capabilities of a raster
scan display. Designed to satisfy a broad range
of evolving needs, from basic line graphs to high
density design, the 4112 provides access to an
unusually wide assortment of graphics capabili·
ties. Its powerful local intelligence keeps user
interactivity high and host dependency low.
The 4112 is designed to be compatible with the
popular Tektronix 4010 Series of computer dis·
play terminals. Programs developed for the 4012
or 4014, for example, may require only minor
software revisions-mostly to account for new
expanded capabilities-in order to run on the
4112. By using the modular device drivers and
advanced feature support of the TEKTRONIX
PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics Library (IGL), up·
dating existing programs for the new 4112 fea·
tures is a simple process.
In addition, there is great commonality among all
members of the new 4110 Series. The selection
allows you to specify the best terminal for each
need , without significant investment in increased
operator training or software .
The 4112 offers a bright, flicker·free 381 mm (15
in) raster scan display with a viewable resolution
of 640 x 480 points, augmented by 4096 x 4096
point addressability and by zoom and pan.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
In addition, the user can specify as many as 64
viewports for simultaneous display of multiple
design perspective, or for any other consolidated
presentation of related information. Each viewport
can be zoomed into and out of individually.
The 4112 incorporates several valuable local fea·
tures that enhance user interactivity and graphics
capacity, while radically reducing the load on the
host and the volume of communications traffic.
These features include:
Local picture segments. A local picture seg·
ment is a group of graphic primitives that de·
scribes a portion or segment of a picture. These
primitives are retained in the terminal 's memory to
be redrawn and manipulated at any time by using
the 4112's local ·segments· capability. Eight
programmable function keys are provided for
user·definable functions that may be used locally.
Raster·scan CRT.
Dllplay Area -
220 mm x 254 mm (8.6 in x 11 .5 in).
Pholp hor Type Sc.n Type (optional).
White P4.
60 Hz non·lnterlaced or 50 Hz non·interlaced
KEYBOARD
Norm.1 Keybo.rd - 72 typewriter paired upper and lower
case. programmable and auto repeating (seven lighted).
8 user-deflnable programmable function keys. 4 terminal con·
trol keys. and 4 special keys for zoom and pan functions .
Other Controls - Thumbwheels contol graphic cursor. zoom·
pan function . and scrolling.
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
St.nd.rd Ch.r.cter Set characters.
Full ASCII set of 94 displayable
GRAPHI CS MODE
Relolutlon -
640 horizontal by 480 vertical pixels.
Addr•••• blllty -
4096 x 4096 points.
Schematic components. symbols. titles and text
can be defined as segments, for example, then
stored in local memory and redrawn when need·
ed. with minimal computer time and communica·
tions traffic required .
Gray Scale - Eight levels of gray scale are provided if two
optional (three total) memory planes are included.
2-D Transforms. Local segments may also be
rotated , scaled or moved around the screen. by a
Simple command from the host processor.
Computer Interl.ces - Basic data communications interlace.
EIA RS·232C compatible. full or half-duplex.
Int.ractlve Gr.phlcI - Thumbwheels in the keyboard control
a graphic cursor. The graphic cursor may have its shape de·
fined by the user (with hardware cross·hairs as default). The
user can also control zooming. scrolling. and the alpha cursor
position by keyboard keys.
Flexlbl. Dilk Ch.ra cterl.tlc. -
(Option 42)
8 in single· sided double-density disk.
Zoom and pan. An addressable display space
of 4096 x 4096 pOints is accessible locally by
simple, key·actuated zoom and pan or via the
host. The thumbwheel controls are used to pan
the display with a rectangular cursor and to set
the viewport dimensions of the magnified image.
Multiple display memory planes. Optionally,
two additional bit map buffers, or memory planes,
may be added to the 4112, providing as many as
three display surfaces. This capability enables a
number of effects, including overlays of text
and/or graphic information.
Tektronix oHers maintenance training classes on instru·
ments in the 4112 Intelligent Terminal. For further training
Information, contact your local Sales Ollice or request a
copy of the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the relurn card.
70
Medium -
Direct memory access.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4112 Computer
Display Terminals ............................... $9600
Option 42 .............................................................. Add $2800
INTERNATI ONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V / 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Ch.rg.
Option A3 Australian 240 V / 1OA ........................ No Ch.rge
Option A4 North Americ.n 240 V / 15A ............... No Charge
TEK
2-D transforms. Local segments can be rotated ,
scaled or moved around the screen, with only a
simple command from the host.
Refresh support. More than 1500 cm or approximately 3000 short vectors of flicker-free refresh.
Color enhanced refresh option for easy recognition of refresh information, for high density applications and those with a great deal of
refresh manipulation, the Color Enhanced Refresh
(Option 31) presents all refresh vectors in amber,
for clear contrast with stored vectors.
Memory. Standard 4114 memory includes 32k
bytes of RAM and 56k bytes of ROM. RAM
memory is expandable up to 800k bytes total.
Fast redraw augments the powers of local
intelligence. 26,000 short vectors may be
redrawn in under 1/2 s.
Definable, refresh dialog area. The user may
define the size and location of a scrollable dialog
area-all in refresh. This area can be redefined
and repositioned at any time.
Mass storage option. Single or dual integral
flexible disk drive mass storage may be specified,
for convenient local storage of segments, fonts,
macros, and completed graphic displays. Each
disk offers a 494k byte capacity.
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Medium - Direct view storage tube 4096 x 4096 addressabte
points; 4096 x 3120 displayabte points ; Enhanced refresh;
Fast redraw
Dilplay Area -
m
KE YBOARD
Normal Keyboard - 72 typewriter paired upper and lower
case. programmable and auto repeating. (five lighted).
4114
Direct View Storage Tube
Local Picture Segments
2-D Transforms, Refresh Support and Fast
Redraw
Compatible with TEKTRONIX 4010 Series
New standards of fast graphics throughput.
Enhanced user interactivity with reduced
host overhead. The 4114 has been designed to
satisfy the evolving needs of graphics users for
faster, more versatile throughput in high density
graphics applications. Its local intelligence and
expandable memory can significantly reduce the
d el ays and costs associated with over dependence on the host computer.
The 4114 has been designed to be compatible
with the popular TEKTRONIX 4010 Series of
computer display terminals. Programs developed
for the 4014, for example, may require only minor
software revisions-mostly to account for expanded capabilities-in order to run on the 4114.
By using the modular device drivers and advanced feature support of the TEKTRONIX PLOT
10 Interactive Graphics Library (IGL), updating
existing programs for the new 4114 capabilities is
a simple process.
368.3 mm x 276.9 mm (14.5 in x 10.9 in).
In addition, there is a great commonality among
all members of the new 4110 Series: project
teams can share programs and peripherals while
utilizing the 4110 Series terminal best suited for
each application's need.
The display: more to see than ever. The 4114
is designed around a 483 mm (19-inch) directview bistable storage tube. Its 4096X by 4096Y
addressable points (4096X by 3120Y displayable
points) provide resolution high enough for the
most complex engineering and scientific graphics. The 4114 offers enhanced text display with as
many as 16 hardware-generated sizes of stroke
upper-and-Iower case ASCII characters. A large
number of dot-dash line styles and markers, plus
rubberbanding capability, simplify graphics development. Thumbwheel-controlled symbols enable
easy placement and revision of display elements.
An intelligent evolution of graphics efficiency. Through its advanced local intelligence and
its capacity to do much more per host command,
the 4114 achieves new standards of productivity.
Specific features of this intelligence include:
Local picture segments. A segment is a group
of graphic primitives describing a portion or segment of a picture, retained as a unit in local
memory to be redrawn or manipulated at any time
by using the 4114's local "segments" capability.
Eight user-definable programmable function keys.
Thumbwheels to control graphic cursor
ALPHANUMERIC MODE
Standard Character Set characters.
Full ASCII set of 94 displayabte
Flexible Disk Characteri stics -
(OptionS 42 and 43)
8 in single-sided doubte-density disk.
iBM compatible soft-sectored record ing format.
Cyclic redundancy checking and automatic data recovery retry
for reliability.
Direct memory access.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4114 Computer Display Terminals. $17,500
Option 3 1 Color Enhanced Refresh __ ..• _............ _ Add $2000
Option 42 Single Flexible Disk and
Disk Controller ........................................... __ ........ Add $2800
Option 43 Dual Flexible Disk and Disk Controller Add $4200
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universel Euro 220 V / 16A ..... _.......... No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13A _............ __ ..................... No Charge
Option A3 Au stralian 240 V/ 1OA ___...... _____ ...... _... No Charge
Option A4 North Ameri can 240 V/ 15A ______ .. _...... No Charge
Tektronix oller. maintenance training classes on instrument. In the 41 14 Intelligent Terminal. For further training
information. contact your local Sales Office or request a
copy of the Tektronix Customer Training Cetalog on the return card.
DISPLAY
TERMINAL
TEK COMUTER
401 4-1 /401 5-1
483 mm (19 in), Direct-View Storage Display
Selectable Formats in Alphanumeric and
Graphic Modes
High-Resolution, Interactive Graphics
Capability
Plug-In Intelligence Options
APL Character Set Available
We've added some intelligent choices to the
choicest of graphics. Tektronix' famous 4014-1
has long been a favorite for display of large data
bases and precise detail. Its flicker-free 483 mm
(19 in) screen offers priced-right performance for
applications in mapping. design. manufacturing.
medicine. energy exploration and many other
diverse disciplines.
Firmware options provide up to 26k of graphics
memory for local symbols. stroke-drawn characters. overlays. or background graphics which can
be redisplayed on command from the host or
keyboard. Reduce data transmission as you
redraw portions of your graphics from local memory and generate circles and arcs by a single
command . Add local scaling. rotation . and clipping of graphics. Buffered communications with
the host and keyboard. Reduce CPU connecttime trough local control of graphic tablets . plotters. and tape and disk storage. A variety of
optional intelligence designed to help you keep
up with new methods in mapping , process layout.
financial graphing and many other applications.
Big Screen . Big Features. The 4014-1 and 4015-1
offer 1024 (X) by 780 (Y) displayable points
standard and up to 4096 (X) by 3120 (Y)
displayable pOints with the optional Enhanced
Graphics Module. Its 12 million point capability is
more than sufficient to solve most complex mapping and design tasks. Full 96-character ASCII
includes four program-selectable alphanumeric
formats which display up to 8512 characters at
once.
Of course, the 4014-1 and 4015-1 are immediately
compatible with the full range of Tektronix
peripherals . including the 4631 and 4611 Hard
Copy Units, the 4923 Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder. B-Size 4662 and C-Size 4663 Interactive
Digital Plotter. plus others. Optional minibus extender allows expanded accessory and peripheral capability. And TEKTRONIX PLOT 10 Software
provides a library of proven graphics packages.
PLOT 10 offers versatile modular software for all
levels of users. PLOT 10 Terminal Con trol System
to link to existing applications, PLOT 10 Easy
Graphing for rapid generation business or scientific graphs. For device independent applications
projec ts add our PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics
Library.
Previews and overviews_ Interactive previewIng on the 4014-1 can lop considerable time off
normal plotter trial-and-error. As a cartographer's
tool. for instance. the 4014-1 will draw precise
maps of cities. states. and land formations . and
isolate and enlarge those areas you choose.
The 4014-1 has become standard equipment to
many phases of research , medicine. engineering.
business. energy-related fields , cartography.
manufacturing and others where its
price/performance practically lends itself.
CHARACTERISTICS
Display Medium Display Area -
Direct View Bistable storage CRT.
381 mm x 279 mm (15 in x 11 in).
Alphanumeric Mode - 4014-1 Full ASCII character set (94
printing characters).
4015-1 Full ASCII and APL character sets (188 total printing
Computer Interfaces - Basic Data Communication Interface.
EIA RS-232-C compat,ble. Full Duplex.
We also oHer a range of oplional interfacing designed for communk:ations with most of the widely used mainframes and
minicomputers.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4014-1 Computer Display Terminal with
Standard Data Communications
Interlace ........................................... $14,775
Option 34, Enhanced Graphics Module
(factory installed only) .......................................... Add $925
4015-1 Computer Display Terminal with
Standard Data Communications
Interlace .... _...................................... $16,900
Option 34. Enhanced Graphics Module
(factory installed only) ........................ __.. _.... _........ Add $925
characters)
Character Format - Four program-selectable formats :
1) 74 characters per line with 35 lines per display.
2) 81 characters per line with 38 lines per display.
3) 121 characters per line with 58 lines per display.
4) 133 characters per line with 64 lines per display.
Alphanumeric Cursor -
OEM terms available on these products.
7 x 9 dot pulsating cursor.
Keyboard - Typewriter paired upper and lower case with
aula repealing keys 4015-1 adds APL character set.
Graphics Mode -
Vector drawing time 5.000 inl s (127 m/s).
Information Density - 1024 (X) by 1024 (Y) addressable
po,nts (10 bits). 1024 (X) by 780 (Y) viewable points.
72
Interactive Graphic Mode - Thumbwheel controlled crosshalr cursor. 3 thru 1024 addressable points horizontally. 0
thru 780 addressable points vert,cally.
Tektronix offers maintenance train ing classes on instru·
ments in the 4010 DVST Graphic Terminal Series. For further training information, contact your local Sales Office or
request a copy of the Tektronix Cuslomer Training Catalog
on the return card.
TEK
Commands also allow a user to digitize data with
distance, time, or gradient filtering ; edit graphics
from a host computer, local 4907,4924 storage
device or Option 40 programmable keys. Implement off-line plotting by accessing data via local
storage devices.
Added enhancements. The 4016-1 includes a
convenient detachable keyboard and detachable
display.
Other standard enhancements include hardware
generated solid, dashed , and dotted lines; point
plotting with software controllable point sizes and
incremental "relative graphics" plotting.
Hard copy compatibility provides 216 mm x 279
mm (8 1/2 in x 11 in) hard copies from our
dependable, dry-process 4631 and 4611 Hard
Copy Units.
CHARACTERISTICS
Display Medium - Direct View B,stable storage CRT. Written
image bright green on green background.
Display Area -
454 mm x 340 mm (18 In x 13.5 In).
Character Set characters).
Full ASCII character set (94 prlnllng
Standard Character Format
1) 74 chari line by 35 lines .
2) 81 charl line by 38 lines .
3) 133 char/line by 64 lines.
4) 179 char/line by 86 lines.
Optional Character Formats
1) 74 chari line by 35 lines .
2) 81 chari line by 38 lines .
3) 121 chari line by 58 lines.
4) 133 char/line by 64 lines.
4016-1
636 mm (25 in) Direct-View Storage Display
High-Resolution, Flicker-Free Graphics
Selectable Formats in Graphic and
Alphanumeric Modes
Plug-In Intelligence Options
The easiest viewing, most exceptional graphics
ever. The 4016-1 was built for designers of electronic circuit boards, utility networks, automotive
components, schematic diagrams, street maps or
similar applications who need to work with fine
detail while maintaining the total picture
perspective.
With its big 636 mm (25 in) diagonal screen, 4096
(X) by 3120 (Y) viewable points, and finely etched
10 mil wide vectors, the 4016-1 is uniquely suited
for displaying highly complex graphics. Using a
Direct View Storage Tube (DVST) display, graphic
lines are sharp , stable and flicker-free, simplifying
the study of fine details. Thumbwheel-controlled
crosshair cursor makes it easy to interactively
manipulate the display.
Over 15,()()() displayable characters. Besides enabling display of more high density graphic information than any other terminal available, the
4016-1 provides high density alphanumerics for
applications, from graphic labeling to newspaper
page layout. Over 15,()()() characters may be
displayed simultaneously and may be formatted
as 179 alphanumeric characters per line, like a
line printer, or in two 85 character columns, like an
open book.
Three other larger character formats are standard
with the 4016-1, the largest of which is suitable for
group viewing .
Complete TEKTRONIX 4014-1 compatibility. The
4016-1 is compatible with 4014-1 application software , communication support , and other
Tektronix peripheral devices. The 4016-1 is supported by the family of PLOT 10 Software
products.
Plug-in intelligence. Using the modular 4010 bus
structure, add-on low-cost options include up to
26k of usable graphics display memory, scaling,
relative graphics, clipping, circular arc generation,
rotation by 10 increments, user definable stroke
characters, programmable keyboard , GPIB interfacing to the intelligent 4924 Digital Cartridge
Tape Drive, 4907 File Manager, and 4662 and
4663 Interactive Digital Plotters, plus the 4953 or
4954 Graphics Tablet .
Alphanumeric Cursor -
7 x 9 dot pulsating cursor.
Keyboard - TypeWriter paried upper and lower case with
auto repealing keys.
Graphic s Mode cml s).
Vector drawing time is 8000 inl s (20.000
Information Display - 4096 (X) by 4096 (V) addressable
poonts (12 bits). 4096 (X) by 3120 (V) viewable points.
Vector Formats dashed lines.
5 formats . including straight. dotted and
Point Plotting Modes - Point Plot Mode: special Point Plot
Mode absolutely addresses points with program control of
plotted point size. Incremental Plot Mode relative addressing 1
of 8 directions. one step at a time.
tnteractive Graphic Mode - Thumbwheel controlled crosshalr cursor. 0 thru 1023 addressable points horizontally. 0
thru 780 addressable poonts vertically.
Hard Copy Mode - Switch selectable hard copy of screen
uSing the 4611 or 4631 Hard Copy Unit .
ORDERING INFORMATION
4016-1 Computer Display Terminal with
Standard Data Communications
Interface ....... _............................. ...... $18,000
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A I Universal Euro 220 V116A •...........•... No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 VI IOA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ............... No Charge
OEM term s available on these products.
Tektronix offers maintenance training class es on instruments in th e 4010 DVST Graphic Terminal Series. For fur·
th er training information, contact your local Sales Office or
request a copy of the Tek tronix Customer Training Catalog
on the return ca rd.
73
GRAPHICS TERMINAL
TEK COLOR
m
4027A
Full Color Graphics and Alphanumerics
PLOT 10 Compatible
Fully Supported Color Capability
Dynamic Displays Created Easily
Tektronix makes it practical to add the color
dimension. The 4027 A offers all the easy data
entry, scrolling, and graphics capabilities of the
Tektronix high performance 4020 raster-scan family. Most importantly, it provides the kind of fully
supported color capability you could expect only
from the world's graphics leader.
Full-color graphics, easy to grasp. Colors are
selected from a 64-color palette with up to eight
colors displayable simultaneously. For specifying
lightness, saturation and hue, you 'll find the
4027 A system as easy as it is versatile.
Local capabilities include colored vectors, characters, symbols, and polygon fill . Firmware enables a second color to border the polygon ... and
allows user selection of up to 120 different patterns or color combinations for special applications. Because the capabilities are initiated by
firmware , not software, 4027 A operation makes
minimal demands on host computer
communications.
Easy-to-use graphic software. For graphic representation, the 4027 A uses color-enhanced PLOT
10 Easy Graphing Software. Easy Graphing simplifies even non-programmer construction of up
to six curves or colored bar charts, line graphs
with special symbols and dashed lines, legends,
titles, and grids.
Gray scale representations of 4027 A color displays can be made with a TEKTRONIX 4632 or
4612 Video Hard Copy Unit Detailed, cameraready color copies of graphs and alphanumeric
data can be made on paper or acetate via the
TEKTRONIX 4660 Series of Interactive Digital
Plotters.
For more general color graphic applications,
Tektronix offers the new PLOT 10 Interactive
Graphics Library. IGL is a highly modular package
offering all the support commonly required in
graphic applications such as 3-0, color panels,
line smoothing and many character fonts. PLOT
10 IGL is upward and downward compatible with
the full line of Tektronix graphic display terminals.
To the standard full duplex, 4027 A interface
options add half duplex, current loop, polling
interface and IBM 3270 compatible polling
controller.
Graphic input Graphic input capability consists of
a graphic crosshair cursor controlled by graphic
cursor keys. In addition to reporting the coordinates back to the host, the terminal also reports
the color of the designated coordinate.
Up to 32k bytes of built-in display memory, and
up to 192k bytes of graphic memory, allow the
same scrolling, dual screen and multiple field
formatting featured in other 4020 Series
Terminals.
The optional video signal output allows connection of the 4027 A to external video displays for
group viewing and presentations.
All this and alphanumerics, too. In addition to
graphic capabilities, the 4027A's extensive alphanumeric capabilities include full ASCII, special
and user-definable character sets, and 34 rows of
80 characters.
CHARACTERISTICS
Olaplay Sl.e Graphlca -
254 mm x 191 mm (10 In x 7.5 in).
Slandard wi1h full screen crosshair cursor.
Color - 8 colors displayable, colors selec1ed from a pallette of
64 colors.
Pattema -
120 user definable color patterns.
Local Functlona -
Circle and pie generation, polygon fill.
O1har 4027A Speclflcatlona -
Same as 4025A.
Order 4027A Color Graphics
Terminal ............................................ $10,000
OEM terma available on the.e product • .
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on instru·
ment. in the 4020 Raster Scan Terminal Series. For further
training information, contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog
on the return card.
74
TEK
•
COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINALS
4025A
From Alphanumerics To Graphics
ASCII Character Set and Finger Tip Editing
Forms Ruling Option Available
The 4025A creates the perfect marriage of alphanumerics and graphics. You can create and store
multiple graphs in memory, create multiple
graphs per page, and scroll graphics along with
alphanumeric information.
The 4025A gives you the ability to expand a
computer terminal from basic alphanumerics, to
forms ruling and then to graphics. No other
terminal has such versatility up to and including
the capacity for unsurpassed report generation.
Start with an ASCII character set and finger-tip
editing. In Its simplest configuration, the 4025A
can display a full 34 lines of 80 characters each
on its 279 mm (12 in) diagonal display screen.
Complete upper-and lower-case ASCII character
set is provided. Green-on-black display with adjustable brightness level keeps even long sessions easy on the eyes.
The 4025A Forms Ruling option can duplicate
essentially any form. Visual attributes include
enhanced blinking , inverted and underlined fields .
Logical attributes include protected fields , modified , alphanumeric or numeric only.
The "send modify" command streamlines data
entry by transferring only the modified, keyed-in
data to the host. The fixed format remains , ready
for the next series of entries. Develop or duplicate
forms of any complexity with a variety of single
and multiple horizontal and vertical rules selected
from the Ruling Character Set. Expandable memory and scrolling let you create forms far beyond
the length of the display screen.
To make data entry and editing easier, you can
divide the display screen into two separate display areas, each with independent scrolling. You
use the monitor area to communicate with the
host and the workspace area for the form Itself.
The PLOT 10 Easy Graphing Software package
lets you interactively create bar charts with multiple shadings , histograms, log plots, pie charts
and period axes, all with a wide variety of labeling
options.
The keyboard , an office typewriter configuration,
is immediately familiar to new users. Pre-defined
editing keys simplify insertion, deletion and input
of lines and characters. Thirteen user-defineable
keys , plus nearly all other keys on the keyboard
can be redefined to generate a command or
character string at the touch of a finger.
A 16k memory is standard with the 4025A display,
expandable to 32k, allowing buffering and
scrolling of hundreds and even thousands of
words.
USing TEKTRONIX 4631 and 4612 Hard Copy
Units you can duplicate on-screen and buffered
displays of up to 80 characters by 53 lines. The
216 mm x 279 mm (8 1/2 in x 11 in) copies are
clean, dry, and sharp. For detailed, camera-ready
copies of graphs and alphanumeric data, choose
the TEKTRONIX 4662 Interactive Digital Plotter.
The dependable 4642 Printer gives you copies of
alphanumeric output only. The 4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive provides an Inexpensive method of storing forms , graphic formats and other
data.
CHARACTERISTICS
Display Size In x 6.4 In).
Video monitor display on 229 mm x 163 mm (9
Raster Lines displayed.
Standard 525 line scan with 480 lines
Character Set - 64/96 upper and lower case ASCII (optional
character sets available).
Alphanumeric - Mode lormat is 34 lines, 80 characters per
hne, 2720 characters lull screen.
Character - Generation - 7 x 9 in an 8 x 14 dot matrix
(graphIC cells are 8 x 14 matrix).
Cursor -
Wide underscore.
Baud Rate Graphics -
Selectable to 9600 baud.
Optional.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4025A Computer Display
Terminal ".,",." .. ,.",." " ".",•. ,.",." .", ",., $5200
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V / 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13A .........................•........•. No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V/1 0A ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A •...•.••.....•. No Charge
OEM terms available on these products .
Using the optional 4025A polling controller , you
can poll multiple terminals on a single data communications line
TektroniX offers maintenance traini ng classes on instru·
ments in the 4020 Raster Scan Terminal Serie • • For fu rther
training information, contact you r local Sales Office or fe·
quest a copy of the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog
on the return card .
75
TEK COMPUTER
DISPLAY TERMINALS
4006-1
Low Cost
4010-1
Flicker-free High Resolution
Graphic and Alphanumerics
The 4006-1 is one of four solutions towards
making interactive , high-resolution graphics
affordable to cost-conscious disciplines and departments . Priced no more than many alphanumeric terminals, the 4006-1 makes graphic
capability practical for the stock room , the classroom and the conference room as well as for
other graphic applications.
The 4006-1 connects readily to most mainframes,
thanks to its RS-232-C interface. With a screen
capacity of 2590 alphanumeric characters in addition to graphics capability, the 4006-1 can work in
configuration with existing alphanumeric terminals
to interpret statistics and coordinates into meaningful charts, tables, graphs and diagrams.
CHARACTERISTICS
Olaplay Medium Olaplay Area -
Direct View Bistable Storage CRT.
190.5 mm x 142.2 mm (7 .5 in x 5.6 in).
Alphanumeric Mode Format 2590 characters full screen.
Character Set -
Curaor -
5 x 7 dot matrix .
8 x 8 dot matrix.
Graphlca Olaplay Mode 3 .6 ± 0.2 ms.
High-Resolution, FliCker-Free Graphics
Convenient Bus Structure for Peripheral
Add-On
Full Upper and Lower Case ASCII
Character Set
Complete PLOT 10 Software Support
Conventional Bus Structure For Peripheral
Add-On
Graphic Input
The 4010-1 Computer Display Terminal is an easy
to use, cost effective tool that brings out the best
of Tektronix ' famous graphics capability. Included
are flicker-free display, high-resolution graphs,
charts, diagrams and renderings produced on a
matrix of 1024 (X) by 780 (Y) viewable points and
interactive graphics construction via thumbwheel
cursor control.
The standard nY-style keyboard enables easy
data entry. Command of both alphanumeric and
graphic display is so immediate that hours of
hand drafting can become the matter of a few
seconds.
The 4012 combines the world 's leading graphics
with complete alphanumerics. Alphanumerics can
tabulate computer data, but graphics can amplify
that data into usable, immediately meaningful information. High-resolution graphic presentations
and the full upper and lower-case ASCII alphanumerics are available in the 4012.
The flicker-free screen provides up to 1024 (X) by
780 (Y) viewable graphic points or as many as
2590 NN characters per display. The nY-style
keyboard simplifies input while the thumbwheel
controlled crosshair cursor enhances graphic
interactivity. With thumbwheel control, user can
direct the X-Y cursor for speedy additions or deletions of data to the display screen .
35 lines, 74 character per line.
63 printing characters (TTV ANSI Code).
Character Generation -
4012
Supports Alphanumerics Plus Low-Cost
Computer Graphics
Vectors only. Vector drawing time.
Information Oenalty - 1024 (X) by 1024 (V) addressable
polnts. 1024 (X) by 780 (V) viewable polnts.
Baud Rate - Transmit and receive independently. Selectable
from 75 to 4800 baud.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4006-1 Computer Display Terminal ... $3600
Option 01 , Data Communlcationa Interface ........ Add $385
Tek tronix off ers maintenance tra ining cl asses on instruments in the 40 10 OVST Graphic Terminal Serie • . For further tra ining informa tion, contact yo ur loc al Sales Office or
reque st a copy of th e Tektron ix Customer Tra ining Catalog
on the return ca rd .
CHARACTERISTICS
Oiaplay Medium Olaplay Area -
Direct View Bistable Storage CRT.
190 .5 mm x 142.2 mm (7.5 in x 5.6 in).
Alphanumeric Mode Formet - 35 lines, 74 characters per
line, 2590 characters full screen.
Character Set -
63 printing characters (TTV ANSI Code).
CHARACTERISTICS
Olaplay Medium Olaplay Arae -
Direct View Bistable Storage CRT.
203 mm x 152 mm (8 in x 6 In).
Alphanumeric Mode Format - 74 characters per line ; 35
lines per display; 2590 characters per display.
Alphanumeric Curaor -
Pulsating 7 x 9 dot matrix .
Characlar Generation - 5 x 7 dot matrix w ith MaS ReadOnly Memory. 1200 characters per second.
Character Set - 94 printing characters on 7 x 9 dot matrix.
(Full ASCII code).
Cursor -
Character Size -
Pulsating 5 x 7 matrix.
Graphic Olaplay Mode 2.6 ms.
Information Oenalty polnts.
Vectors only. Vector drawing time
1024 (X) by 1024 (V) addressable
85 mils x 105 mils.
Character Generation - 7 x 9 dot matrix with MOS Readonly Memory. 1,000 characters per s.
Graphic Mode -
Vectors only. Vector drawing time 2.6 ms.
1024 (X) by 780 (V) viewable polnts.
Graphic Metrlx - 1024 (X) by 1024 (V) addressable polnts .
1024 (X) by 780 (V) viewable points.
Graphic Input Mode - Thumbwheel controlled cross-hair cursor. 3 through 1023 (X) 0 through 780 (V).
Graphlca Input Mode - Thumbwheel controlled cross-hair
cursor. 3 through 1023 (X) 0 through 780 (V).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4010-1 Computer Display Terminal with
Standard Data Communication
Interface .............................................. $5900
ORDERING INFORMATION
4012 Computer Display Terminal with
Standard Data Communication
Interface .............................................. $7850
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI Unlveraal Euro 220 V 11611. ................ No Charge
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V11611. ................ No Charge
Option 11.2 UK 240 V11311. .................................... No Charga
Option 11.2 UK 240 V 11311. .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Auatra llan 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option 11.3 Australian 240 V / l 0A ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ............... No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V / 1511. ............... No Charge
OEM terma available on these products.
76
TEK
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
SOFTWARE
ORDERING INFORMATION
For 4110, 4010 Series Terminals . 4006·1 , 4025A
and 4027A color display.
Tools for easy use of graphic and alphanumeric
capabilities of Tektronix Terminals.
4010A01 PLOT 10 Terminal Control
System ..................... ............................ $1500
4010A10 PLOT 10 Terminal Control
System, Implementation for IBM
with TSO .............................................. $1750
PLOT 10
Graphic Software Library
PLOT 10 is the world 's leading commercial graph·
ics library . Versatile , modular , and fully
documented , it lets you start with only the code
you need to do your job, then expand with
modules and utilities to develop more sophisticat·
ed or specialized applications. PLOT 10 builds to
high·level , "cookbook" solutions such as English·
like commands for business applications and
other non·programmer environments.
PLOT 10 Includes the following packages:
Terminal Control System (TCS) - A compos·
ite of FORTRAN IV subroutines, TeS contains the
basic building blocks for all graphic operations. It
permits modular as well as system independent
programming, and supports such basic graphic
functions as windowing, clipping and rotation for
DVST terminals and 4660 Series Plotters.
Plotter Utility Routines - These routines link
your data base, terminal and TEKTRONIX 4660
Series plotters to enable easy, powerful com·
mand of multicolored graphs, charts, maps and
renderings. Digitizing is just as versatile by using
the built·in joystick.
Versatile software to graph your data
using a powerful set of FORTRAN IV
subroutines.
4010A02 PLOT 10 Advance
Graphing II ........................................... $2000
Powerful graphing through English language commands for the non-programmer
4010A03 PLOT 10 Interactive Graphing
Package ............................................... $2250
Correct your graphics easily with a
Tektronix Terminal before plotting.
4010A04 PLOT 10 Preview Routines for
Cal Comp Plotters ................................. $500
Provides complete flexibilty of character definition, including rotation,
scaling, and special characters.
4010A05 PLOT 10 Character
Generation System ............................... $225
Point by pOint TEKTRONIX 4953 and
4954 support, plus pencil and paper
input ease for many computer systems.
4010A06 PLOT 10 Graphic Tablet
Utility Routines ...................................... $200
Office machine simplicity for the production of the most popular formats
in graphing.
4010801 PLOT 10 Easy Graphing
Punch Paper Tape ............................... $1380
Advanced Graphing Package - AG II subrou·
tines let a programmer tailor the size, shape and
format of graphs, specifying more than 40 graph·
ic elements.
4010802 PLOT 10 Easy Graphing
026 Format Punched Cards ................ $1380
Interactive Graphing Package - IGP simpli·
fies the task of graph storage, editing, recall and
updating, so a user with little or no programming
experience can create a presentation quality
graph, on DVST terminals.
4010B04 PLOT 10 Easy Graphing
RK-05 Hard Disk .................................. $1480
Easy Graphing - A straight forward English
language command structure that gives the non·
programmer wide·ranging command of graphics
in business and engineering decision· making
tasks.
Interactive Graphics Library IGL is a
uniquely modular system of 110, device drivers,
primary commands and advanced feature sup·
port that lets the user move at will among any
Tektronix display devices or technology. Ad·
vanced options such as color panel filling, many
character fonts , segments and 3·0 may be
added .
4010803 PLOT 10 Easy Graphing
Magnetic Tape ..................................... $1950
4010805 Easy Graphing
029 Format Punch Cards .................... $1380
Designed for device independent control of
DVST, raster scan displays, and plotters. Offers a
growing array of graphics control functions such
as commands for color, 3·0, line smoothing, and
multi font text manipulation. Provides graphic
segments support for fast creation and mainte·
nance of picture data bases. Developed in reo
sponse to proposed ANSI graphics standard.
4010C01 PLOT 10 Interactive Graphics
Library ...................................... $2500-10,000
77
SYSTEM
-TEK CONTROLLER
ROMs and carrier (Option 30), and a program
developmenVdebug keyboard (Option 31). BASIC
is an excellent language, and was chosen for the
4041 . Its English-like commands, simple syntax,
and line-by-line interpreter implementation combine for friendly , easy use. To improve the selfdocumenting characteristics and thus reduce
maintenance costs, 4041 BASIC is enhanced by
several features. Variable names may be up to 8
characters, allowing the programmer to select
meaningful names like RISETIME , VOLTAGE 1, or
DELAY. Subprograms and program lines may be
named, with examples such as SRQHANDL or
CALCRMS.
PRINTER
Printing Method - Thermal. fixed head.
Capacity - 20-character alphanumeric line.
Font - 5 x 8 dot matrix printed.
Character Sil ' - 2.5 mm high x 1.8 mm wide (.10 In high x
.07 in wide).
l ine Sp.clng - 4.23 mm (6 lines per In).
Printing Speed - 1.8 IInes/s.
Feed Sp•• d - 8.46 mm per 5 (.34 in/s).
Ch.r. cter Set - 128 Total
P.p.r Sil e - 60 mm x 25 m (2.36 in x 82 It)
A bus management function program that uses direct IEEE488 mnemonic commands accommodates differences in implementation of GPIB on other equipment . Virtually all legal bus
states can be programmed this way, which affords a high degree of flexibility for addressing variOus system applications.
Modular Design - Rackmount or Portable
4041 BASIC includes many enhancements such
as FORTRAN-like subprograms. Variable passing
from main to subprograms and the ability to
declare any variables as local or global means
that a team of programmers can work quite
independently on a massive task, with the main
program ultimately being not much more than a
series of subprogram CALL statements. Other
powerful features include optional data types
(short and long floating point plus integer), a
COMPRESS command to optimize memory use,
a proceed mode which overlaps 1/0 and processing operations for maximum system speed , logical unit assignment capability, and up to 160k
bytes of memory directly addressable without
overlays or paging techniques.
EffiCient, Easy to use BASIC language with
Extensions
Test and Measurement Orientation
•
4041
Ilar!PaI
The 4041 IS deSigned to comply With IEEE Standard 488-1978 and With TektrOniX Codes and
Formats Standard
Optimized for Instrumentation Control
Expandable Capability Through Memory (to
160 k Bytes) and Other Options
The new 4041 Controller is a powerful, flexible ,
expandable IEEE-488 systems controller designed to work with Tektronix and other vendor's
IEEE-488 instruments. While the basic unit is
intended principally for execute only environments such as production line testing, a variety of
options and peripherals will equip the 4041 for full
interactive flexibility in research lab applications.
Tektronix full line of terminals (graphics or alphanumeric. storage or raster, and color) are compatible to create an optimum programmer interface in the more sophisticated areas. Software
features similarly span the range from the occasional programmer to the sophisticated programming team tackling complex products. The basic
4041 compactness, permits configuration of very
compact systems which can go into applications
impractical for earlier generations of systems.
4041 Architecture
The 4041 controller contains three micro-processors, with the CPU being the powerful 16-bit
68000. Standard memory is 32k bytes (approximately 25k user-available), with optional32k increments to 160k maximum . A 2O-character alphanumeric LED display, 20 character thermal printer,
DC-100 casette drive, 18 function keys , an IEEE488 port, and a RS-232 port are standard. A real
time clock and calender capability are standard
on the 4041 . Option 01 adds a second pair of
ports (one IEEE-488 and one RS-232). The Option
01 IEEE-488 port has Direct Memory Access
capability. Other options include an 8-bit parallel
TIL port, (Option 02) the program development
78
The 4041 controller was developed and optimized
as an instrument controller. Many of the IEEE-488
functions are simple high level commands in 4041
BASIC. Examples include ATN , GET, LLO, and
several others. In its power-up default condition,
the 4041 implements Tektronix Codes and Formats standard and thus can communicate instantly with Tektronix IEEE-488 instruments without any programmer attention to formats , syntax,
delimiters, number format , etc. However, the 4041
also has virtually complete, programmable control
over every IEEE-488 line and condition. When this
ability is combined with the 4041 's Logical Unit
assignment and stream specification ability, virtually any IEEE-488 instrument or device can be
easily handled. The stream specification ability
means that a particular device's format , syntax,
end-of-message character, and other idiosyncrasies can be described one time in a Logical Unit
assignment statement. Thereafter, the programmer can control or obtain data from that instrument as easily as from an instrument which fully
complies with Tektronix Codes and Formats
Standard.
The error trapping and handling capabilities of the
4041 are of particular importance in test and
measurement systems. Virtually any category of
error - in instruments, peripherals, on the bus, or
even within the 4041 - can be trapped and
handled by software drivers.
MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE
FII. Structur. - 48 named files (max).
C.p.city (phy.lc.1 r.cord.) - 650 typical (600 min).
Phy.ic.1 Record - 256 bytes.
Av.r.ge Tr.n.ler R. te - 13.324 bits per S.
Se.rch Speed - 1520 mm/s 60 in/s .
Tape Rewind - 1520 mm/s 60 in/s .
Tape C.rtridge - DC 100 cassette.
CONTROlliNG THE BUS
The 4041 automatically contrOls all bus management signals In
the proper sequence for the desired interface task and Instrument Interaction.
BUS INTERRUPTS
The 4041 has the ability to detect and respond to various types
of Interrupt conditions that can be generated In the GPIB. Userspecified software handlers can be written to perform various
tasks when these conditions occur. Interrupts can be programmably ENABLED or DISABLED .
Interrupt conditions are:
M• • •• g.
Mnemonic
Service Request
SRQ
End or Identlly
EOI
Interface Cle.r
IFC
Device Clear
DCl
Group E.ecute Trigger
GET
Tak. Control
TCT
MTA
My T.lk Addre"
My l l,ten Addre..
MlA
BUS COMMUNICATION
Interface and bus device addressing are programmable. This
allows the user to direct message and data flow to and/or from
the appropriate interface and GPIB peripheral. Information
such as primary and secondary addressing. along with pertinent device-dependent Information. can be attached to a specific logical unit number. Subsequent communication with that
GPIB device can be directed to the logical unit. eliminating the
need for redundant or repetitiouS statement programing.
TRANSFER RATES (IEEE-488)
Transfer rates for the standard interlace are given beklw.
Input
Output
Interrupt Mode
Exceeds
Exceeds
5k Bytes/s
5k Bytes/s
Fast Mode
Exceeds
Exceeds
16.5k Bytes/s
19.5k Bytes/s
SERIAL INTERFACE
The 4041 comes with a standard serial asynchronous AS232C Interface. The 4041 can support applications requiring
terminals. modem/host communication . or instrumentation with
this interface protocOl.
In addition to standard transmission rates from 75 to 9600
baud. transmission rates are programmable to any Integer
ranging from 2 to 9600 baud.
Full Duple. - Full Capability (half duplex not supported)
Tran.mlt/Recel.e - Matched rate only
Bitl Per Ch.racter - 5. 6. 7. or 8 bits
Stop Bitl - 1 or 2
Parity - Even. Odd, One. Zero. None
For a complete description and ordering information, refer to pages 292-294.
TEK
4054
The 4054 IS designed to support other products
which comply with IEEE Standard 488·1978
19 In, High Resolution Display
Dynamic Graphics (Option)
Expandable Memory
Enhanced Graphics
Unequalled graphics and powerful , fast computing in an integrated desktop computer. The 4054
is the only desktop computer that combines easyto'learn, extended BASIC with the unique fea·
tures of a large·screen, high resolution Tektronix
display. For rapid calculation, the 4054 has a fast
processor with microcoded floating point. The
state'of-the-art graphics capabilities of the 4054
provide demand hard copy on any combination of
text and high density graphics (with optional hard
copy unit). Fast processing coupled with simulta·
neous text and graphics display offer an excellent
fit for many sophisticated graphics environments.
In addition, the 4054's memory capacity can be
expanded from a standard 32k bytes, to 64k
bytes.
The 4054 has a long list of proven peripheral
products. GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus)
and RS-232·C interfacing coupled with easy-toprogram BASIC 1/0 commands allow consider·
able versatility in designing your own system.
The 4054 features software compatibility with the
rest of the 4050 Series of desktop computers.
Programs developed on the 4051 and 4052 will
DESKTOP
COMPUTER
operate on the 4054, giving 4054 users access to
a wealth of PLOT 50 Software, already written
and debugged , thus reducing program development costs often associated with new systems.
The Dynamic Graphics Option adds increased
interactivity to the graphics of the 4054 Desktop
Computer.
Dynamic Graphics brings the user closer to the
solution by providing the graphic power to work
directly with the graphic elements of the design
problem. Complicated displays can be constructed quickly and easily with movable user-defined
objects.
Superior graphic and alphanumeric display. The
4054 with 4096 (X) and 3125 (Y) resolution - 13
million addressable pOints - has all the graphics
capability you will need for even the most complex display. With stroke·generated characters
programmable in four sizes and eight fonts, the
4054 has the tools to alphanumerically dress up
your output to suit any professional requirement.
The large screen permits previewing of 132 col·
umn line printer output.
For your graphing needs there are 36 distinct dot·
dash patterns, selectable under program control,
providing for maximum effect of represented
data. For interaction the 4054 has a thumbwheel
driven , true cross hair cursor. All of these features
are implemented using the extended BASIC of
the 4054.
Friendly extended BASIC provides the simplicity
desired for the beginner together with the flexibility and power required by the experienced programmer. Device independent keywords make
program and data inpuVoutput operations easy
either binary or ASCII formats. Fast, built-in BASIC
functions such as SINE, LOG, SQR, etc., plus a
complete set of matrix functions provide powerful
computation at your fingertips .
CHARACTERISTICS
Processor -
LSI bl-polar 16 bit, same as 4052.
Keyboard - Indentical to 4052 keyboard but includes added
thumbwheels which control crosshalr cursor.
Tape Dri.e CRT -
Identical to 4052.
Direct view storage CRT.
Alphanumerics - Four program selectable formats .
72 characters per line with 35 lines per display.
79 characters per line with 38 lines per display.
119 characters per line with 58 lines per display.
I 32 characfers per line with 64 lines per display.
Character Set - Full ASCII , upper/lower case, high quality,
stroke generated characters.
Special lonts - Selectable under program control-Swedish,
German, British, Spanish, Danish/Norwegian, Graphic and
Business.
Graphics -
Vector drawing time · 15k em/s.
Addressable resolution - 4096 (X) by 3125 (V).
Dot-dashed vectors, programmable in 36 visibly distinct
patterns.
Crosshair cursor with bullt·in thumbwheels lor interactivity.
Visibility -
Flicker·free , easy-on-the-eyes display.
Copier - Compatible with TEKTRONIX 4631 and 4611 Hard
Copy Units.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4054 Desktop Computer ................. $20,100
Option 24 64k Bytes Total Memory ...................... Add $800
Option 30 Dynamic Graphics .............................. Add $3315
Option 31 Coior Enhanced Dynamic Graphics . Add $5315
OEM terms a.allable on these p.'oduct • .
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on the 4050
Graphic System Series. For further training information,
contact your local Sales Ollie. or request a copy of the
Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
79
DESKTOP
TEK COMPUTERS
Computer Display Terminal with local intelligence
and direct data transfer between the built-in
cartridge tape drive and host computer.
CHARACTERISTICS
4051
The 4051 IS deSigned to support other products
which comply With IEEE Standard 488- 1978
Low Cost
Processor - LSI 8 bit microprccesSOf.
User Memory Workspace - 16k bytes standard, expandable
to 32k bytes.
Keyboard - Full 128 ASCII character upper and lowercase
with auto repeat 10 key numeric and 5 math function calculator
key pad. Line/character editor keys.
User Definable Function Keys - 10 shiftable to 20. Keys for
single step execution of programs, auta-numbering , reWinding
magnetic tape, or automatic loading and execution of fhe first
program on tape.
Tape Drive - 3M DC 300A cartridge 300k bytes maximum
tdependent on number of filesl.
Rewind Speed - 90 ips.
Search/ read Speed - 30 ips.
Structure - 256 bytes with header. File oriented access via
BASIC commands
CRT - Direct view storage CRT.
Alphanumeric - 72 characters per line, 35 lines.
Character Set - Full ASCII including upper/lower case. Also
includes Scandinavian , German , General European, Spanish,
and Special graphic symbol fonts .
Graphic Resolution - 1024 x 780 points.
Visibility - Flicker-free, easy-on-the-eyes display.
Copier - Compatible with TEKTRONIX 4631 AND 4611 Hard
Copy Units.
High Resotution
Graphics and Alphanumerics
ORDERING INFORMATION
4051 Desktop Computer System ...... $6295
Option 22 32k bytes total memory ..................... Add $1000
Desktop computing for a whole spectrum of
problem solving, data analysis, and decision making applications. The 4051 is a stand-alone computer that is approachable, affordable, and able
to grow as your applications grow. From the day
you plug it in, the 4051 performs productively by
putting solution -oriented BASIC language and
meaningful graphic information at your fingertips .
Friendly graphics. Commands like DRAW and
ROTATE built into the 4051 give you full graphics
flexibility while working in your units, not machine
or raster units. Easy graphics accelerates analysis, decision making and model building. It supplements your intuition and gets your point across
by making Information easy to understand. Once
you use graphics you 'll wonder how you got
along without it.
The GPIB bus is built-in and easy to program with
the 4051 BASIC I/O commands. As the industry's
choice for connecting instrumentation it is our
choice for the 4051 and its many available
peripherals.
It includes integrated computing , peripherals, and
a GPIB (IEEE Standard 488-1978) interface. You
don't have to know how the internal processor
works to use it, you simply use the graphicallyenhanced BASIC commands.
A 300k bytes magnetic cartridge tape drive is
built into the 4051 hardware and language. No
bits, no status words to check. File management
commands like FIND, OLD, READ, and WRITE,
retrieve or store programs and data. A comfortable typewriter keyboard is integrated into the
system with a 28-character buffer that eliminates
lost entries .
Friendly, extended BASIC provides both power
for the sophisticated programmer and simplicity
for the beginner. Input and output operations are
easy to program and debug because the 4051
commands use device independent keywords.
Input and output can be as simple at INPUT or
PRINT or can have FORTRAN like power with
PRINT, DELETE and IMAGE commands.
A data communication option permits sharing
data with a host computer. The asynchronous.
RS-232 interface lets you choose terminal mode
communications at up to 2400 baud. Terminal
modes provide performance like our popular 4012
4052
The 4052 IS deSigned to support other products
which comply With IEEE Standard 488-1978
Fast Processing
High Level BASIC
Expandable Memory
High performance computation and communications for a whole spectrum of problem solving,
data analysis, and decision making applications.
The 4052 is a desktop computer offering high
performance, stand-alone computing power, flexible data communications,and easy-to-Iearn, extended BASIC. These features , combined with
high resolution graphics, make the 4052 an excellent choice for scientific and statistical research ,
forecasting , data acquisition and analYSis.
The 4052 is an integrated system offering all the
tools necessary to immediately begin providing
relevant solutions. For rapid calculation, the 4052
has a fast processor with microcode floating
point. The state-of-the-art graphics capabilities of
the 4052 provide for demand hard copy of any
OEM term s available on these products.
80
combination of text and high-density graphics
(with optional hard copy unit). Fast processing
coupled with simultaneous display of text and
graphics meets the needs of most application
requi rements.
The 4052 comes standard with 32k bytes of memory, and can be optionally expanded to 64k
bytes, allowing larger and more complex programs to be handled. A 300k bytes magnetic cartridge tape drive is built-in , allowing both ASCII
and binary programs or data to be easily stored
and retrieved using simple file management commands in BASIC. The 4052 keyboard retains the
familiar, easy-to-use format of the 4051A typewriter keyboard , yet contains subtle changes made
with the user in mind like sculptured keys and
non-glare keycaps.
A Family and a System. Our 4051 set the standard for high performance, affordable desktop
computing . Following in the 4051's footsteps , the
4052 offers a faster processor and larger memory
capacity. The 4054, with a processor similar to the
4052, offers enhanced graphics on a 19 in DVST
screen. Combined, they make up the 4050 Series,
the only desktop computer line with software
compatibility. Programs developed on a 4051 will
operate on the 4052 and the 4054 without
modification.
The 4050 Series continues to set the standards
for high performance, easy-to-use desktop computers. Flexible GPIB and RS-232 interfacing to a
wide variety of proven peripheral products allows
considerable versatility in designing a system to
fit your needs. Additional peripherals can be
readily integrated as your application needs
grow.
Friendly extended BASIC provides the simplicity
desired by the beginner and the flexibility and
power required by the experienced programmer.
Device independent keywords such as INPUT
and PRINT make progamming input and output
operations easy. Fast matrix functions such as
multiply, inverse, transpose, identity and determinants are built into BASIC.
Friendly graphics. Commands like MOVE, DRAW
and ROTATE in BASIC allow graphic displays to
be created on the 4052 using user defined units,
not machine or raster units. Using graphics to display information accelerates analysis, decision
making , and model building. It supplements your
intuition and gets your point across by making
information simple to understand.
CHARACTERISTICS
Processor - LSI bi-polar 16 bit.
User Memory Workspace - 32k standard . expandable to
64k .
Keyboard - Improved . sculptured , matte finish . Keyboard
identical in other specifications to 4051 keyboard.
Tape Drive - Identical to 4051 tape drive but provides faster
storage and retrieval of programs with direct-ta-file operation.
CRT - Direct view slorage CRT.
Alphanumeric - 72 characters per line. 35 lines.
Character Set - Full ASCII including upper/lower case.
Special Fonts - Selectible under program control - SwedIsh , German. British . Spanish, Danish/Norwegian. Graphic, and
BUSiness.
Graphic Resolution - 1024 x 780 viewable points, 1024 x
1024 addressable points.
Visibility - Flicker-free , easy-on-the-eyes display.
Copier - Compatible with TEKTRONIX 4631 and 4611 Hard
Copy Units.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4052 Desktop Computer System .. ..... $9900
Option 24 64k bytes total memory ....................... Add $800
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on the 4050
Graphic Sys tem Series. For further trai ning information,
contact your local Sales Offic e or request a copy of th e
Tekt ronix Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
TEK
DESKTOP COMPUTER
ROM PACKS AND OPTIONS
4051R06
4052R09
Option 01
Editor ROM Pack
(4051 only)
Real Time Clock ROM Pack
(4052 and 4054 only)
Data Communications Interface
(4051,4052 and 4054)
Allows general ASCII file editing of data or programs or text (including FORTRAN, BASIC and
COBOL programs) offline. Includes 29 commands
such as COPY, INSERT, MOVE , SEARCH and
SORT for creating , manipulating and storing
ASCII text.
Order 4051 R06 .. _.... __ . _____ . ____ . ____ ... _._ .. __ ._. $650
Provides five time related functions for date and
timekeeping, elapsed time measurement and a
time programmable 4050 BASIC level interrupt. All
functions may be executed directly from the
keyboard or may be used within a program.
Order 4052R09 ........................ .............. $500
Allows asynchronous bit serial communications
between 4050 Series Desktop Computer and any
external device conforming to EIA RS-232 standard. Ease of use is facilitated by a special
overlay and added language commands that
make communication parameters and communications programmable.
Order Option 01 (4052/4054) ..... Add $1400
Order Option 01 (4051) ........ ........ Add $900
4052R06
Editor ROM Pack
(4052 and 4054 only)
Same capability as 4051 ROO.
Order 4052R06 ____ .... __ . ____ .................. __ ... $650
4051R07
Signal Processing ROM Pack # 1
(4051 only)
Adds seven new functions which can be applied
to one dimensional data arrays; integration. differentiation (2 and 3 point), fast graphing, locating
minimum and maximum, and crossing over a
threshold. Functions operate 2-10 times faster
than equivalent BASIC routines .
Order 4051 R07 ...................................... $350
4052R07
Signal Processing ROM Pack # 1
(4052 and 4054 only)
Same capability as 4051 R07.
Order 4052R07 ...................................... $350
4051R08
Signal Processing ROM Pack #2
(4051 only)
Extends array handling capabilities by adding
commands that perform Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT), its inverse (1FT), convolution, correlation,
windowing and related utility functions. Functions
execute 7-20 times faster than BASIC routines.
Order 4051 R08 ...................................... $700
4052R08
Signal Processing ROM Pack #2
(4052 and 4054 only)
Same capability as 4051 ROB.
Order 4052R08 ........... ........................... $700
4052R11
Character and Symbol ROM Pack
(4052 or 4054 only)
Generates high resolution stroked characters that
can be scaled, rotated and slanted to user's
specifications. In addition to the over one-hundred standard characters, users can construct
unique custom symbols. The degree of smoothness is selectable for quick screen previews
before final plotter copy. Additional commands
are provided to extend Dynamic Graphic
capabilities.
Order 4052R 11 ................................. ____ . $900
Option 02
Backpack (4052 and 4054 only)
Optional four-slot backpack.
Order Option 02 ............ ......... ........ Add $400
Option 03
Backpack (4052 and 4054 only)
Optional four-slot backpack with Option 01 Data
Communications Interface built-in.
Order Option 03 ........ ................... Add $1700
4051 R10
Advanced File Manager ROM Pack
(4051 only)
Provides easy access to advanced file management offered by the 4909 Multi-User File Management System. Accessible using commands in
BASIC, capabilitites such as indexed or "keyed "
files , variable length records and dynamic file
allocation are supported.
Order 4051 R 10 ,.................................. __ . $750
Option 10
Printer Output Interface
(4051,4052 and 4054)
Enables 4050 Series system to output alphanumerics to any printer or output device conforming
to the RS-232-C or RS-244A Standard for EIA
Numerical Machine Control. Data rates are
switch-selectable up to 2400 baud with the 4051 ,
and 9600 baud with the 4052 or 4054.
Order Option 10 .......................... __ Add $550
4052R10
Advanced File Manager ROM Pack
(4052 and 4054 only)
Same capability as 4051RlO.
Order 4052R 10 ...................................... $750
4050E01
ROM Expander (4051,4052 and 4054)
Permits connecting up to eight ROM Packs to the
4050 Series Desktop Computer. Utilizes one slot
of existing twos lot backpack.
Order4051E01 ................................. __ . $1150
Option 30
Dynamic Graphics
(4054 only)
Permits complex graphic objec ts to be created,
saved, and recalled with simple BASIC language
commands. These objects, saved in a Dynamic
Graphics memory can be displayed , blinked ,
moved anywhere on the screen , and removed
without affecting the rest of the display.
Order Option 30 ....... ......... ........... Add $3315
Option 31
Color Enhanced Dynamic Graphics
(4054 only)
Contains Option 30 Dynamic Graphics (see
above) with the addition of the latest technology,
two color DVST. Refreshed graphics appear in an
orange color while stored graphics are displayed
in the familiar green. Distinguishability between
refreshed and stored graphics are improved with
the additional color.
Order Option 31
(factory option only) .... ,............... Add$5315
81
GRAPHICS
SOFTWARE
TEK COMPUTER
PLOT 50
Graphics Software Library
PLOT 50 software supports the 4050 Series
Desktop Computers. The PLOT 50 software provides flexible, interactive programs that aid the
user in scientific, engineering and management
applications through easy-to-use high quality
graphics.
MATHEMATICS VOLUMES 1 & 2
Volume 1 (23 programs) and Volume 2 (16 programs) consist of routines that provide fast solutions to frequently encountered mathematical
problems . Included are function analyses, conversions, integration, differentiation, linear programming, and Fast Fourier Transforms. The math
volumes can be purchased separately or together
at discount as the Math Library.
STATISTICS
The statistics software includes four tape cartridge-based products (statistics Volumes 1-4)
and three disk-based products. These packages
represent a well-rounded portfolio of statistics
routines , from simple descriptive statistics to multiple linear regressions . The 4050DXX Series of
statistics software has been enhanced with a
special user interface to make the use of statistics extremely easy in your problem solving.
Functions include small samples analysis, analysis
of variance and co-variance, polynomiac and
multiple linear regressions , and sophisticated
non-linear regression techniques. A key feature of
the packages is the use of graphics to better
understand the nature of the data.
The statistics packages may be purchased separately or at discount as the Statistics Library.
MANAGEMENT GRAPHICS
Business and technical managers are supported
by a number of flexible graphing packages. Business Planning and Analysis Volume 1 & 2 provide
programs for basic decision making, such as
Break-Even Analysis , to Time Series Analysis and
Forecasting. Modeling and Reporting Software
(MARS) is a general purpose modeling package
that allows the user to automate the reporting
processes. Data is entered, stored , and manipulated in matrix format . Presentation Aids are
oriented towards the easy generation of overhead transparencies, both graphic and textual.
OTHER PLOT 50 PRODUCTS
Picture Composition allows the user to create
simple or complex drawings from a tablet without
being a programming expert. Graph plot provides
the user with multiple graphs per page. General
utilities provide subroutinea for editing, duplicating, and sorting. Digitizing provides editing and
computation support during graphic input. And
there 's more.
PLOT 50 Software supports the 4050 Series
Desktop Computers , providing powerful ,
interactive programs to aid the user in scientific,
engineering, and management application.
Each PLOT 50 volume is driven by menus,
prompts and defaults that keep operation fast ,
friendly, logical and forgiving . You can proceed
from master menu to graph, for example, in as
few as four keystrokes. You can transfer operation from computer to peripheral in many programs at the stroke of a single key.
Tektronix announces 10 new PLOT 50 Software
packages this year:
2-D Drafting
Interactive Digitizing
Picture Composition
Micro Pert 2 Project Management
Document Preparation
Statistics: Test & Distribution
Statistics: Analysis of Variance
Statistics: Multiple Regression
Statistics: Non-Linear Estimation
Presentation Aids
At the heart of the library is Tektronix graphics: more kinds of interactive graphics and
more meaningful graphics than any competitive software on the market. Access to information is of little value if the keys to understanding and communicating it aren't there, too. PLOT
50 supports the unequalled graphics capability of
the 4050 Series.
The displays are not only sharper- thanks to
each 4050 Series computer's high-resolution
display- they're more complete, too. with features like automatically labeled data points. Or
the capability to easily transform the same data
into different kinds of graphs.
Most PLOT 50 is compatible with the entire 4050
Series, so you can change computers or exchange data quickly and easily.
Most importantly, PLOT 50 packs tremendous power into the fewest possible keystrokes. Combined with the processing speed of
the 4052 or 4054, PLOT 50 Software can perform
routines many times faster than competitive
packages-and offers many capabilities simply
unavailable elsewhere.
PLOT 50 lets you sit down at the computer,
load the program, and proceed to the solution. Even complete newcomers to computers
can put most volumes to use in less than an hour!
With PLOT 50's multiple menus, help files and
tutorials, continual prompting and graphic output,
even operators unskilled in the application itself
can perform many common tasks.
Common Data Exchange Formats
Tektronix has developed common data exchange
formats for a number of the PLOT 50 packages to
make re-entry of data unnecessary and sharing of
data across programs very easy. Standard File
Formats (SFF) allow sharing of numeric data
across programs and the Graphic Model Exchange (GMX) Format allows sharing of graphic
data across program. These common exchange
formats represent significant productivity gains
for desktop computing graphics users.
Tektronix ofters OEM Software Licensing
Agreements. See your Tektronix OEM representative for full details.
82
TEK
2-D Drafting
Picture Composition
2-D Drafting
Picture Composition
Easy Graphing
Document Preparation
Micro Pert 2 - Project Management
Statistics
Presentation Aids
Vol 1
Interactive Digitizing
Statistics
83
MULTI USER
SYSTEM
TEK FILE
DIRECT
FILE
BYTE 0
File Security
INDEXED
FILE
Several levels of file security are provided by the 4909,
The removable disk cartridge allows large collections of
files to be completely removed from the 4909 and placed
in a physically secure place, For archival storage , the
removable cartridge is highly effective,
Files cannot be affected at the volume level unless a
master password is known, If a master password was
specified when the original disk volume was formatted ,
subsequent reformatting cannot take place unless the
master password is known, thus prohibiting the modification of existing files ,
IIYTE N
Indexed files don 't have to be treated differently from
regular files, like on some systems supporting this
capability ,
True Concatenated Volumes
PUBLIC
WORKSPACE
PRIVATE
WORKSPACE
PRtVATE
WORKSPACE
PRIVATE
WORKSPACE
4909
Shared Access by a Maximum of 10 Users
Public and Private File Workspaces for
Operational Flexibility/ File Protection
32 or 96 Megabyte Drive Capacity
Expandable up to 8 drives (768 Megabytes)
Indexed (Keyed) Files Support
Dynamically Allocated Files
Variable Length Records
Concatenated Volumes
High Speed GPIB (IEEE 488-1978)
interfacing
Within a multi-user environment, access to files within a
private file workspace is controlled by an access list
assigned to each file,
For security, users permitted to use a file within other
private file works paces can be given different levels of
access, ranging from read-only to write and delete,
Multi-User Access
The cost effectiveness and contribution to productivity
of a mass storage system is enhanced when two or
more users are allowed to share information simultaneously, The 4909 allows the sharing and updating of
files by up to 10 users, Private file access is permitted
after users supply a User-IO and password when
accessing the 4909, Access is permitted to a private file
workspace if the user entry matches a pre-defined User10 list maintained by the 4909,
Users who do not provide a User-IO and password when
' signing-on' are automatically placed into a public file
workspace, All users utilizing the public file workspace
have access to the same files, each of which is
collectively subject to operations currently taking place
by other users within the public file workspace, Public file
workspaces allow users of dedicated 4909 systems to
not be burdened with multi-user 'sign-on' constraints,
English Command Operation Over GPIB
Time of Day Clock with Battery Backup
File Names up to 100 Characters Long
SIMPLE
Flexible file management provides controlled access to
files, expandable records and files , and enhanced data
storage and retrieval. Plug-in interfacing capability permits host interfacing flexibility and the ability to add more
disk dnves for expanded capacity,
Mass Storage Expandability
The 4909 offers 32 megabytes of data storage capacity
as standard, Optionally, 96 megabytes of storage capacity is available. Each drive comes with a t6 megabyte
removable disk cartridge allowing data transportability
and fast backup, For increased capacity , additional disk
drives can be added by acquiring the 4909AC Auxiliary
Cabinet. This cabinet will hold one or two additional disk
drives of either 32 or 96 megabyte capacity, Interfacing
to the 4909 is by a plug-in disk interface which can
support two hard disk drives, A maximum of four disk
interface plug-ins can be used on the 4909, supplying a
maximum of 768 megabytes of online mass storage
capacity,
84
Variable Length Records
Variable length records support by the 4909 provides
additional flexibility In creating and updating files, allowing records to change In accordance With user
requirements,
Interfacing Flexibility
The 4909 controller has eleven plug-in slots allowing a
variety of special purpose interfaces to be supported. In
addition to hard disk interfacing, access to desktop
computers is provided using a GPIB (IEEE 488-1978)
plug-in Interface, Assuming the 4909 controller contained
only a single disk interface, up to ten GPIB interfaces
could be supported, A maximum data transfer rate of
240,000 bytes/second is possible per GPIB interface,
With some performance degradation depending on the
number of users, and the amount of disk access taking
place,
ROM Pack Operation
Access to the 4909 from the 4050 Series of desktop
computers will be via GPIB interfacing used in conjunctIOn With a ROM pack to provide file management
operation, ROM packs for the 4050 Series include the
4051Rl0 for use with the 4051 , and the 4052Rl0 for use
With the 405214054,
English Command Operation
FtLE
Multiple Level Library Names
The 4909 is a high performance mass storage system
based on a controller which provides advanced file
management between multiple desktop computers and
large capacity hard disk drives,
The 4909 introduces the concept of ' concatenated'
volume, File size is no longer constrained by the capacity
of the drive on which it is located , Multiple drives can
logically be configured together to appear as one, Any
individual file can assume the size of the total configured
drive capacity, Fixed as well as removable disk cartndges can be configured together, or kept separate to
allow removable cartridges to be transported between
other 4909 hard disk systems, Also, when drives are
configured together, users need not be concerned with
specifYing which of the volumes on which a particular file
is stored ,
DIRECTORY STRUCTURES
Without a ROM pack, devices supporting any IEEE 488t978 Standard Compatible interface can communicate
directly with the 4909, using English commands, The
4909 will respond to ASCII command strings sent over
the bus , and can therefore be used by a variety of nonTektronix desktop computers or controllers,
Superior File Management
Real Time System Clock
The 4909 is deSigned for ease of use and superior file
management flexibili ty, The 4909 lets you manage your
files , they don 't manage you! File names, for example,
can be up to 100 characters long, Multiple levels of files
called libraries are provided, allowing files to be grouped
according to some particular criteria or need, When files
are created , users need not worry about how big a file
should be , nor what to do if they write more information
than the file can hold, The 4909 provides for dynamic
allocation or automatic expansion of files, eliminating this
'bookkeeping' task by the user,
The 4909's real time clock, once set, automatically
assigns the time and date to a file, allowing users to
keep track of when files were created or updated, Files
can be manipulated on the basis of their time/date
'stamps," e,g , a user may want to delete all files that
have not been accessed since a particular date,
Indexed ("Keyed") Files
Option 33 98 Megabyta, DI,k .. _..... _................... Add $4000
FtELD INSTALLAaLE OPTtONS
4909FO 1 aPia tnterlace .............................................. $ 1800
4909F03 DI,k Intarlace ................................. _.... _........ $1800
4909Fl0 Controller Expanalon ............................. _..... $1000
ROM PACK OPTIONS
4051Rl0 ROM Pack .. _...... _...... _........_.................... _...... _ $750
4052R 1 0 ROM Pack .......................................... _............ $750
For users requiring faster, more flexible access to record
information stored in files, the 4909 provides indexed
files, Each record can be stored and retrieved on the
basis of an alphanumeric key, The key used might be an
employee's name or a product reference number. With
indexed files, information can be organized better, and
retrieved fas ter, A variety of useful commands are
provided to allow complete control of indexed files,
ORDERING INFORMATION
4909 Multi User File System ........... $22,000
Option 33 98 Megabyta, DI,k ...... _..................... Add $4000
4909AC Auxiliary Cabinet ............... $13,000
TEK
CHARACTERISTICS
Plotting Area -
PO In).
mm
4662 Option 31
Intelligent B-Size (A3) Plotter
a-pen Turret Version
Compatible in RS-232C ASCII Environments
Supported by PLOT 10 and PLOT 50
Software
The 4662 Option 31 adds the convenience of an
automatic a-pen turret to the built-in processing
and feature-packed performance of the world 's
most versatile small plotter.
Tektronix has always offered its plotter customers
the largest selection of colors, pen types and line
widths. With the Option 31 turret, you can insert
any eight pens and program the 4662 to make the
selection for you. Mix and match hard-nib, fibertip and wet-ink pens. Include fine line widths for
the most precise plots, or for drawing several
plots on a single page. Work with nine available
colors in adding greater clarity and appeal to
presentations and camera-ready plots.
You can retrofit your present 4662 with the
Option 31 turret. It can be installed quickly and
reliably by any Tektronix service engineer. Updating existing programs to include programmed
pen selection requires the addition of just a few
lines of code.
That's all part of the Tektronix design philosophy
of product upgradability (we also provide 4662
owners with a field-installable ak memory enhancement). That's why Tektronix has a worldwide reputation not only for product reliability, but
for the reliability of its products as long-term
investments.
From the moment you turn it on, you can see
that it is convenient, cooperative, and more
than competent. It automatically adjusts for a
maximum 254 mm x 381 mm (10 in x 15 in) plot.
To set a different plotting area or to adjust to a
new paper size, you simply use the SET control
buttons on the front panel to define the new area.
And once it starts moving, you can see it drawing
on its microprocessor intelligence to draw curves
that are really curve forms . To maintain superior
accuracy and repeatability , even at speeds as
high as 559 mm/s (22 ips). To select and seat
each pen perfectly, whichever pen style it picks
up next.
Because input data is internally buffered,
you can optimize data transfer from the host
processor, or move on to your next computation
while the 4662 is plotting .
The 4662 Option 31 is equipped with both RS232C and GPIB interfaces as standard .
Digitizing on any compatible Desktop Computer or host system is easy with the 4662's
built-In joystick control. Move the pen to the
desired position on the plot, press the CALL key,
and the plotter sends the X-Y data points to the
system . A GIN command causes the plotter to
send the current XY pen coordinates and pen up,
pen down information.
The 4662's internal alphanumeric character generator produces a full upper-lower case ASCII
character set. You can request alphanumerics of
any height and width, and rotate them as fine as
10 increments.
Selected characters are available in seven different standard fonts . You can plot on paper, on
Mylar, or on acetate for overhead transparencies
of the highest quality.
Plotter utility routines in the PLOT 10 Graphics
Software Library are comprehensive and proven
in thousands of sites around the world. In the
PLOT 50 Library, for use with Tektronix Desktop
Computers, are powerful new menu-based Picture Composition and Easy Graphing packages
that take you from first idea to final plot in the
fewest possible keystrokes-just as the Option
31 turret gets you there with the fewest possible
delays.
X-Axis > 381 mm (15 in). Y-Axis > 254 mm
Repeatability - :t 0.063 mm ( :t 0.0025 in) same pen. :t 0.25
mm ( :t 0.01 0 in) pen eXChanged.
Time to Maximum Velocity - '" 120 ms.
olta Re solution - 0.127 mm (0.005 In).
Plotting Rite - User programmable Irom 10 mm/s to 570
mm/s In 10 mm/s Increments.
Point Plotting Rate - Pen action rate 10 points s max.
Pen Control - Each pen may be selected either under sollware control or by operating bullons on the Pen Control
Module.
Position Control s - Joystick vector rates variable Irom .038
mm/s to 102 mm/s (0.015 ips to 4 Ips).
Writing Method - Fiber-tip hard-nib or wet-ink pens.
Paper Size - 279 mrn x 431 mm (11 in x 17 1n max).
Peper Retainer - Electrostatic holddown.
Front Panel Control s POWER switch
POWER indicator
PROMPT indicator
ERROR indicator
LOAD switch
Disengages electrostatic holddown moves pen to upper right
corner of plotting surlace.
LOCAL switch
For data communicalion between terminal and plotter with
the RS -232C interlace.
PEN switch
Provides manual control 01 pen up-down motion.
CALL switch
Used to store coordinate points during digitizing operations.
SET controls
Two switChes-SET LOWER LEFT and SET UPPER RIGHT-used lor convenient page scaling and aspect ratio changes il
desired. May be used to allow plolting mirror images.
JOYSTICK positioning control.
LOCATE controls
Two switches LOCATE LOWERLEFT and LOCATE UPPERRIGHT poSition pen in respective comer 01 the currently delined page.
Pen Control Module - 1-8 switches. Exchange active pen in
location corresponding to numbered switch depressed.
The lollowing lunctions are activated by holding the switch In
the down poSition until the bell rings .
STORE PEN switch causes the active pen to be stored in the
turret.
11 -41 Opens turret to the 1-4 poSition lor loading pens.
15-81 Opens turret to the 5-8 position lor loading pens.
I RETURNI Returns turret to the closed poSition
I FASTI Switch directs plotter to plot at lull speed.
I SLOWI Switch directs ploller to plot at half speed.
JPAUSEI Causes the plotting motion to stop in the middle of a
plot.
I RESUMEI Causes the plolting motion to begin aller a pause
has been enabled. without any loss of data.
Rear Panel Controls - Four rotary hexadecimal switches to
control various interface parameters.
~;~2~210~.i~~ta300~66B~~r~~~~~~~~.d~r~:tadr,~n~~~~';;;i~~
ASCII .
Operating Modes - The 4662 Option 31 has 2 input modes in
RS-232C. Alphanumeric (Alpha) and Graphic plot (Graphic) The
466 Option 31 also has Graphic input (GIN) to the host.
Cheracter Set - The alphanumerics feature includes 95 ASCII printing characters plus BELL. RS. CRT. FF, HT. LF. and
VT characters. all under full program control. The alphanumeric
feature may be changed to suit the individual needs by modifying Alpha Scale which allows changing character size. Alpha
Scale which allows changing character size. Alpha Rotate
which rotates the printing plane and Alpha Font which allows
selection of 7 sets of special character fonts .
1~~~~/~~~~r V-:t~~.Z ;;~xv6~ %.r.~~~~ ee~~~2. °Gnt,,<>~r:quency 48 to 66 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
Dlmenaions
in
Width
654
25.75
8.00
Height
203
Wei hI
Net
Shipping
k
16
21
Ib
35
46
ORDERING INFORMATION
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter
Option 31 .•••..•••.•.......•.•.•••..••..•........•••.• $5300
Span Field Retrofit Kit
for .tandard 4662 (021 -0339-00) .. _....................... _..... $1500
OEM terms 1. lileble on these products.
85
PLOTTER
TEK DIGITAL
The 4662's internal alphanumeric character generator produces a full upper-lower case ASCII
character set. You can request alpha-numerics of
any height and width. Selected characters are
available in seven different standard fonts . In
addition, interchangeable pens and pen types
offer multicolor and multiline width capability.
Plot from any point of view. Not only is character
scaling pOSSible, but alphanumerics can just as
rapidly be rotated in 10 or finer increments.
Drawing speed is generally as fast or faster than
any other plotter in the 4662's price range. Both
RS-232 and GPIB interfaces are standard at no
extra cost.
Contact your local Tektronix Sales Engineer for
more information on this easy-to-use, exceptional
B-size plotter.
CHARACTERISTICS
Plotting Area -
X-Ax is > 381 mm (15 In).
V-Axis > 254 mm (10 in).
Repeatability -
± 0.06 mm ( ± 0.0025 in).
Time to Maximum Velocity Resolution -
", 120 mm/s.
0.127 mm (0.005 In).
Plotting Rate - 40.6-55.9 mm/s (16-22 ips) vector dependent.
Point Plotting Rate Character Set -
4662
Intelligent B-size (A3) Plotter
Multi-color Capability
Once it starts moving, you really notice the
improvement over other plotters: the 4662's digital stepping motors and internal vector generator
work at high speed, with microprocessor-controlled acceleration and deceleration .
Pen Control - By software control or by operation of front
panel PEN button. Pen may be disabled manually.
Position Controls ips to 4 ips.
Writing Method Paper Size -
Built-In RS-232 and GPIB Interface
The 4662 is the first plotter with built·in process·
ing power. As such it has the capability to work
on its own, without bogging down computational
operations. Studded with state·of·the·art technol·
ogy, it works with an accuracy and repeatability
that no other plotter can approach for the price.
From the moment you turn it on, you can tell the
difference : the 4662 automatically adjusts for 254
mm x 391 mm (10 in x 15 in) plot. There's no need
to worry how the last plot was set up. When you
wish to set a different plotting area or adjust to a
new paper size, you simply use the SET control
buttons on the front panel to define the new area.
The 4662 plots on paper, vellum, mylar, acetate·
film and preprinted forms .
Joystick vector rates variable from 0.015
Fiber-tipped pen or wet ink drafting pen.
279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) max.
Repeatability is excellent, time after time. There is
no servo hysteresis, no drift as in potentiometric
feedback systems. And no slidewires to clean, no
moving electrical contacts, no servo adjustments
to be made.
Drive Characteristics - Two four-phase stepping motors,
each operating a pulley/cable system to propel the pen In that
motor's respective axis.
It's a better kind of plotter with a competitive
price for which Tektronix is famous .
ORDERING INFORMATION
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter ......_... $4600
The complete plotter. The 4662 is not only easy to
talk to: it has a great memory. Input data is
internally buffered so you can optimize data
transfer from your host processor, or move on to
your next computation while the 4662 is plotting.
Up to four 4662's can be teamed up in series, and
up to 15 4662's can be used with one GPIB
device like the TEKTRONIX 4050 Series of
desktop graphic computers. Each plotter can
perform its own job simultaneously while the host
processor turns to other tasks. A simple, unique
code activates each plotter.
Digitizing on any compatible graphic terminal or
host system is easy with the 4662's built-in
joystick control. Move the pen to the desired
position on the plot, press the CALL key , and the
plotter sends the X-Y data points to the system. A
GIN command causes the plotter to send the
current X-Y pen coordinates and pen up, pen
down information. If the pen is outside the page
boundaries, boundary values are sent and a bell
on the plotter signals the operator.
86
Pen action rale 10 points/s max.
Full ASCII character set.
Paper Retainer -
Electrostatic hoId-down.
Option 0 1 GPIB I/F cable instead 01
RS-232C I/F cable ................................................ No Charge
Option 20 8k Buller ............................................... Add $495
Option 31 8 pen turret ........................................... Add $700
4662A01 PLOT 10 Utility routines software ........ Add $420
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Unlve"al Euro 220 V/ 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Au stralian 240 V/ 1OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V / 1SA ............... No Charge
OEM terms available on thele product • .
DIGITAL
PLOTTER
TEK
4663
The 4663 IS designed to support other products
which comply with IEEE Standard 4881978
Unique parameter entry device. This front
panel card device lets you quickly identify or
select operating parameters Without resorting to
binary switches, straps, status display devices,
and volumes of operator manuals. It allows you to
quickiy program baud rate , pen type, acceleration, plotting speed , aspect ratio , page size and
many other parameters.
Intelligent C-Size (A2) Plotter
Dual Programmable Pen Control
Nine Character Fonts
RS-232 and GPIB Product
Rnally: an intelligent plotter that saves time without sacrificing flexibility . The 4663 is the first high
speed C-size plotter with built-in processing power and 5.5k buffer memory to free the host from
many routine computational operations. But the
4663 story isn't just the intelligence, but how
in telligently it has been put to use.
The 4663 can handle either 420 mm x 594 mm
(European A-2 drafting size) or 432 mm x 559 mm
(American C size - 17 in x 22 in) paper, mylar or
acetate with felt tip, hard-nib, or wet ink pens to
give you crisp, clean camera-ready copies or
overhead transparencies.
A paper advance option is available for roll stock,
with form feed remotely or locally programmable.
Th is option allows the 4663 to operate
unattended with a variety of form sizes.
The plotter features dual programmable pen control with interchangeable multicolor pens and is
capable of producing dotted or dashed lines from
local firmware . Built-in joystick allows easy manual
positioning of the pens for digitizing or page
scaling adjustments.
Features like these make the 4663 a natural for
printed circuit board manufacturing and metal
working applications or civil engineering and
drafting environments including CalComp previewing and mapping.
These parameters can be stored up to 90 days
without power. Up to four users can configure the
plotter to their individual requirements with Option
37 .
Excellent penmanship. Nine character fonts
come standard with the 4663, including the full
ASCII character set. All characters can be scaled ,
slanted , rotated and may be centered when used
as plot symbols.
Several other performance options are offered
such as downloadable character sets, and
programmable macros. Arc and circle generation
capability, utilizing circular interpolation, is also
available. Standard fixed macros allow the current viewport to be outlined or an axis drawn.
Local functions. Various graphic functions are
implemented via firmware . Page scaling ,
windowing , viewporting and clipping are typical.
CHARACTERISTICS
Max Plotting Area (17 In).
Repeatability -
X-axis 569 mm (22.4 in). Y-axis 432 mm
± 0.025 mm ( ± 0.001).
Max Plotting Speed dependent.
Poinl Plotting Rate Character Generator Fonts Std .
406-559 mm (16-22 ips) Vector
10 pts per s max .
95 ASCII , 15 x 7 Malrix, 7 Special
Paper Slle - European A2 size 420 mm x 594 mm, U.S. CSIZe 17 in x 22 in.
Paper Retention - ElectrostatIC hold down, sprocket feed paper advance (Optional).
Media Types -
Paper or Mylar.
Drive Characteristics - Microprocessor controlled stepping
molors controlling cable system connected to pen arm.
Baud Rate -
110-9600 baud.
Standard Interface -
RS-232-C. full duplex , loop-through.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4663 Interactive Digital Plotter ... .... $10,900
Option 0 1 GPIB I/F cable ...................... ................ Add $525
Option 04 GPIB only (deletes RS-232C) ............. No charge
Option 31 ci rcu lar Interpolation and
programmable macros .... ...................................... Add $525
Option 32 Math character set and down
load able characte rs ............................................... Add $450
Option 36 Paper advance ..................................... Add $990
Hardware loop through RS-232C interface is standard and optional GPIB is available.
Option 37 Added default parameters .................. Add $325
Graphing software support. Tektronix PLOT 10
Utility Routines for the 4663 control the plotter's
multiple pens, paper advance, and built-in arc
and circle generation. They also control selection
of built-in character fonts .The 4663 is also compatible via GPIB with the 4050 Series of desktop
computers using BASIC language keywords to
provide similar controls.
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 Vl 16A ................ No Charge
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORO ANO PLUG OPTIONS
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V 11 OA ......._................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ..... _......... No Charge
4663A01 PLOT 10 Utility Routines
Software •....•......•...•....••..•.•.................... $665
OEM term s available on these product s.
Tektro nix offers m aint enance tra ining cla s se s on the 4663
Interactive Digital PloHer. For further tra ining information,
contact your local Sales Offic e or request a copy of the
Tektronix Customer Training Ca talog on the return card.
87
HARD
UNIT
TEK COPY
Hard Copy Devices
Quick and convenient copies of complex information displayed on a screen are essential to the
use of graphic terminals, desktop computing
systems, and video image processing systems.
Graphic and alphanumeric information is recorded on paper at the press of a button, to fulfill a
variety of user needs. These include the need for
quick preview copy before final plotting, and
copies of intermediate steps during interactive
work sessions. Just as important are permanent
records of results for the file , and final output of
high quality for use in reports and presentations.
Tektronix offers six display copying devices to
cover all of these hard copy needs.
Within the product family are two devices for
copying storage tube screens, and four for copying general video devices such as raster scan
terminals, video cameras and monitors, or image
processing systems. Tektronix ' own implementation of fiber optic technology is provided in the
4631 for storage tube copy, and in the 4632,
4633A and 4634 for video imaging copy and line
scanning recording copy. An innovative Tektronix
implementation of electrostatic technology is offered in the 4611 for storage tube copy, and the
46 12 for video copy.
Fiber optics, based on photosensitive (light exposure) techniques, gives the highest quality hard
copy for dense and complex graphic displays.
Electrostatic technology, based on charge transfer techniques, provides the highest contrast
black-and-white images with high quality at an
economical cost per copy.
The concept of these alternative family offerings
is to fulfill a variety of hard copy requirements whether the need is for low-cost black and white
terminal copy, or for high resolution gray shaded
copy from a sophisticated image processing
system .
mm
4611
Low Copy Cost
High Contrast, Permanent Images
Electrostatic Process
Storage Tube Compatible
The 4611 provides permanent , dry copies of
graphic and alphanumeric information displayed
on storage tube screens. The 4611 is based on
electrostatic (charge transfer) technology, and
uses electrographic paper for high contrast,
archivable copies at an economical copy cost.
The 4611 uses a unique dry toning process that is
convenient, non-messy and superior to liquid
toner systems. Images are permanently fused
and made from inert, safe ingredients.
Compact and lightweight, the 4611 can easily be
moved from desk to desk. A warm-up light and
paper-out indicator are provided. All copies are
vertically oriented , and the copy time is 24
seconds.
The 4611 can be multiplexed to copy up to four
storage tube terminals and/or display monitors. It
is compatible with the 4010 Series of computer
display terminals, the 4114 terminal, the 4025
terminal, the 4050 Series of graphic computing
systems, and the 4081 interactive graphics terminal. The 4611 is also compatible with Tektronix 11
in and 19 in computer display modules.
88
CHARACTERISTICS
Weight -
45 lb.
Paper Size -
216 mm x 277 mm (B.5 in x 11 in).
Image Size -
7.5 in x 5.7 in standard
7.5 in x B.9 in when copying 4025 terminal.
Copy Tima -
24 s (30 s when copying 4025 terminal).
Warmup Time -
2 min.
Addressability -
256 dots per in, horizontal 171 dots per in,
vertical.
Toner -
Ory magnetic 4.9 oz. per bottle.
Paper -
Eiectrographic (dielectric) 500 It per roil.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4611 Hard Copy Unit .......................... $4400
Option 02 Four -
Channel Multiplexer ....................... $500
Option 31 Compatible with the 4025 Terminal .. No Charge
Paper -
One c ase of two rolls, 006-2838-00 ............... $24
Toner -
One bottle, 006-2990-00 .................................. $20
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ................ ........ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ............... NO Charge
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on Hard
Copy Unit. and the terminal. they .upport. For further
trai ning information, contact your local Sales Office or re·
que. t a copy of the Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
TEK
•
4612
Low Copy Cost
High Contrast, Black and White Images
Electrostatic Process
Video Source Compatible
VIDEO HARD
COPY UNIT
The 4612 provides permanent black-and-white
copies of graphic and alphanumeric information
from raster scan terminals and other video signal
sources. Based on electrostatic technology, the
4612 uses electrographic paper for high contrast,
archival copies at an economical copy cost. The
4612 uses a unique dry toning process that is
convenient, non-messy and superior to liquid
toner systems. Images are permanently fused
and made from inert, safe ingredients.
Compact and lightweight, the 4612 can easily be
moved from desk to desk. A warm-up light and
paper-out indicator are provided. A special selftest switch allows the operator to verify that the
unit is operating correctly. All copies are vertically
oriented, and the copy time is 24 seconds. The
4612 can be multiplexed to copy up to four raster
scan terminals, and can accept remote copy
signals. The 4612 is compatible with the
TEKTRONIX 4112 Option 11 terminal , and with a
wide variety of raster scan terminals and video
signal sources; including those which produce
RS-170, RS-330 or RS-375A type signals.
The standard unit is prepared for use with 525
line, 60 Hz sources. Adjustment for 625 line, 50 Hz
is provided as an option. In some cases, internal
adjustments can also be made to accommodate
non-standard video sources.
CHARACTERISTICS
Weight -
45 lb.
Paper Size -
216 mm x 277 mm (8.5 in x 11 in).
Image Size - 7.5 in x 5.8 In standard when copying 525 line,
60 Hz signals.
Copy Time -
24 s.
Warmup Time -
2 min.
Addressability - 256 dots per in, horizontal ;
171 dots per in, vertical.
Toner -
Dry magnetic 4.9 oz. per bottle.
Paper -
Electrographic (dielectric), 500 II per roll ,
ORDERING INFORMATION
4612 Hard Copy Unit
. u . u ••• u ••• u •• • • • u •••
$4400
Option 02 Four· Channel Multiplexer ...... .............. Add $500
Option 03 Setup 'or 625150 Scanning Standard
No charge
Option 15 Video Input Via 15 Pin Connector ..... No charge
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Au stralian 240 VI 1 OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ............... No Charge
Paper -
One case 0' two rolls, 006-2838-00
Toner -
One bollle, 006-2990-00 .................... ..
OEM terms available on these products.
$24
.... $20
COpy
TEK HARD
UNITS
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
Weight -
65 lb.
Paper Size -
216 mm x 277 mm (8.5 in x 11 in).
Warmup Time -
10 min.
Addressability -
20 dots per in, horizontal.
171 dots per in. vertical.
Paper -
Standard Dry-Silver, 500 It per roll.
4631 CHARACTERISTICS
Image Size -
225 mm x 170 mm (8.85 in x 6.7 in), horizontal
format.
180 mm x 137 mm (7 .1 in x 5.4 in), vertical
format.
Copy Time -
18 s first copy (36 s in special scan mode).
8 s subsequent copies (17 s in special scan
mode).
High Resolution (Special Scan Mode) horizontal. 300 dots per in, vertical.
340 dots per in,
4632 CHARACTERISTICS
Image Size -
213 mm X 160 mm (8.4 in X 6.3 in).
Copy Time -
18 s first copy, 8 s subsequent copies.
Gray Shades -
Min six standard min, eight with Option OS.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4631 Hard Copy Unit .......................... $5575
4632 Video Hard Copy Unit .........•.•...• $5575
COMMON OPTIONS
Option 01 Copy Counter ....................................... Add 5100
Option 02 Four·Channel Multiplexer .................... Add 5600
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V 116A ................ No Charge
4631
Hard Copy Unit
4632
Video Hard Copy Unit
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
High Image Quality
High Image Quality
Copies in Seconds
Gray Scale Capability
Fiber Optic Process
Copies in Seconds
Storage Tube Compatible
Video Source Compatible
Option A4 North American 240 V l ISA ............... No Charge
Paper -
One roll, 006·1 603-00 ...................................... 573
One case 01 lour rolls , 006-1603-01 ............ 5250
4631 ONLY OPTIONS
Option 31 Compatible with the 4025 Terminal .. No Charge
4632 ONLY OPTIONS
Option 03 Setup lor 625 Line, 50 Hz .................. No Charge
The 4631 provides permanent, dry copies of any
graphic and alphanumeric information displayed
on the storage tube screen. The 4631's fiber optic
process uses dry silver paper for the fine detail
and photographic quality image needed when
copying complex graphics and alphanumerics.
The 4631 requires no toners or chemical additives
of any kind. The entire process is clean and safe,
as images are created using only light and heat.
The 4631 is easy to move wherever needed. As a
special convenience, the 4631 automatically cuts
and stacks all copies into its built-in tray. A fourdigit copy counter is an optional feature.
Copies can be made in either vertical or horizontal format. The copy time is 18 seconds for the
first copy and only 10 seconds for subsequent
copies of the same display. A special "slow
scanning" mode allows images on the horizontal
format to be made at even higher resolution and
image quality.
The 4631 can be multiplexed to copy up to four
storage tube terminals and/or display monitors. It
is compatible with the 4010 Series of computer
display terminals, the 4114 terminal, the 4025
terminal, the 4050 Series of graphic computing
systems, and the 4081 interactive graphics terminal. The 4631 is also compatible with Tektronix 11
in and 19 in computer display modules.
90
The 4632 provides permanent copies of graphic
and alphanumeric information from raster scan
terminals and other video signal sources. All
copies are horizontally oriented. The copy time is
18 seconds for the first copy, and only 8 seconds
for subsequent copies of the same display. Eight
distinct shades of gray can be copied with a
special gray scale enhancement option. The standard 4632 can clearly show six different shades
of gray, for polygon fill-in, bar charts, and many
other applications.
The 4632 can be multiplexed to copy up to four
raster scan terminals, and can accept remote
copy signals. The 4632 is compatible with the
TEKTRONIX 4112 Terminal and with a wide variety of raster scan terminals and video signal
sources, including those which produce RS-170,
RS-330, RS-375A, RS-343A and RS-412A type
signals. The standard 4632 is prepared for use
with 525 line, 60 Hz sources. Many other adjustments are provided as options, including adjustments for 625 line, 50 Hz and for high resolution
1029 line, 60 Hz.
Option 04 Setup lor 1029 line, 60 Hz ................. No Charge
Option 05 Setup lor 4023 Terminal ..................... No Charge
Option 06 Enhanced Gray Scale .......................... Add 5800
Option 07 Compatible with HP 2640 Series
Terminals ................................................................ Add 5350
Option 08 Compatible with DEC MINC Systems No Charge
Option 09 Setup lor AT&T GEMINI
100 Systems ........ 560
OEM terms available on these products.
TEK
MATRIX
PRINTERS
With high reliability built-in, the 4643 is a convenient and economical choice requiring no preventive maintenance and infrequent servicing.
Fast but not expensive, the 4643 Printer uses bi directional logic technology to print 340 characters per second. With a full 132 character line,
speeds of 125 lines per minute are nominal.
•
4643
Low Cost Printing
Flexible for Many Applications
Crisp, Matrix Quality Printing
Easy to Use
International Characters
High Reliability
Virtually no maintenance means an even
greater savings, and less downtime for repairs as
well, A diagnostic display and self-testing routine
virtually eliminates the need for preventive maintenance calls.
The expected (head) life is more than 300 million
characters with no maintenance. This figure normally means at least two full years of continuous
work from a single matrix head. The fabric ribbon ,
continuous loop cassette is usable for at least 5
million characters. Both the matrix head and
ribbon cassette are quickly operator-replaceable
eliminating the need for a service call.
High quality matrix printing is assured by the
unique 14-wire printing head. The 7 by 7 format
print font permits easy reading and the operator
can specify condensed, expanded or standard
characters. In the condensed (character) face,
the 4643 prints out a 132-character line format on
an 8 1/2 by 11 in sheet. Because the 4643 uses
impact printing, six very legible copies (including
five NCR or carbon copies) can be made to save
time and avoid the expense of photo copies.
Compatibility. The printer of choice for high
technology systems, the standard Tektronix 4643
is RS-232 compatible and can be interfaced with
most standard RS-232 data processing instruments and systems. Option 01 provides a parallel
interface. The 4643 is compatible with the following Tektronix products: 4010 Series Computer
Display Terminals, 4025A Terminal, and 4050 Series of Desktop Graphic Computers; the 8001 and
8OO2A Microprocessor Labs and 8550 Microcomputer Development Lab; the S-3250, S-3270
and S-3280 Semiconductor Test Systems; the
7612D and 7912D Programmable Digitizers, and
the 7854 Oscilloscope .
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Ribbon Cassette (118-1314-00) RS-232 Inlerface
ORDERING INFORMATION
4643 Printer (2400 Baud Standard) ••• $4200
Option 01 -
Parallel Interface " ._" ._" """""""". No Charge
Option 02 - Specify Baud Rate (110, 150, 300, 600,
1200, 4800, 9600) ".""""""_""""_" " """.""." ",,. No Charge
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Pedestal (118- 1335-00) " " "._",,"" ,,"""" " __ " """""""" $185
Paper Basket ( 118- 1316-00) " """"_" "_"_" ___ ._" ",,,,,,,,,,_. S80
4642
Fast printer output is yours at low cost with the
TEKTRONIX 4642 Matrix Printer. This tabletop
printing unit offers 60 character-per-second out put speed, along with a variety of print alternatives. It is compatible with the TEKTRONIX 4020
Series of Computer Display Terminals and 4050
Series of desktop computers. Interface is standard RS-232C.
A variety of type faces. The 4642 gives the
operator a varied selection of upper and lower
case type faces . The standard format prints in 80
columns, and provides a choice of regular and
elongated characters. A condensed character
set, selectable from a front panel switch, gives
132 column output, and again, a choice of regular
or elongated characters. Characters are formed
on a 5 x 6 dot matrix.
Compact, easy to use. The 4642 requires minimum space for operation. Paper feed is by friction on the standard version , which uses inexpensive roll paper. The optional tractor feed paper
drive can be used with both fanfold paper and
multipart forms.
A choice of features. A complete selection of
features and accessories can make the 4642 Matrix Printer even more versatile. For example, Option 01 , a rear feed tractor paper drive option,
allows output of an original and four copies. A
printer stand is available to convert the 4642 to a
floor unit. The 4642-1 is the 220 V ac, 50 Hz version of the 4642. All options and accessories are
identical.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4642 Matrix Printer ............................. $2900
Option 01 Rear Feed Tractor Assembly " "_" .. _.... Add $280
4642- 1 Matrix Printer .......••..••••...... ..... $2900
Option 01 Rear Feed Tractor Assembly ........ _..... Add $280
FILE MANAGER, JOYSTICK
RECORDER/DRIVE
TEK TAPE
4907
File Manager
The 4907 is a direct access fle xible disc device
with a double density read/write feature that
enables up to 630k bytes capacity per disc.
An advanced multiple level file-by-name system
includes a directory that maintains the user files,
passwords and available space. For applications
requiring additional storage capacity, several
drives may be connected to the file manager.
Software commands are extensive with this file
manager and its compact size is small enough to
let it fit on a desktop or lab bench.
Built-in ROMs and special 4050 Series Desktop
Computer's ROM Packs contain the 4907 operating system software. No 4050 Series Memory is
required to support the operating system. The
4907 can also be used with some of the 4010
Series of graphic terminals.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4907 File Manager ................. ,.. ,......... $5280
Option 30 Two Disc Drives Total ........................ Add $3000
4924
Digital Cartridge Tape Drive
4923
Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder
Both digital recorders are highly reliable , very
easy to use for data storage and retrieval. The
4923 contains an RS-232C interface which supports any compatible computer display terminal
from 110 to 9600 baud.
Each tape cartridge can store approximately 300k
bytes of high density digital data. Rles of variable
length and files containing a variable number of
formatted records can be easily stored by these
two storage systems.
The 4924 offers a tape fetch feature and terminal
interrupt capability and can operate with
Tektronix graphics terminals via the terminal IEEE488 bus. Transfer data rates are 10k baud max.
Read data operates at 762 mm/s (30 in/s) and the
Fast Forward Mode allows you to skip forward or
reverse at 2290 mm/s (90 in/s). Up to 15 4924
tape drives may be multiplexed to any 4050 Series Desktop Graphic Computer at anyone time.
Option 31 Three Disc Dri ves Total ..................... Add $4550
Option 40 4052 {4054 Interface ........................... No Charge
OEM terms available on these products.
ORDERING INFORMATON
4923 Digital Cartridge Tape Recorder. $2600
4952
Joystick
For desktop computer users needing increased
interactivity, the 4952 Option 02 Joystick is the
last word in fingertip input control. Accurate to
0.1%. the sensitive cu rsor control activated by the
POINTER command lets you quickly position the
cursor the first time precisely.
More to build on, less to repair. By entering a
command in BASIC the 4952 Joystick will put the
pointer on-screen and initiate movement. Drift is
negligible.
The 4952 is simplicity itself. Just move the center
lever in the direction you want to move the cursor;
speed is controlled by the angle and distance of
the lever from the center position. And when you
want to stop the cursor, simply release the lever
to its natural vertical position.
Compatibility for the Joystick is assured with all
terminals in our 4010 family . 4081 Interactive
Graphic Systems and 4050 Series Desktop
Computers.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4952 Joystick (4014/4015) .................. $590
Option 01 Joystick (4010, 4012{4013) .................. Add $75
Option 02 Joystick (4050 Series) ........... __ ............ Add $100
Option 01 RS-232-C ....... ___ ._................................. No Charge
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive ..... $2990
92
OEM terms available on these products.
IMAGING HARD COPY
GRAPHIC TABLETS
TEK
4953, 4954, 4956
Graphic Tablets
With the 4953/54/56 Graphic Tablets, you can
choose one of two input device options: a pen for
best convenience, or a push-button cursor where
exacting accuracy is required . You can input
points or vectors to digitize or display maps ,
graphic drawings, schematics and other designs.
From precision mapping to exacting parts outlines, Tektronix Graphic Tablets satisfy a wide
range of user needs. You can select options from
a written -menu- placed on a Graphic Tablet. You
can store graphic input on peripheral disc or recorder devices, recall it later, and make quick,
dry-process copies on a Tektronix hard copy unit.
4634
Imaging Hard Copy
CHARACTERISTICS
Photographic Quality Images
RECORDING MEDIUM
Excellent Gray Scale and Copy Quality
Material - Dry Silver Paper Siandard Paper.
Compatible with Most Raster Scan Video
Systems
Paper Roll Length -
152 m (500 11).
Paper Roll Width -
216 mm (8.5 in).
GENERAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Dry, Quick, Convenient Process
Large, File-Sized Image
The TEKTRONIX 4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit is
designed to record images of photographic quality from raster scan video sources. It is suited to a
variety of industrial, commercial and medical
Imaging applications.
The 4634 is easily coupled to video sources. It
can be adjusted to accommodate a wide range
of line rates: from 525-1029 lines interlaced, and
from 256-512 lines non-interlaced for both 50 Hz
and 60 Hz systems. If image size is reduced ,
higher line rates are achievable.
The 4634 is available as either a rackmount or
benchtop model. The rackmount version fits into
any standard 482.6 mm (19 inch) rack.
The 4634 uses a cathode ray tube (CRT) to
expose the image on dry silver paper. A fiber
optic faceplate on the CRT effectively couples
the light output to the paper, providing photographic quality images of fine detail.
After exposure, the image is developed in a
thermal processor. The entire process of exposure and development is completed in just 26
seconds. The costs of space, equipment , and
labor associated with wet process films are
eliminated .
High Perlormance Tektronix
Warmup Time -
20 min.
Image Format paper mohon.
Horizontal scan hnes in direction of exiting
Gray Shades - 12 with High Perlromance Paper
6 with Siandard Paper.
Dimensions
Height
Length
Width
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
in
265.8
685.8
425.4
10.47
27
16.75
Weight
kg
Net
30.5
Ib
67
ORDERING INFORMATION
4953 Graphic Tablet 279 mm x 279 mm
(11 in x 11 in) ..................................... $3795
Cursor, 119-0622-00 .... ......................... _........................ $315
4954 Graphic Tablet 1016 mm x 762 mm
(40 in x 30 in) .... __ ........ _.......... _.. ...... __ .. $6190
4954F32 Pedestal ._ ... _............ _... _..... _.. $1325
Cursor, 119-0622-00 ........................ _.. _.... .. .................... $315
ORDERING INFORMATION
4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit ..•......... $8400
Option 30 Delete Rackmount Hardware .. ............... Sub $85
Option 45 END-USER set-up ........... ..................... No charge
High Perlormance Paper One roll. 006-2432-00 ........... $ 165
One case of four rolls. 006-2432-01 ............................... $560
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Uni_ersal European 220V / 16A ......... No Charge
Option A2 United Kingdom 240V 113A ............... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240V 11OA .................... ..... No Charge
Option A4 North American 240V 115A ._.............. No Charge
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDiTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL TEK TRONIX
REPRESENTATIVE
FOR
COMPLETE
INFORMATION.
Users may select two types of paper: standard
performance for lowest cost per image, and high
performance for optimal image quality. Both paper types are significantly less expensive than
film .
The combination of high image quality, operational simplicity, speed and convenience, and low
cost makes the 4634 Imaging Hard Copy Unit an
excellent choice for a wide variety of raster scan
video applications.
And Tektronix offers all of the pieces you 'll need
with your computer for a truly interactive graphics
system. Take your pick of the 279 mm x 279 mm
(11 in x 11 in) 4953 model, the drawing boardsized 1016 mm x 762 mm (40 in x 30 in) 4954
model, or the 4956 in two sizes. The 4956 is an
IEEE-488 device which connects to the 4050 Series Desktop Computers. Standard is 510 mm x
510 mm (20 in x 20 in) and the Option 33 version
is 910 mm x 1220 mm (36 in x 48 in). The latter
version is large enough to accommodate E-size
engineering drawings. Power modules are compact to help curb desktop clutter for all these
graphic tables.
Tektronix offers maintenance tra ining classes on Hard
Copy Units and the terminals they support. For further
training information, contact your local Sales Office or re·
quest a copy of the Customer Training Catalog on the re·
turn card.
4956 Graphic Tablet 20 in x 20 in
(510 mm x 510 mm) ........................... $5670
Option 33 Graphic Tablet 36 in x 48 in
(910 mm x 1220 mm) .......................................... Add $2600
Cursor, 119-0875·00 ...................................................... $365
TEK
OEM
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
Specifications & Packaging .... ....... ....... .. ... . 95
634 Video Display ............................................. 96
608/624 Direct Viewing Display ...................... 97
620 Waveform Display ...................................... 98
GMA 103 19-inch Display Module ................... 99
GMA 101 A/1 02A 19-inch Display Module ... 100
GMA 125 25-inch Display Module ................. 101
4633A Continuous Recorder
............ 101
The Tektronix
OEM Commitment
634 Video Display at 945/60 line rate
GMA 103 OEM Computer Display
4633A Continuous Recorder
634 Video Display with aerial
reconnaissance
Reliability. Performance.
Value. Support.
When you deal with Tektronix, you 're dealing with a supplier who stands behind you
every step of the way. As a world leader in
display technology, we 're committed to
building lasting OEM relationships and supporting them with continuing new product
developments.
At Tektronix, our product reliability is
your foundation. Your systems can only
be as reliable as the components that go
into them . At Tektronix, we 're committed to
producing the most dependable components possible. You can be confident that
the reliability we engineer into every component can help keep your customers satisfied
and your service costs down. That's quality
you can bank on .
Your Tektronix resource starts with a
broad and comprehensive package of
OEM support: OEM pricing , terms and
conditions to help make you competitive.
OEM service agreements and service capability throughout the United States and in
many countries. Applications engineering including interface assistance , custom mods,
documentation, software compatibility, and
much more .
94
Leadership in systems must begin with
leadership in components. Explore the
advantages of working with Tektronix: excellence in products, in OEM support, and
service. Your local Tektronix OEM Representative can give you full details on how
you can profit from a partnership with
Tektronix.
TEK
OEM IMAGING PRODUCTS
REFERERENCE
The standard dlsplaya come without a handle, feet or cov.r• . See your local Tektronix Repreaentativ. for complete
apeciflcatlon., options and ordering Information, or use the
KEY SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-Y DISPLAYS
See your local Tektronix representative for complete specifications, options and ordering information, or use the return card.
~
.~~
.
. . . ""':;"-.. . "--:-MODULAR PACKAGING AND
RACK MOUNTING
PACKAGING FOR THE 620
608
Spot Size
0.26 mm (10 mils)
'
"--=--~- :~
624
620
0.38 mm (15 mils)
0.30 mm (12 mils)
1 MO II
47 pF
< 47 pF
Vertical package. Includes handle. feet and covers.
Order 016'()409-oo ......................................................... 5215
Horlzontel package. Includes handle. feet and covers.
Order 016-0410-00 ........................................................ 5215
Reckmount kits for the 620
Slide-out 19 In rack assembly which rack mounts one 620 and
an empty compartment horizontally. In the compartment you
may put your custom electronic Circuitry and combine it with
the display. Includes frame. covers and rack slides. Nol available with Options 06. 23. 28.
Order 016-0404-00 ......................................................... 5245
Input Rand C, X-Y'
II
pF
1 MO.
::;60
1 Mn, ::;60 pF
Input Rand C, ZI
1 MO il
1 MO
1 MO < 47 pF
II
< 47 pF
Slide-out 19 In rack assembly which rack mounts two 620s side
by side. Includes covers and rack slides. Not available with
Options 06. 23. 28. 31 .
Order 016-0405-00 ......................................................... 5215
Small-width packaging. Smaller-width packaging removes
controls (intensity. focus . spot position) from the right side of
the CRT. Allows OEM to mount elsewhere in this system. Request quote trom your Tektronix representative.
Included Accessories
Lined external Imploslon shield
(gratipule) for adJustment purposes.
lined external imploslon shield
(graticule) for adJustment purposes.
Recommended Cameras'
C-5C . C-59A , C-28
C-5C , C-5C Opt.
01. C-28
RACKMOUNTING FOR 6068, 608, 624
Rackmount and Empty Cabinet Kit for 6068, 608, and 624.
Slide-out 19 in rack assembly which mounts a display monitor
and an empty compartment horizontally. In the compartment
you may put your custom electronic circuitry and connect it to
the display. all in one enclosure.
Order 040-0601-00 ......................................................... 5290
Diaplay/Power Module Kit. Allows rackmounling of 6068.
608. and 624 with TM 503 Power Module. Minimizes mechanical design time. Simply design your own electronics using TM
500 Custom Plug-In kits described on p. 298. Then plug them
in. Fits standard 19 in rack.
Order 040-0624-01 ........................................................... 590
C-5C, C-28
Measured at 0 .5 }lA.
Full spec would read : "de to ... " appropriate figure.
I . "II <" means "paralleled by less than".
•. line voltage selector allows operation from 100. 110, 120, 200, 220 , and 240 V
(±10"lo on each range) . 48 to 440 Hz (except the 624 which eXCludes 220) .
Number given shows watt max at nom inal line voltage. The 620's power
reqUiremenls are 90-132 and 180-250 V ac: 48-440 Hz line frequency. 22 W max . 0.2A at 120 V ac 60 Hz.
I.
2.
s. External 15 V de 750 mA power supply required for C-28.
Rackmounting kit for 6068, 608, and 624.
Slide-out 19 in rack assembly which rack mounts any two of the
above displays side by side. Includes covers and rack slides.
Order 040-0600-00 ............................................... .......... 5180
Rackmount-to-Cabinet Conversion, required to convert a
rackmount 606B . 608 and 624 to a cabinet style.
Order 040-0602-00 ......................................................... 5160
APPLICATIONS FOR SELECTED OEM IMAGING PRODUCTS
Recommended
Display
634
KEY SPECIFICATIONS FOR 634 VIDEO DISPLAY
Video Dis lav
634
634 Opt. 01
Worst case
1100 line
650 line
Nominal
1400 line
800 line
Resolution
Display Size
POSition Accuracy/
Non-Uneanty
BriQhtness
Bnghlness
Non-unilormity
Bandwidth
9x 12 em (liat screen)
.. 0.5% within 9 em circle.
in corners. For Optkln 01 : 1%
within 9 em circle, 2% at corners.
<; 1%
Very High
Resolution
Video
Display
608
High
Brightness
X-V
Display
515 cdlm2 (150 fLI max.
620
Less than ± 10%
General
Purpose
X-V
Display
1 Hz - 10 MHz std. 20 MHz Video
bandwidth available as Option 14.
Note: Siandard 634 accepts the line/field rate of 525/60 and
625/50.
Discrete line rates of 675/60 through 1083/60 can be
accommodated using opllon 15.
·Merged raster lines.
Medical
Inl'rumanlatlon
Eleclronlc
Teat Equipment
Delense
Electronics
Analytical
Instrumentation
Ultrasound
raster scan
Computerized
tomography
Multi-imaging
cameras
High-density
graphiCS ,
alphanumerics
and imaging
Reconnaissance
& surveillance
Target acquisition
FLiR
LLLTV
Electron
microscopy
Ultrasound
M-Mode
Real time
Sector scan
B-scan
Spectrum
analysis
Navigation and
control
Automated
test systems
Simulators
IR imaging
Mass
Spectrometry
Nondestructive
testing
NMR
FTIR
Ullrasound :
A-mode
Physiological
Logic analyzers
Automated test
equipment
Spectrum
analysiS
RF-sweepers
TV waveform
monitor
Electronic
countermeasures
Radar-A scopes
Sonar PPI
Nondestructive
testing
measurements
....
Multi-channel
pulse height
analyzers
RESOLUTION
VIDEO DISPLAY
TEK HIGH
CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY PERFORMANCE
Monochrome CRT Display - 9 em vertical; '2 em horizontal;
15 em diagonal (6 in.); flat screen. magnetic deflection; 4 x 3
aspect ratio .
Resolullon - Measured by the shrink ina raster method with
no interlacing, center screen at 100 cd/mf (30 fL) (merged raster lines, not TV lines).
634 - "00 lines, worst case; , 400 lines, nominal.
634 Option 01 - 640 lines, worst case; 800 lines, nominal.
Position Accuracy/ Non-Linearity 634 - .. 0.5% within 9 em Circle, .. , % in corners.
634 Option 01 - < 1% within 9 em circte ... 2% in corners.
Brightness - 5'5 cd/m' (150 fL) maximum.
Brightness Uniformity - Better than
0% over the scan
area, measured by J16 Photometer.
Phosphor Type - P45.
VIDEO INPUT
Description - Composite video with negative sync. RS-170
compa tible.
Signat Levet - 0.35 V p-p to 2 V p-p.
Maximum Safe tnput - ± 5 V p-p.
Bandwidth 634 - , Hz to 10 MHz
634 Option 14 - 1 Hz to 20 MHz.
Impedance - 75 II with loop through and switchable
termination.
Return Loss - 46 dB to 5 MHz with internal 75 n termination
and power on.
Dc Restoration - Referenced to back porch.
RASTER
Vertical Rate - 50 to 60 Hz.
Hori zontal Rate 634 - '5,750 Hz.
634 Option 15 - 32,490 Hz, adjustable
0%.
Note: Our standard instrument will accept the linelfield rate of
625/50. With Option 15. parts are supplied to permit setup at
rates between 675/60 and 1083/60 (RS-343A compatible).
Contact your Tektronix Sales Engineer for further information.
SAFETY
Department of D.H.H.S. (BRH Rule 1020 10 (C) (1) standard.
UL 544 Listing (Option 06) and UL 544 Component Recognition (Option 09).
C.S.A. certified.
±,
High Resolution Video Display for Critical
Applications (1400 lines, shrinking raster)
< 1 / 2 % Non-linearity Inside the 9 cm
Quality Area
Excellent Gray Scale and
Brightness Uniformity
Extremely High Resolution, Low Distortion
Displays for Demanding Applications.
The 634 raster scan monitor delivers extremely
high quality video images for both viewing and
photography. Applications include: medical diagnostic imaging , military infrared imaging , and
automated test systems.
The 634 has been specifically designed to deliver
the superior performance required to meet those
demands.
Textronix distortion requirements surpass
normal standards. With the 634 , you'll have less
than 1/2"10 distortion inside the 9 cm quality area.
Outside: less than 1%. And the 634 has an
optically flat screen to preserve geometric correctness in viewing and photographic
applications.
Resolution vastly outperforms other monitors. Resolution on video displays can be separated into two categories: Vertical and horizontal.
Vertical resolution , of course, is limited by the
video line rate used . At the RS-170 rate of 525/60,
approximately 480 lines are visible. Option 15
extends the 634 line rate to 1083160 , and accordingly improves the vertical resolution .
When we talk about the 634's 1400-line nominal
horizontal resolution , we 're only counting the
white lines. If we added all the black and white
lines, that resolution would approximate 2800
lines. And that far surpasses anything else on the
market. In addition, dynamic focusing assures
criSp images, even in the corners.
Optimum gray scale. The 634 is designed to
faithfully display gray scale images on its P45
CRT. Because of the demanding performance
required by our engineers, the CRT was designed
by Tek Labs, and utilizes an advanced gun
96
design. Excellent brightness uniformity - (variation is less than ± 10"10 across the screen)
means that results are consistent from point to
point on the screen.
Built for the job. The 634 is not an upgraded
television monitor. It has been conceived, designed and constructed as a high-precision
imaging display. Its design continues the tradition
of superior CRT technology expertise developed
by Tektronix.
The sliding panel packaging optimizes service
access and each instrument is fully calibrated to
strict Tektronix standards before leaving the
factory .
Safety Options. The 634 is available with safety
options. UL 544 (Medical/Dental) listing, for standalone applications, includes covers and feet . You
may select the UL 544 Component Recognition
option if you intend to house the 634 in your
system. Certifications required by many other
industries or governments are also available.
Optional features. You may also order an optional video reverse feature which provides black
on white or white on black imaging . This is
particularly valuable in medical imaging, where
many doctors perfer to view the scan as a black
image on a white background. Manual or TIL
levels will activate video reversal.
A remote-programming option permits control of
contrast , brightness focus and blanking by the
user's system . And there is a dc option that
eliminates the ac power supply, lowering weight,
cost and power consumption, while permitting
operation from your system's dc power.
Qualified OEMs may also order the 634 with
certain custom modifications including matching
colors. See your Tektronix representative for complete applications assistance and pricing.
High line rate capability. The 634 is available,
on a standard basis, at 525/60 and 625/50 rates .
Common rates of 675/60, 875/60, 945160, 1023/60
and 1083/60 can be accommodated using Option
15. These higher rates allow the systems builder
maximum flexibility in selecting desired vertical
resolution . The optionally available 20 MHz video
amplifier is recommended for use with high line
rates .
±,
ORDERING INFORMATION
634 Video Display ............................... $2900
With standard resolution of 1400 merged raster lines nominal, 1100 line worst case (center screen at 100 cd/ m2(30
fL), without handle feet and covers.
Option 01 ........... ......... ..... ....... ................... ................. Sub$60
Standard resolution of 800 merged raster lines nominal, 650
lines worst case (center screen at 100 cd/ m 130 fLI)
PERFORMANCE OPTIONS
Option 11 External Sync- switchable ................... Add $40
Option 13 Video Reverse ........................................ Add $85
Option 14 20 MHz Video Amplifier ....................... Add $145
Option 15 High Line Rate. Factory calibrated at 1083/60.
User changeable to rates between 675/60 and 1083/60 with
supplied parts kit ................................................... Add $280
Option 16 Remote Brightness, Contrast, Focus, Video Reverse, Blanking ......................................................... Add $60
Option 20 Dc Supply- + 23 V, - 22 V, + 9 V
(unregulated) ............................................................. Sub $20
SAFETY OPTIONS
Option 06 UL 544 Listing (covers included; not available
with Options 20 or 28) ........................................... Add $100
Option 09 UL 544 Component Recognition ....... No Charge
MECHANICAL PACKAGE OPTIONS
Option 23 Handle, Feet and Covers (not available with Options 06, 20 or 28) .................................................... Add $80
Option 28 Covers only (not available with Options 06,20,23).
Rackmount kit to mount two 6340 side by side in 19 in rack .
Not compatible with Option 20. 016-0403-00' ............ $215
Rackmount Kit to mount one 634 and one empty cabinet
aide by aide. Not compatible with Option 20.
016-0402-00 ................................................................... $265
'OEM PRICING NOT AVAILABLE ON RACK MOUNT KITS.
QUANTITY DISCOUNT INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE ON
REQUEST.
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
TEKTRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE
INFORMATION.
DIRECT
VIEWING DISPLAYS
TEK
608/624
High Brightness X-Y Displays
Ambient Light Viewing
High Resolution
Expansion Mesh Halo Suppression
Excellent Gray Scale
Optional UL 544 Listing
The 608 is our finest directed beam viewing
monitor. It is extremely well suited for high performance display applications, such as medical and
military Imaging and electronic instrumentation .
The related 624, a comparable but more economical alternative, provides excellent direct
Viewing capability for systems that require good
performances at a more favorable price. The
608's high usable brightness of up to 240 cd/m2
(70 fL) , a 0.25 mm (10 mil) spot size, and large 9.8
x 12.2 cm screen , all combine to give you optimum viewing capability. Where such a high degree of clarity or brightness is not required , we
recommend the 624 with a 0.3 mm (12 mil) spot
size , display brightness of 135 cd/m2 (40 fL) , and
a screen size of 9.8 x 12.2 cm. Both instruments
produce detailed displays that are easy to read in
high ambient light and that result in quality
photographs.
Special CRT design suppresses expansion
mesh halo. Characteristic of both instruments,
this suppresses secondary electron emissions,
the annoying stray light that ordinarily gives lower
contrast and a 'washed out" appearance that
interferes with high brightness gray scale
displays.
Expansion mesh halo suppression results in a
more readable display with subtle and accurate
gray scale graduation for precise measurement
or analysis.
High resolution. The 608 displays both excellent
gray scale images and detailed waveform displays , thanks to its small 0.25 mm (10 mil) spot
size (0.3 mm or 12 mils for the 624). In addition,
imaging is critically sharp from corner to corner
particularly on the 608, which utilizes dynamic
focusing.
A wide range of options for broad interface
capability. You may order your 608 or 624 with
an internal graticule with 8 x 10 divisions, etched
on the inside of the screen for minimal parallax.
Other options facilitate control of either display by
your system. The TIL blanking option blanks the
Z axis with any TIL logic source. And an optional
25-pin connector permits connection of X, Y and
Z input signals.
The wide deflection factor-adjustable from 50
mV /div to 0.25 V/div (up to 1.25 V/div with
extended gain range option)-facilitates integration with a broad range of designs. An optional
metal bezel lets you use heavy cameras, including those with motorized roll film backs, without
causing distortion , defocus or light·leaks .
In addition, optional full differential inputs help
reject unwanted common-mode signals such as
ground noise and power supply hum. Additionally
the 608 can be ordered with a gamma correction
option for photographic applications: This produces linear light output changes with a linear
change of Z·axis input, typically within 20
percent.
Both the 608 and 624 are available with UL 544
Listing. Handle , feet and covers are included . If
you house the 608 or 624 in your system you may
select UL 544 Component Recognition.
Packaging further expands flexibility.
Packaging option include carrying handle, protec tive covers and feet. Rackmount kits can also be
ordered for either 608 or 624, further extending
packaging versatility, and providing space for
your electronic circuitry.
624 - Dc to 5 MHz over usable range.
Sensitivity range is adjustable from 0 to + 1 V to 0 to + 5 V for
full intenSity control. Zero V input cuts off intenSity with front
panel control at midrange.
Input Rand C
608 -
1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by < 60 pF.
624 - 1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by < 47 pF.
Linear Common-Mode Signal Range (with Option 21) - ± 5
V, nonattenuated.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (with Option 21) - .. 100: 1
to 100 kHz.
CHARACTERISTICS
CRT DISPLAY
Cathode Ray Tube Phosphor standard.
Flat-faced. electrostatic deflection. P31
(without handle leet or covers)
Display Size - 9.8 cm vertically, 12.2 cm horizontally. Internal
graticule is available without charge (Option 01) with 8 x 10
divisions (1 .22 cm/div).
Display Linearity - The voltage required to produce a 2.5 em
deflection at any point on the CRT will not vary more than 5%.
Spot Size - 608 - 0.25 mm (10 mils) at 170 cdl m' (50 fL).
with maximum usable brightness of 240 cdlm' (75 fL). 624 0.3 mm (12 mils) at 170 cd/m' (50 fL).
Acceleration Potential
608 -
22.5 kV overall.
624 -
~
(without handle, leet or cover.)
PERFORMANCE OPTIONS
Option 10 25-pin Remote Program Connector
X, Y and Z, single ended inputs ............................. Add $50
Option 20 Without ac supply (± 18 V unregulated
de supply required. (Not available with Option 06)
(624 only) ................................................................... Sub $30
Option 22 5X Anenuators ....................................... Add $35
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
624 -
624 Display .......... ................................ $2640
Option 21 Full Differential Inputs (X. Y. and Z) .... Add $50
18 kV overall.
Bandwidth 608 -
ORDERING INFORMATION
608 Display ................•.•••......••....•..•.•••. $2690
Option 24 Linearized Z-A.is (Gamma Correction)
(608 only) .................................................................. Add $75
Option 25 TTL Blanking .......................................... Add $75
Dc to .. 5 MHz.
SAFETY OPTIONS
Dc to ;;. 3 MHz.
Deflection Factor - Adjustable < 50 mVldiv to > 0.25 V/div.
Option 22 (5X attenuator) extends deflectoon factor to > 1.25
V/dlv .
Option 06 UL 544 Listed, includes
handle, feet and covers ........................................ Add $100
Option 09 UL 544 Component Recognition ....... No Charge
MECHANICAL PACKAGING OPTIONS
Input Rand C
608 -
1 M!l paralleled by < 60 pF.
Option 01 Internal graticule ................................ No Charge
624 -
1 Mil paralleled by < 47 pF.
Option 23 Handle, Feet and Covers (not available with Options 06 and 28) .................................. Add $80
X-Y Phase Difference
608 -
Nol more than 1· to at least 1.5 MHz .
624 -
Not more than 1· to at least 1.0 MHz.
Maximum Input Voltage -
± 100 V (de plus peak ac).
Linear Common-Mode Signal Range (with Option 21) - ± 3
V. nonattenuated. (Option 22 extends range 5X to ± 15 V.)
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (with Option 21) - At least
100: 1 from DC to at least 100 kHz. Option 22 (5X attenuator)
reduces cmrr to 40:1 to 100 kHz.
Recommended Source Impedance -
Option 28 Covers only (not available with
Options 06 and 23) .................................................. Add $70
Option 29 Metal Bezel ............................................. Add $70
Rackmount kit to mount two 608s or 624. side by side,
or one 608 or 624 and a 606B side by side in a 19 in rack.
Order 040-0600-00 ......................................................... $180
Rackmount k it to mount one 608 or 624 and one empty
cabinet side by side in a 19 in rack.
Order 040-060 1-00 ......................................................... $290
10 kll or lASS.
Z-AXIS AMPLIFIER
Z-axis amplifier permits Intensity modulation of the Writing
beam.
Bandwidth
608 - Dc to 10 MHz over the usable range .
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMs. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
TEKTRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE
INFORMATION.
97
PURPOSE
TEK GENERAL
WAVEFORM DISPLAY
620
General Purpose
620 stand-alone package. With handle, feet
x-v Waveform
Display
Many Packaging Options
Exceptionally High Reliability
The 620 can be used in any situation requiring an
economicaJ, X·Y waveform display. Electronic in·
strumentation applications include pulse height,
network, spectrum , logic and signal analyzers
and digitizers. The 620 is also used in mechanical
measurement instruments for vibration tests and
NOT. And in the medical field it is used for A·
mode imaging . The 620 offers spot size of 0.38
mm (15 mils), a 10 x 12 cm screen , and usable
brightness up to 100 cd/m2 (30 fL) .
Built-in reliability. The typical power requirement of about 22 watts means less power drain
and a lighter weight power supply, so your overall
system can be lighter, more compact , and gener·
ate less heat. An option allowing dc operation
from your power supply further reduces power
consumption and weight. By using fewer parts
and lower power, display and system reliability
are improved, and service costs can be lower.
Packaged the way you want it. The 620 comes
with a wide variety of packaging options which
allow you to easily integrate the display into your
system.
620 standard package. Easily mounts in your
custom cabinetry. The operator controls are con·
veniently positioned to the right of the CRT.
The 620 narrow package (Mod BD). Easy to
install in your product. Mount in any position:
Horizontal, vertical, angled or upside down. All
electronics are on one side, for simplified inter·
face and adjustments.
Once installed in your product, only the CRT
screen and metal bezel show. Position the four
operator controls wherever you want. Controls
can even be mounted internally.
Just 17.5 cm (6.9 in) wide , to save you space .
Weighs only 3.5 kg (7 .7 Ib), to help make your
product lighter.
The Display Narrow Package requires external dc
power (+ 18 V to 26 V dc unregulated), which
must be supplied by your system. Mod BD
cannot be powered directly from ac sources. All
power connections and input signals are made to
interconnect pins inside the monitor. Connector
pins and cables are supplied with the unit.
98
and covers: An excellent choice for your remote
monitor.
620 horizontal and vertical packages. An
empty compartment next to or below the display
provides space for your custom circuitry, resulting
in an integrated enclosure. You can assemble this
package for your product and save valuable
development and tooling costs. The handle fits
on top of the vertical package and on the side of
your choice for the horizontal package. Option 31
allows you to use your own power supply and a
Single ac power cord.
620 rackmount package. Slide-out 19 in rack
assembly mounts one 620 and one compartment
for your electronics alongside. Or, you can mount
two 620s side by side.
NOTE: While the 620 Display Narrow Package is
configured for dc power only, the standard 620 is
configured for ac power (built·in supply). It can
also be configured for dc power.
Any 620 package can be ordered with UL 544
Component Recognition, for applications where
the 620 is directly inserted into an OEM system.
UL 544 Listing is also available and includes
handle , feet and covers.
Comprehensive support services. All
Tektronix displays are backed by a worldwide
service network. Comprehensive, easy-to-read
manuals and complete drawings are provided,
and complete drawings are available to speed
mechanical integration . Spare parts documenta·
tion is available to optimize serviceability and
lower your spare parts inventory cost.
CHARACTERISTICS
CRT DISPLAY
Cathode Ray Tube - 16.5 cm (6.5 in) flat-laced rectangular
CRT with P31 Phosphor.
Spot Size - 0.38 mm (15 mils) at 0.5 ~A .
Display Size - 10 cm vertically , 12 cm horizontally.
Graticute - External graticule included as accessory. Internal
8 x 10 div (1 .22 cm/div) graticule available as Option 01.
Disptay Linearity - The Voltage required to produce a 2.5 cm
deflection from any point on the CRT will not vary more than
5%.
Acceleration Potential - 12 kV.
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
Bandwidth - Dc to 2 MHz.
Settting Time - 1 ~s from any point on the CRT within 0.05
cm of final position.
Deflection Factor - Adjustable. 0;;;0.9 V to ;;. 1.5 V per 10 cm
(vertical). 0;;; 0.8 V to ;;0 1.2 V per 10 cm (horizontal).
Input Rand C - 1 Mil shunted by < 47 pF.
X· Y Phase Difference - .. 1· dc to 500 Hz.
Max Input Voltage - ± 25 V (de plus peak ac).
Recommended Source Impedance - 10 kll or less.
Z·AXIS AMPLIFIER
Linear Z·Axls - Amplifier permits intensity modulation of the
writing beam. Positive input to + input increases the display
intensity. Can be reversed by internal change.
Bandwidth - Dc to ;;. 5 MHz.
Input Sensitivity Range - Not adjustable. 1.0 V will produce
maximum brightrless with Intensity Control set at mid.range.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
External Gratlcule.
CABINET DIMENSIONS
(without modular packaging)
Dimensions (without
cm
in
modular paCkaging)
Height (without feet)
13.26
5.22
Width
21.40
8.43
Length
50.04
19.70
Weight (without handle.
kg
Ib
feet and covers)
Net
5.33
11.75
Shipping (without
6.89
15.2
handle, feet and covers)
MOD BD DISPLAY NARROW PACKAGE
The 620 Display Narrow package (Mod BD) is designed to be
easily incorporated within your cabirletry.
CABINET DIMENSIONS FOR NARROW PACKAGE
Dimensions
Height (without feet)
Width
Height
Width
Cornerradil
5.11
5.11
0.19
ORDERING INFORMATION
620 Display (without handle, feet and
covers) ..................................................... $1400
Option 01 Internal Gratlcule ............................... No Charge
Option 06 UL 544 Listed Includes handle.
feet and covers ...................................................... Add $100
Option 09 UL Component Recognition·
(not compatible with Option 06) ......................... No Charge
Option 10 Remote 25'pin program connector, X, Y, and Z·
axes. Single ended Inputs only. (Not available with Option
31) ............................................................................. Add $50
Option 20 Delete ac power. External dc power required
(+ 17 to 26 V, = 0.9A). Not available with Option 06 or 31 )
..................................................................................... Sub $25
Option 23 handle, feet and covers (not available
with Options 06, 28, 31 and modular packaging) . Add $80
Option 25 TTL Blanking· ........................................ Add $50
Option 28 With cover only-no trim strips (not available
with Options 06, 23, 31 and modular packaging .. Add $70
Option 31 Delete all rear panel BNCs, dc power connector
and ac power supply and switch. Option 31 Includes provi·
sion for external de power ( + 17 V unregulatad). All power
connections and input signals are made to interconnect
pins inside monitor. Not compatible with Options 06, 10, 20,
23 and 28. Can be used with 016·0409·00 or 016·0410-00
packaging .................................................................. Sub $25
620 Mod BD Display Narrow Package, without handte, feet
and covers. Dc power only. Request quote.
RACKMOUNT KITS
Rackmount to one 620 In a 19 In rack. Includes frame,
covers and rack slides. Not available with Options 06, 23,
28, Order 016·0404-00 .................................................. $245
Rackmount for two 620s side by side in a 19 in rack.
Includes covers and rack slides. Not available with
Options 06, 23, 28, and 31 Order 016·0405·00 ........... $215
• Also available for 620 Narrow Package.
MODULAR DRESS PACKAGING
Vertical Package - Consists of empty compartment,
connecting hardware, handle. feet. and covers
Order 016·0409·00 ......................................................... $215
Horizontal Package - Consists of empty compartment,
connecting hardware, handle, feet. and covers
Order 016-0410·00 ........................................................ $215
SPECIAL PRICING, TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE AVAIL·
ABLE TO QUALIFIED OEMS. CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
TEKTRONIX REPRESENTATIVE FOR COMPLETE
INFORMATION.
TEK
OEM
COMPUTER DISPLAY MODULE
~
GMA 103
19 Inch High Performance
Modular Graphic and Alphanumeric Display
Storage and Color Refresh Capability
The GMA 103 is a high performance member
of the GMA display product family which
provides the new feature of color enhanced
refresh . The family features are: A) a blending of
storage and refresh technology, B) modular construction and C) performance , interface and
packaging options to configure a display to fit
your application.
Color refresh for quick differentiation of refresh from stored information. The powerful
combinahon of having storage and refresh display technology combined in one computer display module is further enhanced by the use of
color. Stored information appears in the familiar
green color while refresh data is displayed in a
new yellow-orange hue. The result is that working
files in refresh are easily distinguished from even
the most dense fixed or more finalized stored
files.
The dynamics of color enhanced refresh .
The flicker-free data density and detail of
storage. The GMA 103 will display up to 40
vector meters (1 ,575 vector inches) (30 Hz refresh
rate) of refreshed data while simultaneously having all the benefits of storage technology. The
storage mode presents high resolution , high density graphics at a low cost. Color refresh adds
selective erase, interactivity and dynamic motion
with the same high resolution of storage. By
placing fixed or finalized data in store while
retaining dynamic or working data In refresh , you
can achieve high density , interactive graphics
while making maximum use of your computer to
address the application task rather than support
the display.
Modular Construction. The CRT, low voltage
power supply and printed circuit board modules
are arranged on a unique high-strength wireform
chaSSIS. ThiS construchon not only supports different performance, interface and packaging options but permits easy removal of modules for
field service.
Options Addressed to the OEM. The standard
instrument is driven as an X-Y directed beam
display uSing analog inputs. Space has been left
in the card cage for you to add up to three circuit
b03rds with your application options. Our Option
43 High Speed Vector/Dot Character Generator
can be plugged into two of these positions to
give you a completely digital interface (16 bit
word format plus control and status signals). You
can use your interface connector or ask for our
Option 34 (analog) or Option 35 (digital) connector as appropriate. The standard instrument has a
colored glass filter and is compatible with
Tektronix hard copy units. The display can be
supplied with the CRT module tilted as far back
as 15° and oriented in either the horizontal or
vertical (page) format. Several support options
are also available.
Operation. All display functions are completely
programmable and deSigned to interface to TIL
logiC. The display functions are Write-Thru , NonStore, Brite , Defocus, Center, Copy, Erase, View
and G Busy. The X-Y inputs are analog, the beam
resting at center screen with zero volts applied.
The GMA 103 is completely compatible with other
members of the GMA family . If refresh is already
being used in a GMA family display, no new
signals are reqUired to support color refresh .
Write-Thru. Displays refreshed information on
the screen concurrently with stored data.
Non-Store. Allows the GMA 103 to be used as a
refresh-only display at a higher Viewing contrast.
Defocus. Increases the spot size slightly. May be
used In store or refresh modes.
Brite. Increases the intensity slightly for storing
wide vectors or boldface characters. To be used
in conjunction with DEFOCUS.
Center. Resets the origin shift circuitry used to
protect the CRT during repeated over-write
operation .
Copy. Initiates hard copy when attached to a
TEKTRONIX 4611 or 4631 Hard Copy Unit.
Erase. Activates full screen erasure of stored
Information .
View. Switches the GMA 103 back to the View
Mode after it has switched to the
non programmable Hold Mode.
Hold. Automatically activated to reduce the
brightness of the stored display after 112 seconds of display inactivity, thus increasing CRT
life Supplying a positive-going edge to G-BUSY
will prevent the display from dropping into the
Hold Mode . Inputs on the Z-AXIS normally serve
thiS purpose.
In addition to the control functions , other signals
are proVided by the GMA 103 to Indicate status.
SLU and D-BUSY are outputs provided to let the
system know whether or not to send the display
any additional data. If either of these signals is set
true, another function is taking place and data
should not be sent.
A CRT anti-burn circuit is provided to protect
against burning the CRT phosphor in the event
that X and Y deflection is not commanded to
move or IS lost with the writing beam on. In
addition, the screen is automatically erased after
30 minutes from the last Z-AXIS or G-BUSY
pulse or VIEW Initiate, thus preventing residual
images.
Special Performance or Packaging Requirements? Your local Tektronix Sales Engineer can
describe all standard options, and put you in
touch with Tektronix Application Engineers to
resolve special requirements .
Continued overleaf
99
TEK g6~PUTER DISPLAY MODULES
DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
CRT - 483 mm (19 in) diagonally measured Direct View Storage TUbe.
267 mm x 356 mm (10.5 in x 14 in).
Addressable Area -
Stored Resolution - Screen Center. 157 line pairsl mm (40
line pairs/in). Screen periphery, 138 line pairsl mm (35 line
pairs/in).
Stored Dot Writing Time - 5 "s or less.
Stored Vector Wriling Rate - 150 mls (5900 in/s).
Refreshed Vector Writing Rate - (Write-Thru and NonStore) 1200 mis, (47 ,240 in/s), 40 vector meters, (1575 vector
in) (maximum) at 30 frames/s.
Viewing Time Erase Time -
At leasl 15 minutes at specified resolution .
1.5 s ± 20%.
DEFLECTION AMPLIFIERS
X-V Input. -
Differential.
Origin (X = O, V = O Volt.) -
Center screen.
Origin Shilter - Shilts display origin to one of eight locations.
Resets to a beginning point aNer a Center command. Total
travel Is 4.5 mm (0.179 In).
Polarily (with re.pect to X-V inpul.) - X - long axis, V short aXIS, selected by lumpers): + V moves beam right (X)
and up (V) when applied to - + - Inputs. - V moves beam left
(X) and down (V) when applied to - + - Inputs.
Input Sensitivity - Long axis : 10 V pop full screen ± 2.5%.
Short axis: 7.5 V Pop full screen ± 2.5% of long axis.
± 6.5 V (dc + peak ac).
10 kll ± 10% paralleled by < 100 pF.
Slew Rate (non-linear operation) - 5000 m/s.
Settling Time (non-linear operalion) - 1 "s + 2 "s/cm to
Maximum Input Vollage Input Impedance -
within one spot diameter for vector lengths > 1 cm. 3 "s to
Within one spot diameter for vector lengths .. 1 cm .
Po.itlonal Accuracy - All points within the CRT addressable
area are addressable with an accuracy of ± 1.25% of the long
axis dimension.
Z-AXIS
Inpul Requirement. lectable to HI True).
Rile Time -
TIL compatible. LO True. (Strap se-
70 ns, limited to 1 MHz continuous repetition
rate.
Input Impedance -
50 II. (Strap selectable to 75 II or 93 II.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Remole Control - All operating modes can be controlled by
applying appropriate TIL LO True signals to the appropriate
control line at the interconnect board. These modes are Erase,
View. Copy. Write-Thru, Non-Store, Brite, Defocus, Center and
G Busy.
Slatu. Signal. - Output signals provided to indicate status of
display are D Busy and SLU . The HCU status signal is available when an appropriate hard copy deVM:8 is connected.
Horlzonlal
Format
CHARACTERISTICS
0 " till
-15" till
Dimensions
mm
in
mm
in
Height
Width
Depth
461
487
705
18.2
19.2
27 .8
450
487
660
17.7
19.2
26.0
Height
Width
Depth
100
- 15 " l ill
O· till
Vertical
Format
563
425
705
I
22.2
16.8
27 .8
547
425
660
I
21 .5
16.8
26.0
GMA 101A/GMA 102A
Both the GMA 101 A and GMA 102A are 483
mm (19 in) diagonal modular graphic and alphanumeric storage displays. The GMA101A
is a storage-only display. The GMA 102A is a higher performance instrument that also has refresh
capability . Both are configured for optimum
modularity, with printed circuit board modules arranged on a unique high-strength wireform chassis. This construction not only supports different
performance, interface and packaging options ,
but permits easy removal of modules for field
service.
The GMA 101A - high resolution storage_
The GMA 101A makes the benefits of low cost,
high resolution storage technology graphics available to the OEM system builder in a modular display. This family member is tailored for an application that emphasizes storage graphics. You
can use our options or yours to take advantage of
the very fast stored data-drawing capability of the
GMA101A - 100 m (3900 inches) per second. At
this drawing rate , the entire screen can be
redrawn in less than one second, permitting effective zooming or panning. In addition, data or
picture editing can proceed with minimal thoughtprocess interruption. You can achieve high density interactive graphics while freeing your computer to address the application rather than drive the
display.
The GMA 102A - storage and refresh . With
the GMA 102A, you can display up to 40 vector
meters (1575 vector inches) (30 Hz refresh rate)
of refresh data while simultaneously having all of
the benefits of storage technology. The storage
mode presents high resolution , high density
graphics at low cost, while the refresh feature
adds the benefits of selective erase, interactivity
and dynamic motion with the same high resolution of storage. By placing fixed or finalized data
in store while retaining dynamic or working data in
refresh , you can achieve high density, interactive
graphics while making maximum use of your computer to address the application task rather than
support the display.
Operation both instruments. All display
functions are completely programmable and designed to interface to TIL logic. They are WriteThru (GMA 102A only), Non-Store, Brite, Defocus,
Center, Copy, Erase, View and G Busy.
Options Addressed to the OEM. Both instruments in the standard display format are driven
as X-Y directed beam displays using analog inputs. Both have clear glass filters and are compatible with Tektronix hardcopy units. On either,
the display can be supplied with the CRT module
tilted as far back as 15° or oriented in either the
horizontal or vertical (page) format. Space has
been left in the card cage for you to add up to
three circuit boards with your application options.
Additionally, on the GMA 102A, our Option 42
Vector Generator or Option 43 Vector/Character
Generator can be plugged into two of these positions to give you a completely digital interface (16
bit word format plus control and status signals).
On both instruments, you can use your interface
connector or ask for our Option 34 (analog) or
Option 35 (digital) connec tor as appropriate.
TEK
OEM COMPUTER DISPLAY MODULE
CONTINUOUS RECORDER
GMA 125
The GMA 125 was designed exclusively for
systems builders, and is intended to satisfy
display applications of the greatest size and
complexity. It incorporates 65 percent more
workspace than even our own previous industry
leaders, the 483 mm (19 in) GMA 101A and GMA
102A. Like other members of the GMA series, it
provides low cost, high resolution , storage tube
graphics and unique flexibility of performance,
interfacing and packaging.
Further, the GMA 125 offers that same powerful
combination of simultaneous storage and refreshed displays that was first provided in the
GMA 102A.
The detail of storage. The dynamics of refresh. The GMA 125 features a 635 mm (25 in)
CRT that offers unequaled information display
capacity. Adjacent points that would be indistinguishable on a smaller screen can be seen as
distinct units on the GMA 125. It is ideal for group
viewing and for greater graphics detail. A new
110 0 CRT provides greater display brightness
with less energy consumption in a more compact
package.
The GMA 125 will display up to 50 vector meters
(1968 vector inches) of refreshed data, enabling
all the benefits of selective erase, interactivity and
dynamic motion with the same high resolution of
storage.
By placing fixed or finalized data in store while
retaining dynamic or working data in refresh , you
can work interactively with high density graphics
and alphanumerics while making maximum use of
processing power to address the application
rather than support the display.
Modular design assures ideal building economy. Order CRT, chassis and power supply only,
or configure your GMA 125 to best fit your own
manufacturing capabilities and system specifications. The welded-steel, symmetrically structured
chassis may be rotated vertically or horizontally,
and tilted. Space is left in the card cage for your
own application options. Or you can plug in our
Option 42 Vector Generator or Option 43
Vector/Character Generator to provide you with a
completely digital interface (16 bit word format
plus control and status signals). You can use your
interface connector or our analog or digital interface options.
Colored light filters and several other support
options are also available.
Operation. The standard display instrument is
driven as an X-Y directed beam display uSing
analog inputs. The CRT beam is positioned at
center screen with zero volts applied. All other
display functions are completely programmable
and designed to interface to TIL logic. The
display functions are Write-Thru, Non-Store, Brite,
Defocus, Center, Copy, Erase , View and G Busy.
The Z-axis input is a digital Signal.
4633A
CHARACTERISTICS
Line Scan Recorder
Recording Medium
Black on White or Gray Scale
Material -
Excellent Copy auality
Dry silver paper -
High performance.
Paper Roll Length -
152 m (500 ft).
Paper Roll Width -
216 mm (8.5 in).
100 mm/ s Paper Speed
GENERAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Warmup Time -
The Tektronix 4633A Continuous Recorder is deSigned to provide hard copy output from systems
that provide a Z-axis input Signal simultaneously
with an X-axis (horizontal ramp) signal. It is
uniquely suited to the requirements of the medical echocardiography market and can also be
modified to suit other applications where there is
a need for recording real time data.
The 4633A has three basic speeds, selectable on
the front panel: 10 mm/s, 25 mm/s, and 50 mm/s.
Another switch allows the operator to double
each of the three basic speeds. This provides a
maximum speed capability of 100 mm/s and also
gives the operator considerable operational
flexibility .
The 4633A is available as either a rackmount or
benchtop model. The rackmount version fits into
any standard 19 inch rack .
The medium: high performance/ low cost, dry
process, full-size paper. The 4633A is designed for high performance/low cost dry silver
paper: The state of the art in dry process gray
scale.
Image Width Image Format ing paper.
Gray Shade. -
20 min.
14-20 em (5.5-7.9 in).
Scan lines perpendicular to direction of exit-
5 levels min.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
After the paper has been exposed by a fiber
optic CRT, it passes through a processor, where
the latent Image is thermally developed. The
developed image is transported by a conveyor
through an opening in the front panel.
Unwanted interruptions will be minimal. Big SOOfoot paper rolls mean few time-outs for reloading .
The paper is a full 8 1/2 inches wide.
mm
in
Height
Length
Width
265.9
655.4
425.4
10.47
25 .80
16.75
Weight
k
", 30.5
Ib
67.0
4633A OPTIONS
Option 30 Delete Rackmount Hardware
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ......... _.. .... No Charge
The 4633A's image quality, convenience, reliability, and competitive pricing combine to make it a
valuable component of an OEM system.
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V11OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V115A .. _.. _....._. _. No Charge
SUPPLIES
High Performance Paper - One roll , order 006-2432-00
One case, order 006-2432-01 .
101
TEK
TELEVISION
PRODUCTS
CONTENTS
Color Picture Monitors
690SR , 69MOO, 69M41 ................................ 104
650HR, 650HR-1 ,651 HR, 651 HR-1,
653HR, 653HR-1 , 655HR,
655HR-1, 656HR, 656HR-1 ... ... ........ ........... 105
Waveform Monitors
1480 .................................................................
528A ................... .. ......................... ...................
520A ....... .. ...... .. .. .. ............................................
1420, 1424 ............................ ...... .. ..... .... .........
106
107
108
109
Television Demodulators
1450-1, 1450-2, TDC, TDC-1,
TDC-2 ....................................... ................... 110
Signal Generators
143 ...................................... ............................. 111
1410/1411 .... .... ........................ ....... .. .............. 112
148/1470 .................................. .. ........... .. ....... 113
1900 Transmitter Test Set ............................ 114
1980 ANSWER Automatic
Video Management Set ..................... ............. 115
The following page contains a synopsis of
Tektronix Television products. For details
about worldwide standards , other products,
and complete descriptions, contact your
nearest Tektronix office listed on pages 366-
368.
690SR Picture Monitor
Interface Modules add versatility by helping fit
the 690SR to a wide variety of user requirements. New modules will become available to
keep it configurable to your needs.
COLOR MONITORS
TEK 19HIGHINCHRESOLUTION
690SR Option 42
RGB Multirate Color Monitor
Scan Rates from 15 to 37 .5 kHz
Adjustable Picture Size
Full Video Gray Scale
Flexible Interface
Modular Construction
High Performance for Television or
Computer Graphics
Excellent Color Convergence over Entire
Screen
The 690SR Option 42 has been designed to
provide an accurate display of high quality images and computer graphics. Wide range scan
circuits, excellent convergence and modular construction make the 690SR Option 42 an ideal
choice for laboratory experiments and for systems where easy reconfiguration to different scan
formats will make it possible for one monitor to do
many jobs.
690SR Opt/OO 01
690SR
Television Color Monitor
High-Resolution, Dot-Shadowmask CRT
Precise Color Convergence
Stabilized Color Balance
Rugged Construction
Preset Controls
Plug -in Decoder
Recommended for Critical Picture Evaluation
The 690SR is a new tool lor the television industry
to meet critical needs lor picture evaluation and
quality control. With a high resolution delta gun .
dot shadow mask picture tube and precise, stable
decoding circuitry. the 690SR offers faithful rendi·
tion of picture details and ease of closeup view·
ing. The optional medium resolution CRT provides
uniform screen appearance and excellent resolution at greater viewing distances. With either
picture tube, Tektronix unique color convergence
system provides accurate color registration over
the entire screen - less than 0.5 mm maximum
error. equivalent to less than 0.18% of picture
height - so that fine details can be observed
anywhere in the picture.
104
Stabilized circuitry compensates for picture tube
aging and maintains accurate color balance.
Front panel controls for brightness, contrast,
chroma, hue and aperture have detent positions
so that the monitor may be returned to its preset
condition quickly and accurately. Adjustments for
the preset positions of front panel controls are
located within a lockable front drawer together
with virtually all other adjustments needed for routine servicing.
Decoders are available for NTSC and PAL standards. A flexible modular plug-in design permits
the 690SR to accomodate changes in standards
and additional modules will become available to
meet future needs. Three systems are available
at this time, comprising: the 690SR Option 01 ,
which is an NTSC color monitor including a 69MOO
notch filter decoder module installed in a 690SR
mainframe; the 690SR Option 02" , which is an
NTSC color monitor including a 69M01" comb or
notch filter (switchable from front panel) decoder
module installed in a 690SR mainframe, and; the
690SR Option 11", which is a PAL color monitor
including a 69M1O" decoder module installed in a
690SR mainframe.
All versions of the 690SR are available with a high
resolution CRT (standard) with 0.31 mm dot triad
spacing , or with a medium resolution CRT (Option
25) which has 0.43 mm dot triad spacing. EBU
phosphor colorimetry is also available (Option
27)". All versions of the 690SR are supplied with
rack slides for mounting in a 19 inch standard
rack .
"Available early in 1982.
The 690SR Option 42 will operate over a horizontal scan rate range of 15 to 37.5 kHz , covering the
range from standard television formats to above
the 1280 by 1024 pixel format used for high
resolution graphics. With the additional feature of
adjustable picture size and aspect ratio , the
690SR Option 42 can be used for displays in
unconventional formats . Excellent color convergence - less than 0.5 mm maximum error anywhere on the screen - is maintained over the
entire rate range with only slight readjustment of
controls.
The high resolution picture tube (0.31 mm dot triad spacing) is standard with all versions of the
690SR; however, a medium resolution CRT (0.43
mm spacing) is available as Option 25. Long persistence phosphors for flicker reduction in interlaced graphics displays is Option 26.
The 690SR Option 42 is an RGB monitor including
a 69M41 interface module installed in a 690SR
mainframe. Either internal sync on green or external sync may be used. The 690SR Option 42 is
supplied with hardware for rack mounting.
ORDERING INFORMATION
690SR Television Color
Monitor Mainframe ........ _.................... _ $7950
Option 01 NTSC Interface Instelled .................. Add $ 11 00
Option 25 Medium Resolution CRT ....................... Sub $250
Option 26 Long Persistence Phosphors
(High Resolution only) ........................................... Add $ 150
Option 42 Multirate RGB Interface Installed ...... Add $2000
69MOO NTSC Decoder
Interface Module ................................. $1100
69M41 RGB Interface Module ........... $1000
TEK
RESOLUTION
12 INCH COLOR MONITORS
650HR
Series NTSC, PAL Color Picture Monitors
Precise Color Tracking Over Full Signal
Range
Two Switchable Inputs Isolated from Ground
for Hum Rejection
External Sync Switching Capability
Differential (A-B) Inputs for Sync Timing and
Burst Phasing Adjustments
High Resolution Trinitron CRT
Variable Aperture Correction
NTSC, PAL, and Dual Standard Versions RGB Inputs Optional
Rapid Retrace - Entire Active Picture Area
can be Displayed in Underscan
Precision Decoding - Outputs may be used
to Present Vector Displays on X- Y
Oscilloscopes
Unique "Blue Only" Capability for Optimizing
VTR Settings
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here.
All 650HR Monitors are shipped with rackmounting hardware.
Cabinet version hardware is also Included.
650HR NTSC . .......................................
650HR-1 NTSC + RGB .......................
651 HR PAL ..........................................
651HR-1 PAL + RGB .........................
655HR NTSC + PAL ...........................
655HR-1 NTSC + PAL + RGB ..........
$5350
$5545
$5580
$5810
$6125
$6365
Accurate vector displays on X-V oscilloscopes
such as the TEKTRONIX 1424 are made possible
by the precision decoder outputs on TEKTRONIX
650HR Series Monitors.
Color Picture Mon ito r s SECAM, RGB
NTSC , PAL ,
In addition to having stable. consistent color characteristics, Tektronix Color Picture Monitors provide underscan and vertical and horizontal delay
for detailed examination of the entire picture. A
special high resolution Trinitron CRT and adjustable aperture correction provide consistently high
picture sharpness. Isolated differential inputs for
encoded/composite or RGB signals, flexible synchronization and unique Blue Only mode permit
the 650HR Series Monitor to meet a variety of
needs - both in television systems for displaying
and monitoring television picture quality and in
special systems where a laboratory quality display is required .
650HR
Series SECAM Color Picture Monitors
Color Sequencing from Field Identification
Signals or line Burst
Precision Decoding Allows use of R-Y, B-Y
Outputs for Vector Display Measurements
PAl/ SECAM Version Available (656HR) with
Front Panel Selection of Decoding Standard
RGB Inputs (Optional) Includes R-Y, B-Y
Output
Variable Aperture Correction
Vertical and Horizontal Delay Display Modes
Reduced Chrominance line Crawl
Indicates Color Sequence Error
Rapid Retrace - Entire Picture Area is Displayed in Reduced Scan
Two Switchable Inputs Isolated from Ground
for Hum Rejection
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering. please use \he exact nomenclacture given here.
653HR SECAM MONITOR ...................
653HR- 1 SECAM + RGB ....... _._.... _.._.
656HR SECAM + PAL ........................
656HR-1 SECAM + PAL + RGB .......
$6355
$6570
$6980
$7190
Option 0 1 MiniQuick Connectors for
653HR, 656HR ......................................................... Add $1 30
Option 0 1 MiniQuick Connec tors lor
653HR-l,656HR-l .................................................. Add $1 95
105
MONITORS
TEK WAVEFORM
The fastest sweep time is 0.1 itS per division, fast
enough and bright enough to examine T pulses.
The 1480s are calibrated in itS with a basic 2%
time base accuracy (3% when using the magnifier). X50 is the greatest range of magnification
with steps of 10, 5, 2, and 1.
The sync recognizer has two modes: AFC and
Direct. This provides a way to display jitter or to
stabilize a jittery display.
1485R Option 01 PAUNTSC Dual Standard Waveform Monitor (Rackmount)
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here.
1480
Series
Bright CRT Especially Suitable for Vertical
Interval Testing
Advanced Measurement Modes
Amplitude Measurement Accuracy
Approaching 0.2 %
Digital Selection of Line and Field
Probe Input Option
15 Line Display for VTR Applications
The 1480 Series of Waveform Monitors.
There are 1480 Series Monitors for PAL, PAL-M,
NTSC, and SECAM. Dual standard units are also
available. The differences between the monitors
in the series are essentially confined to what lines
in the vertical interval are selectable, what vertical
amplifier response modes are available, and to
the field selection modes. Dual-Standard Monitors
automatically recognize the signal standard in
use and indicate that standard on the front panel.
Vertical interval testing. The bright CRT of the
1480 Series eliminates many of the VITS monitoring difficulties associated with previous waveform
monitors. CRT brightness is sufficient to allow you
to easily see one Vertical Interval Test Signal
selected out of four fields , even in a well-lighted
area. This solution to VITS display problems required the design of a very high light-output CRT,
which is only one of the unique features of the
1480 Series.
More accuracy, greater resolution. The 1480s
provide several advanced measurement modes
for more accuracy. These allow you to make
amplitude measurements to an accuracy approaching 0.2%. In one mode, a precision display
offset is used . A proven video measurement
technique, offsetting displays with an amplitude
standard is an easy-to-use method that achieves
accuracy by eliminating parallax and transfer
errors. Transfer errors are eliminated because the
signal is compared to a precise 1 V standard
rather than to graticule calibration . Measurements
made with comparison techniques also are highly
consistent and repeatable. When the signal precisely matches the standard, signal amplitude will
be determined to the value and accuracy of the
offset. The tolerance of the internal calibration
signal used as the standard is 0.2%.
Sure line selection, positive field identification. Digital selection of field and line assures
positive identification of displayed information.
For example. selection of line 18 of field 2 assures
display of line 18, field 2. Digital techniques will
not allow an incorrect selection.
Response selection and a unique auxiliary
mode. Many television measurements require the
filtering of some components from the composite
signal. For example, luminance signal rejection by
3.58 MHz or 4.43 MHz subcarrier filters for differential gain measurements. A selection of appropriate filters is provided in the 148Os, including
low pass, IRE , subcarrier, and one for staircase
linearity measurements called differentiated staircase. When specialized or unique measurements
require a special filter, you may insert that filter
between the auxiliary Video output and aUXiliary
input. The auxiliary video input mode, selected by
the response control. allows you to add a filter or
other device without breaking Into the program
line. The auxiliary video input and output are
buffered by amplifiers to provide a precise 75 n
source and load .
In the 1480 Series, monitor focus and brightness
controls compensate for changes when switching
from a two field setting to a faster time base and
can easily be set to an optimum level.
106
1480C NTSC Waveform Monitor .......
1480R NTSC Waveform Monitor ........
1481 C PAL Waveform Monitor' ........
1481 R PAL Waveform Monitor' ........
1482C PAL-M Waveform Monitor ......
1482R PAL-M Waveform Monitor ......
1485C PAL/ NTSC Dual Standard
Waveform Monitor' ............................
1485R PAL/ NTSC Dual Standard
Waveform Monitor' ............................
$4840
$4840
$5035
$5035
$5420
$5420
$5325
$5325
Option 01 1 Mil, 20 pF Probe Input (probe not Included) ... .................................................................. Add $245
Suggested Probe: PS108 lOX Probe.
2 m order 010 -6108 -03, 3 m order 010-6108-05 ........... $90
Option 02 With Carrying Case (Cabinet Version
Only) . ............................................................ _.................. $ 1 15
Option 03 With Blank CRT .................................. No Charge
Option 04 Tone Wheel Sync (1480C.
1481C. 1482C. and 1485C only. Replaces
529 or T04 In some RCA VTRs - Check
With RCA for retrofit compatibility). ........................ Add $665
Option 05 Tone Wheel Sync (1485C only - check
With RCA for retrofit compatibility). .. ...................... Add $655
Oplion 06 124 Il WECO Style Inputs
(1480R only) . .................................................. _...... Add $ 1660
Option 07 Slow Sweep."
..................................... Add $405
Option 08 SECAM Field Identification (1481C . 1481R .
1485C and 1485R only) . .......... _.............................. Add $275
-'481 C/R . 1485C/R meets European Broadcast Union Tech.
3221-E. GUiding PrinCiples for deSign of TeleviSion Waveform
Moni tors.
.. OptIOn 07 sallsfles EBU Tech. 3221 -E §3.2.2.
TEK
WAVEFORM
MONITOR
INn.... TY
IYHe
"I
'oT
m
528A
Internal Graticule CRT
Ac or Dc Input Coupling
Video Output of Displayed Signal
Precise Frequency Response
line Tilt and Pulse Response (K Factor)
Measurements
Different Versions for 525 or 625 line
Systems
Selectable from the front panel, either of two 75ohm video inputs may be displayed and the
selected input is available on the rear panel
VIDEO OUT connector for routing to a picture
monitor or other device. These inputs are normally
ac coupled, but are easily set for dc coupling .
Calibrated 1 volt and 4 volt full scale sensitivities
are provided for displaying video and sync levels
and a VARIABLE VOLTS FULL SCALE control
permits uncalibrated displays from 0.25 volts to
4.0 volts full scale. A built-in 1 volt calibration
signal may be switched on to confirm the vertical
calibration.
UL 1244 listed and Certified to CSA 5568
The TEKTRONIX 52BA Waveform Monitor is intended for television measurement and monitorIng applications, adding new features and capabilities to the well known 52B.
The 52BA provides bright, easy-to-read waveform
displays on a 125 mm (5 inch) CRT with illuminated internal graticule for parallax-free waveform
monitoring and measurement while only requiring
5 1/4 inches of vertical height and 1/2 rack width
mounting space. This permits mounting the 52BA
side-by-side with another 52BA or other monitors,
such as the TEKTRONIX 1420 Vectorscope. A
version of the 52BA in a carrying case is also
available.
Input signal characteristics can be isolated by
using the RESPONSE switch in the FLAT position
for full bandwidth display, IRE position for IEEE
Standard 205 roll off display, CHROMA position
for a display without luminance components, or
DIFF GAIN position for displaying the differential
gain error of the input signal. A dc restorer, which
may be turned off when not required , maintains
the back porch at an essentially constant level
regardless of changes in signal amplitude, average picture level, and color burst. Selectable
external sync capability is also provided .
This compact instrument is especially suited for
monitoring signals from studio camera outputs ,
video system inputs and outputs , production
switchers, and editing consoles. The 52BA allows
the operator to adjust and monitor video and sync
levels, check and adjust system timing, ensure
continuity of the signal and perform camera
alignment procedures. The 52BA also meets
many of the requirements of video tape recorder
monitoring bridges for VTR alignment and set-up,
differential gain measurements, line time tilt measurements, and pulse response (K factor) measurements. In general, the 52BA is well-suited for
all television applications where consistent video
quality monitoring is a requirement.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering, please use the exact nomenclature given here.
528A Waveform Monitor (for
525 line) ............................................... $2175
Option 01 Without cover .......................................... Sub 530
Option 02 With blue protective carrying cabinet .. Add 565
Option 03 Modified for use with 625 line (CCIR) television
systems and wired for use with 230 volt ac 50 Hertz power
sources (unless otherwise specified) ................ No Charge
Horizontal sweep selection includes: 2H (two
line) , 1 IlS (expanded two line), 2V (two fields) and
2V MAG (expanded two-field). Displays of RGB
and YRGB waveforms from a color camera are
prOVided for by using a rear panel 9-pin interface.
107
TEK VECTORSCOPES
Differential phase is a phase modulation of the
chrominance signal caused by changes in the
luminance signal level. The hue will vary with
scene brightness in the reproduced color picture.
Differential gain and differential phase occur separately or together. You can read differential
phase errors from the precision calibrated phase
shift control to 0.2°.
- ........ IW
••
I.
• fl~'
Included Accessories - Smoke-gray filter. installed (378058t -00) ; power cord (161-0036-00). Rackmount: Same as
cabinet but includes rackmounting hardware. and slide-aut assembly .
ORDERING INFORMATION
R520A NTSC (525/60 3.58 MHz) 520A (NTSC). 521A (PAL). AND 522A (PAL-M) VECTORSCOPES
520A
Series
Luminance Amplitude
Chrominance Amplitude and Phase
Differential Phase
Differential Gain
The vector display shows the relative phase and
amplitude of the chrominance signal on polar
coordinates. To help identify these coordinates.
the graticule has points corresponding to the
proper phase and amplitude of the primary and
complementary colors : R(Red) . B(Blue) .
G(Green). Cy (Cyan). YL (Yellow), and MG
(Magenta).
Any errors in the color encoding, video-tape
recording , or transmission processes which
change these phase and/or amplitude relationships cause color errors in the television picture.
Polar coordinate displays . such as those obtained
on the 520A, 521A, and 522A CRT, have proved
to be the best method for showing these errors.
The polar display permits measurement of hue in
terms of relative phase of the chrominance signal
with respect to the color burst. Amplitude is
expressed in terms of the displacement from
center (radial length) toward the color point which
corresponds to 75% (or 100%) amplitude of the
particular color being measured .
The outer boxes around the color points correspond to phase and amplitude error limits ( ± 10°,
± 20%). For the 520A (NTSC) the inner boxes
indicate ± 2.5° and 2.5 IRE units. of optimum per
EIA specification RS-189A. For the 521A (PAL)
and 522A (PAL-M). the inner boxes indicate ± 3°
phase angle and ± 5% amplitude.
An internally generated test circle, used with the
vector graticule , verifies quadrature accuracy,
horizontal to vertical gain balance, and gain calibration for chrominance signal amplitude measurements. Two methods of measuring phase
108
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here.
520A NTSC VECTORSCOPE
shifts are provided. You can accurately read large
phase shifts from the parallax-free vector
graticule. A precision calibrated phase shifter
with a range of 30°. spread over 30 inches of dial
length, is provided for measuring small phase
shifts.
(Cabinet) ...................................................
Dual Vector Displays. In dual-channel operation. successive samples of channels A and B
are displayed on a time-shared basis. The switching rate is locked to horizontal sync. and switching transients are blanked. You can conveniently
compare inpu t/output signals from video equipment on channel A or B for phase and/or amplitude distortion .
(Rack mount) ..............................................
Time Base Displays. The linear time base operates at the line rate . Color signals may be demodulated along any desired axis, I, Q, and R-Y
(for NTSC), and U. and V (for PAL and PAL-M),
and displayed at the line rate on a linear time
base.
Red (R), Green (G), Blue (B), and Luminance
(V). The 520A, 521A, and 522A provide a luminance channel that permits the separation and
display of the luminance (Y) component from the
composite color signal. You can also combine the
Y component with the output of the chrominance
demodulators for R. G, and B displays at a line
rate . You can make amplitude measurements of
color signal components with an accuracy of 3%.
Vertical Interval Test Signal Observation.
You can display vertical Interval Test Signals from
front-panel selected lines of either field 1 or 2 on
the 520A Vectorscope. For the 521A (PAL) and
the 522A (PAL-M), you can display ITS from either
fields 1 and 3 or fields 2 and 4.
Differential Gain and Differential Phase Measurements. The two main chrominance signal
distortions - differential gain and differential
phase - can be measured on the 520A (NTSC),
521A (PAL), and 522A (PAL-M) Vectorscopes.
Differential gain is a change in color subcarrier
amplitude as a function of luminance level. In the
reproduced color picture, saturation will be distorted in the areas between the light and dark
portions of the scene. Differential gain measurements with accuracy to better than 1% can be
made.
$6675
R520A NTSC VECTORSCOPE
(Rackmount) ..............................................
$6675
521 A PAL VECTORSCOPE
(Cabinet) ...................................................
$6940
R521A PAL VECTORSCOPE
$6940
522A PAL-M VECTORSCOPE
(Cabinet) ...................................................
$7470
R522A PAL-M VECTORSCOPE
(Rackmount) ..............................................
$7470
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
75 II Voltage Step' Up Termination - When used with a Tektronix Vectorscope. the 75 II Voltage Step-up Termination provides a X5 increase in chrominance amplitude and lets you
make more accurate Differential Gain and Differential Phase
measurements. Input impedance to the termination is a constant 75 II.
of the termination requires a source of external
sync to the vectorscope.
use
For use with 520A (NTSC). 522A (PAL-M) Vectorscopes:
BNC Connectors, order 011·0100·01 ............................ $70
For use with the 521 A Vectorscope:
BNC Connectors, order 011·0109·00 ............................ $85
Single Sideband Chroma Amplitude Corrector Designed for use with a Tektronix Vectorscope in transmitter
applications where a vestigial sideband signal is being demodulated with a detecting diode. The corrector provides a X2 increase in chrominance amplitude and passes luminance components with little or no attenuation. Input impedance is 75 II.
For use with 520A (NTSC). 522A (PAL-M) Vectorscope:
BNC Connectors, order 011·0107'() 1 ..... ....................... $70
For use with the 521 A Vectorscope:
BNC Connectors, order 011 ·0108·01 .......................... $105
Recommended Camera for display photographs ; C-59P with
Adapter 016-0295-01. See Camera section of this catalog for
information.
R520A Cradle Assembly - For mounting the 520A in a
WECO backless rack order 426-0667·00 ........................ $33
TEK
VECTORSCOPES
'14.0
NTBC
1420 Series
Half Rack Width
Two Loop-Through Inputs
Continuous 360 · Phase Control
External Subcarrier Input
Illuminated Internal Graticule
X-V Display Version
Each 1420 Series Vectorscope is a compact, half
rack width instrument designed for vector display
of the chrominance and burst components of the
composite video signal. This series provides a
low'cost way to meet basic vectorscope require'
menls in CCUs, VTRs, and similar applications.
The 1420 is particularly well suited for side-by'
side rackmounting with the TEKTRONIX 528A
Waveform Monitor.
It weighs a litlie over 15 pounds with an optional
carrying case.
The parallax- free internal graticule is designed for
the vec tor display of color bars and burst. A
special graticule feature allows you to determine
gain or phase errors to reasonable accuracy for
many applications- within 2° and 5% (for higher
resolution differential gain and phase measure·
ments use a 520A Series Vectorscope.)
Two Signal inputs, an external subcarrier reference input , and a PAL pulse input (1421 and 1422
only) are provided on the rear panel. The "A"
signal input is equipped with a switchable
attenuator; use it for viewing large signals such as
the subcarrier signal. Select the signal to be
displayed and the locking signal for the subcarrier
regenerator with two front panel lever switches.
On Ihe 1421 and 1422, a push-pull switch lets you
select the external subcarrier reference signal. All
models have continuous 360° phase control of
the displayed signal. PAL and PAL-M displays on
the 1421 and 1422 are switchable to an NTSC
format.
~1424 X-V DISPLAY MONITOR
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering . please use the exact nomenclature given here.
For NTSC, 1420 Vectors cope
(Factory Wired for 115 V) ............ .. ... .. . __ •••• _•• _.
$2700
For PAL, 1421 Vectors cope
(Factory Wired for 230 V) _._ ••• •_•••••••••••••• ••• •••• ••
$2810
For PAL-M, 1422 Vectorscope
(Factory Wired for 115 V) ...... ....... . ... ..............
$3050
1424 - Standard NTSC/PAL
XYZ Display........................................ $2335
Rack Adapter, (when ordering the vectorscope for use in the
adapter, Option 01), 016·0115·02 ............................ ,.... 5180
Without Cabinet Option 01 ...................................... Sub 530
With Carrying Ca se Option 02 ........ .. ...................... Add 565
Option 03 (1424 only) - Special NTSC/PAL "
XYZ display ............. .............................................. , Add $100
Option 04 - (1 424 only) External SECAM graticule,
blank CRT .............................................................. , Add $100
Option 05 - (1424 only) Combination NTSC/PAL"
Internal gralicule CRT .......................................... , Add $100
"For Ampex VTR ' s -
check with Ampex for compatibility,
The 1424 X-V Display Monitor provides a vector
display of the crema portion of the television
Signal by utilizing the decoder In a TEKTRONIX
650HR Picture Monitor or other suitable monitor.
By interfacing the 1424 with the proper picture
monitor vector displays for NTSC, PAL and
SECAM color television systems can be obtained.
Dual standard displays can be obtained by interfacing the 1424 with a TEKTRONIX 655HR (NTSC
& PAL) Picture Monitor or a 656HR (SECAM &
PAL) Picture Monitor.
The Z·axis input allows the writing beam to be
modulated for special applications.
109
DEMODULATORS
TEK TELEVISION
Note in figures 1 through 4 how synchronous
detection eliminates the quadrature distortion errors introduced during envelope detection. True
transmitter performance may now be determined,
1450
Measurement Quality Performance
Precise Nyquist Slope provided by SAW
Filter
Wide Dynamic Range with Constant
Bandpass Characteristic
Synchronous and Envelope Detection
UHF and VHF Fixed Channel and Tunable
Down Converters
Conforms to EIA Standard RS-462 (1450-1
only)
The 1450-1 (System M) and 1450-2 (System BIG)
Demodulator Mainframes combine with Tektronix
Television Down Converters to provide an accurate link between the transmitter's RF signal and
video baseband measuring equipment. Demodulation distortion is virtually eliminated and a transparent picture of the transmitter output is
provided ,
Tunable or Fixed-Channel Down Converters.
For demodulating an RF signal at a TV channel
frequency, the 1450-1 (M) and 1450-2 (BIG)
Demodulator Mainframes must be used with a
Tektronix Television Down Converter (TDC),
Three compatible TDCs are available for each
system and provide a selection between tunable
and fixed-channel performance, The TDC FixedChannel Down Converter supports a specified
system channel number, Tunable Down Converters available for System M VHF and UHF channels are the TDC1 and TDC2 respectively ,
Demodulation of the transmitter IF signal may be
accomplished by using only the mainframe,
Detection Modes. The 1450 Series Demodulators provide both synchronous and envelope
detection,
Synchronous detection is required to eliminate
quadrature distortion so that the transmitter's
actual performance may be determined, 1450
Series Demodulator's have two synchronous detector's operating in phase quadrature,
This feature is provided to assist in the measurement of transmitter incidental carrier phase modulation (ICPM), A special ICPM graticule for the
1480 Waveform Monitor is provided with each
1450 Series Demodulator, An application note on
ICPM measurement is available from Tektronix,
Envelope detection is required to accurately measure differential phase, The envelope detector in
1450 Series Demodulators has a linear transfer
characteristic down to 3% carrier and is able to
provide optimum modulation depth indication,
Tektronix-Developed Surface Acoustic
Wave Filter. The 1450-1 (System M) and 1450-2
(System BIG) features a surface acoustic wave
(SAW) filter developed by Tektronix, It provides
more precise Nyquist slope characteristics without group delay distortion, improves long-and
short-term stability, and lowers maintenance
costs,
Figure 2,
Digital Readout of RF Input Signal Level. The
1450 Series Demodulators include a 3-digit front
panel display that provides easy readout of the
RF input signal level. The readout can be used for
calibrated field strength measurements and is
useful in determining how the demodulator signalto-noise ratio is affected by RF input signal levels,
Split and Intercarrier Sound. For making measurements or adjustments on aural transmitters,
the 1450-1 and 1450-2 feature both split and
intercarrier sound channels, The split carrier channel, which will operate without the presence of
the visual carrier, may be used when making
measurements on the aural transmitter only,
Four audio outputs give added measurement
capability: a 600 f! output, two low-impedance
outputs for driving a speaker or headphones, and
a calibrated output for making deviation measurements with an ac voltmeter or an oscilloscope,
110
Figure 1.
Figure 3,
TEK
SECAM TEST SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ORDERING INFORMATION SYSTEM M
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here.
1450-1
(order
one vision
IF option) ...... .......
$11 ,950
.-
Option 0 1 37 MHz vision IF ................................. No Charge
-:.:::"
e •
Option 02 38.9 MHz vision IF .............................. No Charge
Option 03 45.75 MHz vision IF ............................ No Charge
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter (stipulate
channel number when ordering) .. .. ................. .. . $2950
TDC-1 Tunable Down ConverterSystem M. VHF Band ............................ .......
$6375
TDC-2 Tunable Down Converter System . M. UHF Band ..................................
$6375
Order one vision IF Option and Option 11 or 14. If your country
is not Itsted, contact your nearest Sales OHice for a quotation.
Option 01 37 MHz vision IF ................................. No Charge
Option 02 38.9 MHz vision IF .............................. No Charge
Option 03 45.75 MHz vision IF ............................ No Charge
Option 1 1 System M countries .......................... No Charge
Option 14 System M countries ........................... No Charge
Countries: System M (Option 11)
Antigua, Argentina , Barbados, Bermuda, Brazil,
Canada, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Cu·
racao, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, EI Salvador,
Guam, Guatemala, Johnston Islands, Korea, Mexi·
co, Micronesia, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Phillipines, Puerto Rico, Samoa, SI.
Kitts, Surinam , Taiwan, TrinidadfTobago,
Uruguay, U.S.A., Venezuela, Virgin Islands.
Countries: System M (Option 14)
Japan and Okinawa.
ORDERING INFORMATION SYSTEM BIG
1450-2 (Order one vision IF optIOn and one group delay
optIOn) ........................... ..... ... .......... .... . $11 ,950
Option 02 38.9 MHz vision IF .............................. No Charge
Option 09 + 90/- 170 ns group delay ............... No Charge
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter (stipulate
channel number when ordering) .. .. .................... $2950
Order one VISion IF option and Option 12. If your country is not
Itsted , contact your nearest Sales OHice for a quotation.
Option 02 38.9 MHz vision IF .............................. No Charge
Option 12 System BIG countries ....................... No Charge
Countries: System BIG (Option 12)
Algeria, Austria, Bahrain, Bangladesh , Belgium:
Brunei. Cyprus, Denmark, East Germany, Egypt,
Ethiopia, Finland, Ghana, Gibraltar, Greece, Guinea, Hong Kong: Iceland, India, IndoneSia, Iran,
Israel, Italy (UHF), Jordan, Kenya , Kuwait, Lebanon , Liberia, Libya, Malta, Mauritius , Netherlands,
Nigeria, Norway, Oman, Pakistan, Portugal, Oatar,
Rhodesia, Saudi Arabia: Sierra Leone, Singapore, Spain , Sudan, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria,
Tanzania, Tunisia, Turkey, Uganda, United Arab
Emirates, West Germany, Yemen Arab Republic,
Republic of Yemen, Yugoslavia, Zambia .
Rackmount version: cabinet version has carryi ng handle less mounting hardware.
Test signals provided by the 143 are fully-encoded color bars, convergence pattern, and RGB
143
color bar signals. You can select color bars in
either a full-field or split-field configuration. AmpliStand-Alone Broadcast-Quality SECAM
tude, white level. and chroma sequence can be
Sync and Test Signal Generator
changed from the front panel. You can also
switch off the DR D'B and Y signal components
Will Gen-Lock to a SECAM Composite
individually using front panel controls.
Video Signal
The convergence pattern consists of movable
Composite Color Bars, Convergence
vertical and horizontal lines plus dots. All three
Patterns, and RGB Color Bar Signals
signals are available in any combination. A 7 x 9
or 14 x 17 crosshatch pattern may be internally
Provisions for Modifying Test Signal
selected.
Components
RGB color bars signals are available from three
separate rear-panel outputs at all times and are
independent of the position of the front panel
The TEKTRONIX 143 SECAM Test Signal Genercontrols.
ator provides all the test and drive signals required to align and maintain SECAM television
equipment. You can easily control all test signal
components and synchronization modes from the
front panel. Easy-to-change internal programming
provides additional test signal capability to satisfy
your unique testing requirements .
The 143 may be operated from its own internal
standards or gen-Iocked to a SECAM composite
video signal. Color lock may be referenced to either the vertical identification Signals or the line
burst. Front panel LEOs indicate the gen-Iock
status.
Additional outputs provide useful auxiliary signals
including line and field drive, line and field
blanking, composite sync, and two specialized
output signals. These two signals are a 12.5 Hz
squarewave (for identification of the SECAM 4
field sequence) , and a 7.8 kHz squarewave (for
synchronizing a waveform monitor to view either
D'B or D'R lines only, while the 143 is generating a
complete test signal). As a special convenience,
the two unmodulated carrier (rest) frequencies
are brought out to the front panel. It's easy to
verify 143 calibration whenever routine maintenance or recalibration is performed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering please use the exact nomenclature given here:
143 SECAM Test Signal Generator
(Cabinet) ........................................................................ 59450
R 143 SEC AM Test Signal Generator
(Rackmount) .................................................................. 59450
Option 01 minQUICK connectors ......................... Add 5255
• System B only.
111
NTSC, PAL
SIGNAL GENERATORS
TEK TEST
1410R Mainframe with SPG2, TSGs 7, 3, 5, 6 and TSP1 installed .
141 0
Series Generators
NTSC and PAL Standards
Genlock and Non-Genlock Sync Generators
Five Test Signal Generators and One Test
Signal Switcher
RS - 170-A Sync Generation (1410 only)
SMPTE Color Monitor Alignment Signal
(1410 only)
The 1410 NTSC and 1411 PAL Series Sync Pulse
and Test Signal Generators are functionally identical within the specifications of each television
system . They all offer versatile card -set construction tha t gives you the advantages of
configurabllity at prices generally associated with
Single-piece units. With each series you have
access to a wide selection of sync pulse and test
signal generators that can be combined with the
mainframe In the color standard of your choice. If
you need additional test signal capabilities in the
future , our flexible card sets assure retrofit capability for you.
Mainframes
The mainframe unit for each generator series
includes the power supply, an extender board , an
interface board , and color-standard circuitry. Two
color-standard circuits are available for the 1410.
The standard 1410 Mainframe generates
chromlnance subcarrier at 3.579545 MHz ± 10
Hz . An Option 01 Mainframe generates
chrominance subcarrier at 3.579545 MHz ± 1 Hz.
The color standard circuitry for the PAL 1411
Mainframe has a chrominance subcarrier frequency of 4.43361875 MHz ± 1 Hz .
Each ± 1 Hz color standard has a proportional
control oven for the oscillator circuit. A front-panel
lamp indicates proper operation of the oven .
112
Sync Generators
Genlock sync generators are available for NTSC
and PAL color standards. Non-genlock models
are also available.
Each sync generator performs three basic functions: provides all the usual color sync generator
functions and outputs including color framing .
Provides the timing signals for the test signal
generators installed . Provides a black burst
signal.
Several useful features are incorporated in the
1410 Series sync generators. These features
include:
Positive SCH Phasing. The relationship of cGlor
subcarrier to horizontal sync is strictly maintained
whether operating on the generator's internal
reference or in the genlock mode. If, when operating in the genlock mode , the incoming signal is
not SCH phased , the generator sync and
subcarrier outputs will still remain SCH phased. A
color frame identification pulse output is
provided.
Adjustable Blanking Widths. Internal adjustments provide for adjustment of horizontal and
vertical blanking width to allow for the widening of
blanking that occurs when the video signal is
processed.
Slow Lock Mode. A slow genlock mode is
provided for applications where the incoming
Video signals are not synchronous and switching
the genlock input to these various signals may
upset the system.
Test Signal Generators
Five test signal generators are available for the
1410 Series Mainframes. These are: Color Bars,
Convergence , Linearity, Pulse and Bar, Multiburst.
The color bar generator provides full field bars,
bars/Y REF, and bars/reverse bars. The TSG7
(NTSC) also includes SMPTE color bars for color
monitor alignment and EIA bars. The TSG11 (PAL)
also provides EBU color bars.
The convergence pattern generator provides
dots, and vertical and horizontal lines. All elements of the signal are positionable. The convergence pattern conforms to IEEE Standard 202.
The linearity signal generator provides 5 and 10
step staircase, ramp , modulated pedestal , and
flat field with adjustable level. Modulation level is
selectable at either of two levels and, if desired ,
may be switched off . Average picture level (APL)
of the signal is variable in fixed increments and a
bouncing APL (rate adjustable) is also provided .
The pulse and bar generator provides a sin 2
pulse, a modulated pulse, a line rate bar, a
modulated bar, and a field squarewave. The
shape of the sin 2 pulse and the line bar risetime
are selectable at 2T, T, or T/2. Provisions for
reduced amplitude signals and setup are also
included .
The multiburst generator provides the multiburst
signal and a sweep frequency signal. Both signals are available in either a low or a high
frequency range to facilitate testing in either an
operational or a laboratory environment. Special
facilities are provided for simplified amplitude
measurements. For example, on the multiburst
the white flag marks both the upper and lower
burst excursions and the frequency packets are
phase modulated. The sweep frequency signal
has both amplitude and frequency markers.
The tesl signal switcher provides all of the functions of the convergence pattern generator plus a
single, switched output of all the test signals.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1410C Generator .............. ..................
1410R Generator .. .................. ............
1411C Generator ................................
1411R Generator ................................
$1540
$1540
$1980
$1980
Options: Consult with local Tektronix Sales Office lor a.ailable options.
TEK
148
PAL Test Signal Generator
ITS Insertion
Full Field and In-Service
Noise Measurements
The Tektronix 148 Insertion Test Signal (ITS)
Generator provides all the test signals needed for
testing PAL video transmission systems. Test
signals are available as both full-field composite
video and as ITS inserted into the incoming
program signal's vertical blanking interval. All
timing information for ITS insertion is derived from
the incoming composite video signal.
PAL INSERTION TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
NTSC SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
Facilities are provided for the deletion and addition of insertion test signals (ITS) on the program
video.
Since ITS insertion/deletion involves active circuit
elements in the program line, program line fail
safe operation is provided in the event of instrument malfunction, loss of sync, or power failure . A
preview monitor output permits observation of the
ITS deletion/insertion program before committing
same to the program signal. Preview/program
operation can be locally or remotely controlled.
Provisions are made for adding an externally
generated ITS to the program line.
Series
Full Color Sync Generator with Genlock
Locks to Most Helical Scan VTRs
Test Signal Generator
The 1470 Sync and Test Signal Generator is a
compact , full color, genlock sync generator providing a full selection of high quality test signals.
148 Test Signal Generator .......••..•.•••• $6825
R 148 Test Signal Generator
(Rack mount Model) ••••••••••••••••••• ••• ••••••• •• ••••••• $6825
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Noise Measurement Filters
Externaliliters are required wllh the 148 Generator when mak·
ing noise measurements. For systems using 625/50 standards
Low Pass 5.0 MHz 625 /50
order 015-0213-00 ......................................................... 5110
Noise Weighting 5.0 MHz 625 /50
order 015·0215·00 ........................................................... 580
Low Pas. 6.0 MHz 625/50
order 015·0220·00 ......................................................... 5100
Unified Noise Weighting Network
order 015·0283·00 ........................................................... 550
(per CCIR recommendation 568. use only with 5.0 MHz Low
Pass Filter 015-0213-00).
Full field test signals provided include multiburst,
linearity, flat field , window, nOise, line 17, line 330
and line 331 . Variable and bouncing average
picture level (APL) are also provided .
1470
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering please use the exact nomenclature given here .
The synchronizing functions of the 1470 allow for
operation as a master sync generator or as a
slave fully or partially timed from external sources.
Color genlock capable of locking to most helical
scan VTRs is a standard feature . Multiple
subcarrier phasing controls are provided to
simplify system timing and adjustable widths are
provided on horizontal blanking and drive and
vertical blanking .
ORDERING INFORMATION
1470 Color Sync and Test Signal
Generator ......... ........... ........ ................ $3380
Option 01 , Sync Generator without Genlock ....... Sub 5260
1474 Color Sync Generator ............... $1760
Option 01 , Sync Generator without Genlock ....... Sub 5260
Rack Mounting - The 1470 and 1474 are shipped ready to
Install.
GV3257 A Automatic Change Over Unit ..................... 51500
Test signals included in the 1470 are color bars,
linearity, multiburst, convergence pattern , window, and red , green, and blue color fields . High
and low APL is provided on the linearity signal to
facilitate measurements of differential gain and
phase .
113
TEST SET
TEK TRANSMITTER
1900
10 Bit Digital NTSC Test Signal Generator
VITS Insertion
Digital Word Input and Output
Versatile Remote Control Facilities
PROM memory allows easy signal modification
when industry signal formats change.
SMPTE Color Bars, Sin xix, and Multipulse signals
facilitate the alignment of color monitors and
enhance testing of frequency response and
group delay. Each version of the 1900 contains
one or more of these new test signals.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
For the Cabinet and Rackmount 1900
1900 Remote Control Unit 015-0374-00: Interconnecting Cable. 1.83 m (6 It) 012-0108-00: 1 Power Cord. 3-wire
Additional Standard Accessory for the R 1900:
1 Slide Section pr drawer (351·0636-00)
ORDERING INFORMATION
The 1900 Digital Test Signal Generator and VITS
Inserter is designed for state-of-the-art performance testing on NTSC video systems and
equipment. Available in three different versions,
this generator supports a wide range of transmitter, studio, common carrier, and equipment man·
ufacturing applications. The three 1900 versions
available are the Transmitter Test Set, the Studio
Test Set, and the NTC 7 Test Set. Each version
provides a special test signal complement, and all
three offer these unique 1900 features :
10·bit digital signal generation Increases test sig·
nal accuracy and long·term stability.
114
FCC or NTC 7 VITS and VIRS meet most testing
requirements and provide a reference signal for
automatic video correctors.
Digital signal output allows accurate alignment of
D to A converters, while digital signal input allows
alignment of A to D converters and facilitates
conversion of user generated digital signals to an
analog format.
RS·232·C and ground closure interfaces allow
wide·ranging remote control functions and application versatility.
When ordering, please use the exact nomenclature given here.
1900 Transmitter Test Set
(cabinet model) ....... .. . ......... ... ........ •••••••••••••
$8720
R 1900 Transmitter Test Set
(rackmoun t model) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
$8720
Option 01 Studio Test Set ...................... ............. No Charge
Option 02 NTC 7 Test Set ................................... No Charge
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1900 to Remote Control Unit 6.7 m (22 It) Interconnecting Ca·
ble 012·0251-00 ................... ................... .......... ..... .. ...... $270
Diagnostic PROM for inSlrument service 067-0964-00 .. $125
TEK
ANSWER
AUTOMATIC VIDEO MEASUREMENT SET
1980
All-Digital Circuitry
Automatic Operation
Programmability In ANSWER BASIC
The 1980 ANSWER is an automatic measurement
set offering total video test capabilities. It's programmed to make both NTC 7 and FCC measurements of all industry standard VITS and full field
signals. Amplitude, phase, and timing parameters
can all be determined quickly and accurately.
With ANSWER you can make virtually every standard video measurement and have fast , automatic results.
1111111 1111 111111111 1111117 111111111111111111111
ANSWER is designed for maximum versatility and
testing power. The following special features give
you quality measurement performance for a wide
variety of applications:
~I'"
11111111 11111111111111 1111111111 IIII ~~~ill
Automatic Measurements Allow Quick Evaluation of VIT or Full Field Signals
NTC 7 and FCC Measurement Routines Provide Detailed Analysis of Signal Amplitude,
Phase, and Timing
Simple Display Format Means Measurement
Results are Easy to Read and Understand
I~
J
\~'.
"",,-,,.(t.;1t;
I'fJ
g~~.:.r t-I
, __ 0
..
:
i
,"l
I!:t.
,,
,
,,
\\.
/
/
-/
~""'.~ :~
....
....... f
."
User-Definable Measurement Limits Quickly
Identify an Out-of-Tolerance Condition
Programmability Accomodates Present and
Future Needs Without Additional Hardware
(Answer BASIC)
Plus, RS-232-C Interface Compatibility
Adapts to Almost any Application of the
Broadcast Plant, an Unattended Transmitter
Site, or even a Common Carrier Satellite
System
High Measurement Accuracy. ANSWER provides consistent measurement accuracy with
high repeatability. Special features like signal
offset and gain control, dither generation, and
signal averaging minimize possible errors. These
techniques reduce noise on the incoming signal
and provide an effective resolution of 11 bits. This
means you can use ANSWER for the most stringent measurement problems and have fast, accurate results.
Automatic Operation. ANSWER is programmed
with 37 individual measurements, many of which
are combined into easy-to-use amplitude, phase,
and timing routines. All of these operations are
completely automatic and may be invoked using
simple, one-word commands. You can tell ANSWER whether to run a whole measurement
routine , a partial measurement routine , or a single
measurement - periodically or on command.
Results are ready within minutes and offer a high
repeatability you can depend on.
In-Service Measurements. ANSWER measures
virtually all signal parameters on an in-service
basis. Many of these measurements, including
timing, do not even require the presence of a VIT
signal. This full in·service capability minimizes the
need for out-of-service measurements, so time
may be spent on maintaining the system rather
than on isolating system problems.
However, if the need should arise for out-ofservice monitoring, ANSWER is ready with measurements for field-time, long-time, and dynamicgain distortions.
Amplitude, Phase, and Timing. ANSWER provides a complete set of amplitude and phase
measurements for both NTC 7 and FCC. These
measurements include such parameters as sync,
burst, and bar amplitudes; differential gain and
phase; and chrominance-Iuminance distortions.
ANSWER also provides a complete set of timing
measurements. These measurements give you
detailed information on synchronizing signal
parameters.
.-.
Comprehensive Display Format. ANSWER displays measurement solutions in a simple,
straightforward manner. The final measurement
printout indicates the types of measurement performed , the resultant data, and the units of
measure. The printout heading, especially useful
for documentation , tells you the exact date and
time the measurements took place. At a glance,
you see all pertinent parameters of the incoming
video signal.
With ANSWER , you can be sure of your video
transmission quality.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering. please use the exact nomenclature given here.
1980 ANSWER ................................. $20,800
Option 01 : NTSC Applications Software " ........ Add $5,200
Option 02: PAL Applications Software " ............ Add $5,200
Option 12: Automatic Call Equipment ................. Add $500
' Option 01 or 02 is required.
115
TEK
TOR
CABLE TESTERS
1502
This unit is directly calibrated in reflection
coefficient (rho) and distance. The 1502
uses a step-pulse and provides fault resolution to 0.6 inch on short cables. The 1502
performs to a maximum of 2000 feet, but
with decreasing resolution as the fault distance increases. The unit is matched to 50ohm cables , but may be used on others by
adjusting the front panel GAIN control or
using optional impedance adapters.
1503
For long cables, the 1503 provides high-energy, 1/2-sine-shaped pulses . Range of the
1503, dependent upon cable type, is up to
50,000 feet. Resolution capability provides
for resolving faults as close together as
three feet on short cables. Impedance levels of 50, 75, 93 and 125 ohms are
selectable.
Portable Battery Powered , SelfContained , Light
These units use a technique called Time Domain Reflectometry (TOR) to identify and locate cable faults . When connected to a line
in the cable, the unit sends out an electrical
pulse that is reflected back to the unit by a
fault in the cable . Fault type is identified by
the shape of the display, and fault distance
is determined by the displayed interval from
the test pulse to the fault pulse .
Rugged Meets MIL-T-28800, Type III,
Class 3, Style A
Versatile Test Any Type Paired
Conductor and Coax Cable
For easy carrying and operating in tight
spaces, these units are lightweight and
small and will operate at least five hours on
the internal, rechargeable batteries.
Easy to Use Produces Results with
Minimal Operator Training
Time Domain
Reflectometry
*TDR
The portable, rugged 1502 and 1503 TDR
Cable Testers are field maintenance tools
that are simple to operate and will test any
transmission cable under virtually any condi tions. The 1502 is appropriate for testing
coax and other cables in aircraft, ships , radar sites, etc . The 1503 tests long runs of
coax or twisted pair cables in telephone and
other communications applications.
* Also known as cable radar.
116
Since permanent records are useful in cable
maintenance, an optional , plug-in chart recorder is available for paper recording of
the test. The standard plug-in X-Y Output
module can drive an external X-Y Recorder.
1 503 Option 01
1503 Option 01 has DISTANCE CAL switches that make it more convenient for fault
location in a variety of cables including
coax. When the 1503 Option 01 has been
calibrated for each cable before trouble occurs, and the records are kept , the DISTANCE CAL switches can be set exactly
and damage location can begin
immediately.
Metric instruments (1502, 1503)
For distance measurements in meters, instead of feet, there is Option 05 of both the
1502 and 1503. These instruments are fully
metric versions of the 1502 and 1503 with
no conversion from feet to meters involved.
The 1502 Option 05 has a distance resolution of 1.5 cm and measures 500 meters.
The 1503 Option 05 has a resolution of .9
meter and measures 10,000 meters.
PA 1 Cable Comparator
The PA 1 Cable Comparator is used with the
1503 to amplify the test pulse and test two
lines at the same time. This means instant
comparison of a bad line with a good one,
the ability to see cross-talk and a clear picture of faults on noisy or lossy lines.
The PA 1 is connected between the 1503
and the cable to be tested , with the results
displayed on the 1503 for measurement.
TEK
PORTABLE TOR
CABLE TESTERS
1503
1502
TEST SIGNAL
Shape - Slep rise.
Amplitude - 225 mV nominal (.nto 50 11 load). de ooupled.
Aberration. - With.n ± 5% during 1SIlO tt atter rise . W.thin
:t 0 5% peak beyond 10 tt NOISE FILTER ' OUI:
Sy.tem Rellected RI.e - ... 0.07 tt ( ... 140 ps).
Jitter - ... 0.02 tt ( ... 40 ps) lor X.1.
... 0.1 tt ( ... 200 ps) lor Xl .
Te.t Connector - BNC.
Termination - 50 11. with.n :t 2%.
M. . Input - DO NOT APPLY EXTERNAL VOLTAGE.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Di.play Range - ± 4 div.
Accuracy - Within ± 3%.
Calibration Point - 2 div - 1 p.
Dellection Factor - 5 mp/d.v 10 500 mp/d.v. 7 steps. 1· 2·5
sequence.
Variable - .. 3.5: 1 from calobration point.
Di.played Noi.e NOISE FILTER swilch ' out' : :t 5 mp or less.
NOiSE FILTER switch 'in' : :t 2 mp or less.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Di.lance Control. Di.tance Dial Range - 0 to 100 tt lor X.l .
to 1000 It lor Xl .
Accuracy - Within ± 2% 01 reading :t 0.05 tt lor X.1.
W.thin ± 2% 01 read'ng :t 0.5 tt lor Xl .
o
Feet/div Control Range - 0.1 to 20 It/div lor X.l . 1 to 200 It/div lor Xl .
Accuracy - Within 2% 01 lull CRT screen.
CABLE DIELECTRIC Scale. (Vp/Vair) - SOUD POLY. 0.66;
SOLI D PTFE. 0.70; OTHER VAR. 0.55 to 1.0. VAR is calibrat·
ed lor air when turned lully cw.
Sweep Repetition - 40 Hz within + 0 Hz. - 10 Hz with
NOISE FILTER switch ' out: 4 Hz within :t 20% with NOISE
FiLTER switch ·in· . 20 sJsweep nominal in chart recorder
mode (dependent upon chart recorder)
1502 Included Acce •• orie. - Walertight Iront cover. TOR
slode rule (003-0700-00); 50 Il BNC term.nator (011 -0123-00);
precision 50 I I Cabie (01 2-0482-00); viewing hood (01 6-029700); X-Y output module (016-0606-00); replacement luses (lor
Ironl panel) 110 V ae (159-0032-00) or 220 V ac (159-0029-01 );
power cord (161 -0066-00); mesh filter (CRT) (378-0055-00);
BNC lernale-to-Iernale adapter (103-0028-00).
UNIQUE 1502 OPTION 05 CHARACTERISTICS
TEST SIGNAL
Aberration. - W.thin :t 5% during 1st 300 em atter rise. With.n :t 0.5% peak beyond 300 cm NOISE FILTER · out.Sy.tem Rellected Ri.e - ... 2.1 em (... 140 ps).
Jitter - ... 0.6 cm ( ... 40 ps) lor X.l .
... 3 cm ( ... 200 ps) lor Xl .
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Di.tance Control. Di.tance Dial Range - 0 to 25 m lor X.l .
010250 m lor Xl .
Accuracy - W.thin :t 2% 01 reading ± 0.02 m lor X.l .
W.l hin :t 2% 01 read'ng ± 0.2 m lor XL
METERS/ DIV Control Range - 0.025 10 5 mld.v lor X.l .
0.25 to 50 mld.v lor Xl .
ORDERING INFORMATION
1502 TOR Cable Tester •.•..•••...•..••...••. $5225
Option 04 (w.th recorder) ........................................ Add $900
Option 05 (metnc versoon) _................................... No Charge
Option 76 (P7 Phosphor) ............................. uo . . . . . . . _ . . Add $35
234 V Intematoonal Power Cord and Plug Optoons Al thru A4
ava.lable. see page 10 lor lull descnptoon.
1502 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Chart Recorder - 016-0506 -04 ........................... _....... $950
Chart Paper (roll) - 006 - 1658-01 .............................. $6.50
Chart Paper (100 roll case) - 006-1658-02 ............... $490
Acce..ory Pouch - 016-0351 -00 ................................. $25
Impedance Adapter 50 /7511 - 017 -0091 -00· ............................................ $95
50 /93 11 - 017-0092-00' ...... ...................................... $95
50/ 125 11- 017-0090-00· .......................................... $95
• Should be purchased with lollowing two partl:
Connector. BNC Female-to-GR - 017-0063-00 ........... $43
Connector. BNC Male-to-GR - 017 -0064 -00 ................ $60
•• Static Suppressor lor 1502 (helps protect Iront end Irom
damage) - 011 -0132-00 .......................................... $29.00
Shape - 112 s.ne with.n .. 20%
Amplitude - 10 V ± 20% unterminated.
5 V :!: 20%. term.nated . ac ooupled.
Aberration. - - 30 dB pop. (Equ.valent to ± 1.6%).
Duration - .. 10 tt ( 10 ns):
.. 100 tt (100 ns):
.. 1000 tt (1000 ns):
'Duration t.mes are w.th.n :!: 20% at half ampl.tude.
Jitter - .. 1 tt lor Xl0 ( ... 2 ns).
... 10 It lor Xloo ( ... 20 ns).
Te.t Connector - BNC.
Termination - 50 Il. 75 11. and 93 11. w.th.n 1% ; 125 11 w.th.n
3%.
M.. Input - ± 400 V (de + peak ac at max Irequency 01 440
Hz).
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Di.play Range - ± 4 d.v.
Accuracy - Within ± 0.2S dB (wilhin ± 3%).
Calibration Point - 2 d.v - 0 dB.
Dellection Factor - 0 to 60 dB. 7 Sleps. 10 dB per step.
Variable - 0 to 18 dB add.l.ve to steps.
Di.played Noi.e NOISE FILTER switch -OUI': - 80 dB RMS. random .
NOISE FILTER sw.tch 'in': - 86 dB RMS. random.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Dislance Control. Di.tance Dial Range - 0 to 2.500 It at Xl 0
01025 .000 tt at Xloo.
Accuracy - Within 2% 01 reading ± 2 tt lor Xl O.
Within 2% 01 reading :!: 20 tt lor Xl 00.
Feet/div Control Range - 5 to 500 It/div at Xl0. 50 to SOOO It/d.v at Xl00.
Accuracy - Within 2% 01 lull CRT screen.
CABLE DIELECTRIC Scalea (VpNair) - SOLID POLY. 0.66;
FOAM POLY. 0.81; VAR. 0.31 -1.0. VAR is calobrated lor air
when turned lully CW o
Diatance Cal Scale • • Option 01 only (VpNaor) - Selectabie
Irom 0.2 to 1.0 in 0.01 increments.
Sweep Repetition - 40 Hz within + 0 Hz. - 10Hz w.th
NOISE FILTER sw.tch ' out: 20 s/sweep nom.nal .n chart recorder mode (dependent upon chart recorder). 4 Hz w.thln
~ 200/• w.th NOISE FILTER sw.tch · .n •
1503 Included Acco ••orie. - Watertight Iront cover. r.placement luses (lor Iront panel) 110 V ac (159-0032-00) or
220 V ac (159-0029-01 ); power cord (161 -0066-00); view.ng
hood (016-0297-00); 50 Il BNC terminator (011-0123-00); X-Y
output module (016-0606-00); mesh filter (CRT) (378-0055-00);
9 tt BNC-to-cl.p-lead cabie (012-0671-02).
1503 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Chart Recorder - 0 16-0506- 04 ................................... $950
Chart Paper (roll) - 006- 1658-01 ............................... 56.50
Chart Paper (100 roll case) - 006- 1658-02 ................. $490
I.olation Network
(lor balanced Iones) - 013-0169-00 ............................. $155
Adapter Cable. (BNC-to-Clops) 9 loot - 012 -0671-02 ............................................ $50
30 loot - 012-0671-03 ............................................ $60
Acce.lory Pouch - 016-0351 -00 ................................. $25
Direct Current Ad.pter with Filter (lor use w. th standard 12 V
automobile lighter plug w.th negatove ground)
25 loot cord - 015-0327-00 ........................................ $ 120
1502 & 1503 COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
POWER SYSTEM
Line Voltage - 117 V ac :!: 200". 48 to 410 Hz. (234 V ac
• 200 • . 48 to 4 t 0 Hz ava.labie w.th Optoons A l -M).
Battery Pack Operation - At least 5 hr ( + 20 ' C to + 25 ' C charge and
d.scharge temperature) .ncluding 20 chart record'ngs .
Full Charge Time - 16 hr.
Typical Charge Capacity Charge
Temperature
OOC
+ 20° C to + 2SoC
+40 oC
Di.charge
Temperature
+20 o C
to
-15° C
+25 OC
40 %
60 %
100%
65%
65 %
40 %
We i ght
Net (with Iront cover and acces .)
(without I ront cover or acces.)
Domestic Sh ipping (complete )
Export Sh i ppi ng (complete)
kg
8 .2
7.3
11.1
16.3
• Duration timea ore within ± 20% at hall amplitude.
Jitter - .. 0.2 m for Xl ( ... 2 ns).
.. 2 m for Xl0 ( ... 20 ns).
Dlmenlion.
em
Height
Wid th
Length
15.3
18.4
29.2
METERS/DIV CONTROL Range - 1 to 100 mld.v at Xl .
10 to 1000 m/d.v at Xl0.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1503 TOR Cable Tester ...•..•.•••.•••....... $4550
Option 01 (D.stance Cal) ........... ............................. Add $325
Option 04 (w.th recorder) ........................................ Add $900
Option 05 (metric versoon) ..... ............................... No Charge
Option 76 (P7 Phosphor) .......................................... Add $35
234 V Internatoonal Power Cord and Plug Optoons Al thru A4
ava.labie. see page 10 lor lull descr.ptoon.
lb.
18
16
24.4
36
PA 1 Cable Comparator
Test Pulse Amplitude 15 V lor IOns pulse width
25 V lor lOOns and 1000 ns pulse widths
Voltages :t 20%
60 Hz Rejection - 40 dB .
o
50%
85%
5S%
EXTERNAL RECORDER INTERFACE
(STANDARD X-Y MODULE)
Horizontal - 0 1 V/d.v. source .mpedance '5 10 kll.
Vertical - 0.09 to 0.13 V/d.v (adJustabie). source .mpedance
.510 kll.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In
em
Di men.i on.
5.0
12.7
Height
12.4
31 .5
Wi dth (w i th handle)
11 .8
30
(wi thout handle)
18.7
47.5
Length (handle extended)
16.5
41 .9
(handle not extended)
UNIQUE 1503 OPT 05 CHARACTERISTICS
TEST SIGNAL
Duration - ... 3 m (10 ns):
.. 30 m (100 ns):
.. 300 m (1000 ns):
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Distance Controf. Distance Dial Range - 0 to SOO m at Xl.
to 5.000 m at Xl0.
Accuracy - W.th.n 2% 01 read'ng :!: 0.2 m lor Xl .
Within 2% 01 reading :!: 2 m lor Xl O.
+55 0 C
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
in
6.00
7.25
11 .5
Weiaht
ka
Ib
Net
Sh'PPlng
8.25
6.75
3.75
14.85
POWER SYSTEM
Battery Powered - ReqUires lour (4) ASA -0 - size alkalone
cells (not provoded).
Service Life - 100 hours m.n.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
M.lltary Spec. flCatlOn MIL-T-288oo. Type II . Class 2. Style B
was used as guideline lor the environmental specilications.
Oper.ting Temperature - - 15' C to + 5' C.
Water Realstance - Splash and dnp proof. Cover removed .
Vibration - 3.0 g. 5 to 55 Hz.
Shock. Mechanical Pulse - 30 g. 1/2 sine shock.
Order PA 1 Cable Comparator ...•...••..••. $450
LOGISTICS INFORMATION
For Iog.StICS data . see Tektronix Logis tics Data Book.
TEK
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS &
SWEPT FREQUENCY SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
Portable Spectrum Analyzers
496/496P 1 kHz to 1800 MHz ................ .
120
122
492/492P 50 kHz to 220 GHz ......... ..
Waveguide Mixers .... ......... ....... ........... . ..... 125
Plug-In Spectrum Analyzers
7L14 10 kHz to 1800 MHz
................. ...
7L18 1.5 GHz to 60 GHz .......
.. ..........
...................
7L5 20 Hz to 5 MHz ......
7L12 100 kHz to 1800 MHz ....
5L4N 20 Hz to 100 kHz
126
127
128
130
131
Tracking Generators
TR502/TR503 100 kHz to 1800 MHz ..
132
1405 Sideband Adapter ..
Accessories .....
133
134
7000 Series
Plug-in Versatility
Three Models Provide Digital Storage.
With the introduction of the new 7L 14, there
are now three members of the Tektronix
family of digital storage plug-in spectrum
analyzers. They provide frequency coverage from 20 Hz to 60 GHz-the 7L 18 covers
1.5 to 60 GHz, the 7L 14 from 10 kHz to 1800
MHz, and the 7L5 from 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Digital storage provides: flicker-free displays
that are easy to interpret; averaging and
peak detection; accurate waveform comparisons; and it stores for long periods to
measure amplitude changes and frequency
drift.
Family Characteristics that make
Spectrum Analysis Easier. The 7000 Series Family of spectrum analyzer plug-ins are
compatible with any Tektronix 7000 Series
Oscilloscope Mainframe, including the new
7854 Oscilloscope Mainframe for microprocessor-based processing of spectra to
aid in complex measurements. Spectra and
data can be transferred via the 7854's GPIB
interface. These spectrum analyzers provide unequaled flexibility and versatility.
With a 7000 Series Mainframe on your
bench , you select the spectrum analyzers
that fit your requirements . And they interchange quickly with each other and with 30
other Tektronix test and measurement plugins.
118
These spectrum analyzer plug-ins display alphanumeric readout for referencing and
easy documentation. And each analyzer
can withstand up to one watt input levels to
save expensive front end repairs caused by
inadvertent overloading.
Other Plug-in Spectrum Analyzers from
Tektronix. The popular, economical 7L 12
has capabilities similar to the 7L 14 at a lower price . It is somewhat lower in performance and does not have digital storage.
Front-end protection is available as an
accessory.
5000 Series Mainframe owners can also add
spectrum analyzer capability in the 20 Hz to
100 kHz range with the 5L4N Plug-in. This
analyzer is ideal for audio, distortion and
noise measurements.
TEK
Performance for the Lab that
goes into the Field
The TEKTRONIX 492 and 496 are two spectrum analyzers that go where you go. Their
compact size , light weight, and rugged
design combine to offer unmatched portability in laboratory quality analyzers.
Single-handle carry and portable form factor
make them ready to travel. The 492 and 496
move as easily in the field as in the design
lab or systems test area. They even fit under an airplane seat.
You can count on the same exceptional performance no matter where you 're working. If
its antenna test measurements, pOint-topoint transmission maintenance, or any
number of critical field applications, the 492
and 496 work with you.
For on site applications reduced warmup
time means reduced measurement time.
Long term frequency drift of 5 kHzJ 10
minute after 30 minutes warmup is typical
for the 4921492P and 2 kHzJ10 minute is
typical for the 496/496P.
Here's Proof of Their Performance
The TEKTRONIX 492 has the widest amplitude calibrated frequency range of any
spectrum analyzer on the market: 50 kHz to
220 GHz using external waveguide mixers
above 21 GHz. The VHF/UHF 496 covers
from 1 kHz to 1.8 GHz.
They offer 80 dB dynamic range on-screen
and excellent sensitivity, with an average
noise level of -123 dBm at 100 Hz resolution bandwidth for the 492, -127 dBm at 30
Hz resolution bandwidth for the 496. Low
phase noise - 70 dBc at only 3 kHz offset
-for accurate small-signal analysis . High
stability for single source spectral purity
analysis , with residual FM of no more than
50 Hz peak-to-peak for the 492, 10 Hz peakto-peak for the 496. For precise measurement of signal differences, there 's amplitude comparison in super-fine 0.25 dB
steps . And the 496 provides 1 kHz frequency resolution in ~F mode. All this and more
in one compact package that goes where
you go.
Easy to Use . Anywhere
Tektronix designed the 492 and 496 to handle your measurement task with microprocessor-aided ease. Setting frequency ,
span and reference level is a simple threeknob operation . Most-used functions are
automatically controlled. Digital storage and
signal processing eliminate time-consuming
display adjustments. And constant tuning
rate helps you position a signal quickly and
accurately. All part of the convenience and
capability the 492 and 496 deliver, on site or
on the bench .
1 19
1 kHz TO 1800 MHz
SPECTRUM ANAL VZERS
TEK PORTABLE
The 496 provides high performance spectrum
analysis and measurements in the 1 kHz to 1.8
GHz range . Its high stability and 80 dB dynamic
range meet your demands for proof-of-performance measurements, on site or on the bench.
Microprocessor-aided controls take care of the
rest . Most-used functions are automatically
controlled .
The 496 offers state of the art performance and
rugged portability. Resolution bandwidth can be
varied from 1 MHz to 30 Hz over the entire
frequency range. Automatic phase lock stabilization reduces incidental FM to 10 Hz pop; phase
noise sidebands are at least - 75 dBc at 30 times
the resolution offset. Frequency drift with phase
lock is no greater than 330 Hz in ten minutes. And
the 496 provides 1 kHz frequency resolution in t.F
mode.
Light weight and compact size combine to provide unmatched portability in a laboratory quality
spectrum analyzer. With its single-handle carry,
the 496 is easily moved around the design lab or
systems test area , to the field , or wherever it may
be needed.
1 kHz Frequency Resolution in t.F Mode
Easy to use.
Anywhere.
CRT Readout of all Important Parameters
Simple 1,2,3 knob adjustment sets center frequency , frequency span and reference level.
Power on sequence automatically normalizes
operational settings and provides maximum input
protection.
The 496P is the fully programmable/GPIB compatible version of the 496 Spectrum Analyzer.
Operation , features and benefits of the 496P are
essentially the same as the 492P. See discussion
on pages 123 and 124. 496 Spectrum Analyzer
specifications also apply to the 496P.
The 496P complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978,
and with Tektronix Codes and Formats
Standard
496
Microprocessor Aided Controls
Automatic Modes
Portable Form Factor
(Compact Size / Light Weight)
1 kHz to 1800 MHz Coverage
Amplitude Comparison in 0.25 dB Steps
Fully Calibrated in Amplitude and Frequency
80 dB Dynamic Range
GPIB/ Fully Programmable (496P)
Three-knob Operation
Environmentalized per MIL-T 288008
Digital Storage and Signal Processing
120
Digital storage eliminates time-consuming display
adjustments. SAVE A, B MINUS SAVE A, MAX
HOLD and AVERAGE modes let you compare,
subtract, save maximum values or noise average
(smooth) your spectral displays. Constant tuning
rate lets you position the signal quickly and
accurately at any frequency span.
The 496 Goes Where You Go
It even fits under an airplane seat.
Automate your Spectrum Analysis with the
496P
Manual instruments can be converted to
programmable instruments at a later time . Contact your Tektronix Sales Engineer for details.
TEK
496/496P CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The lollowlng characleristics and features apply to the
496/496P Spectrum Analyzer after a 30-minute warm up
penod unless otherwise noted.
Frequency Accuracy -
Differential Amplitude - Delta A mode prOVides differential
measurement in 0.25 dB increments.
Display Flatness - ± 1.5 dB . 1 kHz to 1800 MHz measured
With ' 10 dB RF attenuation.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency Range -
Display Amplitude Accuracy - ± 1.0 dB/ l0 dB to a maXimum cumulative error of + 2.0 dB over the 80 dB Window and
• 0.4 dB/2 dB to a maximum cumulative error of ± 1.0 dB over
the 16 dB WindOW. LIN mode IS 5% of full scale.
1 kHz to 1800 MHz.
Sensitivity -
± 5 MHz + 20% of span/div.
• Frequency Readout Resolution 1 MHz. 496P TUNE
Command Accuracy (Span /div < 50 kHz) - ± 7% or ± 100
Hz. whichever is greater.
'Delta Frequency Readout Accuracy (Span/div .. 50 kHz)
- ~ 5% 01 the Deila Frequency Readout.
Residual FM (short term), Phase-lock ON over 20 mS.
Residual FM (short term), Phase-lock OFF over 20 mS .
< 1 kHz p-p
Resolution Bandwidth (- 6 dB) - 30 Hz. then 100 Hz to 1
MHz In decade steps. plus an AUTO position. Resolulion bandwidth is within 20% of selected bandwidth.
496 to 496P Conversion - Conversions made by your Tektronix Service Center. Contact your Spectrum Analyzer Sales
Engineer or Service Center for details.
Rackmount, Option 30 ........................................... Add $790
Rackmount with all Inputs through rear
panel, Option 31 .................................................... Add 5840
Benchmount, Option 32 ......................................... Add $940
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V 116A ................ No Charge
< 10 Hz p-p
Long Term Drilt (At Constant Temperature and Fixed Center Frequency) Phase Lock on 3.3 kHz or less in 10 Min.
Phase Lock off 33 kHz or less in 10 Min.
Resolution Shape Factor (60 dB/6 dB) or less for 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth.
ReSolution Bandwidth Average Noise LeVel.
30 Hz
- 127 dBm
100Hz
- 123dBm
1 kHz
- 115 dBm
10 kHz
- 105 dBm
- 95 dBm
100 kHz
- 85 dBm
1 MHz
ORDERING INFORMATION
496 Spectrum Analyzer ................... $22,950
496P Fully Programmable/GPIB
Spectrum Analyzer .......................... $26,950
SPURIOUS RESPONSE
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Residual (no input Signal, referenced to mixer input) 100 dBm or less.
Third·Order Intermodulatlon Distortion (Min Distortion
mode) - At least - 70 dBc below any two on-screen signals
Within any frequency span.
Harmonic Distortion (ew signal, Min Distortion mode) least - 60 dBc for a fUll-screen signal.
L. O. Emissions (reference to input mixer) maximum
At
- 70 dBm
Option A3 Australian 240 V11OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V 115A ............... No Charge
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS FOR
(496P SPECTRUM ANALYZER)
4041 System Controller ............................................... 54995
4052 Graphic Computing System
Controller ........................... _.......................................... 59900
4611 Hard Copy Unit ................................................... 54400
7.5: 1 or less. 15:1
INPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Rf Input -
Type N female connector.
4631 Hard Copy Unit ................................................... 55575
4662 Interactive Digital Plotter ................................... 54600
Noise Sidebands - At least 75 dBc at 30 times the Resolution Bandwidth offset from the Center Frequency (70 dBc for
100 Hz Resolution Bandwidth or less).
Input Impedance - 50 U: vswr 1.45 maximum With 10 dB or
more rf attenuation.
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive .............................. 52990
Frequency Spanl div Range MHzl div in a 1-2·5 sequence.
Input Level (optimum level for linear operation) - - 30 dBm
referred to input mixer. Full screen not exceeded and MIN Distortion control setting.
1405 TV Sideband Analyzer ....................................... 55000
TR 503 Tracking Generator ......................................... 56300
1 dB Compression Point -
For more information on the TR 503 see page 132.
From 50 HZ/div to 100
Max Span - When selected, the entire effective frequency
range IS scanned and displayed.
Zero Span - When selected. the honzontal axis of the CRT IS
cahbrated in lime (instead of frequency). The spanl div readout
IS changed to time/dlv.
Frequency Span /dlv Accuracy - Wilhin 5% of the selected
spanl div over the center eight divisions of the ten-division CRT
display.
·..IF mode proVides Incremental frequency measurements to
the nearest kHz plus direct center frequency readout to the
nearest kHz between 1 kHz and 1500 kHz (Phase Locked).
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Reference Level Range (lull screen, top of graticule) - 123 dBm to +40 dBm (+ 40 dBm includes maximum safe
Input of + 30 dBm and 10 dB of IF gain reduction) for 10 dB/div
and 2 dB/div LOG modes. 20 nV/div to 2 V/dlv (1 W maximum
safe Input) in LIN mode.
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB . 1 dB. and 0.25 dB lor differenlial (..I) measurements in LOG mode. 1-2-5 sequence and 1
dB equivalent Increments In LIN mode.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy IS a function of
changes In rf Attenuation. Resolution BandWidth. Display
Mode and Relerence Level. See amplitude accuracies of these
lunctlons. The rf attenuator steps 10 dB lor relerence level
changes above - 30 dBm ( - 20 dBm when Min NOise IS active)
unless Min rf Attenuation is greater than normal. The IF gain
increases 10 dB for each 10 dB Reference Level change below
- 30 dBm ( - 20 dBm when Min Noise is active).
Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB at 10 dB/div. 16 dB at 2
dB/dlv. and 8 diVisions In LIN mode.
- 18 dBm. no rf attenuation.
Maximum Input level
" 30 dBm (1 W) continuous (rf attenuation at 0 dB). 75 W peak
(20 dB or more R. F. Attenuation) for 1 .5 or less pulse width
and 0.001 maximum duty factor . Dc must never be apphed to
R. F. Input.
OUTPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Calibrator (Cal Out) kHz .
- 20 dBm ± 0.3 dB at 100 MHz ± 1.7
1st and 2nd LO - PrOVides access to the output of the respective local OSCillators (1st LO + 7.5 dBm minimum to a
maximum of + 15 dBm. 2nd LO - 16 dBm minimum to a maximum of + 15 dBm). These ports must be terminated in 50 I! at
all times.
Vertical - PrOVides 0.5 V ± 5% of signal per diVision of video
above and below the centerhne.
Horizontal Out - PrOVides 0.5 V either Side of center. Full
range - 2.5 V to + 2.5 V ± 10%.
Pen Lift -
TIL compatible. nominal + 5 V to lift pen.
IF Out - Output of the 10 MHz IF. Level is ~ - 16 dBm for a
lull screen Signal at - 30 dBm Input reference level. Nominal
Impedance 50 I!.
496P Only: IEEE Std 488- 1978 Port (GPIB) With IEEE-488 Standard .
In accordance
Probe Power - Provides operating voltages (+ 5 V. + 15 V,
15 V. and Ground) for active probes.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Time .s/dlv In Auto).
20 .s/dlv to 5 sl div In 1-2-5 sequence (20
CRT Readout - Displays : Reference Level , Frequency. FreQuency span/dlv . Vertical Display, rf Attenuation , and Resoulion BandWidth.
Input Voltage Hz.
Power -
90 to 132 Vac or 180 to 250 Vac. 48 to 440
210 W maximum. 3.2 A. at 115 V and 60 Hz .
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Hard Case (tranSit) (016-0658·00) ................................ 5625
Soft Case (016-0659-00) ............................................... $125
Polaroid Film Pack C-59AP ......................................... $1165
C·5C Camera ......................................................... .... ..... 5500
Note: The 496 Spectrum Analyzer system is compatible
with all TEKTRONIX C-50 Series Camera •.
50 kHz to 220 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS
TEK PORTABLE
The 492P complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978,
and with Tekt ronix Co des and Formats
Standard
492
492P
Microprocessor Aided Controls
Automatic Modes
Portable Form Factor
(Compact Sizel Light Weight)
Usable Frequency Range
From 50 kHz to 220 GHz
Amplitude Comparison in 0_25 dB Steps
CRT Readout of all Important Parameters
Fully Calibrated in Amplitude and Frequency
80 dB Dynamic Range
Wide Range of Options
GPIB Programmable (492P)
Three-knob Operation
Environmentalized per Mll-T -28800B
Digital Storage and Signal Processing
Freedom from Spurious Responses
Through Preselection
122
lab Quality You Can Get a Handle on.
The 492 is a high performance, rugged , state of
the art instrument of compact size, with microprocessor logic control. Full programmability via
GPIB (IEEE 488-1978) compatibility is available for
the 492P version.
Three-knob operation provides use as simple as
1, 2, 3 through microprocessor coupled functions
such as resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth ,
sweep time, frequency span , rf attenuation, and
reference level. Measurement accuracy is enhanced through the use of 6. dB mode, which
switches in 0.25 dB steps.
Digital storage and processing facilitate trace
comparisons and add measurement capability
through the MAX HOLD function for frequency
drift and amplitude change measurements.
Arithmetic operations can be performed between
traces or between a trace and a reference . Digital
noise averaging mode results in trace smoothing .
With digital storage, the display is steady and
without flicker, even at the lowest sweep speeds;
plus, trace values may be retained as long as
power is on.
492P Makes Spectrum Analysis
Automatic, and Easy.
Two Instruments in One.
The 492P is a fully programmable version of the
492 Spectrum Analyzer. It incorporates all of the
492's lab quality performance and ease of use
features when used as a manual instrument. Push
the "Reset to Local " button and the 492P becomes a 492-with operation from the front
panel. But, most important, the 492P opens the
way to automated spectrum analysis and documentation via its IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface.
This versatility makes the 492P useful in many
applications in the lab, factory or field .
Programmability/GPIB features can be added to
manual 492 Spectrum Analyzers, serial number
B03XXXX and above, and all 496 Spectrum Analyzers. This means if you want to postpone a
programmability/GPIB decision because of budget constraints, or for any other reason , you can
convert your 490 Series Spectrum Analyzer later.
Conversions are made by your nearest Tektronix
Service Center.
92P
TEK
492/492P CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The lollowing characteristics and features apply to the
492/492P Spectrum Analyzers after a 30 minute warmup period unless otherwise noted.
Frequency Range - 50 kHz to 21 GHz with internal mixer, to
220 GHz with external mixers. Option 08 deletes coverage
above 21 GHz (calibrated mixers to 140 GHz available from
Tektronix).
Frequency Accuracy - ± 0.2% or 5 MHz whichever is greater + 20% of span/div.
Frequency Readout Resolution - Within 1 MHz.
Frequency Span per Division - 10kHz to 500 MHz plus zero
and full band max span. down to 500 Hz with Option 03- ln 12-5 sequence.
Frequency Span Accuracy over center eight divisions.
± 5% of span/div, measured
Resolution Bandwidth @ 6 dB Points - 1 MHz to 1 kHz (100
Hz lor Option 03) in decade steps within ± 20% . manually or
automatically selected .
Resolution Shape Factor (60/ 6 dB) -
- 40
- 60
I III II
1\
'\
TIll
lJHLLUH
'\
___ bandwldlh (Option 3)
E
m
"
7.5; maximum .
-80
1 kHz resolution b andwidth
~
K
- 100
'I'--
r-...
- 120
10
100
1000
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 1 Typical low end frequency performance for the 492 with
Option 01
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
When used with the TEKTRONIX 4052 Graphic Computing System controller and 463t Hard Copy Unit, or with the 4662 Digitsl Plot·
ter, the 492P can provide test results in both gr8phic and numeric form for the evaluation of microwave signal sources.
With or Without a Controller
Easy to Use
Switches on the rear panel select the mode of
operation as a GPIB instrument. In the normal
TALKER/ LISTENER mode, the 492P listens to
and executes commands from a GPIB controller.
All important front panel settings can be operated
remotely. Some functions are controlled with
more detail through the bus than possible from
the front panel.
The 492P is designed for ease of operation via
the GPIB, just as the 492 is designed for front
panel operational ease. Most commands for program control are simply abbreviations of the front
panel nomenclature.
GPIB ADDRESS
LFOREOI~
TALK ONLY:::=!
LISTEN ONLY
l J
I
0-
.2
The 492P's high level command language and the
Similarity of commands and responses simplify
programming and make program listings easily
readable for editing.
Put it to Work
'j jill
'
1IIIIIIi
- - - ·, PE N -
EOI -==::::~-----
With the programmable 492P on your measurement team, rep~titive measurements can be
done the same way every time. Your throughput
will increase-and your confidence in results .
And , the internal processing and high level programming language makes software develop·
ment faster. You get high power results with easy
programming. When you look at the total performance capability of the 492P, you 'll recognize its
value: ease of operation both as a programmable
and manual instrument. Wide frequency range.
The versatility to go where you go. Into the lab for
automated testing; into the field for data
collection.
Residual (no Input signal) - - 100 dBm or less relerenced to
input mixer for fundamental conversion.
Harmonics - At least - 60 dBc for full screen signal in the
Min Distortion mode to 21 GHz . At least - 100 dBc for preselected Option 01. 1.7 to 21 GHz.
tntermodulation - 3rd order products at least - 70 dB down
from two full screen signals within any frequency span in the
Min Distortion mode. At least - 100 dB down for two signals
spaced more than 100 MHz apart from 1.7 to 21 GHz for preselected Option 01 .
L.O. Emissions (referenced to Input mixer) - - 10 dBm
max ; - 70 dBm max lor Option 01 .
STABtLITY
Residuat FM - (1 kHz p-p) n (mixing number) for 20 ms time
duration , improves to (50 Hz) n lor 20 ms with phaselock Option 03.
Long Term Drift - 200 kHz/hour unphaselocked. 3 kHz/10
min phaselocked lor fundamental mixing.
Noise Sidebands - At least 75 dBc @ 30X resolution offset
(70 dBc for 1 kHz resolution) for fundamental mixing .
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Reference Level Range - - 123 dBm to + 40 dBm (+ 30
dBm maximum safe input) for 10 dB/div and 2 dB/div LOG
modes. 20 nV/div to 2 V/div (1 W max safe Input) in the LIN
mode.
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB , 1 dB, and 0.25 dB for relative level (.:.) measurements in LOG mode. 1-2-5 sequence and
1 dB equivalent increments In LIN mode.
Reference Level Accuracy - Amplitude change of 0.25 dB
± 0.05 dB, 1 dB ± 0.2 dB , 10 dB ± 0.5 dB; to a maximum of
± 1.4 dB for 60 dB and ± 2 dB lor 90 dB reference level
change when gain change and attenuation do not offset each
other.
Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB @ 10 dB/div, 16 dB @ 2
dB/div and 8 divisions linear.
Display Amplitude Accuracy - ± 1 dB/10 dB to max of ± 2
dBI80 dB ; ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to max of ± 1 dB/ 16 dB, ± 5% of full
screen in LIN mode.
Resolution Bandwidth Gain Variallon -
± 0.5 dB .
50 kHz to 220 GHz
TEK COMPACT
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS
SENSITIVITY AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Frequency R• • pon ••
With 10 dB Attenuation
Average Nol.e Level
lor 1 kHz Re. olutlon
Frequency Range
Mixing
Number (n)
No
Pre.electl on
50 kHz-1.8 GHz'
50 kHz-4 .2 GHz'
1.7-5.5 GHz
3.0-7.1 GHz
5.4-1 8 GHz
1
1
1
1
3
-115
-115
-115
-115
-100
15-21 GHz
100 MHz-18 GHz ' "
3
-
d Bm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
95 dBm
Pre.elected
Option 01
No
Pre.electlon
Pre.e lected
Option 01
±1 .5 d B
-110dBm
-110 d Bm
-110 dBm
- 110dBm
- 95 dBm
(12 GHz)
- 90 dBm
(1 8 GHz)
- 85 d Bm
±2.5
±1 .5
±1.5
±2.5
dB
dB
dB
dB
±3.5 dB
±3.5 dB
±2.5 dB
±2.5 dB
±3.5 dB
±5.0 d B
±4.5 dB
With Tektron ix optional high perlormance waveguide mixers
18-26 GHz
26-40 GHz
40-60 GHz
60 to 90 GHz
90 to 140 GHz
- 100
95
95
- 85
- 75
6
10
10
-
d Bm
dBm
d Bm
dBm
dB m
±3
±3
±3
±3
±3
Option 02 - Digital Storage ............................... Add 51900
Provides multiple memory display storage with Save A, Max
Hold. B Minus Save A, display averaging, and storage bypass.
Option 03 - Frequency Stabilization I 100 Hz
Resolution ............................................................ Add 53500
Provides first local oscillator stabilization by plhase locking the
oscillator to an Internal reference. Also provides 100Hz
resolution.
Option 08 - Delete External Mixer
Capability ............................................................. Sub 51750
Deletes external mixer capability which provides internal
switching and connection capability to connect and use exter·
nal waveguide mixers.
Option 20 - General Purpose 12.4 to 40 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set ............................................ Add 5520
Includes three mixers (12.4 to 18 GHz, 18 to 26.5 GHz, and
26.5 to 40 GHz) and attaching hardwane to extend the upper
frequency.
dB
dB
dB
dB"
dB"
Option 21 - High Performance 18 to 40 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set .......................................... Add 51970
Includes two mixers (18 to 26.5 GHz and 26.5 to 40 GHz) and
attaching hardware to extend the upper frequency .
'Low Irequency end perlormance does not include effects due to zero Hz feedthrough .
"Typical over any 5 GHz bandwidth.
" ' Includes Irequency band switching error of 1 dB maximum.
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Option 01 - Interna l Preselection .................... Add 53900
Provides calibrated preselected filtering 01 first mixer lor each
frequency band.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Internal Mixer - Type N lemale connector. VSWR 1.45 to 18
GHz and 3.5 to 21 GHz : with 10 dB or more attenuation.
Calibrator 1st LO -
+ 7.5 dBm@50 ll nominai + 15 dBm max .
Rackmount. OpUtgn 30 ........................................... Add 5790
Optimum Level for Linear Operation to mixer.
2nd LO -
- 16 dBm @ 50 II nominal + 15 dBm max.
Rackmount Option 31 with all inputs through
rear panel ................................................................ Add 5840
Benchmount, Option 32 ......................................... Add 5940
- 30 dBm referenced
- 20 dBm :t 0.3 dB. 100 MHz :t 1.7 kHz.
Option 22 - High Performance 18 to 60 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set .................................................. 53220
Includes three mixers (18 to 26.5 GHz, 26.5 to 40 GHz, and 40
to 60 GHz) and attaching hardware to extend the upper
Irequency.
Vertical Out -
1 dB Compression Point - - 28 dBm Irom 1.7 to 2 GHz lor
Option 01 : otherwise - 10 dBm.
M..imum Safe Input Level - + 13 dBm without Option 01 .
+ 30 dBm (t W) with Option 01 . zero rf attenuation.
Attenuator Power Limit - + 30 dBm (1 w) continuous. 75 W
peak lor 1 "s or less pulse width and 0.001 maximum duty
0.5 V ± 5%/division. 1 kll nominal.
Horizontal Out Pen Lift -
0.5 V ± 10%/division. 1 kll nominal.
TTL. 5 V nominal.
PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS FOR
492P SPECTRUM ANALYZER
IF Out - - 15 dBm nominal for full screen. - 30 dBm display:
10 MHz. 50 II.
4041 System ControUer ............................................... $4995
GPIB Control -
4052 Graphic Computing System Controller ............. 59900
IEEE-488 inpuUoutput control for 492P.
4611 Hard Copy Unit ................................................... $4400
factor .
MISCELLANEOUS
Sweep Time sequence.
II
~------~~----~I~I
II
I
tT-"'="'--I
II
I
!!
I
f.-r-~
...... ow
r~:
'Lr-----/
II
I
II
II
20 "s to 5 sldiv (10 sldiv in auto) in 1·2·5
4662 Interactive Digit al Plotter ................................... $4600
4924 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive .............................. 52990
CRT Readout - Reference level. center frequency . frequency
range. vertICal display mode. frequency spanldiv resolution
bandwidth and rf attenuation.
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220V 116A ................. No Charge
CRT -
Option A2 UK 240V 113A ..................................... No Charge
8xl0 cm. P31 Phosphor.
Power - 90 to 132 Vac. 180 to 250 Vac. 48 to 440 Hz. 210 W
max With all options.
Environmental Characteri stics Class 3. Style C.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A3 Au straUan 240V 11OA ......................... No Charge
Option A4 North American 240V/ 15A ................ No Charge
Per MIL·T·28800B Type "' .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Configuration - Por1able. 44 Ib (all optionS). 6.9 x 12.9 x 19.7
in without handle or cover.
I
I
II
4631 Hard Copy Unit ........ ........................................... 55575
OPTtONAL ACCESSORIES
The loIlowing listed accessories are optional to all models and
conhgurations of the 492 system . and may be ordered in any
combination.
General Purpose 12.5 to 40 GHz Waveguide
Mixer Set (not for Option 08)(0 16·0640·00) ................ 5660
1405 TV Sideband Adapter ........................................ 55000
TR 503 Tracking Generator ......................................... 56300
For more Information on the TR 503 see page 132.
High Perlormance 18 to 140 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set (WM 490·2) .............................. 52010
_
.....
._.--.....
High Performance 18 to 60 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set (WM 490·3) .............................. 53260
Microwave Comb Generator (067 ·0885·00) ............... 51800
. . . . . . . . LMr,
TV Trigger Synchronizer (015-0261-00) ...................... 5360
Hard Case (transit) (016·0658·00) ................................ 5625
Soft Cas. (016·0659-00) ............................................... 5125
The 492 or 496 with TR503 Tracking Generator constitutes a
calibrated swept frequency source covering 100kHz to 1.8
GHz .
... __....
---
CR T mask for digital radio application. Ask aboulthe modifl8d
492 op timized for digital fadio measurements.
124
ORDERING INFORMATION
492 Spectrum Analyzer ................... $21 ,300
492P Spectrum Analyzer ................. $27,500
492 to 492P Conversion - Conversion made by your
Tektronix Service Center. For 492's including
Option 08 Order 040· 1038-00 ....................... Request Quote
for 492's not including Option 08
Order 040· 1037·00 ........................................ Request Quote
Polaroid Film Pack C·59AP ......................................... 51165
C·5C Camera .................................................................. 5500
Note: The 492 Spectrum Analyzer is compatible with all TEK·
TRONIX C·50 Series Cameras.
A hmited quantIty of the 491 is stili available. Call your
nearest Spectrum Analyzer Sales Engineer for information .
TEK 490
WAVEGUIDE MIXERS
RACKMOUNT /BENCHMOUNT
SERIES
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
Sensitivity'
Frequency
Amplitude
Range
(dBm)
Response 2
Accuracy'
- 100
± 3 dB
± 6 dB
18-26.5 GHz
26.5-40 GHZ
- 95
± 3 dB
± 6 dB
± 3 dB
± 6 dB
40-60 GHz
- 95
I Equivalent average noise level at 1 kHz bandwidth.
'Maximum amplitude variation across each waveguide mixer band (with peaking control optimized) in response to a - 30 dBm CW
Input signal to the waveguide mixer.
3Maximum reference level error with respect to the internal calibrator. Amplitude accuracy can be Improved 3 dB by measunng
amplitude respenes in each band with respect to a known external waveguide Signal source level.
Typical
Typical '
Frequency
3 dB Compression
Sensitivity'
Frequency
Bm)
Response
Point (Saturation)
- 95
60 GHz
± 3 dB
- 15 dBm 160 GHz
- 85
90 GHz
- 5 dBm
90 GHz
90-140 GHz
- 85
90 GHz
± 3 dB
- 5 dBm
90 GHz
- 75
140 GHz
dBm
140 GHz
'Equivalent average noise level at 1 kHz bandwidth. ' Over any 5 GHz bandwidth.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
Length
Width
Height
Weight
GHz
8.97 cm
2.22 cm
3.68 cm
180 g
(.875 In)
(6.50zl
~3 . 53 in)
&1.45 in)
26.5-40 GHz
.93 cm
1.90 cm
.35 cm
100 g
UG-599/U
(2.73 in)
(.750 in)
(3.70zl
Jl .32 in)
40-60 GHz
4.52 cm
80 g
UG-383/U-M
1.84 cm'
.45 cm'
(1 .78 in)
(2 .90zl
~725 in)'
~980 in)'
60-90 GHz
4.31 cm
40 g
.89 cm'
.29 cm'
UG-387/U
(1 .70 in)
(1 .50z)
~.900 In)'
~350 in)'
.29 cm)1
90-140 GHz
4.31 cm
40 g
UG-387/U-M
.89 cm'
(1.50z)
(1 .70 in)
(.350 inl'
(.900 inl'
'Excludes contribution to dimension due to the diameter of the round waveguide flange .
Overall length contribution of flange is included.
~8.9~eGHZ
I
o
~8-~~~5
490
Series Waveguide Mixers
The 490 Series Tektronix Waveguide Mixers cover
from 18 to 140 GHz with at least - 75 dBm
sensitivity. They are designed specifically for use
with the TEKTRONIX 492 and 7L 18 Spectrum
Analyzers.
The two microwave mixers cover ranges 18 to
26.5 GHz and 26.8 to 40 GHz. They have field
replaceable diodes and frequency response of
± 3 dB when used with the spectrum analyzers
indicated above.
The three millimeter wave mixers cover ranges 40
to 60 GHz (also specified at ± 3 dB frequency
response) , 60 to 90 GHz and 90 to 140 GHz.
The units are all gold plated brass, conforming to
MIL-G-45204 Class 1, Type 1 specifications and
will withstand harsh environments. Each set
comes complete with a container for spare diodes, a 28 inch cable, a 32 page instruction
manual and a wood storage box with foam cutout
storage locations for all five mixers.
u~~59~~u
Typical Frequency Response for
60- 140 GHz Waveguide Mixers.
Typical Frequency Response for
18-60 GHz Waveguide Mixers.
~ JitneI~ lcI"' l
---....
wlltl - JDdeftlI'IF"'PUltornb..., CW
- II
-"
- 31
""---~--+
i
I-:,~,,!:-.-,,=-n=--::,.-=,.;-I ,IIIE.Q (GHal
::~
-H
I
i
~----_____
- )(I
- )4
'-I
"'-
wi", - 10,.".
IOml •.,. CW
=::~
- 35
I
I
1-:_ _;-_-:;_ _;;;-+
=:
-so
,.IIt:a (GMI'I
~;-------~----~- - "
'-',IO--~-...,..:---:'O
, ..:---:'O".:--,.,..,~ FREO 10"-,
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Max cw RF input level: +10
For All Waveguide Mixers dBm (10 mW).
Maximum PULSED RF Input Levet - 1 W peak with 0.001
max duty factor and 1 . s max pulse width.
L.O. Requirement tYPical.
+ 7 dBm min. + 15 dBm max . + 10 dBm
Bias Requirement - - 2.0 to + 0.5 V with respect to the
mIXer body through a current limiting res istor, to provide 0 to
20 mA of bias current.
For the 18 to 60 GHz Waveguide Mixers Sion point (saturation): - 10 dBm (typical).
3 dB compres-
Conversion Loss - 30 dB typical (when used In the proper
spectrum analyzer frequency band).
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering, please use the nomenclature given below :
18 to 26.5 GHz: WM 490 K .......................................... _. $975
26.5 to 40 GHz: WM 490 A .......................... .............. .... $975
40t060
GHz:WM490U ......................................... $1250
60 to 90
GHz: WM 490 E .......................................... $2400
90 to 140 GHz: WM 490 F ......................................... $2600
18 to 40 GHz set (items 1,2): WM 490-2 ................. $2010
18 to 60 GHz set (items 1,3): WM 490-3 ................. $3260
18 to 90 GHz set (items 1,4): WM 490-4 ................. $5660
18 to 140 GHz set (items 1,5): WM 490-5 .... ............ $8260
490
Series Spectrum Analyzers Rackmount/Bench mount Options
The following options denote mechanical configurations of the 4921492P/496/496P. Option 30 is a
rackmount configuration for the 49X with standard front panel input/outputs. Option 31 is a
rackmount configuration with rear panel
inpu t/ output capability . Opt ion 32 is a
benchmount configuration that basically adds
side covers and trim to an Option 30 or 31 transforming it into a stackable bench top
configuration.
The Option 30 and 31 Rackmount is a standard
19 inch rack width and comes with standard
rackmount fittings . A spectrum analyzer accessories storage drawer is also included . Dimensions
are 22.23 x 42.9 x 63.5 cm (8.75 x 16.89 x 25.00
in). Weight is 54 Ib; including the spectrum
analyzer.
The Option 32 Benchmount is approximately the
same size as the Rackmount but is dressed with
side and top panels and carrying handles and
feet. The Benchmount provides a convenient surface for stacking other instruments. Dimensions
are 23.5 x 45.7 x 63.5 cm (9.25 x 17.9 x 25.00 in).
Weight is 57 Ib; including the spectrum analyzer.
See Ordering Information on page 121 and 124.
10 kHz TO 1800 MHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK PLUG-IN
7000
SERIES
I.
Above 100kHz - + 30 dBm to - 110 dBm in 10 dB calibrated steps.
Display Flatness - ± 1.5 dB , with respect to 50 MHz, over
any selected frequency span.
Sensitivity - At 50 MHz, applicable from 100 kHz to 1.8 GHz.
7L14
""'r-...
10kHz to 1800 MHz Frequency
Range
- ID
30 Hz to 3 MHz Resolution
-"
- <0
- 10
"
-'"
- OJ
4: 1 Resolution Bandwidth Shape
Factor
,
1;"
- 10
- OJ
- 0>
70 dB On-Screen Dynamic Range
"
- 1(1)
-'"
Input Limiter Protects Mixer
Up to One Watt Can be Connected to Input for Any Setting of Rf
Input Attenuator
-'ID
-""
-'"
1(1)",
10_
Spurious Responses Residual - < - 100 dBm (referenced to the 1st mixer Input).
Second Order Intermodulatlon Products - 100 kHz - 1.8
GHz ; down 70 dB or more from two - 40 dBm signals, within
any frequency span.
Third Order Intermodulation Products - 100 kHz - 1.8 GHz ;
down 70 dB or more from two - 30 dBm signals. within any
frequency span.
Amplitude Charcteristics Rf Attenuator - Calibrated In 10 dB steps.
Accuracy - ± 0.25 dB or 1.2% of dB reading ; whichever is
Digital Display and Signal Processing (Max Hold, Save A, Split
and Comparison Features, and
Algebraic Addition)
CRT Readout of all
Parameters
It'-..
\
Major
greater.
Swept Frequency Measurements
with TR502
IF GainRange - 70 dB (80 dB when operating in 30 Hz resolution
bandwidth)
Step Accuracy - ± 1 dB per 10 dB step to ± 2 dB max over
entire range .
The 7L 14 Plug-in Spectrum Analyzer spans the
VHF/UHF frequency range with wide dynamic
range and high stability to meet the demands for
proof-of-performance measurements.
Resolution Bandwidth can be varied from 3 MHz
to 30 Hz over the entire frequency range . This
meets the requirements for displaying TV signals,
radar, broadc ast systems , co mmunications
equipment plus any other type of signal in the
frequency range up to 1.8 GHz. Automatic phase
lock ensures ease of use plus the excellent
oscillator stability necessary for demanding signal
measurements. Incidental FM is typically 10 Hz
p-p and the phase noise sidebands are greater
than -70 dBc at 25 resolution bandwidths away.
The 7L 14 featu res digital storage which provides
flicker-free , constant intensity displays regardless
of sweep speed. Automatic overload protection
of the first mixer in the 7L 14 is provided by a builtin limiter. Signals up to one watt can be connected to the input for any setting of the rf input
attenuator. The input is ac-coupled to provide
protection from large amplitude «50 V) line
frequency (50/60 Hz) signals. Frequency coverage down to 1 kHz can be obtained by deleting
the built-in limiter. Talk to your Tektronix Sales
Engineer for details.
126
7L 14 CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the 7L 14
Spectrum Analyzer after a warm up period of 20 minutes.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Center Frequency Range - 10kHz to 1.8 GHz.
Readout Resolution - Within 1 MHz.
Readout Accuracy ± (5 MHz + 20% of frequen c y
span/div).
Frequency Span - 200 Hz/div to 100 MHz/div. In calibrated
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy - Within 5% of the span selected .
Linearity - Within 5% of the span selected.
Max Span - Provides 1.8 GHz of span.
Zero Span - Provides fixed frequency operation for time domain display.
Resolution Bandwidth Range - 30 Hz to 3 MHz, in decade steps.
Accuracy (6 dB down) - Within ± 20% of the resolution
selected.
Shape Factor (60 /6 dB) - 4:1 or less for 3 MHz to 300 Hz ;
12:1 or less for 30 Hz resolution .
Signal Level Change Between Any Two Bandwidths ± 0 .5 dB at room temperature . ± 2 .0 d B max over
temperature.
Residual FM - 13 Hz (p-p) when phaselocked ± 10kHz (p-p)
for 20 ms when not phase locked .
Stability - At a fixed temperature after two hour warm up;
± 2 kHz/hour phaselocked ; ± 75 kHz/hour not phaselocked .
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Display Modes Log 10 dB/div - Provides 70 dB dynamic range.
Accuracy - Within 0.15 dB/dB to 2 dB max over 70 dB dynamic range .
Log 2 dB/div - Provides 14 dB dynamic range.
Accuracy - Within ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to 1.0 dB max over 14 dB
dynamic range.
LIN - Within 10% over 8 divisions. Deviation between display
modes (for full screen signal) ± 2 dB from 2 dB/div to 10 dB/div
0.5 divisions from 2 dB/dlv to LIN .
Reference Level Below 100 kHz - + 30 dBm to - 50 dBm . as the center frequency approaches 10kHz.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Noise Sidebands - - 70 dBc; 25 resolutions away .
Sweep - Triggered manual, external.
Sweep Time - 10 s/div to 1 ~s/div in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy - ± 6% of selected time/div.
Triggering Modes - INT, EXT, EXT in HORIZ/TRIG and
LINE.
Sensitivity - ± 0.5 div of internal Signal (p-p) and/or ± 0.5 V
(p-p) of ext signal.
INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
Rflnput Maximum Input Power Level - +30 dBm.
Maximum Input Power Levef to the Rf Attenuator > 10 dB 1 W average (Including dc). 100 W peak simultaneously.
Input Impedance: 50 11; vswr 1.35 max with 10 dB of rI
attenuation.
External Horizontal/Trigger Input Connector Input Voltage Range - Typically
to 10 V for 10 divl
sweep. Typically 0.5 V (p-p) to trigger the sweep circuits. 40 V
peak max.
OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTORS
CAL OUT - - 30 dBm, ± 0.3 dB at 50 MHz, ± 0.01 %.
1st LO OUT and 2nd LO OUT SWP OUT and Video Output ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The 7L 14 meets Its electrical characteristics over the envlronmental limits per MIL-T-28800 Type III , Class 6, Style E Instruments. The 7L 14 Is operable over the limits of a MIL-T-28800
Class 5 Instrument. The 7L 14 is physically and electrically compatible with all TEKTRONIX 7000 Series Mainframes.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Spectrum Analyzer Gratleule. Clear plastiC implosion shield
with LOG , LIN , REF. and f (frequency) direction markings . 3371439-01 for 7603 Oscilloscope and 337 -1159-02 for other 7000
av
~Ir;~~~ 3~~~8~oifd?':s50Al1m~~x~~~~a~~~~I?;~~~8c~~~~~~~t
6 ft : 012-0113-00; BNe Male to N Female Adapter: 103-005800.-
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer ................ $16,900
7603 Display Mainframe _.............. _..... $2555
7613 Variable Persistence Mainframe $4680
MAINFRAME OPTIONS
Option 06 Internal SA Graticule .............................. Add SSO
Option 08 Protective Front Cover ...................... _.. Add S100
Frequency Range to 2.5 GHz: ask about the 7L14 Mod 139U.
SERIES
TEK 7000
1.5 GHz to 60 GHz
PLUG·IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
7L18
30 Hz Resolution to 12 GHz
Microprocessor-aided
Front Panel Controls
Digital Display and Signal
Processing (Max Hold, Save A,
Split and Comparison Features,
and Algebraic Addition)
Calibrated Reference Level
Includes Internal Preselector
60 GHz with Optional Waveguide
Mixers
Preselected for Freedom from
Spurious Responses
80 dB Display Dynamic Range
..;; 10Hz Residual FM
(Fundamental Mixing)
Fits all 7000 Series Mainframes
including USM-281 C
7L 18 CHARACTERISTICS
FREQUENCY RELATED
Frequency Range -
1.5 GHz to 60 GHz
Tuning Range - With internal mixer: 1.5 GHz to 18 GHz.
With external mixer: 12.5 GHz to 60 GHz.
Frequency Span - Per Division: 20 calibrated span widths
from 200 Hz/div to 500 MHz/div in a 1·2-5 sequence. Max
span: depends on mixing mode. Span widths - N x 2 GHz
where N is the mixing mode. Maximum span full screen is 8.5
GHz with internal mixer (9.5 to 18 GHz band). Zero span : non·
sweeping tunable receiver mode.
Tracking Preselector - Internal and automatic 1.5 to 18
GHz. Rejection of harmonic mixing, image and multiple reo
sponses > 70 dB .
Fre uenc Bond_
With Internal m xer
1.5 GHz to 3.5 GHz
2.5 G Hz to 4.5 GHz
3.5 GHz t o 7.5 GHz
6.5 G Hz to 12.5 GHz
9.5 G Hz to 18.0 GHz
With external m ixer
12.5 GHz 1024.5 GHz
14.5 GHz to 28.5 GHz
16.5 GHz to 32.5 GHz
18.5 G Hz to 36.5 GHz
20.5 GH z to 40.5 GHz
30.5 GHz to 60 GHz
N=
N=
N=
N=
N=
(N
N
N
N
N
N
N
-
m ixing mode
=
6+
= 7+
= 8+
= 9+
= 10+
= 15+
Frequency Accuracy - Dial Accuracy: (5 MHz + 20% of frequency span/div) x N \typically (1 MHz )x N with degauss
activated\ .
Span Accuracy cally 3%).
5% over center 8 horizontal divisions (typl.
Stability - Residual FM stabilized 10 Hz pop x N (typically 2
Hz pop x N).
Frequency Dri" - Long term dri" : (at fixed center frequency
after 2 hr warm up). Stabilized: 2 kHz/hr x N. Unstabiilzed : 50
kHZ/hr x N.
Setability - Within 1 MHz for 1.5 GHz to 18 GHz (after 2 hr
warmup). Within 10 MHz with external mixers (after 2 hr
warmup).
Resolution - Bandwid th range: Selectable 6 dB bandwidths
from 30 Hz to 3 MHz in decade steps plus auto. Shape lactor:
4:1,60 dB to 6 dB points, 300 Hz to 3 MHz, 12:1, 60 dB to 6
dB points, 30 Hz . Bandwidth accuracy: 6 dB points, 20%.
Phase Noise Sidebands - When phase locked, for funda·
mental (N = 1) conversion: - 70 dBc min at frequency offsets
.. 20X resolution bandwidth sellings.
Table 1
Sensitivity and Frequency Response with Internal
Mixers - (Average noise level specified for 300 Hz resolution
bandwidth. Frequency Response with 10 dB input attenuator
setting.)
Average • Frequency Response
Frequency MlxRange
i ng No i se Level
Op ti mum Peaki ng
(GHz)
Mode (dBm Max)
(dB Max)
11.5-3.5
-119
±1.5
2.5-4.5
-11 9
±1 .5
1+
23.5-7.5
-109
±2.0
6.5-12.5
-107
±2.5
3+
59.5-1 8.0
-92
±3.0
'Includes mixer frequency response . RF attenuator frequency
response , internal preselector frequency response, mixing
mode gain variation, RF input vswr.
Table 2
Sensitivity and Frequency Response with External
Mixers - (Average noise level specified for 3 kHz resolution
bandwidth.)
Frequency
Range
(GHz)
Mi x i ng
Mode
Ayerage
Noise Leyel
(dBm Max)
Frequency
Response
(dB Max)
12.5-18,0
**1 8.0--26.5
**26.5-40
** 40--60
6+
7+
10 +
15 +
85
-90
-85
-75
±3
±3
±3
-'High Performance Mixer Une.
AMPLiTUDE RELATED
MEASUREMENT RANGE
Log Reference Level - - 110 dBm to + 40 dBm (+ 30 dBm
max safe input level).
Log Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB.
Linear - 8 divisions with calibrated reference levels.
RF Attenuation Range - 6 steps @ 10 dB/step.
IF Gain Range - 9 steps @ 10 dBl step - 20 dBm to - 110
dBm (with zero RF attenuation) (- 20 dBm is reduced noise
posilion).
Sensitivity and Frequency Response - See tables 1 and 2.
Amplitude Accuracy IF gain variation with different resolution bandwidths (at 25°C).
Log: ± 0.5 dB.
Reference level variation due to band switching: ± 1.0 dB.
Display - Log 10 dB/div: ± 1.0 dBl l0 dB to a max of 2.0 dB.
Log 2 dB/div: ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to a max of 1.0 dB . Unear:
± 10%.
IF Gain: ± 1.0 dBl l 0 dB, ± 2 dB max.
RF Allenualor: ± 0.3 dBl l0 dB to a max of ± 0.7 dB.
Calibrator output : Amplitude - 30 dBm ± 0.5 dB, Irequency
2.0 GHz ± 0.01 %. Absolute Calibralion Accuracy 1.5 to 18
GHz. Overall accuracy Is a funclion of measurement technique
and Includes lhe following parameters: Amplitude calibrator +
band switching error + IF gain switching + RF allenuator
switching + logging error + flatness + digital quantizing error
(If digital storage is used). With appropriate technique, absolute
accuracy of ± 2.5 dB is usually achievable (1 .5 to 18 GHz).
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Input Impedance - 50 {! nominal (1.5 to 18 GHz).
Connector - Type 'N" lemale.
Vswr - '" 1.35 for attenuator settings of .. 10 dB.
Maximum Input Level - 1 watt ( + 30 dBm).
Op ti mum Input Level - '" - 30 dBm with zero RF
attenuation.
Input Compression Point - .. - 28 dBm from 1.5 to 1.8
GHz ... - 18 dBm from 1.8 to 18 GHz (both with zero RF
attenuation.)
L.O. Emission - - 80 dBm, 1.5 to 18 GHz (10 dB input allen·
uator selling).
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual - (No signal present at input) with input altenuation
atOdB, " - 110dBm.
Intermodulatlon Distortion - Third order down 70 dB or more
from any two full screen signals, when IF gain is not set to red
zone (reduced noise position).
Mixed - All harmonic mixing , image and multiple responses
down 70 dBc to 18 GHz.
DIGITAL STORAGE AND SIGNAL PROCESSING
Multiple memory display storage (A & B memory).
Save ·A- .
Digital display averaging.
Max hold .
B minus' Save A '.
Disable for non-storage viewing.
GENERAL
Sweep Characteristics - 1 "s/div to 20 sl div in a 1, 2, 5
sequence plus auto. manual, and external. Accuracy :t 5%.
Triggering Modes - Internal, external, free run , single sweep.
Triggering source line, internal, external. Sensitivity: 1 div internal, 0.5 volt external (50 volts max).
Frequency Range: 15 Hz to 1 MHz.
Video Output - 500 mV ± 5%1div of display.
Pulse Stretcher - Enhances pulsed RF measurements.
Degauss - Improves frequency measurement accuracy.
X, Y Output - Front panel pin jacks .
Uncal Light - Provides indication of uncalibrated display
amplitude.
Peaking - Optimizes sensitivity and frequency response .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 Spectrum Analyzer Graticule 337·1439·01 ; 1 Spectrum Ana·
Iyzer Gratlcule 337·1159·02; 1 50 !! coaxial cable, lOin 012·
0208-00; 1 Adapter, BNG female to N male 103-0045-00: Plug.
in to Mainframe Securing Ki t 016·0637·00.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L 18 Spectrum Analyzer ................ $17,500
'7603 Oscilloscope ..................................................... $2555
R7603 Oscilloscope (Rackmount) .............................. $2955
Option 06 Internal S A Gralicule ............................ Add $50
Oplion 08 Protective Front Cover
(Cabinet Only) ........................................................ Add $ 1 00
'Suggested Mainframe: 7603 Option 08/0ption 06 for maxi·
mum transpor1ability . Has protective front cover (Option 08)
and Spectrum Analyzer Graticule (Option 06). See 7000 Series
pages for oscilloscope specifications and optionS.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
General Purpose Waveguide Mixers
Set 016·0640·00 ............................................................. $660
Mixer 119-0097·01 12.4 to 18 GHz ............................ $145
Mixer 119-0098-01 18 to 26.5 GHz ............................ $180
Mixer 119·0099-01 26.5 to 40 GHz ............................ $220
Cable 012-0748-00 ......................................................... $20
Case 004- 1651-00 .................... ..................................... 535
High Performance Waveguide Mixers
Set WM 490 3 ............................................................... 53260
Mixer WM 490 K 18 to 26.5 GHz ................................. 5975
Mixer WM 490 A 26.5 to 40 GHz ................................. 5975
Mixer WM 490 U 40 to 60 GHz .................................. $ 1250
Cable 012-0649-00 ......................................................... 525
Case 004· 1651 -00 ......................................................... 535
20 Hz to 5 MHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK PLUG-IN
7L5
Three-Knob Operation
Synthesizer Stability for Six-Digit Accuracy
of Center Frequency Setting
Improved Digital Storage and Averaging
Reference Level Selection in 1 dB Steps
Absolute Calibration in dBm, dBV or
Volts /Div
Tracking Generator Option for Swept
Component Measurements
Changeable Input Impedance
Modules to Accommodate any
Impedance Requirement
Wide Dynamic Range and
Nanovolt Sensitivity
Preset Reference Level and Dot Frequency
for Extra Input Protection
CRT Readout of all Major Parameters
B Minus " Save A" Feature
The 7L5 is an audio/baseband spectrum analyzer
plug -in that provides exceptional frequency accuracy and operator convenience through a combination of frequency synthesizer and digital
technology.
The center frequency can be set with six digit
accuracy immediately after turn-on. A built-in
micro-computer decodes control settings, processes frequency span and reference level information and optimizes sweep time and resolution
for the span chosen.
To accommodate a wide variety of user preferences, the 7L5 uses changeable plug-in input
modules providing a variety of input impedances
such as 50, 75, 600, or 1 meg-ohm. The built-in
computer automatically adjusts the calibrator to
provide the correct reference level for the impedance chosen .
7L5 Option 25 Spectrum Analyzer with L3 Plug-in Module in a 7603 Option 06 Mainframe with Internal spectrum analyzer graticule.
Digital storage, in addition to providing clean,
easy-to-interpret displays, also makes such special functions as digital averaging and peak detection possible . The display is stored
electronically and updated during each sweep.
Two complete displays can be held in memory for
comparison. A max hold function stores the maximum signal level over long periods of time to
measure amplitude and frequency drift.
CRT readout displays the center frequency , reference level , resolution bandwidth, dB per division
and frequency span.
The B minus "Save A" feature provides algebraic
subtraction of two traces, so that changes in
multi-signal spectra can be monitored.
Changeable modules permit the 7L5 user to adapt to new
measurement requirements. Modules now available are the
probe compatible L3 and L3-1. The L3 offers selectable internal
50 II, 1 Mil, or 600 II impedance, while the L3- t offers 75
1
Mil or 600 II. The module you select calibrates displays for the
impedance in use.
n,
128
7LS CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics and features apply to the 7L5
Spectrum Analyzer and its options. They are applicable over
the environmental specification criteria for the 7000 Series
Mainframes.
FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS
Range - Input frequency range is 20 Hz through 5.0 MHz.
Dot frequency range is 0 Hz through 4999.75 kHz tuned in 250
Hz steps . Dot accuracy: o· c to 50 ' C ± (20 Hz + 10-' of dot
Irequency): 20' C to 30 ' C ± (5 Hz + 2X 10-6 of dot frequency) .
Orilt -
Frequency drilt is .. 5 Hz/hour.
Residual Incidental Fm - Residual fm is .. 1 Hz (p-p) for
frequency spans of 50 Hz/div to 2 kHZ/div. Residual fm is .;;40
Hz (p-p) for frequency spans of 5 kHz/div to 500 kHz/div.
Resolution Bandwidth - 8 resolution bandwidths range from
30 kHz to 10Hz. COUPLED switch position electronicaily couples resolution to span/div selection so that both are controlled
by the same knob. Bandwidth accuracy @ 6 dB down is within
20% of selected resolution. Shape factor (60:6 dB ratio) is 10:1
or better for 10Hz to 1 kHz and 5: 1 or better from 3 kHz to 30
kHz. Amplitude change between resolution bandwidths is .;; 0.5
dB for 30 kHz to 100 Hz and ..:2.0 dB for 30 kHz to 10Hz.
SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Span - Provides calibrated frequency spans from
50 Hz/div to max (500 kHz/div) within 4% in 1-2-5 sequence.
Horizontal linearity is within 4% over the entire 10 div display.
A O-Hz/div position is provided for time domain operation.
TEK 7000
20 Hz to 5 MHz
PLUG-IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS WITH PLUG·I N I NPUT IMPEDANCE MODULE
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Input Impedance Input Power -
Max input po wer for reference ieveis:
above a dBm
below a dBm
AMPLITUDE CHARACTERISTICS
R•• ldual Reopon •• - Internally generated
signals (relerred to Input).
L3·1
50 n, 600 n
1 MO/28 pF
750,600 (I
1 MO/28 pF
+21 dBm
+21dBm
100 V (peak AC + DC) @ 1 MO input z
spurious
Sensitivity - Equivalent input noise lor each resolution
bandwidth setting Is measured in VIDEO AVERAGE
mode with 10 sId Iv sweep rate and INPUT BUFFER
control oil. Equivalent input noise lor resolution band·
width 01 :
10 Hz
30 Hz
100 Hz
300 Hz
1 kHz
3 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
Sensitivity is further degraded 8 dB with INPUT BUF·
FER on . Noise level increases approx 10 dB operating
in VIDEO PEAK mode .
Intermodulatlon DI.tortl on
Within
any Irequency
span, intermodulation products lor two, on screen,
signals
of any Input level :
3rd order products
2nd order products
01 any input level up to
2nd and 3rd order
-53 dBV/-40 dBm (500) :
products
01 any Input level with
2nd and 3rd order
INPUT BUFFE R on :
products
-143 dBV or less
-!~~ ~~~...'~~i;~librator
On· screen Dynam ic Range Relerence Level " '
I n LOG mode, relerence level
refe rs to top horizontal graticule line . Calibrated In dB
steps .
Range LOG 10 dB/div mode
LOG 2 dB/div mode
LIN mode
When calibrated @ -40 dBV in LOG mode.
1 MO
"(equal to or better than)
-148 dBV
-1 46 dBV
-143 dBV
-138 dBV
-133 dBV
-128 dBV
-123 dBV
-118 dBV
Sweep rate accuracy
IS
within 5% of the rate selected.
Triggering - Provides two triggering sources. INT (internal)
and LINE . in addition to a FREE-RUN position.
at least 75 dB down
at least 72 dB down
at least 80 dB down
at least 80 dB down
0.5 dB max
(25 Hz to 5 MHz)
0.75 dB max
(20 Hz to 5 MHz)
(Add 0.5% quantization
error in dig ital storage)
80 dB (lull 8 div)
1 dB and 10 dB steps
-83 dBV to + 8
- 70 dBm to +21
dBV (1 MO)
dBm (50 Il)
-141 dBV to +8
-128 dBm to +21
dBV (1 Mil)
dBm (50 Il)
20 nV/dlv to 200 mV/div in a
1·2·5 sequence
Within 0.2 dB/dB , to max 010.25 dB/l0 dB change in
relerence level
Hori z Out - A front-panel pon jack connector supplies horizontal output Signal (negative-going sawtooth that varies from
about a to about - 6 V de with a source impedance of 5 kl1).
Calibrator - Front-panel BNC connector supplies a calibrated
500 kHz squarewave output signal (derived from the analyzer's
time base). Output amplitude is within ± 0.15 dB of - 40 dBV
into the plug-in impedance.
When INT is selected. ac coupled signal components from the
mainframe trigger source (left or right vertical amplifiers) are
used.
When LINE IS selected. ac coupled sample of mainframe ac line
voltage is used.
Three trIggerIng modes are NORM (normal). SGL
SWP/READY (Single sweep). and MNL SWEEP (manual
sweep).
Trogger level IS 1.0 div of internal signal for both NORM and
SGL SWP modes over the approximate frequency range of 30
Hz to 500 kHz.
OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Video Out - Front-panel pin jack connector supplies the video
(vertical) output signal at an amplitude of 50 mV/div ± 5%
(about the CRT vertical center) with source impedance of 1 kl1.
(Analog signal prior to digitization for storage).
Flatness 50 II and 75 II: Within 0.5 dB pop.
50 II and 75 II: Within 1.0 dB pop.
600 II: Within 1.25 dB pop.
Dynamic Range (7L5 with Option 25) -
.. 110 dB.
Residual FM (p-p) Spans to 2 kHz/div : 2 Hz (7l5 with Option 25).
Spans 5 kHz/div or greater: 40 Hz (7l5 with Option 25).
Stability - 25 Hz/5 minutes after 10 minute warm-up decreasing to 25 Hz/hr max after 1 hr.
Spurious Suppression, 10Hz to 5.0 MHz (harmoniC
and non-harmonic) - 40 dB or more With respect to the
carner.
<
Sweep Rate - Time per div is selectable from 10 s/div to 0.1
ms/dlv In 1-2-5 sequence. An AUTO position permits automahc
selectIOn of ophmum hme/div depending on resolution and
span/dlv sellings.
Attenuator Range: 0 to 63 dB in 10 dB or 1 dB steps.
Accuracy: Within 0.2 dB/dB to a max of 0.25 dB/l0 dB
absolute.
Total System Flatness (7L5 With OptIOn 25)
50 0
"(equal to or better than)
-135 dBm
- 133 dBm
-130 dBm
-125 dBm
-120 dBm
-115 dBm
-110 dBm
-105 d Bm
Display Dynamic Range Accuracy 0.05 dB per dB to 2 dB max for 80 dB full screen .
LOG 10 dB/div mode
0.1 dB per d B to 1 dB max lor 16 dB lull screen
LOG 2 dB/div mode
LI N mode
±5%
" Note: dBm = dBV -10 Log Z + 30 where Z = Impedance
Example : dB V = [dBm (600 Il - 2.22]
""Note : A
sign is displayed by the reference level readout when the reference level is not calibrated and the
UNCAL light is on. A
sign is displayed when the relerence variable is out of Its detent.
>
Accuracy - (Max Output calibrated at 500 kHz)
50 II. 0 dBm ± 0.25 dB
75 II. - 6 dBm + 0.4, - 0.2 dB
600 II - 17 dBm + 0.5. - 0.1 dB
600 II: Within 1.0 dB pop.
Di splay Flatnes. - Peak·to·peak d isplay variation over
any Irequency span.
Accuracy -
L3
OPTION 25 TRACKING GENERATOR
CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range -
20 Hz to 5.0 MHz.
Output Impedance panel switCh.
50!!. 75 !!, or 600 II selected by a front
Amplitude - The output level is calibrated in dBm or dBV and
selectable In 10 dB or 1 dB steps. A vernier provides continuous vanatlon between calibrated steps.
Range 50 II. a dBm to - 63 dBm
7511. - 6dBmto - 69dBm
600 II - 17 dBm to - 80 dBm
Aux iliary Output -
., 200 mV RMS into 50 II.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L5 Spectrum Analyzer ._.............. _..... $9100
(Spectrum Analyzer requires L Plug-in Module.)
Option 25 with Tracking Generator .................... Add $ 1450
For a separate tracking generator. (One-wide field modification
to be attached to an existing 7l5) Order 040-0810-00 $1500
Included Acce ssories - Graticule. Spectrum Analyzer 3371159-00 (7000 Series). and 337-1439-01 (7603). Filter. light
blue 378-0684·00.
L3 Plug-in Module (1 MO, 50 0, 600 0) $1500
Option 0 1 (1 Mil, 75 Il, 600 Il) ............................ No Charge
t7603 Oscilloscope ..................................................... $2555
tR7603 OSCilloscope (Rack mount) ............................ $2955
Option 06 Internal S A Graticule ............................ Add $50
Option 08 Protective Front Cover (Cabinet
Only) .................................................. ...................... Add $ 100
t 7704A Oscilloscope ................................................... $3995
tR7704 Oscilloscope ................................................... $6665
tSuggested Mainframe. See 7000 Series pages for oscillo·
scope specifications and options.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Tracking Generator, one· wide field modification kit, to
be attached to an existing 7L5 040-0810·00 ............ $ 1500
2701 50 Il Step Attenuator ........................................... $575
2703 75 Il Step Attenuator ............................................ $600
75 Il to 50 Il Min loss Attenuator (Ac Coupled)
011-0112·00 .................................................................... $60
P6105 lOX Probe, (2m) 010-6105·03 ............................ $95
BALANCED INPUT TRANSFORMER
Frequency Range 20 MHz.
50 kHz to 3 MHz, usable from 10kHz to
Flatness - 0.25 dB pop maximum (50 kHz to 3 MHz) including
nominal 0.1 dB insertion loss.
Common·Mode Rejection MHz).
25 dB minimum (50 kHz to 3
Output Termination - Switchable between 124 11. 135 n. and
NONE for bridging or external termination.
Connectors - WECO (0.37 in with 0.090 center) on 0.625 in
spacing for balanced input. BNC for single-endecl output.
Balanced Input Transformer 013-0182-00 ................... $270
Limited quantities in the II and l2 are still available. Call
your nearest Spectrum Analyzer Sales Engineer for
information.
1~Q
100 kHz to 1800 MHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK PLUG-IN
7000
SERIES
7L12
100 kHz to 1800 MHz in One Display
Fully Calibrated Displays
300 Hz to 3 MHz Resolution
4:1 Resolution Bandwidth Shape Factor
70 dB On· screen Dynamic Range
1M Distortion 70 dB below Full Screen
Spurious Free Operation
Automatic Phase Lock
- 1 15 dBm Sensitivity
The 7L12 Spectrum Analyzer is a modern, highperformance, swept front-end type of analyzer
covering the frequency range up to 1.8 GHz. The
unit employs phase lock stability and an ample
selection of resolution bandwidths in an economical field or laboratory instrument.
The unit has a 3 MHz resolution mode for accurate measurement of pulse phenomena; the zerospan mode may be used to present a demodulated display of a signal for time domain
measurements. A 4: 1 resolution bandwidth shape
filter introduced by Tektronix permits close-in
measurements not possible with conventional filters. Noise measurements are also easily made
due to the high sensitivity, video filters , and
equivalent resolution and noise power bandwidth
of the instrument.
The 7L 12 fills two holes in any 3- or 4-hole 7000
Series Mainframe and features a complete time
base so that other oscilloscope or time domain
plug-ins may be used simultaneously. As with all
7000 Series Plug-ins, CRT READOUT will display
the major parameters. For the 7L 12, these include; reference level, dB/div, frequency span
and resolution .
7L 12 CHARACTERISTICS
FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS
7L 12 With 016-0155-00 Blank Panel in 7613 Option 06 Variable Persistence Mainframe with inlemal spectrum analyzer graticule.
Range - 100 kHz to 1.8 GHz . (Usable below 100 kHz with
degraded performance.)
Spurious Responses Residual - (No signal present at input) with input attenuation
at 0 dB . - - 100 dBm .
Resolution Bandwidth - Resolution bandwidth selections
from 300 Hz to 3 MHz . Shape factor 60 dB to 6 dB is 4: I or
better.
from two - 30 dBm Signals within any frequency span. Second
Stabitity - Within 50 kHz, after 2 hour warm-up. over a one
hour period at a fixed temperature when phase locked. Wilhin
100 kHz. when not phase locked. over a I hr period. at a fixed
temperature.
Incidental Fm - 200 Hz (p-p) max when phase locked. 20 kHz
(p-p) when not phase locked.
AMPLITUDE CHARACTERfSTICS
Reference Level Range - Calibrated levels in decade steps
from - 100 dBm to + 30 dBm. within ± 2 dB.
Log 10 dB/div:
70 dB dynamic range. Accuracy ± 0.1 dB/dB to a max of 1.5
dB .
Log 2 dB/div:
14 dB dynamic range. Accuracy ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to a max of 1.0
dB.
linear:
-
Provides a linear display. within 10%.
Cw Sensitivity - (Signal + noise - twice noise in UN mode).
- 115 dBm al300 Hz. - 108 dBm at 3 kHz . - 100 dBm at 30
kHz . - 90 dBm at 0.3 MHz. - 80 dBm at 3 MHz. Sensitivity
may decrease 2 dB at 1.7 GHz and 4 dB at 1.8 GHz.
Flatness -
± 1.5 dB over any frequency span.
Intermodulation Distortion -
order down 70 dB or more from two - 40 dBm signals.
Mixed - All image. harmonic related. and out-af-band mixing
responses are '" 70 dB down from a level of - 30 dBm to the
input mixer (0 dB input attenuation).
Dynamic Range - 70 dB. The VARIABLE control provides
gain adjustment between any two 10 dB steps.
Impedance -
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
50 Il. nominal.
SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Span - 500 Hzl div to 100 MHz/div. A MAX SPAN
position provides ~ 1.8 GHz (180 MHz/div of span). and a 0
position provides fixed frequency operation for time domain
display.
Sweep Modes and Rate - 10 ms/div to I .s/div.
Triggering - Trigger signal source can be external. intemal.
or line voltage.
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Calibrator - 50 MHz comb. - 30 dBm at 50 II.
Vert Oul - ~ 2 V full screen.
Horiz In - For use with chan recorder.
lsI LO - For use with tracking generator or 1405 Sideband
Adapter.
2nd LO -
130
Third order down 70 dB or more
For use with tracking generator.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Spectrum Analyzer Graticule. Clear plastiC implosion shield
WIth LOG . UN . REF. and f (frequency) direction markings 3371439-01 for 7403N and 7603 Oscilloscopes and 337-1159-02
for other 7000 Series Oscilloscopes. Amber Light Filter: 3780684 -01 , Light Filter: 378-0625-07; SO Il. Coaxial Cable, with
BNC connectors, 6 foot: 012-0113-00; BNC Male to N Female
Adapter: 103-0058-00,
ORDERING INFORMATION
7L 12 Spectrum Analyzer ..•... _....... _.... $9350
7603 Mainframe .................................. $2555
Option 06 Internal SA Graticule .............................. Add $50
Option 08 Protective Fronl Cover .... _........... _....... , Add $100
Option 77 P7 Phosphor and Internal
S A Graticule ............................................. ,... _.......... Add $35
7613 Variable Persistence
Mainframe ........................................... $4680
Option 06 Internal S A Graticule ..........................., Add $50
Option 08 Protective Front Cover ........................ , Add $100
7K 11 CATV Preamplifier .................... $1000
Extended Frequency Range to 2.5 GHz. Ask about the modified 7112 ,
TEK 5000
20 Hz to 100 kHz
PLUG-IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SERIES
Di.play Dynamic Range -
80 dB (8 dlv).
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
5L4N
Selactable Impedance gle-ended or difterentlal).
20 Hz to 100 kHz
Dilterential Input Characteristics - Full screen limit Is '" 300
mV to 400 mV. Common-mode relection ratio IS 70 dB or more.
Selectable Impedance
Single-Ended Input Characteristics - Max signal Input for
linear operation: - 10 dBm/dBV or 0.316 V RMS.
Calibrated Appropriate to
Impedance Selected
SWEEP CHARACTERISTtCS
Linear Frequency Span quence. 4% accuracy.
Single-Ended Input
20 Hz/dlv to 10 kHz/div. 1-2-5 se-
Log Frequency Span - 100Hz to 100kHz internally reprogrammable from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Differential (Balanced) Input
Zero Frequency Span - Analyzer operates as a tixed tuned
recetver for tlme-domain displays.
On Screen Dynamic Range
80 dB (Full 8 div)
Intermod
t MIl/47 pF or 600 II or 50 II (sin.
Internal Sweep Sources - Time base 1 s/div to 1 ms/div
(Increased up to Xl 0 with multiplier).
> 70 dB Down
Triggering - Internal at least 0.1 div. External at least 250
mY. Slope and level selection are provided . Auto Trigger provtdes a sweep baseline when a tngger signal IS absent. Single
sweep provided.
Resolution Bandwidth 10Hz
to 3 kHz
Manual Sweep -
Auto Resolution
ProVided .
Elternal Sweep - Requires 0 V to 500 mV ± 50 mY ; from a 1
kll or less source to sweep the full span.
Built-in Tracking Generator
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
20 Hz to 20 kHz Log Sweep·
Track ing Generator - 600 II source. Calibrated output level is
- 40 dBV '±'0.2 dB (10 mY) open CirCUit . or - 46 dBV when
terminated Into 600 11. Output level can be varied from ", 0.001
V to 0 .1 V open Circuit.
5 kHz Freq Comb - 600!1 source of 5 kHz ± 0.005% markers
for span calibration.
5L4N Spectrum Analyzer with 016-0452-00
Blank Plug-in Panel In a 5111 Storage
Oscilloscope.
Video Out - ProVides 250 mV ± 5% of Video signal per diSplay div (0 V to 2 V) . Source impedance is about 1.0 kll.
Elt In/Out - ProVides 500 mV :t 25 mY. per d,v of span lrom
to 5 V . when uSing Internal or manual sweep.
o
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
The 5L4N is a 20 Hz to 100 kHz spectrum
analyzer that offers both high performance and
economy. The analyzer features selectable input
impedances, 80 dB of dynamic range and a builtin tracking generator.
This spectrum analyzer is especially suited for
noise and distortion studies in the audio range
and comes equipped for 20 Hz to 20 kHz log
sweeps.
Many educators prefer this economical analyzer
to teach frequency-related theory and demonstrate practical application in the areas of
speech, sound, music, vibration, audio, broadcasting and many others.
5L4N Spectrum Analyzers can be used with any
5100 Series Mainframe. Only two compartments
are occupied by the anaylzer so that, with the
addition of a vertical plug-in , basic oscilloscope
functions may be obtained. We recommend the
use of a 5111 Storage Oscilloscope for maximum
utilization of the analyzer.
'100 Hz to 100 kHz also available.
mode the resolution bandWidth changes with frequency giving
an eHect Similar to octave bandwidth sweeps.
Stability - Within 30 Hz over a 10 min period. at a fixed ambient temperature.
Incidental Fm -
2 Hz (p-p) or less.
013-0156-00 Adapter. Floating BNC to Dua! BNC . t 75-1 t 7800 BNC to Pin Jack Adapter Cable. 331-0429-00 Log Grallcule
(20 Hz-20 kHz).
ORDERING INFORMATION
5l4N Spectrum Analyzer ................... $4720
AMPLITUDE CHARACTERISTICS
Reterence Level Range Log 10 dB/dlv:
from -10 dBm/dBV to - 70 dBm/dBV. within 0.4 dBltO db to
max of 1 dB at - 70 dBm/dBV .
Log 2 dB/d,v :
from - 10 dBmfdBV to -130 dBmfdBV within 0.4 dBIt 0 dB 10
max of 1 dB at - 70 dBm/dBV and 3 dB at - 130 dBmfdBV.
Linear:
from 50 mV/d,v to 20 nV/d,v Within 5% decade.
Cw Sensitivity (Signal Level + Noise = 2X NOise) - The
follOWing characteristICs are applICable With the input internally
terminated . or With a 600 II or less source Impedance.
We recommend that the Plug-In 5L4N be ordered With a storage mainframe.
5111 Storage Oscilloscope
(Cabinet) .............................................. $2100
Option 02 Protective Front Cover ........................... Add $25
R5111 Storage OSCilloscope
(Rack mount) ........................................ $2150
OPTIONAL PLUG -INS FOR TIME DOMAIN USE
5A 15N Single Trace Amplifier ...................................... $300
5B 1ON Time Base Amplifier ......................................... $460
Re.olutlon Bandwidth
DI.play Moda
3 kHz
10 Hz
-1 47 dBV
dBV
-123 dBV
dBm 50!l
-110d Bm
-134 dBm
dBm 600 fl
-121 dBm
-1 45 dBm
LINEAR
680 nV
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
010-0160-00 lOX Probe P6006 (6 ft .) ............................ $80
016 -0452 -00 Blank Plug-in Panel ................................... $ 15
2701 Step Attenuator (50 0 ) ......................................... $575
45 nV
FREQUENCY CHARACTERISTICS
Range - 20 Hz to 100 kHz . Accuracy ± 3 kHz (fine tune control midrange and span/div calibrated for 10kHz).
Resolution Bandwidth - The resolution bandWidth IS continuously variable from 3 kHz to 10Hz. An AUTO mode provides
the best resolullon for the frequency scan and sweep rate selected . Signal level change over lhe resolution bandwidth range
IS 2 dB or less. line frequency modulation of 50 Hz or more can
be resolved up to 70 dB below the signal level. In the log sweep
Flatness (20 Hz- loo kHz) - Flatness remains within ± 0.2
dB. over any selected trequency span. with respect to the level
of - 40 dBV signal at 5 kHz. Intermodulation Distortion-with
two signals. within any frequency span. that are less than or
equal to the reference level :
- 10 dBm/dBV
.. 70 dB down
- 2OdBmfdBv
.. 75 dB down
Internal Spurious Signals - Equal to or < - 130 dBm/dBV
referred to the input. Une related spurii < - 120 dBm/dBV.
600 0 Attenuator, 51 dB in 1 dB steps
011 -0093-00 ................................................................... $295
1~1
100 kHz to 1800 MHz
GENERATORS
TEK TRACKING
For swept frequency tests and precise frequency measurements, the TR 502 Tracking
Generator may be used with a DC SaBA Option 07 Digital Counter, in a TM 503 Option 07
Power Module, with a 7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer in 7603 Option 06 Mainframe.
TR 503 Tracking Generating used with a DC SaBA DptlOll 01 DigItal Counter. in a TM 503
Power Module, with a 492 Spectrum Analyzer.
TR 502/TR 503
TR 502 Has Automatic Counter Dot Marker
When Used with DC 508A Option 07 and
The tracking generators are two-wide units compatible with the TM 500 Modular Instrument
Series.
7L14
The TR 502 works with the 7L 12 and 7L14 and the
TR 503 works with the 492/492P/or 496/496P
Spectrum Analyzers to provide constant level,
calibrated rf sources for swept frequency tests to
1800 MHz.
When used as a cw source, with the analyzer in a
manual mode , these systems have excellent stability . This stability enhances the narrow
bandwidth measurement capability of the
analyzer/ tracking generator combination.
The TR 502ITR 503 AUX RF OUTPUT may be
used to drive a frequency counter. Frequencies
up to 1800 MHz may be measured accurately in
the presence of high level adjacent signals to the
sensitivity limits of the analyzer.
The tracking generator sweep rates are controlled with the spectrum analyzer, and the output
level is controlled from the tracking generator.
The output frequency of the tracking generator is
the same as the frequency of the analyzer at any
instant of the sweep.
OUTPUT CONNECTORS
RI Out -
CHARACTERISTICS
TR503/492/492P
496/ 496P
TR50217L14
TR502j7L 12
Freq, Range
100 kHz -1 .8 GHz
100 kHz -1.8 GHz
100 kHz -1 .8 GHz
Output Level
(Max) 0 d Bm ±0.5 dB
o dBm
Range
o to
-59 dB In 10 d B
and 1 dB steps
0 10 -59 dB In 10 dB
and 1 dB steps
o dBm ±0.5 dB
o to -59 d B In
Flatne ••
Within ±2.25 dB Max
fro m 100 kHz to 1.8 GHz
(Typically ± 1.5 d B)
Within ±2 d B max
from 100 kHz to 1.8 GHz
(Typically ± 1.5 d B)
Within ±3.0 dB max
from 100 kHz to 1.8 GHz
(Typically ±2.0 dB)
Dynamic Range
:::: 110 d B
:::: 110 d B
:::: 100 dB
Residual FM
50 Hz pop
10 Hz POp
200 Hz Pop
Output
Impedance
500 Nomi nal , VSWR 2: 1
or less to 1.8 G Hz
50 n nom inal, VS WR 2:1
or less to 1.8 GHz
50!l nominal, VSW R 2:1
o r less to 1.8 GHz
Auxiliary
Output
0.1 V RMS Into 50
Load
0.1 V RMS In to 50!l
Load
0.1 V RM S Into 50
Load
Spurlou.
Output
Harmon Ie 20 d Bc
Non Harmonic 40 dBc
Harmo nic 20 d Bc
Non Harmonic 40 dBc
Harmonic 20 d Bc
Non Harmonic 40 dBc
n
±0.5 d B
10 d B and 1 d B steps
50 fl nominal impedance, vswr 2: 1 or less.
Au. RI Out - For use with frequency counter.
Included acc essories TR 502 - Two 50 !! coaxial cables
(012-0649-00), logiC interlace cable, (012-0648-00), adapter N
male to BNC female (103-0045-00). Adapter 3mm male to BNC
lemale (015-101B-00). retainer plug-In (343-0604-00).
Included accessories TR 503 - Two 50 f! coaxial cables,
2B.5 in. (012-0649-00). Adapter, N male to BNC female (1030045-00), Retainer Plug-in 343-0604-01 .
ORDERING INFORMATION
TR 502 Tracking Generator _____ __ ......... $6300
Suggestsd Complementary Items
n
TM 503 Opllon 07 Power Module ................................. $310
DC SOB A Option 07 Digital Counter ............................ $1825
Blank Panel 016-0 195-03 ................................................ $2 1
10 dB, 3 mm attenuator 307·0553·00
(used in the 2nd LO input line to improve
TR 50217L 12 Isolation) ...................................................... $30
TR 503 Tracking Generator ................ $6300
Suggested Complementary Items
TM 503 Power Module ................................................... $265
DC 508A Option 01 Digital Counter ................... Add $1775
Blank Panel 016·0195·03 ................................................ $21
132
TEK
TV SIDEBAND ADAPTER
CATV PREAMPLIFIER AND ATTENUATORS
....
~~~l.
140SI lL 12 TV Sideband Analyzer SySlem,
1405
TV Sideband Adapter
Response of Transmitter Under Test Within
± 0.2 dB
Frequency Response of Rf and If Circuits for
Transmitters with Frequency to 1 GHz
Video Circuits Can Be Swept
For In-service Testing. Use of External
Blanking Allows Either Full-field or Singleline Operation
Check Aural Fm Deviation with Built-in Bessel Null Technique
Flexible Marker System Will Accept Standard Crystals
To analyze the sideband response of a television
transmitter, the 1405 Sideband Adapter is used
with a spectrum analyzer, such as the 7L 12 or
7L 14, The 1405 generates a composite video
Signal, the "picture " portion of which is a constant'amplitude sinusoidal signal that sweeps ISO-IS MHz , This signal is applied as modulation to
a television transmitter; the output is then displayed on the spectrum analyzer, and appears as
the response curve of the transmitter under test.
The 1405/Spectrum Analyzer combination will dis·
play the frequency response characteristics of rf
and if circuits for transmitters with frequencies to
1 GHz, Video circuits (zero frequency offset) can
also be analyzed,
Complete specifications and prices are available
in the Television Products Catalog ,
ORDERING INFORMATION
1405 TV Sideband Adapter
525/60 Markers) ............•..•...••..••.•..•.... $5000
Option 01 TV Sideband
Adapter (625 /50 Markers) ..................................... Add $200
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Rackmount-conversion kit for mounting 1405 or 1405
Option Ol in std. 19 In rack 016-0489-00 ."................. $285
2701, 2703
Step Attenuators
The 2701 and 2703 Step Attenuators are laboratory quality, bench top instruments for attenuation
of large value radio frequency signals, The 2701
50 !! Attenuator is particularly useful in making
receiver sensitivity and distortion measurements,
The range of attenuation is 0 to 79 dB, selected in
1 dB steps with tens and units cam switches, A
front-panel switch selects DC, AC, or DC TERM (a
50 !! precision termination) ,
The 2703 75 n Step Attenuator is tailored for television , CATV, telephone and radio applications, A
front panel switch extends the range to 109 dB,
making the attenuator an ideal accessory for
wide-range measurements such as cross modulation, signal -to-noise and receiver sensitivity, A dc
block has been incorporated for both rear-panel
ports to protect the attenuator against accidental
burnout from high dc offsets or ac power on center conductors,
The board assemblies and thick-film hybrid attenuation chips used in both instruments are
mounted in a sturdy metal housing; solid top and
bottom plates provide excellent mechanical and
electrical stability, The two cam switches which
select individual chips operate through gold-plated switch contacts, Held on a four-layer circuit
board with spring clips, the chip substrates can
be replaced easily in the field ,
The attenuators may be used for frequencies up
to 2 GHz, with slight degradation of the attenuation accuracy and vswr characteristics specified
at 1 GHz,
7K 11
CATV Preamplifier
This plug-in preamplifier is designed for spectrum
analyzer applications where extra sensitivity is required , This amplifier is tailored to the CATV and
field intenSity measurement markets, providing a
75 n input impedance and calibration in dBmV,
The low noise figure makes the preamplifier wellsuited for signal-to-noise and low-level radiation
measurements,
CHARACTERISTICS
(with 7L 12 and 7L 14)
Frequency Range -
30 MHz to 890 MHz,
Display Flatness - ± 1,0 dB , with respect to the level at 50
MHz over the Irequency range of 50 MHz to 300 MHz : ,ncreas,n9 to + 2,0 dB , - 2,5 dB over the full Irequency range,
Sensitivity - Signal + noise - 2X noise. ,n LIN mode at 50
MHz , 90 dBmV at 30 Hz, - 80 dBmV at 300 Hz, - 73 dBmV
at 3 kHz , - 65 dBmV at 30 kHz , - 55 dBmV at 300 kHz , - 45
dBmV at 3 MHz, Noise figure is no > 5 dB,
Intermodulation Distortion (with 7L 12 or 7L 14) -
Imd pre-
ducts and harmonics from two signals within the frequency
range are 70 dB or more down lrom the reference level for:
third order Intermodulatlon With two signals at the reference
level (full screen),
Relerence Level - Calibrated level in 1 dB steps from + 79
dBmV to 0 dBmV, Accuracy's referenced to the + 30 dBmV
calibrator at 50 MHz ,
Input Impedance -
75 \I,
Calibrator - 50 MHz ± 0,01 % w,'h an absolute amplitude level of • 30 dBmV ± 0,3 dB, from 75 \I,
Accessories - BNC 10 BNC 50 !1 Cable, 5,5,n : 012-0057-01 :
BNC to F Adapler: 013-0126-00 : BNC to BNC 75 \I Cable, 42
,n : 012-0074-00,
Order 7K 11 CATV Preamplifier ....... .. $1000
ORDERING INFORMATION
2701 50 {} Step Attenuator .......... .......• $575
2703 75 {} Step Attenuator ...•...•......•...• $600
A hm.ted quant,ty 01 the SW 503 OptIon 01 is stlfl avaIlable,
Call your nea rest Spectrum Analyzer Sales Engmeer for
in formation.
STEP ATTENUATOR CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICS
2701
Attenuation
o to
Impedance
Frequency
Max Average
Input Powe r
Si gnal Coupling
50 !l nominal
Dc to 1 GHz
1,5 W to 65° C ,
Size
Connector
79 dB in 1 d B steps
Dc , ae , and de terminated
at one port only
7,5 in Ig x 4,5 in w x 2,5 in h
Type BNC Female 50 f!
·Blocklng cap.clfors may be removed l or spec ialized applications ,
2703
o to
109 dB in 1 dB steps
(Including extra 30 dB range)
75 !l nominal
3 kHz to 1 GHz·
1,5 W to 65° C
Ac only both PO RTS·
7,5 in Ig x 4,5 In w x 2,5 in h
Type BNC Female 75 !l
ANALYZER
ACCESSORIES
TEK SPECTRUM
PADS AND ADAPTERS
75 11 to 50 11 Minimum loss Attenuator with de block.
5.7 dB loss 011 -0112-00 ................................................. 560
75 11 to 50 11 Matching Attenuator with 11 .25 dB conversion
lactor from dBm to dBmV with de block
011 -0118-00 .................................................................... 560
Fixed 10 dB attenuator with 3 mm fittings for use with
TR 502 with 7112 307 -0553-00 ....................................... 530
Dc Block BNC to BNC max de potential 50 volts
015-0221 -00 ..................................................................... 585
- ..
-a
" F" Female to BNC Male Adapter 013-0126-00 ........... 515
PROBES
BNC Female to " F" Male 1 03-0158-00 ....................... 58.50
Calibrator Jumper 50 11 BNC to BNC 5.5 in
012-0214-00 ..................................................................... 535
A variety of probes Is available In varying frequency and impedance ranges that can be used with the 7L12. 7L 14. 492 and
496 Spectrum Analyzers:
Jumper Cable BNC to BNC 50 Il 42 in
012-0057-01 ..................................................................... 517
FET Probe P6202A to 500 MHz 010-6202-03 .............. $530
Jumper Cable BNC to BNC 75 Il. 42 in
012-0074-00 ..............................•...................................... 517
" N" Female to BNC Male 103-0058 -00 ....................... $7.00
PROTECTIVE VINYL COVERS
For extra protection in field environments. soft vinyl covers are
available to fit over the entire cabinet model mainframe or
instruments.
7000 Series 3 Hole Mainlrame Cover
016-0192-01 ..................................................................... $20
7000 Series 4 Hole Mainlrame Cover
o 16-0531 -00 ..................................................................... $20
5000 Series Mainlrame Cover 016-0544-00 .................. $25
RIGID FRONT COVERS
Solid snap on or Iriction fit covers are available to protect the
instruments In transit or field use.
FET Probe P6201 to 900 MHz 010-6201 -01 ................ $990
Convenlional Probe P6056 Dc to 3.5 GHz 6 It.
010-6056-03 ................................................................... $ 140
Conventional Probe P6057 Dc to 1.4 GHz
with Adapter 010-6057-03 .............................................. $145
Currenl Probe P6022 to 150 MHz 015-0135-00 •......... $325
Complete specifications are available in the probes and accessories sectk>n.
CAMERAS
A camera can greatly enhance the versatility of a speclrum
analyzer. Many different units are available. However. the most
popular units lor the 5000. 7000 and 490 Series Spectrum
Analyzers are:
Polaroid Film Pack C·59AP ......................................... $ 1165
C·5C Camera .................................................................. $500
Complete specifications on all cameras are available in the
See appropriate spectrum analyzer and mainframe ordering in·
lormation regarding the Option 08 Protective Front Cover lor
7603 and 7613. or the Option 02 Protective Front Cover lor
5100 Series Mainlrames.
In addition, our staff of specialists stands ready to
help you solve any special measurement problems. Contact your local Tektronix Sales Office or
representative .
Protective Front Cover lor existing 7603 or 7613
Mainframes:
Blue, 040-0835-00 .......................................................... $ 130
Gray, 040-0628-00 .......................................................... $ 135
GRATICULES, FILTERS
Pla.tlc Implosion Shield and S A Gratlcule 7613 and
7623 Mainframes 378 -0625 -07 ...•..................•.......••....•. $8.25
Pla.tie Implosion Shieid and S A Gralieule 7403 and
7603 M ainframes 337·1439-01 ..................................... $8.00
Pla.lle Implosion Shield and S A Gralleule
All other 7000 Series Mainframes 337 - 1159-02 ........... $6.50
(Internal graticules are available with most 7000 Series
Mainlrames)
Emc Melal Screen Mesh Filler for 7500. 7700 Series
Instruments 378-0603-00 .................•....••........•........•....•.•. $50
Eme Melal Screen Mesh Filter for 7400 Series Instru·
ments 378-0696-00 ........................................................... $SO
Audio 20-20 kHz log Gralieule for 5000 Series Instruments 331 -0429-00 ....................................................... $2.50
Complete selection of colored filters is available in the accessories section.
Numerous application notes and magazine article
reprints on spectrum analyzer measurements are
available. Notes on baseband, emc, am, fm , twoway radio and television measurements, audio
amplifier testing, noise and pulse testing , and others have been written to help you with your
measurements.
CARRYING CASES AND MOUNTS
Specialized carrying cases are available in 2 lorms to protect
your spectrum analyzer.
Metal carrying cases are available lor lhe 7L 12 or 7L 14 Plug·in
units.
Military style liberglass and loam type transit cases can be
custom litted to many of the instruments.
A special mounting bracket assembly can be fitted to bolt the
analyzer securely into the malnlrame II desired. Securing Kit.
fits 7L12 or 7L14
016-0637 -00 ..................................................................... $36
3-wide Carrying Case lor 7L 14. 7L5 Option 25. etc.
016-0626-00 ........................................•..................••....•. $195
2-wlde Carrying Case lor 7L 12, 7L5, etc.
016-0625-00 ................................................................... $195
Luggage-type Carrying Case lor 7603 Opt 08, 7613
Opt 06 016-0628-00 (Analyzer must have
016-0637-00 Securing KII ) ............................................ $550
Hard Case (tranSit) lor the 49X (016-0658-00) ............ $625
Soft Case lor the 49X (016-0659-00) ........................... $ 125
Your local Sales Office or representative can quote prices and
availability on any 01 these accessories.
Option 08 protective 'ront cover is shown with 7613
Mainframe.
134
INFORMATION
TEK REFERENCE
MODULAR NONSTORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
CONTENTS
Minimum
Deflection Factor
Number
of Traces
Maximum
Sweep Rate
Delayed
Sweep
p age
p n' ce t
1 GHz
10 mV/drv al BW
up 104
200 ps/drv
X
156
$18.945
7904
R7903
500 MHz
10 mV/drv al BW
10.V/drv
1 mAldlv
up 10 4
500 ps/drv
X
158
158
$8000
$7545
7844
400 MHz
20 mV/drv al BW
10 .V/drv
1 mAldrv
up 10 4
Dual-Beam
1 ns/drv
X
160
$11 .900
7704A
Opl 09
250 MHz
20 mV/drv al BW
10.V/drv
1 mAldlv
up 10 4
2 ns/drv
X
162
+$500
7704A
200 MHz
10 mV/drv al BW
10 .V/drv
1 mAldlv
up 10 4
2 nsldrv
X
162
$3995
7603
100 MHz
5 mVldrv al BW
10.Vldrv
I mAldrv
up 10 4
5 ns/drv
X
164
$2555
5440
50 MHz
5 mV/drv al BW
10.V/drv
05 mAldrv
up 108
5 ns/drv
X
210
$2390
5110
2 MHz
1 mV/drv al BW
10 . V/drv
05 mAldrv
up 108
100 nsldrv
X
214
$1300
5 mV/drv al BW
up 102
5 ns/drv
X
166
$7160
Product
Modular vs Monolithic Design
Portability ....................... .
CRT vs Digital Storage .
CRT Characteristics .........
136
137
138
140
Key Specifications & Features
Oscilloscopes & Related Equipment
Amplifier Considerations ....
.. .... .. .. .. .. .... ..
Time Bases
Sampling ............ .
141
141
142
142
7104
7603NlIS
TWO BASIC CONFIGURATIONS
There are two basic configurations for test and
measurement instruments. Modular instruments,
more often called plug-in or laboratory models
when referring to oscilloscopes, combine a
mainframe and one or more interchangeable
plug-in subassemblies. Integrated instruments,
such as monolithic oscilloscopes, are one-piece
units.
Although portable instruments are traditionally
designed as integrated units, not all monolithic
instruments meet all the objectives of portability.
On the other hand , some modular systems, such
as the Tektronix General Purpose Instrument line,
are designed for easy transport right into the
field . See the reference section on portability for
more details.
Modular Design
Versatility is the primary advantage of a modular
instrument. Many more functions than could be
economically or practically combined in a single
unit can be made available in separate plug-ins.
You , the user, can then choose the ones that
serve you best.
Because a modular instrument is so versatile, it
can also make use of advances in instrument
design. New plug-ins or mainframes can be added, that within the basic limitations of the other
units, add new functions or higher performance.
Modularity also allows plug-ins and mainframes to
be shared between various uses. For example,
with the TM 500 Line, the same general test and
measurement plug-ins used in the lab for design
work can be quickly inserted into a portable
mainframe and easily carried to a service problem . Alternately, where demand warrants it, the
identical model plug-ins can be supplied to both
field service and laboratory personnel, assuring
the repeatability of measurements and minimizing
training time.
136
Bandwid th "
Ruggedrzed
oscilloscopes
syslem Imeels or
exceeds
MIL-Q-243 11 (EC)
(ANIUSM 28 1
Specs)]
"Bandwldths are real time
tPnce does not Include plug-Ins
Sampling plug-Ins that extend bandwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes
Plug-ins can also extend the original instrument
range to other functions . Digital multi meters,
curve tracers, spectrum analyzers and logic analyzers are just a few examples of the many
specialized plug-ins Tektronix offers for modular
oscilloscopes.
Other Modular Devices
Logic Analyzers
Spectrum Analyzers
Waveform Digitizing Instruments
and Systems
Curve Tracers
Oscilloscopes
Integrated and Monolithic Devices
There are two lines of Tektronix Modular
Oscilloscopes to choose from . The Tektronix 5000
Series uses two amplifier plug-ins plus one time
base. The Tektronix 7000 Series, which offers
higher performance in a number of areas, can
accept up to two vertical-channel plug-ins and
two time bases or other horizontal units simultaneously. In-depth coverage begins on page 148_
Taking the other design approach to instrument
design, integrated instruments are optimized for a
single range of functions . One-piece instrument
design provides reduction in weight, increased
ease of use, smaller size, and usually lower power
requirements when a definite function is required .
General Purpose Instruments
The Tektronix TM 500 Line is a modular system.
One-three-fou r-five -and six-compartment
mainframes accept a broad selection of plug-in
units. The mainframe unit provides a common
primary power supply, keeping total instrument
weight, size, and cost down. Just as importantly,
TM 500 Mainframes also provide a signal control
and data interface between modules_This allows
TM 500 units to work either individually or together as integrated measuring systems . The
Tektronix General Purpose Instrument line is extensive: more than 40 units, including power
supplies, signal sources, oscilloscopes modules,
a logic analyzer , digital multimeters ,
counterltimers, and more. Custom plug-in kits
allow you to add your own unique circuits. With
this feature, you can also apply TM 5OO's capability to unusual applications. Indepth coverage begins on page 252.
page 43
page 118
page 143
page 301
Many oscilloscopes of this type are particularly
designed for portable use, with rugged cases,
environmental protection, and internal or external
battery power. In-depth coverage begins on page
222.
Tektronix also offers many other one-piece
products designed to be used alone or as elements of larger systems. Each performs its specialized task economically yet fully because it is
designed for a specific type of use:
Data Communication Analyzers
page 26
Graphic Terminals
page 68
page 94
OEM Imaging Products
page 103
TV Products
To sum up, modular instruments feature versatility, opportunities for tailor-made selection of functions, and a wide range of measurement capability. Integrated designs are strongest in economy
for single functions, ruggedness , and portability.
TEK
PORTABLE NON-STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
Maximum
Delayed
Sweep
Page
Price
1 nsl dl.
X
228
$6975
X
1 nsl dlv
X
230
$4410
X
1 nsldlv
X
230
$3960
5 mVl dlv al BW
X
2 nsldlv
X
232
$2995
100 MHz
5 mVld,v at BW
X
5 nsldlv
X
234
53500
2337
100 MHz
5 mVl dlv al BW
X
5 nsl dlv
X
223
$3350
2336
100 MHz
5 mVl dlv al BW
X
5 nsldlv
X
223
$3075
2335
100 MHz
5 mVl dlv al BW
X
5 nsldlv
X
223
$2775
Minimum
Product
Bandwidth
485
350 MHz
5 mVl dlv at BW
X
475A
250 MHz
5 mVldlV al BW
475
200 MHz
2 mVl d,v al BW
465B
100 MHz
465M
Deflection Factor
Dual-Trace
Sweep Rate
2215
60 MHz
2 mVl d,v al BW
X
5 nsl dlv
X
226
$1400
2213
60 MHz
2 mVld,v al BW
X
5 nsl dlv
X
226
$1100
335
35 MHz
10 mVldlv at BW
1 mVld,v
X
20 nsldlv
X
236
$2760
305
5 MHz
5 mVldlv al BW
X
100 nsldlv
X
237
$2120
221
5 MHz
5 mVldlv al BW
X
100 nsldlv
X
238
$1600
213
1 MHz
20 mVldl. al BW
5 mVldlv
400 nsl dlv
X
239
$2100
212
500 kHz
10 mVld,v al BW
1 mVldl.
X
1 "sldlv
X
240
$1545
SC 504t
80 MHz
5 mVl dl. al BW
X
5 nsl dl.
286
$2910
sc
15 MHz
5 mVldl. al BW
1 mVldlV
X
20 nsl dlv
288
$2140
502t
tThe SC 502 and SC 504 are oscilloscopes Ihal musl be plugged Inlo a TM 500ITM 5000 Mainframe for operahon. Please lurn 10
page 252 for more Inlormallon .
Portable Oscilloscopes
For oscilloscopes, a combination of factors must
be considered. Small size and lightweight are obviously important , but the degree depends on the
application and the uses. Similarly, ruggedized
cases or dust covers may be required . The
Tektronix 200 Series Oscilloscopes, for example,
are less than 8 x 14 x 23 cm (3 X 6 x 9 in), weigh
less than 1.6 kg (3.5 Ib) and are specifically designed and packaged for field use. The 300 Series all weigh less than 5 kg (11 Ib). The highperformance Tektronix 400 Series models, 10.5 to
15 kg (21 to 33 Ib), are designed as portables too.
Our most recent oscilloscopes also reflect the
emphasIs on portability. The 2213 and 2215 are
dual trace , delayed sweep, 60 MHz instruments
that weight less than 6.1 kg (13.5 Ib). The 2300
100 MHz portable scopes are not only lightweight
(starting at 7.7 kg/ 17 Ib) but they are also the
ultimate in ruggedness for field use . The 2335,
2336, and 2337 meet or exceed the U.S. military
specs for humidity, temperature range , vibration,
electromagnetic Interference, and shock.
For many applications, internal battery power is
often essential. On the other hand , the weight of
internal batteries can be a disadvantage if they
are rarely needed . In some applications power is
always available, since it must be provided to the
equipment being tested . Tektronix Portable
Oscilloscopes cover the full range of power options. The 200 Series and some 300 Series
oscilloscopes have internal batteries. The other
300 Series models and high performance
portables, such as the Tektronix 400 Series, are
line operated. However, external battery packs
are available as accessories for both the 300 Series and the 400 Series.
The 468 combines digital storage, GPIB capability, and a 100 MHz non-storage capability.
Portable General Purpose Instruments
Other Portables
Many of these same factors apply to other instruments besides oscilloscopes. The TM 500 General Purpose Instrument line, for example, has several configurations designed for portability. The
TM 515 Traveler Mainframe travels like luggage
but works like a lab bench set-up Although it is
attractive and convenient enough to treat as carry-on luggage (it will even go beneath your seat in
most airplanes), the TM 515 is designed to take
rugged travel. It carries up to five TM 500 Plug -in
instruments. Again , relatively light weight , rugged
construction, and convenient size are the key to
portability.
The 490 Series Spectrum Analyzers combine lab
performance and ease of operation In a compact,
lightweight package. The 492/492P offers a frequency range of 50 kHz to 21 GHz, extendable to
60 GHz with Tektronix external waveguide mixer,
and to 220 GHz with commercially available mixers . The 496/496P covers 1 kHz to 1.8 GHz The
492P/496P are GPIB programmable via IEEE-488
1978 interface.
Plug-ins include : pulse generators, function generators, other signal generators, amplifiers and filters, oscilloscopes and monitors, lab power supplies, digital counter/timers, digital multimeters,
special plug-ins, and custom plug-ins .
All of the TM 500 Plug-ins are portable when used
with portable TM 500 Mainframes; TM 515 5-compartment Traveler Mainframe, TM 503 3-compartment Mainframe with carrying case or protective
cover,TM 504 4-compartment Mainframe with carrying case or protective cover.
In-depth coverage of TM 500 products begins on
page 252.
Still other Tektronix portable instruments meet
special requirements far above simple movability.
The 1502 and 1503 TOR Cable Testers, for example, are designed to work outdoors In any weather, including pouring rain .
For movement within limited areas, Tektronix
SCOPE-MOBILE" Carts and Lab Carts are avail able in several configurations. A typical setup
might include a 400 Series Oscilloscope on the
top shelf with two TM 503 Mainframes underneath . These carts are particularly useful for inplant servicing, school and research laboratories,
and similar applications.
Logic Analyzers
TOR Cable Testers
Spectrum Analyzers
SCOPE-MOBILE" Carts
page 43
page 116
page 118
page 344
REFERENCE
TEK STORAGE
DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPES AND WAVEFORM DIGITIZERS
Type
468
STORAGE
Tektronix storage instruments continue to display
a waveform after the input signal ceases . The
period of retention runs from a few seconds to
essentially unlimited storage time depending on
the type of storage used .
Vert.
Res.
Data Words
per Waveform
100 MHz
25 MHz
8 Bit
512 in Alt.
256 in chop
Types Of Storage
SO,..
II
15.
~
2
5,..
_\
250,.,..125,-
,
\'1\
\
\ ~\
\
\
~
\
1 kHz 2 kHz
\
\
\
\
~'
t~ ~. ~
-\
~
\
5 kHz
10 kl1z
20 kHz
56270
1024/oluQ-in
4
100 kHz
10 MHz
208
$4505
Up to 1024
Up to 40
50 kHz
400 MHz
177
511 ,950
7912AO
500 MHz
100 GHz
9 Bit
512
1
500 MHz
500 MHz
90 MHz
200 MHz
8 Bit
Up to 2048
Up to 16
20 MHz
-
181
524 ,800
179
$26,400
Digital Storage
Bistable
Digital storage requires digitizing and reconstruction processes. "Digitizing" consists of "sampling "
and "quantizing". Sampling is the process of obtaining the value of an input signal at discrete
points in time; quantizing is the transformation of
that value into a binary number by the analog-todigital converter (ADC) in the digital scope . You
determine how often digitizing occurs by the time
base. The time base uses a digital clock to time
the analog-to-dlgital (AI D) conversion and to store
the data In memory. The rate at which this hap'
pens is the digitizing rate (or sampling rate) . Once
the data is in the digital memory, it can be read
out and reconstructed for displaying or further
waveform processing.
The bistable-phosphor CRT uses a special phosphor with two stable states: written and unwritten.
2M". 125m
,
50ns
25n1125n1
50nl
\
500 kHz
~
1 MHz
2 MHz
1251\1
l\
\
08nt
~\
\
\
'\ r--\
~
25".
\
\
Sine Wave Frequency
~"\
~
\
\
Bistable storage is an easy kind of storage to use.
It is also usually the most inexpensive. Some principal applications include mechanical measurements, Signal comparisons , and data recording .
Most bistable phosphor CRT's have a split-screen
viewing area which allows each half to be used
independently for storage displays. The splitscreen feature provides many unique advantages . With this system, a reference waveform
can be stored on one half of the screen and the
other half can be used to store the effect that
calibration adjustments or the insertion of filters ,
etc, have on circuit operation. If desired , this technique can be used where the reference portion
operates in the stored mode and the other half of
the display, operating in the nonstored mode,
monitors an external input.
An example of the usefulness of the split-screen
feature is in speech therapy . The normal speech
pattern is recorded on the upper half of the storage screen and the patient 's attempts to match
this pattern are recorded on the lower half. With
split-screen operation, the lower half showing the
trial waveform can be erased as many times as
desired without affecting the stored information
on the upper screen .
Variable persistence storage allows a continuous
gradation between the bright written level and the
dark reference .
\
\
5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
The storage mode allows waveforms to be stored
and displayed a minimum of several hours (in
some cases much longer) or until erased by
operator.
Variable Persistence
\
\
'\
50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
"466 and 1533
limiled lo 100 MHz
.... rllClllbanOwIOtt'I
138
Price
10 Bit
_\
~~ \
50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz
242
10 Bit
~
~
\
Page
1 MHz
Digital storage is typically very easy to use and
gives the user crisp , clear displays. Because the
data is stored in memory no fading or blooming
will occur, and storage time is essentially unlimited. This type of storage is excellent for many applications involving single shot or low repetition
signals, or where further signal processing is
desired.
500na
\
-
500 kHz
Ext Ctock
~
IU\ .1
.\
3
125"..
_\\
. 1\
5
25,..
10 MHz
10 MHz
Step Rt .. TIme
1
4
Equlv" "
StorBW
(rep)
400 MHz
CRT STORAGE PERFORMANCE
•
Useful"
Storage
BW (SS)
5223
of
The fundamental difference between the digital
storage scope and CRT storage is the form of
storage . Digital scopes store data representing
waveforms in a digital memory; CRT storage
scopes store waveforms within the CRT, either on
a mesh or special phosphor.
250,..125,.,..
Max No.
Stored
Waveform
'Useful Storage Bandwidth is a measure of the highest frequency sinewave that can be stored in a single sweep and displayed in a
visually useful manner. This is dependent on both the maximum digitizing rate as well as the display reconstruction technique used.
" Equivalent Storage Bandwidth indicates the highest frequency repetitive signat that can be stored and displayed with less than 3 dB
loss of signal amplitude using equivalent time digWzing techniques.
Storage IS used In other Tektronix products, too .
For terminals , CRT storage provides an economi·
cal means of retaining graphic and alphanumeric
displays without requiring refresh circuitry . Curve
tracers with a storage CRT show a wider range of
waveforms. And monitors with storage find a
Wide variety of applications.
TektrOniX products use two basic kinds
Storage- digital and CRT type .
Max Dig
Rate
7854
76120
Storage oscilloscopes allow easy, accurate evaluations of slowly changing phenomena that would
appear only as slow-moving dots. They are also
needed for viewing rapidly changing
nonrepetitive waveforms whose images would
otherWise flash across the CRT too quickly to be
evaluated . Storage can also reduce the time to
photograph scope traces by allowing you to
"compose" the picture. Unwanted displays can
be erased as many times as necessary before
the photograph is taken .
Analog
BW
The variable persistence mode also allows for the
selection of the time a stored image will be retained . The storage persistence can be adjusted
so the entire waveform can be viewed , yet the
stored trace fades from view just as the new
waveform is being plotted. With the save feature ,
an entire display can be stored for further analysis if desired.
TEK
CRT STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
(in order of Stored Writing Speed)
Product
7834
Stored
Writing Speed
5500
d iv /~s
776
466
dlv/~s
12
dlv/~s
0.2
d'v/~s
3000
div/~s
3 d'v/~s
7633
2200
d i v/~s
400
7623A
d'v/~s
View Time
30 s tt
30 m,n
minimum
30 s tt
30 m,n
minimum
Type of
Storalle
Fast Variable
Persistence
Fast variable
persistence
15 s tt
Variable
persistence
Fast variable
persistence
3 d'v/~s
30 s tt
2 d i v /~s
30 min
minimum
Variable
persistence
Bistable
50
dlv /~s
Delayed
Sweep
Plug-in
Page
400 MHz
20 mV/dlV at BW
10 mV/dlv at
325 MHz
Up to 4
X
X
169
$11 ,000
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
Up to 2
X
244
$6385
100 MHz
5 mV/div al BW
10 ~V /div
1 mAld,v
Up to 4
X
X
172
$7295
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
1 mA/div
Up to 4
X
X
172
$5585
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
Up to 2
X
244
$5165
100 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
10 ~V /div
1 mAidiv
Up to 4
X
X
174
$4680
50 MHz
5 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
0,5 mAidiv
Up to 8
X
X
211
$4060
25 MHz
10 mV/div at BW
1 mV/dlv
1 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
0.5 mAidiv
Up to 2
246
$4400
215
$2235
248
$2100
Price
Bistable
Fast bistable
d'v/~s
Number
of Traces
Variable
Persistence
30 min
minimum
150
Minimum
Deflection Factor
Fast Bistable
15 s tt
30 s tt
Bandwidth""
30 s tt
Fast variable
persistence
30 min
Fast bistable
minimum
0.5 div/~s
0.03
div/~s
464
110 div/~s
0.5 div/ ~s
7613
30 s tt
30 min
minimum
Variable
persistence
Bistable
5 div/~s
15 s tt
15 s
1 hr
Fast variable
persistence
Variable
persistence
5441
5 div/~s
1 hr
Variable
persistence
434
5 div/~s
4 hr
d'v /~s
tt
10 hr
Bistable
solit screen
Bistable
split screen
5115
0.8
214
0.5 div /~s
1 hr
Bistable
500 kHz
314
0.4 divlus
4 hr
Bistable
10 MHz
SC 503t
OM 64
0.4
div/~s
T912
5113
0.25 div/~s
0.25 divlus
0.2 div/~s
5111
0.02
div/~s
2 MHz
4 hr
1 hr
4 hr
10 hrs
Bistable
Bistable
Bistable
Bistable
split screen
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 hr
Bistable
split screen
2 MHz
10 MHz
2 MHz
10 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div
2 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div at BW
2 mV/div at BW
1 mV/div at BW
10 ~V/div
0.5 mA/div
1 mV/div at BW
10 ~V /div
0.5 mA/div
Up to 8
X
X
Up to 2
Up to 2
247
$3345
I,!Q.to 2
lJILto 2
Up to 2
Up to 8
dual-beam
287
251
$3150
Up to 8
X
X
249
215
$1890
$2970
X
X
214
$2100
--Bandw,dths are real time. Sampling plug-Ins that extend bandwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes.
tThe SC 503 is an oscilloscope that must be plugged into a TM 500/TM5000 Mainframe for operation. Please turn to page 252 for more information .
ttView times are at full stored display intensity. They may be increased by using reduced intensity in the save display mode.
Applications for variable persistence storage include real time, spectrum analysis, time-domain
reflectometry, sampling and other measurements
which require slow sweep displays. For fast repetitive sweeps, the storage perSistence can be
set so multiple traces are displayed before the
first trace fades from view. Then you can view
changes in signal response with changes in circuit conditions , time, or adjustments. This method
can also be used to provide display integration so
that only the coincident portions of a repetitive
signal are displayed . Any aberration or jitter not
common to all repetitive traces will not be stored
or displayed , Low repetition rate , fast rise time
signals that are not discernible on conventional
CRT's can be easily viewed.
This type of storage provides the best display
when storing displays with varying intensities,
such as delayed sweep or with Z-axis intensity
modulation. Variable persistence storage provides very good displays for photographs due to
the high contrast between dark background and
bright waveforms.
Fast Transfer
Fast transfer storage uses a tube with a special
intermediate mesh target. This target, which is
optimized for speed , captures the waveform and
then transfers it to a slower, longer-storing electrode. The second target can be designed to offer bistable or variable persistence modes, in
combination with the transfer mesh or by itself.
Several Tektronix Oscilloscopes use this combination of capabilities to provide unique multimode
storage. By front-panel controls, users of these
instruments can select the operating mode suited
to the specific measurement situation .
139
INFORMATION
TEK REFERENCE
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
PHOSPHOR DATA
Human Eye Response
An important factor in selecting a phosphor is the
color or radiant energy distribution of the light
oulput. The human eye responds in varying degrees to light wavelength from deep red to violet.
The human eye is most sensitive to the yellowgreen region ; however, its responsiveness diminIshes on either Side in the orange-yellow area and
the blue -violet region . The eye is not very receptive to deep blue or red .
Phosphor Protection
Selecting A Phosphor
When a phosphor is excited by an electron beam
with an excessively high current density, a permanent loss of phosphor efficiency may occur. The
light ou tpu t of the damaged phosphor will be reduced , and in extreme cases complete destruction of the phosphor may result. Darkening or
burning occurs when the heat developed by electron bombardment cannot be dissipated rapidly
enough by the phosphor.
The catalog description of each oscilloscope indicates the phosphor normally supplied or offered
as an option . Special phosphors are available for
applications which require different characteristics. For example , P11 is excellent for waveform
photography but due to its short persistence it is
not well suited for applications requiring visual observation of low-speed phenomena. For more
specific information regarding the best-suited
phosphor for your particular applications, please
confer with your Tektronix Sales Engineer, Representative or Distributor. They know the factors
that must be considered in selection of a phosphor for any given application.
The two most important and controllable factors
affecting the occurrence of burning are beamcurrent density (controllable with the Intensity,
Focus, and Astigmatism controls) and the length
of time the beam excites a given section of the
phosphor (controllable with the Time/Div contrOl).
Of the total energy from the beam , 90% is converted to heat and 10% to light. A phosphor must
radiate the light and dissipate the heat, or like any
other substance , it will burn. Remember, burning
is a function of intenSity and time. Keeping the
intensity down or the time short will save the
screen.
If the quantity of light falling on the eye is
doubled, the brightness "seen " by the eye does
not double . The brightness of a color tone as
seen IS approximately proportional to the log of
energy of the stimulus.
The term luminance is the photometric equivalent
of brightness. It is based on measurements made
With a sensor having a spectral sensitivity curve
corrected to that of the average human eye. The
SI (International metric standard) units for luminance are candelas per meter squared , but the
English footlamberts are still used extensively in
the U.S. One footlambert = 3.43 candelas/m2.
The term luminance implies that data has been
measured or corrected to incorporate the CIE
standard eye response curve for the human eye .
CIE is an abbre vi ation for "Comm ission
Internatlonale de L'Eclairage" (International Com mission on Illumination). The luminance graphs
and tables are therefore useful only when the
phosphor IS being viewed .
Phosphors are rated in several parameters, such
as color of fluorescence or phosphorescence, decay, etc. The table below describes the more
commonly used phosphors.
COMPARATIVE CRT PHOSPHOR DATA
Phosphor
Fluorescence
Phosphorescence
Where Diffe rent
from
Fluorescence
Relative
Luminance '
Relative
Photographic
Writing
Speed'
Decay
Relative
Burn
Resistance
Medium
Medium
Replaced by P31 in
mosl applications
Special
order
Med-Short
Medium
high
Television displays
74
Comments
P1
Yellowish-green
-
50%
20%
P4
Wh ite
-
50%
40%
P7
Blue
Yellowish-green
35%
75%
Long
Medium
Long decay, doublelayer screen
76
For photographiC
applications
78
General purposes,
brightest available
phosphor
80
P11
Purplish-blue
-
15%
100%
Med-Short
Medium
P31
Yellowish-green
-
100%
50%
Med-Short
High
P39
Yellowish-green
-
27%
NA'
Long
Medium
P43
Yellowish-green
40%
NA'
Medium
Very High
High current
density phosphor
68'%
NA'
Medium
High
Bistable storage
32%
NA'
Medium
Very High
P44
Yellowish-green
P45
White
-
Photographic applications
Monochrome TV displays
' Measured with Tektronix J16 Pholometer and J6523 Luminance Probe which incorporates a CIE standard eye filter . Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens. P3 1 as reference .
' P11 as reference with Polaroid 410 film . Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens.
3Low level lasts over one minute under conditions of low ambient illumination .
ANot available.
140
Ordering
Information
Option
40
Special
order
TEK
REFERENCE
INFORMATION
KEY SPECIFICATIONS AND FEATURES
for oscilloscopes and related equipment
AMPLIFIER CONSIDERATIONS
Rise Time and Bandwidth
Two vital capabilities generally sought In an oscilloscope are sufficient bandwidth and adequate
rise time
Although rise time IS usually the more important
parameter when working with faster waveforms,
signal bandwidth is commonly specified for lower
speeds The frequency response of most scopes
IS designed so that there is a constant that allows
you to relate the bandwidth and rise time of the
Instrument. This constant is 0.35 and the rise time
and bandwidth are related by this approximation:
Very accurate absolute rise time measurements
are not always Important. When simply comparing
the rise times of two signals , scopes with a rise
time equal to the rise time of the signals applied
are usually considered adequate.
BeSides indicating bandwidth for the vertical
channel , many oscilloscope specifications also
include a bandwidth figure for the horizontal and
trigger channels.
Tr = ..Q..35..
BW
A simple way to apply the formula is:
BandWidth and rise time figures also apply to
many other Tektronix instruments . Signal sources,
probes, amplifiers, TOR systems and many other
test Instruments are characterized in part by rise
time . Frequency response figures are given for
portable patient monitors, spectrum analyzers
and many TV products. The specifications will
Indicate values where these figures are relevant.
T
Sensitivity (Deflection Factors)
-
350
r (nanoseconds) - BW(Megaherl l)
For the Tektronix 2200 Series instruments with a
bandWidth of 60 MHz , the rise time is 5.8
nanoseconds
BandWidth IS defined as the frequency range in
which signals are handled with less than a 3 dB
loss compared to midband performance. Since
modern oscilloscopes work well at low frequencies down to dc, bandWidth here commonly
refers to the highest frequency which can be
displayed with a 3 dB or less error.
Most OSCilloscope designs make use of gradual
roll -offs at the high-frequency end, so in many
cases a scope will be useful far beyond its
specified bandwidth. Waveshapes may be altered and amplitudes reduced somewhat.
In terms of rise time, scopes ideally should have a
vertical system capable of responding at least
five times as fast as the fastest applied step
signal (thus haVing a rise time less than 1/5 as
great). In such a case , the rise time of the signal
Indicated on the scope will be in error by less
than 2 percent.
USing the 1/5 and 0.35 factors together, the
minimal requirements for scope bandwidth for
accurate rise time measurements can be estimated uSing the follOWing rule of thumb:
BandWidth (minimal) ""
1.70
Fastest Rise Time
Differential, Balanced, or Push-Pull Inputs
Differential or balanced amplifiers provide a feature beyond mere accommodallon of push-pull
signals: they have the ability to cancel or reject , to
a high degree, any signal components equal in
amplitude and phase that appear at both inputs.
Such amplifiers provide a simple and accurate
means of measuring the difference between two
signals. They also provide a means of rejecting
most unwanted signal components common to
both inputs, such as power line "hum ."
Although sensitivity specifications are most often
associated with oscilloscope vertical channels,
specifications can also be provided for horizontal
channels and trigger circuits with external inputs.
Similarly, various other instruments may have a
sensitivity specification relating minimum input
level to some function or output level.
Sensitivity, in the case of oscilloscopes, refers to
the Input needed to produce a stated deflection
of the spot on the CRT. Specifications typically
are given in millivolts per centimeter or division .
At a given state of the art, sensitivity is a trade-off
With bandwidth . The small amount of noise in
even the best Input circuit will mask signals which
are too weak. Raising the bandwidth Increases
the nOise picked up by the amplifiers, requiring
more of a signal to create a clear display.
As a consequence of this relationship , many highsensitiVity scopes provide bandwidth-limiting controls to allow you to make beller low-level , moderate frequency measurements. For these and
other models, a set of sensitivity specifications
may be given for limited frequencies as well as
over the full range .
Many times, external noise will be the problem.
Differential amplifiers are often used to lessen the
effects of external nOise and common-mode sig nals , thus improving the useful measurement
sensitivity range .
141
INFORMATION
TEK REFERENCE
Multiple Inputs
It is quite often useful to be able to view anyone
or several of a number of input signals without
disturbing connections to the oscilloscope. Several types of multiple-input amplifiers which display
more than one signal on the same CRT display
are available.
Common applications include input-output comparisons, checking a signal against a standard or
working with complex circuits.
Dual-Beam and Dual-Trace
Two techniques, dual-trace or dual-beam circuitry , are commonly used for creating two traces on
a single CRT.The dual-trace scope incorporates
electronic switching to alternately connect two
input signals to a single deflection system. The
dual-beam scope, however, has two independent
deflection systems within its CRT. (Some models
do share horizontal systems, though .) There are
distinct advantages to both dual-beam and dualtrace scopes. A dual-beam scope can display
two input signals separately and simultaneously.
Therefore , it can show two nonrecurrent signals
of short duration. Also , models with independent
horizontal deflection can display nonrecurrent signals on different time bases.
The principal advantages of dual-trace scopes
are lower cost and intrinsically better comparison
capabilities. This comes from using a single horizontal amplifier and one set of deflection plates.
On the other hand , since a transient event might
occur on one input channel while the beam is
tracing the other, dual-trace scopes are not recommended for viewing fast one-shot phenomena.
Extension of the dual-trace principles has produced newer multiple-trace oscilloscopes capable of displaying up to eight traces.
Tektronix Logic Analyzers display up to 16 channels of timing data, and can acquire up to 52
channels of state information.
TIME BASES
Sweep Rates and Sweep Types
Except in special cases, oscilloscopes have builtin sawtooth sweep generators for producing constant -speed horizontal beam deflection. In early
scopes, these generators ran continuously and
horizontal calibration was based on their repetition frequency . In most modern scopes, sweeps
are calibrated in terms of a direct unit of time for
a given distance of spot travel across the screen;
hence the lerm, "time base ."
ThiS technique permits:
1. Direct measurement of time between events.
2. Viewi:1g and measuring small portions of pulse
trains.
3. Viewing and measuring random or aperiodic
events.
4. Viewing and measuring single nonrecurrent
events.
Distances representing time are measured on the
scope 's graticule, the ruled scale built into the
display. The internal graticule built inside the CRT
face on modern scopes is preferable, as it eliminates parallax.
A major graticule division may be an inch , centi meter or some other length. Some instruments
have different distance-units for the vertical and
horizontal scales. Graticules often have small
markings which subdivide the major divisions to
assist in making accurate measurements. Such
subdivisions should not be interpreted as the
distance unit in a specification .
Strictly speaking, sweep specifications are rates
properly expressed as time/length. However, the
term sweep speed (implying length/time) is often
used synonymously.
Relating Sweep Rates, High
Frequencies and Rise Times
The appropriate sweep rate for frequency-specified measurements is based on the nature of the
test. Given a moderate frequency, a sweep is
usually considered adequate if it is capable of
displaying one cycle across the full horizontal
scale. At high frequencies , however, scopes seldom have sweeps that fast. To measure rise time
as accurately as possible, a step signal
(squarewave, rectangular pulse, etc) should occupy most of the full vertical scale, and the rising
portion of the Signal should be displayed at nearly
a 45° slope. This objective can be met only if the
fastest sweep is able to move the beam a
horizontal distance nearly equal to the full vertical
scale in a time interval equal to the rise time of
the vertical deflection system . 6ecause of the
compounding difficulties and cost of providing
extremely fast sweeps which are both linear and
accurate, this goal must be tempered somewhat
in scopes having the very best vertical deflection
system rise time capabilities.
In some cases rise time measurements are not
made to determine actual rise time, but are done
to decide whether certain limits are met or exceeded. In such cases, an adequate comparison
with a standard signal of known rise time can
usually be made even with a sweep that provides
a fairly steep display, given that the vertical
deflection system rise time is good enough .
Delaying / Delayed Time Bases
Delaying-sweep measurements use two linear
calibrated time bases. The first timebase, commonly called the delaying sweep, allows the
operator to select a specific delay time. When
this time is reached , the second time base, called
the delayed sweep, starts. The delayed sweep is
typically set a decade or two faster than the
delaying sweep and therefore offers additional
resolution . The combination of these two time
bases also offers increased accuracy of time
interval measurement.
Digital Time Displays
----~~-~ ~~~~---
1)
.
-
~~~~~-
n: ..,. -- ~O~SI
U' ~
. .'
,. -
-
-
You can make delay and interval time measurements with digital ease on several Tektronix
Oscilloscopes. The DM44 option for the 400
Series allow you to read the delay time , interval
frequency , or temperature right from an LED
readout , with no calculation or interpolation required. The 7610,7615, 7685 and 7680 Plug-ins
for 7000 Series Oscilloscopes provide ~ time
(dual-delayed sweep) measurements. With this
feature , both ends of the selected interval which
can be independently positioned on the trace are
shown by intensified regions . The time interval
between those points is shown on the screen
using the 7000 Series CRT readout capability.
Sampling
Sampling is a powerful technique for examining
very fast repetitive signals. It is similar, in principle, to the use of stroboscopic light to study fast
mechanical motion. Progressive samples of adjacent portions of successive waveforms are taken;
then they are "stretched" in time, amplified by
relatively low-bandwidth amplifiers, and finally
shown , all seemingly at one time, on the screen of
a cathode-ray tube. The graph thus produces a
replica of the sampled waveforms. The principal
difference in appearance between displays made
by sampling techniques and conventional displays is that those made by sampling are comprised of separate segments or dots. This technique is limited to depicting repetitive Signals,
since no more than a portion of the signal is
captured and displayed each time the signal
recurs .
The sampling method , however, provides a
means of examining fast-changing signals of low
amplitude that cannot be examined in any other
way. The system is capable of resolving events
that occur in less than 30 picoseconds on an
"equivalent " time base of less than 20
picoseconds per division and less than 5 mV of
peak amplitude .
Tektronix uses the random sampling technique
which differs from conventional sampling because it does not require a delay line or pre trigger
for lead time to be visible in the display. The
benefits afforded by this feature are :
1. Signals with no source of pre trigger can be
observed.
2. The inherent rise time limitation of signal delay
lines is eliminated.
3. It is no longer necessary to work into the 50 n
characteristic impedance of a delay line ,
so high impedance can be retained .
4. External triggers may occur before, coincident
with, or after the displayed signal , with lead
time still visible in the display.
5. Display time jitter otherwise caused by
pretrigger-to-signal jitter is eliminated.
142
TEK
SIGNAL PROCESSING
SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
System Products ...........................................
Software ..........................................................
Mini-Computer Based Systems ..................
Desktop Computer Based Systems ...........
WP2252 (7912AD-BasOO Computer System)
Precise automatic waveform
measurements for demanding applications in research,
design, manufacturing and
quality assurance
144
145
146
147
WP1310 (7854-Basoo Desktop Computer System)
waveform manipulations, and graphic display. And they 're the first to provide system
compatibility that allows configuration for
many types of test and measurement
applications.
Plus, system automation gives greater measurement accuracy and accountability on
your finished product. Since there 's less operator involvement in measurements, there 's
less chance of human error.
Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are
specially designed to handle the increasingly complex, expensive, and time-consuming
task of waveform characterization .
With Tektronix Signal Processing Systems
you concentrate on test results, not test procedures . There are no human-eye interpretations, hand processing, or complex statistical graphing. Tektronix Systems
automatically capture the signals you need,
make the measurements you want, then display, store, and document your solutions.
From today's research and development
tasks to tomorrow's production testing ,
Tektronix Systems give you all the capabilities needed to characterize your waveforms
quickly, efficiently, and automatically.
They're the first measurement systems to
offer all the power and flexibility of oscilloscope acquisition , coupled with fully automatic analysis. They're the first systems to
feature signal processing software with extensive control over instrumentation,
This means work that used to take hours,
now takes only minutes. System automation
saves you time and money by greatly increasing your productivity. Projects not only
get completed on schedule, they get completed on budget.
Automatically save hours, days,
even months of work.
For measurement solutions
you can't beat the SYSTEM.
143
PRODUCTS
TEK SYSTEM
SPS AUTOMATION
ACQUISITION UNIT
HARD COpy
• • •
FIVE MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
AND TEK'S COMPREHENSIVE SOFTWARE
MEET YOUR MEASUREMENT NEED
Acquisition, built around TEKTRONIX GPIB
Waveform Digitizers and 7000 Series Oscilloscope Plug-ins, captures analog data, converts
and stores it in a digital format acceptable to the
system processor.
SIGNAL TO BE
ACQUIRED &
PROCESSED
Processor, either minicomputer or desk-top
computer, controls the system, accepts the
digitized data, and then performs the needed
mathematical calculations and operations.
~
JUl
STORAGE
'0'1O
~~
[I]
01010
01110
PROCESSOR
DISPLAY
Mass Storage, in the form of disk or magnetic
tape, keeps a log of the processed data and also
stores the test programs.
Display, including graphic terminal and Hard
copy units, provides both alphanumeric and
graphic presentation of data and permanent
documentation.
Software, specially developed for ease of use
with TEKTRONIX Signal Processing Systems,
controls all other system components and performs the desired computations. Commands are
high-level BASIC and accessible through a standard terminal keyboard.
A WIDE RANGE OF SYSTEM PRODUCTS PROVIDES THE SOLUTIONS YOU NEED
Signal acquisition. Fast or slow,
transient or repetitive.
System controllers dedicated to
speed and precision.
The growing family of GPIB compatible 7000
Series Waveform Digitizers provides a broad
range of acquisition capabilities. They offer the
ability to analyze signals ranging from seconds to
picoseconds in duration, and risetimes to 25 ps.
Plus, all are compatible with a broad range of
7000 Series Plug-ins.
TEKTRONIX Signal Processing Systems are divided into two major processor families : the
minicomputer family, and the desktop computer
family.
7912AO ·
For high-speed transient signal acquisition, the
79t2AD Programmable Digitizer has the capability to capture signals in .the millisecond to
subnanosecond range with a bandwidth of up to
500 MHz.
76120·
For medium -speed signals, the 76120
Programmable Digitizer offers dual channel acquisition , selectable sampling rates within
records , and pre- and post-triggering. With the
76120 you can capture transient signals from
seconds to sub-microseconds in duration with
high resolution .
7854·
For fast , repetitive signals, the 7854 Oscilloscope
is ideal when configured in a system. The 7854
features an on-board microprocessor. This instrument provides the system with the capability to
acquire high speed Signals with rise times to 25
ps.
'Digital Mainframes Sec tion for detail s.
144
The Tektronix minicomputer systems, built around
DEC PDP11 compatible controllers, are designed
to handle large amounts of data, They offer flexibility in peripheral selection , processing speed,
and up to 128k words of memory space. Plus, the
software support is specially developed for
waveform manipulations, array processing and
display efficiency.
The desktop computer systems are built around
the 4052 Desktop Computer-one of the most
powerful analytical performers available today. Its
built-in extended BASIC software is complemented by special ROM packs featuring commands
most often used in signal processing
applications.
Wide-ranging system peripherals
for full documentation and display.
TEKTRONIX Signal Processing Systems provide
the best in display-the 4010-1 or the 4052 graphic screen. These terminals provide an excellent
medium for displaying graphic and alphanumeric
information with high resolution . In addition, a
wide range of system peripherals is available, including graphic plotters, hard copy units, disk
and magnetic tape storage devices.
•
Introducing the new 1360PIS.
As part of the on going commitment to supply
complete system solutions, a new high performance multiplexer is now available either as part
of an SPS System or to be integrated into your
own system .
The 1360 is a microprocessor-based GPIB compatible system instrument that can be used to
multiplex electrical signals at bandwidths up to
250 MHz. It includes two separate chassis: the
1360P Programmable Switch Controller and the
1360S Switch Matrix. Up to four 1360S Switch Matrix units may be operated by one 1360P. With
one 1360S one may multiplex 1 output with 33
inputs, 2 ganged outputs with 17 inputs, or 4
ganged outputs with 9 inputs. With four 1360S
units these numbers increase so one may multiplex 1 output with 129 inputs, 2 ganged outputs
with 65 inputs, or 4 ganged outputs with 33
inputs.
Total Support
Complete details and application consultation is
available through your local Tektronix Sales Office . SPS Specialists and Application Engineers
stand ready to answer all your system questions.
TEK
The next logical step
ANY SYSTEM IS ONLY AS GOOD AS ITS SOFTWARE
SPS SYSTEMS OFFER THE BEST SOFTWARE AVAILABLE
TEK SPS BASIC is a comprehensive, general
purpose programming language with enhancements for instrument control and waveform processing. Modular in design, it provides an optimum balance between flexibility , space
efficiency, and computing power. Yet it retains
the "easy-to-Iearn , easy-to-use, easy-to-remember" character of traditional BASICs. This makes it
an ideal tool for beginning users as well as expert
programmers.
TEK SPS BASIC runs on the TEKTRONIX
CPll64X Instrument Controller, on the PDP11 /23
Computer, or on any Digital Equipment Corporation PDP-11 minicomputer. It consists of a Resident Monitor and an expandable library of over
100 non-resident commands. This lets you
configure a software system to meet your unique
measurment needs.
It's ready to use. TEK SPS BASIC requires a
minimum system consisting of a controller with
one hard-disk drive or two flexible-disk drives.
Commands can be added to the system from the
disk as needed to provide maximum space efficiency in available memory.
Named files can be accessed by TEK SPS BASIC
on hard or flexible disk, or magnetic tape and
information can be read from files either sequentially or randomly. BASIC commands give you
complete file management capability. Files are
compatible with DEC's RT11 operating system.
Comprehensive graphics permit waveform plots
and X-Y plots between waveforms. Either can be
done with single commands. The output is complete with scaled and labeled axes and can be
hard-copied to paper.
Advanced Signal Processing
Software Maintenance
Waveforms can be integrated, differentiated,
convolved, correlated , and fast Fourier transformed . Also , polar conversions can be
performed.
Customers receive a periodic newsletter containing programming hints and responses to user
questions. Reported system errors can usually be
corrected by customer-applied "patches." These
short code sequences are published in the newsletter with instructions for adding them to established systems. Specific problems encountered
by customers which appear to be caused by
software defect may be addressed by submitting
a Software Performance Report (SPR) which will
be responded to in writing. (Category B support.)
Flexible 1/0
Information can be read or written in ASCII or
binary. ASCII may be used for display on a
terminal or to store information for use by another
software system. Binary can be used for storing
large information blocks for later processing by
TEK SPS BASIC. File may be structured either
serially or by random access.
GPIB
With BASIC commands, you can control multiple
IEEE-488 interfaces at any level, from setting
individual data lines to reading in entire arrays
with a single command . The GPIB feature , which
can be deleted from the BASIC system to save
memory, is integrated with the Resident Monitor
to make GPIB control commands more space
economic. A high level GPIB driver is also avail able to facilitate programming for those not thoroughly familiar with GPIB.
TEK SPS BASIC data-logging capabilities let
turn tedious and repetitive measurements
automated procedures. Program control
eliminate human intervention, reduce errors,
give you time to concentrate on test results .
you
into
can
and
Better than seven-digit precision means much
higher resolution than possible in conventional
oscilloscope measurements. Special data structures retain both numeric and literal information
associated with a given waveform. These
waveform structures, as well as numeric arrays or
portions of numeric arrays, can be operated on
arithmetically as easily as can simple numeric
variables.
PDP and DEC are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation
ORDERING INFORMATION
SOFTWARE PACKAGES
CP57000 TEK SPS BASIC (Monitor) .. $5475
CP57001 Signal Processing ............... $1285
CP57002 Graphics ................................ $975
CP57003 R7912 Transient Digitizer
Driver ... ...... .................. .............. .......... $1445
CP57004 Digitizing Oscilloscope (DPO)
Driver ... ... ...... ........ ................................. $865
CP57005 DPO Envelope Command ..... $350
CP57006 7912AD Programmable
Digitizer Driver ...................................... $875
CP57007 High Level Support ............... $580
CP57008 Assembly Level Support .... $2890
CP57009 GPIB High Level Driver ....... .. $750
CP57010 76120 Special
Commands ............................................ $300
Extended memory capability is offered in
V02XM (CP575XX) software permitting operations which involve large arrays of data to
be manipulated in computers having up to
128k memory, with memory management.
Prices are the same as V02 modules, except
CP57500 ............................................... $7125
There is also available a versatile GPIB software
module for RSX11 -M. This requires special quotation from SPS Marketing.
For additional information or a demonstration of
the TEK SPS BASIC software family , call the
Tektronix Sales Office in your area and ask for
your SPS Specialist.
145
MINI-COMPUTER
SYSTEMS
TEK BASED
Measurement requirements and technologies are
changing rapidly in the dynamic fields of physics,
optics, chemistry, biology, and electronics. Improved bandwidths, sensitivities, triggering circuits, and storage capabilities have done a great
deal to increase the value of oscilloscopes as
general-purpose measurement equipment in
these fields . But in more and more applications
scope measurements are being supplemented by
computations to get the information in a form that
is easy to interpret.
Some Applications
The development and manufacturing of today's
increasingly complex electronic devices require
extensive analysis of the signals these devices
generate and transmit. For example, performance
and calibration of high density cartridge disks can
be characterized using Tektronix Signal Processing Systems - providing accurate, reliable results in seconds. Other components, such as
semiconductors and optical fibers , have benefited from Tektronix Signal Processing System
analysis.
Evaluating equipment designed to be used in
hostile environments is a growing challenge for
today's test and measurement technology. In the
area of lightning effects, Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are used because they can
capture randomly occurring events generated in
such hostile environments. Other examples include shock and vibration testing, and electromagnetic pulse testing.
High performance instrumentation and waveform
analysis have always been required in research
and development for the discovery and quantification of new phenomena. With acquisition
bandwidths up to 14 GHz, Tektronix Signal Processing Systems are ideally suited for such fields
as laser-related research , fusion research , biochemistry, ballistics and ultrasonics.
The WP3207 is one of the many configurations for the minicomputer-based systems.
Systems
Tektronix Minicomputer-based systems offer
combinations of Tektronix Waveform Digitizing
instruments, flexible instrument controllers, and
the most powerful waveform (array) processing
BASIC software available on the market. These
systems are tailored for medium and large scale
experiments and for use in areas where medium
or high power, dedicated systems are best suited
to the task. System versatility and easy-to-use
software allow for a wide variety of tasks to be
performed at a multi-purpose test area. Large
amounts of data storage and waveform analysis
are manageable under the TEK SPS BASIC operating system which handles full arrays of data as
easily as single-valued variables.
Instrument control and data communication are
accomplished over the IEEE-488 (GPIB) bus, allowing for easy expandability. Multiple instruments performing different functions may be
added as needs expand or change. Control or
data busses other than GPIB may be added by
the user and controlled by TEK SPS BASIC
software.
Mass storage includes either floppy or hard disk
systems for operating system , non-resident commands, data files and user program storage.
Hard copy capability may be added by ordering
the Tektronix 4631 option to these systems.
AVAILABLE MINI-COMPUTER-BASED SYSTEMS
146
7912AD
76120
PDP 11 /23 Roppy Disk
WP2252
WP3202
CP1164X/Hard Disk
WP2251 wloptions
WP3201
Warranty
Systems defined as "WP" Systems are installed at
the user's site free of charge. On-site warranty is
for 90 days from date of system start-up, or 120
days from date of shipment, whichever is shorter.
Individual instruments are warranted for one year
at a Tektronix Service Center. Post-warranty service is available on a normal charge basis, or
system components may be sent to a Service
Center for repair.
TEK
DESKTOP COMPUTER
BASED SYSTEMS
Desktop Computer Software
4052 software is an easy-to-Iearn enhanced form
of BASIC which provides the simplicity desired by
the beginner and the flexibility and power required by the experienced programmer. Device
independent keywords make programming input
and output operations easy. Fast matrix functions
are also part of 4052 BASIC. Special ROM Packs
provide 15 commonly used waveform processing
functions-from the location of waveform maximums and minimums to fast Fourier transforms.
And Tektronix supports the software of the 4052
with an extens iv e applications software
library-including mathematics, statistics and
graphics packages- which aids the user in solving measurement problems from modeling to final
report generation .
--_-.--_
.........-- - - - - - •••••
..... -- jJ I ,
--
--'I"'~"'
~'. '
"I."I."I."I."I."I."I."I.~
~
• .
..
For graphic display control, an entire set of
commands allows graphic displays to be created
on the 4052. For example, one ROM Pack com·
mand provides the ability to display a complete
array of data with a single statement.
The WP2 110 IS one of three desk10p compu1er-based systems,
Systems
Tektronix Desktop Computer-based Systems offer combinations of Tektronix Waveform Digitizing
instruments and the 4052 Graphic Computing
System , These systems are tailored especially for
single user, small and medium scale experiments
and for use in areas where medium power,
dedicated, self contained systems are best suited to the task. Each system contains the flexibility
to be easily moved between areas or to perform a
variety of tasks at a mUlti-purpose test bench.
Instrument control and data communication are
accomplished over the IEEE-488 (GPIB) bus, allowing for easy expandability. Multiple instruments of the same type or GPIB-interfaced instruments performing different functions may be
added as needs change. Data communication
with external intelligence for additional flexibility is
available via an RS-232C port. Hard-copy capability from the display may be added by ordering the
TEKTRONIX 4631 option to these systems. Raw
and processed data and user programs may be
stored using the integral magnetic tape, or the
TEKTRONIX 4907 flexible disk Rle Manager may
be ordered to supplement the system.
Desktop Graphic
Computer and Display
The TEKTRONIX 4052 Graphic Computer has
gained wide acceptance as a powerful data
processing tool for system applications. For rapid
calculations this desktop computer contains a
fast processor with microcoded floating point.
The 4052, with state-of-the-art graphics capability,
can provide hard copies of any combination of
text and high density graphics via an optional
hardcopy unit. For peripheral support the 4052
uses the GPIB and RS-232C to interface with
additional instruments as your needs require . And
with memory expandable to 64k bytes, the 4052
can handle lengthy programs and large amounts
of data.
7854
7912AD
76120
WP1310
WP2110
WP3110
For complete information on SPS Systems and
Digitizers described, contact your SPS Specialist
From signal acquisition through final display ongoing support guarantees you the most value for
your investment dollar. The many support programs available are yours as a part of your
system purchase.
HANDSHAKE is a newsletter forum for users of
TEKTRONIX programmable instruments and systems. Published quarterly, HANDSHAKE has articles of interest concerning applications of measurement and analysis techniques.
SPS PROGRAMMING UPDATE is published periodically and sent to users of TEKTRONIX Signal
Processing Systems. It contains information to
help maintain software and firmware system components . It also contains useful programming
hints and software and firmware product information.
AVAILABLE DESKTOP COMPUTER-BASED SYSTEMS
4052
Broad Support Completes the
Package and Assures You of
Continuing Value
Most important of all, a staff of Signal Processing
Systems Specialists, located at various offices,
stand ready to assist you in all aspects of system
specification and performance.
Tektronix complete training is offered in TEK SPS
BASIC software and the operation of signal acquisition and processing systems.
for data sheets and descriptive literature through
your nearby Tektronix Sales Office.
TektronIX offers training classes In TEK sPs BASIC Soltware and the operation and mamtenance Of tYPical Signal
acquIsition and processing systems. For further training Information , contact your local Sales Office or request a
copy of the TektronlJ Customer Training Catalog on the return card .
147
TEK
7000 SERIES
INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
Reference .... ....................." ... "" ... """ Page 148
7000 Series
Nonstorage Mainframes "" ..
"" Page 155
7000 Series
CRT Storage Mainframes ................. Page 168
7000 Series
Digital Mainframes .........
7000 Series Plug-ins .
... " .. Page 176
Page 183
The 7000 Series . . .
Superior Performance. The 7000 Series of
plug-in laboratory instruments embodies
more state-of-the-art performance features
than any other oscilloscope-based measurement system . The 7104 Oscilloscope features a 1 GHz bandwidth combined with the
fastest rise time and writing speed available
today.
Flexibility. A choice of over 35 plug-ins and
19 mainframes gives you the flexibility to
configure the scope package to meet your
individual needs. When your needs change ,
your present package can be reconfigured
with a minimum of additional equipment and
effort.
Expandability. This assures you that the
instrument you buy today will adapt to
changing measurement needs, and that it
won't become obsolete soon after you buy
it. Tektronix' most recent developments in
plug-in scope capability are: the Waveform
Processing Oscilloscope and the 1 GHz
High Writing Rate Oscilloscope .
--- -------------------.
148
7000
TEK
SERIES
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE, FLEXBILITY AND EXPANDABILITY
Pick The Trigger Source
CRT Readout
Storage
Convenient Camera
Mountings and
Connections
High Resolution
Large, No Parallax
illuminated Graticules
Calibration Standard
Easy Display Selection
Plug-in Flexibility
The 7000 Series is a unique family of instrumentation components, a continuation of the Tektronix
committment to bringing the ultimate in measurement technology to the laboratory.
Numerous measurement concepts-oscilloscopy, synergistic analog-digital measurements,
spectrum analysis , sampling , time domain
reflectometry, curve tracing-are fused into a
family of interdependent cathode -ray -tube
mainframes and instrumentation plug-ins.
A system can be tailored for your exact measurement needs. Mainframes in the family offer a
choice of popular bandwidth ranges and a wide
selection of additional features . Plug ins-including oscilloscope vertical amplifiers and
time bases as well as instruments for a variety of
applications-can be selected to round out your
tailored system.
In opposition to an industrial world that is frequently faulted for planning obsolescence, this
instrument family strategically defers obsolescence. Each mainframe and each plug-in reflects
the latest technology at its inception, yet each fits
a well-planned niche in this interdependent family.
The result is an array of instrumentation components that can adapt to our new developments
while protecting your initial investment. Today's
system may be expanded to meet future needs
at a relatively low cost by the addition of a plug-in
or two. When the time comes to add a more
powerful mainframe, your older model continues
to be useful for a host of applications.
149
TEK REFERENCE
-
t:.. ~" • 4
'~~~~ ~,.
- ..
,
o
"
CRT Readout·
All significant parameters are displayed in alphanumeric characters right on the CRT. They are
readily visible when you need them for quick
oscilloscope measurements, and they are permanently recorded on your waveform photographs
for future analysis. When your 7000 Series Measurement System includes a digital instrument
plug-in, the measurement is presented in clear,
accurate digital terms, along with a corresponding analog waveform.
Bright Traces
All 7000 Series CRTs have bright displays and
excellent photographic writing speeds. For applications requiring maximum photographic writing
speeds, several mainframes feature a reduced
scan on a reduced area in the center of the CRT,
and one uses a micro-channel plate CRT.
-=-
Convenient Camera Mountings
and Connections
Mainframes
Calibration Standard
A standard bezel connector matches all
TEKTRONIX Oscilloscope Cameras to 7000 Series Mainframes.
All the 7000 Series Calibrators serve as a voltage
standard for calibrating vertical plug-ins, a 1 kHz
squarewave for adjusting probe compensation,
and a 1 kHz frequency standard in the 7800, 7900
and 7100 Series Mainframes. The output is available in several dc or 1 kHz squarewave Voltages.
Independent Intensity Controls
Separate intensity controls allow for independent
adjustment of A sweep, B sweep, and character
readout brightness. The intensity of each sweep
may be adjusted to a level that suits your
application.
Autofocus
The trace stays in focus with changes in intensity.
After the focus is initially set, an autofocus circuit
reduces the need for additional adjustments.
Adjustable Graticule Illumination
Trigger Source Flexibility
The left and right trigger selector mainframe
push buttons route the desired trigger source to
the appropriate time base. A VERT mode position
automatically routes whichever source has been
chosen for vertical inputs.
Easy Display Selection
Vertical mode switches allow you to easily select
the desired vertical amplifier or interaction of
amplifiers (e.g., alternate, chopped, or added
modes). Four-compartment mainframes provide
equivalent flexibility for time bases as well.
Large, Illuminated
and Parallax-Free Graticules
This gives you easier viewing and sharper photos.
The display area is 8 by 10 divisions (0.85, 0.9,
1.0, or 1.22 cm/div depending upon mainframe)
with a parallax-free graticule.
Plug-ins
Flexible Measurement Systems
Mainframe Flexibility
More than 35 plug-ins provide you with flexibility
to choose just the measurement capability you
require .
Numerous options add even more flexibility in
creating the oscilloscope system that most closely meets your measurement requirements .
Analog/Digital Synergism
-Not available In mainframes or plug-Ins with "N" suffix
150
Dig i tal instrumentation plug -i ns create
unsurpassed measurement capabilities. Highly
accurate digital measurements may be made at
selectable points on complex waveforms by visually superimposing gate waveforms over signal
waveforms.
TEK
7104 NON·STORAGE
7000
SERIES
SAMPLING/TIME DOMAIN
REFLECTOMETRY
Digital Measurement Plug-ins
The 7000 Series Digital Plug-ins include: A universal counter/timer, digital multimeter with temperature mode, digital delay by time or events, a
versatile 0.01% AID converter with vertical amplifier, and a special read-out unit to label each test
for future reference. Together with a 7000 Series
Mainframe, these give you the advantage of
seeing what you 're measuring, plus accuracy of
digital techniques.
This combination offers many advantages over
separate test units. You get: scope-controlled
digital measurements, measuring convenience
and confidence, increased accuracy, easier and
faster solutions to complex problems, a lower
dollar investment, more bench space and signal
conditioning.
Sampling
1 GHz Bandwidth
10 mV/div Sensitivity
Equivalent Bandwidth to 14 GHz
200 ps/div Sweep Speed
Sweep Speeds to 10 ps/div
20 cm/ns Writing Speed
High-Resolution 45 ps TOR: 7S12
Self-Contained 1 GHz dual-trace sampler:
7S14
DUAL BEAM
Digital processing for sampling and TOR
with 7854/7S 12
DIGITAL READOUT
MEASUREMENTS
The 7000 Series Sampling Plug-ins provide some
unique measurement capabilities not available in
other sampling oscilloscopes. You get: A low-cost
storage CRT for slow scans, a random mode that
lets you see leading edges with pretrigger or
bandwidth-limiting delay line, a wide choice of
sampling heads at minimal cost, and the convenience of sampling and conventional displays at
the same time on the CRT.
The adjacent sampling waveform shows the power of the 7S 12 TOR plug-in with the 7854 Digital
Storage Oscilloscope. First, the 7854 acquired the
TOR signal from a prototype connector design,
using waveform averaging to eliminate noise on
the trace. Then, pOSitioning the 7854 cursors to
the area of interest on the waveform , the internal
7854 program calculates an impedance of 52.41
f! at the discontinuity.
Spectrum Analysis
Unexcelled plug-in performance from 20 Hz to 60
GHz is provided by the 7L5, 7L 14 and 7L 18
Spectrum Analyzers . Stable , sensitive and
spurious-free , these analyzers work in any 7000
Series Mainframe. The same mainframe may be
used with other plug -ins for oscilloscope
measurements.
400 MHz Bandwidth
Full Vertical and Horizontal
Cross-over Switching
(one input shown at two sweep speeds)
Full Overlap on 8 x 10 cm Display
400 MHz Dual-Beam
Sample and Hold Dvm Measures
Voltage Difference between Two
Points on Complex Waveform (gate
waveform indicates two pOintsleading and trailing edges-where
voltage difference is made+ 0_737 V)
Dual-beam oscilloscopes are essentially two
oscilloscopes in one. Each beam operates separately and independently of the other. They are
required for many applications where two transient events must be compared simultaneously.
These application areas include stimulation and
reaction events in such fields as medicine, biology, chemistry, engineering mechanics, to name
just a few .
Counter/Timer Measurement with
Analog Display
Depending on the plug-ins selected, up to eight
traces can be displayed at a time.
Compare Digital Measurement with
Analog Display
Readout Unit Identifies this Waveform
as TEST DATA-PHOTO 17
Some plug-in analyzers have microprocessor-aided controls for easy operation, and digital storage
and display capability for recalling and comparing
signals. Others offer 30 Hz resolution for viewing
close-together signals. Some optional tracking
generators are available for swept frequency
measurements.
Refer to the Spectrum Analyzer section beginning
on p. 118 for more information.
CRT Storage
See page 169_
Digital Storage
See page 176
SERIES
TEK 7000
REFERENCE
7000 SERIES
OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEMS/PROBE SELECTION CHART"
PASSI V E VOLTAGE
50 0 INPUT COMPT
PASSIVE VOLTAGE 1 MO INPUT COMPATIBLE
PROBE
Pel0l
Pll01
1 Mltlr
1 MIlar
PlOSs
3.5'
PI053B
..
PI01S
10'
P8082 8
I'
P6105
P6101
2 Metar
PeOSI
I'
40 kV Pk
Pul ••
CompaUblllly
Attenu.t lon
Sallcllb le
Ml nlatur.
Probe
F•• t••t 10X
100X
100DX
Sa ll crabl.
Ne
Ne
125 MHz
Ne
Nc
Nc
75 MHz
Ne
Nc
85 MHz
70 MHz
130 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
Nc
65 MHz
60 MHz
80 MHz
60 MHz
Ne
Ne
125 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
Nc
85 MHz
70 MHz
110 MHz
80 MHz
Nc
1 MHz
Ne
105 MHz
Ne
60 MHz
55 MHz
75 MHz
60 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
Ne
85 MHz
65 MHz
115 MHz
70 MHz
Nc
Ne
65MHz
55 MHz
75 MHz
60 MHz
Nc
Ne
105 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
Nc
60 MHz
55 MHz
85 MHz
65 MHz
Nc
55 MHz
50 MHz
65 MHz
55 MHz
85 MHz
65 MHz
Pe008
FEY PROBES 50 0 /1 M D
INPUT COMPATIBLE
P6057
S·
P6046
P8202 ... •••
2 MI te r
CURRENT PROBES
~/ p .
w/ p... lve
term
term
P6021
Pe022
5' 10 mV/ mA 5" 0 mV/ mA.
P6201
6'
I'
3. 5'
FEATURES
Mlnl alur.
Probe
F•• ta.t
Prob ••
Comp.Ubl.
with 1· MD
Input
ATTENUATION
7A1t
7A24
7A21
7104
7100
FAMILY
7100
FAM I LY
7704A
7600
FAMILY
lX
lOX
1.5 kV ComAdl
Alt.nuaUon
patlbllity
10.
Dlff.rlnUal
U..
lOX
Ne
Ne
175 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
7A2.
Ne
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
7Al1·
7A13
7A15A
7AlIA
7A1I
7A18
7A22
7A24
7A21
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
lOS MHz
75 MHz
200 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
Ne
Nc
175 MHz
Ne
65 MHz
7Al1
7A13
7A15A
7A1IA
7Al.
7A19
7A22
7A24
7A2.
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Ne
95 MHz
75 MHz
160 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
145 MHz
Ne
65M Hz
7Al1
7A13
7A15A
7Al1A
7A18
7A18··
7A22
7A24
7A.26
Ne
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
Nc
1 MHz
Ne
34 MHz
Nc
100 MHz
70 MHz
145 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
Ne
Ne
140 MHz
7A l1
7A13
7A15A
7Al1A
7A1I
7A22
1A21
Ne
3-4 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
34 MHz
1 MHz
34 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
Nc
95 MHz
Ne
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
1 MHz
Nc
Ne
65 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
1 MHz
lX,10X
Ne
Ne
Ne
75 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
75 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
70 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
Ne
70 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
, MHz
95 MHz
-Nole: The velu .. In the above I.bl. repr.,.nt Ih. eppro.lm.l. u,.ful
fr.quency r.,pon .. for the m. ., ur.m. nt ,y,tem, .1 Ihe probe tip.
P... I.I
Probe
Low C
lOX
lOX
Ne
Ne
100 MHz
Ne
Fut•• t
100X P.,·
a lvI Probe
Low C
100X
..,
10·MD Input DIff.renlla' Low Caplcl
Impedlnce Probe High tive LOld lng
DC, OIl·
Ac Coupli ng
emrr
De Oft •• •
Sallclabl.
Selectable
100
100
90
100
500 MHz
350 MHz
480 MHz
350 MHz
950 MHz
800 MHz
300
300
185
450
75 MHz
Ne
500 MHz
105
80
205
75
480
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
Ne
350 MHz
350 MHz
Ne
75 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
75 MHz
100 MHz
85 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
Ne
70 MHz
70 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
100 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
Se ll ctabl.
.. IY.
Ae High
Frequency
Dc High
Selecl.bl.
Sel. cl.bl.
S. I.cl.bl.
300 MHz
300 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
Nc
Nc
60 MHz
Ne
Ne
Nc
140 MHz
Ne
50
45
50
50
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
55 MHz
105 MHz
80 MHz
205 MHz
75 MHz
300 MHz
70 MHz
60 MHz
90 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
105
75
215
75
430
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
so MHz
45
45
40
45
40
290 MHz
185 MHz
90 MHz
85 MHz
310 MHz
180 MHz
150 MHz
90 MHz
70 MHz
150 MHz
70 MHz
Nc
1 MHz
Ne
140 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
320 MHz
70
60
85
65
95
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
100 MHz
80 MHz
165 MHz
90 MHz
360 MHz
45
45
40
45
40
270 MHz
150 MHz
90 MHz
85 MHz
280 MHz
155 MHz
130 MHz
85 MHz
70 MHz
130 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
125 MHz
100
75
160
75
220
70
55
80
60
85
100
70
150
75
215
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Nc
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
so MHz
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Nc
1 MHz
Ne
55 MHz
55 MHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
Ne
70 MHz
60 MHz
95 MHz
70 MHz
1 MHz
95 MHz
CUrrent
430
310
195
660
55 MHz
400 MHz
"
Ac High
Current
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
80 MHz
170 MHz
400 MHz
P63021
AM 503
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
185 MHz
160 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
75
65
100
75
55
50
70
55
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
100 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
55 MHz
45 MHz
Ne
, MHz
Ne
55 MHz
180 MHz
140 MHz
50 MHz
45 MHz
-40 MHz
so MHz
45 MHz
1 MHz
50 MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
70 MHz
125 MHz
85 MHz
70 MHz
125 MHz
70 MHz
Ne
1 MHz
Ne
115 MHz
85
70
60
85
70
1
85
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
50
1
45
45
50
1
45
45
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
45 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
45 MHz
40 MHz
45 MHz
1 MHz
45MHz
45MHz
40
40
35
40
40
1
40
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
If there I, no b.ndp ... , peclfled Ih. prob./ plug·'n comb ination " comp.tlbl.
but not recomm. nd. d .
•• = Option 09 Malnfr.m.
Nc = Ho t comp.ll bl•
••• = R.qulr.,
1101 Pow.r Supply when u.. d wllh 7134, 7854 , 7803 , 7633,
7823 or 7113.
RECOMMENDED COMBINATIONS
MAINFRAME
7104
Time B •••
7904
R7903
Sing le ti me base
7B53A
Dual time base with mixed sweep
7B53A Opt 05
7B53A with tv sync trigg ering
7B80
Single time base (used al so as
de layed time base)
7885
Single time base with de layin g an d
delay swee p fun ct ion
7B92A
Dual time base wit h d isp lay switc hing
7B10
Single ti me base (used also as
delayed ti me base)
7B15
Single time base with delayi ng and
de lay sweep funct ion
INo trace separat ion on R7704 onl y.
2No ma inframe read out .
~
7844/R
7854
7834
•
PERFORMANCE FEATURE
7B50A
152
7000 SERIES MAINFRAMES AND TIME BASES
~
•
•
7704A
R7704
7603/R
7603N11
7633/R
7623A/R
7613/R
INDICATES RECOMMENDED COMB INATION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
. 1'1
•
. 1'1
•
•
•
. 1' )
•
•
•
. (2 )
. (2)
. 12)
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEK
7000 SERIES VERTICAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
PLUG-IN AMPLIFIER
PAGE
PERFORMANCE
FEATURE
7A11
'.7
Low ~c ap. cl·
tance FET
probe
amplifier
MIN DEFL
FACTOR
5 mV/ dlv
ACCUAACY l
2%
(Integral)
WITHOUT PROBE
7100
FAMILY
(o·e to
250 MHz
T'
1." ns
BW
250 MHz
7904
R7903
7812AOJ,1
T,
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106-·
65 MHz P8055
3.5 na P6053·
3.5 ns P6106··
5.4 ns P6055
105 MHz PS053B"
l OS MHz P6106""
65 MHz P6055
3.4 ns P6053B3,4 ns P6106°5." ns P6055
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz PS106""
65 MHz PS055
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106"
65 MHz P6055
3.5 ns P6053B3.5 ns PS10S-5,4 ns PS055
95 MHz PS053B"
95 MHz P61OS-·
65 MHz P6055
3.7 ns P60S3B3.7 ns P61OS"
5.4 ns P6055
100 MHz P6053B"
100 MHz P6106-·
65 MHz PS055
3.5 ns PSOS3B"
3.5 ns P6106°·
5.4 nl PS055
SO MHz P6053B"
60 MHz P6106-50 MHz PS055
100 MHz PS053B"
100 MHz P610S""
65 MHz P6055
3.5 ns P6053B"
3.5 ns P6106-·
5.4 ns PS055
SO MHz P6053B·
60 MHz P6106""
50 MHz PS055
100 MHz PS053B"
100 MHz P610S o 65 MHz PS055
3.5 ns PS053B3 .5 ns P61OS"·
5.4 ns PS055
55 MHz P6053B"
55 MHz P61OS o •
45 MHz PS055
1.• ns
SIG OUT
BW
140 MHz
BW
200 MHz
T,
1.8 "'
1144/R
1100
FAMILY
(OOC to
3S·C)
BW
715.. '
7834
n04A
Opt 9
(DOC to
30·C)
noo
FAMILY
T,
1.S ns
BW
170 MHz
T,
n04A
(DOC to
50·C)
70 MHz
BW
170 MHz
SIG OUT
BW
(DOC 10
2.1 nl
SIG OUT
BW
T,
Rno ..
200 MHz
2.1 ns
70 MHz
BW
150 MHz
T,
2.4 ns
SO·C)
7603/R
7633/R
(OOC to
50·C)
7623A/R
1613/R
(O·C to
7600
FAMILY
and
50·C)
STORAGE 7803N11'
FAMtLY
(DOC to
50·C)
78120'
(O·C 10
40·C)
1A1SA
184
Low cOlt
convant ional
7AliA
184
Wide bandwidth conventlanal
amp lifier
5 mVld lv
(0.5 mV/ d lv)'
2%
amp lifier
5 mVl d lv
Input
1.5%
7104
3S·C)
7100
FAMILY
(O·C to
30·C)
BW
1A13
186
Differenti al
de offset,
hlgh-Ireq
emrr amp llfier
1 mV/ d lv
80 MHz
Inp ut
7A17
186
Low coal ,
easy to
custom i ze
amplifier
7Al.
165
DUIIchannel
ampl ifier
50 mV/ dlv
5 mV/ d lv
-
2%
225 MHz
1.6 ns
80 MHz
225 MHz
10 mV/ dlv
2%
150 MHz
4.4 " S
7AlI
188
Wide bandwidth 50 (I
input
amp lifier
7A22
187
Dc-coupled,
1A21
185
Oualchannel
amplif ier
7A24
188
Dualchannel
500
amp lif ier
10 ~V/dlv
5 mV/ dlv
5 mV/dlv
~:f,~~~~~~al
3%
75 MHz
2 .• ns
• .7 ns
150 MHz
75 MHz
2%
7A2.
188
Widelt
Bandwidth
Single
Channel
amplifier
2%
10 mV/dlv
2%
2%
200 MHz
1000 MHz
600 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
400 MHz
0.6 ns
300 ns
± g%
D,g ns
1.8 nl
500 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
3SO MHz
200 MHz
500 MHz
1.0 ns
1.8 ne
0.8 ns
0.38
n,
1.6 ns
2.4 ns
4.7 nl
0.8 n,
350 n,
±9%
70 MHz
140 MHz
15 MHz
70 MHz
300 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
140 MHz
140 MHz
300 MHz
80 MHz
200 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
"00 MHz"
1 MHz
± 10%
300 MHz
180 MHz
..00 MHz
1.S ns
2.4 ns
0.0 ns
350 "S
± 9%
1.2 n,
300 MHz
4.4 ns
..... ns
80 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
400 MHz"
1 MHz
± 10%
1.8 ns
2." ns
" .7 nl
0.9 ns
350 nl
± 9%
1.2 ns
170 MHz
150MHz
250 MHzS
1 MHz
± 10%
200 MHz
1.5 ns
350 ns
± 9%
200 MHz
" .4 ns
75MHz
2.4 ns
2.1 ns
".7 ns
4.7 nl
75 MHz
4.7 nl
55 MHz
70 MHz
15 MHz
55 MHz
80 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
75 MHz
160 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
200 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
2.2 ns
2." ns
" .7 ns
" .7 ns
55 MHz
15 MHz
70 MHz
75 MHz
150 MHz
55 MHz
1.9 ns
0.9 n,
lS0 MHz
400 MHz
1.9 ns
0.9 ns
170 MHz
1.8 ns
250 MHz
2.1 ne
1.5 ns
70 MHz
70 MHz
80 MHz
200 MHz
ISO MHz
200 MHz
1.8 ns
350 ns
±9%
1.8 nl
2.4 ns
80 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
1.8 ns
70 MHz
70 MHz
80 MHz
160 MHz
140 MHz
175 MHz
150 MHz
75 MHz
175 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
2,4 ns
4.7 ns
2.0 ns
350 ns
±9%
2.2 ns
2.5 ns
2.0 ns
4.7 ns
2." ns
SO MHz
60 MHz
15 MHz
50 MHz
65 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
60 MHz
60 MHz
65 MHz
100 MHz
SIG OUT
BW
60 MHz
BW
100 MHz
75 MHz PS016
55 MHz P6055
S5 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz
100 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
100 MHz
100 MHz
T'
3.5 ns
5.0 ns PSOlS
6." ns PS055
5.4 ns
3 .5 ns
3.5 ns
4.7 ns
3.5 ns
350 ns
± 9%
3.5 nl
3.5 nl
SIG OUT
BW
60 MHz
55 MHz P6016
45 MHz P605S
SO MHz
60 MHz
BW
Tr
(Calcull'ed)
60 MHz
5.0 ns
65 MHz
6.0 ns
60 MHz
S.7 ns
80 MHz
15 MHz
5.0 ns
50 MHz
65 MHz
1 MHz
± 10%
60 MHz
60 MHz
65 MHz
65 MHz
6.0 ns
60 MHz
5.0 na
I MHz ±10%
350 na ±9%
80 MHz
5.0 n.
80 MHz
5.0 nl
60 MHz
5.0 ne
"Bandwidth i. 325 MHz to 10 mV/ dly.
' Bandwidth Is 200 MHz at 10 mV/d lv .
• AII 7000 Ser ies Plug-I ns are compatible w ith the 7603N Opt 11 . However,
~~rta~~ not meet the rigid envi ronmental specifications required by the
Sy.tem Environmental Speclficltlon • • Operating al titude to 15,000 feet. Non.operating to 50 ,000 feet.
'Accuracy percentages apply to all deflection factors . Plug-in gain must be
let at the dellectlon factor designated on 8ach plug-in . When a probe Is
usad , the ga in must be set with the calibration al gnal applied to the probe
tip. The calibration signal Is supplied by an external ca li brator whose
accuracy is within 0.25% .
10btalned with lOX gai n at reduced bandwidth of 10 MHz.
JAefer to Transi ent Digitizer, 7912AD not available with signal outputs .
3.5 ns
·P6053B has Trace Identity
··P6106 has Ground Reference
' Bandwidth with equ ivalent lime sampling and time display only.
IFully programmable mainframe. 7A16P Programmable Amplifier recommended. 7A16P provides 200 MHz, 1.8 nl In 7912AO and 80 MHz, 5.0 n8 In
76120 , see page 113.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 7000 SERIES MAINFRAMES AND PLUG· INS
78120
1t12AO
·7854
7104
7904
R1903
7844
R7844
1834
1704A
Rn04
7S03
R7603
7S03NMS
7533,
7623A,
1613
em
In
em
In
em
In
17.8
7
4S .3
19
67.9
26.75
17.8
7
4S .3
19
S7.9
26 .75
34 .8
13.7
30.5
12
62 .7
24 .7
34 .5
13.6
30 .5
34.3
13.5
30.5
32 .8
12.9
17.8
7.0
34 .5
13.6
34 .5
13.6
29 .0
11 .4
13.3
5.25
29.2
11 .5
30 .5
12.0
13 .3
5.25
12.7
46 .3
19.0
62.7
24 .7
24 .6
9.7
S4.0
25 .2
21 .2
8.7
59 .7
23 .5
46 .3
56 .6
22 .3
7.1
2.8
36 .6
14 .5
kg
Ib
25
55
22.7
50
Shipping
kg
Ib
20 .4
45
28.1
62
13.S
30
28 .2
82
20 .4
Not
13.S
30
19.0
42
Dlmen.lon.
Haight
Wldl h
Length
12.0
12.0
59 .2
23 .5
59 .2
23 .3
13.5
5.3
46 .3
19.0
57.9
22.6
19.6
43.6
14.5
32
12.3
27
25 .4
5S
20
44
2 3.6
52
30.5
48.3
30 .5
30.5
17.8
7.0
46 .3
12.0
19.0
63 .0
24 .8
12.0
57.7
22.7
22 .1
8.7
23 .8
12.0
58 .9
23 .2
19.0
60.5
56 .9
22 .4
61.0
24 .0
16.3
36
21.3
47
15.0
33
16. 1
35 .5
21.3
47
13.6
30
19.5
43
20 .0
44
35 .0
77
13.6
R7633,
PLU G-INS
R7S23A,
SI NGLE DO UBLE
R7613
19.0
5.0
12.1
5.0
14.0
5.5
36 .6
14.5
Weight. (approx)
32.S
72
26.5
63
30
20 .8
4S
45
32 .7
72
14.5
32
28 .2
62
0.9
2
2.3
5
4.1
9
5.4
12
·7854 Calculator dimensions and weights , He i ght 2.7 In . (6 .9 em), Width 10.9 In . (27.7 cm) , Length 6.5 in. (16 .5 cm ).
153
TEK REFERENCE
7000
SERIES
TEK Lab Cart Model 3
Model 3 Lab Cart accepts all 7CXXl Series
Oscilloscopes. A lockable drawer for storage and
a movable shelf for additional instrumentation are
included. The shelf accepts TM 500 Test and
Measurement Instruments, 5000 Series
Oscilloscopes, or 400 Series Oscilloscopes.
For full details see SCOPE-MOBILE'" Cart section,
page 344.
SUMMARIZED CAMERA CHARACTERISTICS
LENS
RECOMMENDED
CAMERA
PERFORMANCE
FEATURES
AND
BENEFITS
OSCILLOSCOPES
FILM BACKS
FIELD OF VIEW
(with 3.25 x 4.25 In
Polaroid Film
except
where noted)
ORO 1NARILY
USED
OPTIONAL AND
INTERCHANGEABLE
PRICE
with
Pack
back
MAXIMUM
RELATIVE
APERTURE
MAG
RELATIVE
SPEED'
Fastest writing speed
with 0.5 mag lens .
fl1.2
0.5
3.0
8x 10 cml
3.15 x 3.93 in
Polaroid
Pack
4 x 5 In Graflok
$1935
C-51P
7904, R7903,
7844, 7704A
7854
C-53P
All except
7603
7603Nl1S
General-purpose
with 0.85 mag lens .
f/1.9
0.85
1.0
8 x 10 cml
3.15 x 3.93 in
Polaroid
Pack
4 x 5 in Graflok
$1590
C-59AP
7603
7603NllS
General-purpose
at low price.
fl2 .8
0.67
0.65
10.2 x 12.7 cm/
4 x 5 In
Polaroid
Pack
4 x 5 in Graflok
$1165
Low cost.
1/16
0.67 or
0.85
selectable
0.02
9.76 x 12.2 cm
Polaroid
Pack
None
$500
C-5C
All
'Relative light-gathering power.
C-SO Series Camera Adapter, part number 016-0249-D3, included with camera.
For full details see Camera section, page 321 .
Following Is a list 01 currently available Application Notes l or 7000 Serles_
Title
ULTRASONIC MEASUREMENTS with digital accuracy
EASIER, FASTER, MORE
ACCURATE Oscilioscope
timing measurement
X-Y DISPLAYS with interval
timing lor measuring SOA
DAC MEASUREMENTS :
The sampling oscllioscope
approach
SeR GATING WAVEFORM
MEASUREMENTS w ith highresolution digital accuracy
Digital delay In an oscllioscope
makes your radar pulse time
delay measurements quicker,
easier and more accurate
Measuring time interval
between non-adjacent digital
word train pulses or mUlti-echo
radar pulses
Measuring memory core I/O
signals with digital accuracy
Measuring disc drive time and
access voltages with Tektronix
7000 Series Digital Plug-ins
154
Featuring
7603/7A22/7D15/7B53A
Part No.
AX-3681
Timing measurements between
non-adjacent pulses. Ultrasonic
transdu cers
7B85/7880
Delayed sweep & delta
time measurements
7D1517A1817A22
X-Y power dissipation
measurements
7S14/7012/ M2/7B92A/ 7904
Measuring DAC (digital analog
converter) settling time
7D12/M217A16A (lour compartment main Irames) SCR
measurements. Absolute and
relative (two paint) voltage
monitoring
7011
The measurement 01 radar
pulse delay time Is given as an
example 01 7011 operation
7015
Demonstrates the ability of the
7015 to measure the time
between adjacent pulses with
digital counter accuracy
7000 Series Digital Plug-ins
Demonstrates how digital
plug-ins can be used to make
accurate pulse parameter
measurements both 01 amplitude and pulse timing
7000 Series Digital Plug-ins
Use a single CRT display to
perlorm both digital and
analog analysis 01 complex
waveforms
Title
DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
combined within Tektronix
Oscilloscope give unparalieled
accuracy and capability
A-3269
AX-3957
AX-3632
MEASUREMENT VARIETY
An Engineering challenge
leaturing the 7854
GPIB COMMUNICATION
with the 7854
A-2693
AX-2659- 2
AX-2680-2
AX-2686-1
Pulse and digital timing me asurements-a beller technique
Using storage to lind troublesome logic glitches
Variable persistence storage
applications
Bistable storage applications
AX-2687-1
Introduction to 7854 Oscllloscope Measurement to Programming Techniques
Featuring
7000 Series digital plug-ins
(counter- timers , DVM 's, temperature probes , sample-hold
modules) with application
examples.
7854/WAVEFORM
CALCULATOR
demonstrating basic operation, application software for
percent overshoot, data
monitoring and histogram .
7854/4052 and 7854/4924
types 01 I/O transfers, transmiss ion lormats, and operational software in TEK Basic
compatible with any 4050
Series computer
Part No.
A-3002
7B8017B85
General overview 01 the operation of the 7B85 and 7B80
Delta-Time Measurement
Plug-ins
7633
Shows how the 7633 Storage
Oscilloscope can be used to
capture and evaluate glitches
AX-3379-1
7613/5441
AX-3 198
Describes various applications
for variable persistence
storage oscilioscopes
Tektronix Storage Oscilioscopes. Describes various
applications lor bistable
storage oscilloscopes
7854 Programming Techniques
AX-4281
AX-4416
AX-3085
AX-3199
AX-4682
TEK
7000 SERIES
NON·STORAGE MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
7104 1 GHz General Purpose ........................
7904/R7903 500 MHz
General Purpose ........ .. ........... .. ... .. .... .. ......... ..
7844/R7844 400 MHz Dual Beam .............. ..
7704A/R7704200 MHz General Purpose ....
7603/R7603 100 MHz General Purpose ......
7603N 11 S Ruggedized
Oscilloscope System .. ..... ... ... ... .. ..... .... .. .. ... .. ...
156
158
160
162
164
166
A high performance instrument system begins with the basic oscilloscope building
block - the 7000 Series Mainframe. Each
mainframe consists of a cathode-ray tube, a
power supply, electron beam deflection systems, and the switching circuitry necessary
to integrate a versatile and complete measurement system.
The TEKTRONIX 7104 is a 1 GHz oscilloscope featuring the fastest rise time (350
ps) and writing speed (20 cm/ns) available
today.
Choose from a variety of features , including
bandwidth , dual-beam, alphanumeric displays, rackmounting , and three- or fourplug-in flexibility.
1 GHz
TEK GENERAL
PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPE
7104
Ultra High Writing Speed
1 GHz at 10 mV/ div
0,38 ns Risetime
200 psec/div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Horizontal Bandwidth 350 MHz
Phase Compensation Option-Phase
Matching to 250 MHz
CRT Readout
APPLICATIONS
High Speed Semiconductor Design
Laser and High Energy Research
Digital Communications
The 7104 has both the highest writing speed and
highest bandwidth available in a general-purpose
oscilloscope today.
The 7104 with 7A29 Amplifier plug-ins provides 1
GHz realtime vertical bandwidth at 10 mV/div.
Combined with the 7B1017B15 Time Base plugins, having fastest sweep speeds of 200 ps/div,
very high-speed signals can now be measured
with confidence.
The 7104's outstanding writing speed means
unsurpassed single-shot capability, with trace
brightness about one·thousand times that of
conventional oscilloscopes. Any single-shot signal
within the 7104's bandwidth can be seen directly
on the CRT in average room light. Also, singleshot photography is now simple and
straightforward, using standard oscillographic
cameras and film without high-speed enhancement techniques.
Horizontal bandwidth of 350 MHz, with the X-V
phase compensation Option 02, gives accuratE:
X·Y displays to 250 MHz. Designers can now
directly obtain V-I curves for high-speed switching
power supply evaluation or monitor performance
of digital communication systems using phase
constellation displays.
156
7000
TEK
SERIES
VERTICAL SYSTEM
1 GHz at 10 mV/dlv
Distinct Image Viewing
Circuit faults such as h igh frequency pulse overshoot
and ringing can easily be observed with the 7104's 1
GHz bandwidth .
A digital circuit that shows no jitter on a conventional
oscilloscope Is found to have a 2.0 ns jitter when
viewed with the distinct Image viewing capability 01
the 7104.
Channela - Two left-hand plug-in compartments: compatible
with all 7000 Serles Plug-ins. 6andwidth determined by mainframe and plug-In unit.
Vertical Dlaplay Modes Chopped Mode -
LEFT. ALT. ADD. CHOP. RIGHT.
Repetition rate is ... 1 MHz.
Vertical Trace Separation - Operative when any vertical signal is displayed with both A and 6 time bases. Positions 6
trace at least 4 div above and below A trace.
Delay Line
waveform.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel a - Two right-hand plug-in compartments : compatible with the time bases of the 7610 and 7680 Serles and the
76 50A and 7692A. The 7650 Serles (except the 7650A). the
76 70 Series and the 7692 (non A) are not recommended. 7000
Serles Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-Ins may also be
used.
Horizontal Display Modes -
A. ALT. CHOP. 6 .
Falteat Cellbrated Sweep Rate or 76 15.
Chopped Mode -
200 ps/div with the 7610
Repetition rate is ... 200 kHz.
Bandwidth - Dc to 350 MHz. With delay compensation (7104
Option 02 using 7A 19s or 7A29s. at least one of which has the
Variable Delay Option. 6 Horizontal compartment only). within
2° from de to 50 MHz after adjusting variable delay for balance
at 35 MHz. Phase balance can be obtained at any frequency up
to 250 MHz. Phase shift is within 2 ° Irom de to 50 kHz without
delay compensation.
Writing Speed : 20 cm/ns
OUTPUTS /INPUTS
+ Sawtooth -
User selectable from A or 6 horizontal. Output
voltage is 50 mV/div ( ± 5%) into 50 n. 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1
MD. Output R is ",,950 11.
+ Gate - Posltive-going rectangular waveform user selectable from A or 6 horizontal. Output voltage is 0.5 V ( ± 10%) into
50 D. 10 V ( ± 10%) Into 1 MD. Output R is = 950 O.
Sig Out - Selected by 6 TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage is 25 mV/div Into 50 D. 0.5 V Into 1 MI1. Bandwidth
depends upon vertical plug-in. Output R is = 950 D.
Horizontal Bandwidth: 350 MHz
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the left of the
CRT provides power. ground. and remote single-sweep reset
access for C-50 Series Camera.
Probe Power - Two rear-panel connectors provide correct
operating voltages lor two active probes.
Slngfe-lweep Ready Indic ators A and B - + 5 V. rear panel
6NC outputs for single sweep ready indications.
View of a single clocking pulse 0.8 ns rise and 2 ns
pulse width .
CALfBRATOR
Voftage Output - Squarewave posl tiv~oing from ground.
Ranges are 40 mY . 0.4 V. and 4 V Into 100 kD: 4 mY . 40 mY.
and 0.4 V into 50 D. Amplitude accuracy Is within 1%: repetition
rate is 1 kHz within 0.25%.
The Irans l ent load line of a fast swi tching franslstor
in a power supply prototype (switching tlme = 10 ns)
Is easily measured for compliance with safe operating
area . (Horizonta/=V; vertical = I).
Currant Output - 40 rnA rectangular waveshape with optional
current-loop accessory (01 2-0341-00) connected to calibrator
output. Output R is 450 11.
Gratlcule/Readout, Single-shot - Ground closure. rear panel
6NC input initiates one frame of CRT read-out and the GRAT
ILLUM Is illuminated for ",0.5 s.
External Single-sweep Reset - Ground closure. rear panel
6 NC , provides input to reset sweep.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Power Requlrementa - Une voltage ranges. 90 to 132 V ac
and 180 to 250 V ac. Une frequency. 48 to 440 Hz . Max power
consumption. 215 W. 3.3 A at 90 V line. 60 Hz.
Dlmenalona and Weights -
See page 153.
For Recommended Cameras -
See page 154
For Recommended Plug-Ins -
See page 152.
Plug-in Compatibility
7104 ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not included)
7104 Oscilloscope .__ ._ .. _................... $18,945
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (0.85 cm/div) graticule with variable
iIIominatlon. Accelerating potential is 12.5 kV with P31 Phosphor standard.
OPTIONS
Re.dout and Gralicule Modes - Each continuous or pulsed
(pulse source selecton by front panel controls: + Gate. external. manual). The pulsed graticule is on lor ",0.5 s.
Option 02 X-Y Horiz Comp .................................... Add 5300
Option 03 Emc Modification ..... ............................. Add 5300
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Min Photographic w riting speed (using Polaroid film
type 106, 20,000 ASA w/out film fogging) - 20 em/ns (w/o
blue filter). Phosphor: standard P31 . Camera: TEKTRONIX
C-53. 1/1.9. 1:0.85 lens.
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V / 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ 1 OA ........................ No Charge
Autofocua - Reduces the need for additional manual focusing
with changes In intensity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder -
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A ............... No Charge
Umits display within graticule area.
External Z-Axla fnput - 2 V p-p for full intensity range. A
positive signal blanks the trace. Max input voltage is 15 V (dc
+ peak ac) and p-p ac. Input is dc coupled.
Plug-In compatib i lity. The 7104 Is compatible with
standard 7000 Series plug-in units that provide for full
7104 system perlormance .
The 7001 and 7002 Logic Analyzer. are not recommended
lor use with the 7104 Mainframe. Such use will void the
7104 warranty.
7A29 - Vertical amplifier to bw 01 mainlrame: 10 mV/div to 1
V/div vertical sensitivity.
7B 10 - Delayed timebase (Similar to 76 80) with 200 ps/div to
0.2 s/div calibrated sweep speed ; triggering up to 1 GHz.
7B 15 - Delaying timebase (similar to 7685) with 200 ps/div to
0.2 sldiv calibrated sweep speed : triggering up to 1 GHz : capable 01 .l time measurements in conjunction with 7610.
157
500 MHz
PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK GENERAL
7904
R7903
500 MHz at 10 mV fdiv
0.8 ns Risetime
500 ps fdiv Fastest
Calibrated Sweep Rate
Greater Than 15 cmf ns Enhanced
Writing Speed
CRT Readout
Over 30 Compatible Plug-ins
900 MHz FET Probe Available
APPLICATIONS
Digital Design
Radar
Laser Research
The 7904 and 5.25 in rackmount R7903 are high
bandwidth , general-purpose oscilloscopes . The
7A1 9 Amplifier/7904 Mainframe attains SOO MHz
at 10 mV/div. A 7A19 variable delay option allows
for the matching of signal transit times of two
plug-ins and their probes to better than 50 ps.
The P6201 1X FET probe gives you high impedance and wide bandwidth . It has a 900 MHz
bandwidth by itself, and in combination with the
7A 1917904, it provides a system bandwidth of 450
MHz at 10 mV.
7904 and R7903 -
VERTICAL SYSTEM
R7903 -
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channell - Two left-hand plug-in compartments ; compatible
with all 7000 Series Plug-ins. 8andwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit.
Single Channel - Right-hand plug-in compartment compatible with time bases of 7880 and 7890 Series. 7000 Series
Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-Ins may also be used.
Model of Operation -
Feetest Calibrated Sweep Rate 7892A.
Chopped Mode -
LEFT. ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
Repetition rate is = 1 MHz.
Trace Separation Range (Dual·sweep Model) - The 8
trace can be positioned 4 divisions above or below the A trace
(7904 only).
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform when using 7880 and 7890 Series TIme 8ases. 7850
Series not recommended.
7904 and R7903
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard - Internal 8 x 10 em graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential Is 24 kV with P31 Phosphor
standard.
Option 01 , Without CRT Readout -
The CRT, the major contributor to the performance of the 7904 and R7903, has good visual
brightness and an 8 x 10 cm display area.
7904 -
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments; compatible with time bases 01 the 7880 and 7890 Series. 7000 Series
Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-ins may also be used .
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate 78 92A.
Chopped Mode -
500 ps/div with the
Repetition rate Is = 200 kHz.
X·Y Mode - Phase shift is within 2· from de to 35 kHz without phase correction (de to I MHz with phase oorrection, Option 02) between vertical and horizontal channels. 8 andwidth is
de to at least I MHz.
158
500 ps/dlv with the
No CRT readout.
Option 04, Max Brightness CRT With Reduced Area - Internal 4 x 5 em graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating
potential Is 24 kV . PI I Phosphor provides max writing rate.
This provides extremely high photographic and information
writing speed and Increases the visibility of low-rep-rate. highspeed signals.
Option 78, Pll Pholphor
Option 10, Pulled Graticule (R7903 Only) - Provides a
means of pulsing the graticule lights at a preset level coincident
with a single-shot event in one exposure. The graticule lights
may be pulsed by the event, an external ground closure, or a
front panel pushbutton. If the mainframe is equipped with CRT
readout, Option 10 provides additional controls and inputs for
CRT readout pulsed operation .
7000
TEK
SERIES
POWER REQUIREMENTS
7904 Power Requirements - Lme voltage ranges. 90 to 132
V ac and 180 to 264 V ac. Line frequency. 48 to 440 Hz. Max
power consumptIOn. 190 W. 2.5 A at 115 V line. 60 Hz.
R7903 Power Requirements - Line voltage ranges. 90 to 132
V ac and 180 to 264 V ac. Line frequency. 48 to 440 Hz. Max
power consumption. 160 w. 2 A at 115 V line. 60 Hz.
7904 Included Accessories - Test adapter (012-0092-00):
two 18 In test leads (012-0087-00): 9 pin cable-mount ptug
(134-0049-00).
R7903 Included Accessories - Test adapter (012-0092-00):
two 18 In test leads,A012-0087-00): rack-mounting hardware.
Dimensions and Weights -
See page 153.
For Recommended Cameras For Recommended Plug-Ins -
See page 154.
See page 152.
The R7903 requires only 5.25 In 01 rack height In a standard 19 In rack . It Is lan -cooled and comes complete with
slide-out chassis tracks.
Typical Photographic Writing Speed
Using The Optional P11 Phosphor and
Polaroid Type 612 20,000 ASA Film
without Film Fogging
CRT
Camera
Standard
8 x 10 em
C-51P
Option 04
4 x 5 em
Len.
Writing Speed
em/ns
t/l .2
1:0.5
2.5
4
In typical applications, P31 Phosphor has approximately one-half the writing speed of P11 Phosphor. The writing speed can be increased by
using controlled film fogging with a writing speed
enhancer (camera accessory).
+GATE - Positive-going rectangular waveform derived from
A. B. or Delayed Gate. internally selectable. Output voltage is
0.5 V ( ± 10%) into 50 Il. 10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. Rise time Is 5
ns or less into 50 Il. Output R is = 950 Il.
Sig Out - Selected by B TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage Is 25 mV/dlv into 50 II. 0.5 V/div into 1 Mil. Bandwidth
depends upon vertical plug-In. See the Vertical System Specifications Chart. Output R is ",,950 Il.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the left of the
CRT provides power. ground. and remote single-sweep reset
access for C-50 Series Cameras.
Probe Power - Two rear -panel connectors provide correct
operating Voltages for two active probes.
R7903 -
OUTPUTSIINPUTS
Limits disptay within graticule area.
Baam Finder -
Extemel Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for full intensity range. A
positive signal blanks the trace. Max input voltage Is 15 V (de
+ peak ac) and pop ac. Input is de couptled.
7904 OPTIONS
Option 01 without CRT Readout ........................... Sub 5300
Option 02 X-Y Horiz Comp .................................... Add $250
Option 03 Emc Modification .................................. Add 5300
Option 04 Max Brightness CRT with 4x5 cm
Display (Specify Phosphor) .................................. Add $500
Option 78 P 11 Phosphor ......................................... Add 535
7904 CONVERSION KITS
040-0605-03 CRT Readout .......................................... $ 1000
(Standard)
040-0606-00 X-Y Horiz Comp ....................................... 5260
Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (Into 1
Mil). Output voltage Is 50 mV/dlv ( ± 15%) into 50 Il. 1 Vldiv
( ± 10%) Into 1 Mil. Output R is ",,950 II.
040-0570-00 Emc Modification ..................................... 5420
+ Sawtooth -
Autolocus - Reduces the need for additional manual focusing
with changes in Intensity after focus control has been set.
7904 ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not Included)
7904 Oscilloscope .............................. $8000
+Gate
- Positlve-going rectangular waveform derived from
Main or Auxiliary Gate. Output voltage 0.5V ( ± 10%) into 50 Il.
10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. Rise time is 7 ns or less Into 50 Il.
Output R is "" 950 II.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 Vl l0A ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 Vl ISA ............... No Charge
Output Wa.eshepe - Rectangular posit ive-going from
ground. 1 kHz ( ± 0.25%). dc or B Gate ~ 2.
Sig Out - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switches. Output
voltage Is 25 mV/dlv into 50 Il. 0.5 V/div into 1 Mil. Bandwidth
depends on the ver1ical ptug-in. See the Vertical System SpeciflCStions Chart. Output R is ",, 950 Il.
Voltage Rangas - 4 mY. 40 mY. 0.4 V. 4 V. 40 V into an
open circuit; 2 mY. 20 mY . 0.2 V. 0.4 V into 50 II ( ± 1 %).
Single-sweep Ready Indicator - + 5 V. rear panet BNC output. for single-sweep ready indication.
Cu".ent Output -
External Single-sweep Reset - Ground closure. rear panel
BNC. provides Input to reset sweep.
Option 01 without CRT Readout ........................... Sub 5300
CRT Readout, Inhibit - Ground closure. rear panel BNC input
locks out CRT readout. Not available wi1h Option 10.
Option 04 Max Brightness CRT with 4.5 cm
7904 -
CALIBRATOR
40 mA dc or 1 kHz.
R7903 -
CALtBRATOR
(Not A.aileble with Option 10)
Output Wa.eshape - Rectangular positive-going from
ground. 1 kHz ( ± 0.25%).
Voltage Ranges - 4 mV. 40 mV. 0.4 V. 4 V into an open
circuit : 4 mY . 40 mY. 0.4 V into 50 II ( ± 1%).
CRT Readout, Single-shot - Ground closure. rear panel BNC
input initiates one frame of CRT readout. Not available with
Option 10 separately. but in combination with the pulsed gratlcule Input.
Cu".ent Output - 40 mA rectangular waveshape with optional
current-loop accessory (012-0341 -00) connected to calibrator
output. Output R is 450 II.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the left of the
CRT provides power. ground. and remote single-sweep reset
access for C-50 Series Cameras.
7904 -
OUTPUTSI INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (into 1
Mil). Internally selectable from A or B horizontal. Output voltage IS 50 mV/div ( ± 5%) into 50 Il. 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1 Mil.
Output R is ~ 950 Il.
Probe Power - Two front-panel connectors provide correct
operating voltages for two active probes. Not available for
R7903 Option 10.
R7903 -
OUTPUTS/INPUTS OPTIONS
Option 10, Pulsed Gratlcule - No CRT readout single-shot
input. CRT readout inhibit input. calibrator. and probe power.
Single-shot graticule and CRT readoul (ground closure) rearpanel BNC input is added. Initiates one frame of CRT readout
and pulses graticule. CRT readout Inputs are not functional
with Option 01.
R7903 ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not Included)
R7903 Oscilloscope ............................ $7545
R7903 OPTIONS
Option 03 Emc Modification ................ .................. Add 5300
Display (Specify Phosphor) .................................. Add 5500
Option 10 Pulsed Gratlcule ................................... Add $ 150
Option 78 Pll Phosphor ...... ................................... Add 535
R7903 CONVERSION KITS
040-0605-03 CRT Readout .......................................... 51000
040-0647-00 Emc Modification ..................................... 5280
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al Universal Euro 220 V / 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 Vl ISA ............... No Charge
159
MHz
DUAL BEAM OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK 400
7844
R7844
400 MHz Bandwidth
0.9 ns Risetime
Dual Beam
Full Vertical Crossover Switching
8 x 10 cm Display
CRT Readout
1 ns/div Max Calibrated Sweep
APPLICATIONS
Radar/Lidar
Destructive Testing
SCR Switching
The 7844 and 7 inch rackmount R7844 are wide
bandwidth , dual-beam oscilloscopes designed
primarily for fast, single-shot events. Unique features such as pulsed graticule and pulsed crt
readout allow you to photograph vertical and
horizontal scale factors , test date, test number,
and other pertinent data before or after an event.
Vertical signal crossover switching permits you to
view a single event from a single probe at two
sweep speeds.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series Plug-ins. Bandwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit.
Display Logic -
Vertical Compartment
Controlling Beam
Vertical Crossover time bases.
Beam 1
Beam 2
Left
Left
Right
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Permits viewing the same signal on two
Vertical Trace Separation em with respect to Beam 2.
Beam 1 can be positioned ± 4
Deley Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform when using 7B80 and 7B90 Series TIme Bases ; not compatible with 7B50 Series.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Chennels - Two right-hand plug-In compartments ; compat~
ble with lime bases of the 7B80 and 7B90 Series. 7000 Series
Vertical Amplifiers and specialized plug-ins may also be used.
7B53AN11 requires modification for use in the 7844.
F..test Calibrated Sweep Rate X-Y Mode Bandwidth -
160
1 ns/div.
Phase shift is within 2° from de to 50 kHz.
Dc to at least 1 MHz.
Horizontal Separation - Beam 1 can be positioned at least
0.25 em to the right and at least 0.25 em to the left of Beam 2
with a total 2 em range.
Typical Photographic Writing Speed
(Using Polaroid Type 612
20,000 ASA Film without Film Fogging)
Display Logic A
A
B
B
Beam 1
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
A
B
A
B
Beam 2
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Dual beam, full overlap. 8 x 10 em graticule with variable illumination. CRT readout intensity is adjustable with frontpanel control. Accelerating potential is 24 kV with P31 ph0sphor standard.
Option 78, P11 Phosphor.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional manual focusing
with changes in intensity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder (Beam 1 and Beam 2, Independent Controls I
- Umits display within graticule area and intensifies beam.
Eltemal Z-AlIls Inpu1 (Beam 1 and Beam 21 - 2 V p-p for
full intensity range. A positive signal blanks the trace. Max input voltage is 15 V (de + peak ael and p-p ae. Input is de
coupled.
In typical camera applications, P31 Phosphor has
about one-half the writing speed of P11 Phosphor. Writing speed can be increased by using
controlled film fogging with a writing speed
enhancer.
The photographic writing speed enhancer, Option
22, provides a preset automatic method of film
fogging for the 7844. Option 22 is recommended
for writing speed enhancement when a camera
with a writing speed enhancer is not available.
TEK
7000
SERIES
POWER REQUIREMENTS
,
-:,/\-' -
-
Line Voltage Ranges - Selectable 115 V nominal (90-132 V),
230 V nominal (180-264 V).
Line Frequency -
48 to 440 Hz.
M.. Power Con sumption -
..
235 W, 2.9 A at 60 Hz 115 V line.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
R711« - 1 rack mount hardware kit, 1 rackrnount slide guide
(351-0314-01).
'
Dimensions and We ights -
See page 153.
For Recommend ed Cameras -
See page 154.
For Recommended Plug-Ins -
See pages 152.
ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not included)
7844 Oscilloscope ........................... $11 ,900
R7844 Oscilloscope ......................... $12,320
OUTPUTSl fNPUTS
PULSED READOUT AND
GRATICULE ILLUMINATION
A and B + Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from
ground (Into 1 MO). Output voltage is 50 mV/div ( ± 15%) into
50 n, 1 V/dlv ( ± 10%) into 1 MO. Output R Is ",,950 O.
Provides a means of pulsing the gratlcule lights or CRT readout
at a preset level , coincident with a single-shot event in one
exposure. The gralicule lights or CRT readout can be pulsed by
the event , an external ground closure , or front-panel
pushbutton.
A and B + Gate - Posltlve-going rectangular waveform derived from Main or Delayed Gate. Output voltage 0.5 V ( ± 10%)
Into 50 O. 10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 MO. Rise time is 5 ns or less into
50 O. Output R is ",,950 O.
CALIBRATOR
Single-sweep Ready Indicator - + 5 V, rear panel BNC output, for single-sweep ready Indication.
Calibrator - Rectangular posillve-going w aveform from
ground, 1 kHz ( ± 0.25%).
External Single-sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel
BNC, provides input to reset sweeps.
Voltage Ranges - 4 mV, 40 mV, 0.4 V, 4 V (±1%) into an
open circuit; 0.4 mV , 4 mV, 40 mV, 0.4 V ( ± 1%) into 50 O.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the left of the
CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset
access for C-50 Series Cameras.
Current Output - 40 mA ( ± 1"10) rectangular waveshape, front
panel current loop 7844, optional current loop adapter (0120341-00) required for R7B44.
-o
z
-
:t
w
3.5
2.5
1.7
1.25
1.0
0 .83
0 .63
0 .5
0 .25
0.17
7
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V /1 SA ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Austra lian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V /1 5A ............... No Charge
This graph shows the relative photographic writ·
ing speed of the 7000 Series Mainframes and the
amplitude-speed relationship for each.
Vertical signal amplitude on the vertical scale is
shown against maximum sinewave frequency
(lower scale) and fastest rise time (upper scale).
These speeds assume a small horizontal spot ve·
locity compared to the maximum vertical velocity.
The step ramp is assumed to be a linear ramp
measured between 10% and 90% points.
6
5
4
::J
3
To obtain these minimum photographic writing
speeds, open the camera shutter before the
sweep and leave open for 5 seconds after the
sweep. Develop the film for 30 seconds at 25°C.
View with front illumination. The limit of photo·
graphic writing speed will be a barely discernable
trace in the center of the photographic image.
..J
Q.
:t
<
..J
<
Z
Option 78 Pl1 Phosphor ......................................... Add 535
PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING RATE
C
!:::
Option 22 Writing Speed Enhancer
Modification .......................... .................................. Add $400
Probe Power - Two connectors provide oorrect operating
voltages for two active probes.
STEP RISE TIME (n5)
5.2
OPTIONS
Option 03 Emc Modification .................................. Add 5300
2
CJ
(/)
40
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
400
500
1 ,000
1,500
SINE WAVE FREQUENCY (MHz)
The standard P31 Phosphor has a spectral output
that gives about one·half the photographic writing
speed of the above optional P11 Phosphor. The
visual output of the P31 Phosphor is, however,
about six times greater than that of the optional
P11 .
Amplitude .s. speed and photographic writing speed comparison of 7000 Series Mainframes using optional PII Phosphors, 20,000
ASA film and the C-51 (f/ I .2 , 1:0.5) Camera.
' 20 cml ns is the specified photographic writing speed for the
7104 Mainframe. However, it is not oorrectly comparable to the
other mainframes here because of relaxed phosphor, film and
camera requirements . The microchannel plate CRT as well as
the bright photographed image allow for these relaxed requirements. Standard P31 Phosphor is used and a C-53 (f/ l .9 ,
1 :0.85 Image) Camera.
161
200 MHz
PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEM
TEK GENERAL
7704A
R7704
Dc to 200 MHz with Optimum
Pulse Response
1.8 ns Risetime
Dc to 250 MHz Bandwidth Option
Greater than 15 cm/ ns
Enhanced Writing Speed with
Optional CRT and WSEN
CRT Readout
APPLICATIONS
Communications
Digital Design
Component Testing
The 7704 family is a wide bandwidth generalpurpose oscilloscope measurement system.
The 7704A Oscilloscope offers you the capability
to optimize the oscilloscope's response for your
type of work. For pulse analysis aberrations are
reduced below the normal level in the optimized
transient response version while still giving you a
bandwidth of 200 MHz. The 250 MHz option is
optimized for bandwidth performance for highfrequency applications. The R7704 offers a 175
MHz bandwidth.
Quite often the need arises to photograph the
waveforms that are produced. The 7704A gives
you a choice of two designs available for this
purpose: the standard 8 x 10 cm CRT and an
optional 4 x 5 cm reduced-scan CRT for high
writing-speed applications. For additional information on the Writing Speed Enhancer (WSEN) see
pages 316 and 320; for a comparison of the 7000
Series writing rate specifications see page 161 .
VERTICAL SYSTEM
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channell - Two left-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series Plug-ins. Bandwidth determined by mainframe and plug-in unit; see Vertical System Specifications
Chart.
Channell - Two right-hand plug-in compartments; compatible with all 7000 Series Plug-ins.
Option 09 Bandwidth Change (250 MHz) - 7704A vertical
circuit performance is adjusted to extend frequency response
to 250 MHz at 20 mVl div (upper - 3 dB) when 7A19 is used.
Provides additional performance for those wor1 600 hours is met as test·
ed under the following conditions: temperature + 40 · C ± 2· C;
relative humidity 70% ± 5% ; vibration 25 Hz at 0.040 in
± 0.008 in p.p amplitude for 10 minutes of eaCh ' Power On'
hour during eaCh day of the 8 hour manned sChedule; power
cycled at 4 hour intervals with 10 minutes power off for eaCh 4
hour period of the manned test schedule. An MTBF of > 2000
hours was aChieved during testing.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
(Includes Two 7A 15AN 11 Plug·lns)
Chennels - Two left· hand plug~ n oompartments. with a delay
line which allows the leading edge of the displayed waveform to
be viewed. All 7000 Series Plug.ins are oompatible (except
those which require CRT readout).
Displey Modes - LEFT. ALT. ADD. CHOP. RIGHT. Chopped
frequency is "" 1 MHz. Added mode displays signals algebra·
ically with a cmrr of 20 :1 to 25 MHz.
Bendwldth/ Sensltlv lty - Dc to 65 MHz from 5 mV/div to 10
V/div. accuracy within 2%. variable extends to 25 V/div. Max
sensitivity Is 0.5 mV at 10 MHz with lOX gain. AC- 50 ns. All amplitudes are mini·
mum and measured when working into at least 100 kll and 15
pF.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Input Voltages - 100. 11 O. 120, 220. and 240 V ac ± 10"10
Internally selectable with quick~hange jumpers with 47.5 - 440
Hz single phase line frequency. Max power consumption Is 125
W.
C281 COVER WITH ACCESSORIES
The cover provides protection during transport and packages
the included accessories.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
(All Packaged In Cover)
The P6006 Probe packages (010-0127-00); two 8 ft long 50 Il
BNC cables (012-0366-00); two BNC female to uhf male adapt·
ers (103.0015.00); two BNC male to uhffemale adapters (1030032-00); two BNC male to binding post adapters (103-003300) two BNC T connectors (103-0030-00). One set of teChnical
manuals (not packaged in cover).
Dimensions and Weight. -
See page 153.
For Recommended Cameras -
See page 154.
Triggering (Source/Sensitivity) - Intemal 0.5 cm to 50 MHz.
Ex temal. 0.25 V to 20 MHz. 0.5 V to 50 MHz. Ext + 10. 2.5 V
to 20 MHz. 5 V to 50 MHz. Triggering extends to 100 MHz with
reduced sensitivity in both Internal and External Modes. Input
R and C is 1 Mil within 2%. 20 pF within 2 pF.
Triggering Frequency Range - Ac. 30 Hz to 50 MHz ; ac If
Rej. 30 kHz to 50 MHz; ac hf Rej. 30 Hz to 50 kHz ; de. de to 50
MHz. With external level range . slope is ± 30 V.
167
TEK
7000 SERIES
CRT STORAGE MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
7000 Series
Mainframes
7000 Series
Mainframes
Storage mainframes in the 7000 Series offer
a full selection of stored writing speeds:
from =0.03 cm/p.s for mechanical, spectrum analysis, or TOR applications, to 2500
cmi p.s for capturing fast Single events such
as high speed digital logic. A selection of
storage modes offers the following features:
Non-Storage
...... .. ....... ... .. ... .. ... .......... .
155
Storage
...... .......... ........ ................ ............. 168
Digital Mainframes ...................... .................... 176
Plug-Ins ......................................................... .. 183
Bistable ..................... Long View Time
Variable
Persistence ................... High Contrast
Displays
FAST Bistable .... Captures Fast Single
or Multiple Events
FAST Variable
Persistence ......... Provides Maximum
Stored Writing Rate
7613
7623A
7633
7834
Variable
FAST
FAST
FAST
Persistence
Multimode
Multimode
Multimode
8
5 ~s 2.50 ~s 1.25 ~s
500 ns
250 ns 125 ns
7
6
5
Ui
z
o
en:;
e.w
4
3
o
::;)
I-
::::;
a..
2
::::E
4(
Graph shows the stored writing speed
needed to display a given sinewave or
step rise time at a given amplitude.
168
1
50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz
10 MHz 20 MHz
SINE WAVE FREQUENCY
50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
TEK
FAST CRT STORAGE
7000
SERIES
7000 Series Storage
Oscilliscopes
Storage, as it applies to most instruments in the
TEKTRONIX 7000 Series, involves techniques for
capturing and retaining signals within the cathode-ray tube itself, or as numeric values in digital
memory.
Bistable CRT Storage
Bistable storage, available as one storage mode
on the 7834, 7633 and 7623A Mainframes, employs a mesh between the electron gun and the
CRT phosphor. It features bright, long lasting
displays with reduced contrast.
Variable Persistence CRT Storage
Why Store?
Readout Stored with the Waveform
Fast Stored Writing Speeds
Multimode 7834/ 7633/7623A
Variable Persistence 7613
Capturing an event for detailed analysis is perhaps the most obvious application for a storage
CRT, but many other situations also call for its
unique advantages. Some examples include capturing the entire display of a slowly occurring
signal ". observing signal changes during circuit
adjustment ". comparing incoming signals with a
standard " . increasing the brightness of a repetitive signal for viewing in normal ambient light ...
reducing flicker or noise ... baby-sitting, or
unattended monitoring for a transient event ...
and enhancing other recording techniques such
as photography.
Storage Features
Since 1962, when Tektronix introduced phosphor
target bistable storage in the 564, techniques for
capturing and retaining waveforms have grown at
an explosive rate in order to keep pace with
measurement demands.
However, the language of storage-such terms
as bistable, variable persistence, mesh transfer
and digital storage-frequently presents as much
confusion as the measurement that must be
made.
Characteristics of individual 7000 Series
Mainframes employing storage techniques are
listed on pages 168 through 182 A review,
though , of storage concepts should prepare the
reader to evaluate the various alternatives more
knowledgeably.
Variable persistence storage is available in the
7613, 7623A, 7633, and 7834 Mainframes. It features bright, high contrast displays and controlled
persistence.
A front-panel persistence knob provides control
of the decay (fade-away) rate of the stored
image. The rate can be varied from almost instantaneous disappearance to a view time of greater
than 15 s in the 7613 (30 s in the 7623A, 7633, and
7834).
Fast Multimode CRT Storage
Fast multimode storage, available in the 7623A,
7633, and 7834, provides four storage modes.
The four modes combine the previously discussed bright bistable and variable persistence
storage modes with fast bistable and fast variable persistence.
The display characteristics of fast bistable and
fast variable persistence are the same as bistable
and variable persistence respectively. In either
fast storage mode the trace image is first written
on a fast mesh, then transferred to a long
retention mesh for viewing .
As the name implies, the fast storage mode
provides increased storage writing speed . For
example, in the reduced scan display mode, the
variable persistence writing speed of 5.4 cmll's is
increased to 2500 cmll's by selecting fast variable persistence.
Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between the digital
storage scope and the CRT storage scope is the
form of storage. Digital scopes store data representing waveforms in a digital memory; CRT
storage scopes store waveforms within the CRT.
169
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK FAST
7834
2500 cm l J.L S Stored Writing Speed
Stores Single-shot Rise Times as Fast
as 1.4 ns
Dc-to-400 MHz Bandwidth
Multimode Storage
Long View Time
APPLICATIONS
Laser Fusion
Digital DeSign
Radar/ Lidar
The 7834 Storage Oscilloscope has a stored
writing speed of 2500 cmlJ.Ls, enabling storage of
single-shot rise times to 1.45 ns, 3.6 em high, at
eight-divisions ampli tude, reduced-scan mode.
The 7834's mainframe bandwidth is 400 MHz
(nonstore). The system bandwidth may vary from
160 MHz to 400 MHz depending on the plug-in
selected .
This instrument has four storage modes-bistable
and variable persistence, FAST bistable and
FAST variable persistence.
FAST Variable Persistence provides the maximum stored writing rate of 2500 cm/J.LS (reduced
scan). View time is at least 30 s.
FAST Bistable increases bistable writing rates
to 350 cmlJ.Ls (reduced scan).
Bistable provides stored displays with long (30
minute) view time.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Channal. - Two lell-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series Plug-ins.
Gratlcule - Internal variable illuminated graticule. 8 x 10 diVIsion (0.9 cm/dlv) gratule in lull sean and 8 x 10 division (0.45
cm/div) in reduced sean.
Mode. of Oparatlon Mainframe Bandwidth -
Variable Persistence gives high contrast displays of both single-shot and repetitive phenomena. When viewing changing waveshapes, variable persistence provides continuous bright
displays of new information as old information
fades from the CRT.
The 4 compartment flexibility means that more
than one measurement can be performed at the
same time without switching plug-ins. The 7834
also offers auto-erase for automatic display
updating ... a save control for 30 times longer
viewing ... gated readout which prevents the
blooming that tends to occur between sweeps
with nongated readout. .. and an adjustable
multitrace delay for varying the viewing time prior
to the next sweep in the FAST transfer mode.
The multimode storage unit is designed for single
shot, low-rep-rate or fast pulse analysis.
LEFT. ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
400 MHz with 7A29 Amplifoer plug-
in.
Malnfrlme Step Re. pon. e fier plug-in.
Chopped Mode -
0.9 ns or less with 7A29 Ampli-
Repetition rate Is '" t MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform (not recommended for use with 7B50 Series Time Bases).
Treee Separation Range - In dual-sweep modes , 8 trace
can be positioned 4 divisions above or below the A trace.
Option 01 , without CR T Readout and Probe Power letes CRT readout and probe power.
Accelerating Potential in reduced sean mode.
Pho.phor -
kV full sean mode. and 12 kV
P31 .
CRT Display Modes - Nonstore, Bistable, Variable Persistence, FAST Bistable and FAST Variable Persistence (full and
reduced sean).
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Peraiatence - (Variable Persistence mode only) controls rate
of continuous erasure of the variable persistence and fast variable perSistence stored displays.
Input - Two right-hand plug-in compartments; compatible
with all 7000 Series Plug-ins. 7000 Series Vertical Amplifoers
and specialized plug-ins may also be used.
Multitrace Delay - Adjusts the transfer cycle time In the
FAST transfer modes. Continuously variable from < 1 s to
Mode. of Operation -
A, ALT, CHOP, B.
F..te.t Calibrated Sweep Rate Chopped Mode -
1 ns/div.
Repetition rate is ", 200 kHz.
X-Y Mode - Phase shill between vertical and horizontal channels is within 2· from de to 35 kHz without phase correction (de
to 1 MHz with phase correction , B horizontal only, Option 02).
Bandwidth is de to at least 1 MHz .
Auto Erase -
Continuously variable from
< 1 s to > lOs.
> 4 s.
Save - Prevents display from being accidentally erased. and
provides up to 30 times longer viewing times in all modes.
External Z·Axls Input - 2 v p-p for full intensity range Irom
de to 1 MHz. Positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input
VOltage is 15 V (de plus peak ac).
Auto·Focus - Maintains CRT focus following changes in display intensity aller focus control has been initially set.
Belm Finder -
170
~ 10
De-
Limits display within graticule.
TEK
7000
SERIES
CALIBRATOR
STORAGE WRITING SPEED
FULL SCAN (Center 6 x 8 div at 0.9 em/div)
Display
Mo de
Stored
Writing
Speed
View
Time
Fast
Variable
Fas t
Variable
Persistence Bistabl e Pe rsistence Bistable
270
emIl's
45
emIl's
1.8
emIl's
0.027
emIl's
(300 divl
I's)
(50 divl
I's)
(2 divl
I's)
(.03 divl
/J.s)
30 s·
30 min
30 s·
30 min
1.4 s
0.9 s
0.9 s
Display
Mode
Stored
Writing
Speed
View
Time·
Fast
Variabl e
Variable
Fast
Persis te nce Bistabl e Persiste nce Bistable
5 .4
cmll's
2500
Cm/l'S
350
cmll's
(5,500 divl
I's)
(776 divl (12 divl
I's)
I's)
(0.2 divl
/J.s)
30 s
30 min
30 s
30 min
1.4 s
0 .9 s
0.9 s
Erase
Time'"
1.4 s
(Approx)
For Recommended Plug-ins -
Reduced Scan
5,500 divll's
(0 .45 em/div)
~1
Full Scan
300 divll's
(0 .9 em/div)
~ 10
Peak-to Pe ak
Option 03 Emc Modification .................................. Add $300
See page 152.
For Rackmounting, Cradle
Mount Adapter 040-0560-00 ......................................... $385
90 V-132 V.
t80 V-250 V.
CONVERSION KITS
CRT Readout, 040-0811 -00 .......................................... $480
48-440 Hz.
Ma. Power Consumption -
Emc Modification, 040-0880-00 .................................... $440
215 Wans.
Included Accessories - Gray CRT filter (installed) (3780625-02) green CRT filter (378-0625-08): power cord (1610066-00).
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V /1 6A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V /1 3A .................................... No Charge
0.09
emIl's
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 Vl ISA ............... No Charge
STEP RISE TIME (n5)
250
125
50
25
12.5
5.0
2.5
1.25
0 .6
8
7
Fa.t Variable Persistence Writing Speed
Sweep
Speed
Option 02 X-V Mode Phase Correction ................ Add $250
See page 154.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
'View times are at full stored display intensity ; they may be
increased more than 30 times by using reduced intensity in the
SAVE display mode.
Scan
Mode
OPTIONS
Option 01 without CRT Readout and Probe Power Sub $300
Dimension. and Weight. See page 153.
For Recommended Cameras -
line Frequency -
·REDUCED SCAN Center 8 x 10 div at 0.45 em/div
(Plug-ins not Included)
7834 Storage Oscilloscope _.__ ...... __ . $11 ,000
Current Output - 40 mA available through CALIBRATOR
output with optional BNC to current loop adapter.
line Voltage Ranges -
Erase
1.4 s
Time
(Approx)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Voltage Output - Squarewave, positlve-golng from ground.
Ranges are 40 mY, 0.4 V. and 4 V into 100 kn: 4 mY, 40 mY,
and 0.4 V Into 50 !l. Amplitude accuracy Is within 1% ; repetition
rate is t kHz within 0.25%.
Sine waye
Step
Re sponse
7.1 div
250 MHz
7.7 div
1.4 ns
8 div
221 MHz
8 div
1.45 ns
3.2 div
30 MHz
3 div
10 ns
6.4 div
15 MHz
5 dlv
16.6 ns
6
5
ns/div
ns/div
OUTPUTS l iN PUTS
i'
o
L
~
-+----i----\~----I
4
-.;
4.5 emI"s.
View Time - The view time is the amount of time the stored
signal can be viewed before it fades away.
At the max writing speed the view time is 15 seconds or 0.25
minutes with the stored intensity control fully cwoAdjusting the
stored intensity ocw will reduce the stored writing speed, but
view time can be increased up to 5 minutes (see the chart
below).
III
•
i=
~:
>'S
",.s:
~ :1 5.0
ns
ns
ns
SAVE TIME
CONTROL
VI
1.0
0.25 !:-:-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-:-::-=!....:_=~~
0.1
1.0
5.0
STORED WRITING SPEED
(diY/"s at Maximum Persistence)
Erne Time -
\
4
3
Dimen.ion. and Weight -
\~,.
Save - Prevents erasure of the stored display and activates
the save time control.
Sa.e Time Control - Allows an extension of the view time
(see Storage View Time Chart).
Eltemal Z·Alls tn put - 2 V pop for full intensity range from
de to 2 MHz ; intensity range diminishes to 20% of full range at
10 MHz. A positive signal blanks the trace. Max input voltage
is 10 V (de + peak ac) and pop ac.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional manual fOCUSing
with changes in intensity after focus control has been set.
Beam Finder -
For Recommended Plug·ins -
!~
2
\
II:
0
L,
7813 OPTIONS
Option 01 without CRT Readout ...................... ,..., Sub $300
Option 03 Emc Modification .................................. Add $300
Option 05 Llna Freq Change (50-400 Hz) ............ Add $300
Umits display within graticule area.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from ground (into 1
Mil). Output voltage is 50 mV/div ( ± 15%) into 50 II, 1 V/div
( ± 10%) into 1 Mil. Output R is 950 II within 2% .
Option 08 Special Int G.alicule
(Spectrum Analyze.) ................................................ Add $50
\
0 .2
See page 154.
See page 152.
ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not Included)
7613 Storage Oscilloscope •.......•...•... $4680
R7613 Storage Oscilloscope ..•..•.•..... $5110
Option 08 Protectl.e Panel Co.er ........................ Add $100
2
0.5
0.5 s or less.
Perliltence - The persistence control also varies the view
time. The persistence can be adjusted from almost instanta·
neous disappearance (fade away), to off, which provides the
view time selected by the stored intenSity control.
Converts
See page 153.
For Recommended Camera. -
..,.
0 ,1
50·60 Hz.
Included Acce •• orie. (for 7613 and R7613) - 20 in cable
(twe-pln.le-BNC); (175·1178·00); CRT filter (gray, 378-0625·
02). The R7613 includes rackmounling hardware.
a:
~
Line Frequency -
\
5
::E
c?>
Line Voltage Ranges -100,110, 120,200, 220, and 240 V
ac ± 10%; internally selectable wilh quick change jumpers.
M.I Power Con.umption - 180 W, 2.0 A at 115 V line, 60
Hz. Fan cooling is provided for both models.
::J
...I
Q.
125
\
C
!:::
250
Oplion 05, Line Frequency Change (50·400 Hz) the 7613 and R7613 to 50-400 Hz operation.
Z
W
500
«
60.0
:I
::E
0
1.25
I1S
R7813 OPTIONS
Option 01 without CRT Readout ....... "" ..•.•... " .• " •. Sub $300
Graph showing the stored writing speed needed for
sinewave or step rise time at a given amplitude.
a
given
CAMERA POWER OUTPUT
Three.prong connector to the left of the CRT provides power,
ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50
Series Cameras.
Option 03 Emc Modification .......... "."." ....•.•.• " •• " . Add $300
Option 05 Line Freq Change (50-400 Hz) ." ......... Add $300
Option 08 Special Int Gratlcule
(Spectrum Analyzer) •••.• " ...." ................... "." ...•.•.,," Add $50
7613 CONVERSION KITS
040-0858-02 CRT Readout •..............................•..... "". $1000
CALIBRATOR
040-0883-01 Emc Modlficetion """" ...... " ..•,................• $480
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveshape, positive-going
from ground. (Dc voltage available when selected by internal
jumper.) Ranges are 40 mV, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 Mil; 20 mV, 0.2
V, 0.4 V inlo 50!l. Amplitude accuracy is within 1% (+ 15'C to
+ 35'C); within 2% (O ' C to + 50·C). Repetition rate is "" 1
kHz .
Current Output - 40 mA de or 40 mA rectangular wayeshape
with optional current.loop accessory (012·0259·00) connected
between 4 V and gnd pin jacks.
040-0718-00 X-Y Horizontal Comp ." ........... "" ... "."" .•. $410
040-0829-02 Sig Out/ In •.•••.•••.•.••."""" ............ " ....... ,,.... $535
040-0888-01 Power Supply to Light
Plug-In pUlhbunonl .•.•••....••.•..•• "."" .. " ........................... $60
R7613 CONVERSION KITS
040-0878-02 CRT Re.dout ............ " ......................." ... $1000
040-0878-01 Emc Modification ................ "" ......... "."". $285
040-0888-01 Pow.r Supply to Light
Plug-In Pushbutton I •••• """ ....................... "" ••••••••••••• ,, .... $60
+ Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output voltage is 0.5 V ( ± 10%) into 50 II, 10 V
( ± 10",1,) Into 1 Mil. Rise time is 20 ns or less into 50 II; output
R is 950 Il within 2%. Source is selectable from main, delay, or
auxiliary gate.
Sig Out - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch. Output
voltage is 25 mV/div into 50 II, 0.5 V/div into 1 Mil. Bandwidth
depends upon vertical plug.in; see Vertical System Specifica·
tions Chart. Output R is 950 II within 2%.
Eltemal Slngle· Sweep Reset - Ground closure; rear panel
BNC provides input to reset sweep.
Remote Erne - Ground closure; rear panel BNC provides
input to erase stored trace.
I, •. "
,.
I
.,
,. , ..
•
,
,
••
The R7613 requires only 5 1/4 in of racle height in a standard 19 in racle. II is fan cooled and comes complete wilh sfide-out chassis
tracles.
175
~~~g
TEK
7000 SERIES
DIGITAL MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope ...
76120 Programmable Waveform Digitizer ..
7912AD Programmable Waveform Digitizer
7000 Series Reference ........................... .. ...
7000 Series Non-Storage Mainframes .....
7000 Series CRT Storage Mainframes ....
7000 Series Plug-Ins ... .............. ........... ..... ...
177
179
181
148
155
168
183
IEEE-488 COMPATIBLE
Especially designed for precise automatic
waveform measurements in demanding applications in R&D and production
environments.
7000 Series Digital Mainframes offer wide
performance capabilities suited to today's
demanding measurement needs. Depending on mainframe, capture high or low
speed signals that are repetitive or single
shot. Configure mainframes to your individual needs from a choice of over 30 plug-ins.
The 7854 combines outstanding analog and
digital performance with microprocessorbased waveform processing whereas the
76120 and 7912AD combine outstanding
analog and digital performance with full
programmability. All mainframes are fully
GPIB compatible.
Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between the
digital storage scope and the CRT storage
scope is the form of storage. Digital scopes
store data representing waveforms in a digital memory; CRT storage scopes store
waveforms within the CRT. Digital storage
requires digitizing and reconstruction processes. "Digitizing" consists of "sampling"
and "quantizing ." Sampling is the process of
obtaining the value of an input signal at discrete points in time; quantizing is the transformation of that value into a binary number
by the analog-to-digital converter (ADC) in
the digital scope . You determine how often
digitizing occurs by the time base. The time
base uses a digital clock to time the analogto-digital (AID) conversion and to store the
data in memory. The rate at which this happens is the digitizing rate (or sampling rate).
Once the data is in the digital memory, it
can be read out and reconstructed for displaying or further waveform processing.
176
Store Repetitive Signals up to 400 MHz
with Standard Plug-ins, and up to 14
GHz with the 7S 12 Sampler
Digital Storage with Waveform
Processing
Common Waveform Measurements at
the Touch of a Button
Keystroke Programming
GPIB Interface
400 MHz
WAVEFORM PROCESSING OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 7000
SERIES
I\
7854
~
The 7854 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978
Waveform Parameters at the Touch of a Key
"
.
."
Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth @ 10 mV /div
Calibrated Sweep Rates to 500 ps/div
.
1\!ktronix
1154 OSCILLOSCOPE
~~-
iiiiiiiiii •
.iil• •,• ~~
.
c c
c -c
"
Stores Repetitive Waveforms up to 400 MHz
-•
i ......
Single Shot Events up to 50 /l s/div
(with 7B87 Time Base)
Signal Averaging
Pretrigger (with 7B87 Time Base)
Resolution up to 0.01 div on Stored Data
(10 bits)
Choose 128, 256, 512, 1024
Points /Waveform
Keystroke Programming (up to 1000 lines)
GPIB Interface (Standard)
APPLICATIONS
Power Supply Testing
Fiber Optics
Total Harmonic Distortion (Audio)
The 7854 Oscilloscope represents a new approach to waveforms. It displays solutions to
common measurement problems on screen at
the touch of a button. Now you can concentrate
on decision making instead of measurement taking. The 7854 gives you the features of a
Tektronix 7000 Series high performance scope
linked with advanced digital storage and
waveform processing. It also offers programmable measurement routines, GPIB interface, and
compatibility with 7000 Series plug-in units.
The 7854 can display real time and stored
waveforms separately or simultaneously. With optional memory up to 40 waveforms can be stored
and recalled for easy comparison.
Signal averaging can recover signals buried in
noise and improve measurement accuracy. One
or two cursors selectable for voltage and time
measurements. One cursor provides measurements referenced to ground and time zero,
whereas two cursors provide ~ time and ~
voltage. Cursors also bracket areas of the
waveform that are to be measured with standard
waveform measurement routines; i.e., min , max,
pop.
For single-shot use, the 7887 Time Base plug-in
provides pre·trigger control which allows storage
of events that precede the trigger. The amount of
pre-trigger data can be varied continuously.
The mainframe and calculator keyboards contain
a series of buttons representing the most commonly used waveform parameters. These functions operate on stored waveforms. Keystroke
programming from the keyboards enable the user
to design measurement routines tailored to individual tests or experiments.
7854 CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
Input - Two plug-in compartments; compatible with 7000 Series plug-ins.
Mode. of Operation Mainframe Bandwidth plifier plug-in.
LEFT, ALT, ADD, CHOP, RIGHT.
400 MHz with 7A29 and 7A19 Am-
Mainframe Step Re.pon.e 7 A 19 Amplifier plug.in.
Chopped Mode -
0.9 ns or less with 7 A29 and
Rep. rate is ,., 1 MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform (7850 Series time bases not recommended for 7854 except 7850A).
Trace Separation Range - In dual-sweep modes, 8 trace
can be positioned 4 divisions above or below the A trace.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT Dlap lay Moda. SCOPE (Conventional display.)
STORED (Digital data display.)
80TH (Stored mode piUS real time waveforms.)
PROGRAM ENTRY (User program text display.)
177
MHz
WAVEFORM PROCESSING OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 400
Cooventional Scope: In the SCOPE mode.
the 7854 provides a complete plug-in scope
giving standard displays like other TektfOflix
high performance scopes.
Storage Scope: Rise time is calculated by
pushing a single key. Time and voltage diffferenees between cursors are shown 00 the
line above rise time.
7000
SERIES
HORIZONTAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
MEMORY FORMAT
Input - Two plug-In compartments ; compatible with 7000 Series plug-ins. 7000 Series vertical amplifl9rs and specialized
plug-ins may also be used.-
Points Per Waveform-
Mod •• 01 Op.r.tion -
Max No 01 Wavelorms
A. ALT. CHOP. B.
F••t ••t Calibrated Sw.ep Rat. Chopp.d Mod. -
0.5 ns/div.
Repetition rate is ",,200 kHz.
X- Y Mod. - Phase shift between vertical and horizontal channels is within 2 ' from dc to 35 kHz without phase correction.
(dc to 1 MHz with phase correction . B horizontal only. Option
02).
'Note: See plug-in compatibility for exceptions for digital
storage.
PROGRAM STORAGE
Keystroke programming allows the mainframe to remember a
sequence of keystrokes (with remote calculator keyboard or
GPIB: )
Editing - Line by line editing capability.
' Note: Vertical and Horlzonial mainframe modes and all other
keys except edit commands are programmable.
DIGITAL STORAGE
Equlval.nt Tim. Bandwidth - 400 MHz. See 7000 Series
System bandwidth specifICations.
Accur.cy - Refer to Plug-In specifications.
Acqul.ltlon Ch.nn.ls - One or two simultaneous channels
(Plug-in CHOP mode not valid).
Acqul.ltlon WindOW - ± 5 divisions from center screen both
vertically and horizontally.
R••olution Vertical. 0.01 divisions.
Horizontal. selectable points/waveform on remote keyboard
onl .
or zon a
Point.
R•• olutlon
p.r waY.lorm
(dIY.)
1024
0.01
512
0.02
256
0.04
128
0.08
PLUG-IN COMPATIBILITY
Most all 7000 Series Plug-ins are compatible in the standard
oscilloscope display mode. The 7L5 and 7L 18 Spectrum Analyzers require lactory modification for optimum use with digital
storage operation. The 7001 , 7002 and 7Tll are not compatible in STORED mode.
The 7B87 provides pretrigger for the 7854. Pretrigger allows
you to view what has occurred belore the trigger event In single
shot applications. The amount of pre-trigger time is determined
by the Acquire-Stop delay time setting. The total amount of
pre-trigger is 0.2 to 9.9 times the time/div setting.
Singi. Shot P.rformance - Using 7B87 with 7854 Internal
clock .
Point.
Fa.te.t Sweep
per wayeform
(Tlma/DIY)
128
SOl'S
256
1001'S
512
2001'S
1024
500l's
STANDARD
178
128 1 256 1 512
I
16
I
8
Max No 01 Constant Registers
Max No 0 1 Prog Commands plus lines
4
OPTION 20
1 1024
I
128 1 256 1 512
2
40
I
20
I
10
OPTION 00
1 1024
I
512
5
1
50
100
0
920
2000
0
'Unless otherwise selected, delault value is 512 at power-up.
+ Gat. - Positive pulse 01 the same duration and coincident
with sweep. Output voltage Is 10 V ( ± 10%) Into t MO. 0.5 V
( ± 10%) Into 50 O.
Output R is ,., 950 O. Source is selectable Irom A gate, B gate,
or DELAYED gate.
V.rtlcal Signal Out - Selected by A TRIGGER SOURCE
switch. Output voltage is 0.5 V/div into 1 MO, 25 mV/dlv into 50
II. Output R is ", 950 O. Bandwidth depends upon vertical plugin.
R.mote Singi. Sw•• p R••• t - Rear Panel BNC. ground closure activated.
TTL Output - Rear panel BNC, TTL output under remote
keyboard control (SWH and SWL).
Ext.mal Z-Axi. Input - 2 V p-p lor lull intenSity range from
de to 1 MHz. Positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input
voltage Is 15 V (dc plus peak ac).
Cam.ra Pow.r Output - Three-prong connector to the left of
the CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset access lor the C-50 Series Cameras.
M.mory BaCk-Up Power Input - 6.0 V to 6.5 V at 0.7 amp to
preserve stored data II mainlrame's power is Interrupted.
IEEE-488 INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE-488 1978 standard.
Int.rfac. Function. Subset Implemented:
SH 1 Complete Source Handshake
AHI Complete Acceptor Handshake
T5
Talker Function
L3
Ustener Function
SR 1 Complete Service Request Capability
RL 1 Complete Remote/Local Capability
DC 1 Complete Device Clear Capability
DT I Complete Device Trigger Capability
I/O R.cord. play text .
Waveforms constants, program text. and dis-
End 01 M•••• ge T.rminalor (Selectable in TALK/LISTEN
mod. lor EOI or LF/EOI). - Compatible with Tektronix and
other popular controllers.
D.vlca Addr••• - Selectable via rear panel switch.
R.mot. Op.r.tlon - All keystroke lunctions and vertical and
horizontal modes can be remotely operated via the GPIB.
CALIBRATOR
ORDERING INFORMATION
Voltag. Output - Squarewave, positive-golng Irom ground.
Ranges are 40 mY, 0.4 V, and 4 V into 100 kO; 4 mY, 40 mY .
and 0.4 V into 50 II. Amplitude accuracy is within 1%; repetition
rate Is 1 kHz within 0.25%.
(Plug-ins not included)
7854 Oscilloscope (including remote
calculator keyboard) ...................... _$11 ,950
Curr.nt Output - 40 mA available through Calibrator output
with optional BNC to current loop adapter.
Option 02 (X-Y Ph... Correction) ........................ Add $150
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Option 78 (Pll Pho.phor) ...................................... Add $35
Option 00 (D.lete GPIB and R.mot.
Kayboard, on. wav.lorm .torag.) ........................ Sub $500
Option 20 (4k Exp.nd.d Memory,
040-0941-00) ........................................................ Add $1000
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Lin. Voltag. Rang•• - 90 V-132 V. 180 V-250 V.
Lin. Fr.qu.ncy - 48-440 Hz.
M.x Pow.r Con.umption - 230 W.
Includ.d Acc ••• orie. - Power cord (161 -0066-00).
BNC-Io-BNC Cabl. -
(012-0208-00).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen.lon.
Mainfra me
Option 03 (Emc Modification) ............................... Add $250
Option AI Unlv.rsal Euro 220 V/ 18A ................ No Ch.rge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A ..................................... No charg.
Option A3 Au.trallan 240 V/ 1OA ........................ No Charg.
em
In
He i ght
34 .8
13.7
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A ............... No Ch.rge
Width
30 .5
12.0
24.7
7B87 Time Base required only for
pretrigger and single shot digitizing . $1480
Le ngth
62.7
Wavef orm
He ight
6.9
2.7
Ca l culator
Width
27.7
10.9
Leng th
16.5
6.5
14.2
(w ithin
7 em)
5.6
kg
tb.
Cord Length
Weight
OUTPUTS /INPUTS
+Sawtooth - Positive-going with baseline at 0 V ± 1 V into 1
Mil. Voltage is 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1 MO, 50 mV/div ( ± 15%)
into 50 II. Output R is = 950.
Waveform Processing: Keystrolce Programming enables the user to design measurement routines tailored to individual tests or
experiments.
Multiple Storage and CalculatiOfl: Volts. current. and power are all shown 00 the display.
Power ( V - · 1) is calculated with two
keystrolces.
Net Weight
20.4
45
Sh ipping
28 .2
62
Th. 7854 Is also aYaiiable a. a WP1310 Signal Proces.ing
System. Thil syatem is 8 synergistic combination of the
TEKTRONIX 7854 Oscilloscope and 4052 Graphic Comput.r. Tog.th.r, th ••e two instruments automate the entire
waveform telt and measurement process, from acquisition
and calculation to storage and display lormatting.
TEK 7000
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
SERIES
SYSTEMS
The 76'20 IS also available In WP3000 Senes SIgnal ProcessIng Syslems T~ese fully aulomalle syslems are desIgned ...
sembled . lested . and documented to sallsty the demand lor
Speed. auiomaltoo. accuracy. and repeatabIlity In characterIZIng devtCes or phenomena which give nse to waveforms In the
second to submlcrosecond range For more Information on
these systems . contact your local Tektrontx Sales EngIneer
76120
I ,g~~?al
The 76120 complies with IEEE Standard 488
1975. and with rektronlx Codes and Forma ts
Standard
200 MHz Maximum Sampling Rate
Two Channels, Two T ime Bases
8 Bit Resolution
2048 Words of Memory per Channel
5 ns to 1 s Selectable Sampling Intervals
with Interval Switching Allowed During
Waveform Acqu isition
decays. Also, each channel's local memory can
be partitioned into one to eight equal-length
records. You have the choice, too, of looking at
waveforms before the triggering event
(pretrigger), immediately after the trigger, or delayed from the trigger (posttrigger). Or you can
choose to operate the channels dependently by
triggering one after the other.
All 76120 functions can be selected manually or
operated under program control over the IEEE488 bus. Add two 7A16P Programmable Amplifier
plug-ins, one for each channel, and you have
program control over every waveform acquisition
function.
Extracting information from medium-speed signals is a typical application of 76120 systems.
figure 3. A signal with two echoes recorded at a uniform Sampling rate (top trace), the same signal recorded at an increased
sampling rate during each echo (bottom trace). to capture escl1
echo with increased resolution.
Pretrigger and Posttrigger Operation
Fully Programmable over IEEE-488 Bus
For System Oriented Operation
APPLICATIONS
Automated Testing
EMP
Non-Destructive Testing
The 76120 Programmable Digitizer is a dualchannel. dual time base waveform digitizer for
use under computer control. It has a maximum
sampling rate of 200 MHz. Each channel has its
own analog-to-digital converter, a new type designed by Tektronix for accurate, high-speed
waveform digitizing. Each channel also has its
own time base operating from a single 200 MHz
crystal-controlled clock. The result ... two fully independent channels capable of capturing one
waveform each, simultaneously, with the same or
different vertical sensitivities and time-base
settings.
And there 's still more flexibility available. The
number of samples per waveform (record length)
can be selected, from 256 to 2048. The sample
rate can be changed during waveform digitizing,
for example, using dense sampling on fast transitions and switching to sparser sampling for slow
figure 1. The oomplete period of a signal (top trace) is recorded
at 200 ns; by changing the sample rate to 10 ns during rise and
fall times and 800 ns during the plateau (bottom trace). you can
measure rise time. fall time, pulse width and interval accurately
on a single shot signal.
figure 2. A decaying signal recorded at a 10 "s sampling rate
(top trace); the same signal can be recorded at a 100 ns
sampling rate during the initial portion and switched back to a
10 "s sampling rate (bottom trace). to capture all information
on a single shot signal.
figure 4. A transient response of a system at power-up recorded with no pre-trigger (top /race); by using the pre-trigger the
oomplete response can be digitized (bottom trace).
figure 5. The initial portion of an exponential decay is recorded
on Channel A (top trace); Channel B. set at a higher sensitivity
and triggered to record after Channel A has finished, captures
the remaining pulse tail with increased vertical resolution (bottom trace).
TEK
7000
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
SERIES
76120 CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channell - Two left-hand plug-in compartments compatible
with all 7000 Series amplifier plug-ins. Fully programmable
when 7A16P Plug-Ins are used.
Bandwidth -
80 MHz with 7A1 6P Plug-in .
Modes 01 Operation - Left channel with Time Base A and
right channel with Time Base B.
TIME BASES A ANO B
Type - Two built-in digital time bases with a common crystalcontrolled clock .
Clock - Internal: 200 MHz ± 0.0035%; stability: within 10
ppm/year. External: from signal source .. 200 MHz.
Sample Interval - With Internal clock : selectable from 5 ns to
1 s in a 1. 2. 3 .. .9 sequence (excluding 6. 7. 8 and 9 ns). With
external clock : Selectable from 1 to 200 x 10' times the external clock period In a 1. 2. 4. 6... 20 sequence.
Interval Switching - Sample interval can be changed up to 13
times per waveform record with preservation of lime
relationships.
TIME MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
Without sample Interval switching : 0.0035% (stability 10
ppm/year). With sample interval switching: 0.0035% (stability
10 ppm/year) for all sample intervals slower than 5 ns.
Modes 01 Operation - Time Base A with left channel and
Time Base B with right channel. Independent or B triggerable
after A completes its acquisition.
Mode -
Left or right plug-in. external. manual by push
Slope -
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X, Y, Z Analog Output - Provides for analog display of data
In memory. X and Y level is 1 V p-p Into 100 kll or greater;
adjustable from 0.75 V to 1.3 V.
Clock Out -
Provides internal clock signal at ECL level.
Land R Trig In - Provide extemaltrlgger input to the left and
right trigger channels (50 Il terminated).
Ac. dc. ac Hf REJ. dc Hf REJ.
Positive or negative.
Level Range - Internal: at least ± 128 LSB in 256 steps.
Extemal: at least ± 1.28 V in 256 steps.
Trigger Jitter (Internal) -
Posttrigger Delay Range - Selectable In multiples of 8 samples from 8 10 the record length (requires selection of only one
record).
External Clock In - ECL levels... I ns rise and fall time. 2.5
ns minimum pulse width and ,.;200 MHz.
Single sweep.
Coupling -
Pretrigger Delay Range - Selectable in multiples of 8 samples. Without sample interval switching: from 0 up to 16 samples less than the record length . With sample interval switchIng : from 0 up to 16 samples less than the position of the first
sample interval change.
1, 2, 3, 4 -
Four feed-through connections to the front panel.
Digital Interface -
0.1 ns or less. de to 100 MHz.
IEEE-488 INTERFACE
Interface Functions Subset Implemented :
Trigger Sensitivity -
SH 1
Complete source handshake.
AHI
Complete aoceptor handshake.
Ac
Ac Hf REJ
Dc
Dc HI REJ
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range ac.
Line Frequency -
Minimum Signal
Requi red
Triggering
Frequency
Range
Internal
Ext
40 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 100 MHz
20 LSB
44 LSB
100 mV
100 mV
40 Hz to 50 kHz
20 LSB
100 mV
dc to 50 MH z
50 MHz to 100 MHz
20 LSB
44 LSB
100 mV
100 mV
dc to 50 kHz
20 LSB
100 mV
Standard -
90 V to 132 V ac and 180 V to 250 V
48 to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption (Including plug-ins) watts. 5 A at 115 V 60 Hz.
Remote Control provided .
Maximum 400
Remote power ON/OFF capability is
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Size - Fits 19 in rack. Height: 178 mm. (7 in). Width: 483 mm.
(19 in). Length: 703 mm. (27 .70 in).
Weight -
25 kg. (55 Ib).
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Operators and Service Manuals. set of rack slides. power cord.
IEEE-488 bus cable.
Conforms to IEEE Standard 488-1978.
Triggering Error - ± 1 sample ambiguity in recognizing the
trigger. 1 sample maximum recognition error between channels
(using same Irigger channel for both time bases).
Coupling
Altitude - Operating: - 250 to + 15.000 ft ( - 76 to + 4570
meters). Nonoperating : - 250 to + 50.000 ft (- 76 to + 15.200
meters).
Z level is 0 to 1 V (full white) into 100 kll or greater.
TRIGGERING A AND B
Source button.
76 120 rear panel: the GPIB connector and outputs for an X- Y-Z monitor (right); clock Input/output. trigger inputs. and BNC connectors to feed signals to the front panel (left): remote power ON/ OFF is also provided through the two central BNC connectors.
Conforms to IEEE-488 1975 Standard.
TE6
Extended talker function .
LE4
Extended listener function .
SRI
Complete service request capability.
RL I
Complefe remote/local function .
Order 76120
Programmable Digitizer ....... ............ $26,400
(Plug-ins not included)
PP- No parallel poll.
DCl
Complete device clear capability.
C,
No controller function
DT, No device
ARMING A AND B
Push button or computer control.
DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method - Continuous. sequential digitizing of the input signals with storage of samples selected by Instrument settings.
Resolution -
8 bits.
Dynamic Accuracy - Signal to noise ratio performance at
25'C for a half scale sinewave input signal (an ideal 8 bit digitizer would give a SIN ratio of 43.8 dB).
Signal Freq .
SIN Ratio
300 kHz
42.0
20 MHz
32 .0
80 MHz
20 .0
Internal Memory - Type: ECl. Size : 2048 8-bit words per
channel. total of 4096 8-bit words.
Record Length, A or B - 256. 512 . 1024. or 2048 samples.
Number of stored records: Up to eight 256-word. four 512word. two 1024-word. or one 2048-word records per channel.
each requires a trigger. Trigger is automatically rearmed after
each record acquisition .
180
Rasponse to Interface Control Messages - The 76120 responds to the following interface control messages:
GTL - Go to local.
LLO - Local lockout.
SDC-DCL - Selected device clear and device clear.
SPE-SPD - Serial poll enable and disable.
IFC - Interface clear.
IEEE-488 Bus Addresses - Mainframe and programmable
plug-Ins share a common primary address and are differentiated through the use of secondary addresses.
Programmable Functions - All Instrument settings and operating modes are programmable.
Format - Commands in ASCII. waveform data in binary
(range 0 to 377.).
Transfer Rate -
710 k bytes/second maximum.
Waveform Transfer Time - To an infinitely fast controller:
8.35 ms for one 2048 points record. Actual transfer time depends on controller and software speed.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - 62'C to + 85'C.
Operating : 0-40' C. Nonoperating:
..-
... . .n
•• w
-•
•••
""OG .. ... MMA.lf
7A16P _ _ _A
_"_'_L_I'_I._.__~
The 7A 16P is a fully programmable vertical amplifier used in
the 76120 . For further information. see plug-in specifICations in
the 7000 Series Plug-in section pages 183-204.
TEK 7000
PROGRAMMABLE
TRANSIENT WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
SERIES
o
I. . .
1I11AD
7912AD
Ilg~~~1
The 79 12AD complies with IEEE Standard 4881975, and with Tektronix Codes and Formats
Standard
Digitize and Store Single-Shot or
Repetitive Signals from Millisecond
to Subnanosecond duration
500 MHz Bandwidth at 10 mV/ div
500 ps/div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
"',I' •• 'Wa D"llu.,
~
Capturing high-speed waveforms is the 7912AD's
forte . Each waveform can be sampled up to 512
times within selectable time window ranging from
ten milliseconds to five nanoseconds (50 kHz to
100 GHz equivalent sampling rate) .
This performance is accomplished by a Tektronix
scan converter which writes the signal onto a
silicon-diode target array. In TV Mode, the signal
information is read from the target and converted
to composite video for a bright display on a
television monitor. However, in the Digital Mode
the waveform data is read into an intemal memory. From this memory, the digitized waveform
can be transferred via the IEEE-488 bus to an
external controller for processing.
SYSTEMS
The 7912110 ,s also available in WP2000 Senes S'gnal Procell,ng Systems. Theae fully automal'c systems are deIIgned, assembled, lested, and documented to salosfy the
demand for speed, automal,on, accuracy, and repeatabll,ty
in characterizing device. or phenomena which give ri.e to
waveform. ,n the millisecond to nanosecond range. For
more information on these systems contlct your local Tek tron,. Sal81 Eng,neer.
The 7912AD Mainframe is programmable over the
same IEEE-488 bus. When the programable plugins (one 7A16P Programmable Amplifier and one
7B90P Programmable Time Base) are used, the
7912AD becomes a fully programmable digitizer
with a bandwidth of 200 MHz. This is a significant
step toward fully automated test and measurement in disciplines such as laser and energyrelated research , component or subassembly
testing, and other areas requiring information
extraction from high-speed waveforms.
Waveform Digitizing to 9-Bit Vertical
and 9-Bit Horizontal Resolution
Built-In Signal Averaging Capability
Fully Programmable over IEEE-488 Bus
For System Oriented Operation
APPLICATIONS
Destructive Testing
Laser Research
Automated Testing
.....-
=:--=s-:::=:.. •
1G1
PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
TEK TRANSIENT
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Chennels - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000
Series amplifier plug-in. Fully programmable when 7A16P Is
used.
Bendwldth - Determined by amplifier plug-In. 7 A16P: 200
MHz. 7A19: 500 MHz.
Deley Line waveform.
Permits viewing of leading edge of acquired
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Chennels - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000
Series time base. Fully programmable with 7B90P.
Feetest Callbreted Sweep Rate or 7B92A Time Bases.
500 ps/div with the 7B90P
Slowest Recommended Sweep Rate - 1 ms/div in digital
mode, possible loss of data below this limit.
DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method -
Scan conversion.
Resolution - 9 bits. In the Digital MOde, the target is scanned
In a 512 x 5t2 point matrix offering at least 400 discrete horizontal elements, each with a range of at least 320 discrete
vertical values. In the TV MOde, the target is scanned in a
standard TV format with a resolution of at least 400 lines at
50% response.
Writing Rete ( + 10·C to +40·C) - TV Mode: writes an lkIiv
sinewave of at least 500 MHz In a single sweep. Digital Mode:
stores a single lkIiv pulse with a rise time of 1 ns or less.
Option 04, Increases TV Mode writing rate by factor of 2 and
Digital MOde writing rate by 2.5.
Terget Defecte - No more than six points digitized other than
those written by input waveform. Built-in firmware allows for
defect removal by an external controller.
7000
SERIES
ELECTRONIC GRATICULE
8 x 10 division dot matrix written onto the scan converter target Immediately alter waveform acquisition. Can be displayed
simultaneously with the Input signal on the TV monitor or digitized and stored.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X, Y, Z Anelog Output - Provides for analog display of data
In memory. X and Y level Is 1 V p..p into 100 kll or greater;
adjustable from 0.75 V to 1.3 V . Z level Is 0 to 1 V (full white)
Into kll or greater.
Composite Video Output - Only available in TV mode. Used
to drive a TV monitor for displaying signal written on scanconverter target as an aid to setting intensity for complete digitizing. Unear Output: Replica of the signal read from the target
with sync added. Binary Output: Two-level output derived from
the linear composite video output. Used to Indicate on the TV
monitor how well a waveform will be digitized. Scale factor
readout Included In both linear and binary.
Sync Output -
At least 4 V into 75 11. Conforms to EIA RS-
170.
Conforms to IEEE-488 1978 Standard.
Interface Functions Subset Implemenled:
SHI Complete source handshake.
AHI Complete acceptor handshake.
TE8 Extended talker function.
LE4 Extended listener function.
SR 1 Complete service request capability.
RL 1 Complete remote/local !unction.
pp 0 No parallel poll.
DC 1 Complete device clear capability.
C 0 No controller function.
DT1 Device trigger complete.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Tempereture Range - 55 · C to + 75 · C.
Operating: 0-40 · C. Nonoperating:
Altitude - Operating : up to 4570 m (7000 It). Nonoperating:
Up to 15,200 m (50,000 It).
Emc (plug-Ina Inaerted) - Meets MIL-STD-461A and 462
radiated and conducted Interference from 30 Hz to 1 GHz.
Sync Loop - Allows TV MOde to be synchronized with external EIA RS-170 sync waveform.
POWER JlEQUIREMENTS
+ Gete Output - Provides a positive pulse with a duration
equal to and coincident with the time-base sweep.
Line Voltage Renge ac.
Z-Axis Input - ± 1 V input mOdulates the writing gun intensity
over its full range.
Power Coneumptlon (Including plug-Ina) -
Vert In, Cal In, Trig In - Three Internal 50 11 coaxial cables
connect signals from the rear panel to the front panel to ease
system configuration In rackmounts.
Probe Power -
Line Frequency -
90 V to 132 V ac and 180 V to 250 V
48-440 Hz.
360 watts
maximum.
Remote Control provided.
Provides power for Tektronix active probes.
Remote power ON /OFF capabilit ies
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Size - Fits 19 Inch rack. Height: 177 mm (7 in). Width : 483
mm (19 in). Length : 679 mm (26.8 in).
Memory - Type: semiconductor. Size: 4096 100bit words for
data from target and two 512 IS-bit word areas for internally
processed and reduced data. Record Length: 512 samples per
waveform maximum.
7A16P
IEEE-488 INTERFACE
Stendard -
Weight -
24.7 kg (54.6 Ib).
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Power cord, set of rack slides, IEEE-488 bus cable, Operator
and Service manuals.
7B90P
ORDERING INFORMATION
(Plug-ins not included)
--TlIM8I. . . .
It is recommended that 7912ADs not be purchased or operated without an accompanying
TEKTRONIX 634 Raster Scan Display Monitor with
Option 11 (see p. 96) .
7912AD Programmable Digitizer .. ,. $24,800
. : : . LUDWlDTM
OPTIONS
•
arm
Option 04 Chenge to Fest Digitize (chenges scennlng metrix to 526 x 256 points, chenges electronic grelicule to
mark only every other division, increeses writing
rete ................................. ,...................................... No Charge
IN .....
Option 09 Change Line Voltage
(220 V/ 50 Hz) ....................................................... No Cherge
•
:::.
••
P"OGIV.MM"'8L E
AM'UFt£R
Programmable Amplifier
Option 13 Chenge TV scen to
625 lines et 50 Hz ................................................ No Charge
n :,-":
,."OGRAMMAUE
,..Op _____
T
_'M
_ .__
••_._. ____
Option 30 Delete IEEE bus ceble ............................ Sub $90
~
Programmable Time Base
The 7A 16P and 7890P are programmable plug-ins used in the 7912AD. For further informaOOn, see plug-in specifications in the 7000
S_s Plug-In Section.
182
634 Option 11 Raster Scan
Display Monitor ,., ... " ......... ,..... ,... ,.. "". $2940
Tektronix offers maintenance training classes on the
7912AD Programmable Digitizer. For further training Information, contact your local Sales Office or request a copy
of the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the return
card.
TEK
7000 SERIES
PLUG-INS
CONTENTS
For the 7000 Series you can select from over
thirty-five different plug-ins. For example,
digital multimeters, counters and A-O converters. With this plug-in selection you can
solve problems in many applications including spectrum analysis, curve tracing, logic
analysis, and sampling. This variety lets you
tailor your instrument to meet your immediate need. And to expand its capabilities
later as your needs change.
Dc to 225 MHz Amplifiers ............................ 184
.. .... 186
Differential Amplifiers .......................
FET Probe Amplifier ...................................... 187
Amplifiers .......................
...................... 188
Programmable and Digital
Pretrigger Time Base ..........................
189
Delayed and ~ Delaying
Time Base ................................................... ... 190
Dual Time Bases ..... .................................. . 192
Single Time Base ........................................... 194
Digital Delay .................................................... 195
Universal Counter/Timer ............................... 196
AID Converter ................................................. 198
Digital Multimeter ........................................... 198
Sampling Units to 14 GHz ............................ 199
45 ps TOR or General Purpose
Sampler ........................................................... 200
1 GHz Dual Trace, Delayed
Sweep Sampler .............................................. 201
Sampling Heads to 14 GHz ......................... 202
Trigger Countdown Head .............. ............... 203
Trigger Recognizer Heads ............................ 203
Pulse Generator Heads ................................. 203
Curve Tracer .................................................. 204
Readout Unit ................................................... 204
183
AMPLIFIERS
TEK WIDEBAND
7A16A
7A15A
7000 Series
Plug-ins
--
"
I """'" I'==:...
+UP
C'
..
I
-_..
-i
v
-
.......
1MII INf'UT
--
1A1U ...._ _ _ _ __
........
7A16A
Dc to 80 MHz Amplifier
Dc to 225 MHz Amplifier
7A15A
7A16A
Single Trace Amplifiers
Dc to 80 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
Dc to 225 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
Differential Amplifiers
5 mV/div to 10 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
5 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
500 jlV/ div at 10 MHz (X10 Gain)
1 MO Input
Dual Trace Amplifiers
Delayed and !:J. Delaying Time Base
Dual Time Bases
Curve Tracer
Digital Delay
AI D Converter
Digital Multimeter
Universal Counter/Timer
Sampling
TOR
1 MO Input
The 7A 15A is an easy to use, 80 MHz amplifier
that features a X10 magnifier to increase the sen·
sitivity to 500 jlV/div with 10 MHz bandwidth. It
has a constant bandwidth at all deflection factors
in the X1 setting. Polarity of the display is
selectable.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/dlv to 10 V/div In 11 calibrated
steps (1 . 2.5 sequence). XI gain accuracy is within 2% with XI
gain adjusted at 10 mV/dlv. Xl0 gain (increases sensitivity to
500 ~V) accuracy Is within 10% at 10 MHz bandwidth through.
out deflection factor settings. Uncalibrated VARIABLE Is con·
tinuous between steps to at least 25 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil within 2%; ",,20 pF.
Max Input Voltage - Dc-coupled: 250 V (de + peak ae), ae
component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less. Ae-coupled ; 500 V
(de + peak ae), ae component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less.
Order 7 A 15A Amplifier ......................... $565
The 7A 16A is an easy to use, 225 MHz amplifier. It
features constant bandwidth over the deflection
factor range of 5 mV/div to 5 V/div. Polarity of the
display is selectable; bandwidth is selectable to
FULL or limited to 20 MHz for low· frequency
applications.
Deflection Flctor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div In 10 calibrated steps
(1 .2·5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at
10 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous between
steps to a least 12.5 V/div.
Input R and C -
1 Mil within 2% ; ",20 pF.
Max Input Voltage - Oe-coupled : 250 V (de + peak ae), ae
component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less. Ac-coupled: 500 V
(de + peak ae); ae component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) Is 0.01 dlv/ · C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant) is 0.02 dlv In anyone minute after 1
hour warm-up.
Order 7 A 16A Amplifier ....................... $1030
Tektronix offers m aintenance training classes on 7000 Series plug-ins and mainframe s and new multi-media training
package s on Digital Counter and Meter Concepts and
Sampling Concepts. For further training information, con·
tact your local Sales Ollice or request a copy of the Tek·
tronix Customer Training Catalog on the return card.
184
For recommended probes- rel er to page 152.
7000
TEK
SERIES
7A 16P
7A26
7A18
...
--
i
"",""11
"
BII:I
""""
•
-...
••
~ROG""MM.'lt
AMI'lIFIIER
7A26
Programmable- Dc to 225 MHz Amplifier
Dc to 75 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
Dc to 200 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
7A16P
7A18
7A26
Fully Programmable Plug-in for
7912AD or 76120 Digitizers only
Dc to 75 MHz Bandwidth
Dc to 200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
5 mV /div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
5 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
1 MO Input
1 MO Input
The 7A 18, the basic building block of 3- and 4trace operation, is a dual-trace plug-in amplifier.
The 7A18 features constant bandwidth for all deflection factors , 5 operating modes (Ch 1, Ch 2,
ALT, CHOP, ADD) , trigger source selectivity and
color-keyed control grouping, The 7A 18 has a
trace identify function . Polarity of channel 2 is
selectable.
The 7A26, a dual-trace plug-in amplifier, is a basic
building block for 3- or 4-trace operation. It features constant bandwidth for all deflection factors, 5 operating modes (Ch 1, Ch 2, ALT, CHOP,
ADD), trigger source selection (Ch 1, Ch 2,
MODE), and color-keyed control groupings. Polarity of channel 2 is selectable. Bandwidth may be
set at FULL or limited to 20 MHz for low-frequency applications.
10 mV /div to 5 V/div Calibrated
Deflection Factors
200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
50 0 or 1 MO Input Selectable
The 7A 16P is designed for use only in Tektronix
7000 Series Programmable Digitizers. All of the
normal operational features of a high-quality,
wide-band 7000 Series plug-in amplifier are provided in the 7A16P. These are available at the
front panel for manual selection , or they can be
set under program control via a programmable
mainframe and the IEEE-488 bus. Whether operated manually or under program control, the frontpanel push buttons light to indicate plug-in status.
Plug-in status can also be read over the IEEE-488
bus by an external controller for input to instrument set-up and control routines .
Two switch selected input connectors are also
provided for selecting input signal source.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - 225 MHz, plug-In only. 200 MHz In the 7912AD.
Bandwidth may be limited to 20 MHz ± 3 MHz by bandwidth
limit switch .
Ac Coupled Lower Bandwidth Step Reapon.e -
10Hz or less.
50 I! input plug-In only, t .8 ns rise time.
Deflection Factor - 10 mV/div to 5 V/div, 9 steps in a 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy Is ± 2'10 of indicated deflection factor with
GAIN adlusted at 10 mV/div.
Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps and extends selected deflection factor to at least 2.5 times the calibrated value.
Input Rand C - Selectable: 1 Mil within 2'10 and ",, 20 pF or
50 I! ± 1 Il with VSWR .. 1.5:1 at 200 MHz or less.
Input. -
Selectable A or B signal input connectors.
M.. Input Voltage - 1 Mil, de coupled : 250 V (de + peak
ac), ac component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less. MI!, ac coupled: 500 V (de + peak ac), ac component 500 V p-p max , 1
kHz or less. 50 Il: 0.5 watts max.
Programmable Function. - All functions except VARIABLE,
GAIN, and IDENTIFY are programmable.
Deliectlon Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/dlv in 10 calibrated steps
(1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2'10 with gain adjusted to
10 mV/div. Uncallbrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
t Mil within 2%; = 20 pF.
Max Input Voltage - [)c.coupled : 250 V (dc + peak ac); ac
component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less. Ac-coupled: 500 V
(de + peak ac); ac component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.01 div/· C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line VOltage constant) Is 0.02 div in anyone minute after 1
hour warm-up.
Common·Mode ReJectlon Ratio (ADD, Ch 2 Invert) At least 10: I, de to 50 MHz.
Order 7 A 18 Amplifier ......................... $1145
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 calibrated steps
(1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy Is within 2% with gain adjusted at
10 mV/dlv. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil within 2'10; = 20 pF.
Max Input Voltage - Dc-coupled : 250 V (dc + peak ac) ; ac
component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or Jess. Ae-coupled : 500 V
(de + peak ac); ac component 500 V p-p max, 1 kHz or less.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (ADD, Ch 1 Invert) At least 10: I , de to 50 MHz.
Dc Stability - Drtft with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) Is 0.02 div/· C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant) is 0.02 div in anyone minute after 1
hour warm-up.
Order 7 A26 Amplifier .......................... $1850
DC OFFSET OPTION
Dc Offset is for the user who needs to analyze small signals
that are riding on larger signals, such as power supply ripple.
Option 06, Dc Ollset - Two separate Channell and Channel
2 variable offset controls are concentric with the position controls replacing the identify push-buttons of the standard 7A18.
The ac-dc-ground switch of each channel is expanded to accommodate a fourth position for de offset.
Ollset Range Display at 5 mV/div.
± 200 div max, equivalent to ± 1 V
Accurecy - When in DC OFFSET the deflection accuracy is
derated by 1%.
Order Option 06 Dc Offset ........... Add $200
Order 7 A 16P Programmable
Amplifier ............••.•.............................. $2200
- -~ - - - - - - - - ......... _ ...... ka. _
.... , • • t""
""'_"A
1.c;,~
185
7000
AMPLIFIER
SINGLE-TRACE AMPLIFIER
TEK DIFFERENTIAL
7A17
7A 13
SERIES
High Cmrr Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high cmrr adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes increase the
differential input impedance to 20 mO and allow
adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection
ratio (cmrr).
See page 336 for P6055 characteristics.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil within O.lS%; ",20 pF. R in "'00, is
available In the 1 mV to SO mV/div range, selectable by an
Internal switch.
Deflection Fector - 1 mV/div to S V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1-2-S sequence). Accuracy is within 1.S% with gain adjusted at
1 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARI ABLE is continuous between
steps to at least 12.S V/div.
Sln\lle Ran\le -
_
Pl
7A17 1 - _AM
_
_ "_'E_R _ _.1l
Dc to 150 MHz Bandwidth
Differential Comparator Amplifier
7A17
7A13
Low Cost
Dc to 105 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
Dc to 150 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
1 mV/div to 5 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
50 mV /div Calibrated Deflection Factor
Easy to Customize
20,000: 1 Cmrr
10,000 em Effective Screen Height
The 7A 17 is a unique wideband, plug-in amplifier
electrically and mechanically suitable for do-ityourself design and modification.
The layout of the circuit board assembly provides
a blank soldering pad matrix and ground plane
surface totaling approximately 40 square inches.
Circuits may be installed here. Mainframe power
is identified and available on the circuit board.
The front sub-panel is prepunched with holes of
various sizes and shapes which allow for the
mounting of connectors, switches, indicators, etc.
Deflection Factor attenuation.
Input Z -
Adjustable to SO mV/div. There is no step
SOil
Max Input Volta\le -
S v RMS.
Order 7 A 17 Amplifer ............................ $375
1 MO Input
The 7A 13 is a differential comparator amplifier. It
incorporates a number of features which make it
particularly versatile, especially in multitrace combination with other 7000 Series vertical plug-ins.
The 7A 13 has constant bandwidth over the 1
mV/div to 5 V/div deflection factor range . The
bandwidth is selectable to FULL or 5 MHz for
best displayed noise conditions for low-frequency
applications.
As a differential amplifier the 7A13 provides a balanced (+ and -) input for applications requiring
rejection of a common-mode signal. The cmrr is
20,000:1 from dc to 100 kHz, derating to 200:1 at
20 MHz. The unit can reject up to 10 V of common-mode signal at a deflection factor setting of
1 mV/div, increasing to 100 V rejection potential
at 10 mV/div (X10 Vc pulled) and 500 V at 0.1
V/div.
As a comparator amplifier the 7A13 loses its differential capability, but provides an accurate
(0.1%) positive or negative internal offsetting voltage covering the common-mode signal range of
the unit. A signal of up to ± 10 V may be applied
to an input (+ or -) at a deflection factor setting
of 1 mV/div and, with an opposing Vc (offset voltage), viewed in 10,000 segments of 1 mV. The
offset voltage is also available as an output for
external monitoring.
186
10 mVto
SO mV/dlv
(Xl0 Vc out)
lmV to
and 0.1 V to
SOmV/dlv
O.S V/dlv
Deflection
Factor
Settings
0.1 V to O.S
V/div (Xl0 Vc
out) and 1 V
to S V/dlv
Commonmode Signal
Range
±10V
±100 V
±SOO V
Max Dccoupled Input
(dc
Peak
Ac at 1KHz
or less)
±40V
± 400 V
±SOO V
+
Max Accoupled Inpu
(dc voltage)
±SOO V
Mu Input Gate Current - 0.2 nA or less from O"C to
+ 3S"C ; 2 nA or less at + 8S"C to + S5"C.
Dc Stability - Drift w~h time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term, 1 mV pop or 0.1 diy, or less
(whichever is greater) over any 1-minute Interval after 20 minute warm-up, Long term, 1 mV p-p or 0.1 div or less (whichever
Is greater) during any 1 hour Interval after 20 minute warm-up.
Drift with ambient temperature (constant line voltage), 2
mV/l0·C to 0.2 div/l0· C or less, whichever is greater.
Dlaplayed Nolae (Tan\lentially meaaured) - With Xl0 Vc in,
400 pV (200 pV RMS) or less at 1 mV/dlv; 0.2 div or less at 2
mV/div to S mV/div; O.OS dlv or less at 10 mV/div to S V/div.
With Xl0 Vc out, 0.4 div or less at 10 mV/dlv to O.S V/div.
Overdrive Recovery - 1 pS to recover to within 2 mV and 0.1
ms to recover to within 1 mV after a pulse of ± 10 V or less at 1
mV/div only regardless of pulse duration.
Intemal Comperiaon Volta\le - Range, 0 V to ± 10 V; accuracy, ± (0.1% of setting + 3 mY); Vc output R, = 15 kll.
Common·Mode Rejection Ratio GMAA Spec,hC.ho" jl m\lld,,,, 'o SOmVtdlV
p .p Amo hluOe SmulO,d Tell Sione'
I
I~'
1'-----'!----4'~
~
20 000 I
1----+---+-- =
- ......1----+--- 0000'"
~
1\
20 ______
~ 10 1--_ _+-__.1-____1:-1- \-'<+--_ '000'
'"
" vr"""on P..;"
\
"",,1\
~--L---L---~-~~ -__~ 'oo,
DC
10 ~Ml
100 IIH~
, MH I
10 MHI
100 MHt
FREOUENCY
At least 2000:1, 10 mV/div to SO mV (Xl0 Vc out) and 0.1 V/dlv
to 5 V/div. A~pled Input at least Soo:l at 60 Hz.
Order 7 A 13 Amplifier •.......•.•..••.••..••••. $2690
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
FET PROBE AMPLIFIER
TEK
Single ended, one-half the differential measurement. Display
shift Is ± 4 div ( + 25 ' C) and ± 20 div (+ 50'C) atl0 ~V/dlv (accoupled).
7A22
Signal and Off..et Range 20 mV
to 0.1
V/dlv
Commonmode
Signal
Range
±10V
±100 V
±500 V
Max Dccoupled
Input (dc
+ peak ac
at 1 kHz
or less)
±15 V
±200 V
±500 V
Dc Offset
Range
7A22
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
10 p.V/ div to 10 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
100,000: 1 Cmrr
Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points
Dc Offset
2V
to 10
±500 V
dc rejection, at least 4 x 10':1
+1 V
to
-1 V
I +10V
I +100V
I+1000
V
to
to
to
-10 V
- 100 V
-1000 V
Dc Stability - Drift with time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term, 5 ~V (pop) or 0.1 dlv, whichever Is
greater In any minute after 1 hour warm-up. Long term, 10 ~V
(pop) or 0.1 div. whichever is greater in any hour after 1 hour
warm-up. Drift with ambient temperature (constant line voltage)
Is 50 ~V/ 'C or less.
DI.played Nol.e - 16 ~V or 0.1 div (whichever is greater) at
max bandwidth; source resistance 25 Il or less measured
tangentially.
Overdrive Recovery - 10 ~s or less to recover within 0.5% of
zero level after removal of a test signal applied for 1 s (signal
amplitude not to exceed differential dynamic range). Front-panel OVERORIVE light Indicates that an overdrive condition Is
being approached.
Common-mode Rejection Rallo (for ligna I. not exceeding
common-mode signal range)
High Cmrr Probes for Differential Amplifiers
Order 7A22 Amplifier ............. __ .. __ ....... $1410
7A11
Built-in FET Probe
See page 336 for P6055 characteristics.
Bandwidth - Hf - 3 dB point; selectable in 9 steps (1-3 sequence) from 100Hz to 1 MHz, accurate within 10% of selected frequency ; rise time In 1 MHz position Is 350 ns ± 9%. LI
- 3 dB point ; selectable in 6 steps (1 -10 sequence) from 0.1 Hz
to 10 kHz. accurate within 12% of selected frequency. The
switch also contains dc and dc with OFFSET positions. Accoupled at input, 2 Hz or less.
Deflection Factor - 10 ~V/dlv to 10 V/dlv in 19 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 Sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adlusted to 1 mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 25 V/div.
fnput Rand C -
1 Mil within 1%; ",, 47 pF.
M.. Input Gate Current - Differentially measured. 40 pA
( + 25'C) and 200 pA (+ 50 ' C) atl0 ~V/div to 10 mV/div ; 10
pA ( + 25 ' C) and 20 pA (+ 50 ' C) at 20 mV/div to 10 V/div.
.-
....-.. ....:-
The 7A22 is a differential amplifier well suited for
difficult low -amplitude , low -frequency
measurements.
'With constant temperature. See de stability specifteations.
\:
1iI-
1 MO Input
When used in pairs, these probes increase the
differential input impedance to 20 mO and allow
adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection
ratio (cmrr).
__~I"
V/dlv
10 p.V/ Hour Dc Drift"
We recommend the P6055 high cmrr adjustable
lOX probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
-- -...
V..... _ I CM.
10l'V
to 10
mV/dlv
Max Accoupled
Input (de
voltage)
Differential Amplifier
I
Delleotion
Factor
Settings
0.2 V
to 1
V/dlv
7A11
Dc to 250 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)
5 mV /div to 20 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
Dc Offset
1 MO Input
The 7A 11 is a wideband plug-in amplifier. The
captive FET probe input configuration optimizes
signal acquisition with high resistance (1 MO) and
low capacitance (5.8 pF at 5 mV/div), without loss
of signal amplitude by probe attenuation. Two
20X attenuators , phYSically mounted in the probe
For recomm ended orobes-refer to page 152.
7Aft
~
Amplifier
--
______________
~
tip, are relay-switched into the input signal path at
the appropriate deflection factor. Therefore you
need not concern yourself with manual plug-on
atlenuators and signal dynamic range .
Deflecllon Factor - 5 mV/div to 20 V/div in 12 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy Is within 2% of gain adlustment at 0.1 V/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous between steps to at least 50 V/dlv.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil within 1%; ",, 5.8 pF (5 mV/dlv to 50
mV/div). _ 3.4 pF (0.1 V/dlv to 1 V/dlv). ",2 pF (2 V/div to 20
V/dlv).
Signal and Offlet Range Deflection
Factor
Settings
5 mV/dlv
to 50
mV/dlv
0.1 V/dlv
to 1 V/dlv
2 V/dlv
to 20 V/dlv
Offset
Range
+1 Vto
-1 V
+20 V to
-20 V
+400 V to
-400 V
Offset
Range to
Offset Out
1:1 within
1%
+0 .5 mV
20:1 within
1.5%
+0 .5 mV
400 :1 within
2%
+0.5 mV
Max Dccoupled
Input
200 V (dc
+ peak ac,
ac component to
50 kHz)
200 V (dc
+ peak ac,
ac component to
40 MHz)
200 V (dc
+ peak ac,
ac component to
70 MHz)
Max Accoupled
Input
(Dc Component)
±200 V
Dc Stability - Drift with time (constant ambient temperature
and line voltage): short term. 0.1 div or less per minute after 20
minute warm-up. Long term. 0.3 div or less per hour after 20
minute warm up. Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage). 200 ~V/ ·C or less.
Dllplayed Noll. - 0.5 mV or 0.1 diY, whichever is greater. in
FULL BANDWIDTH mode. measured tangentially.
Offl.t Funcllon - An Internal de source, continuously variable between + 1 V and - 1 V, may be used to offset the trace.
(See chart for offset range.) An OFFSET OUT jack allows for
monitoring of the offset voltage. OFFSET OUT source resistance is 500 Il within 3%.
Included Acceslorte. - Capacitor-coupler head (011-011000); retractable hook tip (013-0106-00); probe tip ground
adapter (013-0085-00); 3 in ground lead (nose) (175-0849-00);
3 in ground lead (screw-in) (175-0848-00); 12 in ground lead
(screw-In) (175-0848-02); three miniature alligator clips (3440046-00); two insulated sleeves (166-0404-01); probe hook tip
(206-0114-00); probe tip to GR 50 Il termination (017-008800); 18 In cable (offset out) (175-1092-00).
Order 7 A 11 Amplifier ........ _................ $2325
187
7000
TEK AMPLIFIERS
7A24
SERIES
7A19
7A29
VOlTIIOIY
-•
I
---
I
wvtllf
,.,.."
r .~'
l)t."nyr
WII~.
,..
I ......
PO UUIlrf'f'
+ UP
..
' ....a
"""""loU
...."
ooa
-.-.
7 A24
--,
":.:"'"
DUAL TJlACI ..........., ...
Dc to 400 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier
Dc to 600 MHz Amplifier
Dc to 1 GHz Amplifier
7A24
7A19
7A29
Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth (with 7104)
Dc to 600 MHz Bandwidth (with 7104)
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth (7104)
5 mV /div to 1 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 mV/div to 1 V/ div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 mV/div to 1 V/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
50 {} Input
Optional ± 500 ps Variable Delay line
50 {} Input
50 {} Input
The 7A24, a high-performance, wide band, dualtrace amplifier, is designed primarily for use with
the 7700 , 7800, 7900, and 7100 Series
Mainframes. The 7A24 offers 350 MHz bandwidth
and 5 mV/div sensitivity; this provides the basic
building block for 3 or 4 trace operation. It
features constant bandwidth for all deflection
factors, 5 operating modes (CH 1, CH 2, ALT,
CHOP, ADD), trigger source selection (CH 1, CH
2, MODE), and color-keyed control groupings.
Polarity of channel 2 is selectable.
Dellectlon Factor - 5 mV/div to 1 V/div in 8 calibraled sleps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% wilh gain adjusled to 5
mV/div. Uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous between steps
to at least 2.5 V/div .
Input R - 50 !l within 0.5%; vswr 1.25:1 or less at 5 mV/div
and 10 mV/div . 1.15:1 or less from 20 mV/div to 1 V/div at 250
MHz.
Ma. Input protected.
5 V RMS ; 0.5 W max input power, internally
Common -Mode Rejection Ratio MHz .
At least 10: 1, de to 50
The 7A19 is a high-performance, wide band, single-trace plug-in amplifier designed primarily for
use with the 7100, 7700, 7800, and 7900 Family
Mainframes . The polarity of the display is
selectable, either normal or inverted.
Dellection Factor - 10 mV/div to 1 V/div In 7 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 3%.
Input R -
50 II.
Option 04, Varieble Signal Delay - Permits matching the
transit time 01 two preamps and probes to better than 50 ps.
Range is :t 500 ps.
Ma. Input - 50 div peak or 10 V R M S (2 W), whichever Is
less, in the d(}{X)upled mode. 100 V de additional In the accoupled mode.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7A19 Amplifier .................................... $1980
Dellectlon Factor -10 mV/div to 1 V/div in 7 calibrated steps
(1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at
0. 1 V/div. Uncalibrated variable Is continuous between steps to
at least 2.5 V/div.
tnput R -
50 II.
Option 04, Variable' Signal Delay - Permits matching the
transit time 01 two preamps and probes to better than 10 ps.
Range is 1 ns.
Max Input - 10 V RM S or 1 W-second pulses not exceeding
50 V peak in de coupled mode. 100 V dc additional In ac coupled mode.
Input Protection - Internal detection Circuitry provides protection by automatically disconnecting excessive signals 01 up
to 50 V. The 'disconnected' condition is indicated, and has
manual reset.
Option 04 Variable Slg Delay .... _................ _.......... Add 5350
ORDERING INFORMATION
7 A29 Amplifier .................................... $2455
Dc Stability - Drift with ambient temperature (constant line
voltage) is 0.02 div/o C. Drift with time (ambient temperature
and line voltage constant), 0.02 div In anyone minute after 1
hour warm·up.
Option 04 Variable Slg Delay .. _................ ,............ Add 5350
Order 7 A24 Amplifier .......................... $2090
188
The 7A29 is a high performance, wide-bandwidth,
single-trace plug-in amplifier designed primarily
for use with the 7104 Mainframes. A vertical amplifier to bw of mainframe, the 7A29 has a 10
mV/div to 1 V/div vertical sensitivity.
For recommended probes- reler to page 152.
TEK 7000
PROGRAMMABLE TIME BASE
DIGITAL PRETRIGGER TIME BASE
SERIES
7890P
7B90P
7B87
CHARACTERISTICS
500 ps!div to 500 mS!div
Calibrated Time Base
Sweep Rat.. - 5 s/div to 10 ns/div In 27 steps (1-2-5 se·
quence). Xl0 MAGNIFIER extends fastest calibrated sweep
rate to 1 ns div. The uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous to
at least 2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate.
Fully Programmable Plug-in
7912 AD Digitizer only
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div. + 15 ' C
to + 35 ' C. In the 7700. 7800. or 7900 Series Mainframes. ae·
rate accuracies by an additional 1% for O'C to +50'C.
400 MHz Trigger Bandwidth
Tlmel Dly'
Unmagnified
Magnified
4%
Unspecified
5 s/dlv to 1 s/dlv
0.5 sId Iv to 50 ns/div
1.5%
2.5%
20 ns/dlv to 10 ns/dlv
2.5%
4.0%
'Fastest calibrated sweep rate Is limited by 7700 and
7600.
Trigger Holdolt Time 2 times
TIME/DIV
5 sId Iv to
Minimum
setU ng or lass
l/Ls/dlv
Holdolt
0.5 /Ls/div to
Setting
2.0 /LS or less
10 ns/dlv
Variable
Extends holdoff time through at least
Holdoff
2 sweep lengths l or rates 01 20 msl
Range
dlv or laster
Delay Time Range - 0.2 or less to at least 9.0 times
TIME/DIV setting .
Jitter - 0.02% 01 TIME/DIV setting + 0.1 ns. or less.
Single-Sweep Operation
The programmable 7890P is designed for
use with a TEKTRONIX 7912AD
Programmable Digitizer. Its operating functions can be manually selected at the front
panel or selected under program control
via the IEEE -488 bus . The only
nonprogrammable functions are the
Sweep Calibration adjustment and the External Trigger Input Terminator Switch .
P"OGRAMMA ....
T_'''_'_"_'_''__-I.
78 101' _ _ _
Internal Trigger Jitter -
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rates - 500 ms/dlv to 10 ns/div in 24 steps. Magnifier
extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 500 ps/div.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over center 8 div. + 15' C to
+ 35 ' C. with any 7000 Series programmable mainframe. aerate accuracies by an additional 1% for O' C to + 50' C.
Tlmel Dlv
Unmagnified
Magnified
500 ms/dlv to 100 ns/dlv
2%
3%
50 ns/dlv to 10 ns/d iv
3%
4%
500 paId Iv
Tri gger Holdolt - Programmable in 62 steps between
minimum and maximum .
Min (ccw)
Mu(cw)
500 ps/div to 2/Ls/dlv
:<:;3.5/Ls
~ 90 /LS
5 /Ls/dlv to 20 /Ls/div
:<:;35/Ls
~ 900
50 /Ls/dlv to 200 /Ls/dlv
< 350/Ls
~9
500 /Ls/dlv to 2 ms/d iv
:<:;3.5 ms
~ 90
5 ms/dlv to 500 ms/div
:<:;35 ms
~ 900
/LS
ms
Min Signal Requ ired
INT
EXT
2.0 dlv
500 mV
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 dlv
125 mV
50 MHz to 400 MHz
1.5 dlv
375 mV
NORM Mode
Coupling
Triggering Frequency
Range
Min Signal
Required
I NT
EXT"
AC
30 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
100 mV
250 mV
AC LF REJI
30 kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
100 mV
250 mV
0.3 div
100 mV
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
100 mV
250 mV
AC HF REJ' 30 Hz to 50 kHz
DC
Dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
'EXT -;. 10 operation attenuates external trigger signal 10
times.
'Will not trigger on slnewaves or < 8 div.
INT. or 3 V. EXT. at or below 60 Hz.
'Will not trigger on 50 MHz sinewaves 1.5 div or less.
INT. or 0.15 V or less. EXT.
Slngle·Sweep Mode Trigger Level -
Triggering to 400 MHz
Variable Trigger Holdotf
Pretrigger when used with 7854
ms
p .p AUTO MODE
At least 50 Hz
1 ns!div to 5 s!div Calibrated
Time Bases
ms
Triggering Senlltlvlty-
Triggering Frequency
Range
Order 7B90P Programmable
Time Base ........................................... $2650
7887
5%
Tlmel Dlv
0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable: 1 Mn ± 5%. 20 pF
± 10% or 50 n ± 5% with 1.22 max vswr at 400 MHz. Maximum Input is 250 V (de + peak ac) for 1 Mn or 1 watt for 50 n
or 1 watt for 50 n. The level range (excluding pop AUTO) for a 1
kHz sinewave input is at least ± 3 V in EXT and at least ± 30 V
in EXT -;. 10.
Same as NORM mode.
Programmable in 0.05 div steps.
Horllontal POlllion - Programmable in 0.0125 div step unmagnified . 0.125 div step magnified.
The 7887 is a time base designed for use with the
7854 Mainframe to provide additional pre-trigger
capability. The pre-trigger feature is only compatible with the 7854 at this time. When used in the 8
horizontal of the 7854. the 7887 provides both
single shot and pre-trigger capability to the 7854.
The 7887 has the same characteristics as the
788017885 time base plug-ins except for single
shot pre-trigger capability. Pre-trigger allows you
to view what has occurred before the trigger
even in single shot applications. The amount of
pre-trigger time is determined by the AcquireStop delay time setting. The total amount of pretrigger is 0.2 to 9.9 times the time/div setting.
The INT ..;- 1000 control reduces the stored
time/div to 1000 times slower than the real time
display on a 7854. This does not. however. affect
the Acquire-Stop delay time. The INT ..;- 1000
control allows stored sweep speeds from 10 ms
to 5000 sec/div for slow speed applications.
An EXT CLOCK-IN connector is provided for
clock frequencies other than what is offered by
the INT clock of the 7887.
TRIGG ERING
Triggering Sensitivity (Auto and Norm Model) - Irom
repetitive signals)
Triggering
Mi n Signal Requ ired
Coupling
Frequency Range'
Int
Ext
30 Hz to 50 MHz
0.3 div
50 mV
AC
50 MHz to 400 MHz
1.5 div
250 mV
AC LF
30 kHz to 50 MHz
0.3 div
50mV
50 MHz to 400 MHz
1.5 dlv
250 mV
REJ'
AC HF
0.3 dlv
50 mV
30 Hz to 50 kHz
REJ
50 mV
Dc
to
50
MHz
0.3
div
DO
250mV
1.5 dlv
50 MHz to 400 MHz
'Triggering frequency ranges are limited to the Ire·
quency 01 the vertical system when operating In the
Internal mode.
'Will not trigger on slnewaves 01 less than 8 dlv
Int. or 3 V Ext . at or below 60 Hz .
]Trlggering Frequency Range lor dc coupling applies
to Irequencies above 30 Hz when operating In the
Auto trigger mode.
Single Sweep - Requirements are same as lor repetitive inputs.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz.
Sen.ltlylty (P-P AUTO Mode) - (ac or de coupling)
Triggeri ng
Min Signal Required
Frequency Range
Int
Ext
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 dlv
125 mV
50 MHz to 400 MHz
375 mV
1.5 dlv
Low Frequency Response :
mV
500
2.0
At least 50 Hz
External Trigger Input - Max Input voltage Is 250 V
(dc + peak ac) . Input Rand C is 1 Mil within 5%
and 20 pF within 10%. The level range (excluding p.p
AUTO) I. at least ±1 .5 V In EXT +1. and at least
±15 V in EXT +10 .
Internal Clock - Pre·trlgger 0.02048 Hz to 20.45 MHz
determined by the time/dlv. Xl0 mag . and + 1000
switches. Accuracy 01 Internal + INT +1000 = 0.1% .
Exte rnal Clock - Max Input Is 5 V pk. Input R Is 100
KIl within 5% . Threshold voltage TTL compatible . Max
input Ireq . 10 MHz with BNC input . Delay 0.5 /LS or
less .
Acquire Stop Delay - Total range Is 0.2 or less to at
least 9.9 times Tlme/Dlv setting . Jitter Irom 5 s/dlv
10 10 I's/div 0.07% 01 time/dlv setting or less . Delay
accuracy (+15 0 C to +35 0 C) I rom 0.5 s/dlv to 10 /LsI
dlv Is within 0.5% of measurement plus 5% 01 tlmel
dlv setting .
Single Shot Perlormance - Using 7B87 with 7854
I nternal Clock.
Fasteat Sweep
Tlme/ Dly)
50/Ls
100/Ls
2001'S
500/Ls
Order 7B87 Time Base
Point.
per wayeform
128
256
512
1024
$1480
189
TIME BASE
DELAYING TIME BASE
TEK !:iDELAYED
7810 and 7815
7B10
7B15 Features:
. .
- --.
. . ..
7B15
....
[)
t:. Time Measurements
__
with CRT Readout
CIf.,
~_ "~f
Delayed Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
~
\:
i
! l · ':;:
Vertical Trace Separation
between Two Delayed Sweeps
Both Feature:
0.2 ns/div to 0.2s/div Calibrated
Time Bases
Triggering to 1 GHz
Variable Trigger Holdoff
DlLAVINQ TIME .AS'
TIMIE ..... E
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
The 7S10 and 7S15 are horizontal time bases
designed for use with the 7104 Mainframe to
provide
optimum
bandwidth / sweep speed/compatibility, but may also be used with
the 7700, 7800, and 7900 Series Mainframes.
(Each may be used in any slower 7000 Series
Mainframe with some reduction in sweep accura·
cy at the fastest sweep speed.)
The 7S10 and 7S15 or the 7880 and 7885 provide
the t:. time measurement capability in addition to
the standard delay time capability. Either time
interval is digitally displayed on the CRT. A single
intensified zone which you can position anywhere
on the trace identifies the delay time interval (the
time from the "A" or main sweep to the start of
the intensified zone). Two intensified zones which
you can position anywhere on a trace identify the
t:. time interval (time between intensified zones).
Alternate sweep switching makes it possible to
display the information between the intensified
zones full screen at the "S" sweep speed. Sy
overlapping the two expanded waveforms, you
are confident of the exact positioning of the
intensified zones on the "A" sweep. This results in
easy-to-make, precise and repeatable timing
measurements.
Sy rotating the TRACE SEPARATION control out
of the OFF position, the t:. time mode is activated.
Two intensified zones can be independently positioned. As in the conventional delay mode, the
DELAY TIME knob adjusts the time to the first
intensified zone; the t:. TIME knob adjusts the
time between the two intensified zones. Now, the
CRT digital readout shows the t:. time between
the two delays.
Delayed Time Base
t:. Delaying Time Base
Either plug-in can be used separately as an
independent single time base, or they can be
combined in any mainframe with two horizontal
compartments for delaying and delayed
operation.
CHARACTERISTICS
Trace Separallon Range - Functional only in a Delay Time
mode when alternallng or chopping belween lime-base unils.
The second delayed sweep display can be ver1ically posilioned
alleast 3 div below Ihe flrsl delayed sweep display.
Sweep Rales - 0.2 s/div to 2 ns/div in 25 sleps. X10 MAGNIFIER extends faslesl calibrated sweep rale to 0.2 ns/div . The
uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous to at least 2.5 times the
calibrated sweep.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 diy, + 15"C
to + 35 " C, in the 7104, 7800 or 7900 Series Mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% for O"C 10 + 50"C.
Magn ified
Tlmel Dlv'
0.2 s/diy to 10 ns/dlv
3%
5 ns/dlv and 2 ns/dly
4%
'Fastest calibrated sweep rate Is limited by 7900,
7800 , 7700 , 7600 and 7300 Series Mainframes .
Delay Time Range IDIV setting.
Jitter - 0.02% of TIME/DIV setting up through 50 "s/diY.
0.03% of TIME/DIV setting plus 0.1 ns for sweep speeds of 20
"s/dly Ihrough 100 ns/dly.
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensll ivity
Tri ggering Fre·
quency Range '
Coupling
0.2 s/div
to 50 ms/div
Maximum
with VAR IABLE
40 ms
400 ms
X2 the
TIME/Dly Setting
X20 the
TIME/Div Setting
1 /Ls/diy
100.5/Ls/diy
2/Ls
20/Ls
0.2/Ls/dly
102 ns/diY
2/Ls
6/Ls
20 ms/dlv
to 2/Ls/dly
a
Time Range setting .
a
Minimum Triggering
Si gnal Required
Inlernal
External
Ac
30 Hz to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 dly
1.5 dly
50 mV
150 mV
Ac Lf REJ'
50 kHz to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 diy
1.5 diy
50 mV
150 mV
Ac Hf REJ
30 Hz to 40 kHz
0.5 diy
50 mV
Dc l
Dc to 250 MHz
250 MHz to 1 GHz
0.5 div
1.5 dly
50 mV
150 mV
Trigger Holdo" Time Min imum
0.2 or less to at least 9.0 limes TIME-
'The triggering frequency ranges given here are limited to the
- 3 dB frequency of the oscilloscope ver1ical system when
operallng in the internal mode.
'Will not trigger on sinewaves at or beiow 60 Hz when amplitudes are < 8 divisions internal or 3 volts External.
'The Triggering Frequency Range for DC COUPLING applies
to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the AUTO
TRIGGERING MODE.
0 10 at least 9 times TIME/DIV
Time Accura cy - Within (0 .5% measurement plus
3 least significant digits) 20 ms/diY to 100 ns/dly.
Single Sweep inputs.
Requirements are the same as for repetitive
Internal Trigger Jitter HI Sync Mode mVexternal.
30 ps or less at 1 GHz.
250 MHz to 1 GHz, .3 div internal and .75
External Trigger Input - Max input voltage is 250 V (dc +
peak ac) for 1 Mn input. 1 W average lor 50 n input. Input R
and C for 1 Mn input is 1 Mn within 5%, 20 pF within 10"4; for
50 n Input, 50 n within 2%. Level range is at least ± 3.5 V in
EXT -;- 1.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B10 Time Base ................................. $1980
7B 15 Delaying Time Base .................. $2245
190
DELAYED TIME BASE
D. DELAYING TIME BASE
TEK 7000
SERIES
7880 and 7885
7B80
7B85
Delayed Time Base
6. Delaying Time Base
Sweep Accuracy - Measured oyer the center 8 diy. + 15' C
to +35"C. in the 7700. 7800. or 7900 Series Mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% for O" C to + 50"C.
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity (Auto and Norm Modes) (from repetltlye signals)
7B85 Features:
6. Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
Delayed Time Measurements
with CRT Readout
Vertical Trace Separation
Between Two Delayed Sweeps
Both Feature:
1 ns/div to 5 s /div Calibrated
Time Bases
Triggering to 400 MHz
Variable Trigger Holdott
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
The 7880 and 7B85 are horizontal time bases
recommended for use with 7700, 7800 and 7900
Series Mainframes to provide optimum
bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility. (Each
may be used in any slower 7000 Series Mainframe
with some reduction in sweep accuracy at the
fastest sweep speed.)
Either plug-in can be used separately as an
independent single time base, or they can be
combined in any mainframe with two horizontal
compartments for delaying and delayed
operation.
X-V displays are available using a 7880 with
Option 02. A front-panel button (DISPLAY MODE)
selects either normal sweep or X-V display. Both
signals are applied to vertical (Y) amplifiers, and
the desired horizontal (X) signal is then routed
through plug-in and mainframe trigger paths to
the 7880, An X-V mode selection then applies the
signal to the horizontal deflection system.
CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristics are common to both units unless otherwise
noted.
Sweep Rate. - 5 s/diy to 10 ns/diy in 27 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Xl0 MAGNIFIER extends fastest calibrated sweep
rate to 1 ns diy. The uncalibrated VARIABLE is continuous to
at least 2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate.
TlmelDlv'
Unmagnified
S s/dly to 1 s/dly
4%
Magnlflad
Unspecified
Triggering
Min Signal Required
Coupling
Frequency Range'
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to SO MHz
SO MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 dly
1.5 diy
SO mV
2S0 mV
'Fastest calibrated sweep rate is limited by 7700 and
7600.
Ac LI
REJ'
30 kHz to SO MHz
SO MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
SO mV
2S0 mV
Trigger Holdolf Time -
Ac Hf
REJ
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 dly
50 mV
Dc'
Dc to SO MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.S div
50 mV
2S0 mV
O.S s/diy to SO ns/diy
1.S%
2.S%
20 ns/dly to 10 ns/dly
2.S%
4.0%
Minimum
Holdol!
.Seltln g
S s/diy to
1 ,,"s/diy
2 times
TIME/DIV
setting or less
O.S ,,"s/dlv to
10 ns/diy
2.0
Variable
Holdoff
Range
Extends holdoff time through at leasl
2 sweep lengths for rates of 20 msl
div or faster
,,"5
or less
6 Time RInge - 0 to at least 9 times TIME/DIV setting.
6 Time Accuracy - (+ IS"C to +35"C)
Within (0.5% measurement + 0.3% of TIME/DIV setting +1
least signlfteant digit) from 20 ms/diy to 100 ns/diy.
TrIce Separation Range - Functional only in t. Delay Time
mode when alternating or chopping between time-base units.
The second delayed sweep display can be vertically positioned
at least 3 diy below the first delayed sweep display.
Delay Time Range - 0.2 or less to at least 9.0 times TlMEIDIV setting.
Jitter - 0.02% of TIME/DIV setting + 0.1 ns, or less.
'Triggering frequency ranges are limited to the frequency of the vertical system when operatng In the
Internal mode .
'Will not trigger on sine waves of less than 8 dlv
I nt, or 3 V Ext . at or below 60 Hz.
'Triggering Frequency Range for dc coupling applies
to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating In the
Auto triggering mode .
Single Sweep - Requirements ere same as for repetitive Inputs.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 0.1 ns or less at 400 MHz .
Senlltlvlty (P-P AUTO Mode) - (ac or dc coupling)
Triggering
Frequency Range
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 dlv
12S mV
50 MHz to 400 MHz
1.5 dlv
375 mV
Low Frequency Response :
At least 50 Hz
2.0 dlv
500 mV
External Trigger Input - Max Input yoltage is 250 V (dc +
peak act. Input R and C Is 1 M!I within 5% and 20 pF within
10%. The leyel range (excluding poP AUTO) is at least ± 1.5 V
in EXT + 1. and atleast ± ISVlnEXT + 10.
7B80 Option 02 X-Y Ph.se Shift - (Determined by the circuitry In mainframe)
- For mainframe without X-Y horizontal compensation. the
mainframe phase shift SpecifICations are retained for frequencies of 50 kHz and below. For mainframes with optional X-Y
horizontal compensation. the extra delay adds to the phase
shift error above SO kHz.
('!Jure t. Delaying and delayed sweeps are shown with the
mainframe selecting ALT sweep modes. The delay time to the
start of the cJelayed sweep Is digitally presented on the lower
edge of the CRT.
figure 2. With the mainframe stili selecting ALT sweeps. delaying and both delayed sweeps are shown. The digital readout on
the lower CRT edge shows the time between the two sweep
delays. The TRACE SEPARATION knob Is used to position the
second delayed sweep below the first delayed sweep with up
to 3 div of separation.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B80 Time Base ................. ___ .............. $1255
7B85 Delaying Time Base .................. $1510
7B800PTION
Option 02, X· Y ____ ... __ ... __ .____ .........__.____ ... ____ ....... __ ... __ Add $100
191
DUAL
BASE
TEK TIME
DELAYING SWEEP (MAIN SWEEP)
DELAYED SWEEP
Sweep Rate - 0,2 s/div to 10 ns/div in 23 calibrated steps (1 2-5 sequence), An uncalibrated variable rete is continuous between steps, and extends sweep rate to at least 0,5 s/div, The
VARIABLE control is internally swltchable between delaying
and delayed sweeps,
Sweep Rate - 0,2 s/div to 0,5 ns/div In 27 steps (1-2-5 sequence), An uncalibrated variable rate Is continuous Detween
steps, and extends sweep rate to at least 0,5 s/dlv, The VARIABLE control Is internally swltchable between delaying and delayed sweeps,
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 dlv in a 7900
Family Osdlloscope:
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center 8 div In a 7900
Family Oscilloscope:
7B92A
Tlme/ Dlv
+ 15° C to + 35 0 C
DOC to + 5DoC
0,2 s/dlv to
20 ns /dl v
Within 2%
Within 3%
10 ns/div
With in 3%
With in 4%
Delay Time Multiplier Range - a to 9,8 times the DlY TIMEIDIV setting from 0,2 sldiv to 10 nsldiv (0 to 1.96 s).
Differential Delay Time Measurement Accuracy (+15'C to + 35 'C).
Sweep Speed
There are four display modes: normal sweep,
intensified delaying sweep, delayed sweep, and
alternate sweep (excepting alternate in R7704) ,
When operating in the AUTO mode of main
triggering, a bright base line is displayed in the
absence of a trigger signal.
10 ns/d lv to
5 ns/d i v
Within 3%
Within 4%
2 ns/div to
1 ns/dly
With in 4%
Within 5%
0.5 ns/dly
Wi th in 5 %
With in 6%
Tri gge ri ng
Freque ncy Range
Min Si gnal
Requ ired
Int
Ext
Delayed Tri ggering
±(0.75% of measurement + 0.5% of
full scale +5 ns)
Ac
50 ns/d ly to Both delay times
10 ns/dly
equal to or
greater than 25 ns
±(1% of measurement + 0,5% of
full scale)
One or both
delay t imes less
than 25 ns
±(1 % of measu rement +1% of full
scale +5 ns)
Full scale is 10 times the TIME/DIV or DlY TIME setting, Accuracy applies over the center 8 Delay Time Multiplier div from
+ 15' C to + 35 'C.
Delay Time Jitter - Not applicable for the first 2% of max
available delay time (DELAY TIME MULT dial setting > 0.2).
0.2 s/dly to
50 !,s/d ly
1 part in 50 ,000 of the max
available delay time
20 !,s/dly to
10 ns/dly
1 part in 50,000 of the max
ayailable delay time + 0.5 ns
Max available delay time is 10 times the TIME/DIV or DlY
TIME switch setting.
MAIN TRIGGERING
Au to, Norm
Coupli ng
Triggeri ng
Frequency Range
M in Si gnal
Requ ired
Int
Ext
30 Hz-20 MHz
0.5 dly
100 mY
20 MHz-SaO MHz
1.0 dly
500 mY
30 kHz-20 MHz
0.5 dly
100 mV
20 MHz-SaO MHz
1.0 dlv
500 mY
Ac
Ac Lf REJ'
Ac Hf REJ
30 Hz-50 kHz
0.5 d ly
100 mV
Dc-20 MHz
0.5 dly
100 mV
20 MHz-SaO MHz
1.0 dlv
500 mV
Dc
EXT -;- 10 switch attenuates external signal 10 times.
HI Sync - Triggering sensitivity Is 0.5 div INT or 100 mV EXT,
from 100 MHz to 500 MHz for any coupling except Ac HI Rej .
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep. When triggered, time base prOduces one sweep
only until reset.
Internal Trigger Jitter -
50 ps or less at 500 MHz,
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 0 or 1 mO Inputs ( 1
MO is paralleled by = 20 pF). Max safe input is 250 V (de +
peak ac) for 1 MO Input and 1 W average for 50 0 input. Range
of trigger level is at least ± 3.5 V In EXT, and at least ± 35 V In
EXT -;- 10,
192
Within 3%
One or both delay
time mult dial
settings at less
than 0.5
Triggering to 500 MHz
The 7B92A Dual Time Base is recommended for
use only in the 7800 and 7900 Series Mainframes
(the 7B92A may be used in all other mainframes
at slower sweep speeds),
With in 2%
Coupling
0.5 ns/div to 0.2 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Contrast Regulation between
Delaying and Delayed Sweeps
DOC to + 5DoC
0.2 s/dlv to
20 ns/d lv
± (0.75% of measurement +0.25%
of full scale)
Dual Time Base
Alternate Display of Intensified
Delaying and Delayed Sweeps
+ 15 0 C to + 35 0 C
Both delay time
mult dial
settings at 0.5
or greater
0.2 s/d ly to
0.1 !,s/dly
7B92A
Tlme/D ly
30 Hz to 20 MHz
0.5 dly
100 mV
20 MHz t o 500 MHz
1.0 dly
500 mV
DC to 20 MHz
0.5 d ly
100 mV
20 MHz to 500 MHz
1.0 dly
500 mV
Dc
Internal Trigger Jitter -
50 ps or less at 500 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 0 or 1 Mrl Inputs \1
Mrl is paralleled by = 20 pF), Max safe Input Is 250 V (dc +
peak ac) for 1 Mrl input. and 1W average for 50 11 Input. Range
of trigger leyells at least ± 3.5 in EXT.
Order 7B92A Dual Time Base ............ $2985
7000
TEK
7B53A
SERIES
----Ii
iii
~•
III
:I"
-"!!!"-
....
I
I
y
DELAYING SWEEP
Trlgg.rlng -
S.....p Rat. - 0.05 ~sldiv to 5 sldiv in 25 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 5 nsl div, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the Xl0 MAGNIFIER, The uncalibrated VARIABLE is
continuous between steps. The yariable control Is Internally
swltchable between main, delayed-sweep, and Yariable mainsweep holdeH.
Coupling
Trig gering
Frequ.ncy Range
Inl
Exl
Ac
30 Hz-l0 MHz
10 MHz-l00 MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
100 mV
500 mV
Dc
Dc-l0 MHz
10 MHZ-lOa MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlv
100 mV
500 mV
S..... p Accur.cy Tlmel Dly
Unmagnified
ooC
+15 OC
to
to
+35 0 C +50 o C
5 s/d lY to
1 s/dlY
0.5 sId Iv to
0.05/Ls/dlv
50 ms/dlv to
0.5 /Ls/d lv
"Unspec ifi ed
--
7B53 A ______________
Measured over the center 8 div.
3%
Magnified
OOC
+15 OC
to
to
+35 OC +50 o C
Dual Time Base
7B53A
*
3%
4%
3.5%
5%
MIXED SWEEP
2%
3%
2.5%
4%
S.....p Accur.cy - Within 2% plus measured main sweep
error, Exclude the loIlowlng portions of mixed sweep: first 0.5
dlv after start of main sweep display and 0,2 div or 0,1 ~s
(whichever Is greater) after transition of main to delayed sweep.
5 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Calibrated Mixed Sweep
Triggering to 100 MHz
Single-Sweep Operation
0.05% or less of TIME/DIV setting.
Trlgg.rlng Coupling
Triggering
Min Signal Requi red
Frequency Range
Int
Ext
Ac
30 Hz- l0 MHz
10 MHz-lOO MHz
0.3 dlv
1.5 dlY
100 mV
500 mV
0.3 dly
Ac Lf REJ*
30 kHz-l0 MHz
150 kHz-l0 MHz
10 MHz- lOO MHz
--
30 Hz-50 kHz
Dc-l0 MHz
10 MHz- l Oa MHz
0.3 div
0.3 dly
1.5 d lv
Ac Hf REJ
Dc
Optional TV Sync-Separator Triggering
The easy-to-use 7B53A Dual Time Base is recommended for use with 7600 Mainframes to provide
optimum bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility,
It may, however, be used in any 7000 Series
Mainframe. The fastest rate (5 ns/div) is obtained
with the X 10 MAGNIRER
The 7B53A Time Base features four kinds of
sweep: normal, intensified delaying , delayed, and
mixed, The pushbutton switches cannot be IiI.
e
*
Olfl.r. ntlal O.'ay Time Meaaurement Accur.cy - 5 sldiv to
1 sl div ± 1,4% of measurement + 0.3% of full scale; 0.5 sl dlv
to 1 ~sldl v : ± 0.7% of measurement + 0,3% of full scale. Full
scale is 10 times the DELAY TIME/DIV setting. Accuracy applies over the center 8 DTM divisions from + 15" C to + 35 " C,
Jltt.r -
I ns or less at 75 MHz.
Extemal Trlgg.r Input - Max Input voltage Is 500 V (de +
peak ac). 500 V p-p ac at I kHz or less. Input R and Is 1 Mil
within 2%, 20 pF within 2 pF. LEVEL range Is at least + I .5 V
to - 1.5 V In EXT.
4%
O.'ay Tim. Multipli.r Range - 0 to 10 times the DELAY
TIME/DIV setting from 5 sldiv to 1 ~sldiv .
~ '
Intemel Trlgg.r Jitter -
Mi n Signal R.qu l red
--
1.5 dlv
100 mV
500 mV
100 mV
100 mV
500 mV
'Will not trigger on sinewaves of 3 div or less INT or 1.5 V EXT
below 120 Hz .
Single Sw • • p - Triggering requirements are the same as normal sweep, When triggered, sweep generator produces one
sweep only until reset.
Internal Trlgg.r Jltt.r -
I ns or less at 75 MHz,
Ext. rnal Trlgg.r Input - Max input voltage Is 500 V (dc +
peak ac). 500 V p-p ac at I kHz or less, Input Rand C Is 1 Mil
within 2%, 20 pF within 2 pF, LEVEL range is at least + 1.5 V
to - 1.5 V in EXT, at least + 15 V to - 15 V In EXT -;- 10,
EXT HORIZONTAL INPUT
O.II.ctlon Factor - 10 mVldly within 10% when In EXT. MAG
Xl 0; 100 mVl dlv within 10% when In EXT; I Vldlv within 10%
when in EXT -;- 10,
Band ... 'dth
Coupling
Lower -3 dB
Upper -3 dB
Ac
40 Hz
2 MHz
Ac Lf REJ
16 kHz
2 MHz
Ac Hf REJ
40 Hz
lOa kHz
Dc
Dc
2 MHz
TV SYNC
Option OS, TV Sync S.perator Triggering - Permits stable
internal line or field rate triggering from displayed composite
video or composite sync waveforms. Conventional waveform
displays and measurements can be made from standard broadcast or closed circuit tv systems. domestic or international,
with up to 1201-line, 60 Hz field rates, Individual lines may be
displayed with delayed sweep features, The wide range of delayed sweeps permits accurate alternate-frame, color-burst observations In the PAL color system. Option 05 deletes ac line
trigger and External -+- 10 from trigger source.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B53A Dual Time Base ...................... $1380
7BS3A OPTION
DELAYED SWEEP
Option OS, TV Triggering ....................................... Add S150
S.....p Rate - 0,05 ~sldiv to 0.5 sldiv in 22 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 5 nsl div, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the Xl0 MAGNIFIER , The uncalibrated VARIABLE Is continuous between steps to at least 1.25 sl dlv and is switchable
between the main. delayed sweep. and variable main sweep
holdeH.
S..... p Accuracy Tlmel Oly
Measured over the center 8 dlv,
Unmagn ified
Magn ified
+15 OC
to
+35° C
OOC
to
50° C
+15 OC
to
+35 OC
to
50° C
0.5 s/dlv to 0.1
s/dlv and 0.2
/Ls/d lv to 0 .05
/Ls/ dlv
4%
5%
4.5%
6%
50 ms/d lv to 0.5
!,s/dlv
3%
4%
3,5%
5%
ooe
D.'ayed Sweep Gete - Output voltage is ~ + 3,5 V into at
least lOkI! shunted by 100 pF or less. or 0,5 V Into 50 11, Rise
time is 50 ns or less; output R is 350 11 within 10"10. Gate is
available at the DLY'D TRIG IN connector when the delayed
sweep source switch is set to INT,
193
SINGLE
TEK TIME
BASE
7B50A
~
....
~.
,~
----TalMI-'
.
Ii" ii
_ '.i -il'
-- .
i -.'" i
~.
7000
SERIES
Ac Lf REJ attenuates undesirable trigger components below 30 kHz . Ac Hf REJ attenuates components above 50 kHz, which can cause triggering problems during low-frequency applications.
Single-sweep functions with lighted READY indicator and manual reset are associated with the
trigger mode controls.
X-V displays are available with Option 02 installed. A front-panel button (DISPLAY MODE)
selects either normal sweep or X-V display. Both
signals are applied to vertical (Y) amplifiers and
the desired horizontal (X) signal is then routed
through plug-in and mainframe trigger paths to
the 7B50A. An X-V mode selection then applies
the signal to the horizontal deflection system.
Sensitivity (P-P AUTO MODE) (Ac or Dc Coupling)
Triggering Frequency
Range
Min Signal Required
Int
Ext
200 Hz to 50 MHz
0.5 dly
125 mV
50 MHz to 150 MHz
1.5 dly
375 mV
Option 02
X- V Pha.e Shill - (Determined by tha cirCUitry in mainframe)
- For mainframes without X-V horizontal compensation, tha
mainframe phase shift specifICation Is retained for frequencies
of 50 kHz and below. For mainframes with optional X-V horizontal compensation, the extra delay adds to the phase shift
error above 50 kHz.
ORDERING INFORMATION
7B50A Time Base ................................. $840
CHARACTERISTICS
7810"
TIM£ aA.1E
:=G
'"'
Time Base
7850A
5 ns /div to 5 s/ div Calibrated Time Base
Sweep Rale. - 0.05 ~s/diY to 5 s/diy in 25 steps (1-2-5 sequence). 5 ns/diy, the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with tha Xl0 MAGNIFIER. The uncalibrated VARIABLE allows
continuous sweep rate selec1ion between steps.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured oyer center 8 diY, + 15' C to
+ 35 ' C, with any 7000 Series Mainframe. Derate accuracies
by an additional 1'10 each for O' C to + 50' C.
TimelDlv
Unmagnified
5 s/ dly to 1 s/ di y
Magnlned
4%
0.5 s/ diy to 0.5 !,s/ dly
2%
3%
Triggering to 150 MHz
0.2 !,s/ diY to 0.05 !,s/ d iy
3%
4%
Variable Trigger Holdoff
'Unspec lfied
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
Single-Sweep Operation
The easy-to-use 7B50A Time Base is recommended for use with 7600 Series Mainframes to provide optimum bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility. It may, however, be used in any 7000 Series
Mainframe. The fastest rate (5 ns/div) is obtained
with the X10 MAGNIFIER.
Trigger Holdoff Time 5 s/d ly to
1 !,s/ dly
0.5 !'s/ di y to
50 ns/d ly
MIN Hold off
Sett in g
Var iab le
Holdo ff Range
Pushbutton positions select triggering mode, coupling method, and source. For routine applications, hands-off triggering is accomplished by
actuating three switches: INT SOURCE, AC COUPLING, and Pop AUTO MODE. The Pop AUTO
MODE provides a base line trace in the absence
of a signal and a triggered trace at any position of
the LEVEUSLOPE control when a signal of 0.5 div
or greater is present. Except for the selection of
+ or - SLOPE this mode is automatic. The other
triggering positions are useful for specific
applications.
194
2.0 !,s or less
Extends holdoff time through at least
2 sweep lengths for sweep rates
of 20 ms / diy or faster
Triggering Sensitivity (AUTO end NORM modu)
Coupling
This time base features expanded capability in
maximum triggering frequency - now 150 MHz
- and variable trigger hold off - for stability on
lengthy asynchronous data trains.
2 times TIME/DIV
setting or less
Triggering
Frequency Range'
Min Signal Required
Inl
Ext
Ac
30 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 diy
1.5 d ly
50 mV
250 mV
Ac LI
REJI
30 kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 diy
1.5 dly
50 mV
250 mV
Ac Hf
REJ
30 Hz to 50 kHz
0.3 dly
50 mV
Dc]
Dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 150 MHz
0.3 d ly
1.5 dly
50 mV
250 mV
' Triggering fr8Quency ranges are limitlKi to the frtJquency of the
vertical system when operating in the internal mode.
' Will not trigger on sinewaves of less than 8 div INT,
EXT, at or below 60 Hz.
or 3
V
l Triggering Fr8Quency Range for de coupling applies to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating In the Auto Triggering
mode.
7850A OPTION
Option 02, X-V ........................................................ Add $100
TEK 7000
DIGITAL
DELAY
SERIES
7D11
An accurate and jitter-free delay-by-time is very
useful when working with digital logic, pcm telemetry, sonar, radar, shock tube testing, and delay
line measurements, to name a few. On receipt of
a trigger, the 7011 in the delay-by-time mode
counts a highly accurate clock; at the selected
delay time, it delivers a delayed trigger to its
front-panel conector and mainframe. In both
modes, delay time or number of events to be
counted is selected by a single front-panel
control.
When the 7011 is installed in a vertical compartment, the CRT can display a waveform that lasts
for the duration of the delay interval. This
waveform may be displayed together with the
signal waveform the 7011 triggers on . From a
vertical compartment, the 7011 can trigger a time
base such as 7B80, 7B53A, or another 7011
through the internal mainframe trigger path.
Digital Delay Unit
7011
Delay by Time or Events
Digital Delay Readout to 7 1/2 Digits
100 ns to 1 s Delay Time
1 ns Resolution
2.2 ns Delay Time Jitter
0.5 ppm ( ± 2 ns) Accuracy
Delay Interval CRT Display
The 7011 Oigital Oelay Plug-in gives stable delayed triggers for measurements requiring low
jitter. The 7011 also provides precision time
delays. The 7011 may be used in any compartment of a 7000 Series Mainframe equipped with
CRT readout. It provides a variety of outputs.
The delay-by events mode is used to eliminate
jitter in mechanically based systems such as disc
file memories. It is also useful for selecting a
certain time frame in data for analysis and for
making other measurements under complex timing conditions.
In the delay-by events, the 7011 counts arbitrary
trigger events, periodic or aperiodic, and delivers
an output after the preselected count has been
reached (see fig 2).
In any horizontal compartment, the 7011 generates a display similar to the ' A intensified by S'
mode of conventional delayed sweep (see fig 2).
When used in the A horizontal compartment, the
7011 B sweep delay mode controls will permit the
B sweep to run after the delay generated by the
7011 . This delay interval is also available at the
front panel for such uses as gated interval
counter measurements and generating pulses of
highly accurate width.
In delay-by-events, an external pulse (events start
trigger) may be used to enable counting of the
events. In such applications as a line selector on
a video monitor, the vertical sync pulse is the
events start trigger. Then the 7011 counts "n°
number of horizontal sync pulses (events) into the
field or frame . In a similar manner, the origin pulse
of a disc memory can be used as the events start
trigger, and the disc clock pulses become the
events that are counted.
For timing measurements that require a higher
degree of accuracy than the 0.5 ppm source
available in the 7011 , the delay-by-time clock may
be referenced to an external 1 MHz timing standard through the EXT 1 MHz input.
Time delay resolution up to 1 ns may be obtained
by using the front-panel fine delay control.
EVENTS DELAY
Event. Deley Renge Deley Increment -
One to 10' events.
One event.
35 ns ± 5 ns.
In.ertlon Delay -
< 500 ns.
Recy cle Time -
Max Event Frequency -
At least 50 MHz.
TRIGGERING
Exlernel Trigger
Source
Coupling
Max
Inpul
Voltage
Level
Range
!.npul
Rand C
Sens lt lvlty
Inl , Line , Exl, Ext +10
Dc , Ac, Ac LI ReJ, Ac HI ReJ
250 V Dc
+
1 M{l ± 5%, 20 pF :!:2 pF
Coupling
Frequency
Renge
Ac
30 kHz-l0 MHz
10 M Hz-50 M Hz
30 kHz-l0 MHz
150 kHz-l0 MHz
10 MHz-50 MHz
Ac LI
ReJ"
Ac HI
ReJ
30 Hz-50 kH z
Dc
Dc-l0 MHz
10 MHz-50 MHz
Min Signel
Required
Inl
Exl
0.3 dlv 150 mV
1.0 dlv 750 mV
0 .3 dlv
150 mV
1.0 d lv 750 mV
-
0.3 dlv
150 mV
0.3 div 150 mV
1.0 dlv 750 mV
"Will not trigge r on sine waves 01 3 dlv o r less INT
or 1.5 V EXT below 120 Hz.
Evenl. Slarl Trigger
External Only
Dc Only
Source
Coupling
Max Input
Voltage
Level Range
Input
Rand C
Sens itivity
150 V dc
+
peak ac
± 3V
1 M{l w ilhln 5% , 20 pF ± 2 pF
100 mV minimum , 30 Hz to 2 MHz;
increas i ng to 250 mY, 2 MHz to 20
MHz ; increasing to 500 mY, 20 MHz
to 50 MHz.
TIME DELAY
Digital Delay Range - Normal mode: lOOns to 1 s in 100 ns
increments. Echo mode: 200 ns to 2 s in 200 ns Increments.
Analog Delay - Continuously variable from
ns. accuracy within 2 ns of indicated delay.
Jilter with Internal Clock ever is greater.
a to at least 100
2.2 ns or delay time x 10-' , which-
'0".
''''
a:
w
t
..,
DIS~LA~lJr~TER
D~LA~"TI~E
1 00 01
10 ns
By setting an internal switch, the indicated delay
time is half the actual delay time. In such applications as TOR, radar timing, etc, the CRT readout
would display the "one-way-trip' time.
peak Ac
:!: 1.75 V In Exl
±17.5 V In Ext +10
, n.
22 ns
10 lIS
/
V
100 lIS
1 ms
10 ms
100 ma
V
1s
/
10 s
100 s
DELAY TIME
Insertion Delay Recycle Time -
Zero within 2 ns.
Less than 575 ns.
Time Base - 500 MHz oscillator phase-locked to internal or
external clock.
Internal Clock -
5 MHz crystal oscillator. Accuracy is 0.5
ppm.
External Clock -
1 MHz within l "to, ac coupled, 50 n .
OUTPUTS
Delayed Trigger Out - Amplitude: 2 V or greater into open
circuit, 1 V or greater into 50 Il. Rise time into 50 Ilload : 2 ns or
less. Fall time into 50 Ilload : 5 ns or less. Pulse width: 200 to
250 ns.
Delay Interval Oul - Amplitude: 2 V or greater into open
circuit, 1 V or greater into 50 Il. Rise time into fall time: 5 ns or
less. Accuracy: equal to delay interval less 20 to 30 ns.
READOUT
figure t. Delay-by-time. A 0.2 ps time marker delayed 4.9998
ms by the 7011 and displayed at5 nsldiv.
fl9ure 2. Delay-by events. The lower trace is the master clock in
our logic circuit. TIle top trace Is our data which Is delayed by
265 clock pulses.
Display - 71 /2 digit with leading zero suppression , ms legend
in time delay mode. Plus (+ ) symbol reminds the operator to
add on the FINE DELAY (ns) setting.
Order 7D 11 Digital Delay Unit ........... $2735
195
UNIVERSAL
TEK COUNTER/TIMER
7015
Modaa of Operation
Dc to 225 MHz
Resolution
0.1 Hz maximum
Range
Frequency
Mode
Accuracy
f fr' QI H zl ..- ! T8 •
10 ns to 10' seconds with ave raging times
of Xl to Xl000 In decade steps .
Resolution : 10 picoseconds maximum
Range
Period and
Multi-Period
Mode
'In :t T1
fp er lod ls l ::;: ±
Accuracy
T8 . p.
In
10-'
2E np ,
Pc,
±- - ± M
dv
M
± -
-'M
dr
Time Interval
TI and (TI
Average)
Mode
Frequency Ratio ,
CH B/Ext Clock
225 MHz Counter/Timer
7015
Time Interval Averaging
fTl l sl '"
Manual Stop Watch
Range
Range
dt
10' seconds
10' counts
FREQUENCY MODE
l000~-------r-------.-------''-------.--------r-------'
a:
Measurement Interval
+-______4-______-+~~__~~____--1
~100~0~.0~1~.~e~c__~______
a::
w
...z
~
~
0 .1 sec
!-"""-=---+--------+---------1i-==-----¥
-------+---------i
rtl
<
W
~
W
rtl
<
• InterMloteill.tor
... 1.0
U
1-.L.lI.2.!.:.--+-------+~~---I,.L--
• Within 3 monthllince c:.Ilibt,don
• G-SO·C oper.tion
rtl
a::
o
• Trigger recognitlon occurs only
.t desired point on wav.form no f,l. triggering
:t
1000 Hz
10 kHz
0 .1 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
INPUT FREQUENCY
Three displays, the pseudo gate, Ch B Schmitt
trigger output, and true gate, are selected by a
7015 front panel switch and are also available at
a front panel connector.
The 7015 can also be completely controlled by
the oscilloscope's delayed gate. Arming inputs
are provided for each channel. By using the
delayed B gate to control the start and stop count
points, visually selective measurements can be
made at any point on the CRT display.
Two identical high-speed trigger circuits provide
complete signal processing. Identical trigger circuits also allow single-shot time interval measurements to be made with 10 ns resolution . With
repetitive signals, time interval averaging will increase the accuracy of a measurement by a
factor of ten or more .
196
2Enpk
± 10- 9±~
NOTE : Formulas given where Ii Is the error ; TB (expressed as a decimal) Is the
time base accuracy ; P ;n is the period or time Interval of unknown signal ; M Is the
number of averages given ; Pel Is the measurement clock period ; T Is the gate time ;
f;n Is the frequency of the unknown signal ; Enp. equals peak noise p"lse amplitude
as presented to Schmitt trigger circuit ; dvldt equals signal slope at Input to Schmitt
trigger (volts per second). These formulas were used to develop the associated charts.
;:) 10
The 7015 offers all the measurement capabilities
of the counter/timer, such as time interval , period ,
freqency, frequency ratio , totalize , and manual
stop watch.
Pin ± -
..yM
Totalize , Ch B
10 ps Period-Averaging Resolution
The 7015 is a universal counter/timer designed
for use in all 7000 Series Oscilloscope
Mainframes with CRT readout.
Pc k
± T8'
10-' to 10'
w
Signal Conditioning via Mainframe
Trigger Source
Accuracy
Worst Case
(Nominal)
o to
o to
CRT Display of Counting Interval
Frequency Measurements Directly
to 225 MHz
6 ns to 10' seconds with averaging times
of Xl to Xl000 .
0.1 ns resolution (usable)
Range
Oscilloscope-controlled Time and
Frequency Measurements
10 ns "Single-shot" Time Interval
Measurement Resolution
Range
100 MHz
1 GHz
The 7015 has high resolution because of a 10 ns
clock, one of five clock positions obtainable from
the front panel. A front panel Clock Out connector makes the selected clock signal available at a
front-panel connector. This provides a time mark
function that is TIL compatible and will drive a 50
n load.
The Ext Clock in connector allows an external 1
MHz timing standard to be used for measurements requiring a higher degree of accuracy than
that provided by the internal time base.
The 7015 may be used in vertical or horizontal
compartments of 7000 Series Mainframes. It provides a full 8 digit CRT display with leading zero
suppression and positioned decimal. Legend and
averaging information appear at the bottom of
the CRT display.
TEK
7000
SERIES
INTERNAL TIME BASE
ACCURACY
UJ
w
~
a:
1 ms
~
ow
• InternalOKIII.lor
100 /L.
1 ma cl'OCk 106 Averag1es
• O-50· C operil ion
0>
OUTPUT SIGNALS
• Within 3 mon ths since c.llbrltlon
• Peak noise leve' does nOl IxCeed
~<
§ ~ 10l'S
effll(;\ive counter hysteresis
10 I'S t ock 1 L erage
~
• Slgn. 1 riu tim •• • • encounterld
In typ lc.1 TTL logic enYi ronmenli
~~
a: a:
offi
~ !z
l
1 ma d'OCk 10 Avera oJo
Conditions:
W
~ symbol
appears to the left of the reading.
Aperture Uncertainty -
IOns or less.
Pufse-width Sampfe Time (S,-S, mode) - 30 ns to 5 ms w;th
repetitive signal. 150 "s to 5 ms wilh single-shot signal.
Measurement Rate - External Trigger: 1 to 12 measurements per second. depending on external trigger frequency and
internal adjustment. Auto Trigger: 1 to 4 measurements per
second. internally adjustable.
198
Dc Current Range - 0 to 2 A in four ranges. 3 112 digit presentation of 1.999 mA, 19.99 rnA, 199.9 mA, and 1999 mA full
scale. Accuracy is ± O.S% of reading ± 2 counts from + IS ' C
to + 3S ' C, ± 0.7% of reading ± 4 counts from O' C to + SO ' C.
Max input is fuse protected.
Polarity -
1 s or less (vollage. current , and resistance
Automatic indication.
Ma. Common-Mode Voltage minals and ground.
Normal-mode Rejection Ratio Sample and Hold DVM measures difference vollage ( - 168.6
V) between lwo points on complex waveform. Gate waveform
indica tes IWO points: leading and trailing edges where voltage
difference is made.
100 V peak .
Measurement Readout - 0 to 20 V In Iwo ranges. 3 112-digit
presentation of 1.999 V and 19.99 V full scale, extended to
199.9 V with P60SS Probe.
Dc Voltage Range - 0 to 500 V In four ranges. 3 112 digit
presentation of 1.999 V. 19.99 V, 199.9 V, and 500 V full scale.
Accuracy Is ± 0.1% of reading ± 1 count from + 1S'C to
+ 3S ' C, ± 0.2% of reading ± 2 counts from O' C to + 50 ' C.
Input impedance is 10 Mil on all ranges. Max safe input is 500
V peak between either contact and ground, 500 V peak between VOltage contacts.
Settling Time modes).
2 dlV, rise lime and fall
Analog -signal Display - Bandwidth Is de to 25 MHz (decoupling), 3.4 Hz to 25 MHz (ac-coupling). Vertical sensilivity is
100 mVl dlv to 5 Vl dlv in 6 steps (1 -2-5 sequence in combination with M2 range and 7012 vertical display attenuation). Accuracy is within 5%.
When the 7D13A is used , the character generator
traces out a 3 1/2 digit display on the CRT and a
legend for units like kfl, mA, °C.
Resistance Range - 0 to 2 Mil in five ranges. 3 112-digit
presentation 199.9 Il, 199911, 19.99 kll. 199.9 kll. and 1999 kll
full scale. Accuracy is ± 0.5% of reading ± 1 count from
+ IS ' C to + 3S ' C. ± O.S% of reading :!: 2 counts from O' C 10
+ SO ' C. Input is fuse protected.
Temperature Measurement Range - - S2 ' 10 + 200' C in
one range. 3 112 digit presentation to + 200 ' C. Accuracy
( + IS ' C to + 2S' C) is ± 2 ' C Irom - S2 ' C to + IS0 ' C and
O' C to - S' C from + 150' C to 200 'C with the probe calibrated to the instrument. Accuracy (O'C to + IS' C and 2S' C 10
+ SO' C) add 1.5' C to the above lolerance in each direction.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sample-gate Display Amplitude time 5 ns or less.
The 7D13A measures dc volts, dc current, and
resistance. It also measures temperature from a
temperature sensor on the tip of the P66Ql temperature probe. The temperature probe functions
regardless of 7D13A mode or range setting and
provides a front-panel analog signal output of 10
mVI"C (O°C = 0 V). Temperature may be measured simultaneously along with any other
function .
Option 02 without P6055 ........ _.............. _...... _........ Sub $120
At least 30 dB at SO Hz.
Common-mode Rejection Ratio - With a 1 kllimbalance, at
least 100 dB at de; SO dB at SO Hz.
Over Range Indication - When over range occurs, the readout blinks and the most significant digit displays a 3.
Temperature Out -
ORDERING INFORMATION
7012 A/D Converter (Module
not included) ....................................... $1410
M2 Sample/Hold Module .................... $1230
500 V peak between two ter-
10 mV/' C into a load of at least 2 k!l.
Included Accessories - PSSOI Temperature Probe package
(010-6S01-01); pair of test leads (003-0120-00).
Order 7D13A Digital Multimeter ........ $1040
SAMPLING UNITS TO 14 GHz
50 n Delay Line
TEK 7000
SERIES
7M11
7T 1 1
7S11
Random Mode Trigger Rate - 100 Hz min.
Display Jittar - Measured under optimum trigger conditions
with TIME/DIV switch clockwise.
Sequential Mode
Random Mode
Time Po. Range
0.4 dlv or less
I divor less
50 ~s to 500 ns
30 ps
10 ps
50 ns
Pul.e Out - Positive pulse amplitude at least 400 mV (Into 50
11) with 2.5 ns rise time or less.
Trigger Klckout -
2 mV or less into 50 II (except HF SYNC).
DI.play Scan Rate - Continuously selectable from at least 40
sweepsl s to < 2 sweepsl s.
Extemal Scan - Deflection factor Is continuously variable
from 1 V/dlv to 10 V/div. Input R Is 100 kll within 10%. Max
input voltage is 100 V (de + peak ae).
Sweep Out -
1 V/dlv within 2% . Source A Is 10 k!I within 1%.
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature range of O' C to + 50' C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
42 In BNC 50 11 cable (012-0057-01); lOX 5011 attenuator (011 0059-02); SMA (3 mm) male to BNC adapter (015-1018-00);
SMA (3 mm) male to GR874 adapter (015-1007-00).
._o_u_.rr__--t
7sn )-__
'_
AM
_~
__
7S11
7T11
Order 7T11 Sampling Sweep Unit .... $4185
2mV /div to 200 mV/div
Calibrated Deflection Factors
10 ps/div to 5 ms/ div Calibrated Time Base
7M11
Random or Sequential Sampling
75 ns Time Delay
Plug-in Sampling Heads
Equivalent or Real Time Sampling
Selectable Trigger Out
No Pretrigger Required
The 7S 11 is a single-channel sampling unit. The
input configuration employs the sampling plug-in
head concept. The heads, which mount in the
7S11 , range in bandwidth from 350 MHz to 14
GHz.
The 7S 11 can be used in a variety of combinations. Single-channel sampling uses one 7S11
with a 7T11 Time Base. Two 7S11s and one 7T11
provide dual-trace sampling. One 7S11 and one
7S12 provide dual-trace sampling. Two 7S11s can
be used for X-V operations.
CHARACTERISTICS
Oellectlon Fector - 2 units/dlv to 200 units/dlv in 7 steps (1 2-5 sequence). accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated VAAIABLE is
continuous (extends deflection factor from 1 unltJdlv or less to
at least 400 unlts/div). Deflection factor is determined by the
plug-in sampling head.
Blndwldth -
Determined by the sampling head.
Input Impedlnee -
Determined by the sampling head.
Dc Oll.et - Range, + 1 V to - 1 V or more. Offset out Is lOX
the offset voltage within 2%. Source A is 10 kll within 1%.
Del.y Ringe - At least IOns for comparing two signals In a
dual-trace application.
Memory SI..h -
0.1 div or less at 20 Hz.
Verticil Signal Out -
200 mV per displayed div within 3%.
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature range of O' C to + 50 · C.
Order 7S11 Sampling Unit
without Sampling Head ...................... $1670
175 ps Rise Time
The 7T11 Sampling Time Base provides equivalent-time and real-time horizontal deflection for
single- or dual-trace sampling. Timing accuracy is
within 3% and nonliearity is well below 1%. Triggering range is from = 10 Hz (sequential mode)
to above 12.4 GHz.
CHARACTERISTICS
Tlme/ Di. Range - 10 psldiv to 5 msldiv (1-2-5 sequence)
directly related to time position ranges. Uncalibrated VAAIABLE is continuous between steps to at least 4 ps/div.
Time Position Range - Equivalent time is 50 ns to 50
steps; real time Is 0.5 ms to 50 ms In 3 steps.
Time/ DI. Acc uracy center 8 em.
~s
In 4
Within 3% for all timeldiv settings over
The 7M11 is a passive dual delay line unit for use
with the 7000 Series Sampling System . In low-repetition-rate applications requiring the sequential
mode of operation, the 7M11 provides the trigger
source and signal delay necessary to view the
triggering event at fast time-per-div settings.
Vertical delay for two 7S 11 vertical sampling units
is available with the dual 50 n, 75 ns delay lines.
The closely matched (30 ps) lines have GR874
input-output connectors, 175 ps rise time, and 2X
signal attenuation. Trigger selection is from either
input, 5X attenuated, with a rise time of 600 ps or
less.
CHARACTERISTICS
DELAY LINE
TRIGGERING
Ext 50 11 Input - Frequency range is de to 1 GHz in 1X TRIG
AMP mode. Sensitivity range is 12.5 mV to 2 V pop (dc to 1
GHz) in XI TRIG AMP, 1.25 mV to 2 V pop (1 kHz to 50 MHz) in
Xl0 TAIG AMP. Input R Is 5011 within 10%. Max Input voltage
is 2 V (de + peak ac).
Ext 1 MO Input - Frequency range is de to 100 MHz in XI
TRIG AMP mode. Sensitivity range Is 12.5 mV to 2 V pop (de to
100 MHz) In XI TAIG AMP, 1.25 mV to 2 V pop (1 kHz to 50
MHz) in XIO TRIG AMP. Input R Is I Mil within 5%. Max input
voltage Is 100 V pop to I kHz (derating 6 dB per octave to a
min 5 V pop).
Ext HI Sync - Frequency range is I GHz to 12.4 GHz. Sensitivity range Is 10 mV to 500 mV pop. Input A Is 1 Mil. Max input
voltage Is 2 V pop.
Int Trigger Sourca (Slnewa.e Triggering)' - Frequency
range is 5 kHz to 500 MHz in Xl TRIG AMP; 5 kHz to 50 MHz
In Xl0 TRIG AMP. Sensitivity range is 125 mV to 1 V pop
(referred to the vertical Input) In Xl TRIG AMP; 12.5 mV to 1 V
pop (referred to the vertical Input) in the X 10 TAIG AMP.
'Trigger circuits will operate to dc with pulse triggering, except
for Hf Sync.
Time Delay -
75 ns within 1 ns.
Delay Dillerence RI.e Time Attenuation -
30 ps or less between channels.
175 ps or less.
2X within 2% into 50 11.
Input Impedance -
50 11 within 2%.
MIX Input -
± 5 V (de + peak ac).
RI.e Time -
600 ps or less.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Attenuation -
5X within 10% Into 50 11 (referred to IN PUT).
Output Impedance -
50 11 within 10%
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature range of O' C to + 50· C.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
lO in BNC cable (012-0208-00); two 2 ns GR cables (017-050500).
Order 7M 11 Delay Line Unit ........... ... $1250
199
TEK 45 PS TOR OR
7000
GENERA~PURPOSESAMPLER
SERIES
7S12
COMPARISON OF SAMPLING FEATURES
7S11 / 7T11
Maximum
Bandwidth
Fastest
Risetime
Vertical
Sensitivity
Range
Sequential
Equiv.
Sampling
Random
Equiv.
Sampling
Real Time
Sampling
Smoothing
Channels
TOR
Changeable Heads
Input
Impedance
7S12
14 GHz
-
6 Plug-in Sampling Heads Available
1 Trigger Recognizer Head Available
~
2-200
mV/ div
2-500
mV / d iv
2-500
mV / d i v
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
1 (2 with an
additional 7S" .)
NO (bu t ca n be done)
YES (vertical only)
50 or 1 Mil
(depending on head)
NO
YES
1 (2 with an
additional 7S" .)
YES
YES (horizontal
and vertical)
50 or 1 Mil
(depending on head)
NO
YES
2
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WITH S-6 AND S-52
System Rise Time - 35 ps or less for the Incident step. 45 ps
or less for the displayed reflection from a short-circuited, 1 ns
test line.
Pulse Amplitude -
At least + 200 mV into 50 Il.
Input Characteristics - Nominal 50 Il, feed-through signal
channel (termination supplied). SMA (3 mm) connectors.
Jitter - < lOps (without signal averaging).
1 Trigger Countdown Head Available
The 7S12 is a combined vertical-horizontal , double-width plug-in for high resolution TOR or general purpose sampling measurements. As a TOR
using the S-6 Sampling Head and S-52 Pulse
Generator Head, the 7S12 has a system rise time
of 45 ps (return from short-circuit termination) and
distance range to 290 feet in any cable. Its
vertical scale is calibrated in reflection coefficient
(p) from 2 mp/div to 500 mp/div and in voltage
from 2 mV/div to 500 mV/div. Two-way time or
one-way distance to a discontinuity of interest is
read directly from tape dial calibrated for time, air,
polyethylene, or your choice of dielectrics. As a
long line TOR using the S-5 Sampling Head and
S-54 Pulse Generator Head , distance calibration
extends to 4900 ft (air line) and discontinuities to
twice this distance may be viewed. System rise
time with this combination is 1.5 ns.
General-purpose measurements may be made by
using an S-l , S-2, S-3A, S-4, S-5, or S-6 Sampling
Head with an S-53 Trigger Recognizer Head or
S-51 Trigger Countdown Head . For dual-trace
sampling displays, use a 7S 11 Sampling Unit with
a 7S 12. The addition of a 7M 11 Dual Delay Line
provides the signal delay necessary to view the
triggering event when a pre trigger signal is not
available.
1 GHz
c-24 GHz
' -25 ps
Time and Distance Ranges - Direct-reading tape dial gives
calibrated one-way distance to at least 400 ft (air line). Time
range is at least 0.9 .s round trip. Both ranges are limited by
the duration of the pulse from the S-52.
2 Plug-in Pulse Sources Available
-
7S14
--- 25 ps
CHARACTERISTICS
45 ps TDR or a General-purpose Sampler
7S12
350 ps
NO (but can be done)
NU
50 Il
Dlsptay Modes nal scan.
Repetitive or single sweep, manual or exter-
Signat Outputs sweep outputs.
Pin jacks provide both vertical signal and
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
750 ps rigid ·u· delay line (015-1017-01); short-circuit termination (015-1021 -00); TOR slide rule (003-0700-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
7S 12 TDR Sampling Unit
(tape dial in feet) without
Sampling Heads .................................... $3100
Aberrations - + 7%, - 7%, total of 10% p-p within 1.8 ns of
step with reference point at 1.8 ns from step; + 2%, - 2%,
total of 4% p-p after first 2.5 ns with reference point at 300 ns
from step.
Option 03 Tape Dial
Change (Meters) ...................................................... Add $25
TOR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WITH S-5 AND S-54
System Rise Time - 1.5 ns or less for the displayed reflection
from a short-cIrcuited test line.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Patch Corda - Available for the OFFSET OUT, EXT SWEEP
INPUT, VERT SIG OUT, and SWEEP OUT jacks of the 7S 12,
Pin-jack to pin-jack, 0.08 in dia. pin.
Red, 8 In, Order 012-0179-00 ...................................... $3.50
Red, 181n, Order 012-0180-00 .................................... $3.50
Black, 8 in, Order 012-0181-00 ................................... $3.50
Black, 18 In, Order 012-0182-00 ................................. $3.50
Time and Distance Ranges - Direct-reading tape dial gives
calibrated one-way distances to 4900 ft air line, 3240 ft solid
polyethylene. Time range is 20 .s round trip.
Pulse Amplitude - At least + 400 mV Into 50 Il.
Input Characterlltlc. - Nominal 50 Il test line connection
(cable and T supplied). BNC connectors.
Jitter - < 20 ps (without signal averaging).
Aberrations - + 4%, - 6%, total of 10% p-p within first 17 ns
of step; + 1.5%, - 1.5%, total of 3% thereafter.
Tape Dlel (Calibrated In II)
Order 331-0273-00 ...................................................... $28.00
Tape Dial (Calibrated In Metera)
Order 331-0276-00 ...................................................... $28.00
OTHER 7S12 CHARACTERISTICS
Vertical Scale - Calibrated in mp (reflection coeffICient 10- ')
and mV from 2 to 500 units/dlv In 8 steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accurate within 3%. Uncallbrated VARIABLE Is continuous between steps.
Resolution - Reflection coeffICients as low as 0.001 may be
Observed. Signal averaging reduces test-line noise in display.
Dc Offset Range - + 1 V to - 1 V. Allows open-circuit reflections to be displayed at full sensitivity. Monitor jack provides X
lOde offset through 10 kll.
Time/Distance - Tape dial is calibrated in time and distance:
full-scale ranges of 4900 ft , 490 ft , 49 ft (air dielectric); 3200 ft ,
320 ft, 32 ft (polyethylene dielectric); and 10 .s, 'I's, 0.1 "s
(time). Accurate within 1%. Distance calibration may be preset
for dielectric having propagation factors from 0.6 to 1.
Tlme/Di. - 20 ps/div to 1 "s/div (1-2-5 sequence) in three
ranges with direct-reading magnif",r. Accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated variable is continuous between steps.
Locate Button - Provides instant return to unmagnified display showing entire full-scale range. Brightened portion of trace
Indicates time position and duration of magnified display.
3 II Sampllng·Head Extender, Order 012-0124-00 •.... $345
611 Sampling-Head Extender, Order 012-0125-00 •••.• $405
NOTE: See 1502-1503 Portable TDR Cable Tester on pages 116-117.
200
1 GHz DUAL-TRACE, DELAYED SWEEP SAMPLER
70 ps PULSE GENERATOR
TEK 7000
SERIES
Channel Delay DiHerence - Adjustable to zero, or for any
time difference up to at least 1 ns,
7S14
284
TIME BASE
Scan Modes -
Repetitive, single, manual. or external.
Delaying Sweep - May be used as the CRT time base or as a
delay generator for the delayed sweep. The sweep starts with
minimum delay from the instant of trigger recognition, When
the delaying sweep mode Is selected for the time base, two
bright dots In the trace, which may be positioned anywhere on
the displayed wavelorm. are generated. The time between dots
Is equal to the reading on the Delay Time Multiplier dial multiplied by the time/div.
Delayed Sweep - This mode is used when the signal to be
displayed occurs considerably later than the instant of trigger
recognition or when the time must be 5 ns or less per div. The
delayed sweep may be started with zero delay time with respect to the start of the delaying sweep. Or the start may be
delayed by any time interval up to that represented by ten divisions of the delaying sweep selected,
Horizontal Signal Output- 1,0 V/div of horizontal deflection;
10 kll source resistance,
DELAYING SWEEP
Range -
10 ns/div to 100 ,.s/div In 13 steps (1-2-5 sequence),
7S14
Accuracy - Within ± 3%. excluding first one-half div of displayed sweep.
Calibrated Delayed Sweep
Delayed Zero (1st Dot) - Adjustable to correspond to any
instant within the time interval represented by the first 9 div of
the delaying sweep selected.
Two-dot Measurements
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Dual Trace, 2 mV Sensitivity
Simplified Triggering
Operational Ease of a
Conventional Oscilloscope
The 7S14 Sampling Unit combines vertical and
time-base functions in one double-width plug-in.
Two identical vertical channels provide dual-trace
sampling, a two-ramp time base and calibrated
delayed sweep.
Front-panel controls are grouped by color, and
the control nomenclature is similar to conventional
oscilloscope nomenclature. Learning to operate
the 7S14 requires a minimum of effort for those
familiar with conventional oscilloscope operation.
VERTICAL CHANNEL
Modes - Ch 1 only ; Ch 2 only; Dual Trace; Ch 1 added to Ch
2; Ch 2 subtracted from Ch 1 (Ch 2 INVERT); Ch 1 Vertical (Y),
Ch 2 Horizontal (X).
Input Impedance -
Nominally 50 II.
Bandwidth -
Equivalent to dc to 1 GHz.
Rile Time -
350 ps or less.
Step Aberrations - + 2%, - 4%, total of 6% p-p within first 5
ns, ± 1% thereafter, tested with a 284 Pulse Generator.
Deflection Factor - 2 mV/div to 0.5 V/div In 8 steps (1 -2-5
sequence). Continuously variable between steps by at least 2.5
to 1,
Accuracy -
Within ± 3%.
M.. Input Voltage -
± 5 V.
Input Signal Range - 2 V p-p max within a + 2 V to - 2 V
window at any sensitivity.
Dc Offeet Range -
At least + 2 V to - 2 V,
Dllplayed Nolae - 2 mV or less unsmoothed (measured tangentially). Low noise pushbutton reduces random noise by a
factor of 4 to 1 or more.
Vertical Signal Output -
source resistance.
0.2 V/div of vertical deflection; 10 kll
70 ps or Less Rise Time Pulse
Sinewave and Squarewave Outputs
Delay Time (2nd Dot) - Adjustable to any poSition of the time
Interval represented by 10 div of the delaying sweep selected.
Delay Accuracy - Within ± 1% of 10 div when measurement
is made within the last 9,5 div.
DELAYED SWEEP
CRT Readout
284
Range - 100 ps/div to 100 ,.s/div in 19 steps (1 -2-5 sequence), Variable between steps by at least 2,5 to "
Accuracy - Within ± 3% excluding first one-half div of displayed sweep.
Start Delay - Depends on the delaying sweep time selected
and the setting of the Delay Time Multiplier dial. Adjustable
from zero to any time interval up to that represented by 10 div
of the delaying sweep selected. The delaying sweep start point
corresponds to the position of the second bright dot.
Delay Jitter - < 0,05% of the time represented by 1 div of the
delaying sweep selected.
TRIGGERING AND SYNC
CHARACTERISTICS
OUTPUT
Pulse Output - 70 ps or less rise time with a pulse width of
more than 1 "s and a repetition rate of = 50 kHz. Aberrations
immediately following positive-going transitions are < ± 3%,
3% total p-p; after 2 ns < ± 2%, 2% total p-p. Pulse amplitude
is more than + 200 mV into 50 II. Source resistance is 50 II.
Squarewave Output - Periods 01 10 "s. 1 ,.s, or l OOns,
Amplitude is 10 mY, 100 mY, or 1 V into 50 II.
Sinewave Output - Periods of IOns or 1 ns. Output amplitude is 100 mV into 50 n,
Trigger Output - Squarewave, sinewave, or pretrigger pulse
output, depending on the selected main signal output. Amplitude is 200 mY , accurate within 40%. When PULSE OUTPUT
is selected, the trigger can be switched to arrive 5 ns ± 5 ns, or
75 ns ± 5 ns ahead of the main pulse. Rise time is 3 ns or less;
pulse width Is 10 ns or greater,
Signal Sources - Internal from Ch 1 vertical input or external
through front-panel connector,
External Triggering - Nominal 50 II Input, ac coupled, 2 V p-p
50 V de max, Trigger pulse amplitude 10 mV p-p or more with
rise time of 1 "s or less, 10 Hz to 100 MHz. Sinewave amplitude 10 mV p-p or more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Internal Triggering - Pulse amplitude 50 mV p-p or more with
rise time of 1 ,.s or less, Sinewave amplitude 50 mV p-p or
more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz,
Triggered Mode - Trigger recognition may be made to occur
at any selected voltage level between + 0,5 V and - 0,5 V on
either a + slope or a - slope of the triggering signal.
Auto Trigger Mode - For small signals or when there may be
no triggering signal. Sampling pulses are automatically generated at a low rate in the absence of a triggering signal so that a
trace may always be generated and displayed, The trigger level
range automatically adjusts to approx the p-p voltage of the
signal.
HoldoH - Varies the length of the interval during which recognition is inhibited. Variation is at least 5 to 1. The control is
particularty useful for displaying digital words when triggering
on binary pulses.
HI SYNC Mode - For sinewaves from 100 MHz to 1 GHz, 10
mV p-p or more from external source, 50 mV p-p or more from
internal pickoff.
Order 7S 14 Dual· Trace
Delayed Sweep Sampler .................... $4915
Output
Pulse
Timing and Amplitude Accuracy
Amplitude Accuracy
Timing
Period Accuracy
100 mV 10mV
1V
20 ,.s
10,.s
l,.s
100 ns
10 ns
Sinewave
1 ns
' crystal controlled
Square-
± 10%
± 0.5%
± 0.5%
± 1%
± 1.5%
± 0,05%'
± 2%t
± 2.5%t
± 3%t
wave
± 20%
± 1%
t 20 ns after transition
Order 284 Pulse Generator .......... ...... $3085
7000
HEADS
TO 14 GHz
TEK SAMPLING
SERIES
S-1
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Clean Transient Response
The S·1 Sampling Head Is a low noise. 350 ps rise time unit
with a 50 II Input impedance. The S· 1 can be plugged in or
attached by a cable for remote use. A trigger pickoff within the
S· 1 provides a trigger signal output from the plug.in unit.
RI.e Time - 350 ps or less.
Bandwidth - Equivalent to de to 1 GHz at 3 dB down.
Tran.lent Relponle - Aberrations as observed with the 284
Pulse Generator are + 0.5%. - 3% or less. total of 3.5% or
less P-P. first 5 ns following the step tranSition; - 0.5% or less.
total of 1% or less p-p after 5 ns.
DI.played Nol.e - 2 mV or less. unsmoothed ; 1 mY .
smoothed.
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between + 1
V and - 1 V limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals between
+ 2 V and - 2 V limits may be displayed at 200 mV/div. For
best dot response with random-sampling sweep unit. signal
amplitude shOuld be < 500 mV p-p.
Input Characterl.tlc. - Norminally 50 II. Safe overload in ± 5
V. GR874 Input connectors.
Included Acce ••orie. - 5 ns. 50 II AG58 AlU cable (017.
0512·00); lOX . 50 II GA attenuator (017.0078-00).
Order S-1 Sampling Head .................. $1090
S-2
Dc to 4.6 GHz Bandwidth
Displayed Noise < 6 mY (Unsmoothed)
The S·2 Sampling Head is a 75 ps rise time unit with a 50 II
Input Impedance. The S·2 can be plugged In or attached by a
cable for remote use. A trigger pickoff within the 5·2 provides a
trigger signal output from the plug·ln unit.
RI.e Time - 75 ps or less.
Bandwidth - Equivalent to dc to 4.6 GHz at 3 dB down.
Tran.lent Re.pon.e - Aberrations as observed with the 284
Pulse Generator are + 5%. - 5% or less. total of 10% or less
p-p. first 2.5 ns following a step transition ; + 2%. - 2% or less
total of 4% or less p-p after 2.5 ns.
DI.pleyed Nol.e - 6 mV or less. unsmoothed ; 3 mY.
smoothed.
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between + 1
V and - 1 V limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals between
+ 2 V and - 2 V limits may be displayed at 200 mV/div. For
best dot response with random·sampling sweep unit. signal
amplitude should be < 200 mV p-p.
tnput Characterl.tlc. - Nominally 50 II. Safe overload is ± 5
V. GA874 input connectors.
Included Acce •• orie. - 5 ns. 50 II. AG213/U cable (017.
0502·00); l OX. 50 II GA attenuator (017 ·0078-00).
S-3A
Compact, 4.5 ft, 100
k~ ,
2.3 pF Probe
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Displayed Noise < 3 mY (Unsmoothed)
The S-3A Sampling Head is an active sampling-probe unit with
100 kll. 2.3 pF input Impedance. Up to 2 V of de offset may be
used while maintaining a 2 mV/div deflection factor.
RI.e Time - 350 ps or less.
Bandwidth (Probe Only) - Equivalent 10 de to 1 GHz at 3 dB
down .
Tren.lant Re.pone (Probe Only) - Aberrations in the first 2
ns following a slep are + 8%. - 2% or less. total of 10% or less
p-p. + 1%. - 1% or less. total of 2% or less p-p after 2 ns. with
284 pulse dlspiayed.
DI.pl.yed Nol.e (Probe Only) - 3 mV or less referred to
probe tip (Includes 90% of dots).
Signal Range - Variable dc offset allows signals between + 1
V. IX range. or + 2 V and - 2 V. 2X range. to be displayed at 2
mV/div. The signal range may be Increased lOX or l00X with
the probe attenuators.
Included Acce •• orle. - lOX attenuator head (010-0364-00);
l00X attenuator head (010-0365-00); coupling capaCitor (011 0098-00); probe tip (206-0114-00); tipground adapter (0130085.00); two test-point jacks (131-0258-00); 5 1/2 in ground
lead (175· 1017·00); 12 1/2 In ground lead (175-1018-00); 3 In
cable assembly (175-0249-00); three ground clips (344-004600) ; end cap (200-0834-00); two end caps (200-0835-00);
probe hOlder (352-0090-00); retractable hook tip (013-009701) ; 50 II voltage pickoff (017-0077-01); carrying case (0160121 -01 ); 3 In elec lead (175-0849-00); 6 In elec lead (1750849-00).
Order S-3A Sampling Head ................ $1670
S-4
25 ps Sampling Head
Dc to 14 GHz Equivalent Bandwidth
Displayed Noise < 5 mY (Un smoothed)
Order S-2 Sampling Head .................. $1280
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6040/CT·l Current Probe,
Order (Std) 015·0041 ·00 ............................................... $130
P6056 lOX Pas live Probe,
Order (Std) 010·6056·03 ............................................... $140
P6057 100X Probe,
Order (Std) 010·6057·03 ............................................... $145
Coupling CapaCitor, GR874·K,
Order 017·0028·00 ... ........................................................ $90
Power Divider GR874·TPD,
Order 017·0082-00 ......................................................... $225
GR to BNC Adapter,
Order 017·0063·00 ................... ........................................ $43
The 5-4 Sampling Head Is a 25 ps rise time unit with a 50 II
Input Impedance. The S-4 can be plugged Into the sampling
unit or attached by a sampling head extender for remote use. A
trigger pickoff within the S-4 provides a trigger signal output
from the plug-in unit.
RI.e Time - 25 ps or less.
Bandwidth - Equivalent to dc to 14 GHz at 3 dB down.
Tran.lent Re.ponle - Aberrations in the first 400 ps following a step from an 5-52 Pulse Generator Head are - 10%.
+ 10% or less. total of 20"'" or less p-p. From 400 ps to 25 ns
following a step from a 284 Pulse Generator. - 0""'. + 10% or
less. total of 10"1. or less. p-p with 284 pulse displayed ; after
25 ns. - 2%. + 2% or less. total of 4% or less p-p.
DI.played Nolle - 5 mV or less. un- smoothed; 2.5 mY.
smoothed (Includes 90"/. of dots).
Bandwidth
RI.etlme
Input Impedance
S-2
Dc-4.6 GHz
< 75 ps
50 n
Nol.e : Smoothed
Un.moothed
~ 1 mV
::52 mV
~ 3 mV
::56 mV
Connactor
202
GR
GR
S-3A
Dc-l GHz
< 350 ps
100 kn
::53 mV
at probe tip
Probe
5-4
Dc-14 GHz
< 25 ps
50n
~2 .5
~5
mV
mV
SMA
(3 mm)
Order S-4 Sampling Head .................. $2505
S-5
1 MO, 15 pF Input Impedance
Passive Probe
Internal Trigger Pickoff
The S·5 Sampling Head Is a low-noise. 1 ns rise time sampling
unit with a 1 Mil. 15 pF input Impedance. When used with the
Included P6010 Passive Probe. the Input impedance Increases
to 10 Mil. 10 pF while maintaining the 1 ns rise time at the
probe tip. A switch on the sampling head selects either ac or de
coupling of Ihe Input.
RI.a Time - S-5 only. 1 ns or less; with 3.5 ft P6010. 1 ns or
less.
Bandwidth - Equivalent to dc to 350 MHz at 3 dB down at
Input connector or probe tip.
Tran.lant Re.pon.e - S-5 only (driven with a 50 II source
terminated In 50 II): aberrations + 2.5%. - 5% or less. total of
7.5% or less p-p within 17 ns after step; + 1%. - 1% or less.
total of 2% or less p-p thereafter.
S-5/P6010 (3.5 ft probe. properly compensated): aberrations
+ 5%. - 5% or less total of 10% or less p-p within 25 ns after
step; + 1%. - 1% or less total of 2% or less p-p thereafter.
Ol.played Nol.e - S-5 only. 500 ~V or less (includes 90% of
dots). S5/P6010. 5 mV or less (Includes 90% of dots).
Signal Range - S-5 only: dc coupled . 1 V p-p from + 1 V to
- 1 V; ac coupled. 1 V p-p. S5/P6010: dc coupled (dc + peak
ac). 10 V p-p ; ac coupling. dc voltage. 100 V.
Input Characteri.tlc. - S-5 only. 1 Mil within 1% paralleled
by 15 pF. S-5/P6010. 10 Mil paralleled by .. 10 pF.
Attenuator Accuracy - Probe attenuation is lOX within 3%.
Included Acce ..orie. - P6010 Probe package (010-018800). 50 II termination (011 -0049.01 ).
Order S-5 Sampling Head .................. $1160
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probe Tlp-to-BNC Adapter.
Order 013-0084·01 ....................................................... $8.00
Probe Tlp-to-GR Adepter.
Order 017-0076·00 ......................................... .................. $42
Probe Tlp·to-GR Terminated Adepter,
Order 017-0088·00 ........................................................... $44
TIMING HEAD CHARACTERISTICS
SAMPLING HEAD CHARACTERISTICS
S-1
Dc-I GHz
< 350 ps
50 n
Signal Range - Variable de offset allows Signals between + 1
V and - IV limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. For best dottransient response with random-sampling sweep unit. signal
amplitude should be less than 500 mV p-p.
Input Characterl.tlc. - Nominally 50 II. Safe overload ± 5 V.
SMA (3 mm) input connector.
Included Acce •• orie. - 2 ns cable with SMA connectors
(015-1005-00); lOX 50 II SMA attenuator (015-1003-00);
GA874 to SMA male adapter (015-1007-00); SMA male-tomale adapter (015-1011-00); 5/16 In wrench (003-0247-00).
5-5
Dc-350 MH z
< 1 ns
1 Mn
::5500 /JoV
::55 mV
BNC
5-6
Dc-l1 .5 GHz
< 30 ps
50 n
feed thru
-
~5
Bandwidth
RI.etlme
mV
SMA
(3 mm )
Application
551
552
553
1- 18 GHz
tri gger
countdown
-
Dc-l GHz
tri gger
recogn izer
-
::525 ps
extremely
hi gh speed
sampling
hi gh
resolution
TOR
general
purpose
samp li ng
554
::5 1 n
med ium
resolution
TDA
TEK 7000
SAMPLING AND PULSE GENERATOR HEADS
TRIGGER RECOGNIZER AND TRIGGER COUNTDOWN HEADS
SERIES
S-53
Dc-to- 1 GHz Operation
10 mV Sensitivity
The 5-53 Trigger Recognizer Head is intended for use with the
7512 to permit operation as a general-purpose sampling system. The 5-53 supplies triggering lor the 7S12.
S-6
S-51
Input Characteristics - Frequency range Is dc to 1 GHz. Sensitivity range is 10 mV to 2 V pop into 50 n . Kickout at input,
± 5 mV or less.
30 ps Rise Time
18 GHz Countdown
Display~d Noise < 5 mV
(Unsmoothed)
10 ps or Less Trigger Jitter
Output Characterislics - Rise time Is 1 ns or less. Amplitude
is at least 1.5 V positive-going into 50 ll. Pulse duration Is 3 ns
within 2 ns at the 50% amplitude level. Pulse period is 27 "s
minimum. Trigger-ta-signal delay Is 15 ns or less ; Jitter is 15 ps
or less.
Loop-through Input
The 5-6 Sampling Head is a 50 {l feed-through unit for highspeed applications.
Rise Time - 30 ps or less. 35 ps or less as observed with 552 Pulse Generator.
Bandwidth - Equivalent to dc to 11.5 GHz at 3 dB down .
Transient Response - Pulse aberrations following the steps
are + 7%. - 7%. total of 10% pop within 1.8 ns of step with
reference point at 1.8 ns from step; + 2%. - 2%. total of 4%
pop after first 2.5 ns with reference point at 300 ns from step.
Disptayed Noise - 5 mV or less. measured tangentially .
Signat Range - + 1 V to - 1 V (dc + peak ac). 1 V pop. Dc
offset allows any portion of input signal to be displayed.
tnput Characteristics - Nominally 50 ll. loop-through system .
unterminated. SMA (3 mm) connectors. Max safe overload is
± 5 V.
Included Accessories - 50 II termination (015-1022-00); 1
ns 50 II cable (015-1019-00); SMA (3 mm) female-ta-female
adapter (015-1012-00); SMA male-ta-GR874 adapter (0151007-00); combination wrench (003-0247-00).
Order S-6 Sampling Head .................. $2160
The 5-51 Trigger Countdown Head Is a free-running tunneldiode oscillator designed to provide stable sampling displays of
signals up to 18 GHz. The 5·51 has a front-panel sync control
that synchronizes the oscillator frequency to a subharmonic of
the input signal. The output from the 5-51 is available at a
front-panel trigger output connector and through a rear-panel
connector for Internal triggering. The output signal is a direct
countdown of the input and permits triggering by a standard
sampling time-base unit.
2X 50 II Attenuator. Order 015-1001 -00 ..................... 5120
SX 50 n Attenuator. Order 015-1002·00 ...................... 5120
lOX 50 n Attenuator, Order 015-1003-00 ................... $120
50 n Termination, Order 015-1004-00 ............................ 560
2 ns 50 II Signal Cable, Order 015-1 005-00 .................. $80
5 ns 50 II Signal Cable, Order 015-1 006-00 ................ 5130
Female-to-GR874 Adapter, Order 015-1 007-00 ............ $50
Male-to-GR874 Adapter, Order 015-1 008 -00 ............... $60
Male-to-N Female Adapter, Order 015-1 009-00 ........... $50
Male-to-7 mm Adapter, Order 015-1010-00 ................ $175
Male-to-Male Adapter, Order 015-101 1-00 .................. 520
Female-to-Female Adapter, Order 015-1 012-00 .......... $16
Coupling CapaCitor, Order 015-1013-00 ..................... 5170
50 II Power Divider T, Order 015-1014-00 .................. $200
500 ps 50 n Semrigid Cable, Order 015-1015-00 ......... $40
SMA T Adapter, Order 015-1016-00 .............................. $30
SMA Male-to-BNC Female Adapter,
Order 015-1018-00 ....................................................... S8.00
1 ns 50 {l Cable, Order 015-1019-00 ........................... 5105
SMA Male Short-Circuit Termination,
Order 015-1020-00 ..................................................... $17.50
SMA Female Short-Circuit Termination,
Order 015-1021-00 .......................................................... $24
SMA Male 50 II Termination, Order 015-1022-00 ......... 532
With BNC Connectors
50 n Feed-through Termination,
Order 01 1-0049-01 .......................................................... $25
50 n Feed-through (5 W), Order 01 1-0099-00 .............. $40
50 n 2X Attenuator, Order 01 1-0069-02 ........................ $35
50 n 2.5X Attenuator, Order 01 1-0076-02 ..................... $35
50 II 5X Attenuator, Order 01 1-0060-02 ........................ $35
50 n lOX Atteuator, Order 01 1-0059-02 ........................ 535
50 n 18 in, Coaxial Cable, Order 012-0076-02 ............. $17
50 n 42 in, Coaxial Cable, Order 012-0057-01 ............. $17
Included Accessories - 42 in. 50 !l cable (012-0057 -Ot); lOX
50 {l attenuator (011-0059-02).
Order S-53
Trigger Recognizer Head ................... $1120
Input Signal - Frequency range is 1 GHz to 18 GHz. Stable
synchronization on signals at least 100 mV pop, as measured
separately into 50 ll. 5 V. pop max .
S-54
Input Characteristics - 50 II SMA (3 mm) connector.
Open termination paralleled by 1 pF.
1 ns Rise Time
Trigger Output - Front-panel trigger output is at least 200
mV Into 50 ll. BSM type connector. Internal trigger output is at
least 100 mV into 500 11, Internally connected to sampling unit.
Jitter is lOps or less with signals from 5 GHz to 18 GHz ; 15 ps
or less with signals from 1 GHz to 5 GHz. Kickout at Signal
input connector is 400 mV or less; kickout occurs between
successive samples.
Order S-51
Trigger Countdown Head ................... $1225
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FOR
SAMPLING HEADS
with SMA (3 mm) Connectors
Connectors - Trigger input connector is BNC type. Frontpanel trigger output connector Is BSM type. Trigger output is
also available at rear connector for internal triggering.
S-52
25 ps Rise Time
200 mV into 50 !l
50!l Source
Low Aberrations
400 mV into 50 !l
50 !l Source
Variable Pretrigger Lead Time
The S-54 Pulse Generator Head is a step generator designed
for use with the 7512 as a long line Time Domain Refiectameter unit.
Intended for TOR applications. the 5-54 is 50 II reverse terminated to minimize reflections and has a 0 V base line to eliminate base line shift with load changes. A continuously variable
front-panel control enables adjustment of pretrigger lead time.
The pretrlgger output allows the 5-54 to be operated in sequential sampling systems without a delay line.
Pretrigger Output
Pulse Output - Rise time is 1 ns or less. Amplitude into 50 !!
is + 400 mV or greater. Pulse duration is 25 "s within 2 "So
Pulse aberrations following the step are + 1.5%, - t .5%. total
of t .5% pop, as displayed with 5-1 Sampling Head. Base line
level is 0 V within 20 mY. terminated in 50 {l .
The 5-52 Pulse Generator Head is a tunnel-diode step generator designed for use with the 7512 as a high resolution Time
Domain Reflectometer.
For tdr applications, Ihe 5-52 features automatic bias circuit
control to eliminate effects of tunnel-diode and load changes. A
50 II reverse termination minimizes reflections. The pulse width
is sufficient for distances up to 32 ft in any cable. A pretrigger
output allows the 5-52 to be operated in sequential sampling
systems without a delay line.
Pretrigger Output - Rise time Is 5 ns or less. Amplitude into
50 {l is at least 200 mV . positive-going. Pretrigger pulse duration is 20 ns or less at the 50% amplitude point. Pretrigger lead
time is front panel adjustable from 120 ns or less to 1 "s or
greater. Pretrlgger-ta-pulse-output Jitter is 100 ps or less at
120 ns lead time to 1 ns or less at 1 "s lead time.
Output Connectors - Pulse output uses a BNC connector.
Pretrigger output uses a BSM connector.
Pulse Output - Rise time is 25 ps or less. Amplitude Into 50 II
is at least 200 mV , positive-going. Pulse duration 800 ns, pulse
period 16 "s within 2 "So Pulse aberrations following the step
are + 7%. - 7%, total 01 10% pop within 1.8 ns of step with
reference point at 1.8 ns from step. + 2%, - 2%, total of 4% pP after first 2.5 ns with reference poinl at 300 ns from step.
Pretrigger Output - Rise time is 1 ns or less. Amplitude into
50 !l is at least 1 V, positive going. Pretrigger pulse duration is
4 ns. Pretrigger occurs 85 ns (within 5 ns) before the pulse
output. Prelrigger to pulse output Jitter is lOps or less. Pretrig.
ger output is also available at rear connector for internal triggering of the sampling sweep unit.
Output Connectors - Pulse output uses an SMA (3 mm) connector. Pretrigger output uses a BSM connector.
Included Accessory - t ns, 50!! semirigid coax delay line
(015·1023-00).
Order S-52 Pulse Generator Head .... $1550
Included Accessories - BNC T connector (103-0030-00); 8
in 50 {l cable (012-0118-00).
Order S-54 Pulse Generator Head .... $1010
SAMPLING HEAD WEIGHTS (Approx)
5-1
kg Ib
0.5
1
Net
Shlpping 1.4 3
5-6
kg Ib
Net
0.5
1
Ship0.9
2
ping
5-2
kg Ib
0.5
1
S-3A
kg Ib
1.4 3
5·4
kg Ib
0.5
1
5 -5
kg Ib
0.3 0.6
1.4
2.3
0.9
0.9
3
5·52
kg Ib
0.3 0.8
0.5
1
5
2
2
S-53
kg Ib
0 .3 0.8
S-S4
kg Ib
0.3 0.8
5-51
kg Ib
0.5 1
0.5
0.5
2.3
1
1
5
TRACER
READOUT UNIT
TEK CURVE
7000
SERIES
7M13
CHARACTERISTICS
7CT1N
COLLECTOR /DRAIN SUPPLY
XI
Xl 0
5
20
Voltage Range 0 - 7.5 V 0- 30 V
0-75 V
0- 300 V
Max
Current
24 rnA
6 rnA
Horizontal
Volts/Olv
0 .5
2
240 rnA
Max Open Circuit Voltage current. within 30%.
60 rnA
High Voltage Warning - When the horizontal V/div switch is
In the XI 0 position, a flashing warning light, indicating that dangerous voltages may exist at the test terminals, appears on the
front panel.
STEP GENERATOR
7CT1N
10 nA/div to 20 mA/div
Vertical Deflection Factors
0.5 V/div to 20 V/div
Horizontal Deflection Factors
Tr.nlil tor Mode - Step amplitude range Is 1 I'Nstep to 1
mNstep. 1-2-5 sequence. Max current (steps pius aiding offset) is 15X amplitude setting. Max voltage (steps pius aiding
offset) is at least 13 V. Max opposing offset current is at least
5X amplitude setting.
FET Mode - Step amplitude range is 1 mV/step to 1 V/step.
1-2-5 sequence. Voltage amplitude (steps plus aiding offset) is
15X amplitude setting, 13 V max. Source impedance is 1 kll ±
1%.
Accuracy - Incremental : within 3% between steps.
Absolute: within ± (3% + 0.3X amplitude setting).
Step Polarity - The step generator polarity Is the same as the
collector/drain supply in the transistor mode and opposing in
the FET mode.
Number 01 Steps -
The 7CT1N Curve Tracer Plug-in displays characteristic curves of small-signal semiconductor devices to power levels up to 0.5 W. The 7CT1N
operates in horizontal or vertical compartments of
7000 Series Oscilloscopes.
.... .-
..'---'
- ,• I'----=MO:!!'!!:,
II
Within ± 20%. Max short-circuil
Sert.. Reilitance - Aulomatlcally selected with horizontal
V/div switches. Peak power is 0.5 W or less, depending upon
control settings.
Curve Tracer
-
Selectable in 1 step increments between
o and 10.
OH,et - Selectable to 5 steps. Polarity aids or opposes the
step polarity.
Vertical Deflection Factors - 10 nA/div to 20 I'Ndiv with the
.,. 1000 control activated . 10 I'Ndiv to 20 mNdiv in the IX
mode.
Vertical Display Accuracy - Within 5% in the IX mode.
Within 5% ± 0.2 nA per displayed horizontal volt in the .,. 1000
mode.
Horllontal Deflection Factors or 20 V.
Selectable: 0.5 V, 2 V, 5 V,
Horllontal Display Accu racy - Within 5% plus the defiection
factor accuracy of the plug-in being driven. The piug-in is a
vertical or horizontal amplifier with a 100 mV/div defiection factor and an Input R 01 at least 50 kll when it is used in the
horizontal compartment.
mO -0
"~
-0
dO
'Q 4Q
-0 -0
7
10
10 >0
<0
+0 -0
0
0 ·0 -0
0
·0
"0
-.
0
[T[T'T"rJ
......
"EA OOUT UNIT
7Mt:l
Readout Unit
7M13
Easy and Convenient Identification
of Photographed Displays
Automatic Sequence Advance
with Each Camera Exposure
The 7M13 Readout Unit provides front-panel keyboard operation for convenient access to the
CRT readout characters. Up to ten alphanumeric
characters can be displayed at the top and/or at
the bottom of the CRT. The 7M13 is designed for
use in all 7000 Series Mainframes with CRT
readout. A remote-advance cable is supplied with
the 7M13 to connect it to the shutter X-sync connector of the C-50 Series Cameras. An optional
cable is available for cameras using an ASA connector for X-sync.
Included Acces.ory -
Remote-advance cable (012-0339-01).
Order 7M 13 Readout Unit .................... $880
Order 7CT1N Curve Tracer ................ $1305
The photograph above was identified as TEST 14 by using the
7M 13 in 7834 Oscilloscope.
Optional Accelsory - Remote-advance cable with ASA connector for camera X-sync
Order 012-0364-01 ......................................... _................ $20
204
TEK
5000 SERIES
INSTRUMENTS
MAINFRAMES
Malnframel
DI.play
Unll
DI.play
Size
Page
Beams
Slorage
5110
214
Single
5111
214
Single
Bistable
8 x 10 dlv
(1 .27 cm/dlv)
5113
215
Dual
Bis table
8 x 10 dlv
(1 .27 cm/dlv)
5115
215
Single
Bistable
8 x 10 div
(1.27 cm/dlv)
5223
208
Single
Digital
8 x 10 dlv
(1.22 cm/dlv)
54 40
210
Sing le
5441
211
Single
8 x 10 dlv
(1.27 cm/dlv)
8 x 10 dlv
(1 .22 cm/dlv)
Varia ble
Persiste nce
8 x 10 dlv
(0.9 cm/dlv)
SPECIAL-PUR POSE PLUG- INS
Producl
Page
Description
5CT1N
221
Semiconductor Curve Tracer
5L4N
221
low- Cost Spectru m Analyze r
5S14 N
221
Dual-Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler
50 10
217
Waveform Digiti zer
Digital Storage Capability _.. The 5223
Digitizing Oscilloscope provides digital storage at the touch of a button , intensified pretrigger viewing , equivalent time sampling,
and X-V displays. This 5000 Series Scope ,
with optional IEEE-488 interface, is ideal for
physical , mechanical and biomedical
applications.
Performance Value ... The 5400 Series is
designed for the cost-conscious user as an
alternative to the monolithic scope; it gives
you 50 MHz bandwidth in both non-store
and variable persistence storage
mainframes with CRT readout.
Maximum Flexibility _.. The 5100 Series is
AMPLIFIERS
Producl
Page
Type
Minimum
Deflection
Factor
5A13N
218
Single
1 mV/dlv
2 MH z
5A14N
216
Four
1 mV/dlv
1 MHz
5A15N
216
Single
1 mV/div
2 MHz
5A18N
217
Dua l
1 mV/dlv
2 MHz
5A19N
218
Single
1 mV/div
2 MHz
5A21N
218
Single 50 /iV Idlv
(vollage 0.5 mA/dlv
and
current)
Bandwldlh
- 3 dB
Cmrr
10,000 :1
1000:1
1 MHz 100,000:1
5A22N
219
Single
10 /iV
1 MHz 100,000 :1
5A26
219
Dual
SO/iV/div
1 MHz 100,000:1
5A38
212
Dual
10 mV/div
35 MHz
5A48
212
Dual
1 mV/div '
50 MHz
'Ba ndwidth Is de to 25 MHz at 1 mV l dlv and 2 mVldl y.
TI ME- BAS E PLUG -I NS
Producl
Page Type
5Bl0N
220
5B12N
220
5B40
Sweep
Rate
1 /i s to 5 s Xl 0
Du.1
DelayIng
212
5B25N
DlgIIIzar
Vo ll.,
0 1. Ext
Mode
Yes
50 mV
and
500 mV
Xl0
Yes
-
-
50 mV
and
500 mV
O.l /is
Xl0
Ye s
50 mV
50 mV
5S
213 Delay- A O.lp.s
10 5 s
Ing
B 0.1 p.s
to 0.5 s
213
Single
Sweep
A lp.s
10 5 s
B 2 p.s
to 0.5 s
10
5B42
Mag
0.2 /is
to 5 S
Xl 0
Yes
Xl0
-
Xl 0
Ye s
50 mV
ideal for low frequency applications such as
medical and mechanical measurements requiring up to 2 MHz bandwidth; it gives you
unparalleled choices in measurement flexibility such as dual-beam; split-screen ,
bistable storage displays, differential inputs
and spectrum analysis.
Expandability ... With the 5000 Series
Plug-in Oscilloscope, you are making a cost-
CONTENTS
Mainframes
5223 10 MHz Digital Storage .............
... 208
5440/ R5440 50 MHz General Purpose ....... 210
5441 /R5441 50 MHz
Variable Persistence Storage ......................... 211
51102 MHz Single Beam ............................... 214
5111 2 MHz Single Beam Bistable Storage . 214
51132 MHz Dual Beam Bistable Storage .... 215
5115 2 MHz Single Beam Bistable Storage . 215
Plug-Ins
Single Channel Amplifiers ............................. 216
Two Channel Amplifiers ....................... 212, 217
Four Channel Amplifier .................... .. ......... 216
Waveform Digitizer ............... .... .. .... ............ .. 217
Differential Amplifiers .. ........... ... .............. .... . 218
Dual Differential Amplifier ................ ............. 219
Time Bases ............................................ 213, 220
Curve Tracer ................... .. ............................. 221
Spectrum Analyzer ..
.. ....... 221
Dual Trace Sampler ..
.. .................... 221
effective investment in current technology
- and insuring yourself a share in the future .
TEK REFERENCE
CRTs. The dual beam units, have two writing
guns and two pairs of vertical deflection plates.
One pair of horizontal deflection plates drives
both beams.
Low Cost
2 MHz, 10 MHz or 50 MHz Bandwidth
The 5100 Series features 2 MHz mainframes with
large 6.5 inch CRTs that accommodate two verti·
cal deflection plug-ins and one horizontal deflection plug-in . They can be easily converted from
bench to rackmount configuration _
To date , 15 plug-ins are available for use with the
5100 Series. Among these are the low-cost 5L4N
Spectrum Analyzer for the O-to-l00 kHz frequency range the 5S14N, a general purpose, 1 GHz
dual-trace sampling plug-in and the 5010
Waveform Digitizer.
Sampling to 1 GHz
o to
100 kHz Spectrum Analysis
6 Oscilloscope Models
21 Plug-ins Available
Digital, Dual-Beam and Storage Displays
CRT Readout (5400 Series only)
5223 DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE
You can get the benefits of digital storage, along
with the time-tested advantages of a conventional analog scope, in the 10 MHz 5223 Digitizing
Oscilloscope. Combined in one powerful, convenient oscilloscope are pushbutton ease, high
quality waveform display, pretrigger signal manipulation , and optional GPIB interface, plus real-time
analog display capability.
Use the 5223 in the digital storage mode to
capture repetitive events at speeds of up to 10
MHz or single-shot events at speeds of up to 100
kHz. The 5223's maximum sample rate is 1 MHz;
storage capacity is 1024 bits per vertical
compartment.
The digitized display will never fade or bloom, so
you get more accurate measurements, more conveniently. High 10-bit vertical resolution gives you
an accurate representation of your signals.
Large 6.5 inch CRT (8 x 10 div)
10 IlV/ div High Gain Differential Amplifier
1 to 8 Trace Capability
Delayed-Sweep Time Bases
Y-T or X-V Operation
Bench-to-Rack Convertibility
The 5000 Series Oscilloscopes are designed to
provide optimum versatility and performance at
the lowest possible price.
5100 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Four 5100 Series Oscilloscopes are available.
They include single' beam , dual·beam, and stor·
age displays. The storage display units feature
bistable, split·screen storage with large 6.5 Inch
5000 Series Instruments-Physical Characteristics
5100 and 5400 Series
Cabinet
Rackmount
5223
Cabinet
Dimension.
Rackmount
Plug·lns
Single Width Double Width
in
em
In
em
In
em
em
In
em
In
em
Height
12_9
32 _8
7
17.8
11 .9
30 .2
5.3
13.3
5.0
12.7
5.0
12.7
Width
8.4
21 .4
19
48.3
8.4
21 .3
19.0
48 .3
2.6
6.6
5.2
13.2
Length
22.5
57.2
22.4
56 .9
20.4
51.8
19.0
48 .3
12.0
30.5
12.0
30.5
Ib
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
kg
tb
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
kg
Weight (approx)
In
Net
37 .25
16.9
42
19.1
23.0'
10.4'
24 .0'
10.9'
2.8
1.3
5.8
2.S
Shipping
45
20 .5
52
23.6
32.0'
14.5'
43.0'
19.5'
10.0
4.5
10.8
4.9
Recommended Probes for 5000 Series Amplifier Plug-ins
The following probes are recommended for general use with
the listed amplifier plug-Ins. These probes automatically program the knob-skit readout and the CRT readout (available
only In the 5400 Senes) to indICate correct deflection factor.
Probe packages include various tips . ground leads and
accessories.
Ampl ifier
Plug·lns
Voltage
Probe
Attenuation
Standard
Length
5A14N
5A15N
5A18N
P60S0
lOX
6ft
P6062B
lX/lOX
6ft
5A13N
5A21N'
5A22N
5A26
P6062B
IX/lOX
6ft
P6 101
lX
2m
P6055
Ad j ustable
to lOX
3.5 ft
P6 105
lOX
2m
P6062B
lX/lOX
6 It
P6101
lX
2m
5A38
5A48
Probes are also available in different lengths. attenuation ratios. input loading and bandwidths. Special purpose probes.
such as high voltage. FET and current probes are available for
use With 5000 Senes Amplifier Plug-Ins. See Probe sectIOn for
complete information.
Features
Full bw , low cost, (not compatible with CRT
readout ).
Full bw , switchable attenuation, ground
reference button .
Full bw , swi tchable attenuation , ground
reference button .
Full bw , minialure . Modular consl ru ction
simplifies repa ir.
Ad justable attenuation . Will g ive up to 20,000 ;
1 CM RR when used In pa irs . (5A21 N, 5A22N
and 5A26) .
Full bw, miniature . Modular construction
simpl ifies re pa ir.
Switch able attenuation (lull bandwidth In the
lOX pos it ion ) g rou nd refe rence button.
Miniature , modular (reduced bandwidth ).
Package
Number
010·6060·03
The 5400 Series offers 50 MHz bandwidth and is
capable of satisfying a wide range of measurement needs. It features readout of plug-in scale
factors on the CRT (except with plug-ins having a
suffix N: 5A22N , 5Bl0N , etc.). This feature , previously available only on more sophisticated
oscilloscopes, allows you to make measurements
more quickly and conveniently. The CRT readout
can also be external accessed.
PLUG-IN VERSATILITY
21 plug-ins are now available in the 5000 Series
Family. All these plug-ins are compat ible with the
5400 Series, and all but six are compatible with
5100 Series Mainframes.
The amplifier plug-ins include single, dual, and
four trace units, various differential amplifiers (in·
cluding one with a current probe input) , and a
differential comparator amplifier. The time-base
plug-Ins include single, dual , delayed sweep
units, and a digital time base .
Four special-purpose plug·ins are also available.
The 5L4N is a spectrum analyzer for the O-to' l00
kHz frequency range . It has 10 Hz bandwidth resolution. The 5CT1N is a semiconductor curve-tracer plug-in . It allows characteristic curves of tran'
sistors, FETs, diodes and other semiconductor
deVices to be displayed on the CRT. The 5S14N,
a general-purpose dual·trace , delayed sweep
sampler , extends the bandwidth of the 5100, the
5400 Series, and the 5223 to 1 GHz at 2 mV
sensitivity.
The 5010 is a dual channel waveform digitizer
with cursors, CRT scale factor readout , roll mode
and plotter output.
Back-lighted knob skirts on the plug-ins provide
scale-factor readout. The correct scale factor is
automatically indicated when using the Xl0 magnifier and the recommended lX and lOX probes.
In addition , the 5400 Series automatically
presents correct scale factors on the CRT when
used with non-N suffix plug-ins. This feature helps
reduce human errors and enables photographic
recording of measurement conditions.
CARTS
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart. Cart. Model 3.
010·6062·13
010·6062·13
For cabinet models, order TEK Lab
CAMERAS
All 5100 Serie. traces.
C-5C, suitable for repetitive or stored
010·6101·03
5100 Storage In.trumenll, 5440 (with P back), 5441 (with G
back) - C·59. general purpose.
010·6055·01
For full details see Camera section.
ACCESSORIES
010· 6105·03
010·6062·13
010·6101·03
'The 5A21N also provides direcl access to current probe P6021 . Order 5A21N. Option 01 for 5A21N Amplifier and Current Probe
package. See pages 218·219 for complele information.
206
5400 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Two 5400 Series display units are presently available: a single-beam , non-storage display and a
variable persistence storage display. Both feature
CRT readout of plug-in scale factors, 3 plug·in
compartments and benchmount-to-rackmount
convertibility.
Blank Plug·ln Kit Blank Panel -
(040-0818-03)
(016-0195-02)
Viewing Hood. Protective Cover -
(016-0154.00, or 016-0452-00 folding)
(016·0544·00)
For full details see Accessories section.
SERIES
TEK 5000
REFERENCE
···' 0
~-DDDv
All 5000 Series Rackmount Os~scopes and
cabinet-to-rackmount kits include complete slide
out tracks and mounting hardware to interface
with standard 19 inch racks.
CONVERSION KITS
Cablnet-to-Rackmount, Order 040-0583-02 ................. $200
Rackmount-to-Cablnet, Order 040-0584-03 .•............... $ 125
MECHANICAL MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS
DUCPI "TI ON
PERFORMA NCE
Accur acy : ,%
Exclt.tlon : ::=:10 Vdc
RAN GE : 3000 pII;
PRESSURE
0 1 5-0 1 e l ~·
TYPE :
PRESSURE
016-0182-00 ·
Bandld 5t,.ln G.g.
Scala F,otor; 3 mV!V f.•.
I. ::::!S!5 kHz
RANGE: 300 pal ;
Sandld St,.ln G.gI
TYP E:
Accura cy : ,,,
Excitation : ::=:10 Vela
Se. la Fleter: 3 mV/V f. • .
f. ::::.: 24 kHz
012-0201-00
20 ft multl-
RANGE: 3000 PII; (dynamic only)
~;~~[t1:r~ :~po/p.1
M,x O.... rpr... ure : 300'"
Tamp: - 40°C to +150 0 C max
015-0118-00
RANGE: 0.001 10 1000 g'.
TYPE:
Plezoel.ctrlc compre •• lon
High c.paclla nce (e.:: 10,000 pF)
NBS trlc .. bfllty
Accur.cy : 5'"
lInea,lty: 2'"
Senlltlvlty : ~ 12 mVlg
f. ~ 30 kHz
012-0211·00
microdolio BNC
20ft c.ble
Buill·in CAL r.,lllor
ACCelERATION
015-Qles.oo
VIBRATION (EAS)
015-0"f.QO
VERTICAL.
VI BRATIO N
0lS..{llef.OO
TYPE ;
RANGE:
TYPE:
Pll zo,lletrlc
f;~ ~~~. RPM)
Plezoelectrlo
m.gn,tlc.lly mounted
Sen.ltlvlty : e mVlg (o,c.)
C, e.::3SOO pF
Temp: - " OIlC 10 +150 Cl C
t.~11 kH z
!:
1000 cm/ms) in the enhanced mode. Storage
view time is at least 1 hour at normal intensity. A
variable brightness control allows the storage
time to be extended to at least 10 hours at reduced intensity, after which time intensity may be
increased to original level. Variable brightness
also gives optimum photographic results and allows for the integration of multiple traces.
The 5115 is useful in a wide variety of fields , including education, biophysical engineering, component testing, and industrial electronics.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
When using two amplifiers and a dual time-base
plug-in in the dual-sweep mode, the sweeps are
slaved to the amplifiers.
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 dlv (1 .27 cm/div) parallax-free, nonilluminated graticule ..
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Acc.leratlng Potential Pho.phor -
3.5 kV.
Similar to Pl .
Ma. Stored Writing Speed -
At least 20 div/ms.
Storage View Time - At least 1 hr at normal intensity; up to
10 hr at reduced intensity, after which time it may be increased
to original level.
Era •• Time -
",,250 ms.
'lIIuminaled gralicule available al exira COSI.
Cabinet Models
5110 Oscilloscope ......... .....................
5111 Oscilloscope ........ .....................
5113 Oscilloscope ....... .......................
5115 Oscilloscope ............ ........ ..........
$1300
$2100
$2970
$2235
Rackmount Models
R5110 Oscilloscope
R5111 Oscilloscope
R5113 Oscilloscope
R5115 Oscilloscope
$1350
$2150
$3035
$2290
... ........................
...................... .....
........ ...................
........ ...................
OPTIONS
Option 02 Protective Panel Cover (Cabinet Models Only) The cover prolects the front panel and knobs during transportalion and storage ..................................................... Add $25
Option 07 Add Rear Panel Signals Out (All
Models) ..................................................................... Add $75
Option 76 P7 Phosphor (5110, R5110 Only) ......... Add $35
Option 76 Pll Phosphor (5110, R5110 Only) ...... Add $35
CONVERSION KITS
Cablnet·to·Rackmount Conversion Kit,
040-0583-02 .................................................................... $200
Rackmount-to-Cabinet Conversion Kit,
040-0584-03 .................................................................... $ 125
Protective Panel Cover Kit,
040-0620-00 ...................................................................... $40
Rear Panel Signal Outputs
Conversion Kit (Option 07)
040-0915-01 ................................................................... $ 155
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option Al Unlvers.1 Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Auatralian 240 Vl l0A ........................ No Charge
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (1.27 cm/div) parallax-free. nonilluminated graticule"
Accelerating Potential Pho.phor -
3.5 kV.
Similar to Pl .
Ma. Stored Writing Sp.ed - At least 200 div/ms in the normal-mode and 800 dlv/ms In the enhanced mode.
Storage View Time - At least 1 hr at normal intensity ; up to
10 hr at reduced intensity, after which time it may be increased
to original level.
Er••• Tim. - ",, 250 ms.
Option A4 North American 240 VI 15A ............ ... No Charge
For Recommended Cameras -
316.
See Camera section. page
AMPLIFIERS
FOUR-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER
TEK SINGLE-CHANNEL
5000
SERIES
5A15N
5A14N
5A24N
-..r
~I
,.......
·.0:·
..
_ • • • '" ... . . " II ""-R
'1
aAZ4N
Four Trace Dc to 1 MHz
Single Trace Dc to 2 MHz
Single Trace Dc to 2 MHz
SA 14N
SA 1SN
SA24N
Amplifier
Amplifier
Amplifier
50 mV /div to 1 V/ div Deflection Factors
1 mV /div to 5 V/div
1mV/div to 5 V/div
The 5A 14N Four Trace Amplifier features simplified front-panel controls and can be used in any
5000 Series Mainframe.
The 5A 15N Single Trace Amplifier features easy
to use front-panel controls and can be used in
many 5000 Series Mainframe.
Easy to Customize
5A 14N operating modes are: each channel separately , and alternated or chopped between any
combination of channels. Internal trigger is available from channel one only.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled. dc to at least 1 MHz at all deflection
factors . Ac coupled . 2 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz at all deflection factors .
oellectlon Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div to 12 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% . Uncalibrated . continuously variable between calibrated steps and 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C Max Input 350 V dc.
1 Mn w ithin 1%, = 47 pF.
Dc coupled . 350 V (dc
+
Two SA 15Ns (one must be located in the right-hand compartment) provide versatile x -Y operation when used In a 5100
Series Mainframe.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled. dc to at least 1 MHz at all deflection
factors . Ac coupled , 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors .
oellectlon Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% . Uncalibrated. continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C Max Input 350 V dc.
1 Mn within 1%. = 47 pF.
Dc coupled. 350 V (de
+ peak
ac). Ac coupled.
peak ac). Ac coupled.
The 5A24N is a low cost utility plug-in providing
direct access to either the vertical or horizontal
deflection system of the 5000 Series Mainframes.
It contains mode switching , CRT beam positioning, trigger pickoff for basic measurements, and
a built-in 3 3/8 x 2 3/4 inch soldering pad matrix
for use by the customers who wish to build their
own input circuits for special applications. Customer-built circuits are powered through the circuit board which provides access to all
mainframe power supplies.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled. dc 10 at least 2 MHz at 50 mV/div.
decreasing to dc 10 200 kHz at mid-attenuator range. Ac cou~
led. 25 Hz to at least 2 MHz at 50 mV/dlv. decreasing to 25 Hz
to 200 kHz at mid-attenuator range . Uncompensated Input.
oeltectlon Factor - 50 mV/div. accurate within 3%. Continuously variable. uncalibrated from 50 mV/div to at least 1 V/div.
Chopping Rate - 25 kHz to 100 kHz depending upon plug-in
combinations and number of traces displayed.
Input Rand C M•• Input -
= 100 kn . = 30 pF.
50 votts (dc
+
peak ac).
ORDERING INFORMATION
5A14N Four Trace Amplifier .............. $1270
SA 15N Single Trace Amplifier ............. $300
5A24N Single Trace Amplifier ............. $160
For recomended probes - refer 10 page 206.
216
TEK 5000
DUAL· TRACE AMPLIFIER
DUAL· TRACE WAVEFORM DIGITIZER
SERIES
5A18N
5010
Dual Trace Dc to 2 MHz
Waveform Digitizer
5A l8N
Amplifier
1 mV /div to 5 V I div
501 0
The SA 18N Dual Trace Amplifier features easy to
use front-panel controls and can be used in any
5000 Series Mainframe.
Dual Channel Digital Waveform Storage
Waveform Digitizer
CRT Scale Factor Readout
SA 18N operating modes include channel one or
two only, channels one and two added, channel
two inverted and channel one altemated or
chopped with channel two. Internal trigger source
is selectable from channel one and channel two.
CHARACTERISTICS
Two Cursors for Point to Point
Measurements
Bandwidth - Oc coupled. dc to at least 2 MHz at all deflection
factors . Ac coupled. 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors .
X-Y Display
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 12 calibrated steps
(1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated. continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C Ma. Input 350 V dc.
1 Mil within 1% = 47 pF.
Dc coupled. 350 V (dc
+
peak ac). Ac coupled.
Chopping Rate - 25 kHz to 100 kHz to 100 kHz depending
upon plug-in combinations and number of traces displayed.
Order SA 18N Dual Trace Amplifier _. ... $630
Pre-Trigger Viewing
Roll Mode
Analog PloHer Output
The 5010 is a double wide plug-in waveform
digitizer designed to enhance the capabilities of
the 5110. It may be used in other 5000 Series
Mainframes. The 5010 provides digital storage
and generates its own readout of scale factors
and cursor coordinate values. It will digitize two
channels simultaneously with high vertical and
horizontal resolution . When inserted into the 5110,
the vacant left vertical compartment may be used
with one of several plug-ins to precondition the
signal for the 5010. Such a case might be the
5A26 Dual Differential Plug-in.
Se one of the first to have further information on
the 5010. Fill out and return the 5010 information
request card in this catalog. We will send you
complete product information as soon as it is
available. Expected product availability is second
quarter 1982.
For recommended probe - refer to page 206.
217
AMPLIFIERS
TEK DIFFERENTIAL
5000
SERIES
5A13N
5A13N
5A21N
5A19N
Differential Comparator
Differential
Differential
Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV/div to 5 V/div
10,000: 1 Cmrr
10,000 Div Effective Screen Height
The 5A 13N is a differential comparator plug-in
amplifier for the 5000 Series. It incorporates a
number of performance features that make it
particularly versatile.
Conventional Mode - The 5A 13N has constant bandwidth over the 1 mV/div to 5 V/div
deflection factor range. The bandwidth is
selectable at 2 MHz or 10 kHz for best displayed
noise conditions during low-frequency applications. The plus or minus inputs allow normal or
inverted displays.
Differential Mode - The 5A13N maintains its
conventional features and provides a balanced
input for applications requiring rejection of a
common-mode signal. The cmrr is 10,000:1 from
dc to 20 kHz, decreasing to 100:1 at 2 MHz. The
unit rejects up to 15 V of common-mode signal at
a deflection factor setting of 1 mV/div, increasing
to 350 V rejection capability above 100 mV/div.
Comparator Mode - The 5A 13N provides an
accurate positive or negative internal offsel1ing
voltage. A signal of up to ± 10 V may be applied
to an input (plus or minus) at a deflection factor
setting of 1 mV/div and viewed in 10,000 div by
offsetting the signal with the opposing comparison voltage. A ± 1 V comparison voltage is also
available for applications requiring max resolution.
The offset voltage may be externally monitored
through a front-panel output.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to 2 MHz . Bandwidth limit mode, dc to 10
kHz. Ac coupled, 2 Hz or less at the lower - 3 dB point.
Daflectlon Factor - 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil,
~ 51
pF.
Signal Range
Deflection Faclor
Sellings
Common-Mode
Signal Range
Max DcGoupled Input
(Dc + Peak Ac
at 1 kHz or Less)
Max Ac Coupled Input
(Dc Voltage)
1 mV to
50 mV/dlv
0.1 V to
5 V/div
±10 V
±350 V
±350 V
±350 V
Max Input Gate Current - 0.1 nA or less (equivalent to 100
"V or less, depending on external loading) at 25 · C.
Overdrive Recovery - 1 "s to recover to within 3.0 mV and
0.1 ms to recover to within 1.5 mV alter removal of an overdrive signal between + 10 V and - 10 V, regardless of overdrive Signal duration.
Internal Comparison Vollege - Ranges, 0 V to ± 10 V and 0
V to 1: 1 V. Accuracy , within 0.2% of dial setting plus 5 mV
from 1: 1 V to ± 10 V : within 0.2% of dial setting piUS 1 mV
from 1: 25 mV to 1: 1 V on the 0 V to ± 1 V range. From 0 V to
1: 25 mV , use the on-screen display for greater resolution. Vc
output R, "" 15 kll.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 10,000: 1, de to 10
kHz at 1 mV/div to 50 mV/div dc coupled, with up to 20 V p-p
sinewave, decreasing to 100: 1 at 1 MHz. At least 400: 1, dc to
10kHz at 0.1 V/div to 5 V/div dc coupled, with up to 100 V p-p
sinew ave, decreasing to 40: 1 at 1 MHz. For frequencies above
5 kHz ac coupled, ernrr is the same as stated for de coupled.
Below 5 kHz ac coupled , cmrr decreases to 400:1 at 10 Hz.
Cmrr with two P6060 Probes is at least 400: 1 at any deflection
factor.
5A21N
5A19N
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth
10kHz Bandwidth Limiter
1 mV/div to 20 V/div
50 /lV /div to 5 V/div
Dc Offset
100,000: 1 Cmrr
The SA 19N is a low-cost differential amplifier featuring variable dc offset and simplicity of controls.
It is ideal for monitor and systems applications. It
operates in the left or middle plug-in compartment of the 5000 Series Mainframe for Y-T displays , or in the right compartment for X-V
displays.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage and Current Probe Inputs
The 5A21 N is a 50 /lV/div, dc coupled differential
amplifier for the 5000 Series. The 5A21 N has a
current probe input.
High Cmrr Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high cmrr adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes increase the
differential input impedance to 20 Mf! and allow
adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection
ratio (cmrr).
See page 336 for P6055 characteristics.
VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc coupled, dc to at least 1 MHz. Ac coupled, 2
Hz less at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited to 10kHz.
Deflection Factor - 50 " V/div to 5 V/div in 16 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 seq). Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - Voltage mode, 1 MU within 0.15%. ",,47 pF.
Mal Input Voltage
Ac Coupled
Dc Coupled
50 p.V Idiv to
350 V dc (coupling
10 V (dc
50 mV/div
peak ac)
cap pre-charged).
10 V peak ac
100 mV/div
350 V (dc +
to 5 V/div
peak ac)
Input Gate Current - 100 pA or less (equivalent to 100 "V or
less, depending on external loading, at 25 · C.
Displayed Noise - 30 " V or less, tangentially measured.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Ac coupled, 50 "V/div to
0.5 mY/diy, at least 20,000:1 at 5 kHz and above decreasing to
400:1 at 10 Hz. Dc coupled, at least 100,000:1 de to 30 kHz at
50 "V/div and 100 "V/div with up to 20 V p-p sinewave, decreasIng by < 20 dB/decade on sensitivity ranges up to 50
mV/div. From 100 mV/div to 5 V/div, ernrr is at least 400:1 with
up to 100 V p-p sinewave. Cmrr with two P6060 Probes is at
least 400:1 at any deflection factor.
CURRENT PROBE INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
(with P6021 CURRENT PROBE)
+
J
::: ~~~:t~ol ~~:. or less, to at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may
Deflection Factor - 0.5 mNdiv to 0.5 Ndiv in 10 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 1.25 Ndiv.
Max Input Current - 4 A p-p (at probe loop) with 125-tum
P6021 Current Probe.
~~~~:~::ra~e~~c~~r:v~~sio~a;W:~~JlrNn;:';~uO';'b
to +50· C.
218
For recommended probes -
reler to page 206.
Bandwidth - Dc coupled, de to at least 2 MHz at ali deflection
lactors. Ac coupled, 2 Hz or less to at least 2 MHz at ali deileetion factors.
Dellection Factor - 1 mV/div to 20 V/dlv in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is within 2%. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between calibrated steps and to 50 V/div.
Input Rand C -
1 MU within 0.3%, ",,47 pF.
Signal and Offset Range
Deflection
1 mV/dlv to
Factor Settings
200 mV/dlv
Common-Mode
Signal Range
±16 V
Max Dc
Coupled Input
(Dc + Peak Ac
at 1 kHz or Less)
Max Ac Coupled
Input (Ac Voltage)
Dc Offse t
Range
500 mV/dlv
to 20 V/div
±350 V
±350 V
±350 V
+15 V to
- 15V
I
+350 V to
-350 V
Common-Mode Reiection Ratio - Dc coupled, 1 mV/div to
200 mY/diy, at least 1000:1 Irom de to 10 kHz : decreasing to
100:1 at 500 mV/div to 20 V/div.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SA 13N Differential Comparator
Amplifier .............................................. $1140
SA 19N Differential Amplifier ..... _.... _..... $375
5A21 N Differential Amplifier ................ $465
Option 01 (includes P6021 , 5 It
current probe) ......................................................., Add 5265
The 5A21N and 5A22N Differential Amplifiers are
available with CRT readout at additional cost
(CRT readout f unctional in 5400 Series
Mainframes only). Contact your local Tektronix
Sales Engineer for details.
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
DUAL DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
5000
TEK SERIES
5A22N
The 5A26 has many applications in areas that require dual differential performance, especially in
biomedical and electromechanical fields, education, and component manufacturing.
5A28
High Cmrr Probes for Differential Amplifiers
We recommend the P6055 high cmrr adjustable
10X probes for use with Tektronix differential
amplifiers.
When used in pairs, these probes increase the
differential input impedance to 20 M!l and allow
adjustment for maximum common-mode rejection
ratio (cmrr).
See page 336 for P6055 characteristics.
CHARACTERISTICS
Numbe, of Ollle,ential Chennel. -
Two_
Bendwldth - Dc coupled, de to at least I MHz_Ac coupled. 2
Hz or less to at least I MHz_ Bandwidth may be limited to 10
kHz .
Differential
Dual Differential
5A22N
Sl;nll Ind OHael RInge
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
10 /AV/div to 5 Vldiy
100,000: 1 Cmrr
Selectable Upper and Lower -3 dB Points
Deflecti on
Factor Sett ings
10 p.V to
50 mV/ dlv
0.1 V to
5 V/dl v
Comm on-Mode
Signal Range
± 10 V
±350 V
Max Dc Coupled
I nput (Dc + Pea k
Ac at I kHz or Less)
Max Ac Coupled
I nput (Dc Voltage )
Dc OHset Range
Dc Offset
The 5A22N is the most versatile of the 5000
Series Differential Amplifiers. It features front
panel selectable filtering which enables reduction
of undesirable displayed noise; both upper and
lower 3 dB points are selectable. Dc offset at full
bandwidth is available for viewing signals riding
on a dc component such as low-level ripple and
noise on a power supply.
These features, together with its high commonmode rejection , make the 5A22N well suited for
measurements in difficult low-amplitude, low-frequency areas.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bendwldth - HF - 3 dB point: selectable In 9 steps (1-3 sequence) from 100 Hz to I MHz. 100 Hz to 0.3 MHz. accurate to
within 20% of selected frequency; at I MHz. bandwidth Is
down 3 dB or less_LF -3 dB point : selectable In 6 steps (1 -10
sequence) from O.I Hz to 10kHz accurate to within 20% of
selected frequency. Ac coupled , 2 Hz or less .
Deflection Flctor - 10 ~V/d iv to 5 V/div In a 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy Is within 3%. Uncalibrated. continuously variable between steps and to at least 12_5 V/dlv.
Common-Mode Rejection RIlla - Ac coupled. 10 ~V /d l v to
0.5 mV/div. at least 20.000: I at 5 kHz and above. decreaSing
to 400:1 at 10 Hz . Dc coupled, at least 100.000:1. de to 30 kHz
from 10 ~V/dlv to 100 ~V/div with up to 20 V pop sinewave.
decreasing by < 20 dB/decade on sensitivity ranges up to 50
mV/dlv. From 100 mV/div to 5 V/dlv. ernrr is at least 400:1 with
up to 100 V pop slnewave. Cmrr with two P6060 Probes is at
least 400:I at any deflection factor.
Oeflecllon Fecto, - 50 ~V/dlv to 5 V/div In 16 calibrated
steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy Is within 2%. Uncelibrated,
continuously variable between calibra ted steps and to 12.5
V/dlv.
Input RInd C -
Input Rend C -
± 350 V
Dc re j ection, at least 4 x 10' ;1
I
+50 V
to
-50V
I Mil within 0.15%. ",,47 pF.
Overdrive Recovery - I 0 ~s or less to recover within 99.5%
of reference level alter removal of a test Signal applied for I s.
Signal amplitude not to exceed common-mode signal range _
200 pA or less.
Olepllyed Nol.e - 20 ~V at max bandwidth, source resistance 25 \I or less. measured tangentially _
Drift with Temperl tu,e -
I Mil within 0_15% paralleled by ",,47 pF.
MIX Input Yoltl;e
±350 V
± 12 V
+ 0.5 V
to
-0 .5V
M.. Input alte Current -
CRT Readout - CRT readout of deflection factors. Functional
In CRT readout-equlpped 5400 Serles Oscilloscopes, nonfunctlonal ln 5100 Serles Oscjlloscopes.
Dc Coupled
+
10 V (de
peak ae)
350 V de (coupling
cap preeharged),
10 V peak ae
100 mV / dlv
toSV/d lv
350 V (de +
peak ae)
350 V
(dc + peak ac)
Input aete Current - 100 pA or less (equivalent to 100 ~V or
less, depending on external lOading) at 2S " C.
Ol.played Nolee -
30
~V
Two Differential Amplifiers in One Plug-In
Dc Coupled
50 p. V/ dlv to
50 mV/d lv
100 mV/ div to
5 V/ dlv
Ae Coupled
50 p. V/ dl v to
50 mV/d lv
50 /AV/diy Sensitivity at 1 MHz
100,000: 1 Cmrr
or less. tangentially measured.
Common-Mode Rejection Rltlo
100 ~V / " C or less_
5A26
Ac Coupled
50 p.V/ dlv to
50 mV/d l v
Wi th 2 P6062A Probes
At least 100,000 ;1 from de
to 30 kHz with up to 20 V
pop sine wave
At least 300 :1 from de t o
30 kHz with up to 100 V
pop sine wave
At least 20,000 :1 at 5 kHz
to 30 kHz, decreasi ng to
not less than 2000 :1 at
60 Hz
400 :1 at lOX probe attenuation
CRT Readout
The 5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier combines
two independent differential amplifiers in one
plug-in. It adds no-compromise differential measurement capability to the line of low-cost, highp erformance 5000 Ser ies Laboratory
Oscilloscopes. It may be used in any 5000 Series
Mainframe .
ORDERING INFORMATION
5A22N Differential Amplifier ................ $940
5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier ........ $1 010
The 5A26 provides 50 /AV/div sensitivity at 1 MHz,
high common-mode rejection ratio , CRT readout
in any standard 5400 Series Mainframe, triggersource selection and bandwidth limit on each
channel. With two 5A26s, it is possible to observe
up to four differential channels at one time in the
chop or alternate mode.
For recommended probes-refe, 10 page 206 _
219
BASES
TEK TIME
5000
SERIES
CHARACTERISTICS
sB12N
sBl0N
A Sweep Rete. - 1 ~ s/dlv to 5 s/dlv in 21 calibrated steps (1 .
2·5 sequence). Xl0 magnifier extends displayed sweep tlmeIdiv to 100 ns. Uncallbrated, continuously variable between
steps and to 12.5 sldlv.
A Sweep Accurecy - Unmagnified, within 3% from 1 ~s/div
to 1 s/dlv and within 4% at 2 s/dlv and 5 s/dlv. Magnified,
displays accurate to within 1% in addition to specified tlmebase sweep accuracy.
a Sweep Rate. steps .
0.2
~s/div
to 0.5 s/dlv In 20 calibrated
a Sweep Accuracy - Within 3% from 1 ~s/div to 0.1 s/dlv.
Within 4% at 0.2 ~s/d i v , and 0.5 s/dlv, 0.2 s/div, and 0.5 s/div ..
TRtGGERING
The following applies to the A and B trigger except as noted.
Coupling
To 1 MHz
Internal
0.4 d lv
0.6 dlv
External'
200 mV
200 mV
At 2 MHz
Dc
Requirements Increase below 50 Hz
Ac
Single Sweep Time Base
Dual Sweep Time Base
5B10N
5B12N
100 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Single Sweep
Direct Readout X 10 MAG
Auto Trig above.
The following characteristics apply to the A trigger only.
Dual and Delayed Sweep
Single Sweep -
Direct Readout X10 MAG
The 5810N is a time base/amplifier plug-in unit for
generating a sweep in the 5000 Series
Oscilloscopes. An external input allows use of the
58WN as a voltage amplifier with calibrated
deflection factors of 50 mV/div and 500 mV/div.
Multiple triggering modes may be pushbutton
selected with the 5810N. Source positions include left or right plug-in, composit (from the
mainframe vertical amplifier), line and external.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep R.t•• - , ~s/d l v to 5 s/dlv In 2' calibrated steps (' -25 sequence). X'O magnifier extends displayed sweep tlme/dlv
to '00 ns. Uncallbrated , continuously variable between steps
and to 12.5 s/dlv.
Swe.p Accurlcy - Unmagnified, within 3% from 1 ~s/dlv to 1
s/dlv and within 4% of 2 s/div and 5 s/dlv. Magnified displays
accurate within 1% In addition to specified time base sweep
accuracy.
Coupling
Dc
Internal
External
Ac
TRIGGERING
To 1 MHz
At 2 MHz
0.4 d lv
0.6 dlv
200 mV
200 mV
Requ irements Increase bel ow 50 Hz
Auto Trig - Same as above except signal rate requirements
are 15 Hz and above.
Singi' Sweep -
Same as for ac and dc coupled.
Ext.m.1 Trigger Input - Max Input Is 350 V (dc + peak ac).
Input Rand C Is 1 Mil within 2% paralleled by ... 70 pF. Trigger
level voltage range Is + 5 V to - 5 V.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL MODE
D.It.ctlon Factor - 50 mV/dlv and 500 mV/dlv, accurate
within 3%. Xl0 variable extends range to at least 5 V/dlv.
e.ndwldth - Dc coupled, de to at least 1 MHz . Ac coupled,
50 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz.
tnput R .nd C -
1 Mil within 2%, ... 70 pF.
M•• Input Volt.ge -
220
350 V (dc
+
peak ac).
Same as above on signal rates of 15 Hz and
100 ns/div to 5 s/div Calibrated Time Base
Provides Alternate and Chopped Displays
SO mV/div and 500 mV/div External Input
'A Trigger only.
B sweep operates In triggered or free-run mode after delay
time.
The 5812N is a time base for generating single,
dual , or delayed sweeps in 5000 Ser ies
Oscilloscopes. The 5812N is normally used in the
right plug-in compartment but is compatible with
the vertical deflection compartments as well.
The display modes are A sweep, 8 sweep, A intensified - 8 delayed , and dual sweep. Each
mode is selectable by pushbutton switches. Triggering sources for A and 8 sweep include left
and right plug-in , line, and display composite .. In
the display composite mode the sweep IS triggered from the composite signal being displayed.
Auto and external trigger and single sweep are
provided for the A sweep. The 8 sweep is
triggerable after the delay time.
When operated in the dual-sweep mode in a dualbeam oscilloscope with two amplifier plug-ins,
first the A sweep and then the 8 sweep displays
the signals from both amplifiers ; four traces will
be displayed. 80th sweeps are displayed simulta'
neously in chop mode.
When operated in the dual'sweep mode in a single-beam oscilloscope with two amplifier plug·ins,
the A sweep is slaved to the left plug·in and the 8
sweep is slaved to the right plug-in.
The display mode pushbutton selects chop or al·
ternate time-share switching between vertical
plug·ins and amplifier channels. Chop rate is 25
kHz to 100 kHz depending on plug-in combina·
tions and number of traces displayed.
Same as for ac and dc coupled.
Eltemel Trigger Input - Max Input voltage Is 350 V (dc +
peak ae). Input Rand C Is 1 Mil within 2% paralleled by '" 70
pF. Trigger level voltage range is + 5 V to - 5 V.
DELAYING SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Del.y Time Accuracy - 1
s/dlv to 5 s/div, within 2%.
~s/d lv
Del.y Time Multiplier Renge setting.
to 0.5 s/dlv, within 1%. 1
0.2 to 10.2 times the tlme/dlv
D.lay Time Multiplier Incrementel Linearity -
Within 0.2%.
DIII.rentl.1 Time Me •• urement Accuracy - Within 1% plus
2 minor dial dlv for , ~s to 0.5 s delay times. Within 2% piUS 2
minor dial dlv for 1 s to 5 s delay times.
Jitter - < 0.05% of the lime represented by one dlv of the
delaying sweep selected.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL MODE
D.llectlon F.ctor - 50 mV/dlv and 500 mV/dlv accurate to
within 3%. Xl0 variable extends range to at least 5 V/dlv.
a.ndwldth - Dc coupled, de to at least 1 MHz . Ae coupled,
50 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil within 2%, ", 70 pF.
M•• Input Volt."e -
350 V (de
+
peak ae).
ORDERING INFORMATION
sB10N Time Base/Amplifier ................ $460
sB 12N Dual Time Base ........................ $970
DUAL TRACE SAMPLER
CURVE TRACER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER
TEK 5000
SERIES
5CT1N
5L4N
5S14N
spectrum Analyzer
Dual Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler
acT1Ji11 CU"Vt. TRACE"
Curve Tracer
seT 1N Curve Tracer
• Test Semiconductor Devices to 0.5 W • 10
nA/div to 20 mA/div Vertical Deflection Factors •
0.5 V/div to 20 V/div Horizontal Deflection Factors
• For a complete description see page 309.
by the Delay Time Multiplier Control to the end of
the event. The time-interval between the selected
points is then determined by multiplying the
number read directly from the Delay Time Multiplier Dial by the selected time per division.
AMPLIFIER CHARACTERISTICS
SL 14N Spectrum Analyzer
• Low Cost. 0-100 kHz Frequency Range
• Resolution Bandwidth 10Hz to 3 kHz· Log and
Linear-Span Modes • Auto Resolution • For a
complete description see page 131 .
58 14N
Sampler
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Dual Trace, 2 mV/ div Sensitivity
Mode. - Channell only; Channel 2 only ; Dual Trace; Channell added to channel 2; Channel 2 subtracted from Channell
(CH 2 INVERT); Channel 1 vertical (V), Channel 2 horizontal
(X).
Input Impedlnce Blndwldth RI.I Time -
Simplified Triggering
350 ps or less.
DeilY Time (2nd Dot) - Adjustable to any portion of the time
Interval represented by ten div of the Delaying Sweep selected.
DeilY Accuracy - Within ± 1% 01 ten div when measurement
Is made within the last 9.5 diy.
Within ± 3% excluding first 1/2 div of displayed
Accurlcy sweep.
Oe"ectlon Flctor - 2 mV/dlv to 0.5 V/div in 8 calibrated
steps (1-2-5 sequence). Variable between steps by at least 2.5
to 1.
St.rt DeilY - Depends on the Delaying Sweep time selected
and the setting of the Delay Time Mult dial. Adjustable from
Zero to any time interval up to that represented by 10 div of the
Delaying Sweep selected. The Delaying Sweep start point corresponds to the second bright dot position.
Accuracy -
Within ± 3%.
± 5V.
Input Slgnll Ringe - 2 V pop max within a + 2
window at any sensitivity.
Dc Off.et Ring. -
v to
- 2V
At least + 2 V to - 2 V.
Two-Dot Time Measurements
Verticil Signal Output source resistance.
A unique feature is a system for making two-dot
time-interval measurements. This feature provides
an easy and accurate means for measuring the
time between two pOints on a waveform . One
bright dot on the trace is positioned with the
Delay Zero control to the start of an event to be
measured. Next a second bright dot is positioned
DeilY Zero (l.t Dot) - Adjustable to correspond to any instant within the time interval represented by the first 9 div of
the Delaying Sweep selected.
Step Aberrltion. - + 2%, - 3%, total of 5% Pi> within first 5
ns, ± 1% thereafter, tested with 284 Pulse Generator.
Ol.pllyed Nol •• - 2 mV or less unsmoothed (tangentially
measured). Low noise pushbutton reduces random noise by
factor of 4 to 1 or more.
Two identical amplifier channels provide dualtrace sampling. A two-ramp time base introduces
calibrated delayed sweep operation to sampling
in an inexpensive package .
Within ± 3% excluding first 1/2 div of displayed
Ringe -100 ps/div to 100 ~s/div In 19 calibrated steps (1 -2-5
sequence). Variable between steps by at least 2.5 to 1.
Operational Ease of
Conventional Oscilloscope
The 5S14N Sampling Unit combines amplifier and
time-base functions in one double-width plug-in
unit designed to operate in all 5000 Series
Mainframes. Combining the sampling amplifier
and time-base functions in one plug-in enables
the 5S14N to provide new economy and ease of
operation.
10 ns/div to 100 ~s/div In 13 steps (1 -2-5 sequence).
Accuracy sweep.
DELAYED SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Equivalent to dc to 1 GHz.
Mil Input Voltlge -
Calibrated Delayed Sweep
Nominally 50 II.
DELAYING SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Ringe -
0.2 V/div of vertical deflection ; 10 kll
Chlnnel DeilY Difference - Adjustable to zero or for any
time difference up to at least 1 ns.
TIME BASE CHARACTERISTICS
SCln Mode. -
Repetitive. Single. Manual, or External.
Oellylng Sweep - May be used as CRT time base or as a
delay generator for the Delayed Sweep. The sweep starts with
minimum delay from the instant of trigger recognition . When
the Delaying Sweep mode Is selected for the time base, two
bright dots in the trace are generated which may be positioned
anywhere on the displayed waveform. The time between dots
is equal to the reading on the Delay TIme Multiplier dial multiplied by lhe time/div.
Oellyed Sweep - This mode is used when the signal to be
displayed occurs considerably later than the instant of trigger
recognition or when the time must be 5 ns or less per div. The
Delayed Sweep may be started with zero delay time with respect to the start of the Delaying Sweep. Or the start may be
delayed by any time Interval up to that represented by ten div
of the Delaying Sweep selected.
Horizontll Slgnll Output - 1.0 V per div of horizontal deflection; lOkI! source raslstance .
DltlY Jitter - < 0.05% of the time represented by 1 div of the
Delaying Sweep selected.
TRIGGERING AND SYNC
CHARACTERISTICS
Slgnll Source - Interval from Channell vertical input or external through front-panel connector.
Elternll Triggering - Nominal 50 II input, ac coupled, 2 V
pop. 50 V dc max. Trigger pulse amplitude to mV pop or more
with rise time of 1 ~s or less. 10Hz to 100 MHz. Sinew ave
amplitude 10 mV pop or more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Intlmat Triggering - Pulse amplitude 50 mV pop or more with
rise time of 1 ~s or less. Sinewave amplitude 50 mV pop or
more from 150 kHz to 100 MHz.
Triggered Mode - Trigger recognition may be made to occur
at any selected voltage level between + 0.5 V and - 0.5 V at
Instants when either a + slope or a - slope of the triggering
signal crosses that level.
Auto Triggered Mode - For small signals or when there may
be no triggering signal. Sampling pulses are automatically generated at a low rate In the absence 01 a triggering signal so a
trace may always be generated and displayed. The trigger level
range automatically adjusts to approximate the pop voltage of
the signal.
Holdoff - Varies the length of the time Interval during which
recognition is inhibited. Variation is at least 5 to 1. The control
is particularly useful for displaying digital words when triggering
on binary pulses.
HI SYNC Mode - For sinewaves from 100 MHz to 1 GHz, 10
mV pop or more from external source, 50 mV pop or more from
internal pickoff.
Order 5S14N Sampler .. ,... ,." .. ,... ,....... $4915
221
TEK
PORTABLE
OSCILLOSCOPES
CONTENTS
2335 100 MHz Dual Trace .. ............ .......... .. . 223
2336 100 MHz Dual Trace wIt:. Time .......... . 224
2337100 MHz Dual Trace wIt:. Time & DMM 225
226
221360 MHz Dual Trace .......... .. .......... ..
2215 60 MHz Dual Trace,
Alternate Time Base .... . .. ...... ...................
226
485350 MHz Dual Trace ........... .. ............... 228
475/475A 250 MHz and
200 MHz Dual Trace
.......... .. .. .... .. .. .. . 230
465B/DMM44 100 Dual Trace . .................. 232
465M (AN/USM) 425 (V1) 100 MHz Dual Trace
Tri-service Standard
............................ 234
33535 MHz Dual Trace ..................
236
305 Battery Powered 5 MHzlDMM
237
221 5 MHz .....
................ .. . 238
.................. 239
213 1 MHzlDMM
212500 kHz Dual Trace .........................
240
T922R 15 MHz Dual Trace Rackmount
241
Portable Storage Oscilloscopes
468 100 MHz Dual Trace Digital Storage
466/464 100 MHz Dual Trace .
434 25 MHz Dual Trace
314 10 MHz Dual Trace .... .. .... .
214500 kHz Dual Trace ........ ..
T912 10 MHz Dual Trace ....................... .
242
244
246
247
248
249
For Accuracy and Versatility In the Field, Take One of Our 23 Portable Oscilloscopes.
Nonstorage Models
Storage Models
Produci
2335
2336
2337
2213
2215
485
475A
475
465B
465M
335
305
221
213
212
T922R
468
466
464
434
314
214
T912
Bw
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
60 MHz @ 20 mV/dlv
60 MHz @ 20 mV/dlv
350 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
250 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
200 MHz @ 2 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
35 MHz @ 10 mV/dlv
5 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
5 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
1 MHz @ 20 mV/div
500 kHz @ 10 mV/dlv
15 MHz @ 2 mV/div
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/dlv
100 MHz @ 5 mV/div
25 MHz @ 10 mV/dlv
10 MHz @ 1 mV/dlv
500 kHz @ 10 mV/dlv
10 MHz @ 2 mV/dlv
Dual
Trace
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Delayed
Sweep
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Fa.test Sweep
5 ns/dlv
5 ns/dlv
5 ns/d lv
5 ns/dlv
5 ns/dlv
1 ns/dlv
1 ns/dlv
1 ns/dlv
2 ns/dlv
5 ns/dlv
20 ns/dlv
0.1 Its/dlv
100 ns/dlv
400 ns/dlv
1 Its/dlv
20 ns/dlv
2 ns/dlv
5 ns/dlv
5 ns/dlv
20 ns/dlv
100 ns/dlv
1 Its/dlv
50 ns/dlv
Special Featur..
Rugged , compact , lightweight
B trigger, t:. Time
B trigger, t:. Time , DMM
2 mV/dlv @ 50 MHz
Dual time base , 2 mV/dlv @ 50 MHz
Widest BW In portable Instrument
High performance 250 MHz portable
Highest galn/BW In a portable
Cost effective 100 MHz portable
Trlservlce standard 100 MHz scope
Only 4.8 kg . 10.5 pounds
Autoranglng DMM
Only 1.6 kg, 3.5 pounds
DMM/scope at 1.7 kg, 3.7 pounds
Battery operation
Rackmount, front or rear Inputs
10 MHz Digital Storage
3000 dlvl itS stored writing speed
110 dlvl itS stored writing speed
Split-screen storage
Only 4.8 kg , 10.5 pounds
Only 1.6 kg, 3.5 pounds
Low-cost bistable storage
Price·
$2775
3075
3350
1100
1400
6975
4410
3960
2995
3500
2760
2120
1600
2100
1545
1750
6270
6385
5165
4400
3345
2100
1890
·U.S. sales prices are F.O.B. Beaverton, OR . For price and avallabllty outside the United States , please contact the nearest Tektronix Field Office, Distributor or Representative. Prices are subject to change without notice.
222
TEK 2300
100 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
SERIES
All three oscilloscopes come with detachable
power cord, integral EMI shielding, and an accessories pouch.
The Tektronix 2335, 2336, and 2337 Oscilloscopes
have been manufactured to withstand impact
shocks of 50 g's, almost twice that of other
portable scopes from Tektronix. This ruggedness
meets MIL-T-28800, Class 3 environmental requirements for aerospace and military
qualification.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The fOllOwing electrical characteristics are common to the
2335, 2336, and 2337 OscillOscopes except where Indicated .
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(Two Identical Channels)
Bandwidth ' and Rile Tlme -
-1 5 to + 40 ' C
+ 40 to + 55 ' C
Dc to at least 100 MHz,
Dc to at least 85 MHz,
3.5 ns
4.15 ns
'Measured at - 3 dB point at all deflection factors from a
50-I! source terminated In 50 n.
Lower - 3 dB Point (ac coupling and I X probe) less ; (lOX probe): 1 Hz 01' less.
10 Hz
01'
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/dlv.
1-2-5 sequence, accurate :t 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously
variable between steps and to at least 2 mV/dlv.
DI.play Mode. -
Ch 1, Ch 2, ADD (normal and Inverted).
Cmrr - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 10: 1 at 50 MHz
for common-mode signals of 6 div 01' less.
1 Mn ± 2% paralleled by 20 pF :t 10%.
Input Rand C -
Ma. Input Voltage - Ac 01' de coupled, 400 V (de
01' 500 V p-p ac at 1 kHz 01' less.
m
2335/36/37
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
Vertical Channel Deflections
from 5 mV/ div to 5 V/div
10X Magnifier to Increase
Sweep Rate to 5 ns /div
Rugged for Field Service
A new line of Tektronix portable oscilloscopes
feature extreme ruggedness to provide dependability in field service applications.
Compact and lightweight for ultra-portability,
these oscilloscopes are designed and built for onsite trouble-shooting. The 2335, 2336, and 2337
are useful for high speed logic and digital applications. They feature an innovative and protective
flip-top cover that doubles as a front panel with 6.
Time on the 2336 and 6. Time/DMM on the 2337
versions. The entire outside case of all three
instruments is made of durable, one-piece aluminum and the front panels are coated with scratch
resistant plastic. When the flip-tops are latched
shut, the entire scope can withstand the abuse
and heavy usage of field service environments.
+ peak
ac)
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Inside these new oscilloscopes is performance
capability to accommodate the wide variety of
testing conditions normally encountered by field
service personnel. Vertical channels have calibrated deflection factors from 5 mV/div to 5 V/div
with a variable gain control to increase the sensitivity to at least 2 mV/div. An internal delay line
permits observation of the leading edge of a
waveform. Variable sweep speeds range from 0.5
s/div to 50.0 ns/div and a 10X magnifier can
increase the sweep rate to 5 ns/div. An autotrigger mode allows triggering on waveforms with
repetitive rates down to approximately 10 Hz. The
sweep rate will run freely and provide a base line
trace in the absence of an adequate trigger
signal.
Many exterior features have been incorporated
into these new ultra-portable scopes to make
them fast and convenient to use. The CRT produces bright , high resolution traces that are
readily visible in most light conditions. The 6.
Time/DMM readouts are distinct, backlighted Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) for clear viewing in any
lighting condition. All knobs and switches have
been located in logical groupings to avoid errors
and delays during operation. And for the 2336
and 2337 models, 6. Timing and DMM display and
controls are in the hinged, fliptop cover.
Time Ba. e A - 0.05 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). XI 0
mag extends max sweep rate to 5 nsldiv.
Time B. .e B - 0.05 ~sldiv to 50 ms/div (1-2-5 sequence).
Xl0 mag extends max sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time base A provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div.
Time Ba .. A and B Accurecy, full 10 dlv -
+ 20 ' to + 30 ' C
- IS ' to + SS ' C
Unmagnified
:t 2%
± 3%
Magnified
± 3%
:t 4%
DI.play Mode. -
A, A intensified by B, B delayed.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - Continuous from 50 ns to at least 5 s
after start of delaying sweep.
Dillerential Time Mea.urement Accurac y -
+ 15' to +3S' C
2335
2336/2337
- IS ' to + SS ' C
0.75%
1.5%
+ 0.015 majOl' dial div
+ 0.015 majOl' dial div
± 1% of reading
± 2.5% of reading
:!: 1 count
1: 1
count
Jiller - 1 part 01' less In 20,000 (0.005%) of 10 times the A
SWEEP TIMEJDIV setting.
223
100 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DUAL
TRIGGERING, A AND B
A Trigger Mode - Normal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep run. in absence of a triggering signal and for
signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs once on first
triggering event after reset selector is pressed). LED light indicates when sweep is triggered and when single sweep is ready.
Sensitivity and Coupling CO UP L IN G
T o 20 MH z
At 100 M Hz
Inte rn al
1.1 d iv
0.3 dlv
defl ec t io n
deflection
Dc
Exte rn al
50 mV
150 mV
Extern al + 10
1.5 V
500 mV
Ac
Requ irements inc rease
be low 60 Hz
A c Lf Reject
Req ui rements Inc rease
bel ow 50 kHz
A c Hf Rejec l
Requi rements increase
above 50 kH z
A Trigger Hold Oft - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive waveforms.
to TIME B Trigger Modes (2336 and 2337 only) - Provides
two intensified zones on the CRT trace for differential time
measurements. Time difference between the two intensified
zones Is determined by B DELAY TI ME POSITION and ..I TI ME
POSITION controls. Time difference is displayed on Ihe LCD
readout.
RUNS AFTER DELAY - B sweep starts immediately after the
delay time selecled by the DELAY TI ME POSITION control and
is independent of B trigger signal.
TRIGGERABLE AFTER ADJUSTABLE DELAY TtME - The B
Sweep Trigger Is sourced from a composite of Ch 1 and Ch 2;
Ch 1 only or from the EXT Trigger Input connector.
Jitter -
1.0 ns or less at 100 MHz and 5 ns/div.
A Trigger View - A spring loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical con trols 10 display the external signal used to lrigger
the A sweep. This control provides quick verification of the
(trigger) signal and permits a time comparison between the ver-
tical input signal and the trigger signal. Deflection Factor is 100
mVldiv ± 40% (1 V/div with EXT -;. 10).
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of lriggering at
any point on positive or negative slope of vertical input signal.
Level adjustment through at least ± 1 V in external, through at
least ± 10 V in external -;. 10.
Adjustment Range A Sources 10.
1.0 V in EXT (10.0 V in EXT
~
10).
Vertical Mode, Ch 1, Ch 2, LINE, EXT, EXT -;.
B Sources (2336 and 2337 only) - ..I Time Runs After Delay,
Vertical Mode, Ch 1, Ch 2, EXT (All modes ac coupled).
External Inputs - Rand C 1 Mil ± 10%, 20 pF ± 30%. 400 V
(de + peak acl or 500 V ac pop at 1 kHz or less .
CALIBRATION SIGNAL
Output Voltage (0 ' to + 40 ' C) -
0.2 V ± 1%.
Output Voltage ( - IS ' to + SS ' C) -
0.2 V ± 1.5%.
X-Y OPERATION
DIGITAL MULTI METER (2337 only)
DC VOLTAGE
Full Scale Ranges - 2V (Auto-ranging to 200 mY); 200 V
(a uta-ranging to 20 V) ; and 500 V.
Resolution -
100 .V at 200 mV lull scale.
Accuracy Within ± 0.15% of reading ± one count
Add 0,01 % for every ' c below + IS ' C
Add ± 0.01 % for every , C
above + 3S ' C
Add ± 0.2S% of reading ± 8 counts
+ I S' to + 3S ' C
- I S' to + 15 ' C
+ 3S ' to + SS ' C
> 80% Relative
Humidity
Input Resistance -
10 Mil ± 0.2S%,
Rejection Ratio - Normal-Mode 60 dB minimum at SO and 60
Hz . Common-Mode 100 dB minimum at dc, 60 dB minimum at
SO and 60 Hz.
Full Sensitivity X-Y (Ch 1 HOrizontal, Ch 2 Vertical) - 5
mV/div to 5 V/div (1 -2-5 sequence), accurate ± 5% from 0' to
+ 40' C, accurate ± 8% from - IS ' to + SS ' C. X-axis bandWid th is dc to at least 2 MHz. Y-axis bandwidth is de to at least
100 MH z. Phase difference between amplifiers is 3' or less
lrom dc to 200 kHz.
Response Time - Within 3 s (no autorange); within 9 5 ; (up
rangel ; within 7 5 ; (down range).
DISPLAY
AC VOLTAGE
CRT - 8 X 10 div (8 mm/divl display . Horizontal and vertical
centerlines further marked in 0.2 div increments . P31 Phosphor
standard . 18 kV accelerating potential.
Graticule - Internal , nonparallax, non-illuminated; markings
for measurement of risetime.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to wilhin graticule area to
loea te an off screen signal.
Z-Axis Input - Positive-going, dc coupled signal decreases
intensity ; S V pop signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity ; dc to 20 MHz.
224
Maximum Input Voltage - SOO V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between positive and negative inputs or between either input
and ground).
Full Scale Ranges - 2 V (auta-ranging to 200 mY); 200 V
(auto-ranging to 20 V); and 3S0 V,
Crest Factor scale) Six .
(When peak voltage input is < 3 times lull
Accuracy · -
+ I S' to + 3S ' C
- IS ' to + IS ' C
+ 3S ' to + SS ' C
Within + 3%, + 6 counts, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Add ± 0.05% for eve ' C below + IS ' C
Add ± O.OS% for every 'c above + 3S ' C
' Non sinewsves : Derate to SO Hz to 20 kHz. For crest factors
greater than 3, add + 0, - 1% of reading.
Input Impedance - Resistance 10 Mil ± 0.2S%. CapaCitance
(20 V, 200 V, and 3S0 V range) < lS0 pF; (200 mY, 2 V range)
< 220 pF.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio - 60 dB minimum at SO and
60 Hz, 2 V range; S3 dB minimum at SO and 60 Hz, 200 VI and
300 V range.
Response Time - Within 3 s (no autorange); wi thin 9 s; (up
range); within 7 5: (down range).
Maximum Input Voltage - SOO V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between positive and negative inputs or between either input
and ground).
RESISTANCE
Full Scale Ranges - 2 kll (auto-ranging to 200 11); 200 kll
(auta-ranging to 20 kll); 20 Mil (auta-ranging to 2 Mil).
Resolution -
0,1 I!.
Accuracy + IS ' to + 3S ' C
- IS ' to + lS 'C
+ 3S ' to + SS ' C
:;:... 80% Relative
Humidity
Response Time -
Within + O.S% + 1 count + 0.4 11
Add O.OS% lor every ' C below + lS ' C
Add 0.05% for every ' C above + 3S ' C
Add ± 1% of reading ± 8 counts
< 4 s.
Maximum Input Voltage - SOO V (dc + peak ac) at 60 Hz
(between posi tive and negative inputs or between ei ther Input
and ground).
TEK
2300
SERIES
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.2 V accurate ± 1% from 0 ' to
+ 40 ' C. ± 1.5% lrom - IS ' to + 55 ' C.
Power Requirement . - Qulck-change selector lor operation
Irom 100 V to 132 Vac or 200 to 250 Vac. 48 to 440 Hz.
Maximum power consumpllon is 60 watts at 132 V. 48 Hz .
Typical power consumption Is 35 watts at 115 V. 60 Hz.
Option 03 provides operation from 90 to 115 Vac or 180 to 230
Vac. 48 to 440 Hz.
Dlmen.lon.
mm
In
Height (without pouch)
Height (with leet and pouch)
135
210
5.3
8.3
Width
Width (with handle)
274
315
10.8
12.4
Oepth (with Iront cover
Depth (handle extended)
430
527
17.0
20.8
Weight. (2335)
kg
Ib
Net (without accessories
and pouch)
7.7
17
Net (with accessories
and pouch)
8.6
19
Shipping
10.6
23.5
Net (without accessories
and pouch)
7.9
17.5
Net (with accessories
and pouch)
Shipping
8.8
10.9
19.5
24 .0
Weight. (2336 and 2337)
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6108 lOX probes (010-6108-03). accessory pouch (0160674-00). zip lock accessory pouch (016-0537-00). blue CRT
light lilter (337-2760-00). clear CRT light IiIter (337 -2781 -00).
two lA luses (159-0022-00). 112 A fuse (159-0025-00). power
cord (161 -0104-00). 2337 also includes test lead pair (0120941-00).
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES '
Operating Temperature Range - - 15· to + 55 ' C (forced
air ventilation during normal operation).
Storage Temperature Range (2335 only) + 85 ' C.
- 62 ' to
Storage Temperature Range (2336 and 2337) + 80 ' C.
- 40' to
Operating Altitude Range -
Sea level to 4.500 m (15.000 tt).
Nonoperating Altitude Renge (50.000 II).
Sea level to 15.000 m
Vibration, Structural Integrity - Test samples were subjected to sinusoidal vibration in the X. Y. and Z-axes with the frequency varied from 10Hz to 55 Hz to 10Hz in one minute
cycles for a duration of filleen minutes. Total displacement was
0.025 In pop at 4 g 's (55 Hz).
Shock, Operating and Nonoperating - Test samples were
subjected to 3 shocks . both directions along each axis (X . Y.
and Z) for a total of 18 shocks. Peak acceleration of each
shock was 50 g·s. 112 sine.
Humidity, 2336 and 2337 Oscilloscopes, Operating - Test
samples were subjected to 90% relative humidity at 55 ' C fl)( a
maximum of 72 hours.
Humidity 2336 and 2337 DMM, Operating - Test samples
were subjected to 90% relative humidity at 35 ' C for a maximum of 24 hours and to 70% relative humidity al 50 ' C fl)( a
maximum of 24 hours.
Humidity 2336 and 2337 Oscilloscope and DMM, Nonoperating - Test samples were subjected to 90% relative humklity
at 60 ' C for 72 hours.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) - Test samples were
found In compliance with Ihe Class 3 requirements of MILSTD-46tA using procedural steps outlined in MIL-STD-462.
(Increase RS03 reqUIrements from 1 V/meter to 10 V/meter).
ORDERING INFORMATION
2335 Oscilloscope ............................ .. $2775
2336 Oscilloscope with Delta Time
$3075
2337 Oscilloscope with Delta Time
and DMM ............................................. $3350
OPTIONS
Option 03 100/200 V, ac nominal, 48 to 440 Hz No Charge
INTERNATIONAL POWER COROS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13 A .. ....................... .......... No Charge
Option A3 Australien 240 V / 1 OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V 15 A) .............. No Charge
-The 2335 Oscilloscope meets all environmental requirements
of MIL-T-28800. Class 3. The 2336 and 2337 Oscilloscopes
meet the environmental requirements of MIL-T-288oo. Class 3
except lor nonoperating temperature range and high (95-percent) relative humidity. both 01 which were delimited as indicated herein to avoid potential damage to the LCD readout.
Humidity, 2335 only, Operating and Nonoperating - Test
samples were exposed to 120 hours (5 cycles) of 95% relative
humidity as specified In MIL-T-28800B Paragraph 3.9.2.2.
225
MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK 60DUAL
trigger holdoff, TV line and TV field triggering at
any sweep speed , and an enhanced auto mode.
On the 2215, the dual time base operates in either
run after A or trigger after A. The latter permits
jitter-free B measurements.
The 2213's single time base delay provides the
user with the performance of intensified and
delayed sweep operations at a low price. Where
dual time base performance is required , the 2215
delivers it with alternate sweep switching . The
2215 can display four traces; vertical channels 1
and 2 at the A sweep rate , and vertical channels
1 and 2, delayed, at the B sweep rate. Both
scopes also incorporate new auto-intensity and
auto-focus circuits that provide convenient operation over a wide range of sweep speeds.
•
2213/2215
Dc to 60 MHz Bandwidth
Light Weight
Easy to Use
2 mY Sensitivity
Advanced Trigger System
5 ns /div Sweep Speed
Delayed Sweep Measurements
Large, Bright CRT
New 10X Probes Included
Two new 60 MHz, dual trace oscilloscopes from
Tektronix offer unprecedented value in both initial
and life cycle costs. They are ideal everywhere
general purpose scopes are needed.
These oscilloscopes provide unexcelled performance in a small light-weight package; 6.1 kilograms (13.5 Ib). With pouch and front cover, only
6.8 kilograms (15Ib).
X-V operation is simple and easy to use. Both
vertical input channels (Ch 1 and Ch 2) can be
used through their full range of sensitivity
settings. Vertical sensitivities range from 2 mV to
10 V/div. Sweep speeds range from 0.5 seconds
per division to 50 nanoseconds per division. A
10X magnification provides 5 nanoseconds per
division.
226
A pushbutton beam finder allows easy scope
setups. The scope bezel accepts a TEKTRONIX
C-5C Scope Camera with graticule illuminating
flash (option 04).
The advanced triggering system features true
vertical mode alternate triggering; both the 2213
and 2215 will trigger alternately even with
unrelated signals. Other features include variable
Low life cycle cost is brought about by the
inherent reliability of the new scopes. The parts
count and cabling have been greatly reduced as
compared to older designs. Even the traditional
line transformer and line voltage selector switches have been eliminated , thanks to a new highefficiency power supply. The advantages of
these power supply improvements are that the
2213 and 2215 will operate from mains voltages
of 90 to 250 Volts RMS at frequencies from 48 to
62 Hz. Additional reliability also results from superior mechanical design and packaging, solderedin components, absolute minimum of connectors
and very low power consumption.
TEK
2200
SERIES
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICS
TRIGGERING
The following electrical characteristics are common to both Instruments except where noted :
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
2213 and 2215 A Time Ba.e Trigger Mode. - Normal
(sweep runs when triggered). automatic (sweep runs in the absence of a triggering signal and triggers automatically for signals down to 20 Hz). and tv field (with slope set for negative
going transitions. and trigger level adjusted close to blanking
level. sweep starts at first line of video; use NORMAL for tv line
display). LED Indicates when sweep Is triggered.
Cabinet Dimension.
mm
In
HeIght (with leet and handle)
137
5.4
A Trigger Holdofl - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
Width (with handle)
360
14.2
WIdth (WIthout handle)
237
12.9
Depth (WIth Iront cover)
445
17.5
(2 Identical Channals)
BandwIdth ' and RI.e Time 50 II terminated source).
O'C to + 40'C
(At all deflection factors from
Dc to 60 MHz. 20 mV/div
to 10 V/dlv. 5.8 ns reduced
to 50 MHz for 2 mV to
10 mV/div. 7 ns
+ 40 ' C to + 50 'C
50 MHz. 7 ns
Sen.ltlvlty - Auto and Normal Internal: below 2 MHz. signal
must be at least 0.4 divisions amplitude; requirements Increase
above 2 MHz; at 60 MHz. signal must be at least 1.5 divisions
amplitude.
Probe Adju.t Signal ± 20%.
Squarewave. 0.5 V ± 20%. 1 kHz
Power Requirements - 90 to 250 V. 48 to 62 Hz without
range switching, 50 watts max at 115 V and 60 Hz.
Depth (without lront cover)
440
17.3
Depth (WIth handle extended)
511
20.1
Auto and Normal External - Up to 2 MHz. trigger signal must
be at least 50 mV p-p; reqUirements Increase up to 60 MHz.
where signal must be at least 250 mV p-p.
Weight. (approx)
kg
Ib
Dellectlon Factor - 2 mV/div to 10 V/dlv ± 3% (+ 20 ' C to
+ 30' C) or ± 4% (O ' C to + 50· C).
Net (with cover
accessories. and pouch)
7.6
16.8
1-2-5 sequence. Uncallbrated. continuously variable between
steps to at least 25 V/dlv.
TV Field amplitude.
Net (WIthout cover
accessories. and pouch)
6.1
13.5
DI.play Mode. - Ch 1. Ch 2. Ch 2 ADD (normal and inverted). alternate. chopped ", 250 kHz rate . electronically
switched.
Level and Slope (NORM Mode) - Internal: trigger level can
be adjusted over the range of amplitudes displayed on the
CRT. External. dc coupled: level can be adjusted over a range
of at least ± 2 V. or 4 V p-p. External. dc coupled and attenuated ( -T 10): level can be adjusted over a range of at least ± 20
V. or 40 V p-p.
Sh,pp,ng (domestiC)
8.2
18
'Measured at - 3 dB.
Cm" - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 10:1 at 10 MHz
for common-mode signals of 6 divisions or less.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ± 2% paralleled by ",30 pF.
Extarnallnput. - R and C ",, 1 Mil paralleled by ", 30 pF. 400
V (de + peak ac) or 800 Vac p-p at 1 kHz or less.
Mu Input Voltage Dc coupled 400 V (dc + peak ac)
800 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less).
2215 DELAYED (B) TIMEBASE
Ac coupled ~OO V (dc + peak ac)
~OO V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less).
Delay Line waveform,
Level and Slope gering B sweep.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Tlma Ba.e B - (2215 only) - 0.05 ~s/d i v to 50 msldiv (1-2-5
sequence). lOX mag extends max sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time Base A (both 2213 and 2215)
provides continuously variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps to at least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A (both 2213 and 2215) and B (2215 only) Accuracy , center 8 divisions +20 'C to +30 ' C
O' C to +50 'C
I
I
I
± 3%
± 5%
I
I
I
Separate slope and level controls for trig-
Sensitivity - Up to 2 MHz. signal must be at least 0.4 divisions in vertical amplitude ; requirements increase up to 60
MHz . where signal must be at least 2 divisions in amplitude.
± 4%
± 6%
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
2213 SWEEP DELAY
Multiplier -
Increases delay time by 20 to 1 or more.
5000 to 1 (0.02%) of maximum available delay time.
2215 SWEEP DELAY
Dalay Time. - Continuously variable by means of a 10 to 1
vernier control. Delayed (B) portion is intensified on the main
(A) trace.
Delay Position Ranga Delay Dial Accuracy -
< 0.5 to more than 10 divisions.
± 1.5% of full scale.
AlB Sweep Separation - Control permits main and delayed
sweep to be separated by at least 3.5 divisions.
Jlttar -
10.000 to 1 (0.01 %) of maximum available delay time.
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Autlrallan 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V /15 A ............... No Charge
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 cm display. Horizontal and vertical center lines
lurther marked in 0.2 cm increments . P31 Phosphor standard.
10 kV accelerating potential. mesh grid. halo suppressed.
Gratlcule - Internal. non-parallax. not illuminated ; markings
for measurement of rise time.
Z-Axl. Input - Dc coupled. posltive-going signal decreases
intensity; 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity; dc to 5 MHz.
< 0.5 ~ s . 10 ~s . and 0.2 ms.
Standard: 110 Vac NorIh American plug.
Full Sen.ltlvlty X-Y (Ch 1 Horiz, Ch 2 Vert) - 2 mV/div to 10
V/div. accurate ± 5%. Bandwidth is de to at least 2 MHz.
Phase difference between amplifiers is 3 ' or less from de to 50
kHz.
Horizontal DI.play Modes (2215) - A. alternate (A intensified
by B and B). B. Electronic switching between Intensifoad and
delayed sweep.
Jlttar -
2215 Dc to 60 MHz Dual Trace, Delayed
Alternate Time Base
Oscilloscope ............................. ____ .. __ .. $1400
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS. PLUG OPTIONS
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within gratlcule area for
ease in locating an off-screen signal. A pre-set intensity level
provides a constant brightness.
Dalay Time. -
ORDERING INFORMATION
2213 Dc to 60 MHz Dual Trace, Single
Time Base Oscilloscope with Delayed
Sweep ....................... __ .. _.. ____________________ $1100
X-Y OPERATION
A. A intensified after de-
Horizontal DI.play Mode. (2213) lay. delayed.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6120 lOX voltage probes (010-6120-00). two IC grabber
probe accessories (013-0191-00).
Power Cords -
Tlma Base A - (Both 2213 and 2215) - 0.05 ~s/d i v to 0.5
sldiv (1 -2-5 sequence). lOX mag extends max sweep rate to 5
ns/dlv.
Unmagnilled
Magnilled
Composite video must be at least 2 divisions
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O' C to + 50 · C.
Nonoperating : - 55 ' C to + 75 · C.
Altitude - Operating : to 15.000 ft ; max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by I ' C/1 000 ft from 5000 to 15.000 ft.
Nonoperating : to 50.000 ft.
Vibration - Operating test samples were Subjected to sinusoidal vibration in the X. Y. and Z axis with the frequency varied from 10Hz to 55 Hz to 10Hz In one minute sweeps for a
duration of 15 minutes per axis and a dwell 0110 minutes at 55
Hz. Total displacement was 0.015 in p-p (2.4 g 's at 55 Hz).
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: test samples were
subjected to 5 cycles (120 hours) of humidity testing.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : test samples were subjected to 3 shocks. both directions along each axis lor a total 01
18 shocks. Peak accelerations 01 each half-sine shock were 30
g·s.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Front Panel Cover (200-2520-00) .............................•.. $5.00
Accessory Pouch (016-0677-00) .................................. .. $42
Pouch and Cover (020-0672-00) ..................................... $47
Viewing Hood (016-0566-00) ................... ........ ............... $15
C-5C Option 04 Scopa Camera .................................... $500
Model 200C SCOPE-MOBILE" Cart ..... ......................... $265
Rack Adaptor Kit (016-0466-00) ................................... $ 1 00
MHZ
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 350
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels I
Bandwidth' and Rile Time 50 U terminated sourcel.
(at all deflection factors from
- 150C to +35° C
+35 0C to +55 0C
50 f!
Dc to 350 MHz,
1 ns
Dc to 300 MHz ,
1.2 ns
1 MQ
Dc to 250 MHz,
1.4 ns
Dc to 200 MHz ,
1.8 ns
'Measured at - - 3 dB. Bandwidth may be limited to = 20
MHz by bandwidth limit switch.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1X probe: 1 kHz or less for 50
II, and 10Hz or less for 1 Mil. lOX probe: 100Hz or less for 50
11, and 1 Hz or less for 1 Mil.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/dlv to 5 V/div (1-2-5 sequencel,
accurate + 2%. Uncallbrated, continuously variable between
steps and to at least 12.5 V/dlv. Gain can be recalibrated at the
front panel.
Dllplay Model - Ch 1, Ch 2 (normal and invertedl, alternate,
chopped (= 1 MHz ratel, x-Y (Ch 1-Y and Ch 2-XI, ADD (Ch 1
± Ch 21.
Cmrr - Common-mode relection ratio at least 20 dB at 50
MHz for common-mode signals of 6 div or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1x,
lOX, and 100X coded probes are automatically indicated by
three readout lights at the edge of the knob skirts. All lights are
off when the channel is not selected for display or when the
trace identification control on the probe is depressed.
Salactabla Input Impedance - 50 11 and 1 Mil impedances
are available at a single BNC connector by pushbutton
selection.
5011 ± 0.5%: VSWA 1.15:1 or less from 20 mV/div to 5 V/div,
1.25 :1 or less at 5 mV/div and 10 mV/div to 350 MHz.
Input Rand C -
485
350 MHz at 5 mV/div
1 ns/div Sweep Rate
3,0 div/ns Writing Speed
1 MO and 50 0 Input Impedances
Input Protection 50 0 Internal
Automatic Deflection Factor Readout
Pushbutton Ext Trigger View
Battery Operation (Optional)
Weighs R: 9,5 kg
At just 21 pounds, the 1 ns/div dual-trace 485 is
the only true portable 350 MHz oscilloscope on
the market. This wide bandwidth is one reason
why the 485 is highly compatible with today's
increasing technology.
Many features contribute to the 485's extraordinary overall performance. Fast 3.0 div/ns writing
speed is one , making it especially attractive for
use in field research environments.
The 485 features a wide bandwidth at its full 5
mV/div vertical sensitivity (350 MHz at 50 0 and
250 MHz at 1 MO). Selectable input impedance
provides the capability to measure low and high
impedance points with the same scope and
without active probes.
Internal detection circuitry protects the 50 0 input
by automatically disconnecting when the Signal
exceeds approximately 5 V RMS.
228
You no longer have to mentally compensate for
attenuating probes. Automatic vertical scale-factor readout is provided by three light-emitting
diodes located around the edge of each input
attenuator knob. A quick glance at the readout
tells the operator the correct on-screen V/div
when the recommended 10X or 100X probes are
used.
And you always know exactly where you are in a
pulse train when making a delayed sweep measurement. An alternate sweep mode allows the
delayed sweep to appear alternately with the
intensified main sweep. In this mode, you can
view the intensified zone and the delayed display
simultaneously.
The external trigger signal can be easily viewed
on the 485. A front-panel pushbutton automatically routes the external signal used to trigger Time
Base A to the vertical deflection amplifier. This
feature can also be used to quickly make time
comparisons between the signal of interest and
the external trigger signal.
On the 485, focus is always correct in single-shot
photography. An autofocus circuit eliminates the
need to readjust the focus each time the intensity
is changed.
When commercial power is not available, use the
1105 Battery Power Supply. It weighs only 19.5
pounds, and lets you take the high-performance
485 virtually anywhere.
Often chosen as a general-purpose scope for
computer and electronic servicing environments
because of its fast writing speed and wide
bandwidth, the 485 can also be found in specialized and unusual applications. For example, to
maintain a ground based laser/radar acquisition
system , the 485's alternate sweep switching
mode proved an important factor.
1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by
=
20 pF.
50 0 Protection - Internal detection Circuitry provides protection by automatically disconnecting excessive signals of up to
50 V. The 'disconnected' condition is indicated, and has manual reset.
Max Input Voltage
50 Q
Protection disconnect occurs for voltages that exceed approx :
5 V AMS continuous
0.1 watt-second for instantaneous
voltages of 5 V to 50 V.
Signals in excess of 150 V
will damage the instrument.
1 Mfl
Dc coupled
250 V (dc + peak acl.
500 V POp to 1 kHz.
Ac coupled
500 V (dc + peak ac) .
500 V POp to 1 kHz.
S.lectable Input Coupling - Ac: dc: GND (provides zero reference, precharges coupling capacitor, disconnects 50 n load
in 50 n mode).
Delay Line waveform .
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
Probe Power - Connectors provide correct voltages for two
optional P6201 FET Probes .
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Baee A and B - Calibrated sweep range: 1 ns/dlv to 0.5
s/div (1 -2-5 sequencel·
Variable Time Control - TIme Base A provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A and B Accuracy, center 8 dlv
Sweep Aate
+15 0C to
+35 0C
- 15° C to
+55 0 C
1 ns/div to 20 ns/dlv
±3%
±5%
50 ns/dlv to 0.1 sId Iv
±2%
± 4%
0 .2 s/dlv and 0.5 s/dlv
± 3%
±5%
Horizontal Dllplay Modes - A, intensified, alternate, and B
(delayed sweep). A only is displayed for A sweep rates of 1, 2,
and 5 ns/dlv. B ends A for increased intenSity in the dlelayed
mode.
Altamate Display Modes - Allows the B delayed sweep to
appear alternately with the Intensified A sweep. Trace separation control positions B (delayed sweep ",,4 div from the A
sweepl·
400
TEK
SERIES
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
DeilY Time Ringe nsldiv to 0.5 s/div.
0 to t OX delay timeldiv setting of to
Z·A.II Input - Rise time "" I 5 ns. Input R "" 500 0. + 0.2 V
(dc to 20 MHz) decreases intensity. + 2 V (de to 2 MHz) blanks
max intenSity trace.
Probea-
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Input
Terminal
Dillerential Deley Time Mea.urement Accuracy
De lay Time Sett ing
+ 15° C to +350 C
10 ns/ d iv and 20 ns l d lv
± (1 % of measure ment
+ 0.2% of full scale)
50 ns / d iv 10 1 ms l dlv
2 ms/d lv to 0.5 sld lv
± (0.5 % of measu rement
+ 0.1 % of full scale)
± (1 % of meas urement
+ 0.1% of full sca le)
Full scale is 10 times the delay time/div setting.
Jlner -
1 part or less in 20,000 of lOX the time/div sening.
TRIGGERING A and B
A Trigger Mode. - Normal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering signal and for signals below 20 Hz). Single sweep (sweep runs
one time on the first triggering event after the reset selector Is
pressed). Lights Indicate when sweep is triggered and when
single sweep is ready.
A Trigger Holdoll - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms. The control covers
at least the time of one full sweep for faster than 0.2 s/dlv.
B Trigger Mode. - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once,
in each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
Time Ba.e A Ind B Trigger Sensitivity
Coupling
Dc
To 50 MHz
Internal
External
Ac
I
To 350 MHz
0.3 dlv deflecti on 1 , .5 d iv deflect ion
20 mV
100 mV
Signals below 16 Hz are attenuated
Ac
Lf
Re j ect
Ac
Hf
Re j ect Signa ls below 16 Hz and abova 50
kHz are allenuated
Jlner -
Signals below 16 kHz are allenuated
Ambient Temperatur. - Operating: - 15' C to + 55 ' C. Non·
operating: - 35 ' C to + 75 ' C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided .
Aflltude - Operating: to 15,000 ft ; max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by I ' Cl l 000 ft from 5000 to 15,000 ft.
Nonoperating to 50,000 ft.
Level end Slope - Internal, permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. External, level is adjustable through at least ± 0.5 V
for either polarity ; ± 5 V for Ext .;- 10.
A Source. -
Internal. line. external. external .;- 10
B Source. nal .;- 10.
B runs after delay time. Internal. external. exter-
E.ternel tnput. - Rand C approx 1 Mn paralleled by "" 20
pF. Max input voltage ; 500 V (dc + peak ac). 500 V p-p to 1
kHz.
X-Y OPERATION
Full Senlltlvlty X·Y (Ch 1 Vert. Ch 2 Horiz) - 5 mV/dlv to 5
V/dlv. accurate ± 2'10. Y·axis bandwidth Identical to Channell .
X·axls bandwidth Is dc to at least 4 MHz (- 3 dB). Phase differ·
ence between amplifiers is 3 ' or less to 4 MHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 dlv display . each dlv Is 0.8 cm. Horizontal and
vertical centerlines further marked In 0.2 dlv Increments. P31
Phosphor standard ; Pll optional. 21 kV accelerating potential.
Photogr.phlc Writing Speed - At least 3 dlvlns with stan·
dard P31 Phosphor and at least 6 dlvlns with optional Pll
Phosphor using the TEKTRONIX C·31 R Camera and 3000
speed film .
Auto Focul - Automatically maintains beam focus for all in·
tenSity settings .
Gr.llcul. - Internal, nonparallax ; variable edge lighting;
markings for measurement of rise time.
B.lm Flnd.r - Compresses trace to within gratlcule area for
ease In determining the location of an off·screen signal.
50 0
Input
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutas along each of the three
axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in I minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity referenced to MIL·E· I6400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9.5.1, class 4).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g's. 1/2 sine. I I ms
duration. 2 shocks per axis In each direction for a total of 12
shocks.
50 0 or
1 MO
Probe
Type
Allenua·
Input
lion
Impedance
P6056
611
lOX
500 0
1 pF
350 MHz
P6057
611
100X
5000 0
1 pF
350 MHz
IX
100 kO
3 pF
1 MO
1.5 pF
330 MHz
P6201
FET
2 Meter
lOX Head
100X Head
1 MO
1.5 pF
lOX
P6202
2 Meter 100X Head
(optional )
10 Mil
2 pF
285 MHz
lOX
10 MO
13 pF
250 MHz
IX
1 Mil
12 pF
6 MHz
10 Mil
14 pF
200 MHz
P6106
:! Meter
1 MO
Input
Bandwidth'
with
485
P6063B
611
SWI\~~abll
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Two·Frequency. F..t·RI.e Calibrator - Output resistance is
450 II with a rise time (positive slope) into 5 0 of 1 ns or less. I
kHz , duty cycle 49 .8% to 50.2%. Amplitude is 5 V ± 0.5% into
I Mil and 0.5 V ± I % Into 50 n ( ± 0.5%). Optional BNC acces·
sory current loop provides 50 mA ± 1%. Selectable repetition
rates are 1 kHz and 1 MHz ± 0.25%. Specifications apply over
+ 15' C to + 35 ' C range.
Current
Probe
Probe
Type
Callbrellon
Insertion
Impedance
P6022
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
(Select·
ab l e)
0.03 Il@
1 MHz In·
creasing
to
0.2 [I @
120 MHz
A Sweep Output - Open circuit. _ 10 V posltiveilolng saw·
tooth ; Into 50 0. ",, 0.5 V.
A and B Gate Output. - Open circuit. ",,4 V positivailolng
rectangular pulse; into 50 n = 0.5 V.
Power Requirements - Recessed slide switch salects nomi·
nal operating line range. Line voltage range is 90 V to 136 V
and I 80 V to 272 V. 60 W max power consumption at 1 15 V.
Line frequency 48 to 440 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
O. I ns or less at 350 MHz at 1 ns/dlv.
A Trigger View - A spring-loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertICal controls and displays the external signal used for A
sweep triggering. This provides quICk verifICation of the external signal and time comparison between a vertical signal and
the external trigger signal. The deflection factor Is "" 50 mV/dlv
(0.5 V/dlv with external .;- 10 source).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Cabinet
Dlmenllonl
He i ght
Wi dth
Depth
(handle extended )
(handle not extended )
Welghtl (Approx)
130 MHz
'Bandwidths are measured at the upper - 3 dB, and apply only
to the cable length shown . Generally. shorter cable lengths in·
crease bandwidth. longer ones decrease bandwidth.
Current Loop Adapter - The adapter provides an accurate
50 mA squarewave calibrator when connected to the 485 volt·
age calibrator. The rise time is ", 25 ns.
Order 012·034 1·00 .......................................................... 545
Rsekmount
em
In
em
In
16.8
30 .5
6.6
12.0
17.7
48 .3
45 .7
7.0
19.0
18.0
52.3
47 .0
20 .8
18.5
kg
Ib
Net
(w ith accassorles)
10.9
Net
(without accessori es )
9.5
Sh ipp ing
15
Bandwidth'
with
485
500 5X Pad - Provides reverse termination for the calibrator.
Order 01 1-0080·02 .......................................................... $35
Folding Viewing Hoodl x 11 .5 x 19.1 cm).
Folds to 7116 x 4 112 x 7 112 in (1.2
Order 018·0274·00 ........................................................... $15
Folds to 9/1 6 x 6 3/4 x 13 3/4 in (1 .4 x 17.2 x 34.9 cm).
Order 018·0082·00 ........................................................... $15
kg
Ib
11.9
24.5
26.2
54
24
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart storage area In base.
Occupies < I 8 in aisle space. has
Order 200c ....................................................... .............. $285
21
33
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
50 II, 18 Inch BNC cable (012·0076·00). two BNC jack posts
(012·0092·00). two 50 0 terminators (011-0049·01 ) clear filter
(386.01 18.00), four 3 amp fuses (159· 0015-00). accessory
pouch (016.0535·00) or (016.0537.00). Rack models also In·
clude mounting hardware and slide out assemblias.
ORDERING INFORMATION
485 Oscilloscope ................................ $6975
R485 Oscilloscope, 7 in Rack Model $7145
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 04 Eme Modlflcltlon for 485 .................... Add $110
Option 04 Emc Modlclcltlon lor R485 ................. Add $ 120
Option 7e Pll Pholphor ......................................... Add $35
1105 Blnery Power Supply Ord.r 1105 Blnery Power Supply ............................. $ 1240
RIck Adapter -
018·0558·00 ...................................... $275
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
C·30BP Gene,., Purpole Clme,. - InCludes 016-0306-01
mounting adapter.
Order C·30BP ........ ....................................................... $ 1245
C·31 BP High Speed Clme.. - Includes 016·0306·00 mount·
ing adapter.
Ord.r C·31BP ............................................................... $1430
For further Informlilon Ie. Clme,. lectlon.
TektrOniX offers maintenance training cia •••• on Instruments in the 400 Series and multi·media training packages
on Digital Counter and Meter Concepts .nd Basic Oscillo·
scope Maintenance Concepts. For further training informa·
lion. contact your local Sales Office or requelt • copy of
the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the r.turn
card.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Unlv""al Euro 220 V/ leA ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 224 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 AUltranln 240 V11OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North Americln 240 V115A ............... No Cherge
For more information on Instrument options, see your Tek·
tronlx Sales Engineer. Distri butor. or Representative.
229
250 MHz AND 200 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK DUAL
Deflection Factor at BW 475 475A -
2 mV/dlv to 5 V/dlv
5 mV/div to 10 V/div
1-2-5 sequence. accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated. continuously
variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/dlv (475) to at
least 25 V/dlv (475A). In cascade mode sensitivity Is ",400
~V/dlv (475) ; and = 2.5 mV/dlv (475A). Cascaded bandwidth Is
at least 50 MHz (475/475A) when signal out Is terminated
In 50 II.
Dlaplay Mode. - Ch I ; Ch 2 (normal and Inverted). alternate.
chopped - (", I MHz rate). added ; X-Y (Ch I-X. Ch 2-Y).
Cmrr - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at 1 kHz
for common-mode signals of 8 dlv or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for I X
or I OX coded probes are automatically Indicated by two readout lights behind the knob skirts. All lights are off when the
channel Is not displayed. Ground reference display selectable
at probe (when de coupled).
I Mil ± 2%. paralleled by ",,20 pF.
Input Rand C -
Max Input Voltage
Dc coupled
Ac coupled
Delay Line waveform.
2S0 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kH z or less)
500 V (dc + peak ac)
SOO V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
Probe Power - Connectors provide correct voltages for two
optional P6201 FET Probes.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTtON
Tim. Be.e A and B - 0.01 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1 -2-5 sequence). XI a mag extends max sweep rate to I ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time Base provides continuously
variable uncallbrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/dlv. Warning light Indicates uncallbraled setting.
475/475A
1 ns/ div Sweep Rate (475) (475A)
with X 1 0 Sweep Magnifier
Trigger View
Versatile Trigger Selection
Battery Operation (Optional)
Determining deflection factors used to be errorprone and costly. Now, it's a problem of the
pasLreadout lights behind knob skirts automatically indicate the proper probe tip deflection
factors for recommended 1X and 10X probes.
Measuring with respect to ground is important in
many applications. This is controlled at the probe
when dc-coupled by simply pressing the small
ground reference button on recommended
probes.
Weighs ",, 10.3 kg (22.75 Ib)
Both of these Tektronix Portables feature high
performance and light weight for making complex
measurements in the field .
1) The 475A provides a 250 MHz bandwidth at 5
mV/div. It features wider bandwidth than the 475.
plus a more concise spot size and trace for
particular applications.
2) With 200 MHz at 2 mV/div. the 475 features
better sensitivity than the 475A . This
bandwidth/sensitivity combination is useful in a
wide variety of measurements.
Both the 475 and 475A offer 2% (1 ns/div) or 1%
(10 ns/div) timing accuracy. which can be critical
in servicing computers.
Both oscilloscopes are light. compact. and rugged for portability and durability. yet each contains a large. bright 8 x 10 cm CRT. Operation has
been simplified by single-function pushbuttons.
control knob design . layout. and color-coordinated front panels.
You can choose from the 1105 or 1106 Battery
Packs. Both are small and light weight,and provide a ready solution for making accurate measurements in difficult environments such as conducted emc , ground loops , power line
fluctuations or where line power is nonexistent.
Applications for these instruments are widespread . The 475 performs tests and measurements aboard flight test aircraft, in both stationary and portable modes.
All characlerlstlcs are common 10 Ihe 475 and 475A except
where indicated.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
(At all deflection factors from
- 15°C to +40 oC
+40 oC to +5SoC
475
Dc to 200 MHz, 1.8 ns
175 MHz, 2.0 ns
475A
Dc to 250 MHz, 1.4 ns
2S0 MHz, 1.4 ns
'Measured al - 3 dB . bandwidth may be limited to ",20 MHz
by bandwidth limit switch.
Lower - 3 dB point. ac coupling I X probe: 10Hz or less. lOX
probe: I Hz or less.
230
Unmagnified
±1%
±2%
Magnified
±20/0
±3%
Horizontal Dlaplay Modea - A. mixed sweep. A Intensified. B
delayed. B ends A for Increased Intensity In the delayed mode.
Calibrated Mixed Sweep - Displays A sweep for period determined by delay-time position control. then displays B sweep
for remainder of horizontal sweep.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - a 10 XIO delay tlme/dlv settings of 50 ns
to O.S s (minimum delay time is SO ns).
Dillerantial Time Maa.urement Accuracy Delay Time Setting
over one or more
major dial divisions
less than one major
dial division
+ISoC to +3SoC
±1%
±0 .01 major
dial division
Jitter - One part or less In SO.OOO (0.002%) of XI O the A
sweep tlme/dlv setting. One part In 20.000 when operating
from 50 Hz line.
TRtGGERING A AND B
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth- and Rise Time 50 II terminated source).
Time Ba.. A and B Accuracy, full 10 cm
+20 oC to +30 oC -IS oC to +SsoC
A Trigger Modes - Nomnal (sweep runs when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering signal and for signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs
one time on the first triggering event alter the reset selector is
pressed). Ughts indicate when sweep Is triggered and when
single sweep is ready.
400
TEK
SERIES
A Trillller Holdoff - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
8 Trillller Mode. - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once,
In each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time,
Time
a..e II and a Trlllller Sen.ltlvlty and Coupllnll475
To 40
MHz
At 200
MHz
to 40
MHz
At 250
MHz
Internal
0,3 dlv
deflection
1,5 dlv
deflection
0,3 dlv
deflection
2,0 dlv
deflectlon
External
50 mV
250 mV
50 mV
250 mV
External
+ 10
500 mV
Coupling
Dc
475A
2,5 V
500 mV
2,5 V
Ac
Requ i rements Increase below 60 Hz
Ac Lf Reject
Requirements Increase below 50 kHz
Ac Hf Reject
Requirements Increase below 60 Hz
and above 50 kHz
475 Jiller 475A Jiller -
0,2 ns or less at 200 MHz and 1 nsJdiv.
0.2 ns or less at 250 MHz and I ns/div.
Tektronix offers maintenance train ing classes on instru+
ments in the 400 Series and multi-media training packages
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator
Output Voltage
0.3 V
Output Current
30 mA
Frequency
1%
ooC to +40 oC
2%
+ 20° C to + 30°C
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Vertical Signal Output - Ch 2 vertical signal Is de to at least
50 MHz ( - 3 dB), and ",, 10 mV/div terminated Into 50 II, and
",, 20 mV/div terminated in 1 Mil.
ProbesProbe
Type
Attenuation
Input
Impedance
Bandwidth" with
475
475A
Gate Outputl -
P6063B
6ft
1 Mn
105 pF
6
MHz
6
MHz
10 Mn
14 pF
145
MHz
160
MHz
lOX
10 Mn
2 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
100X Head
10 Mn
2 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
Ac Head
10 Mn
4 pF
185
MHz
220
MHz
Positive gates from both time bases (.. 5 V).
Power Requirement. - Oulck-dlange line voltage selector
provides six ranges; 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, 220 V, 230 V, and
240 V, each ± 10%. 48 to 440 Hz, or 100 watts max at 115 V
and 60 Hz. Operation from 12 or 24 V de Is available with
Option 07 ,
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Cabinet
em
In
Rackmount
em
In
He ig ht (w/o pouch)
15.7
6.2
17,7
7.0
Width (with handle)
32.8
13.1
48.3
19.0
Depth
(with panel cover)
46 .0
18.1
45 .7
18.0
Depth
(handle extended)
51 .6
20.3
Weights (approx)
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Net (without panel
cover)
10,3
22,8
13.3
29,4
Lavel and Slope - Internal, permils selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V in external,
through at least ± 20 V In external .;- 10.
Net (with panel cover
and accessories)
11 .5
25.3
Sh ipping
16.7
37 .0
26 .3
58 .0
B Source. external.
Norm, Ch 1, Ch 2, line, external, and external .;S1arts after delay, norm, Ch 1, Ch 2, and
Extemallnput.-RandC ... 1MII paralleled by ,.,20 pF. 250
V (de + peak ac) max input.
X-Y OPERATION
Full-Sen.ltlvity X-Y (Ch 1 Horiz, Ch 2 Vert) - 2 mV/div to 5
V/dlv (475), 5 mV to 10 V/div (475A) accurale ± 3%. Bandwidth
Is de to at least 3 MHz. Phase difference between amplifiers is
1· or less from de to 1 MHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 em display. Horizontal and vertical centeriines
further marked in 0.2 cm increments. P31 Phosphor standard;
Pll optional. 18 kV accelerating potential.
Gratlcule - Internal, nonparallax; variable edge lighting;
markings for measurement of rise time.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in determining the location of an off-screen signal. A preset inlensity level provides a constant brightness,
Two P6106 lOX probes (010-6106-03), blue accessory pouch
(016-0594-00), clear pouch (016-0537-00), blue CRT light filter
(337-1674-00), clear CRT light filter (337-1674-01), BNC male
to ground wire (134-0016-01), two 1 1/2-amp fuses (159-001600), one 3/4-amp fuse (159-0042-00). Rack models also include
mounting hardware and slide out assemblies, do not include
accessory pouches.
ORDERING INFORMATION
475 Oscilloscope ................................
475A Oscilloscope ..............................
R475 Rackmount Oscilloscope ..........
R475A Rackmount Oscilloscope .......
475 OM 44 OM 44 info on page 233 .............
475A OM 44 (order 475A 44) .....................
$3960
$4410
$4130
$4580
$4465
$4915
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's 112 sine, 11 ms
duration, 2 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 12
shocks.
Current
Probe
Calibration
Insertion
Impedance
Bandwidth with
475
475A
0.03 n @
125
160
MHz
1 MHz In- MHz
creasing
to
0.2 n@
120 MHz
'Bandwldths are measured at the upper - 3 dB and apply only
to the cable length shown. Generally shorter cable lengths increase bandwidth, longer ones decrease bandwidth .
P6022
51t
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
(Selectable)
Folding Polarized Viewing Hood Order 016-0180-00 .......................................................... $40
Protective Cover - Waterproof, blue vinyl
Order 016-0554-00 ........................................................... 517
Me.h Filter - Improves contrast and emc filtering
Order 378-0726-01 ........................................................... $45
SCOPE-MOBILE" Cart - Occupies < I 8 in aisle space, has
storage area In base.
Order 200c ..................................................................... 5265
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C·30BP Option 01 General Purpose Compact Camera
Includes 016-0301 -01 mounting adapterlcorrector lens.
Order C-30BP Option 01 ............................................. 51285
For further Information see Camera section.
Battery Packs
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 01 Delete Temperature
Probe on DM« ...................................................... Sub 580
Option 04 Emc Modification .................................. Add 5140
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity referenced to MIL-E-I6400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9 5.1, class 4).
P6202
FET
Probe
2 Meter
1105 Ballery Power Supply ........................................ 51240
Option 78 Pll Phosphor ......................................... Add $35
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three
axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
lOX
Rack Adapter (not for use with OM 44) Order 016-0556-00 ......................................................... 5275
Option 07 Ext Dc Operation .................................. Add 5220
Altitude - Operating: to 15,000 ft ; max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by 1"C/ l000 ft from 5000 to 15,000 ft.
Nonoperating to 50,000 ft.
IX
Switchable
Collapsible Viewing Hood - Binocular Order 016-0566-00 ........................................................... $15
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Z-Axl. Input - Dc coupled, positive-going signal decreases
Intensily; 5 V pop signal causes noticeable modulation at normal Intensity ; dc 10 50 MHz.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15"C to + 55 "C, Nonoperating: - 55 "C to + 75"C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
card.
Approx 1 kHz
A Trillller View - A spring-loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical controls and displays the external signal used for A
sweep triggering. This provides quick verification of the signal
and time comparison between a vertical signal and the trigger
signal. The deflection factor is ,.,50 mV/dlv (0.5 Vldiv with external .;- 10 source).
A Source. 10.
on Digital Counter and Meter Concept. and Basic Oscilloscope Maintenance Concepts. For further training informatoon. contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of
the Tektronix Customer Training Catalog on the return
Option 07 cannot be ordered with OM «.
Modification kits for field conversion of existing 475s or 475As
to Option 04, Option 07, or OM « equipped soopes are available, These are typically more expensive than when the option
is ordered with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales
Engineer, Distributor, or Representative for information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charlie
The 1106 is a convenient, snap·on battery power
supply for TEKTRONIX 455, 464, 465B, 466, 475 or
475A Oscilloscopes when the scope is ordered
with Option 07
Output Power charge.
22 to 26 V de; 100 watt-hours from lull
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Charging Power Source - 90 to 132 V ac, 50 to 400 Hz ; or
180 to 264 V ac, 50 to 400 Hz.
Option A4 North American 240 V115A ............... No Charge
Charging Time -
14 to 16 hours.
Weight- 7.2 kg (16Ib).
Order 1106 Battery Pack ..................... $905
231
100 MHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DUAL
TRIGGERING A AND B
A Trigger Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered),
automatiC (sweep runs in the absence of a triggering signal and
for signals below 30 Hz), Single Sweep (sweep runs one time
on the first triggering event after the reset selector is pressed).
LED lights indicate when sweep IS triggered and when single
sweep is ready.
A Trigger Holdoff - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms.
B Trigger Modes - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs once,
in each of these modes. following the A sweep delay time.
Time Base A and B Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling COUPLING
to 25 MHz
At 100 MHz
Internal
0.3 div
1.5 div
dellection
deflection
Dc
Exlernal
50 mV
150 mV
500 mV
External + 10
1.5 V
Ac
Requirements Increase
below 60 Hz
Ac Lf Reject
Requirements increase
below 50 kHz
Requirements increase
Ac Hf Reject
below 60 Hz and above
50 kHz
Jitter -
0.5 ns or less at 100 MHz and 2 ns/div.
Zero Delay A Trigger View - Electronically switched trigger
view displays the external signal used for A sweep triggering.
This provides quick verification of the signal and time comparison between a vertical signal and the trigger signal which can
be displayed simultaneously. The deflection factor is "" 100
mV/dlv (1 V/div with external 7 10).
465844 Oscilloscope/ DMM Shown A bove Includes DM44 Digilal Mul/imeler.
465B/DM44
100 MHz at 5 mV/ div
2 ns/div Sweep Rate with X10 Sweep Mag
Trigger View
Display Modes - Ch 1: Ch 2 ADD (normal and inverted),
alternate. chopped- ",,500 kHz rate, in any combination electronically switched.
Cmrr - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at 20
MHz for common-mode Signals of 6 div or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X
or 10X coded probes are indicated by two readout lights behind
knob skirts. LEOs are off when channel not displayed . Ground
reference dispiay selectable at probe (when dc coupied).
Input Rand C -
Versatile Trigger Selection
Alternate Sweep
The 4658 offers upgraded performance to match
advancements in technology, while providing improved trace quality, easier maintenance, and
greater operator flexibility.
Improved trace selection versatility allows you to
choose channel 1 and/or channel 2, sum or
difference, and A trigger view in any combination.
In addition, the 4658 has all the features of the
original 465: 5 mV/div vertical trace, delayed
sweep, the differential time/OMM option, and a
sharp, bright 8 x 10 cm CRT.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical channels)
Bandwidth" and Ril e Time - (at all deflection factors from
50 II terminated source)
-15°C to +40 0 C
+40 0 C to +55 0 C
Do to 100 MHz, 3.5 ns
85 MHz, 4.1 ns
-Measured at - 3 dB. Bandwidth may be limited to = 20 MHz
by bandwidth limit switch.
Cascaded bandwidth is at least 50 MHz when signal out is
terminated in 50 !I.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1 X probe: 10Hz or less. 10X
probe: 1 Hz or less.
Dellection Factor at BW - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div.
1-2-5 sequence, accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously
variable between steps and to at least 12.5 V/div. LED warning
light Indicates uncalibrated setting . In cascade mode sensitivity
is ~ 1 mV/div.
232
1 M!I ± 2%, paralleled by = 20 pF.
Max Input Voltage Dc coupled
250 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Ac coupled
250 V (dc + peak ac)
500 V (p-p at 1 kHz or less)
Delay Line
waveform .
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTiON
Time Bale A - 0.02 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). X1 0
mag extends max sweep rate to 2 ns/div. LED indicates X10
mag.
Time Bale B - 0.02 ~s/div to 50 ms/div (1-2-5 sequence).
X10 mag extends max sweep rate to 2 ns/div. LED indicates
X10 mag.
Variable Time Control - Time Base A provides continuously
variable uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/div. LED warning light indicates uncalibrated
setting.
Time Base A and B Accuracy, lull 10 cm
+20 o C to +30 o C -15°C to +55 0 C
+3%
+2%
Unma nified
Magnified
±4%
±3%
Horizontal Display Modes - A, A intensified, altemate (A intensified and B delayed), B delayed. B ends A for increased
intensity in the delayed mode. ElectroniC switching between intensified and delayed sweep. A sweep and B sweep may be
viewed simultaneously.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - 0.2 to X10 delay time/div settings of 200
ns to 0.5 s.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy Delay Time Setting
+15°C to +35 0 C
over one or more
±1%
ma or dial divisions
less than one major
± 0.01 major
dial division
dial divisions
Jitter - 1 part or less in 50,000 (0.002%) of 10X the A sweep
time/div setting. 1 part in 20,000 when operating from 50 Hz
line.
Level and Slope - Internal . permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V in external.
through at least ± 20 V in external 7 10.
A Sources 7 10.
Norm, Ch 1, Ch 2, line, external , and external
B Sources nal.
Starts after delay. norm. Ch 1. Ch 2. and exter-
External Inputs - Rand C '" 1 Mil paralleled by ", 20 pF. 250
V (de + peak ac) max input.
X-Y OPERATION
Full-sensitivity X-Y (Ch 1 Hori z, Ch 2 Vert) - 5 mV/div to 5
V/div. accurate ± 4%. Bandwidth is dc to at least 4 MHz.
Phase difference between amplifiers is 3· or less from dc to 50
kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 cm dispiay . Horizontal and vertical centerlines
further marked in 0.2 cm increments. P31 phosphor standard :
P11 optional. 18 kV accelerating potential.
Gratleule Internal , nonparallax : variable edge lighting :
markings for measurement of rise time.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in locating an offscreen signal. A preset Intensity level
provides a constant brightness.
Z-A.is Input - Dc coupled . positive-going signal decreases
intensity: 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity : dc to 50 MHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15· C to + 55 · C. Nonoperating: - 62 · C to + 85·C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating : to 15.000 ft: max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by 1· C/1000 ft from 5000 to 15,000 ft .
Nonoperating to 50.000 ft .
Vibration - Operating : 15 minutes along each of the three
axes. 0.06 em (0.025 in) p-p dispiacement (4 g·s at 55 Hz) 1055 - 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating : 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95°/0-97% relative humidity as specified in MIL-T-28800B
(par 3.9.2.2).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g·s 1/2 sine, 11 ms
duration. 3 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 18
shocks.
DMM WITHIN
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK 400
SERIES
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator Output Voltage
0.3 V
Oulpul Curren t
30 mA
Frequency
Approx
1 kHz
1%
OOC to +40 o C
2%
+ 20° C to + 30° C
Vertical Signal Output - Ch 1 vertical signal is de to at least
50 MHz - 3 dB). and ~ 25 mV/dlv terminated Into 50 11. and
~ 50 mV div terminated into 1 Mil.
Gate Outputs - Positive gates Irom both time bases (",5 V).
Power Requirements - Quick-change line vOlta~e selector
j
~~v~~:a~~ ~~8~ ; 41~~OV4411~z~8~2~a~'s2~~xV~t ~5VV:~
60 Hz . Operation Irom 12 or 24 V de is available with Opt 07.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cab inet
Rackmount
Dimensi ons
In
cm
In
cm
17.7
He ight
15.7
6.2
7.0
Width (with hand le)
48 .3
19.0
13.1
32.8
Depth
45 .7
18.1
18.0
(with panel cove r)
46.0
Depth
(handle extended)
51.6
20.3
kg
Weights approx
kg
Ib
Ib
Net (without
13.3
29.4
panel cover)
10.3
22.8
Net (with panel
cover and
accessories)
11 .5
25 .3
Sh ipping
16.7
37 .0
26.3 58 .0
INCLUDED ACCESSORtES
Two P6105 lOX probes (010.6105-03). blue accessory pouch
(016-0535·02). clear pouch (016-0537-00). blue CRT light filter
(337 -1674.00!. clear CRT light filter (337 -167 4-01). a round wire
(134-001 6-01 . two 1 1/2-amp luses (159-00 16-0 ). one 3/4amp luse (159·0042·00). Rack models also include mounting
hardware and slide out assemblies. bu t not pouches.
ORDERING INFORMATION
4658 Oscilloscope .............................. $2995
R4658 Rackmount Oscilloscope ....... $3165
465844 Oscilloscope/ DMM ................ $3500
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 01 , Detete Temperature Probe on
465B44 ...................... ................................................. Sub S80
Option 04, Emc Modification ................................. Add S140
Option 05, TV Sync Separator (Provides triggering on TV r19ld
and TV Itne) ........................................................ ..... Add S260
Option 07, Ext Dc Operation ................................. Add S220
Option 07 cannot be ordered with 465844.
Option 78, Pll Phosphor ................................................ 535
Modilication kits lor lield conversion 01 eXisti n~ 465Bs . to Option 04 . Option 07 . or 465B44 scopes are avai able. These are
thpicall Y more expensive than when the option is ordered with
t e instrument. Contact fc0ur Tektronix Sales Engineer. Distributor. or Representative or information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTtONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V 116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 VI I OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V l iSA ............... No Charge
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probes Probe
Type
P60638
6 ft
Attenuation
IX
Input
Impedance
1 M!l
105 pF
Bandwidth'
6
MHz
OM 44 DIFFERENTIAL-TlME/ DMM OPTION
1% timing measurements were never this easy!
With the OM 44 Option , available on five
TEKTRONIX 400 Series Portables, time intervals
can be read directly from the 3 1/2 digit LED
Screen. Simply use the Delay Time control and
the Ll time dial to position intensified spots at the
beginning and end of the interval you Wish to
measure . Next, switch to delayed sweep and use
the Ll time dial to superimpose the end of the
interval on the beginning. Then read its differential time or frequency from the 3 1/2 digit LED
panel. It's that simple. Time intervals are accurate
to 1% and the frequency of periodic waveforms
can be read out with 2% accuracy by simply
pushing the 1lTime button.
Compare the OM 44 sequence with the measurement technique you may now be using. Calculating the interval from the CRT may take 10 times
as long.
Voltage, resistance , and temperature measure·
ments are also much easier with a OM 44equipped 400 Series Oscilloscope. The OM 44
measures dc voltage with 0.1% accuracy, resistance with 0.3% accuracy, and temperature from
- 55°C to 150°C. Previously, you would have
needed a separate DMM and digital thermometer
in addition to your oscilloscope. Now, these fea·
tures are combined in one small, inexpensive, integral package.
The OM 44 is available as a factory installed op'
tion on the 464, 4658, 466, 475 and 475A
Portables. It adds Delta Delayed Sweep and inde·
pendent DMM capabilities to these 400 Series
Scopes. First, consider your bandwidth, sensitivity, storage , and price requirements . Then specify
the OM 44 Option for simple and accurate digital
measurements.
OM 44 CHARACTERISTICS
Timing Measurements
Dillerential Time Delay Accuracy + 15 0 C to +35 OC
used wi th 464 , 465B ,
466 , 475 , and 475A
w ith in 1% of
readi ng
± 1 c o unt
llTl me Accu racy +15 0 C to +35 OC
used wi th 464 , 4658 ,
466 , 475, and 47SA
w ith in 2% 0 1
read ing
± 1 c ount
P6202
FET
Probe
2 Meter
lOX
100X Head
Ac Head
Current
Probe
P6022
Sit
Calibrati on
1 mA/ mV
10 mA / mV
(Selectable)
10
14
10
2
10
2
10
4
MQ
pF
M!l
pF
M!l
pF
M!l
pF
tnsertion
Impedance
0.03 Q @ 1 MHz
Increasing to
0.2 !l @ 120 MHz
90
MHz
100
MHz
100
MHz
100
MHz
85
MHz
' Bandwldths are measured at the upper - 3 dB and apply only
to the cable length shown. generally. shorter cable lengths in·
crease bandwidth .
- 15° C
to
+55 0 C
used with 464 . used w i th 475
and 475A
4658 , and 466
w ith i n 3%
with in 3.5%
of reading
01 reading
± 1 count
± 1 count
DC Voltage
Switchable
lOX
to
-15° C
+ 55 OC
used with 464 . used w i th 475
and 475A
465B , and 466
w ith in 1.5%
with in 2.5%
of reading
0 1 reading
± 1 count
± 1 count
Ranges -
0-200 mV . 0-2 V. 0·20 V. 0-200
v. 0-1.2 kV .
Resolution - 100 "V .
Accuracy - Within 0.1% of readint ± 1 count.
Input Resistance - 10 Mil lor all ranges. Removal of an inter·
nal strap increases resistance to '" 1000 Mil on 200 mV and
2V ranges.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 60 dB at 50 Hz and
60 Hz.
Maximum Safe Input Voltage - ± 1200 V de + peak ac
between + and common Inputs or between + and chassis.
± 500 V (dc + peak ac) common Hoating Voltage between
common and chassis.
Resiltance
Ranges - 0-200 Il. 0-2 kD. 0-20 kD. 0-200 kll. 0-2 Mil and 020 Mil.
Relolution - 0.1 D.
Accuracy Range
200 !l
2 kll, 20 k!l, 200 kll , 2 M!l
20 MQ
Recycle Rate -
Accuracy
with in 0.25% ± 1 count
+ probe resistance
within 0.25% ± 1 count
within 0.3% ±1 count
"",3.3 measurements/s.
Response Time 200 Il through
200 k!l ranges
2 M!l ranges
20 M!l ranges
Mulmum Safe Input Voltage common inputs.
within 1 5
with l n 5 5
120 V RMS between
+
and
Temperature Using P6430 Probe
Range -
- SS · C to + IS0 · C.
Accuracy Accuracy
probe
cali brated
to OM 44
DM 44
Temp
P6430
Tip Temp
+ 15 0 C to
+ 35 OC
- 55° C to
+150 o C
±2° C
-55° C to
+ 125 OC
+12S oC to
+150 o C
±3°C
-15° C to
+ 55OC
± 4oC
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair. Test Leads (003-0120-00). one P6430 Temperature
Probe (010-6430-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
4658 OM 44 (Order 4658 44) .............
475 OM 44 Oscilloscope/ DMM ...........
475A OM 44 (Order 475A 44) .............
466 OM 44 Oscilloscope/DMM ...........
464 OM 44 Oscilloscope/DMM ...........
$3500
$4465
$4915
$6890
$5670
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 01 Delete Temperature Probe ..................... Sub 580
Modilication kits lor lield conversion of existing 4645. 465s.
4665. 4755. and 475As to OM 44-equipped scopes are avail·
able. These are typically more expensive than when the option
is ordered with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales
Engineer, Distributor. or Representative for inlormation.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V 116A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V113A ................. ................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ l0A ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V l i SA ............... No Charge
For Information on hoods, covers, lilters, carts, battery
pecks, rack adapter, and cameras, see previous page.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 100 dB at dc. 80
dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Recycle Rate - ", 3.3 measurements/s.
Response Time -
Within 0.5 s.
... .....
100 MHz DUAL TRACE
STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK TRI-SERVICE
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Bandwidth and Rise Time - Dc to at least 100 MHz (- 3 dB)
and rise time 3.5 ns or less for de coupiing and - IS· C to
+ SS·C. For ac coupling the lower 3 dB point Is 10Hz or less
with a 1X probe and 1 Hz or less with a lOX probe.
Bandwidth Limit Mode -
Bandwidth limited to 20 MHz.
Dellectlon Factor - S mV/div to S V/div in 10 steps (1-2-S
sequence). Dc accuracy: ± 2% O·C to + 40·C ; ± 3%, - IS·C
to O· C. + 40·C to + SS·C. Uncalibrated, continuously variable
between settings, and to at least 12.SVIdlv.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - 2S:1 to 10 MHz; 10:1
from 10 to 50 MHz, 6 em sinewave, (ADD Mode with Ch 2
Inverted.)
Dllplay Mode. - Ch 1, Ch 2 (normal or inverted). alternate,
chopped (2S0 kHz rate), added, X-Y o
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ± 2%, "" 20 pF.
M.. Input Voltage - Dc or ac coupled: ± 2S0
ac at 50 kHz. derated above SO kHz.
v de
+ peak
Cncaded Operation - (Ch 2 Out Into Ch 1), BandWidth, de
to at least 40 MHz . Sensitivity. = 1 mV/div when terminated in
50 II at Ch 1 input with both Ch 1 and Ch 2 V/dlv switches set
to S mV/div.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e A - 0.5 s/div to O.OS "s/div in 22 steps (1-2-S
sequence). Xl0 mag extends lastest sweep rate to S ns/div.
Time B..e B - SO ms/div to O.OS "s/div in 19 steps (1-2-S
sequence). Xl0 mag extends fastest sweep rate to S ns/div.
AccuracyUnmagni fied
+20 0 C to +30 oC
±2%
-ISoC to +SsoC
±3%
Mixed Sweep Accuracy -
465M (AN/USM)425 (v) 1
Fully Provisioned through the Federal
Supply System
Meets MIL-T -28800, Type II, Class 4,
Style C for the Environmental
Conditions Listed
100 MHz at 5 mV /div, Dual Trace,
Delayed Sweep
Accepted and Specified by All
Branches of the Military and by
Several Civil Agencies
If you 're a contractor involved in designing and
specifying systems for the government, here's a
100 MHz oscilloscope that should top your recommended support equipment list-the
TEKTRONIX 465M Portable Oscilloscope.
The TEKTRONIX 465M is the AN/USM-425 (v) 1
tri-service standard 100 MHz portable oscilloscope . The instrument is accepted, fully
provisioned, and supported throughout the Federal Supply System. Because the MIL manuals and
support documentation are already complete,
your required paper work is greatly reduced and
it's much simpler for the government to accept
your recommendations .
You can now order the 465M directly from your
Tektronix Sales Engineer with the AN/USM 425 (v)
1 nomenclature by simply specifying option 49.
This assures the fastest possible delivery of your
ANI USM 425 (v) 1.
Horizontal Display Modes by A. and mixed.
A portion- ± 4%.
B portion- ± 2%.
A, A intensified by B, B delayed
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Calibrated Delay Time - Continuous Irom 0.1 "" to at least S
s after the start of the delaying A sweep.
Dlflerential Time Measurement Accuracy ments of two or more major dial divisions:
+ IS·C to + 3S · C, 1% + 0.1% 01 lull scale
O· C to + SS · C, additional 1% allowed.
for measure-
Jitter - 1 part or less in 20,000 (O.OOS%) of XI 0 the A TIMEIDIV switch setting.
TRIGGERING A AND B
A Trigger Modes - Normal Sweep is triggered by an internal
vertical amplifier signal, external signal, or internal power line
signal. A bright baseline is provided only in presence of trigger
signal. Automatic: A bright baseline is displayed in the absence
of input signals. Triggering is the same as normal-mode above
40 Hz. Single (main time base only): The sweep occurs once
with the same triggering as normal. The capability to re-arm the
sweep and illuminate the reset lamp is provided. The sweep
activates when the next trigger is applied lor rearming.
A Trigger Holdolf - Increases A sweep holdoff time to at
least XI 0 fhe TlME/DIV settings, except at 0.2 sand O.S S.
Triggering Sensitivity and Coupling From 30 Hz
to 2S MHz
Coupling
Dc
234
At 100 M Hz
Internal
0.3 div
1.0 div
External
SO mV
ISO mV
Ac
Attenuates signals below
30 Hz
Ac Lf Reject
Attenuates signals below
15 kHz
Ac HI Reject
Attenuates signals below
50 kHz
TEK
400
SERIES
Jitter - 0.5 ns or less at 100 MHz and 5 nsldlv. - 15' C to
+ 55 · C.
Trigger View - View external and Internal trigger signals; Ext
1X. 100 mV/dlv. Ext + 1O. 1 V/dlv.
Level ond Slope - Internal . permits triggering at any point on
the positive or negative slopes of the displayed waveform . Extemal. permits continuously variable triggering on any level between + 1.0 V and - 1.0 V on either slope of the trigger signal.
A Sourcel - Ch 1. Ch 2. NORM (all display modes triggered
by the combined waveforms from Ch 1 and 2). LINE. EXT. EXT
+ 10.
B Source. - B starts after delay time; Ch 1. Ch 2. NORM.
EXT. EXT + 10.
X-Y OPERATION
Sen.ltlvlty - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div in 10 steps (1 -2-5 sequence)
through the vertical system. Continuously variable between
steps and to at least 12.5 V/div.
X Axl. Bandwidth Y Axl. Bandwidth X-Y Pha.e -
Dc to at least 4 MHz.
Dc to 100 MHz.
< 3 ' from de to 50 kHz.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
A Gote -
~ 5 .0
B Gate -
.. 5.0 V positive.
V positlve-golng pulse.
DtSPLAY
CRT - 5 in. rectangular tube; 8 x 10 em display; P31
Phosphor.
Grotlcule - Internal. non-parallax; illuminated. 8 x 10 cm
markings with horizontal and vertical centerlines further
marked in 0.2 em increments. 10% and 90% markings for rise
time measurements.
Grotlcule illumination - Provides variable illumination from 0
to greater than optimum illumination.
Beam Finder - Umits the display to within the gratcule area
and provides a visible display w hen pushed.
Z-Axis Input - A female BNC connector is provided to permit
Intensty modulation over the de to 15 MHz range. At optimum
intensity. intensity modulation is accomplished with a Z axis
input of from - 5 V (to Intensify) to + 5 V (to blank). Continuous
operation maximum Input shall be ± 50 V (de + peak ac).
OTHER CHARACTERfSTICS
Collbrator Output Voltage + 55 · C. Frequency ",, 1 kHz.
1.0 V ± 1.0% to - 15°C to
Channel 2 Signal Output - Through main module Ch 2 OUT
connector. Output voltage: ",, 50 mV/dlv Into 1 MO. ..25
mV/d,v into 50 II. Output resistance: .. 50 O. Bandwidth : de to
at least 40 MHz Into 50 II.
Power Requirements - 100 V to 132 V RMS. 200 V to 264 V
RMS. 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Maximum power consumption 60
watts at 115 V. 60 Hz.
Dlmenllonl
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
cm
In
He i ght (with feet)
17.91
7.05
Width (with handle)
34 .67
13.65
Width (without handle)
31 .75
12.50
Depth (includ ing panel cover)
54.58
24.45
Depth (handle extended)
61.10
24 .10
We ight (approx)
kg
lb.
Net (without cover and
accessori es)
10.9
24 .0
Net (with panel cover. modules.
and accessori es)
12.2
27.0
Shipping
15.5
34 .2
For further information see camera section.
Tranlportatlon - Meets the limits of National Safe Transit
Committee test procedure 1A with a 30 in drop.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One accessory and cover assembly (200-2055-01). one 1X
probe (0 10-6101-00). two l OX probes (010-6104-00). three pincer tips (013-0107-03). two UHF male to BNC female adapters
(103-0015-00). two BNC male to UHF female adapters (1030032-00). one T connector (103-0030-00). one BNC male to
dual binding post adapter (103-0035-00). three probe tip adapters (103-0051 -01). three banana tips (134-0013-00). three 6 in.
leads with spring clips (175-0124-01). three hooked probe tips
(206-0105-00). one blue filter (337-2122-00). one clear filter
(337-2122-01). three miniature alligator clips (344-0046-00).
one power cord (161 -0118-00).
465M Portable Oscilloscope ______ ........ $3500
Emc - Complies with the following limits as specified in MILT-288ooB. CEOI (1 0 kHz to 20 kHz only). CE03. CSOI . CS02.
CS06. REOI (relaxed 10 dB at fundamental. third harmonic.
and fifth harmonic of the power source frequency) RE02 (limited to 7 GHz). RSOI and RS03 (limited to 1 GHz).
Option 49 AN/USM 425 (v)1 _...._.. _...................... No Charge
Attitude - Operating: to 15.000 feet. Max operating temperature decreased I · C/l .0oo ft above 5.000 ft. Nonoperating : to
50.000 ft.
Tek trOniX offers maintenance training classes on instru m ents In the 400 Series and multi-media training packages
on Digital Counter and Meter Conce pts and Basic Oscilloscope Maintenance Conce pt s. For further training information. contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of
the Tektronix Cus tomer Training Catalog on the return
ca rd,
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to + 55·C. Nonoperating: - 62'C to + 85·C.
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30 BP Option 01 General Purpose Cemera - Includes
016-0301 -00 mounting adapter/corrector lens.
Order C-30BP Option 01 Camera ............................... $1285
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V/1 6A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V/ 13A .................................... No Charge
1105 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
Option A3 Australian 240 V/1 OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A ............... No Charge
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Vibration - Operating: along each of the three major axes:
a. cycling 5 to 25 to 5 Hz for 10 min at 0.025 in pop;
b. cycling 25 to 55 to 25 Hz for 5 min at 0.020 in pop;
c. dwelled at 55 Hz for 10 min at 0.020 in pop.
Total vibration time 75 min.
Folding Polarlzad Viewing Hood
Order 016-0180-00 .......................................................... $40
Humidity - Five cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-E16400F (operating and nonoperating).
Muh Filter - Improves contrast and erne filtering.
Order 378-0726-0 1 ........................................................... $45
Shock - Operating: 30 g·s. 112 sine. 11 ms duration. 3 shocks
each direction per axis for a total of 18 shocks.
SCOPE-MOBILE" Cart - Occupies < 18 in of aisle space.
Order 200C ................. .................................................... $265
Probe - P6022 Current Probe. 9 ft cable with termination.
Order 015-0135-01 ............................................... ......... $325
Rack Adapter (Cradle Mount) Kit - Rack height 7 In. depth
18.75 in . width 19 in Order 040-0825-01 .•.•.•................. $320
The 1105 Is a rugged . portable power supply suitable for
powering virtually any portable osciloscope in the field . The
1105 IS not recommended for the T912.
Frequency -
Squarewave. 60 Hz ± 10%.
Amplitude - ~ 108 V peak, operating from 24 V dc external
or 22 V internal charge. = 137.5 V peak . operating from 28 V
dc external or 30 V internal charge.
Amplitude (Option 01 ) - '" 216 V peak . from 24 V dc external or 22 V internal charge. ", 275 V peak. operating from 30 V
dc external or 28 V Internal charge.
Charging Power Source - 100 to 132 V ac. 48 to 440 Hz (or
internal connections expand range). Option 01 - 200 to 264 V
ac. 48 to 440 Hz (or Internal connections expand range).
Battery Operating Time -
= 100 W hrs.
Recommended Max Output Current Weight -
0.9 A.
8.8 kg (19.5 Ib).
Order 1105 Battery Power Supply.... $1240
Option 0 1, 230 V Operation ............................•... No Charge
235
SONY@
/ TEKTRONIX@~t:~~RACE OSCILLOSCOPE
Trigger Source. - Internal Ch 1. internal Ch 2. internal composite (uses a composite of Ch 1 and Ch 2 signals to produce
trigger). external . external ... 10. and line. The B sweep can
also be started automatically at the end of the time base A
delay.
X-V OPERATION
Input - X-axis input is via the external horizontal input connection. Both Ch 1 and Ch 2 provide vertical Inputs. Using
chopped mode . two simultaneous X- Y displays can be
obtained.
X-Axis Dellectlon Factor. - Variable from
2 V/div . Dc to at least 500 kHz .
Input Impedance -
~
20 mV/div to
~
1 Mil paralleled by 24 pF.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div (O.S cm/div) display. P31 Phosphor. 12 kV
accelerating potential.
~
Gratlcule - Internal (non-parallax) non-illuminated. Vertical
and horizontal centerlines marked in 5 minor div per major O.S
cm.
Z-Axi. Input - + 5 V signal causes noticeable modulation at
normal intenSity. Useful bandwidth dc to SOO kHz.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating : - 15' C to + 55 ' C. Nonoperating : - 40 ' C to + 75 ' C.
Altitude - Operating : to 15.000 ft max. decrease max temperature by 1 ' C/1000 ft from 5000 ft to 15.000 ft . Nonoperating: to 50.000 ft max .
335
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e A - 0.2 ~s/div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequence). Xl0
magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
35 MHz at 10 mV / div
Small Size, Weighs = 4.7 kg, (10.5 Ib)
1 mV I div Vertical Sensitivity at 25 MHz
Delay Lines Input
Time Bile B - 0.2 ~s/div to 50 ms/div (1 -2-5 sequence). Xl0
magnifier extends fastest sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
Verlable Time Control - Time Base A provides uncallbrated.
continuously variable sweep rates between steps and to at
least 1.25 s/dlv.
TIme Base A and B Ac curacy, cente r 8 d lv -
+20° C to +30° C
Rugged Construction
Unmagnified
Magn i fied
-15° C to
±3%
±5%
+55° C
±4%
±S%
The portability of the 335 is a big plus in many
digital and analog trouble-shooting applications.
And it weighs only 10.5 pounds.
Horizontal Display Mode. - A only. A intensified by B. B
delayed by A. B triggerable after A.
1 mV/div (at 25 MHz) vertical sensitivity insures
that low level signals from magnetic recording
heads, optical read heads. or industrial control
transducers can be accurately and easily measured. Delay line allows viewing the leading edge
of the triggering signal. By using a composite of
Channels 1 and 2 as a trigger source, stable
displays of non-time-related signals can be
obtained.
Delay Time Range - Continuously variable from 1
least 5 s after the start of the delaying (A) sweep.
Differential Time Measure ment Accuracy Delay Time Settings
between 1.0 and 9.0
one or more
major dial divisions
±2%
less than one
major dial divis i ons
±0.02%
Operation from either ac (90 to 132 V, or 180 to
264 V, 48 to 440 Hz) or dc (+ 11 to + 14 V or +22
to + 28 V) assures that power can be obtained at
nearly any location.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
Bandwidth + 20 · C to +30 · C
1 mV to 5 mV Idiv dc to 25 MHz
10 mV to 5 Vl div dc to 35 MHz
10 Vldiv
dc to 25 MHz
-IS·C to +SS·C
dc to 20 MHz
dc to 30 MHz
dc to 20 MHz
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
~s
to at
Jitter - 1 part or less in 20.000 (0.005%) of Xl0 the A time/div
setting.
TRIGGERING A AND B
A Trigger Mode. - Normal (sweep nuns when triggered).
Automatic (sweep free-runs in absence of a triggering signal
and for signals below 20 Hz). Single sweep (sweep nuns once
on the first trigger signal after the reset button is pushed).
Variable Trigger Holdoff - For the A sweep an adjustable
holdoff control permits a stable display of complex waveforms.
Sweep holdoff time can be increased at least Xl0.
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating : 15 minutes along
each of the three major axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in I-minute cycles.
Humidity -
5 cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-E-I6400 F.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g·s. 1/2 sine, 11 ms
duration each direction along each major axis. Total of 12
shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.5 V ( ± 1%) ~ 1 kHz from 20'C to
30 ' C.
Power Source - External ac source. 90 V to 132 V or 180 V
to 264 V with a line frequency of 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Max power
dissipation 24 W at 115 V. External de source: + 11 V to + 14
Vor + 22 V to + 28 V with a max current drain of 2 A at + 12 V
or 1.0 A at + 24V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensi ons
In
cm
4.4
Height
11.2
9.3
Width (with handle)
23.S
Depth (handle not extended)
34.7
13.S
17.S
Depth (handle extended)
44.8
kg
We ight. ( approx)
4.7
Net (without accessories)
7.S
Shipping
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Ib
10.5
17.0
Two PS149 lOX probes (010-S149-03). carrying case and
pouch (016-0485-00). external de cable assembly (012-040S00). strap assembly (346-0131-00). two I-A fuses (159-00S400). two O.4-A fuses (159-0139-00),two 2-A fuses (159-010700). three 0.2-A fuses (159-0080-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
335 Portable Oscilloscope ....................$2760
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Viewing Hood -
Order 016-0297 -00 .............................S6.S0
B Trigger Modes - B runs after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time). B triggerable after delay time
(runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep nuns once In
each of these modes. following the A sweep delay time.
CRT Filter -
Ught blue. Order378-2016-01 ................. S1 .80
CRT Filter -
Light amber. Order 378-0843-0 1 ............. S1 .80
Dellectlon Factor - 1 mVl div to 10 Vldiv (1-2-5 sequence)
accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated. continuously variable between
steps and to at least 25 Vldiv.
Tri gger Sensitivity and Coupling Coupli ng
To 10 MHz
DI.play Modes - Ch 1. Ch 2 (normal or inverted) alternate,
chopped ( ~ 300 kHz rate) added. X-Y.
Dc
The SONyo/TEKTRONIX· 335 Is manufactured and marketed
in Japan by Sony/Tektronlx Corporation. Tokyo. Japan. Outside of Japan. the 335 Is available from Tektronix. Inc .. its marketing subSidiaries and distributors.
For ac coupling. the lower 3 dB point is 10Hz or less with a 1X
probe and 1 Hz or less with a lOX probe.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ± 2%. paralleled by "" 24 pF.
Max Input Voillge, ac or dc coupled. 300 V (dc + peak ac).
300 V pop ac at 1 kHz or less.
Delay Line waveform.
236
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
Ac
Ac Hf Re j
Ac Lf Rej
At 35 MHz
1.5 dlv
250 mV
Internal
0.35 div
70 mV
External
2.5 V
700 mV
Ext +10
above requirements Increase below SO Hz
requirements increase above 20 kHz
requirements increase below 40 kHz
CRT Mesh Filter - With frame and holder.
Order 378-0063-00 .............................................................. S27
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30BP General Purpose Camera ................................ $1245
Camera Adapter - mount. C-30B to 335.
Order 016-0327-01 .......................................................... S16S
For further information see Camera section.
SONY@
ITEKTRONIX@
BATTERY POWERED 5 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE/DMM
RESISTANCE
Range. Accuracy -
2 kll. 20 kll. 200 kll. 2000 kll.
Within 0.6% of reading ± 3 count s.
Ra.pon.e Time - < 5 s plus range step time « 1 sl step) .
Max safe Input voltage at DMM input connectors- DeV: 1000
V de + paak ac, between HI and LO inputs or between HI and
chassis,
ACV - 700 V RMS if sinusoidal between HI and LO inputs or
between HI and chassis, + 1000 V de + paak ac between HI
and LO Inputs or between HI and chassis, + 500 V (de component) between LO and chassis, kll function settling ' 100 V (de
+ paak ac) between HI and LO inputs.
All Ranga. - 500 V (de + paak ac) between LO and chassis
(LO Floating Voltage).
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Oparating : - 15' C to + 55 ' C (Os.
ciiloseepa), O' C to + 55 ' C (DMM). Nonoperating' - 25 ' C to
+ 75 ' C.
Altitude - Oparating : to 30,000 It max, decrease max tem.
parature by I ' C/l000 It from 5,000 It to 30,000 11. Nonoperat.
ing: 50.000 It max.
Vibration - t 5 min along each of the three major axes, 0,025
in (0.06 em) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz
in 1 min cycles.
Humidity - Nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hrs) of MI L·E·
16400G. Omit freezing and vibration and allow a post·test dry·
ing pariod at + 25 ' C. ± 5' C and 20% to 80% relative humidity .
305
5 MHz at 5 mV/div
Full X-V
Dual-Trace
Weighs "" 1 0.6 Ib
The 305 Oscilloscope/DMM is the ideal oscillo·
scope for those who demand portability and
mult i· funct ion versati lity in their test
instrumentation.
The SONY"'/TEKTRONIX'" 305 combines a 5 MHz
oscilloscope with an integral auto ranging DMM
and a built·in rechargeable battery pack. Take the
305 instead of multiple instruments when you
climb the ladder to maintain your in· plant industri·
al controls. Or leave the extension cord at your
bench when you go on location to service medi·
cal instrumentation.
The 305 features a dual· trace 5 MHz oscilloscope
with a large 8 x 10 div (0.6 cm/div) CRT display
and an autoranging DMM with dc and ac volts,
and resistance measurement functions-all in a
10.61b (4.8 kg) , 4.4 x 9.3 x 14.6 inch (11 .2 x 23.6 x
37.1 cm) package. The front panel TIL marker
presets the trigger generator for optimum level
control on TIL signals.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth - De to at least 5 MHz. For ac coupling, the lower
3 dB point is ~ 10 Hz.
De'leetlon Factor - 5 mV/div to 10 V/div (1 .2-5 sequence)
accurate ± 3% 'rom O' C to + 40' C. ± 4% through remainder
of operating range. Uncallbrated, continuously variable between steps and to at least 25 VIdlv.
DI.play Mode. - Ch 1, Ch 2, Chopped. Alternate, Added,
Invert Ch 2 and X· Y. Bandwidth in Add mode is de to at least
4.5 MHz.
Input R • C - 1 Mil ± 2%, paralleled by ",,47 pF.
Max Input Voltage - ac or de coupled, 250 V (de + paak ac).
or 250 V pop at < 1 kHz.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Tlma B..e - 500 mS/div to 1 ~s/div (1.2-5 sequence). Xl 0
mag extends sweep rate to 0.1 ~S/div .
Variable Time Control - Uncalibrated. continuously variable
between steps and to at least 1.25 s/div.
Time Ba.e Accuracy. Center 8 divooC to +40 oC
-lS oC to +S50C
±3%
±5%
±4%
±6%
(Excludes first 10 dlv and all sweep past 90 div in Xl0 mag.)
TRIGGER
Mode. - Normal and Auto (p-p).
TTL Triggering - TTL position of trigger level control presets
for optimum triggering from TTL levels, In 50 mV. 0.1 V and 0.2
V/div or external trigger signals.
Trigger Source. - Internal Ch 1, internal Ch 2. external. TTL
Threshold voltage, int (with lOX probe) 1.4 V within ± 0.3 V.
Ext (with lOX prObe) 1.4 V within ± 0.2 V.
Trigger Sen.ltivity In NORMAL·Mode
Cou lin
To 0.5 MHz
At 5 MHz
0.75 d iv
50 mV
Above requ irements
i ncrease be l ow 60 Hz
Ac
p.p Auto Operation Sensitivity
Coupling
Mode
500 Hz
to 0.5 MHz
0.5 MHz
to 5 MHz
Dc , Ac
Internal
External
0.5 d iv
35 mV
1.0 div
70 mV
External Trigger - Max Input Voltage: 250 V (dc + paak ac)
at 1 kHz or less (same as vertical). Input Rand C, = 1 Mil
paralleled by ",47 pF.
X·Y OPERATION
Input - X·axis input is via the Ch 1 connector; Y·axis input is
via the Ch 2 connector.
X· Y Characteristics - Same as stated for vertical deflection,
except deflection factor accuracy is ± 4% from O' C to + 40' C
over the center 8 div.
X·Aal. Bandwidth - De to 150 kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div (0.632 em/div) display. P31 Phosphor. 2 kV
accelerating potential.
Gratlcule - Internal, non·illuminated.
DMM
DC VOLTAGE
Ranges - 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 1000 V (autoranging).
Accuracy - Within 0.1% of reading. ± 2 counts.
Common·Mode Rejection - > 100 dB at de, 80 dB at 60 Hz
with 1 kll imbalance.
Normsl·Mode Rejection - > 30 dB at 60 Hz Increasing 20 dB
par decade to 2 kHz.
Re.pon.e - < 1 S plus range step time « 1 sl step).
Input R - 10 Mil ± 2%.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating : 30 g's. 1/2 sine, 11 ms
duration. Total of 12 shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.3 V accurate ± 1% from 20 ' C to
30 ' C ± 2% from - 15' C to + 55 ' C.
Power Sourca. - External ac source, 90 V to 132 V or 180 V
to 250 V with a line frequency of 48 Hz to 440 Hz, Max power
dissipation of t7 W. External de source + 9 V to + 32 V.
Charge Time -
At least 16 hours for full charge.
Operating Time - Internal NiCd batteries provide ,.., 1.6 hours
of scope and DMM operation, 10 hours of DMM alone oper·
ation, or 2 hours of seepa alone operation at maximum trace
intenSity and 20' C to 25 ' C operating temparature.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In
Dlmen.lons
em
4.4
He i ght
11.2
9.3
23 ,6
Width (with handle)
Depth (handle
14.6
not extended)
37 .1
Depth (handle
18,0
45 ,8
extended
Weight. (approx .)
Net (without
accessories)
Sh ipping
kg
4.8
7.8
Ib
10.6
17,1
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two lOX prObes (010.6149-03), one DMM probe package
(012-0732-00), one carrying case (016-0401-00) one carrying
case cover (200.2260-00). one carrying strap assembly (3460131-00), one clear CRT filter (331 .0394-01), one blue CRT
filter (378-2016-01), one external de cable assembly (012-040600).
ORDERING INFORMATION
305 DMM/Oscilloscope ...................... $2120
The SONyolTEKTRONIXo 305 DMM/Oscilioseepa Is manufac·
tured and marketed in Japan by SonylTektronix Corporation ,
Tokyo, Japan. Outside of Japan the 305 is available from Tektronix, Inc., its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Viewing hood (016-0297-00) ......... ' .............................. $6,50
BNC to binding pOlt adapter (103-0033-00) ............. , $4.75
AC VOLTAGE
Range. Accuracy 500 Hz.
2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 700 V, (autoranging).
Within 0.5% of reading, ± 10 counts, 40 Hz to
Re.ponse Time Input Impedance -
< 55 plus range step time «1 s/step).
10 Mil paralled by '" 70 pF.
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30BP General Purpo.e Came,. .............................. $1245
Camera Adapter Mount C-30B to 305
Order 016-0327-01 ............................................. ........... $165
For further Information .ee Camera section.
OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 5MHz
200 SERIES
MINISCOPES
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operaling ; (ballery only), - 15' C to
+ 55 ' C. Charging or operating from ac line; O' C to + 40' C.
Nonoperating; - 40' C to + 60' C.
Altitude - Operating ; 25,000 ft , decrease max temperature
by 1 ' Cl l 000 ft above 15,000 ft . Nonoperating ; 50,000 ft .
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating ; 15 minutes along
each of the 3 major axes, 0,06 cm (0.025 in) p-p displacement
(4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10Hz in one minute cycles. Held for
3 min at 55 Hz.
Humidity -
5 days at + 50' C, 95% humidity.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating; 100 g's, 112 sine, 2 ms
duration each direction along each major axis. Total of 1
shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
221
5 MHz. 5 mV /div to 100 V/div
0.1 j.ls / div Sweep Rate with
X 10 Sweep Magnifier
Internal Battery Pack
The 221 is used in a wide assortment of service
applications. For example, in data transmission
systems , the 221 is preferred for maintenance
and testing of modems because of its ability to
see higher frequency noise. It can even help in
building roads by spot checking motors in a road
grader's closed loop servo system that controls
blade angle, depth of cut and machine direction.
The 221 Miniscope weighs just 3.5 pounds and
easily fits into a tool box or brief case; it measures
only 3 x 5.2 x 9 inches. Yet it has the capability
needed for on-site service of much of today's
complex equipment. This versatile miniscope has
a 5 MHz bandwidth. 5 mV/div sensitivity, and 0.1
j.ls /div sweep rate (using Xl0 magnifier)
packaged in an impact-resistant case.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Dimensions
Bandwidth - Dc to 5 MHz (- 3 dB point) at all calibrated
deflection factors . Lower - 3 dB point ac coupled is = 2 Hz.
Deflection Factor - 5 mVldiv to 100 Vldiv, accurate ± 3%
from O' C to + 40 ' C and ± 5% from - 15' C to O' C and
+ 40 ' C to + 55 ' C. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps to at least 300 Vldiv.
Input Rand C - '" 1 Mil paralleled by ", 29 pF via attached
signal acquisition probe.
Max Input Voltage MHz or less.
600 V (dc + peak ac), 600 V p-p ac , 5
The 1 Mfl low-capacitance probe minimizes circuit loading. And because it's attached , it's always there when you need it. Vertical deflection
factors extend from 5 mV/div, allowing on-screen
measurement of signals up to 600 V dc + peak
ac. The 1 j.ls/div to 200 ms/div time base is
enhanced by a Xl0 magnifier that extends the
fastest range to 0.1 j.ls/div. A variable control will
slow the sweep to about 0.5 s/div.
A single rotary control on the 221 is used for all
trigger level and slope functions . Controls are
side mounted and recessed for protection, yet
are easily accessible.
In applications where it is necessary to "float" the
oscilloscope to make your measurements, 200
Series Miniscopes can be elevated to 700 V (dc
+ peak ac) above ground when operated from
batteries. Although insulated , caution should be
observed when connecting the probe to test
points.
238
1 ~sldiv to 200 msl div, accurate ± 3%.
Time Base -
em
in
He i ght
7.6
3.0
Width
13.3
5 .2
Depth
22.8
9 .0
Weights (approx)
kg
Ib
Net
(without accessories)
1.6
3.5
",, 3,6
",, 8.0
Shipping
I
tNCLUOED ACCESSORIES
Viewing hooc (016-0199-01), carrying case (016-0512-00)
neck strap (346-0104-00), two spare fuses (159-0080-00).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Internal rechargeable batteries allow at least two
hours operation away from external power
sources. And the 221 will operate and charge
from practically all the world 's principal line
voltages: 90 to 250 V, 48 to 62 Hz ac, or 80 to 250
V dc (all without making any change to the
instrument).
Insulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (dc + peak ac
when operated from internal balleries, with the line cord stor
and the plug protected. When operated from an external line
line voltage plus floating voltage not to exceed 250 V RMS ;
1.4 x line + (de + peak ac) not to exceed 350 V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Integral 1 Mfl Probe
Weighs "" 1.6 kg.(3.5 Ib)
Power Sources - Internal NiCd balleries provide at least
hours operation at max trace intensity for a charging and operating temperature between + 20' C and + 30' C. Intema
charger charges the balleries when connected to an ac line
with instrument turned on or off. Dc operation Is automaticall
Interrupted when battery voltage drops to = 10 V to protect
balleries against deep discharge. Full recharge requires "" 16
hours. Extended time charges will not damage the balleries _
An expanded scale ballery meter indicates full , low, and recharge. External power source, 90 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz) 0'
80 to 250 V dc, 5 W or less.
Magnifier - Increases all sweep speeds Xl0 with a max
sweep speed of 0.1 ~s ldiv .
Variable Time Control - Exlends minimum sweep rale to
'" 0.5 sldiv. Continuously variable between calibrated settings.
ORDERING INFORMATION
221 Oscilloscope.
including batteries and probe ........... $1600
INSTRUMENT OPTION
Option 76 P7 Phosphor .................... _.......... ,........... Add 53
TRIGGER
Modes - Aulomalic or manual. Level and slope selecled with
a single conlrol. Automatic opera lion minimizes lrigger adjuslmenl and provides a bright baseline with no input.
Trigger Sensitivity Mode
To 1 MHz
Ats MHz
Internal
0.5 div
1 dlv
External
0 .5 V
1V
X-Y OPERATION
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Alligator Clip Kit - A pair of alligator clips that allow connect·
ing the probe and ground lead to large (up to 318 in) condu
tors. Includes ; red Clip (015-0229-00); yellow clip (015-023
00); 6-32 to probe adapter (103-0051 -01).
Order 015-0231 -00 ........................... _................ _.......... _.. 516
Probe-tip to BNC Panel Connector Adapter
Order 013-0084-01 .................. _........ _.... _.................. _... 58.00
Input - X-axis Input is via Ihe external trigger or Ihe external
horizonlal Input.
Probe-tip to BNC Cable Adapter,
Order 103-0096-00 .......... _...........................................
X-Axis Deflection Factor - 1 Vl div ± 10%, dc to 500 kHz.
Sensitivily is increased by a faclor of 10 (0.1 Vldiv) using horizonlal magnifier.
Power Cable Adapter Assembly - A short length of two-wir
power cord. One end has a female NEC SCicket filling the 20
Series power cords ; the other end is left open so that the wire
can be allached to a non-NEC male power plug. Plugs no
supplied.
Order 161-0077-01 ....................................................... 57.00
Max External Horizontal Input Voltage - 200 (de + peak
ac), 200 V (p-p ac) 10 500 kHz, decreasing to 20 V p-p ac at 5
MHz .
Input Impedance -
",, 0.5 Mil paralleled by = 30 pF.
DISPLAY
CRT - 6 x 10 div (0.5 cml div) display. P31 Phosphor normally
supplied ; P7 oplional. 1 kV acceleraling potential.
Graticule -
Inlernal, black line, non-iliuminaled.
510_ s~
TEK
1 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPE/DMM
200 SERIES
MINISCOPES
213
1 MHz at 20 mV/div
0.4 !'s/div Sweep Rate
with X10
Sweep Magnifier
DMM and Miniscope in
One Unit
Rugged Construction
Internal Battery
Compact, Weighs ",, 1.7 kg (3.7 Ib)
True RMS Voltage and Current
Measurements
The 213 combines a precision 3 1/2 digit digital
multimeter and a 1 MHz oscilloscope in one
instrument. It is a compact (3 x 5.2 x 8.9 inches)
and lightweight (only 3.7 pounds) package that
will fit easily into your briefcase or tool kit.
In operation, the light-weight 213 can be hand
held, rested on the equipment being tested or
carried conveniently on a neck-strap. Operating
controls are designed for speedy measurements
and easy understanding.
Rugged construction enables the 213 to withstan d hostile industrial or transportation
environments.
The 213, combining both oscilloscope and DMM
functions , fits many on-site service applications.
As an example, the 213 is used extensively for
preventive maintenance on industrial control
systems.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION (VOLTAGE)
Bandwidth - Dc to 1 MHz ( - 3 dB point) for 20 mV/div to 100
V/div deflection factors. Dc to 400 kHz (- 3 dB point) for 5
mV/div and 10 mV/div. Lower - 3 dB point for ac coupling is
~ 1 Hz.
Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 100 V/dlv (1-2-5 sequence),
accurate r 30;.. Uncallbrated; continuously variable between
steps to at least 250 V/div.
Input Rand C - 10 MG paralleled by 150 pF for 5 mV/div
through 1 V/div and 100 pF for 2 V/div through 100 V/div.
Max Input Voltage Input Condition
Dc coupled , 5 mV/div
to 1 V/dlv
Ac coupled, 5 mV/div
to 1 V/div
A c, Dc coupled,
2 V/div to 100 V/div
Max Input Voltage
500 V (dc + peak ac)
at 1 MHz o r less
800 V (dc
peak ac)
SOO V peak ac
component
800 V (dc + peak ac)
at 1 MHz or less
+
VERTICAL DEFLECTION (CURRENT)
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 400 kHz (- 3 dB point) for 20
" A/dlv through 100 mNdiv deflection factors. Dc to at least
200 kHz (- 3 dB point) for S " A/div and 10 "Ndiv.
Dellection Factor - S ~div to 100 mNdiv (1-2-S sequence),
accurate r 30;.. Uncalibrated; continuously variable between
steps to at least 2S0 mNdiv.
Ma. Input Current - 2 A RMS or 3 A peak for any range (fuse
and diode protection).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Bue - 2 "s/div to SOO ms/div (1-2-5 sequence), accurate ± 5%.
Variable Magnilier - Increases all sweep speeds to al least
XS with a max sweep speed of 0.4 "s/div.
TRIGGER
Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered). Aulomatic
(sweep free-runs in absence of trigger signal or for frequencies
below 7 Hz).
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling - Ac Intemal, (auto and
normal, 1 MHz) 0.5 div. Dc External, 1 MHz, I V.
DISPLAY
CRT - 6 x 10 div (0.S2 cm/div) display. P43 Phosphor is
standard.
Gratlcule - Internal, black line, non-illuminated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating: (battery only). - I 5·C to
+ 55·C. Charging or operating from ac line: O·C to + 40·C.
Nonoperating: - 40·C to +60·C.
Altitude - Operating: To 25,000 ft, decrease max temperature by ,·C/l ,000 ft above IS,OOO ft. Nonoperating: 40,000 ft .
Vibratfon - Operating and nonoperating: 15 minutes along
each of the 3 major axes, 0.06 em (0.025 in) p-p displacement
(4 g's at 5S Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles. Held for 3
minutes at 5S Hz.
Humidity - +40·C or less, 800;. or less relative humidity.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: ISO g's, 1/2 sine, 2 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis. Total of 12
shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Sources - Internal NiCd batteries provide 3 to 5 hours
operation at max trace Intensity for a charging and operating
temperature between +20·C and + 30·C. Internal charg...
charges batteries when connected to an ac line with instrument
turned on or off. Dc operation is automatically interrupted when
battery VOltage drops below 2 V to protect batteries against
deep discharge. Full recharge requires "" 16 hours. External
power source, 90 to 136 V ac (48 to 62 Hz). Option 01 allows
operation from an external 180 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz) or de
supply. Power consumption, 8 watts or less.
Inlulation Voltage - SOO V RMS or 700 V (dc + peak ae)
when operated from internal batteries with line cord and plug
stored. When operated from ac, line vollage plus floating voltage not to exceed 250 V RMS or 1.4 X line + (dc + peak ae)
not to exceed 350 V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensi ons
In
cm
3.0
Height
7.6
Width
13.2
5.2
Depth
22.6
8.9
We ights (appro.)
kg
Ib
3.7
Net (without accessories)
1.7
8.6
Shipping
3.9
DMM
Provides true RMS readings of voltage and current.
DC AND AC VOLTAGE
Range - 0.1 V to 1000 V full scale in S ranges.
Resolutfon - 100 "V at 0.1 V full scale.
Accuracy In Dc Mode - For + 25·C r S· C.
Range (Full Scele) 0.1 V
±0.1% of reading ±3 counts.
Temp coef is (±O.OIS% of reading
+ 0.04% of full scale) pe r
1V
±0.1% of reading ±1 coun t.
Temp coe f Is (±0.01% of readi n g
+ 0.01 % of full scale) per
10 V and 100 V
±0.15% of reading ±1 count.
Temp coef is (±O.OIS% of reading
+ 0.01 % of full scale) pe r cc.
±0.2% of reading ± 1 cou nt.
1000 V
Temp coef is (±0.02% of reading
0.01 % of full scale) per
Accuracy in RMS Mode - For 25 · C r 5· . Temperature coefficient ( r O.050;. of reading + 0.1% of full scale) per ·C.
ac.
ac.
+
Range
ac.
Within % of reading shown ±S counts ·
40 Hz
4 kHz
to
to
Dc
4 kHz
40 kHz
3.S%
0.1 V
2.5%
1.5%
1 D/O
1 V, 10 V, and 100 V
1%
2%
2%
1000 V
1%
2%
•Accuracy limit increases IInearty for crest factor > 2 up to
twice indicated limit for crest factor of 5.
Input Resiltance - 10M!!.
Input Capacitance - ISO pF on O. I V to 10 V ranges, 100 pF
on 100 V and 1000 V ranges.
Settling Time - Dc: I .S sec to 0.10;. of readIng. RMS: 2 s to
10;. of reading.
Ma. tnput Voltage Dc Coupled
0.IVtol0V
500 V (dc
peak ac)
Ac Coupled
0.lVto10V
800 V (dc + peak ac)
+
100 V tol000 V
800 V (de + peak ac)
DC AND AC CURRENT
Range - 0.1 mA to 1000 mA full scale In 5 ranges.
Re.olutlon - 100 nA at 0.1 mA full scale.
Accuracy In Dc Mode - For + 2S·C r S· C.
Temperature Coel - (r 0.02"10 of reading r 0.040;. of full
scale) per ·C. O. I mA r 0.5% r 3 counts. f mA to 1000 mA
r 0.250;. r 3 counts.
Accuracy In Ac Mode Within % of reading shown ±5 cou nts ·
Range
0.1 mA
1 mA to 1000 mA
Dc
2.5%
2.5%
40 Hz
to
4 kHz
1.5%
1.5%
4 kHz
to
40 kHz
4.5%
3.5%
•Accuracy limit increases linearly for crest factor > 2 up to
twice the indicated limit for crest factor of 5.
Settling Time - I.S s to 0.10;. of reading.
Ma. Input Current - 2 A RMS or 3 A peak on any scale (fuse
and diode protection).
RESISTANCE
Range. - I kll to 10 Mil full scale in 5 ranges.
Resolution - 1 G on 1 kG scale.
Accuracy - For 2S·C r 5·C.
Range
% of Reading
O.S% ±3 counts
1 kU
0.5% ± 1 count
10 kn to 1 MU
1% ±1 cou nt
10 Mn
Settling Time -
2 seconds r 2 counts.
READOUT
Number 01 Digits - 3 112 digits plus decimal point and sign.
Dllpley Size - 1 em high by 4 em wide (S characters).
O.errange Capability - At least 200% of full scale.
O.e"ange Ind ica ti on - Readout displays scrambled
characters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Viewing hood (016-01 99-01), carryinl/ case (016-051 2-00), 2
test leads (alligator clip to banana Jack) (red 012-0015-00)
(black 012-0014-00), neck strap (346-0104-00, 2 power line
fuses (159-0080-00), power line plug adapter (option 01 only)
(161-0077-01), identification tag (334-2614-00), identiftcatlon
tag (000-7983-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
213 Miniscope/DMM including batteries and
probe ........_._ ................ _.. _.. _.................. $2100
POWER OPTION
Option 01 , 180 to 250 V ac (48 to 62 Hz) or de
(Includes batterie. and probe) ........................... No Charge
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Alligator Clip Kit - A pair of alligator clips that allow connecting the probe and ground lead to large (up to 3/8 in) conductor.
Includes: red clip (0IS-0229-oo); yeliow clip (015-0230-00); 632 to probe adapter (103-0051-01).
Order 015-0231-00 .......................................................... $16
Probe-tip to BNC Panel Connector Adapter
Order 013-0084-01 ....................................................... $8.00
Probe tip to BNC Cable Adapter,
Order 103-0096-00 ...................................................... $10.50
Power Cable Adepter As.embly - A short length of two-wire
power cord . One end has a female NEC socket fitting the 200
Series power cords; the other end is left open so that the wires
can be attached to a non-NEC male power plug. Plugs not
supplied.
Order 161 -0077-01 ....................................................... $7.00
500kHz
TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DUAL
200 SERIES
MINISCOPES
Altitude - Operating: 25,000 ft, decrease max temperature
by l · C/l 000 ft above 15,000 ft . Nonoperating: 50,000 ft.
Vibration - Operating and nonoperating : 15 minutes along
each of the 3 major axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement
(4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in one-minute cycles. Held for
three minutes at 55 Hz.
Humidity - 5 cycles (120 hours). 95% relative humidity, referenced to MIL-E-16400F.
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 150 g's, 1/2 sine, 2 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis. Total of 12
shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Source. - Internal NiCd batteries provide ",,3 to 5
hours operation for a charging and operating temperature between + 20 · C and + 30 · C. Internal charger charges the batteries when connected to an ac line with instrument turned off.
Battery operation is automatically interrupted when battery
voltage drops to = 10 V to protect batteries against deep discharge. Full recharge requires "" 16 hours. Extended charge
times will not damage the batteries.
212
500 kHz, 1 mV/ div to 50 V/div
Internal BaHery
Integral 1 MQ Probe
Weighs "", 1.6 kg, (3.5 Ib)
The 212 features these signal acquisition capabilities: bandwidth to 500 kHz with deflection factors
from 1 mV/div to 50 V/div. It is lightweight (only
3.5 pounds) and compact (3 x 5.25 x 9.5 inches).
Built of impact-resistant plastic and fully selfcontained , this miniature portable is perfect for
applications in severe environments. And it permits "floating" measurements since it is double
insulated and can be elevated to 700 V (dc +
peak ac) above ground when operated from
batteries. Although insulated, normal caution
should be observed when connecting the oscilloscope probe to the test point.
The 212 features integral probes that are color
matched with the vertical deflection controls to
minimize measurement error. The probes have
their own storage space and are part of the
instrument-you can 't forget and leave them
behind. Clip-on 10X attenuators are available for
higher voltage applications.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 500 kHz from 10 mV/div to 50
V/div, reducing to at least 100 kHz at 1 mV/div. Lower - 3 dB
point ac coupled is < 2 Hz.
Dellectlon Factors - 1 mV/div to 50 V/div (1 -2-5 sequence),
accurate ± 5%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between
steps to at least 125 V/div.
Display Mode. - Ch 1 only, Ch 2 only, or Ch 1 and Ch 2
chopped (approx chop rate - 50 kHz) from 500 ms/div to 2
ms/dlv of time base, alternate from 1 ms/div to 5 ~ s/d i v of time
base.
Input Rend C - = 1 MO paralleled by = 160 pF from 1 mV/div
to 50 mV/div: and 140 pF from 100 mV/div to 50 V/div.
Max Input Voltage (IX probe only)-
+
1 mV/d l v to 50 mV /dl v
600 V (dc
peak ac)
ac not over 2 kHz .
0.1 V/ dlv to 50 V/ d iv
+
600 V (dc
peak ac)
600 V pop ac
5 MHz o r less
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Ba.e -
5
~ s/dlv
to 500 ms/div, accurate ± 5%.
Veriable Magnifier - Increases each sweep rate X5 with a
max sweep speed of 1 ~s/d i v .
Extemal Horizontal Input - (Ch 1) 1 mV/div to 50 V/div
± 10%: dc to 100 kHz: X-Y phasing to 5 kHz < 3 · . Input characteristics same as Ch 1.
M.. Extemal Horizontal Input Voltage and Impedance Same as for vertical inputs.
External Ac Source - 110 to 126 V, 58 to 62 Hz, 3 W. Can be
operated at 104 to 110 V with resulting slow discharge of internal batteries.
In,ulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (dc + peak ac)
when operated from internal batteries, with the line cord and
plug stored. When operated from ac, line VOltage plus floating
Voltage not to exceed 250 v RMS : or I.4X line + (dc + peak
ac) not to exceed 350 V.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
In
cm
He ight
7.6
13.3
24.1
Wi dth
Depth
3.0
5 .3
9.5
We i ghts (appro x)
kg
Ib
Net (without accessor ies)
Sh ipp ing
1.6
3 .5
3.2
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
7.0
Viewing hood (016-0199-01 ), carrying case (016-0512-00). two
4-A fu ses (1 59-0121 -00). identification tags (000-7983-00),
Identification tag (334-2614-00), carrying strap (346-0104-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
212 Dual-Trace Oscilloscope, including
baHeries .............................................. $1545
POWER OPTIONS
Option 01 for 220· 250 V, (48 to 52 Hz) include.
batteries ............................................................... No Charge
TRIGGER
Trigger Mode. - Automatic or normal. Level and slope selected with a single control. Automatic operation minimizes trigger adjustment and provides a bright baseline with no input.
Option 02 for 90 to 1 10 V, includes batteries .. No Charge
Trigger Sen,ltlvity and Coupling -
lOX Attenuator Package - A slip-on tip to provide lower
circuit loading (4.4 Mil. = 20 pF) and higher max input voltage
1000 V (dc + peak ac) includes : lOX attenuator (010-037801 ): pincher tip (013-0071-00): flex tip (206-0060-00): banana
tip (134-0013-00): IC adapter (206-0203-00).
Order 010-0378-01 ................................................ .......... 545
Coupling
Trigger level and slope functions are simplified to
one rotary control on the side of the unit. A
convenient neckstrap is an included accessory,
freeing both hands to perform other tasks.
Dc
to 500 Hz
Internal
(wI composite
tri gge r
source)
0.2 d lv
Internal
(w/ch 2 tri gger
source)
0.2 d iv
Extern al
1V
Max External Trigger Input Voltage V (p-p ac) at 1 MHz or less.
Input Impedance -
8 V (dc + peak ac), 16
R and C, 1 MO paralleled by = 30 pF.
DISPLAY
CRT -
6 x 10 div (0.52 em/div) display . P31 Phosphor.
Graticule -
Internal. black line, non-illuminated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating: (battery only), - 15· C to
+ 55 · C. Charging or operating from ac line, O· C to + 40· C.
Nonoperating : - 40 · C to + 60 · C.
240
A pilot light battery-charge indicator light will extinguish when
oscilloscope has about 10 min of operating time remaining in
the batteries .
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
All igator Clip Kit - A pair of alligator clips that allow connecting the probe (or optional lOX attenuator) and ground lead to
large (up to 3/8 in) conductors. Includes : red clip (015-022900): yellow clip (015-0230-00): 6-32 to probe adapter (1 030051 -01 ).
Order 015-0231-00 .......................................................... $16
Probe-lip to BNC Panel Connector Adapter
Order 013-0084-0 1 ....................................................... $8.00
Probe-tip to SNC Cable Adapter
Order 103-0096-00 ...................................................... $10.50
Power Cable Adapter Assembly - A short length of two-wire
power cord. One end has a female NEC socket fitting the 200
Series power cords : the other end Is left open so that the wires
can be attached to a non-NEC male power plug. Plugs not
supplied.
Order 161 -0077-01 ....................................................... $7.00
TEK
T900
SERIES
15 MHz DUAL TRACE
RACKMOUNT OSCILLOSCOPE
POWER SOURCE (AC)
Line Voltage Ranges - 100-120 V, 220-240 V line voltage
and HI/LO range are accessible externally.
100-120 V Range - HI : lOB to 132 V AMS . LO: 90 to 110 V
AMS.
220-240 V Range - HI : 216 to 2S0 V AMS . LO: 19B to 242 V
AMS.
Line Frequency - SO to 60 Hz.
Power Consumption - Watts (max) 50, amps (max) 0.3S, at
120 V, 60 Hz.
Canedlen Standerd. A.sociation Certified.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Height
Width
Oepth
Wei ght
Net
T922R
Dc to 15 MHz at 2 mV /div
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Calibrated Range - 0.5 sl div to 0.2 ~s/div in 20 steps in a 12-5 sequence. Variable XI to Xl0 magnifier extends maximum
sweep rate to 20 ns/div.
Switch able Front and Rear Signal Inputs
Only 13.3 x 48.2 x 43.2 cm, 9.1 kg
(5.25 x 19 x 17 in, 20 Ib)
Single Sweep Operation
Bright (12 kV) Display
The T922R is a rackmount multipurpose 15 MHz
oscilloscope. It features: 15 MHz bandwidth at 2
mV/div vertical sensitivity, 20 ns/div maximum
sweep rate with the Xl0 magnification control,
switchable front and rear signal inputs, selectable
chop and alternate sweeps, graticule illumination
and rear panel outputs (gate out, sweep out and
vertical signal out). The T922R fits any standard
48 cm (19 in) rack and weighs only 9.1 kg (20 Ib) .
Option 01 adds the differential capability.
Many companies are using the T922R for their
production testing applications-often as an inex·
pensive replacement for aging instruments which
require frequent repair and calibration.
T922R CHARACTERISTICS
Seven recessed rear panel BNC connectors provide: Ch 1, Ch
2 vertical signal input. Extemal trigger input, Z-axis input,
Sweep Outpul, Gate Output, Vertical Output.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Mode Selections
Ch 1 - Displays only the Ch 1 signal.
Ch 2 - Displays only the Ch 2 signal.
Dual Trace - Displays Ch 1 and Ch 2 signals simultaneously.
Alternate or chopped mode is manually selectable.
Range -
Deflection Factor
2 mV/div to 10 V/div in 12 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Within 3%
Within 4%
Uncallbrated (VAR) Range - Continuously variable between
settings. Extends dellection factor to at least 25 VIdiv.
Frequency Response - Dc to at least 15 MHz (measured at
- 3 dB).
Rise Time - 23 ns or less.
Chopped Mode Repetition Rate (Dual Trace) - = 250 kHz.
Input Resistance - = 1 Mil.
Input Capacitance - 30 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc coupled, 400 V (de + peak ac)
BOO V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less, Ac coupled, 400 V (de + peak
ae) BOO V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less.
Delay Line - Permits viewing edge of displayed waveform.
Z-AXIS INPUT
Sensitivity - 5 V signal causes noticeable intenSity modulation . Polarity of the voltage causing a decrease in intensity is
internally selectable.
TRIGGERING
Trigger Mode
Auto - Permits normal triggering on waveforms with a repetition rate of at least 20 Hz. Sweep ' free runs' in the absence 01
an adequate trigger Signal, or with a repetition rate below 20
Hz.
Norm - Permits normal triggering. Sweep does not run In the
absence of an adequate trigger signal.
TV - Provides triggering on TV field when SEC/DIV switch is
set at 0.1 ms or slower, Trigger on TV line when SEC/DIV
switch is set at 50 ~ or faster .
Slope + Out - In - Sweep is triggered on the positive/negatlve-going slope of the triggering waveform.
Level - Variable control selects the amplitude point on the
trigger signal when sweep triggering occurs.
em
In
13.3
43,2
4B .2
5.25
17,0
19.0
kg
9,1
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ib
20 .0
Temperature
Nonoperating - - S5 ' C to + 7S· C.
Operating - O· C to + 45 · C.
Altitude
Nonoperating - To 15,200 meters: SO,OOO ft .
Operating - To 4,500 meters: 15,000 ft max . Operating temperature decreased I ' C/3Q4,B meters (1,000 ft) above 1524
meters (5,000 ft).
CAMERAS
T922A interfaces to all Tektronix Cameras.
T922R -
ORDERING INFORMATION
Oscilloscope ...................... $1750
Option 01 , Differential Input ................................... Add $90
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Rackmount Hardware Kit
Order 016-0375-00 ........................................................... $75
Triggering Sensitivity
Auto and Norm - 0.5 div internal or 100 mV external Irom 2
Hz to 5 MHz, increasing to 1.5 div internal or 150 mV extemal
at 15 MHz.
TV - CompoSite sync 1 div intemal or 100 mV external (about
2.3 div or 230 mV of composite video).
External Trigger Input
Maximum Input - 400 V (de + peak ae) BOO V p-p ac at 1
kHz or less.
Input Resistance - = 1 Mil.
Input Capacitance - 30 pF.
X-Y OPERATION
SenSitivity, Variable Magnifier - From = 100 mV/div (X l 0
mag) to = 1 V/div (X I mag) for X: Y is adjusted by vertical
control.
X-Ax is Bandwidth - Dc to at least 1 MHz (measured at - 3
dB).
Input Resistance - = 1 Mil.
Input Capacitance - 30 pF.
Phase DINerence Between X and Y Axis Amplifiers - WithIn 5' from dc to 50 kHz.
CRT DISPLAY
Display Area - B x 10 ern, illuminated intemal graticule.
Standard Phosphor - P31.
Beam Finder - Locates off-screen display.
Nominal Accelerating Potential - = 12 kV .
Output Voltage Repetition Rate -
PROBE ADJUST
",, 0.5 V.
= 1 kHz.
OUTPUTS
Sweep/Gate Out - Output Voltage is = 5 V positive going
Into 1 Mil, ",,50 mV into 50 Il load.
Vertical Output - A compos~e 01 Ch 1 and Ch 2 with = 0.5 V
output per displayed division into a 1 Mil load. ",,50 mV with 50
Il load. Bandwidth is at least 1 MHz.
C-5C Camera
Recommended for all T900 Series Oscilloscopes,
the C-5C attaches directly to the front panel without adapters and uses Polaroid pack film . A fixed
f/16 lens aperture, an electric shutter with timed
speeds from 0.1 to 5 seconds, plus open shutter
mode, and bulb, combine to make the C-5C Option 03 which includes a built-in Xenon flash unit
that flashes to illuminate the graticule when the
shutter opens. The T922R uses the C-5C Option
01, without the Xenon flash . Batteries are not included for either version.
Order C-5C, Option 03 .......................... $500
C-5C, Option 01 ......................... $480
An NTSC IRE TV graticule is available. Ask your
local Tek Sales Engineer or Representative.
Viewing Hood
Provides for convenient viewing in high ambient
light conditions.
Order Viewing Hood (016-0377-00) .... $8.00
')111
100 MHz DUAL TRACE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK DIGITAL
PORTABLE STORAGE
OSCILLOSCOPES
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
Bandwidth and Rise Time II terminated source).
(At all deflection factors· from 50
Storage Modes'
Dloplay Relponle
Sine
Pulse
'Bandwidth measured at 5% envelope error and maximum
sampling rate, using appropriate interpolator. Rise time is 1.6
times minimum sample interval. Chopped mode halves the
bandwidth.
Non-Store Mode' •
- 15' C to + 40' C
DC to 100 MHz, 3.5 ns
+ 45 ' C to + 55' C
85 MHz, 4.1 ns
"'Measured at - 3 dB. Bandwidth may be limited to ",, 20 MHz
by bandwidth limit switch.
Cascaded bandwidth is at least 50 MHz when signal out is
terminated in 50 II.
Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling 1X probe: 10Hz or less lOX
probe: 1 Hz or less.
Dellectlon Factor at Bandwidth 0.5 mV/div to 5 V/div in slorage modes
5 mV/div to 5 V/div in non-store
1·2·5 sequence, accurate ± 3%
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to at
least 12.5 V/div. In cascade mode sensitivity is ",, 1 mV/div.
Stored images can be expanded by factor of 10 ver1ically.
Display Modes - Ch 1; Ch 2 ADD (normal and inver1ed),
Trigger View (non-store only), alternate, chopped - ",, 250 kHz
rate, in any combination electronically switched in non-store; in
storage chop rate is 1/2 the digitizing rate.
Envelope Mode - Records waveform envelope over multiple
sweeps. 5 MHz digitizing rate from 5 secJdiv to 10 ~s/div ; 10
MHz digitizing at 5 ~s/div ; 25 MHz digitizing from 2 "s/div and
faster . Number of sweeps equals 1 to 256 plus continuous
setting.
Signal Averaging - 2 to 256 sweeps can be averaged together to remove randiom noise.
468/468R
The 468 IS deSigned to comply with IEEE Stan·
dard 488·1978, and with Tektronix Codes and
Formats Standard.
10 MHz Useful Storage Bandwidth
Cursors for Time and Voltage Measurements
The ENVELOPE mode, a Tektronix exclusive,
uses multiple sampling rates and digital memory
to capture and record the maximum and mini·
mum excursions of a waveform. The resulting
waveform "envelope" can be used to catch
glitches, view frequency drift and amplitude mod·
ulation, or detect aliasing. Unlimited storage time,
expandable, repositionable stored traces; SAVE
REFERENCE memory; pre trigger viewing; and
correction for the trigger uncertainty inherent in
digital storage make the 468 the most versatile
digital storage scope available today.
Envelope Mode
Signal Averaging GPIB Options
100 MHz Non-Storage Bandwidth
Advancing the state·of·the·art in digital storage
oscilloscopes is the TEKTRONIX 468. This high
performance portable scope is capable of accu·
rately storing and displaying 10 MHz single shot
events using a unique display interpolation
system.
The 468 was designed with many features which
enhance its usefulness in your applications.
Cursors and a calibrated LED readout enable you
to measure time or voltage differences easily and
accurately.
Signal Averaging, now standard on the 468, can
be used to remove random noise from a signal
and improve measurement accuracy.
242
In addition, the 468 features all the nonstorage
performance of our 465B, the industry standard
100 MHz oscilloscope.
Cmrr - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at 20
MHz (10 MHz in storage) for common-mode signals of 6 div or
less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X
or lOX coded probes are automatically indicated by two readout lights behind the knob skirts. All LEOs are off when the
channel is not displayed.
Ground Reference Display - In storage modes moving the
coupling selector to ground position will locate ground and dis·
playa reference dot at left edge of CRT.
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ± 2% paralleled by "" 20 pF.
Ma. Input Voltage -
+
Dc coupled
250 V (de
peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Ac coupled
250 V (de
peak ac)
500 V (p-p ac at 1 kHz or less)
Delay Line waveform.
+
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
Options include signal averaging , a GPIB inter'
face, a TV sync separator, and emi shielding.
DIGITIZER, MEMORY
speed - Digitizing rates from 10 samples per second at 5
secJdiv to 25 megasamples per second at 2 ~s/div and faster.
Digitizing rate changes propor1ionate to sweep speed (50 data
words per horizontal division). Chopped mode effectively
halves the digitizing rate per waveform.
Relolution -
8 bit (1 part in 256) ver1ical resolution.
Memory Size - Up to two 512 word waveforms or four 256
word waveforms can be stored and displayed.
Interpolator - Two firmware interpolators; one optimized for
sine waveforms, one optimized for pulse waveforms.
R468 RACKMOUNT
400
TEK
SERIES
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Bas. A - 0.02 .s/dlv 10 5.0 sl dlv (0.5 sldiv In nonslore
mode) in a 1·2·5 sequence. Xl 0 mag ex lends max sweep rate
to 2 ns/div.
Time Bu. B - 0.02 .s/div to 5.0 sldiv (50 msldiv In nonstore
mode) In a 1·2·5 sequence. Xl 0 mag extends max sweep rate
to 2 nsldiv.
Veriable Time Control - In storage modes has no effect. In
non·store mode Time Base A provides continuously variable
uncalibrated sweep rates between steps and to at least 1.25
sldiv LED waming light indicates uncalibrated setting.
Time Bue Accuracy - Full 10 cm Storage Modes 0.1%.
Non· ltorage Mode
+ 20 o C to + 30 o C - 15°C to + 55°C
±2%
±3%
Unmagnified
±4%
Magnified
±3%
Horizontal Displey Modes
Storage -
A. B delayed.
Non·Storage - A. A intensified. alternate. B delayed. B ends
A for Increased Intensity in the delayed mode. Electronic
switching between intensified and delayed sweep. A sweep
and B sweep may be viewed simultaneously.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - 0.2 to Xl0 delay timel div settings 01200
ns to 0.5 s.
Differenti al Time Meal urement Accuracy -
A Source. + 10.
Norm. Ch '. Ch 2. line. external. and external
B Source. external.
Starts after delay. norm. Ch 1. Ch 2. and
External Input. - R and C "" 1 MU paralleled by ", 20 pF. 250
V (de + peak ac) max input.
x·y OPERATION
Full·sensitlvlty X· Y (Ch 1 Horiz, Ch 2 Vert) - 5 mV/div to 5
V/div. accurate ± 4%. Bandwidth is de to at least 4 MHz.
Phase difference between amplifiers Is 3' or less from dc to 50
kHz.
Non·store mode only.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 cm display. Horizontal and vertical centeriines
further marked in 0.2 cm Increments. P31 Phosphor standard:
Pt 1 optional. 18 kV accelerating potential.
Graticule - Internal. nonparallax: variable edge lighting :
markings lor measurement of rise time.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease In determining the location of an offscreen signal. A pre·
set intensity level provides a constant brightness.
Z· Axls Input - Dc coupled. posltive..golng signal decreases
intensity: 5 V pop signal causes noticeable modulation at nor·
mal intenSity: de to 50 MHz. Non·store mode only.
±1%
±0.01 major
dial divisions
Jitter - 1 part or less in 50.000 (0.002%) of lOX the A sweep
timeldiv setting. 1 part in 20.000 (0.005%) when operating from
50 Hz line.
TRIGGERING A AND B
A Trigger Model - Normal (sweep runs when triggered)
automatic (sweep runs in the absence of a triggering signal and
for signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs one time
on the first triggering event after the reset selector Is pressed).
LED lights indicate when sweep is triggered and when single
sweep is ready.
A Trigger Holdoff - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms. Non·store only.
B Trigger Modes - B runs after delay time (starts automati·
cally at the end of the delay time) and B triggerable after delay
time (runs when triggered). The B delayed sweep runs once. in
each of these modes. following the A sweep delay time.
Storege Trigger Po.itions Pre·trigger at 8.75 div.
Post.trigger point is at 1.25 div:
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15'C to +55'C. Non·
operating: - 55 ' C to + 75·C. Filtered forced air ventilation is
provided.
Altitude - Operating : to 15.000 ft : max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by I' C/l 000 ft. from 5000 to 15.000 ft.
Nonoperating to 50.000 ft .
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each 01 the three
axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz)
10 to 55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity as specified in MIL·T·28800B (par
3.9.2.2).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's 1/2 sine. 11 ms
duration. 3 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 18
shocks.
Amplitude Cal ibrator
Output Voltage
0.3 V
Output Current
30 mA
1%
OOC to +40 o C
2%
+ 20° C to + 30° C
Vertical Signal Output - Ch 1 vertical signal is dc to at least
50 MHz (- 3 dB). and = 25 mvldiv terminated into 50 U. and
.. 50 mV/div terminated into 1 MU.
50 mV
150 mV
500 mV
1.5 V
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
Requirements Increase below 50 kHz
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
and above 50 kHz
Digital Storage Jitter ns/div.
0.5 rlS or less at 100 MHz and 2
Digital Trigger Uncertainty - Correction circuit lor the ± 112
sample interval trigger uncertainty that is caused by asynchronous triggerl sample clock relationship.
A Trigger View - Electronically switched trigger view displays
the external signal used for A sweep triggering. This provides
qUick venHcatkln of the signal and time comparison between a
vertical signal and the trigger signal which can be displayed
simultaneously. The deflection factor is .. 100 mV/div (1 V/div
With external + 10).
Nonstore mode only.
Level and Slope - Internal. permits selection of triggering at
any POint on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V in external .
through at least ± 20 V in external + 10.
Option 78 Pl1 Phosphor ......................................... Add $35
ModifICation kits. for fl8ld conversion of existing 468s to Option
02. are available. These are typically more expensive than
when the option is ordered with the instrument. Contact your
Tektronix Sales Engineer. Distributor. or Representative for
Information.
tNTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option
Option
Option
Option
Al
A2
A3
A4
Unlver.al Euro 220 V116 A ...............
UK 240 V113 A ...................................
Austrelian 240 Vl l0 A .......................
North American 240 VI ' 5A ...............
No
No
No
No
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
This provides service and Signature analysiS routines for verifi·
cation and troubleshooting the digital portion of the instrument.
Recommended to be used with a TEKTRONIX 308 Data Ana·
Iyzer. Order 067·0989·00 ................................................. $85
ProbeaProbe
Type
P6063B
6 ft.
Attenuation
IX
App rox 1 kHz
Gate Output. -
Positive gates from both time bases (",5 V).
Power ReqUirements - Quick change line voltage selector
provides four ranges to cover 90·132 V and 198-250 V. 48 to
440 Hz. 150 watts max at 115 V and 60 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen.lons
cm
In
Height
15.7
Width (with handle)
Depth (wilh panel cover)
32.8
6.2
13.1
55.0
21.7
Depth (handle extended)
60.0
23.8
kg
Ib
Weights (approx)
Net (without panel cover)
12.7
28.0
Net (with panel cover and
accessories)
Shipping
13.9
30.5
19.1
42.2
Input
Impedance
Band·
width '
1 Mil
105 pF
6
MHz
10 Mil
14 pF
90
MHz
10 Mil
2 pF
10 Mil
2 pF
10 Mil
4 pF
100
MHz
100
MHz
100
MHz
Swltchable
lOX
P6202
FET
Probe
2 Meter
lOX
100X Head
Ac Head
Coupling
Internal
Dc
External
External +10
Ac
Ac Lf Reject
Ac Hf Reject
Option 05 TV Sync Separator
(Provides triggering on TV field and line) ................ Add $260
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
At 100 MHz
1.5 dlv
deflection
Option 04 Emc Environmental .............................. Add $140
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Time Base A and B Trigger Sensiti vity and Coupling To 25 MHz
0.3 div
deflection
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option 02 GPIB Interfece - Addressable talker: follows
Tektronix codes and formats .................................. Add $820
Optionat Servic e ROM
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
+15 0 C to +35 0 C
Delay Time Setting
ove r one or more
major dial divisions
less than one major
dial division
ORDERING INFORMATION
468 Oscilloscope ................................ $6270
R468 Rackmount Oscilloscope .•........ $6520
Current
Probe
P6022
5 ft .
Calibration
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
(Selectable)
Inserti on
Impedance
0.03 Il
at 1 MHz
Increasing to
0.2 Il at
120 MHz
85
MHz
·Non·store modes - Bandwidths are measured at the upper
- 3 dB and apply only to the cable length shown. Generally.
shorter cable lengths Increase bandwidth. longer ones de·
crease bandwidth.
Folding Polarized Viewing Hood Order 0 16·0 180-00 .......................................................... $40
Collapalble Viewing Hood - Binocular
Order 0 16·0566·00 ........................................................... $ 15
Protective Cover - Waterproof. blue vinyl
Order 0' 6·0365·00 ........................................................... $21
Mesh Filter - Improves contrast and erne filtering
Order 378.0726·0 1 ........................................................... $45
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart - Occupies < 18 in aisle space. has
storage area in base
Order 200c ................................. .................................... $265
1105 Battery Power Supply ........................................ $1240
Reck Adapter 016·0675·00 ........................................... $300
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6105 lOX probes (010·6105·03). blue accessory pouch
(016-0594.00). clear pouch (016-0537.00). blue CRT light filter
(337.1674-00). clear CRT light filter (337.1674.01). ground wire
(134-0016-01). two 1 1/2.amp fuses (159.0016-00). one 3/4·
amp fuse (159.0042.00).
C·30BP Option 01 General Purpo.e Compact Camera Includes 016-0301·00 mounting adapterlcorrector lens.
Order C·30BP Option 01 ............................................. $1285
For further information .ee Camera section.
243
100 MHz DUAL TRACE
OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK STORAGE
Input Rand C -
1 Mn ± 2% paralled by = 20 pF.
Mal Input Voltage Dc coupled
250 V (de + peak ae)
500 V (p- p ac at 1 k Hz or l ess)
Ae coupled
500 V (de + peak ac)
500 V (p-p ae at 1 kHz or l ess)
Delay Line waveform.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base A - 0.05 ~s/ div to 0.5 s/div (1-2-5 sequenoe). Xl0
mag extends sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Time Base B - 0.05 ~s/div to 50 ms/div (1-2-5 sequency).
Xl0 mag extends sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time Base A - Provides continuously variable uncalibrated sweep ra tes between steps and to
at least 1.25 s/div. Warning light Indicates uncalibrated setting.
Time Base A and B Accuracy -
Full 10 dlv.
+20 oC to +30 oC
- 150C to +55 0C
Unmagnified
±2%
±3%
Magnified
±3%
±4%
Horizontal Display Modes - A, mixed sweep, A intensified. B
delayed. B ends A for increased intenSity in the delayed mode.
Calibrated Miled Sweep - Oisplays A sweep for period determined by DELAY-TIME POSITION control, then displays B
sweep for remainder of horizontal sweep.
466/464
100 MHz at 5 mV /div
5 ns/ div Sweep Rate with X10
Sweep Magnifier
Variable Persistence and Fast Mesh
Transfer Storage Modes
3000 div/I' s Stored Writing Speed (466)
Battery Operation (optional)
Third Channel Trigger View now
available on 466 and 464
Weighs
=11.8 kg, (26 Ib)
TEKTRONIX P6062B Probes provide operator
convenience of 1X or 10X input attenuation at the
probe ti p. The correct deflection factor is automatically indicated on the 464 or 466 front panel
when the probe attenuation factor is switched .
Light weight plus the ability to use optional,
external dc power makes both the 466 and 464
sufficiently portable for virtually all field measurement applications. The snap-on 1106 Battery
Pack is also useful in isolating these
oscilloscopes from noisy or intermittent power
sources.
CHARACTERISTICS
All characteristics apply to both the 466 and 464 , except where
indicated.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
The 466 and 464 Portable Storage Oscilloscopes
are both designed to display nonrepetitive or slow
moving signals. And with the exception of increased stored writing speed on the 466, both
instruments offer similar performance.
Operating in a reduced scan mode, the stored
writing speed of the 466 is 3000 div/I's (1350
cm/I's). The lower cost 464 doesn't offer a reduced scan mode and stores at 110 div/I's. Both
instruments feature two modes of storage
variable persistence and fast transfer.
The bright 8 x 10 div CRT on both instruments
comprises 0.90 cm/divisions. In the 466, reduced
scan graticule is superimposed over the center of
the main graticule, measuring 8 x 10 divisions with
0.45 cm/division. All graticules are etched onto
the inner face of the CRT to eliminate parallax
problems. A third channel trigger view option is
now available for the 466 and 464. This option
allows the simultaneous display of channels 1 and
2 with the external A trigger.
244
Bandwidth' and Rise Time I! terminated source.
at all deflection factors from 50
- 15°C to +40 oC
+ 40 oC to +55 0C
Dc to 100 MHz, :-0;3 .5 ns
Dc to 85 MHz, :-0;4.15 ns
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - 0.2 to Xl 0 delay lime/div settings of 200
ns to 0.5 s (minimum delay time is 200 ns).
o illerential Time Measurement Accuracy Delay Time
+ 15 0C
Sett ing
to
+35 0 C
over one or
- 150C
to
+55 0C
± 1 0/0
±2.5%
±0.01 major
dia l div
±0.025 majo r
dial div
more major
dial d i v
less than
one major
dial dlv
Jllter - One part or less in 50,000 (0.002%) of Xl 0 the A
sweep time/div setting.
TRIGGERING A and B
A Trigger Modes - Normal (sweep runs when triggered),
automatic (sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering signal
and for signals below 30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs one
time on the first triggering event after the reset selector is
pressed). Ughts indicate when sweep is triggered and when
single sweep is ready.
A Trigger Holdoll - Adjustable control permits a stable presentation of repetitive complex waveforms. At least 10: 1
variation .
' Measured at - 3dB down. Bandwidth may be limited to = 20
MHz by bandwidth limit switch. Lower - 3 dB point, ac coupling I X probe : 10 Hz or less. l OX probe: 1 Hz or less.
B Trigger Modes - B starts after delay time (starts automatically at the end of the delay time). B triggerable after delay time
(runs when triggered). The B (delayed) sweep runs onoe, in
each of these modes, following the A sweep delay time.
Dellection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div (1-2-5 sequenoe):
accurate ± 3%. Uncalibrated , continuously variable between
steps and to = ' 2.5 V/div. In cascade mode sensitivity is = 1
mV/div. Cascaded bandwith is at least 50 MHz when signal out
is terminated in 50 n .
Time Base A and B Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling Coup li ng
Int
Dc
I
To 25 MHz
At 100 MHz
0.3 div
deflection
1.5 div
deflection
Display Modes - Ch 1, Ch 2 (normal or inverted), alternate,
chopped (= 250 kHz), added , X-Yo
Ext
50 mV
150 mV
Ext +10
500 mV
1.5 V
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at 20
MHz for common-mode signals of 6 div or less.
Ac Lf
Re ject
Requirements increase below 60 Hz
Ac Hf
Re je ct
Require ments i n c rease below 30 Hz
and above 50 kHz
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip deflection factors for 1X
or l OX coded probes are automatically indicated by two readout lights behind the knob skirts. All lights are off when the
channel is not displayed . Ground referenoe display selectable
at probe (when dc coupled).
Ac
Jilter -
Requ i rements increase below 50 kHz
0.5 ns or less at 100 MHz and 5 ns/div (Xl0 mag).
TEK
400
SERIES
A Trtgger View - A spring.loaded pushbutton overrides other
vertical controls and displays the external signal used for A
sweep triggering . This provides quick verification of the signal
and time comparison between a vertical Signal and the trigger
signal. The deflection factor Is ",,50 mV/dlv (0.5 V/div with ex·
ternal ..;. 10 source).
Level and Slope - Internal. permits selection of triggering at
any point on the positive or negative slope of the displayed
waveform. Level adjustment through at least ± 2 V In external.
through at least ± 20 V In external ..;. 10.
A Source. 10.
Norm. Ch 1. Ch 2 line. external and external ..;.
Altitude - Operating: to 15.000 ft : max allowable amblent
temperature decreased by I ' C/l000 ft from 5000 to 15.000 ft.
Nonoperating to 50.000 ft.
Vibration - Operating : 15 minutes along each of the three
axes. 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% relative humidity referenced to MIL·E·I6400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9.5.1. class 4).
Shock - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g·s. 1/2 sine. 11 ms
duration. 2 shocks per axis In each direction for a total of 12
shocks.
MOdification kits for field conversion of existing 466s and 464s
to Option 07 or OM 44 equipped scopes are available. These
are typically more expensive than when the option Is ordered
with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix Sales Engineer,
Distributor. or Representative for information.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probea Probe
Type
Allenua·
lion
P6063B
6ft
1X
Switchable
lOX
1 Mil
105 pF
10 Mil
14 pF
lOX
10 Mil
2 pF
10 Mil
2 pF
10 Mil
4 pF
Starts after delay. norm. Ch 1. Ch 2. and
B Source. external.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
E.temellnput. - R and C "'" 1 MrI paralleled by = 20 pF. 250
V (de + peak ac) max input.
Third Channel Trigger View Specifications (Option 10) Oeflection Factor (Dc trigger coupling only)
EXT
100 mV/div ± 5%
EXT ..;. 10
1 V/div ± 5%
Rlsetime .. 5 ns.
x·y OPERATION
Full Sensitivity X· Y (Ch 1 Hortz. Ch 2 Vert) - 5 mV /div to 5
V/div. accurate :t 4%. Bandwidth is dc to at least 4 MHz.
Phase difference between amplifiers is 3' or less from dc to 50
kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 div display. each dlv is 0.9 cm (normal): 0.45
cm/div reduced scan (466 only). 8.5 kV accelerating potential.
normal.mOde. 10 kV reduced scan (466 only). P31 Phosphor.
Gratlcule - Internal. nonparallax : variable edge lighting:
markings for measurement of rise time.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within graticule area for
ease in determining the location of an off·screen signal. A pre·
set Intensity level provides a constant brightness.
Z· A.I. Input - Dc coupled. positive.going signal decreases
intensity : 5 V pop signal causes noticeable mOdulation at nor·
mal intensity : dc to 50 MHz .
STORED WRITING SPEEDS
I~ARIABLE
PERSISTANCE
0.3 V
Output Current
30 mA
Frequency
Approx 1 kHz
466
464
Storage"
View
Time
150div/,us
0.5 div/,us
110 dlv/,us
0.5 dlv/,us
> 15s
> 15s
3.000
div/,us
3 div/,us
Redu ced
Scan not
available
on 464
> 15s
> 15s
'These times are at full·stored display Intensity : they
can be extended at least 25 times using reduced In·
tens ity In SAVE Display Mode.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating : - 15' C 10 + 55 ' C. Non·
operating : - 55'C to + 75 ' C. Forced air ventilation Is
provided.
100X Head
Ac Head
Gate Outputs -
Aberration < 10% pop.
Full Scan
(Center 6 x 8 dlv:
0.9 cm/dlv)
FAST
VA RIAB LE
PERSISTANCE
Reduced Scan
(Cente r 8 x 10 dlv:
0.45 cm / dlv)
FAST
Output Voltage
2%
+ 20°C to + 30° C
Vertical Signal Output - Ch 1 vertical signal is de to at least
50 MHz and = 25 mV/div terminated into 50 rI. and = 50
mV/div terminated Into 1 MrI.
Oelay difference (to Ch 1 or Ch 2) 3.5 ns ± 1 ns
Trigger point is approximately center screen.
I
P6202
FET Probe
2 Meter
Amplitude Calibrator -
Input
Impedance
Positive gates from both time bases (",, 5 V).
Power Requirement. - Quick-change line voltage selector
provides six ranges: 110 V. 115 V. 120 V. 220 V. 230 V. and
240 V. each ± 10%. 48 to 440 Hz. 100 W max at 115 V and 60
Hz. Operation from 12 to 24 V de is available with Option 07.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In
Height (w/o pouch)
6.2
Width (with handle)
13.1
Depth (with panel cover)
21 .7
Depth (handle extended)
23.8
cm
15.9
33.0
55 .0
59.7
Weights (approx)
kg
Dimensi ons
Net (without panel cover or
accessori es)
Net ( w i ~ panel cover and
accessories)
Shipping
Ib
26.0
11.8
29.8
41.5
13.5
18.8
Currenl
Probe
Callbrelion
In18rllon
Impedance
P6022
1 mA/mV
10 mA/mV
(Selectable)
0.03 @
1 MHz In·
creasing
to
0.21l@
120 MHz
n
Bandwi dthwith
464/466
6 MHz
90 MHz
100 MHz
Bandwidth
with
464/466
85 MHz
'Bandwidths are measured at the upper - 3 dB point. and apply only to the cable length shown. Generally . shorter cable
lengths increase bandwidth. longer ones decrease bandwidth.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Two P6062B Probes (010·6062·13). blue accessory pouch
(016·0535·02). clear pouch (016.0537.00). CRT light filter (337.
1674·01). two 1 1/2·amp fuses (159·0016-00). one 3/4..amp
fuse (159·0042·00). adapter. ground wire (134..0016.01). view·
ing hoOd (016.0592.00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
466 Storage Oscilloscope ...... ............ $6385
466 OM 44 Storage Oscilloscope/DMM
OM 44 Multimeter info on p.233 •••••••••••••• $6890
464 Storage Oscilloscope .................. $5165
464 OM 44 Storage Oscilloscope/DMM
OM 44 Multimeter info on p.233 •••••••••••••• $5670
1106 Battery Pack (used with Option 07) ..................... $905
11 05 Battery Power Supply ........................................ $ 1240
Meah Filter - Improves display contrast in high ambient light.
Order 378·0726·01 ........................................................... $45
Protective Cover - Waterproof vinyl.
For 464/466 Order 016·0365·00 ...................................... $21
Folding Viewing Hood -
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Folding Binocular Hood -
Order 016·0592·00 ............... $12
Order 016·0566·00 ............. $15
Option 01 Delete OM 44 Temperature Probe
(466 OM 44, 464 OM 44 only) ................................... Sub $80
Polarized Collapsible Viewing Hood Order 016·0180·00 .......................................................... $40
Option 04 Emc Modification .................................. Add $ 140
SCOPE·MOBILE" Cart - Occupies < 18 inches aisle space.
has storage area in base.
Order 200 C ........ ............... ....... .................. .................... $265
Option 05 TV Sync Separator (Provides
triggering on TV field) .............................................. Add $260
Option 07 E.t Dc Operation
(Option 07 cannot be ordered with OM 44) ......... Add $220
Option 10 Third Channel Trigger View ............... Add $ 11 0
(Option 10 cannot be ordered with Option 05)
Option 1Y 100/200 VAC Operation .................... No Charge
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V11eA ................ No Charge
Rack Adapter Order 016·0676-00 ......................................................... $250
(Not for OM 44)
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C·30BP Option 01 General Purpose Camera -Includes 0160301·01 mounting adapter/corrector lens.
Order C·30BP Option 01 .................... ......................... $ 1285
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ 10A ........................ No Charge
Camera Adapter - Mounts C·30B Series Camera to 464/466
Oscilloscopes.
Order 016·0301·01 ........................................................ $105
Option A4 North American 240 V/ 15A ............... No Charge
For further Information see Camera section.
Option A2 UK 240 V113A .................................... No Charge
245
MHz DUAL TRACE
OSCILLOSCOPE
TEK 25STORAGE
Stored Writing Speed (Center 8 div) - Normal, 100 div/ms.
Enhanced. increases single·sweep storage writing speed to at
least 400 div/ms. (Option 01 , 500 div/ms. normal; to 5000
div/ms, enhanced).
Era.e Time - 300 ms or less.
Loeate - Beam can be poSitioned left of the gralieule area to
determine vertical position 01 next sweep without disturbing
stored display.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15" C to + 55 ' C. Non·
operating : - 55 ' C to + 75 ' C.
Altitude - Operating: to 15,000 ft ; max allowable ambient
temperature decreased by I ' C/l000 ft Irom 5000 to 15,000 ft .
Nonoperating : to 50,000 ft .
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three
axes, O.OS cm (0.025 In) pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to
55 to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
to 95% reiative humidity referenced to MIL·E· f6400F (par 4.5.9
through 4.5.9.1. class 4).
Shoek - Operating and nonoperating: 30 g's, 1/2 sine. 11 ms
duration, 2 shocks per axis in each direction lor a total 01 12
shocks.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - O.S V ± 1.0%. 1 kHz ± 1.0% ( + 20' C
to + 30 ' C). Output resistance Is 575 Il.
o r e
fo~4aJI ~~~a&rs:~a;O XI~
~~6tJ :~~18~':~~s 272
operates from 220 V de to 350 V de .
r :J
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
434
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
25 MHz at 10 mV/div
20 ns/ div Sweep Rate
with X50 Sweep Magnifier
Weighs "",9.4 kg (20.8 Ib,)
Time Baae - 0.2 .s/div to 5 s/div (1.2-5 sequence). X50 mag
extends lastest sweep rate to 20 ns/dlv.
Variabl. Time Control - Uncalibrated, continuously variable
between steps and to 12.5 s/div.
Time Base Accuracy, Full 10 dlv -
Unmagn ified
Magnified
+20 oC to +30 oC
- 150C to +55 0C
±3%
±4%
±4%
±5%
'Bandwidth derated to 22 MHz above + 30'C .
A bistable, split·screen storage oscilloscope with
a 25 MHz bandwidth. the compact 434 fills many
needs.
Elternal Horizontal Input Input resistance is ",50 kll.
The split screen provides: full-screen storage, or
upper or lower screen storage, with the other half
conventional.
Modes - Auto trigger (sweep free-runs in absence 01 triggering signal, normal trigger, single sweep.
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling -
Tektronix 434s are used for maintaining display
boards, video monitors, automatic baggage handling systems, X-ray systems, and air-conditioning
and heating systems.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
(2 Identical Channels)
Bandwidth and Rlae Time - (Irom 50 Il terminaled source,
wilh or wilhoul lOX probe) Dc 10 at least 25 MHz at 3 dB
down' , 14 ns from 10 mV/div to 10 V/div. decreasing to 15
MHz. 22 ns at 1 mV/div. Low frequency 3 dB down point with
ac coupling is 14 Hz or less « 1 Hz with 1OX probe).
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 10 V/div, accurate ± 3%.
Uncallbrated . continuously variable between steps and to ", 25
V/dlv.
Dlaplay Modea - Ch 1 only, Ch 2 only (normal or inverted).
alternate. chopped (", 100 kHz), added.
CMRR - Common-mode rejection ratio at least 20 dB at 10
MHz for common-mode Signals of S div or less.
Automatic Scale Factor - Probe tip dellection factors for 1X
or lOX coded probes are indicated by lights besides the knob
skirts. Ground relerence display selectable at probe (when de
coupled).
Input Rand C -
1 Mil ± 2% paralleled by "" 24 pF.
Mal 1m put Voltage - Dc coupled: 250 V (dc + peak ac); ac
coupled: 500 V (dc + peak ac). In either mode the max ac is
500 V pop at t kHz or less.
Delay Line - Permits viewing of leading edge of displayed
waveform.
246
Deflection factor is ",0.5 V/div.
Dimens ions
Height (w/o pouch)
Width (with handle)
Depth
We i ghts ( approx)
Net
Shipping
Internal
Dc
External
ORDERING INFORMATION
434 Storage Oscilloscope .................. $4400
R434 Storage OSCilloscope Rackmount
Model................................................... $4570
Option 0 1 Increased Writing Spsed .................... Add 5200
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
To 5 MHz
At 25 MHz
0.3 div
deflection
1 div
deflection
50 mV
125 mV
Ac
Requirements increase below 20 Hz
Ac LI Re je ct
Requirements Increase below 50 kHz
Ac Hf Reject
Requ irements increase above 50 kHz
Sources - Ch 1 only, composite line, external and external
-;- 10. External trigger level range is at least + 2 V to - 2 V or
+ 20 V to - 20 V.
Elternallnputs - Input R '" 1 Mil paralleled by 100 pF -;- 1 or
70 pF -;- 10. 250 V (de + peak ac).
DISPLAY
CRT - 8 x 10 dlv (1 div - 0.975 cm) horizontal and vertical
divisions lurther mat1 1 mS/div, alternate for settings .;500 "s/div. Trigger is derived from Ch 1 signal only.
Deflection Factor
Range -
2 mV/div to 10 V/dlv In 12 steps in a 1-2-5
Accuracy 20°C to
+
+30°C
sequence.
W i thin 3%
W ithi n 4 %
Uncalibrated (VAR) Range - Continuously variabie between
settings. Extends deflection factor to at least 25 V/div.
Frequency Reaponse - 3 dB).
RI.e Time -
Dc to at least 10 MHz (measured at
35 ns or less.
Chopped Mode Repetition Rate Input Re.islance Input Capacitance -
T912
10 MHz at 2 mV /div
",,30 pF.
Max Input Voltage Dc Coupled less.
400 V (de + peak ac) 800 V pop ac at 1 kHz or
Ac Coupled less.
400 V (de + peak ac) 800 V pop ac at 1 kHz or
Delay Line -
Permits viewing edge of displayed waveform.
250 cm / ms Stored Writing Speed
50 ns/div Sweep Rate (with X10
Sweep Magnifier)
",, 250 kHz.
"" 1 MO.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Calibrated Range - 0 .5 s/div to 0 .5 "s/div in 19 steps in a 12-5 sequence. Variable XI to Xl 0 magnifier extends max
sweep rate to 50 ns/dlv .
Accuracy -
8 x 10 cm Bistable Storage CRT
Weighs ",, 7.9 kg, (17.5 Ib)
Unmagnified
Magn ified
W ithin 3 %
W ithin 5%
W ithin 4 %
Within 6%
Differential Input Option
TRIGGERING
Trigger Mode
The T912 Storage Oscilloscope is well suited for a
wide range of applications in education and
industry. As a training aid in basic electricity and
elec tronics courses, the storage feature is highly
useful in creating visual representations of electrical signals. In physics and engineering courses,
storage permits the user to capture and display
single·shot events like the pressure curve gener·
ated in the chamber of an engine or the stress·
strain characteristics of a material undergoing
destructive testing .
The T912 has similar industrial applications, where
it can also be used to compare input vs feedback
signals in servo'mechanisms, for shock and vibra·
tion analysis, and countiess other transducer·
aided measurements.
Besides bistable storage, the T912 offers other
fe at ures sel dom foun d in economy-model
oscilloscopes. These include a delay line, which
allows you to view the leading edge of fast-rising
signals; a 12'step calibrated vertical attenuator;
constant bandwidth throughout the sensitivity
range of 10 V to 2 mV per centimeter; 19
calibrated sweep rates ranging from 0.5 s to 500
ns/cm ; 3% amplitude and timing accuracy; and
minimal corner shift over a broad vertical dynamic
range.
Auto - Permits normal triggerinQ on waveforms with repetition rate of at least 20 Hz. Sweep free-runs' in the absence of
adequate trigger signal, or one with a repetition rate below 20
Hz.
Norm - Permits normal triggering. Sweep does not run in the
absence of an adequate trigger signal.
Single Sweep - Displays one sweep only. Sweep cannot be
triggered again until reset.
Slope + Out - In - Sweep is triggered on the positive/negative-going slope of the triggering waveform.
Output Voltage Repetition Rate -
PROBE ADJUST
= 0.5 V.
", 1 kHz.
Z-AXIS INPUT
Sen.ltlvlty - 5 V causes noticeabie modulation.
U.able Frequency Range - Dc to 5 MHz.
Input Impedance - ", 10 kll.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature
Nonopereting - - 55 · C to + 75 · C .
Operating - O· C to + 45 · C .
Altitude
Nonoperating - To 15.200 meters; 50,000 ft.
Operating - To 4.500 meters; 15.000 ft max. Operating temperature decreased I·C/304.8 meters (1,000 ft) above 1524
meters (5.000 ft).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen.lona
Hei ght
W idth
De pt h
em
In
25 .4
18.0
47.5
10 .0
7.09
18.7
Weight (a pprox)
kg
Ib
Net (w ith panel cover)
Net (w/ o p anel c ove r)
8 .2
7 .9
18.0
17 .5
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Probe. - 2 each. P6006 general purpose lOX voltage probes.
Provides full bandwidth capabilities for the T912.
ORDERING INFORMATION
T912 - Storage Oscilloscope
(includes two 10X probes) .••.•••..••.•• •. $1890
Option 01 , DiHerenti.1 Input ................................... Add $90
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS & PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI Univers.1 Euro 220 V / 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................................... No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V/ l0A ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V / ISA ............... No Charge
Level - Variable control selects the amplitude point on the
trigger signal when sweep triggering occurs.
Trigger Sensitivity
Auto and Norm - 0.5 div internal or 100 mV external from 2
Hz to 5 MHz, increasing to 1.5 div internal or 150 mV external
at 10 MHz.
External Trigger Input
Max Input less.
400 V (de + peak ac) 800 V pop ac at 1 kHz or
Input Re.l.lance Input Capacllance -
"" 1 MO.
Front Panel Cover
",30 pF.
X-Y OPERATION
San.ltlvlty, Variable Magnifier - ", 100 mV/div (X l0 mag),
'" 1 V/div (XI mag), for X; Y is adjusted by vertical control.
X-Axl. Bandwidth dB).
Input Resialance Input Capacllance -
Dc to at least 1 MHz (measured at - 3
",, 1 MO.
Pha.e DiHerence Between X and Y Ax is Ampfifiers in 5 · from de to 50 kHz.
Writing Rate -
At least 25 em/ms.
Enhanced Writing Rate DI.play Area -
At least 250 cm/ms.
8 x 10 em, internal graticuie.
Storage Pho.phor Beam Finder -
PI .
Locates off-screen display.
Nominal Accelerating Potential -
Snaps over the oscilloscope front panel to protect controls during transport or storage. Molded
from high-impact-resistant plastic. Storage com·
partment for two probes and cables is built into
inner side.
Order Protective front cover
(016-0340-00) •••.•.•••.••...••••••••••••••••••••••.••.. $20
",,30 pF.
CRT STORAGE DISPLAY
The T912 may be ordered with a differential input
option . In DIFF mode, the T912 displays the
difference between Channel 1 and Channel 2
signals. The Channel 2 signal is automatically
inverted: The algebraic sum of the Channel 1
signal and the inverted Channel 2 signal is then
displayed on the CRT.
POWER SOURCE (AC)
Line Voltage Ranges - H I-LO ral1Q9 accessibie externally ;
110·120 V , 220-240 V line selector vlsibie but not accessibie
externally.
100- 120 V Range - HI: 108 to 132 V RM S. LO: 90 to 110 V
RM S.
220-240 V Range - HI : 216 to 250 V RM S. LO: 19810242 V
RM S.
Line Frequency - 50 to 60 Hz.
Power Conaumption - Watts (max) 65. amps (max) 0 .6 , at
120 V , 60 Hz.
_ 2.76 kV.
With-
Dust Cover/ Rain Jacket (not shown)
Provides protection against dust accumulation
when not in use, and against rain and snow duro
ing transportation. Constructed of 15 mil tough
durable vinyl. An opening at the top allows ac·
cess to the oscilloscope handle,
Order Protective cover
(016-0361-00) ••...•.•••••.••...•••.••..•.••....••.••.. $20
C-5C Camera (not shown)
Order C-5e, Option 03 .......................... $500
249
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
Digital Multimeters ....................................... .
Counter/Timers ........................................... .
Power Supplies ........................................... ..
Digital Delay .
.. ............................. ..
Digital Latch ................................................. ..
Word Recognizer ......................................... .
Pulse Generators ......................................... .
Function Generators ................ ..
Current Probes ............................................ .
Amplifiers ....................................................... .
Calibration Generators ............................. .
Distortion Analyzer, Oscillator .................. ..
Plug-In Oscilloscopes ................................. .
Interface & Scanner ...... .
Controllers .................................................... .
Mainframes .......... .
Accessories ................................................. ..
250
254
258
265
267
267
267
268
272
277
278
279
284
286
290
292
295
298
Designed for Configurability; for Programming
Ease; for Productivity.
Test and Measurement set-up has
never been this friendly, has never
been this fast. With our new line of Tek
programmables , you can continue to build
on the concept of configurability.
Now you can link together customized ,
automated test packages over the GPIB
bus. Our IEEE-488 compatible TM 5000
programmables are configurable, with the
same plug-in, pUll-out ease as our TM 500
plug-ins. And they 're compatible, between
themselves and with over 40 TM 500 manual
instruments.
You'll find these fully programmable instruments are among the friendliest and fastest
to integrate you can buy.
Standardized instrument data formats open
up the lines of bus communication, and
makes your test and measurement system
easy to set-up and operate. Or change its
test and control functions quickly and easily.
TEK
Manual instruments that perform
in hundreds of combinations.
Configurability is the watchword for TM 500
Instruments and Mainframes. You can create multifunction packages that encompass
a wide diversity of applications. Or solve
one unique application problem.
You choose from over forty ready-to-go,
compact plug-ins for a range of test and
measurement needs. TM 500 Instruments include digital counters, pulse generators,
function generators, amplifiers, signal processors, audio oscillators, a distortion analyzer, ramp generators, calibration instruments, power supplies, oscilloscopes,
digital delay, word recognizer, and a digital
latch. Plus a blank plug-in kit for customizing
special functions.
You put your instruments together in the
mainframe that best suits your environment.
There's a travel mainframe for service work
and field testing . A rackmount model for
production and test.
With the LEARN mode, you input simple
routines to the controller directly from the
instrument via front panel settings. And you
can change a routine when necessary without having to reprogram the whole system.
Start with our two new mainframes, the TM
5003 and TM 5006.
They hold up to three or six plug-ins, yet
they're very compact. So your test package
takes up less than half the space of ordinary
rackmounted test equipment.
Add our new instrument-optimized controller, the 4041. It has a detachable keyboard
that you attach for program development
and detach for program protection. Built
around a 16-bit microprocessor with 160k
byte memory capacity, this sophisticated
controller offers two GPIB and two RS-232
ports (with Option 01), so you can optimize
system set-up. And three data transfer
speeds: normal, fast transfer and DMA. So
you can optimize program run -time .
Choose your programmable test gear from
our fully programmable Function Generator
(the FG 5010), Universal CounterfTimers
(DC 5010 and DC 5009), Digital Multimeter
(OM 5010) , and Power Supply (PS 5010) and
incorporate TM 500 Plug-ins for special
functions.
The vital link between your specific device
under test and the programmable system , is
the multifunction interface, MI 5010. The
multifunction interface acts as the "systems
glue" for your application . The multifunction
interface is a card based instrument. To customize its' capabilities you choose from
three available function cards: Digital 1/0
card , Relay Scanner card and to customize
your own card, a Development card. For additional card capacity an extender is
available.
Or standard mainframes, compact and convenient for bench or desk, that accept one
or up to six instruments. Rollabout carts are
available for lab configurations with Tek
oscilloscopes.
All TM 500 Instruments and Mainframes are
electrically and mechanically compatible. So
through interfacing you can configure an instrument more powerful than the sum of its
parts: An audio lab with distortion analyzer
and storage scope , for example.
Cost efficiency is as important a part of the
TM 500 concept as solving applications
problems is. You add on performance capabilities when you need them . And when you
do add them, you can still use the same
mainframe and power supply you started
with .
Simplify system routing and switching with a
Scanner Interface. The SI 5010, lets you preset a 16-channel, software configurable RF
switching matrix to make test connections
on command .
251
INSTRUMENTS
TEK SYSTEM
PROGRAMMING EASE
• • •
Another Order of Magnitude in
Measurement Convenience
TM 5000 Programming ...
A Commitment to Compatibility
The new TEKTRONIX TM 5000 Series of instruments is, in many respects , the same as its
predecessor, the TM 500 Series. There 's the
same range of instruments - digital multimeter,
universal counter/timers, triple power supply,
function generator, and others. And there 's the
same commitment to excellence in each
instrument.
It 's the additions and enhancements that make
TM 5000 something new. Rrst, each TM 5000
Plug-in Instrument is programmable. Plus, there
are new kinds of plug-ins - a Programmable R.F.
Scanner and a Programmable Multifunction Interface - for further test automation . And every
instrument is compatible with IEEE Standard 4881978, the instrument interfacing standard specifying what is often called the General Purpose
Interface Bus or GPIB.
TM 5000 Speaks Your l anguage
With TM 5000, compatibility is the key. And it's
more than just IEEE-488 compatibility. It's total
system compatibility, from configuring to programming. This higher level of compatibility is
achieved through conformance to the additional
standard of TEK Codes and Formats, the same
standard goveming other Tektronix IEEE-488compatible products, including a variety of instrument controllers, waveform digitizers, and special
signal analyzers. TM 5000 and Tek Codes and
Formats extend compatibility through:
• An ASCII-coded language for easy, English-like
programming.
• Command names that are descriptive abbreviations of instrument functions for simple and
direct instrument control.
• Universal message and data formats for instrument-to-instrument consistency.
In short, TM 5000 Instruments speak a system
language that is the same as your language.
Need to set your power supply to five volts?
It's easy with the TM 5000 Series Programmable
Power Supply. Just send the message VPOS 5
over the IEEE-488 bus to the power supply, and it
will change its positive output to five volts.
Want to set the negative supply to - 9 volts? Just
send VNEG 9, or even VNEG - 9. All the TM 5000
Instrument commands are simple, English abbreviations for the instrument functions , with direct
matches to the front-panel control labels where
appropriate. So, if you know how to operate the
instrument, you essentially know what commands
to send it.
What could be simpler than OCV .2 to change
your TM 5000 Programmable Multimeter to the
200 millivolt range for dc voltage measurements?
Or ACV 2 to switch it to the 2 volt range for ac
measurements? But then, you may not always be
sure of the range you need. So just send OCV or
ACV without specifying the range , and the
multimeter will auto-range to give you the best
measurement. You don't have to learn a new language to speak to an instrument or understand
instrument control messages - they 're self
documenting.
Getting Your Message Across
It doesn't take long to become familiar with the
command set for any TM 5000 Instrument. And ,
once you have that familiarity, you 'll want to begin
actually programming for automated measurements. Rrst, though, you 'll need to know something about IEEE-488 bus communication.
IEEE Standard 488 specifies overall bus functioning, leaving many implementation options to designer discretion. One option is how controllers
and instruments signal message endings to each
other. Some controllers end messages by asserting End Or Identify (EOI) concurrent with sending
the last character of a message, others by adding
a line feed (LF) character and asserting EOI concurrent with that. For compatibility, your instruments and controller must use the same message termination mode.
Whatever your choice of IEEE-488 instrument
controller, TM 5000 Instruments are designed for
compatibility. A switch on each TM 5000 Instrument lets you match it to your controller by
selecting the EOI only or EOI/LF message termination mode. But , if you 've chosen a Tektronix
controller, you won't have to bother with this
switch. All Tektronix-supplied instrument controllers use EOI only, and all TM 5000 Instruments are
shipped set for EOI only.
Along with the message terminator switch, you'll
also find that each TM 5000 Instrument has a
bank of at least five additional switches. These
are used to set the instrument's primary bus
address.
For an IEEE-488 system to work, each instrument
on the bus must have a different address. Valid
addresses range from 0 to 30, with 0 reserved in
some cases for the controller. Before connecting
your TM 5000 Instrument to the IEEE-488 bus,
make sure each instrument is set to a different
address. For powered-up instruments, address
checks can be done with the INST 10 button.
Pressing INST 10 causes the address to appear
on the instrument's display. Also, a decimal point
will be displayed after the address if the message
terminating mode is set for EOI/LF; absence of a
decimal indicates EOI only.
The primary address serves two major functions.
Rrst, it links the controller to a specific instrument.
Second, the primary address, when increased by
a specific amount, determines whether the instrument is to ·Iisten· for a message or to send data
by ·talking·.
An instrument's listen address is its primary address plus 32, and its talk address is its primary
address plus 64. So an instrument with a primary
address of 20 will have a listen address of
20+32=52, a talk address of 20+64=84.
In most cases, you won 't have to worry about
listen and talk addresses. For example, when
using a TEKTRONIX 4OSO-Series Controller with
4050 BASIC Software, just primary addresses are
used . 4050 BASIC automatically converts primary
addresses to talk and listen addresses. For example, here's a 4050 BASIC statement for sending
VPOS 5 to a PS 5010 Programmable Power Supply with a primary address of 22 PRINT @22:"VPOS 5"
PRINT is the 4050 BASIC statement for sending a
message to an instrument. The instrument's primary address, 22 is this case, is always preceded
in the statement by an "at" sign (@) and followed
by a colon. The instrument message, VPOS 5,
follows the colon and is always enclosed in
quotes. Since the instrument will be receiving the
message, PRINT causes the primary address to
be automatically incremented to a listen address.
Keep in mind , though, PRINT @22:·VPOS 5" is a
statement format specific to 4050 BASIC. Other
instrument controllers and software packages
may use different statement formats , however
the device dependent message is always the
same.
TM 5000: IEEE-488 compatibility in an attractive high density package for minimum use of bench top or system rack space.
252
In addition to being easy to program, TM 5000
Instruments are friendly and informative in respect to sending SRQ inturrupts.
TEK
AfT ,
AT"'
AT"'
TEA
TEA
'ER'
HI
SLONb
SLO
P'
COU Ac
CCU DC
CCU?
FllON
FIL OFF
FIL?
NULL ON
NUL IFF
NUL
RES
START
STOP
10'
USER ON } PRGGRAMMED FOR
USER OFF USER GENERATED SRQ
USER
,HA A.LEV \NUMI
:HA A.LEV?
CHA B.LEV (NUM)
CHA B.LEV?
~_-I+-_
CHAA
AVE (NUM)
AVE?
, . - - - - - - - -_ ,----il+- FREO A
1
PER A
CHAO
WIDA
1
RISE A
FALL A
CHA B
RAT BlA
TEST
TER HI
TER LO
TER?
An,
SLO NEG CCU AC TIME AB PROB A&B
~g?5 ~tg:os gg~?DC
TOT A TOT A+ B
TOT A B
AUTO MB
AUTO A
AUTO B
TM 5000 means friendly ' front-panel" commands for easy instrument programming",
We Interrupt this Message for a Brief
Program
With the basic message format in mind, you are
ready to begin sending messages to your instruments. However, you should be aware that your
instruments can occasionally interrupt what you
are dOing by asserting what is called an SRO
(Service Request).
over the bus. For example, here's a query sequence in 4050 BASIC to obtain the positive
voltage setting of a TM 5000 Programmable
Power Supply.
PRINT @22:"VPOS?"
INPUT @22:V$
Queries Keep You Posted
The first statement in this example questions the
instrument: ' What is your positive voltage setting?" The instrument answers by getting the
setting and putting it onto the bus as a message,
VPOS 5 for example. The INPUT statement is the
means of receiving the message and storing it in
string variable V$. When a string variable (alpha
character followed by $) is used with the INPUT
statement, the entire message is stored in the
variable .
A TM 5000 error code scheme allows individual
instruments to expand on the universal IEEE-488
system status codes, This expansion is the result
of an extensive message decoding system that
checks for syntax errors, illegal combinations, etc.
before messages can affect instrument operation . Illegal setups are prevented, and specific,
rather than generalized , error codes are available
for each instrument. These error codes can be
read over the IEEE'488 bus by sending the
instrument an error query message (ERR?).
Perhaps you are interested in all the control
settings of an instrument. SET?, a universal query
for all TM 5000 Instruments, causes the queried
instrument to send a message that lists all of its
current settings. This entire settings message can
then be stored in a string variable . (Since the
settings message can be several hundred characters long, it may be necessary with some
software packages to extend or dimension the
string variable to a length capable of holding the
message,)
You 'll also want to be able to get specific information about instrument settings , measurement
modes, etc. This type of information can be
obtained with various instrument query
messages.
The SET? feature allows you to acquire and store
a number of instrument configurations in different
string variables . Then, just by sending the appropriate string variable to an instrument, the instrument can be reset at any time to any of the
stored configurations.
The INST ID button can also be found on each TM
5000 plug-in programmed (USER ON) to generate
an SRO when it is pressed. This manually generated SRO is a convenient way for you to interrupt
and interact with measurement programs while
they are running .
All TM 5000 queries take the form of a keyword
followed by a question mark. You send the query
to the instrument as a message, and the instru'
ment answers the query by returning a message
In essence, SET? is a ' learn mode" of operation. It
allows your software to "memorize" instrument
setups for later use.
If you 'd like to experiment with this, set your
instrument to a familiar measurement configuration . Using 4050 BASIC, enter the following statements (20 is assumed here to be the address of a
DC 5010 Programmable Counter and S$ is set to
a 3OO-character length to be sure to accommodate all of the instrument's settings).
DIM S$(3OO)
PRINT @20:'SET?"
INPUT @20:S$
Now change several of the settings. Then enter
the following statement.
PRINT @20:S$
The instrument will switch its settings back to
those stored in S$.
Would you like to see what is in S$? Just enter
PRINT S$. The entire settings message will be
printed out on the terminal screen for your
inspection.
Each TM 5000 Instrument responds to a variety of
queries, each query consisting of a keyword
specific to the information desired. Would you like
to know what measurement function your DM
5010 Programmable Digital Multimeter is set up
for? Just send it "FUNC?" and the DM 5010 will
prepare to send back DCV, OHMS, DIODE, ACV ,
or ACDCV and the measure ment range the function is set for. Send the same query to your FG
5010 Programmable 20 MHz Function Generator,
and it'll prepar\J to send back FUNC SINE, FUNC
SOUARE , OR FUNC TRIANGLE , depending on
the waveform it is generating. Just another example of how TM 5000 Instruments work with you in
plain English.
253
MULTIMETERS
TEK DIGITAL
OM 5010
The addition of the new DM 5010 to the Tektronix
line of Dig ital Mult ime te rs br in gs full
programmability, IEEE-488 compatibility, and TM
500 modularity/versatility together for the first
time. Excellent performance, local math capability, and the programming ease of a high level
language make the DM 5010 an attractive link in
any IEEE -488 sys tem requir ing a digital
multimeter.
'Iry.
"Uf II- 10' II.
200 V - 1000 V Range - 10 Mil ± 0.2S%.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1000 V peak.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TRUE RMS AC VOlTS (AC and AC + DC)
Rang.. -
200 mV. 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. 700 V
Accuracy (Nannal and Fnt Conversion R.te) 6 months or 1000 hours.
100Hz to
20 kHz
20 kHz to
100 kHz
II'C t028'C
20 Hz to
100 Hz
200mV
through
200 V ranges
± (0.8%of
rdg. + .2%
of full scale)
± (O.2%of ± (I .O%of
rdg. +.2% rdg. + 0.5%.
of full scale) of full scale)
700 V range
(15 kHz Max)
± (0.8%
of rdg.
+ 0.6%
of full scale)
± ( +.2%
of rdg.
+ 0.6%
of full scale)
700 V range
(15 kHz Max)
± (0.65%
of rdg.
+ 0.95% of
full scale)
± (0.8% of rdg + 0.9% of
full scale)
O'C to II'C. 18'C to SO'C
200 mV through
200 V Range
± (1 .25% of rdg + .45% of
full scale)
700 V Range
:t (1 .25% of rdg + 1.25% of
full scale)
-
200 II. 2 kll. 20 kll. 200 kll. 2 Mil. 20 Mil.
Accuracy -
6 months or 1000 hours.
Normal
18'C to 28'C Converalon R.te
200 II to
± (0.015% of reading +
200 kll ranges 0.01 % of full scale)
Unguarded: .. 130 dB al dc ... 80 dB at 50 to 60 Hz.
Guarded: .. 140 dB at dc ... 100 dB at 50 to 60 Hz.
10 ~V.
Reapon.e Time - < 1.2 s except for LOW FREQUENCY
RESPONSE mode.
Input Impedance -
2 Mil ± 0.1% paralleled by < 150 pF.
M.xmum Input Voltage Creat Factor -
1000 V peak ac. 500 V dc.
4 (except for 700 V range).
-... B
OM 502A
.. '
~~
+,' :r
~
n
,U
...
v
~.
Fa.1
Converalon Rate
±(0.05% of reading +
0.05% of full scale)
2 Mil range
± (0.10% of reading +
0.01 % of full scale).
± (0.10% of reading +
0.05% of full scale)
20 Mil range
± (0.15% of reading +
0.005% of full scale)
± (1.0",," of reading +
0.05% of full scale)
Common Mode Rejection Ratio -
Maximum Reaolutlon -
O' C to 18 ' C.
200 Il to
200 kll ranges
2 Mil range
28 ' C to SO ' C
± (0.06% of reading +
0.035% of full scale)
:t (0.54% of reading +
0.035 of full scale)
20 Mil range ±(0.75% of reading +
0.01 % of full scale)
± (0.1% of reading +
0.1 % of full scale)
± (0.55% of reading +
0.1% of full scale)
± (1.6% of reading +
0.05% of full scale)
The OM 502A Digital Multimeter measures seven
different functions with pushbutton convenience.
Autoranging. in all modes except current. eliminates any need for operator selected ranges . The
OM 502A measures dc and ac voltage. dc and ac
current. dB. resistance and temperature. True
RMS provides more accuracy in ac measurements on distorted. noisy. random or other nonsinusoidal ac waveforms. The resistance mode
features HI-LO voltage (2 V-o.2 V). The low voltage is user-selectable for making in-circuit ohms
measurements without turning on diode and transistor junctions. The high voltage is available for
testing junctions for forward and reverse resistance. The LED indicators provide a bright.
readable 3 1/2 digit display.
DC VOLTS
Rangea - 200 mY . 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 1000 V. Aulomatic
or manual ranging.
Accuracy - 6 months or 1000 hours.
18'C to 28'C:
Digital Multimeter
Maximum Relolution - 10 mil.
Step Relponle Time (To Rated Accuracy) RUN Mode: Normal Conversion Rate - .. 1.24 s.
Fa.t Conversion Rate - .. 0.33 s.
TRIGGERED Mode: Normal Conversion Rate - .. 0.73 s.
Fait Conversion R.te - .. 0.19 s.
Maximum Input Volt. - 400 V peak.
M.xlmum Open Circuit Voltage D.veloped - < 5 vofts.
DIODE TEST
Operation - AlmA current Is generated and lhe resullant
voftage Is measured on the 2 V dc range. This produces a
voftage suffICient to tum on diode and transistor junctions.
RESISTANCE
± (0.65% of ± (1 .45%of
rdg.+ 0.3% rdg.+ 0.65%
of full scale) of full scale)
± (1 .24%
of rdg.
+ 0.95% of
full scale)
700 V Range
Range. -
O'C to II'C 28'C to SO'C
200mV
:t (1.25% of
through
rdg.+ 0.35%
200 V ranges of full scale)
AC + DC VOlTS ONLY
(Normal and Fast Conversion
R.te 10 to 20 Hz
+ 18'C to 28'C
200 mV through
(0.8% of rdg + 0.3% of
full scale)
200 V Range
OTHER CHARACTERfSTICS
Ove"ange Indication - For OHMS and DIODE TEST. · OC·
is dispiayed; for ACV. DCV. ACV + DCV. the dispiay blinks.
Menurement Rate ACV. DCV. ACV+DCV. Diode Test
3 per second at 4.5 digits
26 per second at 3.5 dlgils
Ohm.
1.6 per second at 4.5 digits
7.1 per second at 3.5 dlgils
Power Consumption - ~ 20 VA.
GPIB Commands - Addressable by 30 English-like GPIB
commands.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 set Test Leads.
ORDER OM 5010 ................................. $1995
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS
Range. - 200 mY. 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 500 V. Automatic or
manual ranging (ac coupied).
Accuracy - 6 months or 1000 hours.
18'C to 28'C:
20 Hz
40 Hz
20 kHz
200 mV to
200 V
Ranges
± [1.5% of reading
+0.3% of lull
scale (6 counts))
± [0.6% of reading
+0.3% of lull
scale (6 counts))
500 V
Range
±[1.5% of read ing
+1.2% of full
scale (6 counts))
±[O.6% of reading
+1.2% 01 lull
scale (6 counts»)
O·C to 18·C and 28·e to 50·e:
20 Hz
40 Hz
20 kHz
200 mV to
200 V
Ranges
± [1 .8% 01 reading
+9.35% 01 full
scale (7 counts»)
± [0.8% 01 reading
+0.35% 01 full
scale (7 counts)]
500 V
Range
±[1.8% of reading
+1.4% 01 lull
scale (7 counts»)
± [0.8". of reading
+1.4% 01 lull
scale (7 counts))
Typically usable to 100 kHz .
Common·Mode Rejection R.tio with I kll imbalance.
Maximum R..olution -
100
.. 60 dB at 50 Hz to 60 Hz
~V .
200 mV to
200 V Ranges
±[O.I% of read ing
+0.05% of full scale (1 count))
OM 502A
Re.pon.e Time - 1 s within a range. + 1.5 s for each range
change in autoranging mode.
1000 V Range
± [0.1 % of reading
+0.1% of full scale (1 count)]
Inpullmpedance -
True RMS
O·C to le·e and 2e·e to 50·C:
Maximum Input Voltage exceed 1000 V peak .
Autoranging
200 mV to
200 V Ranges
± [0.2% of reading
+0.1 % of full scale (2 counts))
Crell Faclor -
1000 V Range
±[O.2% of reading
+0 .2% of full scale (2 counts»)
Seven Functions including
Temperature and dB
0.1 % Dc Volts Accuracy
3 1/2 Digits
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - .. 100 dB at dc... 80 dB
at 50 Hz to 60 Hz with 1 kll imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio ± 0.2 Hz .
Maximum Resolution -
100
10 Mil paralleled by < 100 pF.
500 V ac RMS. 600
v dc. not 10
4 at full scale all ranges (.. 2 on 500 V range).
dB (TRUE RMS)
Zero dB Relerence - 1 mW in 600 II (0.775 V) (dBm). Internal
Jumper change for zero dB reference of 1.000 V (dBV).
.. 50 dB at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
~V .
Step Response Time - 1 s w~hin a range. + 1.5 s for each
range change in autoranging mode.
Input Resistance -
10 Mil.
Maximum Input Voltage -
1000 V peak.
255
MULTIMETERS
TEK DIGITAL
Ranges
Automallc or manual ranging.
Range Selected
Dynamic
Range
on front Panel
+30 dB
+lQdB
Accuracy -
6 months or 1000 hours. 18'C to 28'C:
2000102000 kO
Ranges
±[O.5% of reading +0.05% of
full scale (1 count) +0.20)
20 MO Range
±[1% of reading +0,05% of full
scale (1 count))
O"C to 18°C .nd 28°C to 50°C:
- IOdS
- 2008
200 0 to 2000 kO
Ranges
± [0.8% of reading +0.1 % of full
scale (2 counts) +0.2 0)
20 MO Range
±[1 .3% of reading +0.1% of full
scale (2 counts))
Response Time - ... , s within a range, " ' .5 s for each
range change in autoranging mode.
- 30 de
- AOdB
Maximum Input Volts - 130 V de or ac RMS indefinitely. 230
V de or ac RMS for 30 minutes maximum.
HI-LO Ohms Operation - A low voltage is user-selectable for
making in-circuit ohms measurements without turning on silicon diode and transistor junctions. A high voltage is also available for lesting junctions for forward and reverse resistance.
- SOdS
-60 dB
lyp.caltv -7508
~
IndIcates dynamIc operatIng range.
D
Indicates over or under range with blinking display.
Maximum Resolution - 0.1 Il.
Maximum Open-Circuit Voltage Developed -
Accuracy -
= 14 V.
20 kHz
Typically
±2.S dB
-so dB to -60 dB
' From O' C to 18' C and 28 ' C to 50 ' C. add 0.6 dB to above
accuracy specifications. For example, at O' C the accuracy in
the + 50 dB to - 50 dB range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz would be
" . , dB .
Noise Level - Typically - 75 dB.
Maximum Resotution - 0.1 dB.
Response Time - ~ 1 5 within a range. ~ 1.5 s for each
range change in autoranging mode.
Input Impedance - 10 Mil paralleled by < 100 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage peak .
Crest Factor -
500 V RMS . not to exceed 1000 V
DC AND TRUE' RMS AC CURRENT
Ranges - 200 .A, 2 mAo 20 mA, 200 mA, and 2000 mAo
Manual ranging only .
Accuracy Dc Cunent Only:
IS'C to 2S'C: ± 10.2% of reading + 0.05% of full scale (1
count)!.
O'C to IS'C and 2S'C to 50'C: ± 10.3% of reading + 0.1%
of full scale (2 countsl( .
Ac Cunent Only (from 40 Hz to 10kHz) Usable to 20 kHz.
IS'C to 2S'C: ± 10.6% of reading + 0.3% of full scale (6
counts)!.
O'C to IS'C and 2S'C to 50'C: ± (0.7% of reading + 0.5%
of fUll scale (10 counts)! .
4 at fUll scale (... 2 above 40 dB).
RESISTANCE
Input Resistance R.nlle
200 p,A
2 mA
20 mA
200 mA
2000 mA
Relponse Time -
Approx Rel'lt.nce
1 kO
100 {}
10.2 {}
1.20
0.4 0
.. , S.
Maximum Open Circuit Input Voltage (mA to LOW) peak , fused with 2 A fast blow.
250 V
Maximum Floating Voltage - 1000 V peak.
Maximum Resolution - 0.1 .A.
TEMPERATURE
Range - - 55' C to + 200· C.
Resolution - O.I ' C.
Accuracy -
+ 18' C to + 28 ' C ambient temperature·
Temperature to be Me.lured
-SS"C
+150 o C
+200"C
P6601 Probe and OM 502A
calibrated as a pair
±2.SoC
±3.50C
P6601 and instrument not
calibrated as a pair
±4.5°C
±S.soC
•For 0' C to + 18' C and 28 ' C to 50 ' C ambient temperatures,
add + 1.SoC to accuracy specifteaUons .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Ovenange Indication - Blinking display (except 1000 V de
and 500 V ac).
Measurement Rate -
3 per second .
Power Consumption - = 8 watts.
Inputs - Maximum inpul voltage is 1000 V. The front panel
voltS/II, or LOW, or mA terminal can be floated 1000 V peak
max above ground, the rear input 200 V peak. For the rear
input , ac volts, ohms and maximum input SpecifICations are
derated.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair test leads 003-0120-00, One P6601 Temperature
Probe 010-6601 -01 .
ORDERING INFORMATION
OM 502A ......•.•.•• ,................................... $550
Ranges - 200 II, 2 kll, 20 kll, 200 kll, 2000 kll, and 20 Mil.
Automatic or manual ranging.
Option 02 (Deletes temperature probe
and capability) ....................................................... Sub $125
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The fOllowing accessories may be ordered as optionS for use
with any of the three TM 500 Digital Multimeters.
..
013-0107-03
~
P6601
TEMPERATURE PROBE
012-0426-00
012-042S-00
012-0426-01
Telt Lead, Black, 4 It 012-0425-00 ............................ $10.25
Test Lead, Red , 4 It 012-0426-00 .............................. $15.50
The P660l Probe is a temperature measuring device designed to operate with the OM 502A and
OM 501A Digital Multimeters. The temperature
sensing element consists of a thin-film platinum
resistor on the tip of the probe. Measurements
are made by touching the sensing element to the
surface whose temperature is in question. The
thermal signal is transmitted to the associated
digital multimeter through a two· conductor cable.
The thermal time constant on the P660l Probe is
0.5 s ± 0.2 S . The P660l is totally immersible ex·
cept in liquids that are not compatible with Dow
Corning 308 molding compound, SeQ, silicone
rubber, or epoxy adhesives. The sensor and tip
are limited to a max of 240°C, and cable is limited
to a max of 140°C.
Order P6601 Temperature Probe
010-6601-01 ....... ,.... ,...... , ... ,.................. $180
256
Test Lead, Black, 4 It 012-0426-01 ........................... $15.50
Test Lead Set of 012-0425-00, 012-0426-00, and
013-0107.03. 012.0427-00 ............................................... 529
High Voltage Probe to 40 kV (complete information
page 300) Order 010-0277-00 ....................................... 5115
P6420 RF Probe, 2 m Cable included (complete
information page 327) Order 010-6420-03 .................... $120
Female BNC to dual banana adapter
Order 103.0090·00 ........................................................ $7.50
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
The lollowing environmental specs are common to all three
digital multimeters.
Temperature - Operating in mainframe: O' C to 50' C. Nonoperating: - 55 ' C to + 75 ' C. MIL·T-28800B Class 5.
Humidity - 95% to 100% for 5 days (derated above 25 ' C).
MIL·T-22800B, Class 5.
Altitude - Operating in mainfraMe: to 15,000 It (4.6 km). Nonoperating : To 50,000 tt (15 km), MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
Vibration - In TM 515 Mainframe: 0.38 mm (0.015 in) displacement 1 to 55 Hz sinewave for 75 minutes MIL-T-2BBOOB,
Class 5. In TM 501 , TM 503, TM 504, or TM 505 mainframe:
0.26 mm (0.010 in) displacement, 10-55 Hz sinewave. 75 minutes total.
Without mainframe: MIL-T·28800B , Class 3: 0.060 in 5-10 Hz,
0.040 in 5-25 Hz, 0.020 in 25-55 Hz.
Shock - Operating in TM 515 Mainframe: 30 g's, 1/2 sine, 11
ms duration, 18 shocks, MIL-T-28800B, Class 5. Operating in
TM 501 , TM 503, TM 504 , or TM 506 mainframe: 20 g's 1/2
sine, 11 ms duration, 18 shocks.
Without mainframe : MIL·T-28800B, Class 3; 30 g's, 1/2 sine.
11 ms duration, 18 shocks.
Bench Handling - Drop from Operating 45 ' or 4 in or equilibrium, whichever occurs first. MIL-T-2BBOOB,Class 3.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Operating in mainframe 30
Hz 10 1 GHz : MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
Electrical Discharge - Operating in mainframe 20 kV max.
No MIL·T-28800B equivalent. Charge applied to each protruding area of the front panel except input tenninals.
Transportation - Vibration: 25 mm (1 in). at 270 rpm for 1
hour without mainframe; National Safe Transit Association
Preshipmenl Test. Package Drop: 10 drops from 91 em (3 tt)
without mainframe.
Tektronix offers maintenance training classea on the
TM 500 Calibration Systems Package and a new multimedia training package on Digital Counter and Meter Concepts. For TM 5000 training and other training information,
contact your local Sales Office or request 8 copy of the
Tektronix Customer Training Catalog.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
Range. - 200 mY. 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 500 V (accoupled),
Accuracy - 18'C to 28'C, 6 monlhs or 1000 hours.
OM 501A
20 Hz
40 Hz
10 kHz
±[0.6% 01
±[1%01
reading
reading
+0.05% 01 +0.05% 01
lull scale
lull scale
(10 counts)] (10 counts))
±[I%ol
reading
+0.2% 01
lull scale
(10 coun ts) ]
±[1% 01
reading
+0.2% 01
full scale
(10 counts))
±[0.6% 01
read ing
+0,2% 01
lull scale
(10 counts))
Doe to laoe and 2aoC 10 50 oe :
500 V
Range
20 Hz
Digital Multimeter
OM 501A
0.05 % dc Voltage Accuracy
Seven Functions
20 kHz
±[1% 01
reading
+0.05% 01
lull scale
(10 counts)]
200 mV
to 200 V
Ranges
40 Hz
10 kHz
±[0.8% of
reading
+0.075% 01
lull scale
(15 counts))
20 kHz
±[1 .3% of
reading
+0,075% 01
lull scale
(15 counts)]
200 mV
10200 V
Ranges
±[1 .3% 01
reading
+0,075% 01
full scale
(15 coun ts))
500 V
Range
±[1 .3% 01
+[1 ,3% of
±[0.8% 01
reading
reading
read ing
+ 0.3% 01
+0,3% 01
+0.3% 01
full scale
full scale
lull scale
(15 counts)) (15 counts)] (15 counts)]
Common-Mod. Rejection Ratio - .. 60 dB at 50 Hz to 60 Hz
with 1 kll imbalance.
Ma.imum Resolution - 10 ~V ,
Relponle Time - < 2 seconds.
Input Impedance - 10 MU paralleled by 160 pF.
Mallmum Input Voltage - 500 V ac RMS. 600 V de. not to
exceed 1000 V peak .
Cr••t Factor - 4 at full scale,
dB (TRUE RMS)
Zero dB Reference - 1 mW in 600 U (0.775 V) (dBm) Internal
jumper change for zero dB reference of 1,0000 V (dBV).
Accuracy - 18 ' C to 28 ' C'
dB
4 1/2 Digits
20 Hz
True RMS
2 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
+20 dB 10 -15 dB
Typically
±2.5 dB
-15 dB to - 20 dB
The DM SOlA Digital Multimeter measures dc and
ac voltage. dc and ac current, resistance. dB and
temperature, The DM 501A gives 4 1/2 digits of
readout resolution . All with 0,05% accuracy and
true RMS capability, True RMS allows accurate
measurement of distorted wave forms, DB is
useful when making critical audio and communication measurements, Fast accurate temperature
measurements to 240·C come from the
TEKTRONIX P6601 platinum film temperature
sensing probe, The P6601 reaches 90% aHinal
reading in 1,5 seconds.
'From O' C to 18' C and 28 ' C to 50 ' C. add 0.6 dB to above
accuracy specifications.
Ma.lmum Resolution - 0,1 dB.
Relpon.e Time - < 2 seconds,
Input Impedance - 10 Mil paralleled by < 160 pF,
Malimum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS . not to exceed 1000 V
peak, Equivalent to + 54 dBV or + 56.2 dBm.
erelt Factor - 4 at full scale.
ange Selected
on front
Dynamic
Panel
Range
DC VOLTS
Range. - 200 mY . 2 V. 20 V. 200 V. and 1000 V.
Accuracy - 18 ' C to 28·C. 6 months or 1000 hours
- 20 dB
- 40 dB
+ 0'"
- 10<18
200 mV Range
±[0.05% 01 reading +0.015% 01
lull scale (3 counts)]
-20'"
2 V to 200 V
Ranges
±[0.05% 01 reading +0 .01% 01
lull scale (2 counts))
-<0'"
1000 V Range
± [0.05% 01 reading +0.02% 01
lull scale (2 counts))
-30 '"
-so ...
-<0'"
OAlfererced 10 1 Y
DoC to laoC end 2aoC to 50°C:
200 mV to 200 V
Ranges
± [0,1% 01 reading +0,025 01 lull
scale (5 counts)]
1000 V Range
±[0.1% 01 reading ±0.05% 01
lull scale (5 counts)]
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - ;;. 100 dB at dc, ;;.80 dB
at 50 Hz and 80 Hz with 1 kU imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio - .. 60 dB at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
± 0,2 Hz,
Malimum Resolution - 10 ~V ,
Step Response Time - .. 1 second,
Input Resilience - 10 MU,
Malimum Input Voltage - 1000 V peak,
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS
Input ligna I must be between 5% and 100% 01 lull Icale.
121 indicates dynamic opendlng range
o
indicates out of range with blinking display
To obtain the correct dB reading. algebraically add the range
selected to the display reading (' dynamic range' should be
± 20 dB Irom range reflected on front panel except + 54 dB).
RESISTANCE
Relponle Time - < 2 sec in 200 li to 2000 kll ranges ; < 10
sec in 20 Mil range,
Maximum tnput VOItI - 250 V peak,
Ma.imum Relolution - 10 mil,
HI·LO OHM Operation - A low voltage is user-selectable for
making in-circuit ohms measurements without turning on silicon diode and transistor junctions, A high voltage is also available for testing junctions for forward and reverse resistance.
Maximum Open-Circuit Voltage D.veloped - < 6 V,
Ranges - 200 II. 2 kH. 20 kll. 200 kll. 2000 kll. and 20 Mil,
Accuracy - 18' C to 28'C, 6 months or 1000 hours,
2000 Range
LO 0
± [0.15% of re ading
+0 . 015~)]Of full scale
(3 counts
±[0.15% of reading
2 kO to 2000
HIO
kO Ranges
to . 015~tf full scale
3 counts
± [O.IS% of reading
2 Ie{} to 200 kO
LO 0
+ O.OlS% of full scale
Ranges
(3 counts)]
± [0.3% of reading
2000 kO Range LO 0
+0.015% of full scale
(3 counts)]
20 1.10 Range
± [0.5% 01 read in g
HI 0 only
(!~g~~~t' full scale
ooe 10 laoC end 2aoe to 50 0e
2000 Range
LO 0
± [0.3% of reading
+0.025% of full scale
(S counts)]
2 kO to 2000
HIO
± [0,3% of reading
kO Ranges
+0.025% of full scale
(5 counts)]
2 kO to 200 Ie{}
LO 0
± [0.3% of read ing
Ranges
+0.025% of full scale
(5 counts)]
201.10 Range
HIO
±[1 .2% of reading
LO 0 2000 kO
~~~~~;;)]Of full scale
RanDe
DC AND TRUE RMS AC CURRENT
Ranges - 200 ~A . 2 mAo20 mA o200 mAoand 2000 mAo
Accuracy - 6 months or 1000 hours,
Dc Current only:
18 ' Ct028 ' C - ± 10,2% of reading - O.OlS% of full scale (3
countsll,
O'C to 18'C and 28'C - ± 10,3% of reading = 0,025% of
full scale (5 counts)],
Ac Current only: (from 20 Hz to 10kHz):
Input signal mu.t be between 5% and 100% of full scale.
18 'C t028 ' C - ± 10,6% ofreadlng + 0.05% of full scale (10
countsll,
O'C to 18'C and 28'C to 50'C ± 0,7% of reading
+ 0,075% of full scale (15 countsf-), Usable to 20 kHa,
Relponle Time - < 1 sec de current. < 2 sec ac current.
Input Impedance Ren •
rox. R.al.tanca
2 A
20 m
1000
2000 m
0.4
Maximum Open·Circuit Input Voltage (mA to LOW) peak. fused with 2 A fast blow.
Maximum Floating Voltage - 1000 V peak.
Maximum Resolution - 10 nA.
250 V
TEMPERATURE
Range - - 62' C to + 240' C,
Resolution - O,l ' C.
Accuracy - 18' C to 28' C ambient lemperature.'
Temperature to be measured
-620C +150 oe
+240 o e
P6601 and OM 50 l A
+
0°
C
to
-6°C
calibrated as a pair
P6601 and Instrumen t
+2°C to -80C
not calibrated as a pair.
'For O' C to 18 ' C and 28 ' C to 50'C ambient temperatures.
add 1.5'C 10 above limit in each direction.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Overrange Indication - Blinking display (except on 1000 V de
and 500 V ac ranges),
Measurement Rate - 3 1/3 per second,
Power Consumption - ",, 9 walls,
Inputs - Maximum inpul voltage is 1000 V, The front panel
Volts/. or LOW. or mA terminals can be floated to 1000 V peak
max , above ground . the rear input only 200 V peak, For the
rear input. ac volts. ohms.and maximum input speclications are
derated,
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One pair of test leads 003-0120-00 ; one P6601 Temperature
Probe 010-6601 -01. For environmental specifications and accessories see previous page,
ORDERING INFORMATION
OM 501 A Digital Multimeter ................. $630
Option 02 (deletes P6601 Temperature Probe
and temperature measurement capability) ......... Sub S125
257
DIGITAL
TEK COUNTERS
Now, more counter capability than ever before.
The 135 MHz DC 5009 and the 350 MHz DC 5010,
both fully programmable, IEEE-488 compatible
Universal Counter Timers feature Reciprocal Frequency, Auto-Trigger, Probe Compensation, and
more. The DC 509 and DC 510 provide all of the
performance of the DC 5009 and DC 5010 except
IEEE-488 compatibility. And that can be added as
a field modification at a later date.
Fully programmable
Frequency and Period to 135 MHz
Eight measurement functions:
Reciprocal Frequency (8 digits in ,,;;; 1 s)
Period and Period Average
Width and Width Average
Add the DC 508A, the DC 503A, and the DC 504
and you have a counter selection to satisfy
virtually any application.
Time A
+
B and Time A -
B Average
Events B During A and Events B During
Average
The DC 508A is a 1.3 GHz communications
counter ideal for high frequency applications. The
DC 508A, which features an audio frequency
resolution multiplier, is particularly applicable to
telecommunications, aerospace and two-way
communications.
Totalize
Time Manual
Ratio B/A and Ratio B/A Average
The DC 503A is a 125 MH z Universal
CounterfTimer designed for field service and
general maintenance applications. The DC 503A
is designed to offer a wide choice of performance features at an affordable price.
DC 509
UNIVERSAL COUNTER TIMER
DC 5009
PROGRAMMABLE UNIVERSAL
COUNTER TIMER
•
The DC 504 is an 80 MHz, General Purpose
Counter available at an affordable price. The
compact size of the DC 504 makes it particularly
suitable for field service applications.
Duty cycle independent Auto-Trigger from
20 Hz to 100 MHz in 2.5 seconds for both
channels
Trigger level and shaped outputs for ease
of triggering
10 ns single-shot resolution in all timing
modes
The DC 5009 IS deSigned to comply with IEEE
Standard 488-1978 and with Tektronix Codes and
Formats Standard . The DC 509 IS Identical to the
DC 5009 except that It IS not GPIB compatible
Designed for serviceability including power·
up self test and Signature analYSis
Auto or Selected Averaging from 1 to 108 in
all modes
Probe compensation mode for true probe
compatibility
Arming for added measurement capability
with complex waveforms
DIGITAL COUNTERS-SELECTION GUIDE
DC 503A
DC 504
DC 50BA
DC 509/DC 5009
DC 510/DC 5010
Number 01 digits
8
5
9
8
9
Frequency Range
125 M Hz
80 MHz
1.3 GHz
135 MHz
350 MHz
Ratio Architecture
NO
NO
NO
Y ES
YES
YES , plus
Averag ing
YES
YES , plus
Averaging
YE S
NO
YE S, plus
Ave rag ing
Width Averaging
(lingle Input)
YES
NO
NO
YES
Time Interval Avg .
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
Auto· Trigger
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
A duri ng B
NO
NO
B d uring A
B du r ing A
YES
NO
NO
YES
Period
Gated Event. Avg .
Ratio Averaging
Other
Price
258
Option 01 ,
Option 01 ,
tr igger
rp m
level &
shaped ou l puts , t i me
manu al,
to talize
$930
$600
YES
Opt io n 01 ,
Opti on 07,
resolution
multipl ie r ,
1 Mr! /50 r!
inpu t
Option 01 ,
trigge r
level &
shaped outputs , sel'tes t , phase
mod ulated
cl ock , pro be
compe nsa t ion
IEEE 488
(DC 5009)
full y
progra mm able
(DC 5009)
Option 01 ,
trigge r
level &
shaped o ut·
pu ts , se lftes t , phase
mod ul ated
cloc k, p ro be
compensa t ion
1 pi cose c ond
resolut ion
(Time A· B)
IEEE 488
(DC 5010)
fu ll y
p rogramm abl e
(DC 5010)
$1500
$1700/2200
$3100/3600
The DC 509/DC 5009 Universal CounterfTimer
makes frequency and period measurements to
135 MHz using the powerful reciprocal counting
technique. This method provides high resolution
of low frequency signals much faster than conventional counting techniques. Signals to be
counted or timed can be applied to channels A or
B via front panel BNC connectors or rear interface
connections.
The DC 5009 is designed to operate in TM 5000
Mainframes. The DC 509 will operate in both the
TM 500 and the TM 5000 Series. The DC 509
offers a broad range of versatile features including Auto-Trigger, Auto-Averaging, and Probe
Compensation.
Auto-Trigger, at the push of a button, senses the
applied signal and sets both trigger levels to the
optimum trigger paints. Channel A and B trigger
levels can be monitored at front panel jacks or via
rear interface connections. Available are buffered
voltages corresponding to the trigger levels set
by the front panel controls ()r the Auto-Trigger.
Also available over the IEEE-488 bus are the
minimum and maximum peaks signal voltage
values as well as the mid point values for both
channels. Trigger level outputs are essential for
accurate time interval measurements, especially
when the rise and fall time of the signal accounts
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
------------------------------
for a sizable portion of the time interval to be
measured. The outputs of the signal shaping
circuits can be monitored, also. These outputs
are useful in setting the trigger points on complex
waveforms.
The DC 509/DC 5009 provides ten measurement
functions, and an averaging feature allows measurements to be averaged from 1 to 1()8 times
with usable resolution to 5 picoseconds. A pseudo-random, phase-modulated time base, standard in the DC 509/DC 5009, provides increased
accuracy by eliminating clock-synchronous errors
in the time interval and width averaging modes.
The DC 509/DC 5009, a microprocessor-based
instrument, executes an extensive self-test routine when powered up. A unique feature-Probe
Compensation-permits quick and accurate compensation of signal probes. An arming input
allows measurements of selected events within
complex waveforms.
The English-like programming language makes
GPIB control of the DC 5009 easy. The GPIB
commands allow full access to all DC 5009
controls and features.
The DC 509/DC 5009 can be equipped with an
optional oven-controlled, 10 MHz crystal oscillator
(Option 01) to obtain a more accurate, highly
stable time base.
A conversion kit is available to owners of DC
509's who desire IEEE-488 capabilities. This option is a field modification kit which easily converts a DC 509 to DC 5009.
DC 509/5009 CHARACTERISTICS
Display - Eight- I 2 V X attenuator will
cause Input protectIOn circuitry to switCh input to 1 MO.
Shaped Out - Shaped replica of signal being measured. aids
proper triggering on complex waveforms (;;. 200 mV typically
;;. 100 into 50 II load).
Arming Input - Permits measurements of complex waveforms . A TTL high allows averaging of selected events within a
• LSD + ~( I Start Trigger Jitter Error ± Stop Trigger
\ N
Jitter Error).
Accuracy - ResolutIOn I (Time Base Error x Width)+ (Stop
Slew Rate Error - Start Slew Rate Error) I 2 ns.
Minimum Time, Start to Stop -
TIME MANUAL
Range -
0 to 3.125 x 10'
Resolution Accuracy -
I LSD (100 ms).
TOTALIZE A
Repetition Rate -
TOTALIZE A + B
Repetition Rate -
36 "Hz to 350 MHz.
Resolution I (Time Base Error x Frequency A.)
0 to 350 MHz.
N
Resolution I (Time Base Error) x Period A.
RATIO B/A
Reaolution I LSD I 1.4 x B Trigger Jitter Error X Frequency B
N
5.0 ns to 10' s. (1 MO and 50 n.)
B
2.0 ns to 7.6 hours.
x ( I Ch A T"gger Jitler Error I Ch B
Trigger Jitter Error)
Resolution I (Time Base Error x Time A ~ B) + (Ch B Slew
Rate Error) ± (Channel Delay MismatCh').
' Can be removed with 'Null" .
Best time A -
Minimum Dead Time -
B Avg. resolution -
I I psec.
12.5 ns (stop to start).
< 70 MHz.
EVENTS B DURING A
Range -
6•
O· C to 50· C.
", t ppm/year.
Adjustable to Within I 5 x 10 - B.
10 - ' to 10' .
350 MHz
M..lmum A Frequency -
80 MHz
Minimum A Pulse Width tween pulses).
Reaolution i LSD + Frequency B
VN
10 MHz .
± 2 x 10 -
7
after warm-up. O·C to 50 · C.
Warm -up Time - Within ± 2 x 10 - 7 of final frequency in < 10
minutes when COld-started at 25 · C.
Setability -
:b
LSD +
( ± Start Trigger Jitter Error
VN
± Stop Trigger Jitter Error.)
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x RISE/FALL
TIME) :!: 2 ns ± 4 mV x Slew Rate A Error (near 10%) ± 4 mV
Slew Rate A Error (near 90%).
+ (en2)' (Volts RMS)
Where enl - 140"V RMS typical Counter Input noise for 1 Mil
filter on ; 240 "V RMS typical for 1 M!! filter off and 340 "V
RMS tYPical for 50 !!.
en2 - RMS Noise Voltage of input signal at trigger point
measured with the appropriate bandwidth .
Slew Rate Error (seconds) -tri er level error volts
npu sew ra e a rigger poln
' T"gger level error All lunctions
Pos slope trigger accuracy times
except Width
ATTN factor
and Events B
Width A .
Neg slope
...rt.. start edge
4.0 ns (and 8.5 ns min . time bestop edge
""'l..I'" start edge
I Trigger Jitter Error
Ch A st art edge
I Trigger Jitter Error Ch A stop
edge).
stop edge
Events B
Dur A
Adjustable to WIthin ± 2 x 10 - a.
REAR INTERFACE
ReSOlution -
Dur A
Muimum B Frequency -
HIGH STABILITY TIME BASE (OPTION 01)
Input amplitude - (1.4 V to 8 V) X Attenuation (SO 0). (.7 V to
4 V) X Attenuation (1 MO.)
Input slew rate at trigger point (Volts/Sec)
Accuracy -
Rep Rate -
Aging rate -
10 MHz.
I 5 x 10 -
Aging Rate - 1 x 10 - ' /day at time of Shipment. - 4 x
10 - B/week after 30 days o f continuous operation. 1 x
10 - ' /year after 60 days of continuous operation.
V (enl)'
Relolulion -
Reaolution -
Temp. Stability -
Repetilion Rate Minimum time between rising (falling)
edges is 12.5 ns (80 MHz).
T"gger Jitter Error (seconds RMS) TIME A -
~
STANDARD TIME BASE
Crystal Frequency -
Temp. Stability -
0 to 350 MHz.
Resolution and Accuracy Definitions -
Same as Resolution .
VN
The sum of all errors specified for the time
Repetition Rate -
:!:
10 - , to 10' (Frequency range 36 " Hz to 350 MHz)
± LSD +
Time Bese Error base used .
Crystal Frequency -
Range -
Relolutlon I LSD I 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Error
Range -
Freq. A (Hz) x .3 seconds (N always ;;. 1).
Probe Comp Display indicates 1 for over comp. 0 for under
comp. Accuracy - (A X 0.300)%. A - Probe Attenuation times
counter attenuatar setting .
Range - - 1 x l{)l1to + 1 x 10' (either A > 10" or B > 10"
WIll cause overflow).
RISE /FALL A
PERIOD A
3.125 ns to 7.6 hours .
Accuracy -
N
Setability -
N
Range -
In the AUTO mode the counter measures With a fixed measurement time of about 300 ms (or the time for one event. whichever is grea ter.
TOTALIZE A - B
± LSD I 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Error x (Frequency A)2
Accurlcy -
ThiS typically leads to better than expected resolution in the
displayed answer for small N with only minimal impact on measurement time. It does mean however that Arming must be
used where only N - t Is desired for signals ;;. 250 Hz.
0 to 350 MHz.
0 to 10' counts (A + B '" 10').
Resolution -
Range -
hours).
0 to 10' counts.
Range -
Range -
FREQUENCY A
Accuracy -
s( ~ 8
I Resolution I (TIme Base Error x TIME).
measurement.
Range -
.. 8.5 ns.
The minimum number of averages is selected by the AVERAGES button and the 1 ! buttons in decade steps from 1 to
10". At Channel A repetition rates above = 250 Hz the actual
number of averages will be:
N
IFreq. A (Hz) x 4 msl + Averages.
N - Averages setting (below 250 Hz).
Inputs Outputl -
Arming ; reset ; external time base (1 .5. or 10 MHz)
1 MHz clock .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Consumption DC 510: t5 W ~ (19 W with Option 01).
DC 5010: 15.5 W ~ (19 . 5 W with Option 01).
GPIB Data Output Rate (DC 50tO only) cond maxImum .
GPIB Commands (DC 5010 only) lISh-like GPIB commands.
~ 10
readings/se-
Addressable by 45 Eng-
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
One each shaped Output Cable 012-0532-00.
RECOMMENDED PROBE
P61255 X Passive Probe 010-6125-01
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 510 ................................................. $3100
DC 5010 .... ........................................... $3600
Option 0 t High Stability Time Base ..................... Add $275
Field GPIB Kit lor DC 510 040- t 023-00 ......................... 500
;trigger accuracy ± 10 mY)
times ATTN factor
trigger accuracy times ATTN
factor
(trigger accuracy + hyst)
times ATTN factor
(trigger accuracy + hyst) times
ATTN factor
trigger accuracy times ATTN
factor
Same as Width. except each number is
multiplied by (Freq B)
Note : Input hysteresIs is typically 50 mV pop x attenua tion.
N - Number of Averages
261
DIGITAL
TEK COUNTERS
Maximum Operating Input Voltage - For 50 Il is .;;7 V peak.
For 1 Mil 1X attenuation, V peak .. 400 V; V pop < 300 V from
10 Hz to 0.75 MHz, V pop 225/fMHz V from 0.75 MHz to 22
MHz, V POp .. 1a V above 22 MHz; for a pulse, V peak .;;400 V
and dV/dt .. 5 V/ns. For 1 Mil, lOX attenuation, V peak .. 400
V; V pop .. 300 V Irom 10Hz to 1 MHz, V pop < 3OO/fMHz V
Irom 1 MHz to 6 MHz, V pop < 100 V above 6 MHz.
DC 508A
lie _
I 181h COUNTER
OVUUlaw
IIHI
INSI'\.A'I'ml[~
.1lI
1"
GA~I
Uti
_ct
""KALE
Attenuation -
ruOl!JlIOII
TflAUlf
•
.Uv
"".
"'"
... ...~
DC 503A
lX , lOX .
Resolution (without resolution multiplier) - 0.1 Hz with lOs
gate, 1 Hz with 1 s gate, 10 Hz with 100 ms gate, 100 Hz with
lams gate, and 1 kHz with 1 ms gate.
Rear Interlace Internal Input Sensitivity 50 MHz .
125 mV RMS to
Rear Interlace Internal Input Impedance -
50 Il.
~,
~
0 1
Rear Inlerlace Internal Input Maximum Input Voltage Resolution Multiplier Frequency Range Resolution Multiplier Multiplication Resolution Multiplier Lock Time -
4 V.
10Hz to 25 kHz.
Xloo,
< 5 s.
PRE SCALE INPUT ( + 8)
Frequency Range -
Frequency Counter
Impedance VSWR -
DC SOBA
Frequency up to 1.3 GHz
Sensitivity to 20 mY RMS Prescale,
15 mY RMS Direct.
X 100 Resolution Multiplier to 25 kHz
100 MHz to 1.3 GHz.
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS from < 100 MHz to ;;. 1.1 GHz
( - 21 dBm) 40 mV RMS ( - 15 dBm) from 1.1 to 1.3 GHz.
DC S03A
.. 2.2:1.
Maximum Operating Input Voltage <; 2 V (+1 9 dBm).
V peak .. 15 V, V RM S
125 MHz both A and B channels
Resolution - 1 Hz with 8 s gate, 10 Hz with 800 ms gate, 100
Hz with 80 ms gate, and 1 kHz with 8 ms gate.
Input Protection Voltage ( + 30 dBm).
Input Out· of·Range LED - Indicates voltage or frequency too
low for error-free counting .
TIME BASE
Front Panel Fuse Protection on
Prescale Input
Frequency - 10 MHz; may also be used with external time
bases with TIL levels at " 5, and 10 MHz.
Temperature Stability Aging Rate -
O' C to 50 'C -
1 x 10 - . per year.
DISPLAY
Nine-digit LED display. leading zeros blanked, automatic decimal point poSitioning . LED front panel indicators lor gate open,
overflow, kHz. and MHz.
DIRECT INPUT
Frequency Range Sensitivity Impedance -
10Hz to 100 MHz .
15 mV RMS .
Selectable 50 !! and 1 Mil paralleled by 25 pF.
10 ps Resolution in Time Interval
Average with 10' Averages
10 MHz.
Temperature Stability, O'C to 50'C After Warmup 0.2 parts in 10' after warmup.
Within
Warmup Time - Within ± 0.2 ppm of final frequency in < 10
minutes when cold-started at 25 °C.
Aging Rate - .. 1 x 10 - 8 /day at time of shipping ... 4 x
10 - 8 /week after a month of continuous operation ... 1 x
10 - ' /year aiter two months of continuous operation.
Setability- ± 2xl0 - · .
Rear Inputs -
Frequency, reset , external clock, start count.
Rear Outputs - BCD , decimal point. time slot zero. scan
clock, data good, overflow, reset , gate out.
ACCURACY
The overall DC 508A accuracy is:
Accuracy (% of reading) ~ ± (time base accuracy
+
1
) x 100.
I total displayed counts I
Time base accuracy '" ± Icalibration accuracy + temperature
stability + (aging rate x time since calibration) + short-term
stability I.
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 50BA Frequency Counter ............. $1500
Option 01 (Time Base) .......................................... Add $275
Option 07 (Includes Option 01 Time Base)
for use with TR 502 ............................................... Add $325
262
Events A During B Average
Ratio A/B Average
(OVEN OSCILLATOR)
Frequency -
Frequency
Period and Period Average
Width and Width Average
Time A-.B and Time A-.B Average
Totalize
Time Manual
± 5 x 10 - ' .
OPTION 01 TIME BASE
The DC 508A Counter, designed to operate in TM
SOOITM 5000 Series Mainframes, measures fre·
quency from 10 Hz to 1.3 GHz. A nine-digit LED
display shows frequency or total events from 0 to
999,999,999. The prescaler input allows it to measure frequency from 100 MHz to 1.3 GHz, and the
direct input from 10 Hz to 100 MHz. The decimal
point is automatically positioned and leading zeros suppressed. Digit overflow is indicated by a
front panel LED. Option 01 includes a highstability time base, and Option 07 includes Option
01 and an interface for the TR 502 and TR 503
Tracking Generator/Spectrum Analyzer. An audio
frequency resolution multiplier multiplies the resolution by 100 from 10 Hz to 25 kHz. This allows
resolution of 0.Q1 Hz in 1 second . Detent position
of Display Time knob provides a hold mode.
Eight measurement functions
Input fuse opens at = 9 V RMS
Input Out-of-Range Light
Nine Digit LED Readout
Universal Counter/Timer
50 II.
Shaped Outputs for Ease of Triggering
40 MHz Rep Rate in Time Interval Average
Simplified Width Measurement
Designed for True Probe Compatibility
Trigger level Outputs for
Accurate Trigger Setting
The DC 503A offers a broad range of measurement features at an affordable price. The instrument has two input channels, A and S, each with
125 MHz capability. Each channel has separate
triggering level, triggering slope, attenuator, and
coupling mode controls. Eight measurement functions are available with the DC 503A and an averaging feature allows measurements to be
averaged from 1 to 10S times. Signals to be
counted or timed can be applied to channels A
and S via front panel SNC connectors, or through
rear interface connections. The DC 503A features
an easy access front panel and an LSI based design for increased instrument reliability.
The DC 503A can be equipped with an optional
oven-controlled 10 MHz crystal oscillator (Option
01) to obtain a highly stable and precise intemal
time base. Both the optional oscillator and the
standard 10 MHz crystal oscillator provide 100 ns
resolution of single-shot time intervals.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
DC 503A CHARACTERISTICS
Display - Eight digit LED display, LED indicators lor units,
gate open, and overflow.
Display Time -
",,0 .2 seconds to 5 seconds and hold.
CHANNEL A AND B INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
°
Frequency Range MHz, ac coupled.
to 125 MHz, de coupted. 10 Hz to 125
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS sine wave to 100 MHz, 35 mV
RMS sinewave to 125 MHz. 60 mV p.p; at min pulse width 01 5
ns to 100 MHz. 100 mV p.p at min pulse widm of 4 ns to 125
MHz.
Impedance -
1 Mil paralleled by ",,27 pF.
Attenuation -
Selectable IX, 5X .
Dynamic Range Trigger Level -
Yin < 3 V p.p; x Attenuation.
Adjustable ± 3.5 V x Attenuation.
Independent Controls - Slope +/-, Atten. lX/5X , Coupl.
AC/DC, Source INT/EXT.
Accuracy.,b,c,d =
v'N
+ Ch a start trigger Jitter error
-
v'N
v'N
+ (Ch a stop slew rate error - Ch a start slew rate error)
Frequency Range -
TIME A -.. B (SINGLE SHOT)
Range -
lOOns to 10'5.
Resolution -
FREQUENCY A
0 to 125 MHz.
Resolution -
100 ns to 1()'l s.
Accuracya,c = ± 1 oount ± time base error x Period a ± 1.4
x Ch a trigger Jitter error.
0 to 125 MHz.
PERIOD B (Average)
Range -
8 ns to 10 s.
Resofutlon -
12.5 ns (Stop.to-Start).
Number 01 Averages -
N
Accuracy·,b,c,d
1 Is (10 -
Number 01 Average -
~
to 100 ns in decade steps.
N - 1 to lOS.
Accurecy8,b,c = ± J..QQ..!!! ± time base error x Period 8
N
0 to 125 MHz.
WIDTH B (SINGLE SHOT)
Range -
lOOns to 1()'ls.
Resolution -
lOOns to 10 5 in decade steps.
± 1 count ± time base error x Width a .
± Ch a start trigger Jitter error
:t Ch a stop trigger jitter error
+ (Ch a stop slew rate error-Ch a start slew rate error).
WIDTH B (AVERAGE)
5 ns to 10 s.
Resolution 100 ns
v'N
Number of Averages -
N - 1 to lOS in decade steps.
8
8,
O·C to 50·C.
per year.
Adjustable to within 5 x 10 -
8.
OPTION 01 HIGH STABILITY TIME BASE
Temp Stability -
10 MHz.
< ± 2 x 10 -
7
after warm-up, O· C to 50 · C.
Warmup Time - Within 2 x 10- 7 of final frequency in < 10
minutes when oold started at 25 · C.
Aging Rate - 1 x 10- a/day at time of Shipment, 4 x
10 - a/week after 30 days of continuous operation , 1 x
10 - · /year after 60 days 01 oontinuous operation.
Adjustable to within 2 x 10 -
8;
REAR INTERFACE
Inputs - Direct oount input to 50 MHz, (50 {J impedance, resistor may be removed for 1 Mil impedance, remote start/stop,
reset ; external time base.
Outputs - aCD serial-by-{jigit, decimal point, overflow, scan
clock ; trigger level ; time base reference.
+ Ch A trigger litter error
-
IN
NOTES:
A) Time base error is the sum 01 all errors specified for the time
base used.
± Ch a trigger litter error
+ (Ch a stop trigger slew error
- Ch A start trigger slew error) ± 4 ns
EVENTS A DURING B (AVERAGE)
Ma. A Frequency -
125 MHz.
Min B Pulse Width -
5 ns.
N
=
1 to lOS in decade steps.
Accurscyb,C,d ±
Period A
Width a x v'N
x Events A during a
± Ch a start trigger litter error x Frequency A
v'N
± Ch a stop trigger litter error x Frequency A
v'N
+(Ch a stop trigger slew error
- Ch a start trigger slew error) x Frequency A
(Note: Frequency in MHz)
Accuracy.,c,d =
Range -
a
VN
N
Frequency Range -
1 to lOS in decade steps.
=
+ 1.4 x Ch a trigger Jitter error
-
=
± time base error x Time A -
Number of Averages 15 )
< 1 x 10 -
Crystal Frequency -
Setability -
IN
Resofution- lOOns to lOs in decade steps.
Frequency Range -
~
Minimum Dead Time -
0.1 Hz to 10 MHz in decade steps.
PERIOD B (SfNGLE SHOT)
B (AVERAGE)
IN
±
Accuracya = ± 1 count ± time base error x Frequency A.
Range -
TIME A 12.5 ns to 10 s.
Resolution -
Setability -
10 MHz.
< ± 5 x 10 -
=
± 1 count ± time base error x Time A -.. a
± Ch A trigger Jitter error
± Ch a trigger Jitter error
± (Ch a stop trigger slew error
- Ch A start trigger slew error) ± 4 ns.
Range -
Temp Stability Aging Rate -
lOOns to 10 5 in decade steps.
Accuracy·,c,d
5X: 200 V peak, 400 V p.p Irom de to 5 MHz, derate to 20 V P.
p from 100 MHz to 125 MHz.
Range -
STANDARD TIME BASE
0 to 100 MHz.
Crystal Frequency -
1 X: 200 V peak ; 400 V p.p from de to 50 kHz, derate to 15 V P.
p from 1.33 MHz to 125 MHz.
Trigger Level - A de level corresponding to the actual trigger
level. Accuracy ± 20 mV ± 0.5% 01 reading.
TIME MANUAL
Electronic stopwatch, accumulales and displays time between
activation of front panel start/stop button or rear interface signal line. Clock rates selectable from lOOns to lOs in decade
steps. Range lOOns to 10' s.
± Ch a stop trigger litter error
M.. Input Voltage -
Shaped Out - Shaped replica 01 signal being measured, aids
proper triggering on complex waveforms. ;,,200 mV p.p from
50 II.
TOTALIZE A
to 99,999,999 oounts at max rate of 125 MHz. Start, stop
and reset oontrolled by front panel pushbuttons or rear interface signal lines.
± JQQ.!!.s ± time base error x width a .
RATIO A/B
A veraged over 1 to 1OS cycles of channel a signal.
Frequency Range Accuracyb,c _
±
a) N is the number of periods averaged in PERIOD a (AVGS)
mode, the number of intervals averaged in the TIME A- a
(AVGS) mode, the number of widths of a averaged in
WIDTH a (AVGS) and EVENTS A DURING a modes, and
the number of periods of a in the RATIO Na mode.
C) Trigger Jitter error (in "5)
V (en,)2 + (en,)2 (V)
Inpul slew rale allngger polnl (V,"S)
Where en, - 100 "V RMS typical internal noise.
en, = RMS noise of the signal input at the trigger
point for a 125 MHz bandwidth.
D) Trigger slew rate error (in "s)
Input hysterisis (V)
2
Input slew rate at set trigger point (V/"s)
Where input hysterisis - 20 mV p.p typical.
0 to 125 MHz (both Channels A & a ).
Frequency B
Frequency A x N
± 1.4 x Ch a trigger litter error x Frequency A
N
+ Frequency A
0.3 x lOS
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 503A ... ,... ,., ................ " ... ,.... ,... ,........ $930
Option 01 High Stability Time Base ..................... Add $275
COUNTERS
ACCESSORIES
TEK DIGITAL
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
P6125 COUNTER PROBE 5X
CHARACTERISTICS
DC 504
Display -
5 dIQlts LED display.
Accuracy - ± 1 count ± time·base accuracy ( ± trigger error
in perIOd mode only).
Frequency (or rpm) - Dc coupled: 0 Hz to at least 80 MHz.
Ac coupled : 10 Hz to at least 80 MHz.
Frequency /rpm (Max Resolution) - kHz Positions: 0.1 Hz, 1
Hz, and 10Hz (1 rpm , 10 rpm , and 100 rpm)" MHz Positions:
0.1 kHz and 1 kHz (1000 rpm and 10k rpm)"
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS (56.6 mV p-p) below 15 MHz, 35
mV RMS (99 mV p-p) at or below 50 MHz derati"9 to typically
< 175 mV RMS (495 mV p-p) at 80 MHz.
Triggering Level -
Adjustable from at least - 1.5 V to
+ 1.5
V.
Trigger Source - Internal (rear connector interface) or exter·
nal (front·panel BNCl.
Max Input Voltage - (sinewave, de + peak ac) ± 250 V at
500 kHz or less; derate - 20 dB/decade to 25 MHz. ± 5 V from
25 MHz to 80 MHz.
Impedance . . . . - . DC 1M COUffJEIVTIIU"
Counter/Timer
DC 504
Counter/Timer
Direct Frequency Counting to 80 MHz
Period Measurement for Resolution
at Low Frequency
Rpm Counting
Coupling -
1 Mfl paralleled by
~ 20
pF.
Dc or ac .
Internal Time Base Standard
Crystal
Frequency
Stability (OOC
to 50°C) after
Y2 hour
warm-up
Option 01
1 MHz
5 MHz temperature compensated
::;±1 x 10.5
::;±5 x 10·'
CHARACTERISTICS
AHenuation -
Long-term Drift
< ±1 x 10·'
Per month
< ±1 x 10"
Per month
Setability
Adjustable to
±1 x 10·'
Adjustable to
±5 x 10·'
Totalize Events (Resolution -
1 count.
5 Digit LED Display
Period (Resolution) - mSec Position: 1 "s and 10 "s Sec
Posllton: 0.1 ms, and 10 ms.
Low Cost
Display Time - Variable from about 0.1 s to about lOs. Detent POSllton at cw position of DISPLAY TIME knob provides a
HOLD mode.
The DC 504 CounterfTimer measures frequency
from 0 Hz (with 0.1 Hz resolution) to 80 MHz,
period from 1 microsecond to 999.99 seconds,
and totalizes events from 0 to 99,999 at a maxi·
mum rate of at least 80 MHz. A resolution of 0.1
Hz can be obtained by allowing the more signifi·
cant figures of the counter to overflow. Five 7·
segment lightemitting diodes (LEDS) provide a
visual numerical display. The decimal point is
automatically positioned and leading zeros are
blanked. Digit overflow is indicated by a front·
panel LED. Signals to be counted/timed can be
applied to either a front·panel BNC connector or
to the rear interface connector. Internal switches
select frequency or rpm operation , internal time
base or external standard, and override display
storage.
Data Inputs and Outputs - Available at rear of plug';n for
Intra-compartment routl"9 In any TM 500 Power Module/Main·
frame . Bcd senal.by-dlgit (parallel data for one digit at a time)
plus timIng and control functions,
ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 504 Counter/Timer .... ,..................... $600
Option 01 (Time Base) .......................................... Add 5200
5X.
Input Resislance -
Bandwidth -
5 Mfl Input.
~ 20
CapaCitance -
pF.
Dc to 200 MHz.
Voltage Rating 100 MHz.
Cable Length -
250 V (dc
+
peak ae) derated to 35 V at
1.5 meters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
352-0351 ·00
013·0107·03
344-0046-00
175·0t 24-0t
175· 0263·0 t
166·0404·01
016-0521 -00
1 HOLDER , probe
1 TIP, retractable hook
1 TIP, IC tester
2 TIPS, probe
2 CLIPS , miniature, alligator
1 LEAD, ground, 13 cm
1 LEAD, ground, 8 cm
1 SLEEVE, insulati"9
1 POUCH , accessory
·Available in packages of 10 (015·0201 ·04) or 100 (015.0201 .
05) only.
··Avallable in packages of 10 only (206-0191 .03).
·Th,s assumes that the transducer output is one pulse per
revolutIOn .
OPTIONAL COUNTER ACCESSORIES
P6101 Xl Probe, Dc to 34 MHz
Order 010·6101·03 ......................................................... 553
P6106 Xl0 Probe, Dc to 300 MHz
Order 010·6106·03 ............................... ......................... 5125
P6201 FET Probe, Dc to 900 MHz
Order 010·6201·01 ........ ................................................ 5990
P6056 50 fl, Xl0 Probe, Dc to 3.5 GHz
Order 010·6056·03 ......................................................... 5140
Power Divider, GR, 50 fl
Order 017·0082-00 ........................................................... 575
Adapter, GR to BNC lema Ie
Order 017 ·0067·00 ........................................................... 555
Adapter, GR to BNC male
Order 017·0064·00 ........................................................... 560
Cable, adapter, BNC to tipjack
(DC 503A, DC 509. DC 5009)
Order 175·3765-01 .......... .... .. .... ...................................... 523
Cable, Adapter, BNC to RI
(DC 510, DC 5010)
Order 012·0532·00 .......... ................................................. 523
264
The P6125 is a low·capacitance, 5X attenuation
passive probe specially designed for use with
counter/timers. It makes possible more accurate
time interval measurements of high speed logic
signals. Five·times attenuation provides an opti·
mum match between the counter input character·
istics and the voltage levels of all common logic
families . The low input capacitance permits acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum
loading of the circuits under test.
P6125 Counter Probe, 5X, 1.5 m,
Order 010-6125-01 ..... ,.................•......... $53
TEK
POWER
SUPPLIES
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
PS 5010
PS 5010 CHARACTERISTICS
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE FLOATING SUPPLIES
~
Configuration -
Dual noating with shared common terminal.
Isolation - 150 V peak from panel. 42 V peak from rear Interlace, 0.015 .f typical shunt capaCitance to ground.
PS 5010
Voltage Range -
0 to + 32.0 V: 0 to - 32 .0 V.
Voltage Accuracy - :!: (0.5% + 20 mY) overall: :!: (0.01 %
+ 2 mY) line regulation , :!: 10 mV for 1A load current change (1
mV when USIng rear interface output with remote sensing).
Ilgr!~1
10 mV pop: 20 Hz to 20
The PS 5010 IS designed to comply with IEEE
Standard 488·1978, and with Tektronix Codes
and Formats Standard
Voltage PARD (Ripple and Noise) MHz.
Fully Programmable
Load Transient Recovery - 500 .s
mV of nomInal value for a 1A change.
Three Programmable ± O to 32 V Dual Floating Supply to 0.75A (1 .6A to 15 V). + 4.5 V to
+5.5 V Logic Supply to 3A.
Voltage Change Response Time - 1 ms for up or down
change, 20 ms lor down change with no load .
Voltage Resolution - 10 mV
:!: 10 mV (typ :!: 2 mY)
10.0 V. 100 mV :!: 40 mV (typ :!: 10 mY) > 10.0 V.
Automatic Crossover
Powerful Set ot GPIB Status Reporting
Commands
Front Panel Lock-Out Capability
Programmable Output ON/ OFF (Independent
ON/OFF tor Floating Supply and Logic
Supply)
± 0.5% Accuracy
within 20
Current Limit Range - 50 mA to 0.75 A (1 .60 A at 15 V and
below) in high power compartment : 50 mA to 400 mA (0.750 A
at 15 V and below).
Three Independent Digital Displays
Programmable Voltage and Current Limits
Over Full Range
to recover
to
Programmable Triple Power Supply
The PS 5010 Programmable Power Supply is a
two-wide TM 5000 module that provides a complete and rapid high performance solution for
many system power supply applications. It's three
supplies provide the most commonly used
voltages, and the three digital displays automatically indicate all six voltage and current limit
parameters. Automatic crossover from voltage to
current limit and a powerful set of GPIB status
reporting commands allow the user to be constantly aware of the power supply's status. Also,
the user can program the output on or off and
lock-out the front panel controls with GPIB
commands.
The PS 501O's dual floating supply provides 0 to
+32 V and 0 to -32 V at up to 0.75 A (1 .6 A to
15 V). The logic supply provides +4.5 V to +5.5
V at 3 A. The three supplies can be independently programmed for voltage and current limits.
Since the PS 501O's microprocessor monitors the
voltage and current feedback loops of each
supply, a simulation of true DMM output monitoring of all supplies is possible. Each display indicates the true output voltage or current of that
supply. Whenever a load change causes a supply
to change modes from constant voltage to constant current (or vice-versa), the display also
changes to show the known current limit or
voltage value. This condition can be reported
over the bus via an interrupt when the PS 5010 is
in the remote state.
With it's English-like GPIB commands, performance, and combination of features , the PS 5010
Triple Power Supply reduces both software and
hardware system development time.
Current Limit Accuracy - :!: (5% + 20 mAl overall : :!: 1 mA
line regulation : :!: 10 mA load regulation. Output impedance is
IYPlcaily 5 kll shunted by 20 .F.
Current Mode PARD (Ripple and NOise) to 20 MHz.
Current Change Response Time -
10 mA pop, 20 Hz
20 ms up or down.
50 mA ± 15 mAo
Current Resolution -
LOGIC SUPPLY
Voltage Range -
+ 4.50 to + 5.50 V, ground relerenced.
Voltage Accuracy - ± 50 mV overall: ± 1 mV line regulation :
" 10 mV for 1 A load currenl change (1 mV when using rear
Inlerface outpul with remote sensing)
Voltage PARD (ripple and noise) MHz.
Voltage Resolution -
10 mV pop, 20 Hz to 20
10 mV ± 10 mV (typ ± 2 mY).
Load Transient Recovery of nominal value.
500 .s to recover within 20 mV
Current Limit Range - 100 mA to 3.0 A (Foldback characterIStiC below 4 .5 V. maximum short circuit current is < 1.5 A).
Current Limit Accuracy -
± (5% + 20 mAl,
100 mA :;: 30 mAo
Current Resolution -
Scaled Current Output - 10 mA ~ 2 mV :;: (2% + 1 mY)
available at rear Interface (not ground referenced).
Overvoltage Protection -
SeR crowbar tYPIcally tnps at 6·7 V
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
ooe to +5O oe
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Altitude Storage Altitude -
_55°C to +75°e
46 km (15,000 11)
15 km (50,000 11)
Power Consumption - 250 VA max In high power compartment ,
2(X) VA In standard compartment
Order PS 5010 Power Supply ............ $2500
SUPPLIES
TEK POWER
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
PS 501-1
PS 503A
......
--
CHARACTERISTICS COMMON TO
PS 501-1 , PS 503A
20 V FLOATING SUPPLY
Primary Power Input - Determined by mainframe (TM 501 ,
TM 503, etc).
Output ground.
Floating, isolated for 350 V de + peak ac above
Stability - Typically (0.1% + 5 mY) or less drift in 8 hours of
constant line, load, and temperature.
Indicator Lights -
Voltage variation and current limit.
...-. H ... ., .........'"
+5 V GROUND-REFERENCED SUPPLY
Output -
5 V nominal, ± 0.25 V at 1 A.
Load Regulation Line Regulation change.
Within 50 mV for a 10% line voltage
Ripple and Noloe (1 A) Stability -
Triple Power Supply
Power Supply
PS 503A
PS 501-1
Within 100 mV with a 1 A load change.
5 mV pop or less, 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Typically 30 mV or less drift In 8 hours.
Overtoad Protection temperature shutdown.
Independent
+ and
- Controls
Automatic current limiting and over-
Dual Tracking Voltage Control
Floating Output, 0-20 V
o to 400 mA
Precise Regulation
o to
±20 V at 1 A (in High-power
Compartment)
Fixed Output
+5V@
1A
Remote Resistance Programming
Low Ripple and Noise
Fixed Output
+
5V @ 1A
3 1/2 Digit Ten Turn Dial
Over-Voltage Protection Standard
The PS 503A features superior dual tracking performance, over-voltage protection, and remote resistance programming of voltage. When operated
in the high-power compartment of a TM 504 or
TM 506 Mainframe, the PS 503A provides up to 1
amp from both 0 to 20 volt supplies.
± 20 V FLOATING SUPPLIES
Outputl - 0 to ± 20 V dc with respect to the common terminal or 0 to 40 V dc across the + and - terminals. Outputs can
be varied independently or at a constant ratio.
Output -
0 to 20 V dc.
Maximum Rated Current 300 mA at + 50' C.
Acc uracy -
± (0.5% + 10 mY).
Line Regulation change.
Within 5 mV for a + 10% line voltage
Load Regulation -
Within 1 mV for a 400 mA load change.
Ripple and Noise -
0.5 mV pop or less; 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Temperature Coefficient -
Tracking Mode Offset Error - If the two supplies are set
independently to any given voltage ratio and then varied by use
of the VOLTS DUAL TRACKING control, the two supplies will
maintain the same voltage ratio as initially set within ± 50 mV.
Minimum Rel olution -
Load Regulation - Within 3 mV for 1 A change (high-power
compartment ) o r 1 mV for 400 mA change (standard
compartment).
Ri pple and Noile - 3 mV pop or less at 1 A load (high-power
compartment). 0.5 mV pop or less at 400 mA load (standard
compartment).
tndicatorl - Individual voltage indicators and current limiting
indicators for both + and - supplies. Standard compartment
(400 mAl indicator.
Order PS 503A Power Supply .............. $540
400 mA to + 30' C derating to
Current Limi t - < 40 10400 mAo
M aximum Rated Current - 400 mA (1 A in high power compartment to + 30 ' C derating to 300 mA (750 mAl at + 50 ' C.
Current Limit - Adjustable from < 100 mA to 1 A (high-power
compartment) or < 40 mA to 400 mA (standard compartment)
on each supply.
266
The PS 501-1 features precise regulation and better than 2 mV resolution (setability) over a 0 to 20
V range.
Typically « 0.01 % + 0.1 mY) per
· C.
Typically 1.6 mY.
Tranlient Recovery Time - 20 ~s or less to recover within 20
mV of final output voltage after a 400 mA change in output
current.
Order PS 501 -1 Power Supply ............ $430
GENERAL PURPOSE
TEK INSTRUMENTS
DIGITAL LATCH, DIGITAL DELAY,
WORD RECOGNIZER
OL502
DO 501
WR 501
IA...
...
II
DO 501
Digital Events Delay
Delay to 99,999 Events
Divide by N up to 20 MHz
Pulse Counting to 65 MHz
Time Delay with Ext Clock Digital Delay
Compatible with Most
Attenuator Probes
~igital
Latch
WR 501
The DO 501 is an events count or count down
plug-in unit. The unit counts a predetermined
number of events, from
to 99,999, selected
by the front-panel thumb-wheel switches. The
DO 501 can also function as a frequency divider,
or it can be used in a 'counted burst' mode with
pulse or function generators that can be synchronously gated. Tektronix generators capable of being gated by the DO 501 are the FG 501, FG 502,
FG 504, FG 507, FG 5010, PG 508 and the PG 507.
°
DL 502
16 Channel Latching Capability
Captures Glitches as Narrow as 5 ns at
Probe Tips
Allows ExpanSion of Information Time Frame
Word Recognizer with Digital Delay
The WR 501 is a 16 bit parallel Word Recognizer
with digital delay that produces trigger pulses
when a preselected word occurs. It occupies one
plug-in position in any TM 500 Series Power Module Mainframe.
The WR 501 may also be used separately as a
word recognizer to generate triggers for
oscilloscopes or other measurement instruments.
It gives you fast access to any unique word in the
data stream.
TM 500 Compatibility
WORD RECOGNIZER (WR 501)
EVENTS DELAY
The DL 502 Digital Latch extends the logic analyzer's measurement capabilities . The Digital
Latch aids in detecting narrow pulses in a data
stream that cannot be captured by a logic analyzer alone. The 16 channel latch captures asynchronous glitches of less than one sample interval or
as narrow as 5 ns.
In asynchronous measurements without latching
capability, high speed data anomalies go undetected if they do not appear on a clock edge. The
DL 502 Digital Latch captures the glitch and holds
it until the next clock edge, then expands and
displays it for one sample interval_
CHARACTERISTICS
Minimum pulse width to Initiate iatch Minimum amplitude to Initiate latch threshold.
30 ns or less lrom final event to trigger
Insertion Delay output pulse.
Recycle Time Reset -
50 ns or less.
Manually resets delay counter.
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
(All characteristics apply to both events and start inputs).
Input Impedance Slope -
1 Mil, 20 pF.
Either + or - _selectable.
Sensitivity -
85 mV pop @ 30 MHz.
Frequency Response -
Up to 65 MHz at 120 mV sensitivity.
Minimum Detectable Pulse Width -
500 mV cenlered at
5 ns,
Threshold Level Range - From - 1.0 V to + 1.0 V ( - 10 V to
+ 10 V with lOX probe). Can be externally programmed or
monitored at Iront panel lacks.
50 ns.
Events Triggered Light being detected.
Start Triggered Light progress.
Order OL 502 Digital Latch ................. $1600
Standard accessories include instruction manual. 6 inch BNC
cable.
15 data Inputs plus a clock and qualifier.
Word Selection - Made using sixteen three-position toggle
switches. Positions are HI , (don't care), and LO.
Trigger View Out - Threshold detector output, at least 0.5 V
(200 n or less source impedance).
5 ns.
Minimum sample intervai alynchronous clock -
Count - 10 to 99.999 events.
Max Count Rate - 65 MHz .
Inputs -
Qualifier - Can expand the word recognizer to 17 bits, acl as
a gale for the external clock or do bolh .
Clock - Selects positive- or negative-gOing edge of clock input slQnal. Used for synchronous operation.
Modes - Front panel selection of snychronous word recognitIOn (a trigger is produced only when Ihe operator selected
word occurs at a clock edge: either position, positive or negative edge. may be selected), or asynchronous word recogntion
(a trlQger IS produced anytime the recognized word occurs).
Synchronous Mode Minimum set·up time 18 ns
Minimum Hold time 0 ns
(Filter IS automatically disabled)
Asynchronous Mode and Filter - Minimum coincidence time
is variable from 15 ns or less to 200 ns or more.
Order WR 501 Word Recognizer ....... $2000
Visual indication that events are
Visual indication that delay is in
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Pulse Width -
Width 01 events pulse plus 6 ns or less.
Voltage Swing - + 0.8 V or less to at least + 2.0 V with 3
TTL ioads ( ~ 5 mAl.
Light -
Indicates output trigger.
GENERAL
Temperature - Operating: O' C to + 50 ' C. Nonoperating:
- 40 ' C to + 75 ' C.
Altitude 11 .
Operating : to 15,000 It: Nonoperating: to 50,000
Order DO 501 Digital Delay ................ $1170
The DL 502 Digital Latch and WR 501 Word Recognizer are
TM 500 Plug-ins compa tible with al/ Tektronix Logic Analyzers
(see page 55).
7
PULSE
TEK GENERATORS
The TM 500 Pulse Generator family offers a wide
variety of capabilities suitable for most pulse
testing applications. Whether testing wide-band
systems, simulating data transmission signals, or
driving a laser, the versatile TM 500 Pulse Generators have the capabilities to meet your needs.
Particularly important in today's digital world is
the capability to generate a variety of pulse
signals compatible with the key logic families .
PULSE GENERATORS -
Pulse Period
Pulse Duration
Duty Factor
Square Wave Mode
The newest addition to the TM 500 Pulse Generator family, the PG 507, features complementary
dual outputs making it ideally suited for digital
applications. The dual output feature is particularly useful when working with ECl logic families.
Similar to the PG 507 Pulse Generator is the 50
MHz PG 508 featuring independently variable rise
and fall times. The PG 508's high level performance and versatility cover a broad range of test
and measurement applications.
The PG 507 or PG 508's accurate 50 !1 output
impedances deliver clean signals into logic families, reactive loads, or at the end of an
unterminated cable. These 50 MHz multipurpose
generators are also designed for high level performance on high impedance circuits (MOS, HTl,
and CMOS logic).
In 50 !1 systems, our PG 501 and PG 502 are
designed to be compatible with common digital
integrated-circuit families, (TIL, OTl and ECl), in
repetition rates , amplitudes and transition times.
Our PG 505 100 kHz Pulse Generator featurE's
custom timing positions to allow addition of internal capacitors to custom-selector extend pulse
period and duration.
Our TM 500 Pulse Generators' wide range of
features afford you ease of operation, even on
the most challenging test and measurement
problems.
PG 508
PG 507
~
20 ns to
~ 10
ns to
~ 70%
~
200 ms (50 MHz to 5 Hz)
~
100 ms
to 0.2 /JoS period,
~ 10 ns to ~ 100 ms'
Pulse Delay
Duty Factor
r
at 20 ns period
YES
YES
~ 70%
to 0.2 /JoS period,
~ 10nsto ~ 100ms'
~ 50%
Double Pulse
YES
YES
Fixed, ~ 3 . 5 ns,
~ 4 ns @ >5 V
~ 5.5 ns to ~ 50 ms, Independently
variable up to 100:1
Aberrations
~ 5% p-p +25 mV
into 50 fl load
~ 5% p-p +50 mV for pulse
within ±5 V into 50 flload
Amplitude: Into 50 fl
~
7.5 V p-p, ±7.5 V window
~
10 V p-p, ±10 V window
~
15 V p-p, ±15 V window
~
20 V p-p, ±20 V window
Open Ckt
Source Impedance
50 fl
Simultaneous Outputs YES, complementary
50 fl
NO
Pulse Coincidence
~1
Output Controls
Independent pulse top and pulse bottom, normal or PRESET
Normall Complement
YES, both outputs
ns at 50% amplitude
!
at 20 ns period
Transition
Times
NA
I~
YES
Positive I Negative
NO
NO
Remote Amplitude
Rear interface inputs
Rear interface inputs
Locked On Mode
NO
NO
Back Termination
Always back terminated
Always back terminated
External Input
1 Mfl or 50 fl input impedance
1 Mfl or 50 fl input impedance
Trigger Level
-3 V to +3 V, 80 mV p-p sensitivity to 10 MHz
250 mV p-p to 50 MHz TRIG'O/GATEO light
Slope
+ or-
+ or-
Trigger Mode
YES
YES
Manual Trigger
YES
YES
Duration Mode
YES
YES
Gate Mode
YES
YES
Counted Burst
YES, with DO 501 )
YES, with DO 501 '
Trigger Output
(50% squarewave
or follows external
signal')
~ +2 V from 50 fl approx. 35 ns prior to pulse output
(23 ns in square wave or EXT OUR modes)
Custom Timing
Positions
User installed capacitors
User installed capacitors
Control Error Light
YES
YES
Temperature
O°C to +50 o C Operating, -55° C to +75°C Non-operating
I·'
II
I'j
(1) Add 60 ns for delay from external trigger.
(2) PG 505 trigger output follows pulse output.
(3) Exact count to 20 MHz, usable to 50 MHz.
268
~ 50%
I
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
COMPARISON OF CHARACTERISTICS
PG 501
~ 20
ns to
PG 502
~
200 ms (50 MHz to 5 Hz)
~ 10nsto ~ 100ms
PG 505
$ 4 ns to
~ 100
$ 2 ns to
~ 50
ms (250 MHz to 10 Hz)
ms
~
10 I'S to
$ 5 1's to
~
1 s (100 kHz to 1 Hz)
~ 0. 5
s
Z 70% to 0.2 I'S period, Z 50% at 20 ns period
~ 50 %
approaches 100%
NO
YES
NO
Fixed , 20 ns from external trigger
Fixed, 17 ns from external trigger
Anywhere along + 10 V external ramp
NO
NO
NO
Fixed, $ 1.0 ns
$ 1 I'S to Z 20 ms. Independently
variable up to 20 :1
Fixed,
~ 3.5
ns
Within 3.5% at 5 V into 50 n load
Within 5% at 5 V p-p (durations
~5
ns)
Within 5% at max output into 4 kn, 20 pF load
z 5V
5 V, ± 5 V window
typ + 1 Vor - 1 V
not spec ified
5 V, ± 5 V window
~ + 80Vor
4 k!1
z - 80V
not specified
1 k!1 or 50 !1
YES, positive and negative
NO
NO
$ 1 ns at 50% amplitude
NA
NA
Independent amplitude
controls for + and - outputs, no offset
Independent pulse top and pu lse bottom
Ampl itude control , no offset
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES , swi tchable
NO
50 n input Z
50 n input Z
10 k!1 input Z
+1 V required
+ 1 V required
+ 0.5 V to + 10 V
+ Only
+ On ly
+ Only
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
z +2 V from 50 n, approx. 8 ns
prior to pulse output
~ + 2 V from 50 n, approx. 10 ns
prior to pulse output
~
NO
NO
User installed capacitors
NO
NO
NO
+ 4 V from 200 !1
O°C to +50° C Operating, - 55 °C to +75 ° C Non-operating
269
PULSE
TEK GENERATORS
PG 508
PG 507
-
.. f'-U. -
"'......... n.
TIIG ..... TI
lUll
--
...
...
aM
....
-
.,..
.,
Ff(,
llilAIS ITIOI li ME
.....
,
:.:
It.
...
({f)
...,..
.....c. . ..
,
•
--
'.::.'
•
,.."
•
-,
=
....
c:=:J
IOWA.
" . ''l1llO1
-• --.
-• =
_TRM
.
- ,":,
IUTPU T
''''N''
~
.
-
.
-- .=
--~
>•
. ':
...
--
~.
50 MHz Pulse Generator
50 MHz Dual Output Pulse Generator
PG 507/PG 508
With an output of up to 15 V pop for the PG 507
and 20 V pop for the PG 508, both instruments
also feature independent controls for output period, delay and duration times. Other features
include selectable 1 MD/50 0 trigger input impedance, a control error light, a 3 state trigger/gate
light, and preset or external control of output
voltage levels.
Common Characteristics
5 Hz to 50 MHz Plus Custom Range
Delay and Double Pulse Capability
Independent Pulse Top and Bottom Level
Controls
Simply pushing the preset button can change the
output from variable top and bottom controls to
front panel screwdriver adjustments, or track
external supply voltages.
True 50 0 Output Impedance for Clean
Waveforms
Control Error Light Warns of Improperly
Set Switch or Variable Controls
The complement mode of either generator allows
an output duty cycle range approaching 100% to
be conveniently set up with more accuracy, range
and stability.
3 State Trigger Light Indicates Proper
External Triggering
Selectable 1 MD/50 0 Trigger Input
Impedance for Optimum Match to Circuitry
- Lets You Use Your Scope Probe
The PG 507 and PG 508 combine TM 500
configurability with state-of-the-art capabilities.
Their high-level performance and unique versatility cover a broad range of test and measurement
applications and logic design functions in MOS,
CMOS, TIL and ECl.
You can gate the PG 507 or PG 508 with a
positive- or negative-going signal, or by pressing
the MAN button. Or dial up a predetermined
number of pulses in a burst by adding the
DO 501's independent digital delay capabilities
for Counted Burst mode; especially useful for
testing circuits at different frequencies with the
same number of pulses.
And there's more; with the trigger input switched
to 1 MD impedance, you can explore circuitry
using a 1X or 10X scope probe. The PG 507 or
PG 508 can be usedas a pulse regenerator, logic
level translator, or sine wave to pulse converter.
The PG 507's and PG 508's output is capable of
driving MOS, CMOS, DTl, HTl 12l ,T2l or ECL.
I
1
l ~~_~U
PG 507 trigger output and outputs switched to poslt/ve going mode.
270
OUTPUr IVOl.TII
,
I ••
DtlMTIU
GENERATOR
III.
=::0.
......
.-
PUlSF
-... -.. -..
.....
c:=:J
I!':.:: lUOl.,
...
- -= .--. ..
..,(\MH/
• J
c:=:J
.
il: ~'O
flItlJUU.
WIG tl~ IIAI
:::
~~ ~
~!
PG 507
Dual Outputs with Tracking Level Controls
Normal or Complement Pulse Output on
Both Channels
15 V Output in a ± 15 V Window into Hi
Impedance, 7.5 V into 50 0
3,5 ns Rise/Fa" Time
The PG 507 is a high performance, 50 MHz pulse
generator designed specifically for logic design
applications.
The PG 507 features complementary dual outputs
which greatly increase its applicability in logic
design areas, especially interfacing within systems or to peripherals. For instance, the complementary outputs allow simulation of line drivers or
opposite phase clocks.
The PG 507 also offers versatility to the design
engineer in an analog environment. For example,
the dual outputs can be used to test differential
input amplifiers or multiplexers.
The PG 507 features four output modes: normal
complement mode (Channel A output positive
going, Channel B output negative going), opposite phase complement mode (Channel A output
negative going, Channel 8 output positive going),
simultaneous negative mode (Channel A output
negative going, Channel B output negative going), and simultaneous positive mode (Channel A
TEK
output positive going, Channel B output positive
going).
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
PG 505
PG 502
PG 501
In addition, the Output High Level and Low Level
voltage controls track between channels, making
amplitude settings easy.
This unique output flexibility within the normal and
complement modes is particularly useful in logic
design or control applications requiring simultaneous signals.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 507 50 MHz Pulse Generator ••..... $1810
DO 501 Digital Delay (page 267) ••.•••••. $1170
P6062B and P6 108 ProbeS are recommended.
PG 508
.... -...
" . - e ..
250 MHz Pulse Generator
._-
100 kHz Pulse Generator
Independently Variable Rise and
Fall Times to 5 ns
50 MHz Pulse Generater
20 V Output in a ± 20 V Window to
Hi Impedance, 10 V into 50 n
PG 501
PG 505
5 Hz to 50 MHz
1 Hz to 100 kHz
Normal or Complement Output
Simultaneous Plus and Minus Outputs
Independently Variable Duration and Period
The PG 508 50 MHz Pulse Generator is a highly
versatile, general purpose pulse generator. The
circuitry of the PG 508 is designed so that rise
and fall waveforms closely simulate real world
waveforms. This capability is particularly useful in
research and development applications demanding versatility in rise and fall times like testing of
amplifiers, slew rate testing, comparator simulation and logic circuitry performance tests.
For example, controllable rise and fall times are
extremely desirable when working with CMOS
where logic power consumption increases with
slower rise times. Also, variable rise and fall times
are used to reduce ringing (transient distortion)
problems associated with too fast a pulse.
The PG 508 features a vemier control on the rise
and fall times controllable from 100 to 1. This
completely overlaps the next decade range and
increases the PG 508's versatility in applications
Simulating different rise and fall times, especially
the output of nonlinear devices. This overlap
feature can also be used to generate a ramp
signal or simulate unequal slew rates in an
amplifier.
Also adding to the simplicity of using the PG 508,
is the capability of changing output amplitude
while variable rise and fall times remain constant.
ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 508 50 MHz Pulse Generator .....•• $1810
PG 508T 50 MHz Pulse Generator ..... $2095
(includes PG 508. TM 503 Mainframe. and 016-0195-03 blank
panel).
For counted Burst. order the
DO 501 Digital Delay (page 267) ........ $1170
Suggested to in BNC 50 II cable (2 req) for interconnecting PG
508 and DO 501 :
012-0208-00 ..•..•••.••••.•.••.....•••.••.............•. $17
5 V and 3.5 ns into 50
n
80 V Output
Independent Period and Duration Controls
Variable Rise Time and Fall Time
Trigger Out
Delay Mode
The PG 501 is a 50 MHz Pulse Generator featuring simultaneous plus and minus outputs; a wide
range of pulse period durations, and duty factors;
trigger output and external trigger/duration input.
Its performance and ease of operation make it
well-suited to basic digital and analog
applications.
The PG 505 Pulse Generator features: floating
output; independently adjustable rise and fall
times; external control of period or period and duration. A special position on the pulse period and
pulse duration controls allows addition of an internal capacitor to custom-select pulse period and
duration. When driven from an externally supplied
o to 10 volt ramp, the delay control of the PG 505
permits the output pulse to occur at any selected
voltage point on the ramp, thus providing controllable time delay to any set time along the ramp.
Order PG 501 50 MHz Pulse Generator. $650
PG 502
10 Hz to 250 MHz
Order PG 505 100kHz
Pulse Generator .................................... $840
1 ns Rise Time
5 V OutPut ± 5 V Window
Independent Pulse Top and Bottom Level
Controls
Selectable Internal Reverse Termination
Manual Trigger Button
The PG 502 (250 MHz Pulse Generator) features:
fast rise and fall times; independent top and bottom pulse levels; and adjustable pulse duration.
The fast rep rate makes the instrument ideal for
design and testing of fast logic and switching
circuits.
MANUAL (ONE-SHOT) TRIGGER
GENERATOR
The Manual (one-shot) Trigger Generator is used
for manually initiating a pulse or complete train of
events with instruments which do not have a
manual trigger button or where a remote operation capability is desired, such as with some
oscilloscopes and the PG 501 , PG 505, and
RG 501 .
Order 016-0597-00 ................................ $125
Order PG 502
250 MHz Pulse Generator .....•............ $2310
P6062B and P6108 Probes are recommended .
')71
FUNCTION
TEK GENERATORS
For full programmability and IEEE-488 compatibility, select the new FG 5010 Microprocessor
based 20 MHz function generator featuring : 10
complete stored front panel setups, counted
burst and phase lock capabilities as well as
programmable symmetry and phase. Basic frequency accuracy is 0.1% and all signals can be
AM and FM modulated.
For applications demanding logarithmic or linear
sweep the FG '3J7 offers an accurate and versatile solution. The low distortion of the FG 507
(0.25%), combined with log and lin sweep is
particularly useful in audio and communicationsoriented applications.
FUNCTION GENERATORS
W.y.forma
Si ne, Square , Triangle, Pulse & Ramp with variable symmetry
Symmetry
:0:;5% to 2:95% Variable
:0:;5% to 2:95% Variable
Frequency Range
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz ±10% with variable symmetry on
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz ±10% with variable symmetry on
Dial Accuracy
(% 01 Full Scale)
Within 3%
Within 3%
Within 5% In sweep mode'
Cu.tom Frequency Range
NO
NO
Frequency Stability
(% of Full Scale)
:0:;0.05% for 10 min., :0:;0.1% for 1 hour, :0:;0.5% lor 24 hours , constant temperature
Amplitude: Open Circuit
30 V pop
30 V pop
15 V pop
15 V Pop
Into 50 ()
For low-frequency function generator applications, set the FG 501A, FG 502, FG 503,or FG 507
to work on biological, geophysical and mechanical simulations or on servo systems.
Applying an external ramp to the vcf (Voltage
Controlled Frequency) input, allows our function
generators to double as sweep generators. The
vcf input fed from a low- level modulating signal
can produce a frequency-modulated carrier. The
FG '3J7 and FG 504 have sweep capabilities
conveniently built in that simplify setting up start
and stop frequencies in addition to providing
logarithmic sweep.
Sweeping wide frequency ranges (100:1 or greater), with logarithmic sweep allows you to spread
out lower octaves, sweep a full range in less time,
and produce easy-to-read Bode plots and
graphs.
You can control the starting phase of a waveform
with the FG '3J1A, FG 504, FG '3J7 and FG 5010 in
the gated (burst) or triggered mode. A gated or
triggered waveform efficiently tests tone-controlled systems, loud speaker transient response
characteristics, automatic gain control circuits, or
other amplitude sensitive systems.
The FG 504's phase lock mode feature lets you
convert digital signals to high or low voltage sine
waves, pulses, or triangles; ideal for locking the
function generators output to a house or system
frequency standard. With the DD 501 Digital
Delay Generator in the "divide by n" mode, the FG
504 can be locked to your frequency reference at
a lower frequency.
When your test and measurement problems require more waveforms for more applications, the
high performance TM 500 Function Generators
are a versatile solution Singly or in combination
with one another.
- 60 dB In 20 dB Steps
> 20 dB additional with AMPL control
Off.et: Open Circuit
± 13 V dc, Step attenuator decreases offset
±6.5 V dc, Step attenuator decreases offse
Into 50 0
Pk Slg + Off•• t:
Open Circuit
± 15 V
Into 50 0
± 7.5 V
Output Impedance
± 7.5V
50 0
±0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
± 1 dB 1 MHz to 2 MHz
±0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
±0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
± 1 dB 1 MHz to 2 MHz
Triangle
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 200 kHz
± 2 dB 200 kHz to 2 MHz
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 200 kHz
± 2 dB 200 kHz to 2 MHz
Square
± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 2 MHz
±0.5 dB 20 Hz to 2 MHz
Sine wave DI.lortlon
(Maximum oulpul,
50 0 load)
:0:;0.25% 20 Hz 10 20 kHz l'1
:0:;0.5% 20 kHz to 100 kHz
Harmon lcs :o:; - 30 dB, 100 kHz
102 MHz
:0:;0.25% 20 Hz to 20 kHzl'1
< 0.5% 20 kHz to 100 kHz
Harmonlcs :o:; - 30 dB , 100 kHz
to 2 MHz
Square Wave
Respon.e
:0:;25 ns risellall
< 3% POp aberrations
< 25 ns rlsellall
< 3% Pop aberrations
Triangle
Linearity
(10% to 90%)
2:99% 20 Hz 10 200 kHz
2:97% 200 kHz 10 2 MHz
2:99% 20 Hz to 200 kHz
2:97% 200 kHz to 2 MHz
Trigger Output
2: +4 V from 50 0
Exlernal Input
Impedance ~2 kO
Trigger Ihreshold level
+1 V ±20%
Impedance ~ 2 kli
Trigger threshold level
+1 V ±20%
Trigger
± 900 variable start phase conlrol
±900 variable start phase control
Gate
± 90° variable start phase control
±900 variable start phase control
Pha.e Lock
NO
NO
Counled Bur.t
With DO 501
With DO 501
NO
Logarithm iC or Linear, Separale
Start/Stop Dials
I·
wave
Internal Sweep
Duration
Ramp Outpul
272
± 15 V
Sine
wave
Amplitude
Flatne ••
(10 kHz r.',
50 0 load)
r
I
o to
Allenuator
1 ms to 100 s
+1 V ±20% Irigger level
KO onpul lmpedance
External Trigger
111+150C to +35 0C ambient
1'1+200C to +30 0C ambient
1'120 Hz to 20 kHz modulation frequency
I-I FG 504 requires forced air circulation above + 40° C
1'1Fully Programmable
I"IIEEE 488 Compatible
1'lPercent of Indicated frequency
1'lAbsolute voltage accuracy
l'ISeparate FM function provided (1 %/V)
FGS07
FG S01A
~2
NA
:0:;0.3 V to +10 V from 1 KO ±5%
Gate Output
2: +4 V from 50 ()
Other Mode.
Manual Sweep Trig
Manual Sweep
Sweep and Hold
Amplitude
Modulallon
NO
Voltage Controlled
Frequency (FM)
Up to 1000: 1 Frequency change with 10 V external signal.
Slew rate 2:0.3 V/ms , 10 kO input Impedance.
Nominal Hz/Volt
.en.lllvity
2 x Frequency MULTIPLIER setting
4 x Frequency MULTIPLIER
Oulput Hold Mode
NO
NO
Temperaturel-I
OOC to +500 Operallng, -55°C to +750C non-operating
NO
II
-
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
COMPARISON OF CHARACTERISTICS
FG 504
Sine , Square , Triangle, Pulse &
Ramp with variable symmetry
FG 502
Q;ll) FG 5010(')(')
FG 503
Sine , Square , Triangle Pulse, or Ramp
Sine, Square , Triangle
Sine , Square , Triangle , Pulse &
Ramp with variable symmetry
7% to 93% Variable
5%, 50%, 95% Fixed
50% Fixed
10% to 90% , 1% steps
0.001 Hz to 40 MHz
4 MHz nominal with var symm on
0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
Pulse & Ramp , 1.1 MHz
1.0 Hz to 3 MHz
Usable 0.01 Hz to 5 MHz
0.002 Hz to 20 MHz
Within 3% to 4 MHz'
Within 6% to 40 MHz'
Within 3% to 1 MHz
Within 5% to 10 MHz
Within 5%
W'thln 0.1%
DIgItal LED DIsplay
Shipped with capacitor for 20 Hz to 20 kHz
NO
With user-installed capacitor
NA
:0;.05% for 1 hr., .05% for 24 hrs. (:0;. 1%
In trigger, gate , burst mode > 200 Hz)!'1
:0;0.05% for 10 min ., :0;0.1 % for 1 hour, :0;0.5% for 24 hours, constant temperature
30 V p-p
10 V p-p
20 V p-p
20 V p-p
15 V p-p
5 V p-p
10 V p-p
10 V p-p
o to -5 dB In 10 dB steps
< 10 mV p-p with VAR conrtol
Variable control only
Variable control only
DIgItal Control of fixed and Var.
10 mV pop into 50 II
±7.5 V dc
±5 V dc
±7.5 V dc
±7.5 V dc
±3.75 V dc
±2.5 V dc
±3.75Vdc
±3.75 V dc
±20 V
±10 V
±15 V
±15 V
±11.25 V
±5V
±6V
±7.5 V
50 fl
50 fl
50 fl
50 II
±0.5 dB 0.001 Hz to 40 kHz
±0.5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
±1.5 dB 0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
±0.5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
±2 dB 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz
±3.0% to 5 MHzl'll'l
+5%-10% to 20 MHz!'1
±2% to 500 kHzl'II'1
+2%, -3. 5% to 1 MHzl"
+3%, -5% to 5 MHz!'1
+5%, -20% to 20 MHzIII
±2 dB 40 kHz to 40 MHz
±3 dB referenced to Sine wave
± 1 dB referenced to Sine wave
:0;0.5% 20 Hz to 40 kHzl l1
Harmonics :
< -30 dB 40 kHz to 1 MHz
-20 dB 1 MHz to 40 MHz
:'00.5% 10 Hz to 50 kHzl'l
Harmonics :0; - 30 dB at all other frequencies
:'00.5% 1 Hz to 30 kHz
<1.0% 30 kHz to 300 kHz
:S2.5% 300 kHz to 3 MHz
:'00.5% 20 Hz to 19.99 kHz!'1
:'0 1.0% 20 kHz to 99 .99 kHz
100 kHz to 20 MHz Harmonic
greater than -30 dB
:'06 ns rise/fall fixed 10 ns to 100 ms variable
:'05% p-p +30 mV aberrations
<20 ns riseffall
:S3% p-p aberrations
<60 ns rise/fall
:S3 p-p aberrations
< 10 ns rise/fall
:S5% p-p aberrations
;:::99% 10 Hz to 400 kHz
;:::95% 400 kHz to 40 MHz
typ ;::: 98% 0.001 Hz to 10 Hz
;:::99% 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz
;:::97% 100 kHz to 1 MHz
;:::95% 1 MHz to 11 MHz
> 99% 1 Hz to 100 kHz
2:95% 100 kHz to 3 MHz
;:::98% to 2 MHz
;:::90% to 20 MHz
±0.5 dB to 20 MHz
±2 dB to 40 MHz
<:
±2% to 1 MHzl'lI"
±3% to 5 MHzl l1
±5% to 20 MHz!'1
;::: + 2 V from 50 fl
+2.5 V to 50 flload
+ 2.5 V to 600 llioad
+2 V from 50fl
Impedance ;:::10 kll
Sensitivity :'01 V p-p
Trigger level -1 V to +10 V
Impedance::::: 1 kll
;::: + 2 V Gate Signal required
NO
1 Mil/50 fl internal setabllity
0.0 V/0 .5 V internal setability
20 MHz maximum
±800 start phase control to 10 MHz
NO
NO
±900 variable start phase control
Fixed 0° start phase
NO
±900_variable start phase control
NO
NO
20 Hz to 20 MHz
(Auto Scan)
100 Hz to 40 MHz
±800 phase range
With DO 501
With DO 501
NO
1-9999
Logarithmic or Linear, Separate
Start/Stop Dials
NO
NO
NO
N/A
N/A
N/A
NO
NO
100%
Dc to
<2%
< 4%
0.1 ms to 100 s
+1 V +10 V trigger level
1 V p-p sensitivity
o to +10 V from 1 kfl
±5% to 1 ms , ±10%
:0;1 ms
NO
Manual Sweep Trig
100% with nominal 5 V p-p Input
Dc to 100 kHz modulation freq.
<5% distortion to 4 MHz @ 70%1 31.
<10% distortion to 40 MHz @ 65%1'1
Up to 1000: 1 Frequency change with 10 V external signal.
Slew rate ;:::0.3 V/ms, 10 kfl input Im~edance.
with nominal 5 V p-p signal input
100 kHz mod frequency
distortion to 2 MHz @ 70%
distortion to 20 MHz @ 70%
Up to 1000 : 1 frequencyl'l
change with 10 V external input
4 x Frequency MULTIPLIER
1.1 x Frequency MULTIPLIER
3 x Frequency MULTIPLIER
10% of selected range
0.001 Hz to 400 Hz
NO
NO
0.002 Hz to 200 Hz
OOC to +50° Operating, -55° C to +75 0C Non-operating
FUNCTION
TEK GENERATORS
FG 5010
f G ill' , 1I0G RAMMAllf 2.II HI fU NCTIO I Sf NfI'l ATOft
OiL
" ... , ,_;I ,_,,
rl L'
"n
,_,
+ ,_,C
L _ --;-,
~ ~ _ •
•
~I~I
,", ,
,,,,,,,
~
"''''C'I
• ....
",.",,,
'. OLlIo
PROGRAMMABLE
20 MHz FUNCTION GENERATOR
•
FG 5010
The FG 5010 IS deSigned to comply With IEEE
Standard 488' 1978, and with Tektronix Codes
and Formats Standard
0.002 Hz to 20 MHz, 4 digits
20 mV to 20 V pop, ± 7.5 V Offset
I
An error correction circuit maintains fre·
quency accuracy within 0.1% over the
full 0.002 Hz to 20 MHz range. Automatic
phase lock to an external signal is possi·
ble from 20 Hz to 20 MHz. Output ampli·
tude is programmable from 20 mV to 20
V p.p from 50 nand dc offset is
programmable from 20 mV to 7.5 V. For
dc voltage applications, offset only can
be programmed . Programmable
waveform hold can freeze the output
voltage of ahy 200 Hz or less waveform
at its instantaneous value. Waveform
complement and + /- trigger slope al·
low interfacing to circuits with the proper
waveform phase, especially important in
pulse and digital applications.
The ability to store ten front panel set·
ups reduces GPIB programming time
and enhances stand·alone bench appli·
cations. And the english·like GPIB com'
mands reduce software development
time.
Pulses to 25 ns, 10 ns rise/fall
Trigger, Gate, Burst, and Phase Lock
AM, FM, and VCF
Waveform Complement and Hold
The FG 5010 Programmable 20 MHz Function
Generator is a two· wide TM 5000 module with
versatile overall performance and an unusually
high degree of programmability for many paramo
eters and settings. Its Sine, Square, and Triangle
modes are optimized for superior waveform capa·
bility and include trigger, gate, counted burst,
phase lock, AM, and FM modes. Variable symme·
try that is usable to 20 MHz extends pulse and
ramp capabilities beyond those of normal gener·
ators; and variable phase enhances the triggger,
gate, burst, and phase lock modes.
1 Mn or 50 n. internally selectable.
Trigger Threlhold -
0 V or + 0.5 V. internally selectable.
Amplitude lensitivity Slope -
.;;250 mV p-p.
or Minus. piUS only in PH LOCK .
Plus
Minimum Pull. Width -
25 ns.
Maximum Frequency -
20 MHz.
Maximum Input Amplitude into 1 Mil.
Burst Range -
:t 5 V pk into 50 n . :t 20 V pk
1 to 9999 cycles.
Phale Lock Range MHz .
Automatic capture from 20 Hz to 20
Phale Lock Time - Typically 8 ms to 88
final frequency and start frequency.
sec. depending on
AM INPUT
Input Impedence Sensitivity -
10 kll.
5 V p-p produces .. 100% modulation.
Dlltortlon - < 2% at 70% modulation and .;;2 MHz : < 4% at
70% modulation and > 2 MHz.
Bandwidth -
Dc to .. 100 kHz.
Maximum Input Amplitude -
:t 20 V pk.
FMINPUT
FG 5010 CHARACTERISTICS
Input Impedance -
Waveform - Sine. Square and Triangle with variable Symme·
try providing Pulses and Aamps.
Symmetry - 10% to 90%. 1% steps. :t 2% accuracy. Aange
above 4 MHz is limited by 25 ns minimum triangle transition
time (decreases to 50% at 20 MHz).
Sensitivity Distortion -
Bandwidth -
10 kll.
0 to :t 1V deviates center frequency "
:t 1%.
~ 2%
Dc to .. 100kHz.
Maximum Input -
:t 20 V pk.
Frequency - Aange: 0.002 Hz to 20 MHz. Accuracy: Con·
tinuous mode. :t 0.1%. Trigger. Gate. Burst modes: frequency
200 Hz. :t o .l %: frequency > 200 Hz. :t 5.0%. Aesolution :
Continuous mode. 4 digits Trigger. Gate. Burst modes. Fre·
quency ", 200 Hz. 4 digits. Frequency > 200 Hz . 3 digits.
Senlitivity - 0 to 10.0 V produces a .. 1000: 1 frequency
change. positive going voltage increases frequency .
Amplitude - Aange: 20 mV to 20 V p-p open circuit: 10 mV
to 10 V p-p into 50 Il load.
Slew Rate -
.. 0.063
Bandwidth -
Dc to .. 100 kHz.
Accuracies -
Maximum Input -
Sine, Square, and Triangle Waveforms
10% -90 % Variable Symmetry in 1 % steps
TRIG, GATE, BURST, and PH LOCK INPUT
Inpul Impedance -
.002 Hz to 500 kHz
Sine
Square
:t 3%
± ;20/0
10 kn.
V/~s .
:t 20 V pk.
Triangle
OUTPUT HOLD MODE
± 20f0
+ 2% - 3.5% + 2% - 3.5%
500 kHz to 1 MHz
± 3%
1 MHz to 5 MHz
:t 3%
± 3%
+ 3% - 5%
5 MHz to 20 MHz
+ 5% - 10°;'
± S%
+ 5% - 20%
From + 15' Cto + 35 ' C Into 50 Il load at 50% symmetry. Aes·
olution : 20 mV from 2.02 V to 20.00 V p-p. 2 mV from 202 mV
to 2.000 V p-P. 0.2 mV from 20.0 mV to 200.0 mV p-p.
Olllet - Aange: :t 10 mV to :t 7 .5 V open circuit : :t 5 mV to
:t 3.75 V into 50 Il load . Maximum peak signal plus ollset is
:t 15 V open circuit. :t 7 .5 V into SOil load. Accuracy: .;; :t (I %
of the selected ollset, + 1% of the signal p-p amplitude. + 20
mY). Resolution: 10 mV open circuit. 5 mV into 50 II load. 0
volts is also provided.
Output Impedance -
VCFINPUT
Input Impedance -
50 ll.
Sineweve Distortion - 20 Hz to 19.99 kHz . .;;0.5%: 20.0 kHz
to 99.99 kHz . .;; 1.0%: 100kHz to 20.0 MHz, Harmonics great.
er than 30 dB down. Valid from + 15' C to + 35 ' C into 50 II
load with 0 V ollset. continuous mode. 50% symmetry. and
AM . FM . VCF. and Complement 011.
Range value)
0.002 Hz to 200 Hz. (Output holds at instantaneous
PHASE (TRIG, GATE, and BURST modes)
Range -
:t 90 ' to 1 MHz . decreasing to :t 47 ' at 20 MHz.
Accuracy -
:t 2' to 500 kHz:
:t 12'
+ (~XI9% xlf)' 1
20 MHz
From + 15' C to + 35 ' C. VCF 011. output in Normal and sym·
metrty at 50%.
Resolution -
l'
PHASE (PH LOCK MODE)
From +IS'C to +3S'C.
Range - :t 90 ' to 9.999 MHz: :t 50' from 10 MHz to 20 MHz
(Complementing the output extends range).
Accuracy Resolution -
:t (2 ' + 5% of selected value).
10
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Squarewave Response - Aisetime and Falllime are .,;10 ns.
Aberrations are .,; 5% p-p + 20 mY.
Operating Temperature -
Triangle Linearity (10% to 90 %) - 0.002 Hz to 100 kHz.
;;> 99%. 100 kHz 10 2 MHz. > 98%. 2 MHz to 20 MHz . .. 90%.
Operating Altitude -
Trigger Output impedance.
0 V :t 100 mV to .. + 2 V from 50 n source
Storage Tempereture Storage Altitude -
4.6 km (15.000 It).
15 km (50.000 It).
Power Consumption Net Weight -
O' C to + 50 ' C.
- 55 ' C to + 75 ' C.
60 watts.
6.2 Ibs.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Extender Board Kit 067·0152· 00. Aear Interface Signal Cabl
Kit 020·0701 ·00 . Service Kit 067· 1041 ·00.
Order FG 5010 20 MHz
Function Generator ............................. $5200
274
TEK
FG507
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
FG 504
40 MHz Function Generator
FG 507
FG 504
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
0.00 1 Hz to 40 MHz
Includes all FG 501 A Features
Three Basic Waveforms,
Plus a Wide Range of Shaping
with Variable Rise and Fall Times
and Symmetry Controls
Logarithmic or Linear Sweep
Separate Start/Stop Frequency Dials
FG 507 triggered sweep mode with output gated on by sweep
gate.
Sweep Up or Down
Logarithmic or Linear Sweep
Sweep and Hold
Separate Frequency Dials
Set Lower (START) and
Upper (STOP) Limits of Sweep
Manual Sweep
Up to 30 V pop Output
The FG flJ7 features the same basic performance
as the FG 501A and adds flexible ,easy·to-use log
and linear sweep capability.
The log sweep of the FG 507 is mathematically
accurate and allows accurate frequency plots
when using log scales, log paper, or a storage
oscilloscope like the SC 503 Storage Oscilloscope. Separate start and stop frequency dials
make frequency settings easy to set and interpret. The instrument can be internally or externally
swept up or down and a third frequency control
allows you to manually sweep between the preset
start and stop frequencies without disturbing their
settings. This is especially convenient for examining frequency and amplitude anomalies of a
circuit under test or in setting start and stop
points. The sweep generator can be swept and
the sweep gate output can be used to gate
(burst) the generator on for swept bursts. The
sweep hold mode allows the generator to sweep
to the stop frequency and remain there until
released .
Built-in Attenuator
Am and Fm
FG 507 in logarithmic sweep with sweep ramp and gate
outputs.
Phase Lock Mode
External and Manual Trigger or Gate
Counted Burst with DO 501
True four quadrant multiplier permits normal am or double sideband suppressed carrier modulation.
The output of the FG 504 may be phase locked,
gated, or triggered by a reference signal, letting
you convert from one waveform to another, such
as pulses to sinewaves, as well as adjust phase
relationships. Post attenuator offset enables use
of the full ± 7.5 V offset range with small signals.
And the FG 504 output can be amplitude or frequency modulated by external signals.
The FG 504 also provides trigger output, external
voltage control input, and sweep output.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 504 40 MHz Function Generator .. $2360
FG 504T 40 MHz Function Generator $2645
The accurate log/lin sweep capability of the
FG 507 plus the low distortion, 0.25% over the
audio range, make it ideally suited to audio
testing.
(includes FG 504, TM 503 Mainframe, and 016-0195-03 blank
panel)
Order FG 507 2 MHz Sweeping
Function Generator ............................. $1300
FG 504 30 volt output with 6 ns rise and fall times for superior
pulse waveforms.
275
RAMP AND FUNCTION
TEK GENERATORS
FG 501A
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
FG 502
FG503
RG 501
',
\
,," ...
~
2 MHz Function Generator
11 MHz Function Generator
..
3 MHz Function Generator
Ramp Generator
FG 501A
FG 502
RG 501
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
10 I'S to 10 s Ramp Duration
Five Waveforms
Plus or Minus Output
Vcf and Gated Burst
10 V Amplitude
30 V pop,
± 13 V Offset
5% to 95% Variable Symmetry
Trigger or Gate, ± Slope
60 dB Step Attenuator
,.;:;;0.25 % Sinewave Distortion
,.;:;; 25 ns Rise/Fall
The FG 501A provides low-distortion outputs from
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz. It is capable of generating five
basic waveforms-sine wave, square wave, triangle, ramp , and pulse-at output levels up to 30
volts peak-to-peak with up to ± 13 volts of offset
from a 50·ohm source. Waveform triggering and
gating are provided with a variable phase control
to permit up to ± 90° of phase shift for generating haversines, sin2 pulses, and haver triangles. A
step attenuator provides 60 dB of output signal
attenuation in 20 dB steps with an additional 20
dB of variable attenuation. Variable symmetry
from 5% to 95% provides ramps and pulses.
Pulse rise time is ,.;:;;25 ns. Audio sinewave distortion is less than 0.25% and audio amplitude
flatness is within 0.1 dB.
Because of its ability to generate low distortion
sine waves, the FG 501A is uniquely appropriate
for applications demanding audio signals.
Also useful in audio applications is the built-in 0 to
60 dB attenuator designed into the FG 501 A.
The wide range variable symmetry of the FG 501A
is useful for generation of pulses and ramps.
Order FG 501 A 2 MHz
Function Generator ............................... $700
The FG 502 Function Generator provides low-distortion sine, square, and triangle waveforms, and
positive or negative ramps and pulses. Output
frequency is continuously varable from 0.1 Hz to
11 MHz. The high frequency range from 1 to 11
MHz permits the versatility of the function generator to be extended into the medium radio frequency range. Voltage controlled frequency input
permits the FG 502 to be used as a sweep generator. The external gate input permits the FG 502
output in any of its modes to be controlled by an
externally supplied pulse to generate bursts of
various output waveforms. This feature has application in wireline or radio remote control equipment and in certain phases of the telephone
industry.
Order FG 502 11 MHz
Function Generator ............................... $810
Gate Out, TTL Compatible
RAMP
Ramp Duration - Decade ranges of 10 "s to 1 s, extends to
lOs with 1-10 duration multiplier. Accurate within 3% when
multiplier is at Xl (multiplier not calibrated).
Ramp Amplitude - Continuously variable from 50 mV or less
to at least 10 V, either polarity. Dc level between ramps, 0 V
within 20 mV .
Gate - From a low state of 0 V, within 100 mV, the ramp gate
rises to + 3 V, within 0.6 V, in 100 ns or less. Fall time is 100 ns
or less. Gate source Impedance is nominally 160 Il.
Ramp Output Characteristics - Minimum load resistance 3
kll: max load capacitance, 300 pF.
FG 503
1.0 Hz to 3 MHz
Three Waveforms
Vcf
The FG 503 Function Generator provides highquality low-distortion sine, square, and triangle
waveforms . Six decade frequency multi pier
steps, a custom position for user-determined frequency multiplication, a dial calibrated from 1.0 to
30 (uncalibrated from 0.1 to 1.0), and a frequency
vernier control work together to select frequencies in overlapping ranges from 1 Hz to 3 MHz.
The output frequency may be swept over a
1000:1 ratio by an external voltage. Output amplitude and offset controls are provided. A trigger
output is available for controlling external devices
or equipment. Amplitude up to 10 V pop can be
developed across a 50 f! load (20 V pop open
circuit). Selectable offset up to 3.75 V dc across
50 f! (7.5 V dc open circuit) is also featured .
Order 503 3 MHz
Function Generator ............................... $525
276
Scope-type Trigger Functions
TRIGGERING
Auto Triggering - Provides free-running Signal in absence of
trigger. Locks automatically to trigger with a frequency above
20 Hz and at least 200 mV amplitude.
External Triggering - Sensitivity is at least 200 mV pop, de to
100 kHz. Input Impedance ",,9.5 kll. 50 V (dc + peak ac) max
input.
Internal Triggering - Same as external except that the trigger source is via the rear interface.
Line Trigger -
Triggers at line frequency .
Trigger Level Range -
± 1 V.
Order RG 501 Ramp Generator ........... $540
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY
Manual (one-shot) Trigger
Generator (016-0597-00) ................................................ $125
TEK
CURRENT PROBE~
AMPLIFIER:s
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
The TM 500 Signal Processors offer unique capabilities for solving electrical measurement and
analysis problems. Compact portability and plugin flexibility allow complete lab instrumentation
set-ups, within stringent space and budget
limitations.
These versatile signal alteration devices are applicable to a broad range of measurement needs:
preamplification of low level signals; addition or
removal of dc offset; integration, differentiation,
or summing of multiple signals; impedance transformation; or amplification (to 80 V pop) to suggest a few.
AM 503
... --
~Ji
•
A6303
'00 A Ac and Dc Current Measurements
The AM 503 is specifically designed to work with
the A6303/A6302 Current Probes (up to 50 MHz),
and incorporates a feature that limits the
bandwidth to 5 MHz, allowing elimination of
unwanted transients or noise. An illuminated knob
skirt indicates calibrated current per division.
To use these current probes to their full
bandwidth, the bandwidth of the oscilloscope
should be greater than the probe/AM 503 combination. For example, with the A6302IAM 503, a
scope such as the 80 MHz SC 504 can be used
to obtain full bandwidth capability.
The A6302IAM 503 and A6303/AM 503 Current
Probe Systems have a wide variety of applications from SCR and power supply measurements
to medical applications. The probes utilize inductive coupling eliminating the need to break the
circuit under test.
The versatile AM 502 Differential Amplifier lets
you control gain, dc offset, low frequency and
high frequency response for maximum rejection
of unwanted signals. Adjustable dc offset allows
high amplification even when low-level signals
have a dc component of up to one volt. High
performance features of the AM 502 are a dc to 1
MHz bandwidth and 100 dB common-mode rejection ratio.
The AM 501 Operational Amplifier's output power
( ± 40 volts and ± 50 mA across 800 n loads) is
more than adequate for most electronic and
electro-mechanical applications. This high-output
unit has front panel connectors that let you
change configurations by selecting feedback
components. The AM 501 is easily set up for
differentation, integration, summing and impedance transformation problems.
Our extremely versatile AF 501 Bandpass
Riter/Amplifier has a center frequency that is oneknob tunable over the entire audio range (3 Hz to
35 kHz). It's switch-selectable in broad (0=5,
"",1 /3 octave) and narrow (0=15, "",1 / 10 octave)
bandwidths. It provides sine wave generation to
35 kHz and flat signal amplification to 50 kHz. You
can select amplification from 1 to 500 in a 1-2-5
sequence in both filter and amplifier modes.
Current Probe
Dc to 15 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurements to 500 A
Ac or Dc Coupling
, Inch by 0.830 Inch Jaw Opening
Current Probe Amplifier
One·hand Operation
AM 503
Displays Current Signals on an Oscilloscope
Current Range. Maximum Current, and
Bandwidth Determined by the Probe Used
This new clamp-around probe satisfies requirements for current measurements to 100 A from
dc to 15 MHz. Equipped with a convenient pistol
grip, the A6303 can easily be clamped to cables
up to 0.830 in. Other measurement parameters of
the probe include: 100 amps continuous and 500
amps peak.
The AM 503 is a plug-in modular current-probe
amplifier that operates in TM 500 Mainframes. It
allows display of current on any oscilloscope with
10 mV/div sensitivity, 50 ohm or 1 megohm input,
and (for performance to full bandwidth specifications) at least 75 MHz when using the A6302 or 50
MHz when using the A6303 . The amplifier
attenuator is calibrated in 12 steps with aI, 2, 5
sequence, and the knob-skirt is illuminated to indicate current per division. The current range, maximum current rating , and bandwidth are determined by the particular probe in use. Bandwidth
can be set to FULL (where it is limited by the
probe in use) or to 5 MHz. Coupling may be
switch selected to ac or dc. Ac coupling offers a
convenient means of measuring low-amplitude ac
signals on a high-level dc current. A front-panel
indicator warns of input current overload.
By combining an oscilloscope, like the SC 504,
with the A6303/AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier in
a TM 500 Mainframe you will have a convenient
and compact high current amplification/measurement system.
CHARACTERISTICS
, mA to 20 A Current Measurement Range
Order A6303 Current Probe .... _.. _......... $845
A6302
Current Probe
(AM 503 Current Probe Amplilier with A6302 Probe or
A6303 Probe)
50 A Peak Pulse Measurements
Maximum Input Current - 20 A (de + peak ac) for
A6302 . 100 A (de + peak ac) lor A6303.
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
Maximum Voltage lor Current Under Test (Bare Conductor)
- 500 V (de + peak ac) for A6302. 700 V (de + peak ac) for
A6303.
Bandwidth (- 3 dB) - Dc to at least 50 MHz with A6302. Dc
to at least 15 MHz with A6303.
Rise Time (Full Bandwidth) or less with A6303.
7 ns or less with A6302. 23 ns
Dellection Factor - 1 mA/div to 5 A/div for A6302. 20 mA/div
10 50 A/div for A6303. In aI , 2. 5 sequence for both probes.
Attenuator Accuracy IDIV for both probes.
Within 3% of indicated CURRENT-
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES WITH AM 503
50 II cable with SNC (012-0057-01). 50
0049-01).
n
terminator (011 -
Order AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier . $875
When a A6302 Current Probe is used with the AM
503 Current Probe Amplifier, the current range is
from 1 mA to 20 A. Maximum current is 20 A (dc
+ peak ac). Peak pulse maximum is 50 A not to
exceed a product of 100 A /LS . The probe operates through inductive coupling with no electrical
contact. A flick of your forefinger operates the
sliding jaw in the insulated probe tip. Just put the
probe tip around the conductor under test for immediate current readings .
Included Accessories - 5 inch ground lead (175-0124-01).3
inch ground lead (175.0263-01), 2 alligator clips (344-0046-00).
Order A6302 Current Probe .. ............... $440
')77
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK AMPLIFIERS
AF 501
AM 501
AM 502
AF 501
Tunable Bandpass Filtering to 35 kHz
Signal Amplification to 50 kHz
Sinewave Generation to 35 kHz
Strobe Trigger Synced to Oscillator or Filter
Output
Dial Readings in Hz or Cycles per Minute
Differential Amplifier
Operati~nal
Amplifier
Bandpass Filter/Amplifier
AM 502
AM 501
1 to 100,000 Gain
±40 V, 50 mA Output
100 dB emrr
Open Loop Gain 10,000
Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points
50 V / jJs Slew Rate
Dc to 1 MHz Maximum Bandwith
Symmetrical Differential Design
Adjustable Dc Offset
The AM 502 Differential Amplifier features wide
bandwidth; high cmrr; and selectable calibrated
gain and filtering . Well-suited for general-purpose
or laboratory work, it can drive oscilloscopes,
monitors, chart recorders, displays, or processing
devices. In the unity gain mode, it can be used as
a signal conditioner. Input dc offsetting to ± 1 V is
provided.
AMPLIFIER
Gain - 100 to 100.000. 1-2-5 sequence. accurate within 2%.
1X gain obtained by l00X attenuation.
Hf - 3 dB POINT - Selectable In 9 steps (1-3 sequence) from
100Hz to 1 MHz. Upper - 3 dB point reduces to 500 kHz at 50
k gain. 250 kHz at lOOk gain.
Lf - 3 dB POtNT - Selectable in 6 steps from 0.1 Hz to 10
kHz : ac coupling limits - 3 dB point to 2 Hz or less.
Variable DC Offlet - At least ± 1 V.
Normal-Mode Cmrr - At least 100 dB. de to 50 kHz. ± 5 V.
+ 100 Mode Cmrr - At least 50 dB. de to 50 kHz. ± 1O'V.
Max Input Voltage - Normal mode de coupled: 15 V (de +
peak ac) . .;. 100 Mode de coupled: 350 V (de + peak ac). Ac
coupled : 350 V (de + peak ac) with coupling capaCitor
precharged.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil paralleled by = 47 pF. Input impedance
can be increased to a FET Input via a simple Internal jumper
change.
Max Voltage Drift - 100 .V/' C referred to input NORM
mode.
Input Gate Current - ± 100 pA for T .. 30' C.
Max Noise 25 .V or less (tangentially measured) referred
to input NORM mode.
OUTPUT
± 5 V. ± 20 mAo output resistance is 5 n or
Max Output less.
Min Load Impedance - 250 II
Over Range - Front-panel lamp indicates most over-range
ConditionS.
Order AM 502 Differential
Amplifier .............................................. $1065
278
The AM 501 Operational Amplifier features high
input impedance (FET), high slew rate, a wide
range of input and output voltage, and high output current. Applictions include: amplification; impedance transformation; integration; differentiation and summing. It is well-suited as a postamplifier or offset-generator for signal sources,
including the TM 500 Modules. Components may
be added externally or internally making it ideal
for teaching operational amplifier theory.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
Open Loop Gain - At least 10.000 at 60 Hz into BOO n load.
Unity Gain Bandwidth - At least 5 MHz into BOO n load.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Typically > 20.000 to 1 at
60 Hz for common-mode signals up to ± 40 V.
Slew Rate - At least 50 V/.s into an BOO n load.
INPUT
Input BI.. Current - Typically < 500 pA at 25' C. < 2nA at
50' C.
Drift - < 100 .V/' C.
Noise - < 10.V RMS.
Max Differential Input Voltage - BO V.
OUTPUT
Voltage Range - At least ± 40 V into 2 kit
Current Limit - At least ± 50 mAo
Open Loop Output R - ~ 150 II.
Order AM 501 Operational Amplifier .. $530
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY
Terminal Acce..ory Adapter Kit
(013-0146-00) .................................................................. $22
The AF 501 is a Bandpass Riter/Amplifier, ac·
coupled amplifier and sinewave generator. Used
alone or in conjunction with other TM 500 instruments, the AF 501 is a highly versatile and accurate signal analysis tool. Developed primarily for
the mechanical measurement domain, the AF 501
can be used as a manual-sweep spectrum analyzer for complex sound and vibration signals.
Single-frequency tuning facilitates isolation of lX
rpm signals in dynamic balancing. or viewing
higher order disturbances on a CRT monitor. An
output pulse, synced to the filter or oscillator output Signal, is available for triggering a strobo·
scope or oscilloscope and for frequency
counting.
BANDPASS FILTER
Center Frequency Range - 3 Hz to 35 kHz in 4 decade
steps.
Frequency Dial Error - < 5% dial setting between 3-20.
< 10"10 dial setting between 20-30.
Frequency Multiplier - Xl. Xl0. Xl00. Xl k.
Pha.e Shift - < 10' at tuned frequency below 5 kHz.
Dial Range - 3 to 40 Hz/1BO-2400 cprn.
Max Filter Attenuation - > 70 dB.
Filter Selectivity - Broad:
5 ± 1.
Narrow: a - 15 ± 5.
Bandwidth at Half-pqwer Pointl 6F _ 3 dB _ center frequency
a-
a
Gain Range - 1-500 : 1·2·5 sequence.
Gain Accuracy - ± 3 dB (Broad). ± 5 dB (Narrow).
Input Impedance - 1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by ~ 47 pF.
Max Dc Input Voltage - ± 100 V.
Output Voltage - 20 V pop (max freq times amplitude - 400
V kHz).
Output Current - 20 mA pop max (at 20 V pop).
Output Impedance - < 1 II.
AMPLIFIER
Gain - 1 to 500: 1-2·5 sequence.
Gain Accuracy - ± 3% .
Bandwidth - < 0.5 Hz to > 50 kHz (at 3 dB point).
Input Impedance - 1 Mil ± 1"10 paralleled by ~ 47 pF.
Nol,e - < 25 mV rms (referred to output).
Output Voltage - 20 V pop (max freq times amplitude - 400
V kHz).
OSCILLATOR
Sine Wave Out Range - 3 Hz to 35 kHz .
Dial Range - 3 to 40 Hz/1BO·2400 cprn.
Output Amplitude - 1. 2. or 5 V pop ± 20%. depending on
gain position.
Waveform Distortion - < 3%.
Output Current - Max 50 mA pop.
Output Impedance - < 1 II (within 50 mA output current
limit).
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Pulse Amplitude - > 10 V.
Pul.e Duration - 10 ± 5 .5.
Min Signal Required - 500 mV. pop
Rise and Fall Time - < 1 .5.
Output Impedance - ~ 50 II.
Order AF 501 Bandpass
Filter/Amplifier ...................................... $840
GENERAL PURPOSE
TEK INSTRUMENTS
Downtime is one problem no production manager
can afford ... and the time service engineers
spend transporting oscilloscopes from the job
site to the calibration bench is wasted time. In the
end, for a production house or manufacturing
unit, the production line is the bottom line.
With the CG 551AP, Tektronix Oscilloscope Calibration Instruments come close to solving the
entire range of oscilloscope calibration problems.
The CG 551 AP is the computerized solution to
large-scale scope calibration needs. The CG
551AP can be used as part of a computerized
system to calibrate and verify all of the major
oscillOSCOpe parameters. The CG 551AP is specifically designed for use at those installations
where many oscilloscopes are used and maintained. Its programmability, combined with stateof-the-art performance, helps to minimize calibration lab labor while maximizing accuracy of
verification checks.
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the CG 551 AP, TM 500 offers a
complete set of calibration instruments which can
be configured into a portable test set for in-field
oscillOSCOpe service and calibration.
These TM 500 Oscilloscope Calibration instruments offer the widest range of standard amplitude square waves, fastest rise times, lowest
aberrations, fastest time marks and widest frequency range of leveled sine waves available
today.
In addition to its crystal-controlled mode, the TG
501 provides a variable mode. This means you
can quickly adjust and accurately align the time
mark spacing to your oscilloscope's graticule
marks, and read the percentage timing error
directly off the TG 501 's digital display.
Our PG 506 Calibration Generator offers TM 500
portability plus state-of-the-art performance features. With the PG 506 in the amplitude calibration
mode, you can generate a 1 kHz squarewave and
vary its amplitude around thl! calibrated level until
the squarewave aligns with your oscilloscope's
verticle graticule divisions. At that point, you can
read the scope deflection error right off the PG
506's digital display in percentage high or low.
TM 500 leveled sinewave generators, the SG 503
and SG 504, round out a scope calibration and
verification package. These generators provide
leveled sine waves for bandwidth checks (- 3 dB
points) and triggering performance checks.
The SG 503 is a general-purpose leveled sinewave oscillator providing variable output from 250
kHz to 250 MHz. The SG 504 provides a leveled
output amplitude that is variable from 245 MHz to
1050 MHz in two bands.
Another TM 500 plug-in, the SG 502 Oscillator,
could also benefit calibration applications where
verification of low frequency roll off in ac modes
and performance measurement of low frequency
reject triggering modes is required.
For features that allow time and error reduction
for on-the-job oscilloscope evaluation, our TM 500
Calibration instruments are the best value on the
market today.
Tektronix off.r. malntenlnc. training cl..... on the
TM 500 C.llbr.tlon Sy.t.m. P.ck.g. and a new multlm.dla tr.lnlng pack.g. on Digital Count.r .nd M.t.r Conc.pt • . For TM 5000 trllning and other tr.lnlng Inform.tion,
contact your local Sal •• Offlc. or requ••t • copy of th.
T.ktronlx Cu.tom.r Tr.ining C.talog.
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION INSTRUMENTS CHART
CO 551AP Programmable
C.llbr.tlon Oener.tor
Primary
Functions
Amplitude Calibration
40 pv to 200 V
Time-base Calibration
400pstoSs
Secondary
Functions
Rise time and transient response testing,
attenuator compensation testing.
Testing OSCilloscope nonlinearity.
PO Sot
C.llbr.tlon
Gener.tor
TO 501
Time M.rk
Oener.tor
SO 503
Signal
Gener.tor
SO 504
Slgn.1
Gener.tor
Amplitude
Calibration
200 pV to 100 V
Time-base
Calibration
1 ns to 5 s
Bandwidth
Calibration
250 kHz to 250 MHz
Bandwidth
Calibration
245 MHz to 1050 MHz
Rise time and transient
response testing, altenuator
compensation testing.
Testing
OSCilloscope
nonlinearity
General leveled rf
signal source
General leveled rf
signal source with
frequency modulation
capability
279
CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
CG 551AP
~,.,'
-,"
I0
''''··;···>!':':·'~1!I'.'ii''~
)I
V /
11
x
•
lI!ktronlx
Y
-
!IV
o. Y "H
tion signals to the oscilloscope. At the same time,
a series of op~rator instructions on the CRT are
automatically coordinated with the calibration Signals going into the oscilloscope from the CG
551AP. The operator follows these instructions to
make the necessary settings of the oscilloscope
controls as the calibration or test procedure progresses. The CG 551AP return error or deviation
information to the controller, where it is compared
with pre programmed reference values for the oscilloscope; out-of-tolerance values are flagged . A
permanent record of the entire maintenance procedure can be stored by the controller and can
be printed via peripherals such as the hard copy
unit or line printer. Throughout the process, all
calibration settings are determined by the computer's program. All front panel settings on the
oscilloscope are specified in detail for the operator. Calculations of error percentages are performed automatically.
--
I GH
ll'IIAMAIU
0
Programmable Oscilloscope Calibration Generator
CG 551AP
The CG 551 AP IS designed to comply with IEEE
Standard 488-1978, and with TektroniX Codes
and Formats Standard
The TEKTRONIX CG 551AP is a mlcroprocessorbased OSCilloscope calibration generator that is
fully programmable. It can be used as part of a
computerized system for the calibration and verification of major oscilloscope parameters, IncludIng
Vertical Gain
Horizontal Timing and Gain
Vertical Bandwidth/ Pulse Characteristics
Probe Accuracy and Compensation
Current Probe Accuracy
The CG 551AP's front panel features a diversity
of functions, many of which represent a new
state of the art in calibration performance. All
these functions are programmable through a controller via the GPIB (General Purpose Interface
Bus, IEEE-488). A "LEARN" mode allows any manually-set function or range to be acquired by a
controller. Subsequent use of the resulting program requires a minimum of operator skill and
makes data logging an automatic operation.
This computer-assisted test and calibration system provides step-by-step instructions to the operator, thus significantly reducing the skill level
required .
Many of the calibration and test steps previously
performed by the operator can now be transferred to the computer which executes them in a
consistent and error-free manner. To calibrate a
particular oscilloscope, the computer's program
sends control-setting information to the CG
551AP, which then sends the appropriate calibra-
Calibrator Output Accuracy
InslrucllOns to opera lor on CRT screen of 4052 Graphics Computing Controller.
280
To develop the specific software for testing and
calibration of different oscilloscopes, Tektronix
has designed the CG 551 AP ScopeCal Procedure
Development Aid program . This program assumes you are not familiar with programming. To
incorporate the calibrator's knowledge into the
system software, the ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid program uses two simplified techniques. Rrst is a series of questions that appear
on the controller's CRT. The calibrator's answers
to these questions form the foundation for the
software that will eventually run the system. Second is the CG 551AP's "LEARN" mode, which allows the calibrator to set functions and ranges
using the CG 551AP's front panel controls (as
would have been done on older generations of
manually-operated calibration generators), and
have these entries automatically transferred to
the controller for use in forming the program.
Once the calibrator has completed interacting
with the ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid
program, all the acquired information is automatically converted into a Simpler program format that
will govern the system's operation when a less
experienced operator is using it. This operatororiented program will take care of all the CG
551AP's settings, while giving the operator a
4052 Graphics Computer Controlier showing the development of a typical cali bration procedure using the ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid program.
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
step-by-step description of any settings that must
be made on the oscilloscope. It will also accept
data from the CG 551AP or the controller
keyboard.
The CG 551AP is designed to greatly reduce your
maintenance costs. Built-in self test routines and
hardware check the operation of all major circuits
each time the power is turned on.
SLEWED EDGE (TIMING MODE)
Slewed Edges are used to calibrate the very fastest ranges
found on oscillOscope time bases.
Range -
0.4 ns to lOOns (1-2-5 steps plus 0.4 ns).
Xl0 Magnifier - Increases Slewed Edge rate by a factor of
ten (5 ns to lOOns range).
Accuracy -
:t o.Ol % (Optional TCXO ± 0.0003%).
Edge POlltion Uncertainty Amplitude -
Modular construction means that all circuit
boards unplug (except the Main Interconnect) for
easy exchange if service is required. A signature
analysis mode is included to facilitate
troubleshooting of the digital portion of the
instrument.
VOLTAGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The standard voltage is used to calibrate vertical display
accuracy.
Range -
40"V to 200 V (1-2-5 steps with multiplier).
Multipliers Polarity -
t .2.3.4 .5.6.8.1 0 divisions.
POSitive from ground.
+ 0.25%
Accuracy -
± 1 ~ V,
Frequency - 40 "V to 80 mY : 10 Hz to tOO kHz. 100mV to
10 V: 10 Hz to 100 kHz . or dc. 12 V to 200 V: 10 Hz to 10 kHz.
or dc.
Droop-
~ 1 %.
Variable Range -
::!:
TRIGGER OUTPUT
The oscilloscope under test is normally triggered externally
from this source.
1.2.3.4 .5.6.8.10.
Accuracy -
Slawed Edge Mode - One trigger per slewed edge. (Rate -;10 and -;- 100 not available).
All Othar Modes Normal - Slaved to output Irequency.
Divided by 10 - One-tenth output frequency .
Divided by 100 - One-hundredth output frequency .
TIMING REFERENCE OUTPUT
EXTERNAL TIMING REFERENCE
Input Frequency MHz.
Dc or 10Hz to 1 MHz (decade steps).
Input Amplitude -
1 V to 10 V RMS.
10 kll (nominal).
20 mV to 1 V (1-2-5 steps with multipliers).
1.2.3.4.5.6.8.10.
Positive or negative transitions to ground.
Risetime (Falltime) -
< 1.3 ns.
± 2%.
Abberrations -
Long Term Flatness Frequency -
:t 0.5% alter first IOns.
10Hz to 1 MHz (decade steps).
Variable Amplitude Range -
Termination -
> ± 10% from nominal.
50 II.
HIGH EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode IS used to test
OSCilloscope input amplifier and attenuatar compensation .
Range -
1.2 V to 100 V (1.2.5 steps with multipliers).
Polarity -
Positive to ground.
Risetime -
< 100 ps .
Aberrations -
± 2%.
Long Term Flatness Frequency -
:t 0.5% alter first 500 ns.
10Hz to 100 kHz (decade steps).
Variable Amplitude Range -
Termination -
The markers obtained In this mode are used to calibrate oscilloscope time bases.
10 ns to 5 s (1-2.5 steps).
Accuracy Amplitude -
Increase marker rate by a factor of ten (0. 1
:t o.Ol % (optional TCXO :t o.0003%).
1 V minimum into 50 ll.
Variable Range -
:t 9.9%.
Option 02 Delete. Pulse Head ............................ Sub $1100
Altitude Operating km).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Operating - O'C to + 50'C.
- 20'C to +65 ' C.
Relative Humidity -
90 to 95% at + 50 ' C for 5 days.
15.000 It (4.5 km). Nonoperating -
50.000 It (15
Vibration - Operating - Displacement (peak-to-peak). 0.015
inch. Vibration Frequency. 10 Hz - 55 Hz. Total time. 75
minutes.
Shock - Nonoperating - 30 g's. 1/2 sine. 11 ms duration. 3
shocks in each direction along 3 major axes ; lotal shocks. 18.
Bench Handling - Operating balance, whichever occurs first.
45 '. 4 inches or point of
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Overall Dimensions (triple compartment TM 500
Plug-in).
Height - 4.97 inches (12.63 cm).
Width - 7.96 inches (20.22).
Length - 11.97 inches (30.42 em).
Net Weight Standard Instrument - 8.50 Ibs (3.86 kg).
Option 01 - 8.75 Ibs (3.98 kg).
PULSE HEAD
(Standard Accessory)
... 10 kll.
Xl0 Magnifier "s to 5 s range) .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Output Cable Assembly. 012·0884·00. Pulse Head . 015· 0311-01.
Meets or exceeds MIL-T-28800B. Class 5 requirements.
Temperature Nonoperating -
> ± 10% from nominal.
MARKERS (TIMING MODE)
Range -
Chop Parameters - Frequency - 30 Hz nominal. (Auto).
Auto Timeout - Internally selectable. 0.5. 1 or 2 minutes.
Oplion 01 Add. High Accuracy Time Base
(TCXO) .................................................................... Add 5500
ENVIRONMENTAL
LOW EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
Polarity -
Resistance - Open - Unterminated (the resistance of the
oscilloscope input). 50 II - 50!l :t 1% in 50 II position. Maximum voltage is :t 5 V peak in the 50 !l postion.
ORDERING INFORMATION
CG 551 AP ................ _........ _............... $12,000
:t O.OOt %.
Input Resistance -
:t 9.9%.
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode is used to test
OSCilloscope input amplilier and attenuator compensation.
Multipliers -
Input - Ac Voltage - :t 40"V to :t loo V.
Signal Frequency - 10 Hz to 1 MHz squarewave.
Dc Voltage - + 100 mV to + 100 V.
ReqUires TM 5003 or TM 5006.
Droop- .,0: : ; 1%.
Range -
Both the OSCilloscope calibrator and CG 551 AP standard amplitude Signals are applied 10 the Comparator Head and simultaneously displayed on the oscilloscope CRT. The CG 551AP
Signals are then varied to obtain congruent displays. Errors are
then displayed on the CG 551AP readout.
Any integral multiple of 1 MHz up to 5
Required Accuracy -
± 0.25% ::t 2 JJA.
Variable Range -
COMPARATOR HEAD
(Optional Accessory)
MAINFRAMES
1 mA to 100 mA (1-2-5 sequence).
Frequency -
1 V minimum into 50 ll.
Trigger Rate - Marteer Mode
Normal - Siaved to marker rate trom lOOns to 5 s ; remains at
100 ns for faster markers .
Divided by 10 - Reduces normal trigger rate by a factor of
ten.
Divided by 100 - Reduces normal trigger rate by a factor of
one hundred.
9.9%.
The standard current is used to calibrate current probes.
Multipliers -
:t 9.9%.
Output Amplitude -
The Remote Variable Head permits the operator to concentrate
on the oscillOscope CRT while remotely operating the following
front panel controls: UNITS/DIV control ; VARIABLE-FIXED
button ; CONTINUE pushbutton and the VAR control.
The Comparator Head is used to calibrate built.in OSCilloscope
calibrators against the signals available from the CG 551AP.
> 1 V into 50 !l.
Variable Range -
CURRENT (AMPLITUDE MODE)
Range -
:t 40 ps.
REMOTE VARIABLE HEAD
(Optional Acce.lory)
FAST EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Pulse Head is used to generate fast rise, low distortion
pulses lor testing higher bandwidth vertical amplifiers.
Amplitude -
Polarity -
Remote Variable,
Order 015-0309-01 ........................................................ 5375
Pul.e Head. Order 015 -0311-01 ................................ $1400
(When purchased separately.)
4052 Graphic. Computing Controlier (32k bytes memory)
(see page 80) ............................................................... 59900
Option 10 Printer Interface ................................... Add 5550
Blank 4052 Tape. Order 119-0680-01 - (box of 5) ... $150
119-0680-00 (One each) .................................................. 540
4632 Hard Copy Unit (See page 90) ........................... 55575
Option 01 Copy Counter ................................ ....... Add $100
Paper, Carton of four rolls,
Order 006-1603-01 ........................................... ............. 5250
4642 Matri. Printer (see page 92) .............................. $2900
Option 01 Rear Feed Tractor Assembly .............. Add 5280
Paper, Carton of 2.500 sheet• •
Order 002-0262-01 ........................................................... 545
GPIB Cable. 2 meter Cable.
Order 012-0630-01 .......................................................... $75
SCPDA I (ScopeCal Procedure Development Aid and 465B
Verification Program) ................................................... 51450
Rigid Circuit Board Extender
Order 067 -0975-00 ........................................................... $65
Flexible Circuit Board Extender
Order 067-0974-00 ........................................................... 580
1.1 V peak :t 5% into 50 ll.
Adjustable Range Risetime -
Comparator Head,
OrderOI5-0310-01 .......................................................... 523
:t 10%.
", 200 pS .
Positive or negative from ground .
Aberrations - .i 3% of pulse amplitude ; not to exceed 4%
p.p lor adlacent peaks.
Frequency -
100 Hz to 100 kHz (decade steps).
281
CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS
TEK OSCILLOSCOPE
TG 501
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR MOOE
PG 506
Fixed at .. 1 ms ()( dc.
Period -
Amplitude - From 100 V pop to 200 ~V pop In 1-2-5 sequence. accurate within :1: 0.25% into 1 MO. 5 V pop to 100 ~V
pop into 50 !l.
Error Readout Range -
:I: 7.5%.
Error Readout Reaolullon -
0.1 %.
PULSE MODES
Period - 1 ~s to 10 ms (within 5%) in decade steps with the
VARIABLE control in CAL position. VARIABLE extends period
to at least lOOms.
Symmetry -
",,50% duty cyete.
HIGH AMPLITUDE OUTPUT
RI.e Time - Unterminated: lOOns ()( less. Terminated Into 50
!l: 10ns()(less.
Amplitude Range - Unterminated : 6 v ()( less to at least 60
V. Terminated into 50 0: 0.5 V ()( less to at least 5 V.
Leading Edge Aberration. - Within 2% ()( 50 mV POP. whichever is greater. when terminated into 50 0.
Pol.r1ty -
Calibration Generator
Positive going frOl"n a negative potential to ground.
Output Re.l.tance Source -
Time Mark Generator
600 0 within 5% .
FAST RISE OUTPUTS
PG 506
RI.e Time (Terminated Into 50 0) -
Three Square-Wave Output Modes
Amplitude Range (Terminated Into 50 0) to at least 1.0 V.
10 Hz to 1 MHz
Leading Edge Aberrallon. - Within 2% ()( 10 mV POP. whichever is greater. during first 10 ns.
Direct Readout of Oscilloscope Timing Error
Direct Readout of Oscilloscope Deflection
Error
Flatne •• -
External Trigger Output
The PG 506 is a calibration generator for
oscilloscopes with three modes of squarewave
output, selectable dc outputs, and a variable'
amplitude output with front· panel digital indica·
tion of oscilloscope deflection error. For checking
attenuator performance and transient response
of oscilloscopes, simultaneous plus and minus
low·level, fast rise (1 .0 ns) square waves or high
amplitude (60 V), extremely clean square waves
are available at frequencies from 10 Hz through 1
MHz. A 5 mA calibration current loop is useful for
current probe calibration. In the amplitude calibra·
tion mode, a 1 kHz square wave is generated
whose amplitude may be varied around the cali·
brated level until the square wave aligns with the
oscilloscope vertical graticule divisions; scope
deflection error is then read directly off the PG
506 digital display in percentage high or low,
permitting rapid verification of oscillOSCOpe
performance.
TG 501
1.0 ns ()( less.
100 mV ()( less
Within 0.5% after first IOns.
Pol.rity - Simultaneous positive and negative going. Positive
going is IrOl"n a negative rest potential to ground. Negative g0Ing Is IrOl"n a positive rest potential to ground.
Output Ra.i.tance Source output connect()(s.
50 0 within 3% at
Trigger Output (Terminated Into 50 0) nal of at least 1 V.
+
and -
Positive-golng sig·
Order PG 506 Calibration Generator . $2250
TUNNEL DIODE PULSER
The Tunnel Diode Pulser (067-D681-Dl) provides a
clean, fast· rise pulse for adjusting the transient
response of high·frequency oscilloscopes and
other instruments. The Tunnel Diode Pulser can
be driven by the PG 506 Calibration Generator at
repetition rates exceeding 50 Hz. Output ampli·
tude of the pulse is approximately 250 mV into 50
0, while rise time is <125 ps; aberrations are
<1% in a 1 GHz system.
Order 067-0681-01 ............................... $155
PRECISION VOLTAGE DIVIDER
Designed for use with the PG 506 in the STAN·
DARD AMPLITUDE mode, this 0.4 divider allows
your oscilloscope to display a constant 4 divisions
when checking amplitude calibration from 20
p.V/div through 1 V/div. It also allows the PG 506
to be more conveniently used with oscilloscopes
that cannot display 5 divisions of amplitude.
Input Z -
50 !l with output load .. 100 kll.
M.. Input Output -
... 5 B RMS.
0.4 x PG 506 amplitude.
Voltage Accuracy -
Marker Outputs, 5 s to 1 ns
The TG 501 nme Mark Generator provides mark·
er outputs from five seconds to one nanosecond.
A unique feature on the TG 501 is a variable timing output with a front·panel two digit LED display
which indicates percentage of timing error be·
tween the normal time interval and a variable in·
terval set to line up the marker pulse with
graticule or division mark on the display. This feature not only provides direct readout in terms of
percent error, but also helps eliminate errors as·
sociated with visually estimating error from a
display.
Marker. -
1 ns through 5 s in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Marker Amplitude - > 1 V peak into 50 n on 5 s through 10
ns markers. > 750 mV POP into 50 0 on 5 ns and 2 ns markers.
> 200 mV POP Into 50 !l on 1 ns markers.
Trigger Output Signal - Slaved to marker output frOl"n 5 S
through lOOns. Remains at lOOns f()( all faster markers.
Internal Tima B..e
Standard
Opllon 01
Crystal Frequency
1 MHz
5MHz
Stability (0· to 50·
C) after 1/2 hour
within 1 part
in lOS
within 5 parts
in 10'
Long· term Drift
1 part ()( less
in 10' per
month
1 part ()( less
in 10' per
month
Setabillty
adjustable to
within 1 part
in 10'
adjustable to
within 5 parts
in 10"
External Reference Input - Available with intemal changes.
Acceptable Irequencies. 1 MHz. 5 MHz . ()( 10 MHz. Input am·
plitude must be TIL COI"npatible.
Timing Error Readout Range -
To :I: 7.5%.
Timing Error Me •• urement Accuracy - Device under test
err()( Is indicated to within one least signifocant digit (to within
one displayed count).
:1: 0.4%.
Order 015-0265-00 ................................ $115
ORDERING INFORMATION
TG 501 Time Mark Generator ............ $1810
Opllon 0 I , 5 MHz Time B••e ................................ Add 5200
282
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK
SG 503
SG504
SG 502
•
10 HI .. 'I'Inl ......'It. • •UTH
Signal Generator
Signal Generator
Oscillator
SG 504
SG 503
SG 502
Leveled, Variable Output
Leveled, Variable Output
5 Hz to 500 kHz Sine and Square Waves
245 MHz to 1050 MHz
250 kHz to 250 MHz
Low Distortion Sine Wave
Frequency Modulation Capability
Digital Readout of Frequency
5 V RMS Open Circuit-600 fl Source
The SG 504 Signal Generator provides a leveled
output amplitude that is variable from 245 MHz to
1050 MHz in two bands. Frequency is indicated
by a high-resolution tape dial that expands each
band over 28 inches. The accurately calibrated
output voltage is variable from 0.5 V to at least 4.0
V peak-to-peak into 50 fl .
The SG 503 Signal Generator is a general-purpose leveled sine·wave oscillator. It provides a
leveled output amplitude which is variable from
250 kHz to 250 MHz. The selected frequency is
indicated by a built·in autoranging frequency
counter with a three-digit LED read-out on the
front panel. Accurately calibrated output voltage
into 50 fl is variable from 5 mV to 5.5 V peak-topeak.
Frequency Range - Low band : 245 MHz to 550 MHz Highband: 495 MHz to t 050 MHz. plus 50 kHz or 6 MHz reference
frequency (internally selected).
Frequency Accuracy Amplitude Range -
Amplitude Accuracy amplitude.
Flatness -
± 2% of dial indication.
0.5 V to at least 4.0 V pop.
(at reference) Within 3% of Indicated
± 4% of amplitude at reference frequency.
Harmonic Content - 2nd harmonic at least 25 dB down ; 3rd
and all higher at least 40 dB down.
Fm Input - Frequency range: dc to 100 kHz. Deviation sensitivity: ± 9 V produces from ± 0.05% to ± 0.4% deviation of
carrier. depending on output frequency .
Frequency Monitor Output from 245 MHz to 1050 MHz.
... 0.3
v pop
into a 50 Il load
Rear Card Edge Connections - Address fm input. frequency
monitor output. and amplitude control.
Frequency Range ence frequency .
Accuracy frequency .
250 kHz to 250 MHz. plus 50 kHz reler·
The SG 502 Oscillator features a wide frequency
range of 5 Hz to 500 kHz with low distortion
(0.035% between 20 Hz and 50 kHz) and is desirable for general test purposes where the extremely low distortion levels of the SG 505 are not
required . Other SG 502 features include 70 dB
amplitude control plus a simultaneous fixed amplitude squarewave.
SINEWAVE
Within ± 0.7 01 least signifICant digit 01 indicated
Amplitude Range - 5 mV to 5.5 V pop into 50 Il termination in
three decade ranges.
Amplitude Accuracy - (50 kHz reference) Within 3% of indicated amplitude on (X1) range. 4% on (XO.1) range. and 5% on
(XO.01) range.
Flatness - (p-p) From 250 kHz to 100 MHz. output amplitude
will not vary more than 1% of the value at 50 kHz except that
up to + t .5%. - 1% variation may occur between 50 MHz and
100 MHz on amplitude multiplier XO.1 and XO.01 ranges only.
From 100 MHz to 250 MHz. amplitude variation is within 3% 01
the value at 50 kHz.
Harmonic Content - Second harmonic at least 35 dB down.
Third and all higher harmoniCS at least 40 dB down.
Other - Aear edge card connection available to address the
leveling circuit.
Standard Accessory (012- 0482-00).
0·40 dB Output Variable Plus 0·70 dB in 10
dB Steps
Precision 50 Il cable 3 It long.
Order SG 503 Signal Generator ......... $1780
Frequency Range - 5 Hz to 500 kHz in 5 decade steps.
Accurate within 5% of dial setting from 5 Hz to < 50 kHz ; within 10% of dial setting from 50 kHz to 500 kHz.
Amplitude Response (1 kHz reference).
Attenuation - Selectable Irom 0 dB to 70 dB in 10. 20. and 40
dB steps with pushbuttons . Accurate within 0.2 dB lor each
step selected. additive. An uncalibrated control provides continuous variation from 0 dB to - 40 dB .
Harmonic Distortion - < 0.035% (- 70 dB) from 20 Hz to 50
kHz. < 0.15% Irom 50 kHz to 500 kHz (AL .. 600 Il).
Max Output Voltage 600 !I.
Output Impedance -
Replacement Leveling Head,
(015-0282-00) ................................................................. $375
5 V AMS open circuit ; 2.5 V AMS into
600 Il. grounded.
SQUAREWAVE
Frequency Range - Same as sinewave. The squarewave
switches on the O· phase of sine out.
Rise and Fall Time Amplitude -
50 ns or less.
+ 5 V. fixed . open circuit.
Output Impedance -
ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 504 Signal Generator
(Includes Leveling Head) ................... $3030
Flatness is 0.3 dB over entire range
600 II. grounded.
SYNC INPUT
Tektronix offers maintenance training cla.ses on the
TM 500 Calibration Systems Package and a new multimedia training package on Digital Counter and Meter Concepts. For TM 5000 training and other training information,
contact your local Sales Office or request a copy of the
Tektronix Cu stomer Training Catalog .
Oscillator can be synchronized to ex ternal signal. Sync range.
the difference between sync frequency and set frequency . is a
linear function of sync voltage.
Input impedance -
10 kll.
Order SG 502 Oscillator ....................... $730
283
ANALYZER
TEK DISTORTION
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
AA 501
AA 501
Distortion Analyzer
~
Fully Automatic: No Level Setting,
Tuning or Nulling
-
Total System Harmonic Distortion
plus Noise (THO + N) - 0.0025 %
Extremely Low Residual Noise -
,-, I-' C-, CI,-,
. ,_, I_I
-:
~
< 3 jlV
Novel Analog-like "bar graph"
plus Complete Digital Readout
True RMS or Average Responding
in All Modes
Intermodulation Distortion (option)
to SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF
The AA 501 and SG 505 can be configured with
several other audio-quality instruments from
Tektronix. For instance, the FG 507 Sweeping
Function Generator features a low distortion sine
wave output (up to 2 MHz) and a logllin sweep
making it an ideal signal source in a communications test set. The FG 501A 2 MHz Function
Generator is specifically designed for those
audio/communications measurements not demanding logllin sweep capability. (See pages 25,
26 for complete specifications and information on
the FG 507 and FG 501A).
To complete an audio test set add the DM 502A
Digital Multimeter with an accuracy of 0.1% dc
volts and seven functions including autoranging
dB and temperature (see page 6). The SC 503
Storage Oscilloscope is also ideal for
audio/communications applications with a
bandwidth of 10 MHz and X-V capability. Storage
permits slow audio sweeps to be displayed or
enables the long term monitoring of peak audio
levels (see page 37).
Differential Input
THO
Distortion Analyzer
Used together, the AA 501 Distortion Analyzer
and SG 505 Oscillator provide the easiest solution
to your distortion measurement needs. The AA
501 and SG 505 combination permits harmonic
distortion, intermodulation distortion, frequency
response , gain/ loss, and signal-to-noise ratio
measurements to be accomplished with minimal
operator skill level. At the same time, both instruments feature state-of-the-art performance in residual noise and distortion.
When using the TEKTRONIX AA 501 Distortion
Analyzer and SG 505 Oscillator, complex distortion measurements become a totally automated
process. All steps which previously required several minutes of skilled operator time, such as level
setting, tuning and nulling are now done quickly,
precisely, and automatically by the AA 501 's
internal circuitry.
Because the AA 501 Distortion Analyzer and SG
505 Oscillator are two separate plug-ins they may
be used as a powerful package in the same
mainframe or apart. For instance, the SG 505 can
be left in a rackmount mainframe at a broadcast
station while the AA 501 is transferred to a
portable mainframe and taken to the transmitter
site for distortion measurements. Together or
thousands of miles apart, the AA 501 Distortion
Analyzer automatically tunes to the oscillator's
(SG 505 or your present oscillator) signal with no
operator assistance required . The SG 505's frequency or level can be changed repeatedly and
the AA 501 will automatically accommodate these
changes as they occur.
The AA 501 Distortion Analyzer makes complex
measurements easier than ever with no compromise in performance. The AA 501 measures total
harmonic distortion, gainlloss, signal to noise
ratio, and audio levels. With Option 01 the ability
to measure intermodulation distortion is added.
These measurements are accomplished automatically, with no level setting, nulling, or meter
ranging to be done by the operator. The measurement result appears on an LED display with
no additional scale factoring necessary.
284
Residual distortion, when used with the SG 505, is
0.0025%. Residual noise in the analyzer is less
than 3jlV.
To measure Total Harmonic Distortion plus noise
(THD+N) or Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) the
operator simply feeds the audio signal to the
analyzer. The AA 501 automatically locks on the
Signal, sets the proper level, and switches in the
proper filter. In the THD+N measurement the
filter nulling is totally automatic, with no presetting
of controls required . When used with a separate
oscillator, no loss of automatic features is
experienced.
The optional IMD mode measures signals to any
of three usual standards: SMPTE, DIN, or CCIF.
Internal Circuitry identifies the standard being
used and configures itself to display the appropriate results .
The AA 501 has a 0 dB reference memory. This
feature allows an audio level to be set to 0 dB
and all subsequent Signal levels are compared to
it. The result is expressed in dB on the display.
Selection from the front panel allows readings to
be expressed in true RMS or average response ,
RMS calibrated. Although true RMS is more accurate in most applications, the average response
permits comparisons with measurements previously taken with older instrumentation.
The digital voltmeter is auto ranging on all scales,
from the lowest, 200 jlV full scale, to the highest,
200 V full scale.
Four filters are included and can be switched in
and out from the front panel. They are: 400 Hz
high pass, 30 kHz low pass, 80 kHz low pass (all
18 dB per octave Butterworth),and "A" weighting.
For user convenience, an extra position on the
filter switch provides for an external, user provided filter.
Completely automatIC Total Harmonic DistortIOn (THO) measurements to specified accuracy in 7 seconds or less.
LEVEL
Autoranglng digital voltmeter displays input signal level In volts,
dBm, or dB ratIOs.
IMD (OPTION 01)
Fully automatic SMPTE, DIN , and CCIF difference frequency
test measurements.
DISTORTfON FUNCTION
Fundamental Frequency Range matICally tuned to input frequency .
Distortion Ranges (autoranglng).
10Hz to 100kHz auto-
Auto (100%), 20%, 2%, O.2%,and dB
Accuracy (readings .. 4% of range) - 20 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1
dB. 10Hz to 100kHz + " - 3 dB. (Accuracy is limited by
reSidual THD+N and filter selection.)
AA 501 /SG 505 System Residual THD+N V,n .. 250 mV, (all distortion, noise, and nulling error sources
combined).
20 Hz to 20 kHz
... 0.0025% (- 92 dB) Average Response with 80 kHz filter.
... 0.0032% (-90 dB) RM S Response with 80 kHz filter.
10 Hz to 50 kHz
... 0.0071% (- 83 dB) RMS or Average Response.
50 kHz to 100 kHz
... 0.010% (- 80 dB) RMS or Average Response.
TYPICAL THD+N
•
00l D'f1
+
t
T"'
BD d.
..... RUPONU (0.003 I'l10 GUARANTEED)
Ava
O.OO4O"1t 0.0032'1
""~
aU: .AHTEfDI
=:::
; ;;' ; ;~"d.
- 17 dB
:
O.OO1 D'f1
20
so
100
200
500
I~
lK
2K
SK
l'OOd.
10K
20K
Typical Fundamental Rejection - At least 10 dB below
specified reSidual THD+N or actual signal THO , whichever is
greater.
Minimum Input Level -
60 mV ( - 22 dBm).
TEK
DISTORTION ANAL VZER,
OSCILLATOR
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
LEVEL FUNCTION
SG 505
Modes - Volls. dBm (600 Il). or dB ratio with push to set zero
dB reference.
Leyel Rangel - 200 ~V full scale to 200 V full scale in ten
steps. manual or autoranglng .
Output Impedanca - 600 11 :;; 2%; floating or grounded
through ... 30 II. Output Impedance does not change with OUTPUT ON/OFF selection. Maximum floating voltage :;; 30 V
peak.
Accuracy Frequency
Volta
dBm or dB ratio
20 Hz to 20 kHz
:;;2%
± 0.3 dB
10 Hz to 100 kHz'
:;;4%
:;;0.5 dB
(V In >100 ~V . level ranging Indicators extinguished).
Bandwidth - >300 kHz.
Relidual Noise - <3.0 ~V ( - 108 dBm) with 80 kHz and 400
Hz filters .
<1 .5.V (- 114 dBm) with ' A' weighting filter.
'On the 200 .V range. accuracy above 50 kHz Is +4%. -6%
(+0.5 dB . -0.7 dB).
Max Output Voltage - At teast 6 V RMS open cirCUit; 3.16 V
RMS (+10 dBV or +12.2 dBm) Into 600 II.
SYNC OUTPUT
Signal - 200 mV RMS ± 20% sinewave to 20 kHz. at teast
120 mV RMS at 100 kHz.
Frequency -
SMPTE and DIN Tests - Lower frequency range: 50 Hz to
250 Hz.
Upper frequency range: 3 kHz 10 100 kHz.
Level ratio range: 1:1 to 5:1 (lower: upper).
ReslduallMD: <0.0025% ( - 92 dB) for 60 Hz and 7 kHz or
250 Hz and 8 kHz . 4:1 level ratio.
Accuracy -
ALL FUNCTIONS
Input Impedance differential.
100 kll :;; 2%. each side to ground. fully
Maximum Input - 300 V pk . 200 V RMS either side to ground
or differentially.
Fully protected on all ranges.
Common Mode Rejection - >50 dB at 50 or 60 Hz .
TYPically >40 dB to 300 kHz .
Detection lactors <3 .
Sync Output - Same as front panel SYNC OUTPUT except
output impedance Is ... 50 !!.
Oscillator
OPTION 01 1M TEST SIGNAL
SG 505
Selecting the 1M Test Signal causes a LF sinewave to be mixed
with the normal oscillator signal in a 4.1 amplitude ratio.
10Hz to 100 kHz Sinewave (typically 9 Hz to
110 kHz)
(:;;3 Hz).
Ultra-Low Distortion-O.OOOa % THO (typically 0.0003%)
Floating Output-600 0 Source
Vernier Frequency Control
Isolated and Ground Referenced Sync
Output
LI Frequency -
Internally selectble 60 Hz (± 1 Hz) or 250 Hz
Main Output - Composite p-p output within 0.2 dB Of normal
oscillator mode output .
ReslduallMD -
Typically <0.0005% from 2.5 kHz to 10kHz.
Sync Output :;;20%.
LI signal component only, 200 mV AMS
ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 505 Oscillator .................................. $690
Option 01 (1M Test Signal) .................................... Add 5150
Calibrated Output into 600 0- + 10 dBm to
-60 dBm
Average or true RMS for waveforms with crest
FRONT PANEL SIGNALS
Input Monitor - Provides constant amplitude version of signal
applied to input. Output voltage: 1 V RMS :;; 10% for input
Signals > 50 mY. Source impedance: 1 kll :;;5%.
Function Output - Provides a scaled sample of selected lunc·
lion Signal (1000 count display - 1 V RMS ± 3%). Source
Impedance: 1 kll :;; 5%.
Auxiliary Input - ProVides input to detector circuit when EXT
FILTER button is depressed. Sensitivity : 1 V RMS :;;3% 1000 count display. Impedance: lOOk!! ± 5%. ac coupled.
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Rear INTFC INPUT - Front panel selected. Same as main
INPUT except. maximum signal input is limited to 42 V pk. 30 V
RMS. (Potential crosstalk at rear intertace may degrade noise
and distortion on pertormance).
Monitor -
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Buffered Main Output - Buffered version of actual output
signal from front panel connector .... 300!! Output Impedance.
:;; 1 dB.
Filters - 400 Hz high pass: - 3 dB at 400 Hz ± 5%: at least
- 40 dB rejection at 60 Hz.
80 kHz low pass: -3 dB at 80 kHz:;; 5%.
30 kHz low pass: -3 dB at 30 kHz:;; 5% .
• A' weigh ling: Meets specifications for Type 1 sound level
meters (ANSI S 1.4. IEC Recommendation 179).
EXT: Allows connection of external filters .
Same as main output.
Impedance - 1 kll :;; 10%. ground referenced and Isolated
from main output.
INTER MODULATION DISTORTION FUNCTION (OPTION 01)
CCIF Difference Frequency - Frequency range: 4 kHz to
100 kHz .
Difference frequency range: 50 Hz to 1 kHz.
ReslduallMO : <0.0018% (- 95 dB) with 14 kHz
and 15 kHz .
Minimum input level: 60 mV ( - 22 dBm).
Harmonic Distortion - <0.0008% (-102 dB) THD from 20
Hz to 20 kHz (typically 0.0003%): 0.0018% (-95 dB) THD
from to Hz to 20 Hz. and from 20 kHz to 50 kHz: 0.0032%
(-90 dB) THO from 50 kHz to 100 kHz (RL >600 II).
Same as Iront panel INPUT MONITOR .
Function Output OUTPUT.
Auxiliary Input -
Same as Iront panel FUNCTION
Same as front panel AUXILIARY INPUT.
Converter Oulput - DC output of selected response converter. 1 V :;; 5% for 1000 count display. Source impedance: 500 !!
:;;5%.
dB Output - Dc output of logarithmic dB converter. 10 mV
:;; 5% per 1 dB of display. Source impedance : 1 k!! :;; 5%.
ORDERING INFORMATION
AA 501 Distortion Analyzer ............... $1950
Option 01 Intermodulation Distortion ........... ........ Add 5650
The SG 505 Oscillator: it features the lowest dis·
tortion level commercially available today in the
10 Hz to 110 kHz band (0.0008% between 20 Hz
and 20 kHz). The SG 505 assures you of freedom
from residual distortion effects, particularly critical
when making audio and communication measurements. And , this extremely low distortion is coupled with many designed'in convenience features .
For instance, the main signal output may be floated to help avoid interference due to troublesome
ground loops, or it may be ground referenced.
The SG 505 also features an isolated and ground
referenced sync output. This allows you to monitor the phase or the frequency of the output of
the oscillator without disturbing the floating output of the main signal.
MAIN OUTPUT
Frequency Range - 10Hz to 100 kHz in four overlapping
bands. Accurate within 3% of dual setting (with Vernier at center). VerRier Range is at least :;; 1% of frequency setting.
Calibrated Output - Selectable from +10 dBm to -60 dBm
into 600 II in eight 10 dB steps. Accurate to within 0.2 dB at
+ 10 dBm and 1 kHz. Step accuracy is :;; 0.1 dB/l0 dB step.
An uncalibrated control provides continuous variation from at
least +2.2 dB to < -10 dB from calibrated positon.
Ampl itude Response - Level flatness:;; 0.1 dB from 10Hz to
20 kHz (1 kHz ref): within 0.2 dB from 20 kHz to 100 kHz
excluding - 60 dB output level range).
285
TEK OSCILLOSCOPES
SC504
x-v Mode - Bandwidth : Dc to at least 2 MHz. Deflection
Factor, selected by channel 2 controls and horizontal mag XI ,
Xl0 with 5% accuracy. X and Y amplifier phase difference, less
than 3' at SO kHz or less. Input parameters same as Channel
•
2.
TRIGGER
Trigger Mode. -
AUTO, NORM, and SGL SWP.
Enhanced Auto Trigger - The trigger circuit automatically
adjusts to spread the peak -t~ak signal over most of the
range of the triggering level control. This provides more convenient triggering, especially on low amplitude Signals.
Trigger Sources -
Ch 1, Ch 2, LINE, EXT, INT.
Trigger Coupling -
Ac, ac Lf REJ , ac Hf REJ, de.
Trigger Sensitivity Required.
Minimum Peak to Peak Signal
OCto
30 MHz
Source
Dc
Ch 1, Ch 2
External
Interface
Ac
Requirements Increase below
approx SO kHz
Ac LI REJ
Requirements Increase below
approx 10kHz
HI REJ
Requirements Increase above
approx SO kHz
0.4 dlv
1,0 dlv
150 mV
60 mV
Typ 50 mV Typ 100 mV
to 50 MHz
External Triggering Level Range -
SC 504
80 MHz Oscilloscope
5 mV/div Max Sensitivity
Dellection Factors - Calibrated Range: S mV to 10 V/div, 11
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence.
AUTO Mode - Sweep free runs in the absence of a triggering
signal. TRIGGER LEVEL range is reduced to approximately the
p-p range of the triggering signal.
Accuracy - ± 2%, + IS ' C to + 3S ' C: ± 3%, O'C to 50 ' C.
Uncalibrated Range - Continuously variable between calibrated steps. At least 2.S: 1 range. Extends maximum deflection
lactors to at least 2S V/div.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are as for normal
sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one sweep
only.
Modes - Ch 1. Ch 2, All. , Chop, Ch 1 minus Ch 2, Ch 1 plus
Ch 2, X-Yo Chop rate at least 2S0 kHz .
5 ns/ div Max Calibrated Sweep Rate
Enhanced Automatic Triggering
Input Rand C -
True X-Y Capability
Max Input Voltage kHz or less.
1 Mil ± 1% paralleled by = 20 pF.
The addition of this plug-in scope makes many
new configurations possible, especially for those
applications demanding higher bandwidth capabilities. A double-wide plug-in, the SC 504 is
compatible with all existing TM 500 Plug-ins and
multi-compartment mainframes.
The SC 504 is a general purpose, dual-trace, nondelayed-sweep oscilloscope. It has a high writing
speed with a maximum sensitivity of 5 mV/div,
and a maximum sweep rate of 5 ns/div (with
magnifier). This oscilloscope features Add (Ch 1
+ Ch 2), differential (Ch 1 - Ch 2), and "true" XY modes,and also includes rear interfacing capability (switchable Ch 1, Ch 2 and ext trig inputs).
Enhanced auto triggering, trigger view, and variable trigger holdoff make this oscilloscope very
versatile and easy to use. The P6108 and P6062B
are the Tektronix Probes recommended for use
with the SC 504.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth at - 3 dB points - Dc to at least 80 MHz from
O' C to 3S ' C: de to at least 70 MHz from 3S ' C to 50' C.
Rise Time - 4.4 ns or less from O' C to 3S'C : S ns or less
from 3S ' C to SO ' C.
With-
Position Range Delay Line waveform.
Calibrator -
CRT
Phosphor -
P31 .
Acceleration Potentill-
2S0 V (dc + peak ac), 500 V p-p ac at 1
Common-Mode Rejection Ratios - At least SO: 1 up to 1
MHz , and 10:1 from 1 MHz to 10 MHz when using the same
attenuator settings : common-mode signal S divisions or less.
Switchable Rear Interface Capability
286
.. ± 1.4 V.
External Triggering Input - Input R and C - 1 Mn ± 10""paralleled by approximately 24 pF. Maximum Input Voltage 2S0 V (dc + peak ac): 2S0 V p-p at 1 kHz or less.
80 MHz Oscilloscope
Ac Low Frequency Response (lower - 3 dB points) out probe. 10 Hz : with lOX probe. 1 Hz.
30 MHz to
80 MHz
Coupling
± 6 div.
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
0.6 V, ± 1%, = 1 kHz frequency .
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Sweep Generator - Calibrated Sweep Rates: 0.2 s to SO
nsldiv, 21 steps in a 1-2-S sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifoer for
sweep rates fo S ns/div . Uncalibrated (variable) Range - The
CAL (variable) con trol provides sweep rates that are continuously variable between the calibrated rates, and extends the
slowest sweep rate to at least O.S s/div.
Sweep Rate Accuracy - Measured over center 8 divisions,
excluding first 50 ns and all after the first 10 divisions of magnified sweep. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% from O' C to
IS ' C, and 3S ' C to SO 'C.
15°C to 35 0 C
X1
X10
20 ms/dlv to 0.2 !£s/dlv
±2%
±3%
0.2 sldiv to SO msldiv
±3%
±4%
0.1 !£s/div to SO nsldlv
±3%
±4%
Trigger Holdo" - CAL (variable) control, if selected by an
internal switch , increases trigger holdoff time by a factor of at
least 20.
Gratlcule lines.
~ 12
kV.
Scale, 8 x 10 div with 0.2S Inldiv Intemal gratleule
REAR INTERFACE
Ch lind Ch 2 Vertical Inputs - Selected by Ch 1 and Ch 2
coupling in INT (interface) poSition. Input impedance: SO n. Can
be customer-modified for input impedance of 1 Mil paralleled
by ", 60pF.
Trigger Input - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch in
INT (interface) poSition. Input impedance: SO n when selected,
2S II when not selected. Can be customer-modified for input
Impedance of 1 Mil paralleled by = 40 pF.
Z-Axis Input - Input Impedance: = 1.S kn. + S V tums beam
ON from OFF condition, - S V turns beam OFF from ON
condition,
Channell Output - At least SO mV/div. Bandwidth: At least
30 MHz . Output Impedance: < SO n .
Rlmp Output -
0 to
+ 10 V ramp. Output resistance = SOO n.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperlture - Operating: O' C to 4S ' C (to SO'C in malnIrames equipped with fan). Nonoperating: - SS ' C to + 7S'C.
Altitude - Operating: To IS,OOO feet. Nonoperating: To
SO,OOO feet.
Order SC 504 80 MHz Oscilloscope .. $2910
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
Sweep Rete Accuracy -
SC503
•
2 ./dly to 0,5 a/dlv
0,2 ./dly to 5
Idlv
2 p.S/dly to 0,5 /Ls/dlv
+15°C to +35 0 C
Xl
Xl0
±40/0
±30/0
±40/0
±50/0
±40/0
±50/0
Derate accuracy by an additional 1% from O' C to IS ' C and
35 ' C to SO · C.
Trlggar Holde« - At least 20: 1 range internally selectable.
X-Y Moda - Bandwidth: de to at least 500 kHz. Deflection
Factor: selected by Ch 2 controls and Horizontal Mag XI , XI O.
PIlase D,Nerence: < 3 " at 50 kHz or less.
TRIGGER
Trigger Modes - AUTO (enhanced), NORM , and SGL SWP
(single sweep),
Enhanced Auto Trigger - The trigger clreuit automatically
adjusts to spread the pop signal over most of the range of the
triggering level control, This provides more conyenlent triggerIng, especially on low amplitude signals.
Trigger Sources - Ch 1, Ch 2, LINE, EXT, INT (rear
Interlace).
Trigger Coupling - Dc, ac, ae U REJ .
Trigger Sensitivity - Minimum p-p signal required,
Source
Ch 1, Ch 2
Extemal
Interlace
10 MHz Storage Oscilloscope
SC 503
10 MHz Bandwidth
Bistable Storage Auto-erase
Variable Enhancement and Integration to
Increase Writing Speed
Trigger View
Variable HoldoH
Switchable Front/Rear X and V Inputs
Rear Z Axis Input
True X-V Capability
The SC 503 is a non-delayed sweep, general
purpose storage oscilloscope which is compatible with five of our TM 500 Mainframes, (TM 503,
TM 504, TM 515, TM 506 and RTM 506).
Because the SC 503 is a storage oscilloscope, it
can be used to store and display waveforms after
the input signal is removed. This feature is particularly useful when measuring slow repetition
rates or single-shot signals, important in the
biomedical and mechanical measurements fields.
Low frequency signals at heart or respiration
rates can be stored for detailed analysis. In the
mechanical measurements field the SC 503 can
"freeze" fast or transient signals from
transducers, which is especially useful in pressure and velocity VS. time analysis and shock
testing.
Other important storage applications of the
SC 503 include measurements of signals in computer peripherals, communication terminals and
industrial control systems.
Major features of the SC 503 include; variable
enhancement and integration to increase the
writing speed of signals with rapid rise times, an
auto erase mode which erases the stored signal
and automatically retriggers the oscilloscope, and
X-V capability. The X-V capability allows creation
of Lissajous patterns in many cause and effect
testing relationships including : acoustic speech
testing, nerve potential testing, and optical stimulus response testing. The P6108, P6062B and
P6060 are the Tektronix recommended probes for
use with the SC 503.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth at -3 dB points - Dc to at least 10 MHz, (5 mV/
div 10 20 mV/div); de to al least 7 MHz (2 mV/div), de to at least
5 MHz (1 mV/div).
Ris. Time - 5 mV to 20 V/div, typically 35 ns or less.
Ac Low-Frequency Response (lower -3 dB points) - Without probe, 10 Hz ; with lOX probe 1 Hz.
DellecHon Factors - Calibrated Range: 1 mV/div to 20 V/div,
14 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy - 5 mV to 20 V/div
( + IS ' C to + 3S ' C) :t 3%, 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div :t S% ; (derate accuracy by additional 1% for O' C to +SO·C). Uncalibrated Range: at least 2.5: 1 continuously variable between calibrated steps: Extends maximum uncalibrated deflection factor
to at least 50 V/div.
Modes - Ch 1, Ch 2, ALT, CHOP, Ch 1 minus Ch 2, Ch 1 plus
Ch 2, X-Y o Chop rate at least 250 kHz.
Input Impedance - 1 Mil :t 1% paralleled by ",,47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 350 V (de + peak ac), 700 V pop
ae at 1 kHz or less. Above 1 kHz recommended pop ae limit is
250 V to 10kHz derating to 25 V above 100kHz.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least 50:1 at 1 MHz
when using same attenuator setting, in Ch 1 minus Ch 2 mode.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of displayed
waveform .
Calibrator - 0.6 V, :t 1%, ", 1 kHz frequency .
Position Range - :t 6 div.
Channel Isolation - 2% or less display related crosstalk to 10
MHz .
Displayed Noise - < 0.2 mV peak to peak at 1 mV/div.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Sweep Generator - Calibrated sweep rates: 2 s/div to 0.5
.s/div, 21 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifoer for
sweep rates to 50 ns/div. Uncalibrated (variable) Range provides continuously variable sweep rates, between the calibrated rates, and extends the slowest rate of at least 5 s/div.
dc to 5 MHz
0,4 dlv
60 mV
Typ 35 mV
5 MHz to 10 MHz
1,0 dly
150 mV
Typ 80 mV
"With ae coupling requirements Increase below ",, 50 Hz. With
ae U REJ coupling requirements increase below ",, 10 kHz,
Triggering Level Range - Extemal: at least :t 1.2 V. Internal:
at least - 6.0 divisions,
External Triggering Input - Input Impedance: 1 Mil, para~
leled by '" 47 pF. Maximum Input Voltage: 350 V (de + peak
ae), 350 V pop at 1 kHz or less. Above 1 kHz recommended pop
ae limit is 100 V to 10 kHz derating to 10 V above 100 kHz,
Auto Mode - Sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering
signal. Level control range automatically varies with the triggering signal amplitude for frequencies above 100Hz.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements same as for normal
sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one sweep
only.
STORAGE SYSTEM
Stored Writing Speed (center 6 x 8 divisions) - Nonmal : at
least 80 div/ms (50 cm/ms). Enhanced: at least 400 div/ms (250
cm/ms).
Erase Time - 400 ms to 600 ms.
Auto Era.e Viewing Time - Continuously variable from .. 0.5
s to ;;. 5 S .
Maximum Recommended Storage Time - ",,4 hours.
CRT
Phosphor - P44 .
CRT Gratlcule - 8 x 10 div., 0.25 inchldiv (0.64 cm/div). Internal graticule lines.
REAR INTERFACE
Ch 1 and Ch 2 Vertical Inputs - Selected by Ch 1 and Ch 2
coupling in INT (interlace) position. Input Impedance: 50 Il. Can
be eustomer-modiroed for input impedance of 1 Mil paralleled
by ~ 100 pF.
Trigger Input - Selected by TRIGGER SOURCE switch in
INT (interlace) position, Input Impedance: 50 Il, when selected,
25 II when not selected. Can be customer-modified for input
impedance of 1 Mil paralleled by '" 60 pF.
Z-Axi. Input - Input Impedance: '" 1.5 kll. + 5 V turns beam
ON from OFF condition, - 5 V turns beam OFF from ON
condition.
Ch 1 Output - At least 50 mV/div. Bandwidth: at least 4
MHz. Output Impedance: 50 Il,
Ramp Output- 0 to + 10 V ramp. Output impedance
= 500 Il.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature - Operating: O' C 10 + 4S ' C (O'C to + SO'C In
mainframe equipped with a fan) . Nonoperating: - SS'C to
+ 7S · C.
Altitude - Operating : to 15,000 feet ; maximum operating
temperature decreased by I ' C/1ooo feet from 5000 feet to
15,000 feet. Nonoperating: to 50,000 feet.
Order SC 503 10 MHz
Storage Oscilloscope ." .. ,,'_"""""""" $3150
287
TEK OSCILLOSCOPES
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
SC 502
Sweep Generator - Calibrated Sweep Rates: 0.5 s to 0.2
"s/div, 20 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence, plus a Xl0 magnifier for
sweep rates to 20 ns/div. Uncalibrated (variable) Range: the
CAL (variable) control provides sweep rates that are continuously variable between the calibrated rates, and extends the
slowest sweep rate to at least 1.25 s/div.
Sweep Rate Accuracy - Within 3% unmagnified, 4% magnified , + 15' C to + 35 ' C.
Derated by an additional 1% for O' C to + 15' C and + 35 ' C to
+ 50 ' C.
Trigger Holdot! - CAL (variable) control, if selected by an
internal jumper, increases trigger holdoff time by a factor of at
least 20.
External Horizontal Amplifier - Bandwidth : de coupled , de to
at least 2 MHz; ac coupled < 50 Hz to at least 2 MHz. Deflection Factor, 50 mV/div within 5%. X an£! Y Amplifier Phase
Difference, < 3' at 50 kHz or less. Input Impedance, 1 Mil
within 2% paralleled by = 47 pF. Max Input Voltage: 350 V (de
+ peak ac); 350 V p-p at 1 kHz or less.
TRIGGER
Enhanced Automatic Triggering - In the automatic mode,
the trogger circuit automatically adjusts to spread the p-p signal
over most of the range of the triggering level control. This provides more convenient triggering, especially on low amplitude
sognals.
Trigger Modes - AUTO (enhanced), NORMAL (auto butlon
out). SINGL SWP.
Trigger Sources -
15 MHz Dual-Trace Oscilloscope
SC 502
15 MHz Bandwidth
Dual-Trace
20 ns/div Max Calibrated Sweep Rate
1 mV/div Max Sensitivity
The SC 502 makes many new instrumentation
systems feasible , especially in the areas of QA,
production testing, maintenance, and field servicing. The rear interfacing capability of the SC 502
and all TM 500 Instrumentation suggests exceptional applicability to systems of built-in test
equipment or rackmounted installations. And the
TM 515 Traveler Mainframe with the SC 502 form
a nucleus for sophisticated, compact field service
·packages.'
Tektronix Probes P6062B and P6108 are recommended for use with the SC 502.
Variable Trigger Hold-off
Enhanced Automatic Triggering
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth at - 3 dB pOints - 5 mV to 20 V/div, dc to at least
15 MHz : 2 mV/dlv, dc to at least 10 MHz ; 1 mV/div, dc to at
least 5 MHz .
The SC 502 is a compact general-purpose 15
MHz dual-trace oscilloscope designed to operate
in any two adjacent compartments of TM 500
Power Module/Mainframes. It has a high writing
speed, a wide range of sweep rates , a wide
range of deflection factors, and versatile triggering, including trigger view and enhanced automatic triggering.
Rise Time -
As with many Tektronix Products, the SC 502
features circuits, sub-circuits, and components
designed and built by Tektronix to fulfill the
special design capabilities of the instrument.
Among its many recommended uses, the SC 502
is intended to be a powerful tool in the field
servicing of digital equipment, where it would be
used in association with disc memories, key-totape, printers, plotters, punches, readers, and
terminals. The CRT of the SC 502 offers a high
writing speed as an advantage in the display of
digital information, while stable, clean triggering is
assured by incorporating well proven circuits.
Thus, the SC 502 offers the engineer a unique
combination of performance, compactness, and
systems capability.
Modes - Ch 1, Ch 2, ALT, CHOP, Ch 1 MINUS Ch 2. Chop
rate at least 250 kHz. Triggering waveform is displayed instead
of selected display when desired.
288
Dc, ac, ac LI REJ.
Trigger Sensitivity -
Delay Line
Trigger View
Ch 1, Ch 2, LINE EXT.
Trigger Coupling -
Minimum p-p signal required.
Source
dc to 5 MHz
5 MHz to 15 MHz
Ch , Ch 2
0 .4 div
1.0 div
External
60 mV
150 mV
With ac coupling requirements increase below ~ 50 Hz. Ac LI
REJ coupling requirements increase below .. 5 kHz.
Internal: at least ± B div. External:
Triggering Level Range at least ± 1.2 V.
External Triggering Input - Input Impedance: 1 Mil within
2% paralleled by ~ 47 pF. Max Input Voltage: 350 V (de +
peak ac) ; 350 V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less.
Auto Mode - Sweep free-runs in the absence of a triggering
signal. TRIGGER LEVEL range is reduced to approx the p-p
range of the triggering signal.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements same as for normal
sweep. When triggered, sweep generator produces one sweep
only. AUTO pushbutton must be in the OUT position for operation and for setting triggering controls.
CRT
5 mV to 20 V/div , 23 ns or less.
Ac Low-Frequency Response (Lower -3 dB points) Without probe, 10 Hz ; with probe (lOX), 1 Hz.
Pholphor -
Deflection Factors - Calibrated range: 1 mV to 20 V/div , 14
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy: 5 mV to 20 V/div (+ 15 ' C
to + 35 ' C) within 2%, (0 ' to + 50 ' C) within 3%; 1 mV and 2
mV/dlv within 5%. Uncalibrated (variable) range. At least 2.5:1
range. Continuously variable between calibrated steps. Extends max atlenuator step to at least 50 V/div.
Acceleration Potential -
Input Impedance -
1 Mil within 1% paralleled by = 47 pF.
Max Input Voltage kHz or less.
350 V (de + peak ac), 700 V p-p ac at 1
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (Ch 1 minus Ch 2 mode) At least 30: 1 at 1 MHz when using same atlenuator setting.
Channeiliotation MHz.
Displayed Noise Position Range -
2% or less display related crosstalk to 15
<;; 0.2 mV p-p at 1 mV/div.
± 6 div.
Calibrator - Voltage, 0.6 V ± 1%. Frequency , twice the power line frequency .
P31 .
Dellection Graticule lines.
Electrostatic.
"" 12 kV.
Scale, B x 10 div with 0.25 in/div internal graticule
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Temperature - Operating, O' C to + 45 ' C (to + 50' C in
mainframes equipped with fan) . Nonoperating - 55 ' C to
+ 75 ' C.
Altitude -
Operating, to 15,000 ft . Nonoperating to 50,000 ft .
Order SC 502 1 5 MHz Oscilloscope , $2140
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK
SC 501
IC 501
With the SC 501 a multitude of versatile test
systems may be structured from the TM 500
Series to suit specific needs for time and frequency response , modulating waveforms, power for
devices under test, stimulus and response stud·
ies and voltage, current, and temperature measurements. Since the SC 501 fits any TM 500
Mainframe, it can be used on the bench, in a
rack , or on the road . The Single-channel SC 501
has a calibrated vertical deflection range from 10
mV/div to 1 V/div, selectable in decade steps. A
variable control extends this range to at least 10
V/div.
OSCILLOSCOPE
Calibrated sweep rates are selected by
pushbutton logic in decade steps from 1 ~s/div to
100 ~s/div (microsecond), and from 1 ms/div to
100 ms/div (millisecond range). A variable control
extends the slowest sweep rate to at least 1 s/div
and a fixed magnifier extends the fastest sweep
rate to 200 ns/div.
A 0 to 10 V ramp for all sweep rates (excluding
the X5 magnification) is provided at a rear interface connector. This capability may be used for
many auxiliary functions such as sweeping a
voltage-controlled frequency oscillator or obtaining variably delayed pulses from the PG 505
Pulse Generator.
Olcilloscope
SC 501
5 MHz Bandwidth
Single Compartment Size
The triggering circuits allow stable triggering from
either internal or externai sources. An AUTO
triggering mode and manual LEVEUSLOPE selection is combined in a single control. It is useful
above 10 Hz and provides a bright baseline at all
sweep rates.
6.4 cm (2.5 inches) CRT
Versatile Operating Features
The SC 501 is a single·channel 5 MHz plug·in unit
oscilloscope with a 2.5 inch CRT display which
occupies a single TM 500 Series Plug-in compartment. Oscilloscope capability significantly enhances the appl ication range of the
multifunctional TM 500 Series Test and Measurement Instruments.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
Bandwidth -
Dc to > 5 MHz.
Dellectlon Factor. - 10 mV/div. 100 mV/dlv. and 1 V/div .
Accuracy. within 3%. Uncallbrated (variable) range . continuously variable between steps (10:1) and to at least 10 V/div.
Input Coupling -
Ac or dc.
Input Impedance Max Input Voltage -
1 MG paralleled by 47 pF.
350 V (de
+ peak
ac).
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Time Base - Calibrated sweep rates : 1 ~s/div 10 100 msidlv
in decade steps. Uncalibrated (variable) range : extends slowest
calibrated rate to ~ 1 s/div. X5 magnifier (fixed): extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 200 ns/div. Accuracy (over center
8 div): ~ 5 % for ali sweep rates . Unearlty (any two div portion
within center eight dlv): ~ 5 %.
External Horizontal Amplifier - Bandwidth: de to 100 kHz .
Input Impedance: ~ 100 kG paralleled by 25 pF. Max Input voltage: :t 3 v.
TRIGGER
Normal Trigger Sensitivity (Trigg.r Le.el/Slope In) - Inter·
nal : dc coupled . 0.4 major dlv of deflection al dc: Increasing to
1.0 major div of deflection at 5 MHz. External: dc coupled . 1 V
minimum to 5 V max from dc to 5 MHz. External trigger input
impedance : 22 kll paralleled by = 150 pF.
Auto (Trigger Level /Sfope Out) - Sweep free-runs In absence of trigger Signal. or for trigger repetition rates below 10
Hz .
CRT
PhOSphor -
P31
Graticule -
6 X 10 dlv (0.203 in per div).
Order SC 501 5 MHz Oscilloscope ••. $1040
An internal switch converts the horizontal deflection system of the SC 501 to an external horizontal amplifier which is internally calibrated for 100
mV/div deflection factor with a bandwidth of 100
kHz.
OSCILLOSCOPES COMPARISON CHART
SC504
SC503
SC 502
SC 501
CRT
8 x 10 diY, 0.25 inl div
P31 Phosphor
8 x 10 diy, 0.25 in/div,
Bistable Storage, P44
Phosphor
8 x 10 diy, 0.25 in/div
P31 Phosphor
6 x 10 diY, 0.203 in/div
P31 Phosphor
Vertical
(Y) axis
Dual-trace. 80 MHz,
5 mV/div to 10 V/div,
Alt, CHOP, Ch 1 minus
Ch 2, Ch 1 + Ch 2, X-V
modes
Dual-trace, 10 MHz,
1 mV/divt020V/div,Alt,
CHOP, Ch 1 minus Ch 2,
Ch 1 + Ch 2, X-V modes
Dual-trace, 15 MHz, 1 mV I 5 MHz bandwidth, 10 mV I
divto 10V/div
per div to 20 VI div (5 and
10 MHz bandwidth at 1 and
2 mY) ALT, CHOP, and
Ch 1 minus Ch 2 modes
Horizontal Triggered sweep 50 nsl div
to 0.2 sl div with X1 0
(X) axis
magnifier. Enhanced auto
trig, line ext/int trig ,
single sweep, external
horizontal input, variable
trigger holdoff
Triggered sweep 50
ns/div to 2 sec/div with
X10 magnifier. Enhanced
auto trig, line, ext! int
trig, single sweep, external
horizontal input, variable
trigger holdoff
Triggered sweep 200
ns/div to 0.5 s/div with
X10 magnifier, enhanced
auto, trigger, line, ext / int
trig. single sweep, external
horizontal input, variable
trigger holdoff
Other
features
Trigger view, switchable
rear interface capability
Trigger view
Bistable storage, auto
erase, variable enhancement and integration , rear
interface capability, trigger
view
Compact display
Price
$2910
$3150
$1040
$2140
Triggered sweep 1 ~s/div
to 1 s/div with X5 magnifier to 200 nsl diy,
normal! auto trigger, internall external-trigger,
external horizontal input
289
TEK PROGRAMMABLE
MULTIFUNCTION INTERFACE
INTERFACE PRODUCTS
The term "Interface Product" is used here as a
generic term and is meant to describe a combination of TM 5000 products designed to provide a
solution to the problem of interfacing test and
measurement instruments to a device under test,
a control process, or to the external environment.
These products supply digital input and digital
output data to control instruments, indicators, or
relays and can accept digital data from switches,
push buttons, and other digital data sources. Multiple processes can be controlled in parallel by
programming the interface products to conduct a
sequence of events which can be executed while
a system controller directs activity elsewhere.
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
MIs010
sOM30 CHARACTERISTICS
Data Outputs Using Internal Supply - 16 open-collector TTL
with 2 kll pullup resistors. Logical ' 1·; + 5 V ± 20,1, (open circuit). Source current - 2.5 mA ± 70,1, maximum. Logical ' 0·;
.. 0.2 V. Sink current - 40 mA maximum.
Data Outputs Using External (User) Supply - Maximum
Voltage; + 15 v. Pull-up Resistors; 2 kll. Logical T Equal to
external supply voltage (open circuit). Source current = 7.5
mA ± 5"10 plus external supply tolerance. Logical ·0' ; .. 0.2 ....
Sink current 40 mA maximum.
Data Inputs - Input Buffers; 16 Schmitt triggers. Logical ' 1·
(+ V threshold); + 1.6 V ± 25%. Source current = - 0.14 mA
nominal . - 0.16 mA maximum. Logical ·0· (- V threshold);
+ 0.8 V ± 40"10. Source current = - 0.18 mA nominal, - 0.21
rnA maximum.
I ......."
......
I:'r'_,
Order 50M30 Digital Input/Output Card. $400
•
sOM40Programmable Relay Scanner Card
MI5010
16 Mercury Wetted Relay Contacts
Ilg~!!1
Triggered Externally or on Command
The MI SOlO is designed to comply wilh IEEE
Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix Codes
and Formats Standard.
Customer Configured
Automatic Self Test
Triggered Externally or on Command
Built in Real Time Clock
Programmable Multifunction Interface
Mnemonic Instructions
with the microprocessor control card removed .
The combination of the MI 5010 and the MX SOlO
allows a total of six function cards to be controlled by the microprocessor control card in the
MlS010 via commands from the GPIB.
Digital control signals between the MX SOlO and
the MI SOlO are connected via a flat ribbon cable
at the backplane connector.
Order MX 5010 Interface Extender ..... $650
Self Test and Error Indicators
Mnemonic Instructions
Instruction Buffer for Unattended Operation
The MI SOlO Programmable Multifunction Interface is a two-wide, TM 5000 Series plug-in capable of accepting a total of three function cards.
The MI SOlO, with appropriate function cards
installed, is a GPIB compatible system capable
of:
--Producing, on command from a GPIB controller,
either analog or digital output signals to control
the events or conditions in an external system.
--Receiving, on request from a GPIB controller,
input signals (analog or digital) from external
sensor pOints that represent events or conditions in an external system.
The MI SOlO has its own intelligence and a built in
buffer capable of storing from 80 to 300 commands (depending on command length). The
buffered commands are sequenced in order and
can be paced with a built-in real time clock, builtin wait timer, external trigger or software trigger
from the system controller.
One, two, or three function cards plug into the
front of the MI SOlO and communicate with a
microprocessor control card in the MI5010 via the
backplane connectors of the MI SOlO.
Each function card in the MI SOlO or MX SOlO
contains its own ROM with the specific firmware
required for that function . Each function can be
programmed with its own, unique set of software
commands.
Order MI 5010 Multifunction
Interface _............................................. $1350
MX 5010 - Multifunction Interface Extender
The Multifunction Interface Extender is a twowide, TM 5000 plug-in which, when used, mechanically attaches to the MI SOlO and provides
the capability of accepting three extra function
cards into the system. The multifunction interface
extender is electrically identical to the MI SOlO
290
sOM30 Card
Programmable Digital Input/Output
16 Digital Input and 16 Digital Output Lines
Triggered Externally or on Command
Mnemonic Instructions
Self Test and Error Indicator
The Programmable Digital Input/Output Card is a
function card used in either the MlS010 or the
MX SOlO. The SOM30 contains its own ROM with
the firmware specified for the card, and is programmed with its own set of software
commands.
The SOM30 provides 16 digital input and 16 digital
output lines. The digital inputs accept data from
push buttons, switches, contact closures, and
most digital devices capable of supplying TIL
output levels. The digital outputs provide TTL
levels to control various types of test and measurement instruments, relays , indicators, etc. The
digital outputs can be configured for open-collector outputs by positioning internal jumpers and
using power supplied by the user.
Programming of the SOM30 is via the IEEE-488
(GPIB) bus specified and described in IEEE-488
Standard 488-1978. System commands sent to
the MI SOlO Microprocessor, along with specialized programming commands unique to the
SOM30, control the selection of the data
input/output channels alld the armingltrigger
functions of the card.
Four lines at the front panel connector operate as
input/output pairs to handshake data with the
user's external system. One handshake pair allows the user's data source to be synchronized
with the SOM30 data input register and the other
handshake pair allows the user's data storage
device to be synchronized with the SOM30 data
output register.
The Programmable Relay Scanner Card is a function card used in either the MI SOlO or MX SOlO.
The 5OM40 contains its own ROM with the
firmware specified for the card, and is programmed with its own set of software
commands.
The 5OM40 provides 16 independent, normallyopen relay contacts. The relay contacts may be
used as switch closures to supply power to several external points from one source, or scan several sources and supply various inputs to a single
measurement device.
The desired relay switch pattern is configured by
the user with internal jumpers. When the configuration has been established, the relay scanning
sequence, open and close operations, and triggering events are programmed over the IEEE-488
(GPIB) bus described in IEEE Standard 488-1978.
The relay channel configurations are not programcontrolled and the 16 relay contacts must be
jumpered in various combinations of switch closure patterns. Three possible combinations are:
4 groups of 4 individual relays
2 groups of 8 individual relays
1 group of 16 individual relays
Scanning sequence and relay closure is accomplished under program control. Two logic signal
lines on the front panel connector are provided
for externally controlling the 5OM40--one as an
output (READY) to indicate to the user when the
relays have settled, and the other as an input
(EXT TRIG) to tell the MI5010 Microprocessor that
the user is ready for the relay switch configuration
to close.
sOM40 CHARACTERISTICS
Type of Relays -
Mercury wetted reed .
Possible Configurations (Jumper Selectable) - 1 of 4, 4
each. 1 of 8, 2 each.1 of 16, 1 each. 1 of 12 and 1 of 4, 1 each.
Pull In Time; 3 ms, nominal. 30 V connected to common port
through 30 kll. Release Time; 3 ms, nominal. Sequence
Ihrough all relays. Contact Resistance; 0.5 II nominal (end of
life).Peak Applied Voltage; 40 V, maximum. Peak Contact Current ; lA, maximum. Breakdown Voltage; 100 V dc plus peak
ac. Frequency Range ; Dc to 1 MHz.
Order 50M40 Relay Scanner Card ....... $575
PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TEK GENERAL
50M70 -
PROGRAMMABLE
SCANNER
Programmable Development Card
SI5010
SI '1011) PIII(I(,JlA .. rtII,H, f :"
Develop IEEE-488 Specialized Functions
Easily
A"~t
I
-
-----
Mnemonic Instructions
Self Test and Error Indicator
The Programmable Development Card is a function card used in either the MI 5010 or the MX
5010. The 5OM70 contains its own ROM with the
fimware necessary for IEEE-488 operation of a user's specialized circuit.
The 5OM70 contains two interface logic registers,
address and data buffers, a breadboard area for
user development, and (as previously mentioned)
its own firmware .
Possible applications are:
- Specialized DAC/AOC functions
- Timing functions
- Special communication interface
functions
- Keyboard/Display functions, etc.
Control Input (Ext Trig) -
•
SI5010
a
ACTIVE Indicator Voltage - Output High Level; + 2.4 V minimum . + 5.5 V maximum. J1216. pin I pulsed lor 20 ms or
greater.
READY Line. - Pin 10 on J1200 and J1210. Output High
Level ; + 2.4 V minimum. + 5.5 V maximum. ILr - - 200 /lAo
Output Low Level; 0 V minimum . 0.4 V maximum. IL - 3.2 mA
maximum.
TRIG Line. - Inputs on pin 9 of J12oo. J1202. J1210. and
J1214 ; Input leakage current - 1.0 /lA minimum. 2.5 /lA miximum. Minimum Hold TIme; 3 /lS .
ACCEPT/ ERROR Line. - Pin 10 J1214/Pin 10 J1202. Output
High Level; + 4.5 V minimum. + 5.5 V maximum. IL - 10 /lA o
Output Low Level ; 0 V minimum. + 0.4 maximum. IL - 3.2 mA
maximum.
High during self-test, goes low if
no
J1201 . Pin I : + 26 V dC, ± 9%. 100 mA maximum. J1201 , Pin
2: - 26 V de. ± 9%. 100 mAmaximum. J1212, Pin I ; + 8 V dC,
± 5%. 600 mA maximum. J1212, Pin 2:
+ 5 V dC, ± 5%. 1.5 A maximum.
Not to exceed 7.5 W.
Standard Acce.lorles - Function Card Extender Cable 0150430-00. one Reference Guide 070-3832-00.
Order 50M70 Development Card ......... $325
Optional Accessories ............................... $50
~_
External Trigger; TIL compatible
Control Output Data Accepted (READY) Output goes high when relays have settled.
Software Configured
Triggered Externally or on Command
Built in Real Time Clock
Instruction Buffer for Unattended Operation
350 MHz Bandwidth (1 ns Rise time)
The R.F. scanner is a two-wide, TM 5000 plug-in
capable of scanning and switching 16 different
signal channels, or a combination of signal channels, under program control. OPTIMUM frequency
response is 350 MHz.
Of the 20 front panel BNC connectors used for
channel switching, 16 are connected internally to
16 R.F. reed relays and 4 are connected to common points. The common points act as output
connectors to an external system. The 16 relays
can be programmed to connect to the common
points in various combinations. Three possible
combinations are:
4 groups of 4 channels
2 groups of 8 channels
1 group of 16 channels
For scanning, channel grouping is always done in
groups of four with each individual cha:1nel exhibiting a characteristic impedance of 50 Os and providing minimum R.F. signal degradation when
configured for one or more groups of 4 individual
channels. Channel rise time for groups of 4 channels is approximately 1 nanosecond and de'
grades to about 4.0 ns for 1 group of 16.
TIL compatible.
Channel Conllguratlon (Software Selectable) - 1, 2, 3, or 4
groups of 4 channels. 2 groups of 8 channels. I group of 16
channels.
Frequency Re.pon.e - Any I group 01 4; - 3 dB at 350
MHz, decreasing to - 6 dB at 500 MHz or greater. Any I group
of 8; - 3 dB at 175 MHz or geater.Any I group of 16; - 3 dB
at 80 MHz or greater.
Port (Channel) I.olatlon - 40 dB at 100 MHz.
Characterl.tlc Impedance (Each Channel) VSWR specification .
RI.e Time (Each Channel) -
Mnemonic Instructions
Open-circuit voltage on Pins I through 8
on J12oo, J1202. J1210. and J1214. Output High Level; + 2.4
V minimum. + 5.5 V maximum. Output Low Level ; V minimum. + 0.4 V maximum. Load current = 1.6 mA nominal.
Maximum Load (Sink) Current (Any Output); 3.2 mA at 0.4 V
dc. Input Low Current; 1.3 mA nominal. 2.4 mA maxi mum. Vln
- 0.4 V dC . User Ground Points; Analog Ground; TPI 201 .
TP1202. Digital Ground ; TP'2" . TP1212.
015-0430-00 User Cable
.'
SI 5010 CHARACTERISTICS
RF Connectore - Twenty BNC connectors, sixteen channel
and four common.
Programmable R.F. Scanner
50M70 CHARACTERISTICS
Total Combined Power Limit -
•
lII"'"
f.
I/O through I/O 7 -
ERROR Line State. error,
The SI 5010 has its own intelligence and a built in
buffer capable of storing from 80 to 300 commands (depending on command length). The
buffered commands are sequenced in order and
can be paced with a built-in real time clock, builtin wait timer, external trigger or software trigger
from the system controller .
'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __
Special features of the 5OM70 include:
- Programmable data direction registers
(input/output)
- Programmable trigger conditions
- Programmable data transfer, register
configuration, status, and interrupts
- Front panel edge connector configured
by the user
It is possible, under program control, to build a
matrix using any or all 16 input channels while
leaving the normal output channels disconnected.
The possible number of combinations precludes
characterization, and it is recommended that any
such matrix established be characterized if degradation of signal quality is a consideration.
50 II. See
< I ns.
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) - Any 4 channel
group. 1.25:1 at 100 MHz. increasing to 1.8:1 at 350 MHZ. Any
other combination : 1.5:1 at 100 MHz. 2 :1 at 225 MHz.
In.ertlon Lo.. -
< I dB at 100 MHz.
Channel Delay Matching Any group of 4; 50 picoseconds. Any group of 8; 110 picoseconds. Group of 16; 310
picoseconds.
Type 01 Relay. - 16 Form A. EAC 05Y21Al 40 BAB. or
equivalent. 4 Form -C', TO-5, Teledyne 712-6, or equivalent.
Pull In Time ; 3 milliseconds. Release TIme; 3 milliseconds.
Breakdown Voltage; 350 V (de + peak ac). Series Path Resistance (End of Ufe); 0.5 ll.
Peak Carry Voltage - Unterminated ; 40 V maximum. 50 II
terminated ; 12.5 V maximum.
Peak Contact Current -
0.25 A maximum.
Pe.k Switching Voltage. 50 \I; 3.73 V Maximum.
Peak Switching Current -
Unterrninated ; 15 V Maximum.
.01 Amp Maximum.
Order SI 5010 R.F. Scanner ............... $1850
SYSTEM
TEK CONTROLLER
Programmer Skill Spectrum
Most test programs are written by "electronics
types" , not computer science majors. Many test
engineers write programs only occasionally, and
later modifications and maintenance are frequently done by a second party since "the guy who
wrote the program doesn't work here anymore".
At the other end of the spectrum, however, are
complex requirements demanding a team approach to writing the program and sophisticated
and powerful techniques to maximize memory
utilization and minimize run time.
,
"
I
I
.
-
'
•
1'mNI'"
•
I
ON
1
em
Operator Skill Spectrum
404 1
System Controller
Ilar~ral
The 4041 is designed to comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978 and With Tektronix Codes and
Formats Standard
Optimized for Instrumentation Control
Modular DeSign - Rackmount or Portable
Efficient, Easy to use BASIC Language with
Extensions
Expandable Capability Through Memory (to
160K Bytes) and Other Options
The new 4041 Controller is a powerful, flexible ,
expandable IEEE-488 systems controller designed to work with Tektronix and other vendor'S
IEEE-488 instruments. While the basic unit is
intended principally for low user-skill environments such as production line testing, a variety of
options and peripherals will equip the 4041 for full
interactive flexibility in research lab applications.
Tektronix full line of terminals (graphics or alphanumeric, storage or raster, and color) are fully
compatible to create an optimum programmer
interface in the more sophisticated areas. Software features similarly span the range from the
occasional programmer to the sophisticated programming team tackling complex products. The
basic 4041 compactness, coupled with compact
TM 5000 IEEE-488 instruments, permits configuration of very compact systems which can go into
applications impractical for earlier generations of
systems.
292
In test and measurement systems applications
the computer skills of the operator typically range
from moderately high to zero. Laboratory applications are frequently interactive, where the
engineer/programmer/operator are all the same
person. On a production test station , operator
computer skills are low. Unattended testing has
no operator by definition. The 4041 controller was
designed, with options and peripherals, to fit
these differing needs. The standard 4041 is an
"execute only" controller; it can only run previously developed programs. The operator cannot
tamper with programs, or even list them. The
standard 4041 is non-intimidating, with operator
interaction limited to reading prompts from the
alphanumeric display, inserting a DC 100 tape
casette, and pressing a small number of keys.
Extensive error handling and trapping capabilities
can keep the system from "crashing" in almost all
situations. Hard copy, perhaps for applications
such as failure tags to be attached to a defective
unit under test, can be automatically generated
on the built-in printer. Up to four ports, two IEEE488 and two RS-232, permit networking to host
computers, up to 28 IEEE-488 instruments, or
even segregation of fast and slow instruments
onto two busses to maximize throughput.
At the sophisticated end of the operator spectrum, an RS-232 CRT terminal attached to a 4041
with program development ROM packs (Option
30) provides a flexible interactive workstation for
the sophisticated programmer. Peripherals such
as printers, plotters, and mass storage add further power. This configuration would be typical in
research labs, or for the test engineer to develop
programs which will then be run by lower skilled
operators on the production line with executeonly 4041s.
BASIC is an excellent language for the occasional
programmer, and was chosen for the 4041 . Its
English-like commands, simple syntax, and lineby-line interpreter implementation combine for
friendly , easy use . To improve the selfdocumenting characteristics and thus reduce
maintenance costs, 4041 BASIC is enhanced by
several features. Variable names may be up to 8
characters, allowing the programmer to select
meaningful names like RISETIME, VOLTAGE 1, or
DELAY. Subprograms and program lines may be
named, with examples such as SRQHANDL or
CALCRMS.
Simple BASIC leaves much to be desired for most
sophisticated programmers. 4041 BASIC includes
many enhancements such as FORTRAN-like
subprograms. Variable passing from main to
subprograms and the ability to declare any
variables as local or global means that a team of
programmers can work quite independently on a
massive task, with the main program ultimately
being not much more than a series of
subprogram CALL statements. Other powerful
features include optional data types (short and
long floating point plus integer), a COMPRESS
command to optimize memory use, a proceed '
mode which overlaps 110 and processing operations for maximum system speed, logical unit
assignment capability, and up to 160k bytes of
memory directly addressable without overlays or
paging techniques.
4041 Architecture
The 4041 controller contains three micro- processors, with the CPU being the powerful 16-bit
68000. Standard memory is 32k bytes (approximately 25k user-available), with optional32k increments to 160k maximum. A 2O-character alphanumeric LED display, 20 character thermal printer,
DC-100 casette drive, 18 function keys, an IEEE488 port, and a RS-232 port are standard. A real
time clock and calender capability are standard
on the 4041 . Option 01 adds a second pair of
ports (one IEEE-488 and one RS-232). The Option
01 IEEE-488 port has Direct Memory Access
capability. Other options include an 8-bit parallel
TIL port, (Option 02) the program development
ROMs and carrier (Option 30), and a program
development/debug keyboard (Option 31). Options 30 and 31 could thus let a test engineer
easily and temporarily convert an installed execute-only 4041 into a debug/edit mode, make
necessary program changes, and restore it to the
tamper-proof condition. Extensive program development, however, would normally be accomplished at a programming station consisting of an
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
Option 30 4041 plus a CRT terminal to permit
multi-line viewing of program listings.
The 4041 package is a compact monolithic unit of
identical height and width to the TM 5003 Power
Module. A 4041 and TM 5003 can be easily
fastened together and used on the bench or
rack-mounted as a single unit, leading to extremely compact system configurations suitable for
crowded benches and racks or use in vans,
ships, and aircraft
Test and Measurement Orientation
The 4041 controller was developed simultaneously with the TM 5000 instrument family, and optimized as an instrument controller. Many of the
IEEE-488 functions are simple high level commands in 4041 BASIC. Examples include ATN,
GET, LLO, and several others. In its power-up
default condition, the 4041 implements Tektronix
Codes and Formats standard and thus can
communicate instantly with Tektronix IEEE-488
instruments without any programmer attention to
formats, syntax, delimiters, number format, etc.
However, the 4041 also has virtually complete,
programmable control over every IEEE-488 line
and condition. When this ability is combined with
the 4041's Logical Unit assignment and stream
specification ability, virtually any IEEE-488 instrument or device can be easily handled. The stream
specification ability means that a particular device's format, syntax, end-of-message character,
and other idiosyncrasies can be described one
time in a Logical Unit assignment statement.
Thereafter, the programmer can control or obtain
data from that instrument as easily as from an
instrument which fully complies with Tektronix
Codes and Formats Standard.
PAUSE - Halts the program after executing the current line. If
the current program line is an INPUT statement. the program
stops before the execution of INPUT.
User-Delinable Function Keys
Ten numeric user-definable function keys. 0-9. can be assigned
subroutines by the applicatio~s program. The keys may be redefined by the program during execution to allow for unlimited
user routines . The function keys can be enabled or disabled
under the control of a program .
Numeric values are assigned to these keys for entering information requested by an INPUT statement. When input has
been completed . user lunctions assigned to these keys are reenabled.
The other two keys on the front-panel keyboard are the declmal key ('. ') and the minus (. - ') key. The decimal key is previded for decimal point entry aSSOCiated with numeric and the
minus key is used to enter negative numbers associated with
numeric.
Keyboard overlays may be used for labeling the function keys
with a number or an abbreviation of the user routines .
Front·Panel Display
The front-panel display communicates test procedures and operator prompts and displays intermediate or final program results. The display is fully programmable.
Alphanumeric Display
Twenty character alphanumeric line
Sixteen segment LED
Size: height: 4.1 mm (0.16 in) width: 3.3 mm (0.13 in)
Characters per cm: 1.6 char. per cm (4 char per in)
Sixty-four character symbols
Message viewing time: programmable
Scrolling rate : programmable
System Indicators
Four LEOs located on the display front panel indicate the status of the system.
Character Size .07 in wide).
Line Spacing -
Front Panel Keyboard
System Keys
AUTO-LOAD - Causes the internal magnetic tape to rewind
and find the ' AUTOLOAD ' program. This program is then loaded into memory and execution begins.
ABORT - Halts program execution if no user-specified handier routine is called by the program. If a handler routine is
specified for the ABORT key. program control is passed to that
routine.
PROCEED - Performs one of the following functions depending on equipment or program state:
1. Causes program execution to start at the next program line
if a PAUSE was encountered.
Feed Speed -
CLEAR - Clears the alphanumeric display. Does not clear
user-defined prompts or the input cursor from an INPUT
statement.
EEX - Causes the number requested by an INPUT slatement
to be entered in scientific notation. Numbers entered after
pressing the EEX (Enter Exponent) key are considered part of
the exponent.
1.8 lines/s.
8.46 mm per S (.34 in/s).
Character Set -
26 Uppercase letters
26 Lowercase letters
10 Numeric digits
34 Special characters
32 Control characters
128 Total
Paper Size -
60 mm x 25 m (2.36 in x 82 ft)
CONTROLLING THE BUS
The 4041 automatically controls all bus management signals in
the proper sequence for the desired interface task and Instrument interaction.
A bus management function program that uses direct IEEE488 mnemonic commands accommodates differences in implementation of GPIB on other equipment. Virtually all legal bus
states can be programmed this way, which affords a high degree of flexibility for addressing various system applications.
BUS INTERRUPTS
The 4041 has the ability to detect and respond to various types
of Interrupt conditions that can be generated in the GPIB. Userspecified software handlers can be written to perform various
tasks when these conditions occur. Interrupts can be programmably ENABLED or DISABLED.
Interrupt conditions are :
Message
Mnemonic
Service Request
SRC
End or Identity
EOI
Interlace Cfear
IFC
DCL
Device Clear
GET
Group Execute Trigger
TCT
Take Control
MTA
My Talk Address
MLA
My Listen Address
BUS COMMUNICATION
Indicates that a program is running . A blinking BUSY light indicates that the system has PAUSED (temporarily halted).
POWER Indicates the machine is on.
1/0 Indicates that an Input/Output operation is being performed.
FN-
Interface and bus device addressing are programmable. This
allows the user to direct message and data flow to and/or from
the appropriate interface and GPIB peripheral. Information
such as primary and secondary addressing, along with pertinent device-dependent information, can be attached to a speCific logical unit number. Subsequent communication with that
GPIB device can be directed to the logical unit, eliminating the
need for redundant or repetitious statement programing.
Indicates that the user-definable function keys are enabled.
TRANSFER RATES (IEEE·488)
Magnetic Tape Drive
The magnetic tape drive is used to store user's programs and
data. The tape is the primary means of loading programs, particularly for execute-only applications; in addition, the tape
drive provides for long-term unattended data logging. File security is programmable.
File Structure -
Physical Record -
Search Speed -
650 typical (600 min).
256 bytes.
Average Transfer Rate -
Tape Rewind -
13,324 bits per s.
60 in/s 1520 mm/s.
60 in/s 1520 mm/s.
Tape Cartridge -
DC 100 cassette.
PRINTER
The printer produces hard copies of the interrr.adiate or final
program results , operator prompts, and changes in variables or
system status. Messages longer than twenty characters are
printed on succeeding lines where the user can specify the appropriate indentation for better delineation and readability .
Printing Method Capacity Font -
Transfer rates for the standard interface are given below.
Input
Output
Interrupt Mode
Exceeds
Exceeds
5k Bytes/s
5k Bytes/s
Fast Mode
Exceeds
Exceeds
16.5k Bytes/s
19.5k Bytes/s
SERIAL INTERFACE
48 named files (max).
Capacity (physical records) -
2. Resumes execution after an ABORT. If a program is loaded
from the tape. execution starts from the first program line.
3 . Delimits user input when requested from an INPUT
statement.
4.23 mm (6 lines per in).
Printing Speed -
BUSY -
The error trapping and handling capabilities of the
4041 are of particular importance in test and
measurement systems. Virtually any category of
error - in instruments, peripherals, on the bus, or
even within the 4041 - can be trapped and
handled by software drivers. When coupled to
the powerful self-diagnostics and error reporting
features of TM 5000 instruments, very fault-tolerant systems can be configured which demand
little or no operator skill.
2.5 mm high x 1.8 mm wide (.10 in high x
The 4041 comes with a standard serial asynChronous RS232C interface. The 4041 can support applications requiring
terminals , modem/host communication, or instrumentation with
this interface protocol.
In addition to standard transmission rates from 75 to 9600
baud transmission rates are programmable to any integer ranging from 2 to 9600 baud.
Full Duplex -
Full Capability (hall duplex not supported)
Transmit/Receive -
Matched rate only
Bits Per Character -
5, 6 , 7 , or 8 bits
Stop Bits Parity -
1 or 2
Even , Odd , One, Zero, None
Thermal , fixed head.
20-character alphanumeric line.
5 x 8 dot matrix printed.
293
TEK SYSTEM
CONTROLLERS
DYNAMIC RANGE
Error and Interrupts
Conditions such as parity , framing and overrun errors , receipt
of data or data available, and BREAK can all be programmably
captured. User routines or handlers can then direct what action
should be taken , depending on the particular condition.
The end of message delimiter (EOM) can be programmable to
anyone or two character ASCII string. This enables the 404 t
to communicate with most hosts or peripherals via the serial
interface.
Long Precision Numeric -
2.2E ± 308
Shorl Precision Numeric -
9.0E ± 307
Integer -
- 32760 to
SELF-TEST
An integral part of the 4041 is the self-test feature, which assures the user of reliable operation. Self-test is executed automatically on power-up and performs extensive hardware and
operating system tests.
SYSTEM VERIFICATION
The system verification tape is a standard accessory that tests
4041 components not covered by the self-test. These include
front-panel controls and indicators, and the optional program
development keyboard. Interface line drivers can be tested, if
necessary , by connecting Ioopback connectors.
32767
A"ay elementl (real, Integer or character a"ays ) - 32767
elements maximum per row (or column): limited by total memory installed
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage -
Reliability/Self· Test
+ 32767
Character String Length (max) -
100 - 120, 200 - 240 Volts AC ± 10%
Line Frequency -
48 - 66 Hz
Power Consumption -
ORDERING INFORMATION
4041 Controller ,,_,, _____ ._,,_,,_,, __ ,__ ,,_,,_"" $4995
Option 0 1 Second GPIB and RS-232 ................. Add $1600
Option 02 TTL Interface 8 bit parallel Interface .. Add $800
Option 20 Added memory 64K byte total .......... Add $1850
Option 21 Added memory 96K byte total .......... Add $2625
Option 22 Added memory 128K byte total ........ Add $3350
Option 23 Added memory 160K byte total ........ Add $3950
Option 30 Program Development ROMs and
ROM Carrier ........................................................ Add $995
Option 31 Program Development Keyboard ....... Add $750
FIELD INSTALLED MODIFICATIONS
120 Watt (max)
4041 -F01 , Option 01 ................................................... $1800
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
4041-F02 Option 02 .................................................... , $1000
Operating Temperature - O· to SS · C (32· to 131 · F) without
data cartridge or printer paper. O· to 4S · C (32· to 113· F) with
data cartridge or printer paper.
4041 -F30 Option 30 ..... .......................... ........... ............. $995
Storage Temperature - - 40 · to 7S·C ( - 40· to 167"F)
without data cartridge or printer paper.
Humidity - 85% relative non-condensing, O· to 4S · C (32· to
113· F) - 20% to 80% condensing.
Altitude (operating) -
4041-F31 Option 31 ...................................................... $750
040-1021 -00 First expansion from standard conllguration
(32k bytes lor total of 64k bytes) ............................... $2050
040-1022-00 Memory Expansion 01 32k byte increments
above 64k byte total ...................................................... $800
4.5 km (15,000 It).
EMI - Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A and VOE 0871
Class B.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimenalons Height - 180 mm (7 .2 in).
Width - 212.5 mm (8.5 in).
Length - 446.2 mm (20.75 in).
Welght Standard Net Weight - 7.70 kg (17 Ib 5 oz).
With Options Net Weight - 8.69 kg (191b 5 oz).
4054
4051
4052
System Controller
System Controller
11 Inch DVST Display
11 Inch DVST Display
19 Inch DVST Display
Graphic Enhanced BASIC
Graphic Enhanced BASIC
Enhanced High Resolution Graphics
GPIB Compatible
GPIB Compatible
DynamiC Graphics Option
Built·in Tape Drive
Expandable Memory (to 64K)
Thumbwheel Controlled Crosshair Cursor
Expandable Memory (to 32K)
RS·232 and Terminal Mode Option
Expandable Memory (to 64K)
Optional RS·232 with Terminal Mode
High Speed 16·bit, Bit·sliced Processor
GPIB and RS·232·C Compatible
See pages 79 and 80 for additional Information on controllers
294
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
MAINFRAMES
MAINFRAMES
The new TM 5000 Programmable Instrument Plugins operate in either of two power-module
mainframes. One of the mainframes is a half rack
width power-module capable of accepting three
single width plug-in instruments at one time. The
other power-module can provide power for up to
six single wide plug-in instruments at one time.
While TM 5000 Instruments will operate only in
these TM 5000 power-modules, over 40 TM 500
manual plug-in instruments will operate in these
same mainframes. Since this is so, it is possible to
utilize the TM 5000 Mainframes for either all
programmable systems or for hybrid systems
using both programmable and manual
instruments.
TM 5006
The TM 5006 can accept and provide power for
up to six single widths of TM 5000fTM 500 Plugins. The right hand compartment is a high power
compartment. The power module features a
pulse width modulated switching dc power supply. All dc voltages are electronically regulated.
The TM 5006 has forced air cooling.
While the TM 5000 power-modules are used for
GPIB compatible plug-ins, the power-modules
themselves do not occupy a bus address location. Each module has its own bus address, and
the inter-connect scheme will allow as many as
six (typically three) instruments to be connected
to the system with only one GPIB cable.
,
.
-
Six individual connectors, one for each compartment, provides connections to each GPIB compatible plug-in. These connectors feed a GPIB interface board, then to a standard GPIB connector
on the rear panel. All GPIB connections are separate from the board rear interface connector.
~
...
TM 5003
The TM 5003 can accept and provide power for
up to three single widths of TM 5000fTM 500 plugins. The power module features a pulse width
modulated switching dc power supply. All dc
voltages are electronically regulated. The TM
5003 has forced air cooling.
Three individual connectors, one for each compartment, provides connections to each GPIB
compatible plug-in. These connectors feed a
GPIB interface board, then to a standard GPIB
connector on the rear panel. All GPIB connections
are separate from the board rear interface
connector.
Reid modification kit is available to rackmount the
TM 5003 with the 4041 Instrument Controller.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200, 220 and 240 V;
not to exceed 250 V on 240 V range. Range changing accomplished by moving an easily accessed internal jumper.
Line Frequency Ranges -
48 to 60 Hz.
Power Consumption - Maximum primary power ",, 300 VA.
Actual power consumption depends on plug-in selection and
operating modes.
Heighl
Length
Width
TM 5003
in
mm
19.4
7.63
47 .6
18.7
9.1
23.0
TM 5006
mm
in
7.63
19.4
47.6
18.7
44.5
17.5
Weight
Net
Ship
kg
19.0
26.5
kg
32.0
460
Dimensions
Ib
8.6
13.0
Ib
14.5
21.0
Option 10 provides rack mounting capability. 040
kits also available to field convert standard to
rack mount and rack mount to standard.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100. 110, 120, 200 , 220 and 240 V;
not to exceed 250 V on 240 V range. Range changing accomplished by moving an easily accessed internal jumper.
Line Frequency Ranges -
48 to 60 Hz.
Power Consumption - Maximum primary power ",, 650 VA.
Actual power consumption depends on plug-in selection and
operating modes.
RACKMOUNT -TO~CABINET AND
CABINET -TO-RACKMOUNT
CONVERSION KITS
Cablnet-to-rackmount conversion kit, equipped with slide out
assembly . required 10 convert a TM 5006 to rack mount
capability.
Order 040-0982-00 ........................ _................................ $125
Rackmount-to-cabinet conversion kit, equipped to convert a
TM 5006 with rack mount capability to cabinet style.
Order 040-0983-00 ..................................................... _..... 560
Cablnet-to-rackmount conversion kit, equipped with slide-{)ut
assembly to rackmount a 4041 Instrument Controller to the left
01 a TM 5003.
Order 040-0984-00 ..........................................._............. $150
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 5003 ................................................. $700
Option 02 Rear Interlace ......................................... Add $75
TM 5006 .............. ...... ............... .............. $950
Option 02 Rear Interlace ....................................... Add $150
Option 10 Rackmount ... .......... _.... _........................ Add S120
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
GPIB Cable, 2 meter
Order 012-0630-0 1 .......................................................... $75
GPIB Cable, 4 Meter
Order 012-0630-02 ......................................................... $115
Plug-in GPIB Extender Cable
Order 067-0996-00 ..................... _..................................... 585
?QI\
TEK MAINFRAMES
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
TM 500 Plug-ins slide into anyone of several
power-module mainframes. They are available in six versions accepting one instrument, or combinations up to six. Below are
described each of the six mainframes built
by Tektronix for TM 500 Instrumentation.
Dlmenllonl
Option 02 Rear interface for interconnection of
instruments at mainframe rear interface. (Option
05 with TM 515).
Length
Option 07 - For operating TR 502, TR 503 and
DC 508A Option 07 in a TM 503, TM 504, TM 506,
or TM 515.
MAINFRAMES DIMENSIONS & WEIGHTS
(without Plug-ins)
CABINET
TM 503
TM 501
He i ght
6.0
15.2
6.0
15.2
6.0
15.2
6.0
15 .2
3.9
9.9
8 .7
22.1
12.0
30.5
17.4
44 .2
19.0
15.3
38.9
17.0
43 .2
20.0
50 .8
20.0
50 .8
18.9
Domestic
Shipping
Ib
kg
Ib
kg
5.4
2.4
9.5
13.0
5.9
17.0
in
cm
In
RTM 506
Width
Net
cm
TM 506
cm
Weight (appro x)
in
TM 504
In
cm
TM 515
In
cm
5.25
13.3
6 .8
17.3
48 .3
15.0
38 .1
cm
48 .0
20.0
50.8
Ib
kg
Ib
4.3
18.5
8.4
29.0
13.2
32.0
14.4
22.5
10.2
7.7
26 .0
11.8
41 .0
18 .6
46.0
21.0
30.0
13.6
kg
Ib
kg
In
Ib
kg
TM 501
Built for use with one single wide plug-in module.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 515
RTM 506
The TM 515 Traveler Mainframe is designed to
protect up to 5 separate instruments during transportation to and from the worksite. Included with
this rugged mainframe are pop-off front and back
covers which protect the instruments and also
store accessories. The Traveler Mainframe will
slide easily under an airline seat when traveling
and comes equipped with a heavy duty handle
and tilt bail.
The RTM 506 is a rackmount version of the TM
506. It contains all the same features with the
added front panel handles and rackmount rails
for built-in configurable test stations . This
mainframe saves you space and money in tight
situations.
$285
TM 501
TM 501 Option 02 Intertace .................................... Add $55
TM 503
Accepts up to three single wide TM 500 Plug-ins.
This lightweight, portable, bench top mainframe
includes a front panel power switch and tilt bail.
Also fits easily into the shelf of a TEK Model 3 Lab
Cart. A carrying case is available to protect the
mainframe during transportation.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 515 ................................................... $545
TM 515 Option 05 Intertace .......... _.............. _.... _..... Add $75
With Option 06 48-440 Hz fan ............................... Add $ 150
TM 515 Option 07 Intertace ..................................... Add $25
ORDERING INFORMATION
RTM 506 .............. .................. ................. $560
RTM 506 Option 02 Intertace ................................ Add $ 1 50
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Rang •• -
InternatkH'lal Transformer: 100. 110.
120. 200. 220. 240 V ac. all Within 10%; but not to exceed 250
V ac. Range changing for transformer accomplished with
qUick-change line-selector block .
Line Frequency Ranges to 440 Hz .
International Transformer: 48 Hz
NOTE . The ventllallng lans on the TM 506 and TM 515 operate
on 48-60 Hz only.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 503 ................................................. _. $285
Power Consumption - Max primary power approx: 35 w for
TM 501 . 120 W for TM 503 . 220 w for TM 504 . 320 w for TM
506. and 240 W for TM 515 . Actual power consumption depends on plug-In selection and operating modes.
TM 503 Option 02 Intertace .................. _.... _............ Add $75
TM 503 Option 07 Intertace .......... _........ _................ Add $25
TM 506
SUPPLIES (UNREGULATED)
TM 504
The TM 504 can be fitted with up to four different
TM 500 Plug-ins. This mainframe is designed to fit
into the shelves of the TEK Model 3 Lab Cart for
complete test station mobility. Each TM 504
Mainframe also comes equipped with front panel
switch, tilt bail and a handle. An optional carrying
case is available for transportation to and from
the worksite.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 504 ................................................... $315
This mainframe can power up to 6 different plugin's, providing a complete test station with one
power cord. Like most TM 500 Mainframes, the
TM 506 is available with the Option 02 which allows rear-interfacing of different modules, reducing front panel clutter.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 506
$440
TM 506 Option 02 Intertace .......................... __ ...... Add $ 150
TM 506 Option 07 Intertace _.......................... _........ Add $25
Shared by All Compartments - + 33.5 V dc and - 33.5 V de.
TM 501 : 500 rnA max . TM 503: 1 A max. TM 504 : 1.4 A max.
TM 506: 2.1 A max. TM 515:1.8 A max.
Low Power Compartments - Two 25 V ac windings. 500 mA
each supplied to each compartment. independently. 17.5 V ac
and + 11 .5 V de shared in any combination bietween these two
supplies and among all low-power compartments. TM 501 : 1 A
max . TM 503 and TM 504 : 3.6 A max. TM 506: 6.5 A max. TM
515: 6.5 A max.
High Power Compartments - (nearest to switch in TM 504
and TM 506): Two 25 V ac windings. 1 A each. 17.5 V ac and
+ 11 .5 V de . 4 A max. shared In any combination bietween
these two suppl18s.
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating -
O· C to + 50 · C.
Nonoperating -
ALTITUDE RANGE
To 15.000 fl .
TM 504 Option 02 Intertace .................................. Add $ 1 00
Operating -
TM 504 Option 07 Intertace ............................ _.... _.. Add $25
Nonoperating -
296
- 40 · C to + 75 · C.
To 50.000 ft .
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
MAINFRAME5..z
CARl
a limited rear interface on any TM 500 and TM
5000 Mainframe except the TM S01 . The kit
includes fourteen square pins, and 3 coaxial
cables, all with female pin receptacles. Installation
instructions also included. For "do-it-yourself"
modification kit
TEK LAB CART MODEL 3
Order 040-0846-01 _................................. $30
Tektronix has published a Rear Interface Data
Book that contains information on the interfacing
capability of each instrument "family." This book
is available through Tektronix by filling out a card
included in each mainframe package.
REAR INTERFACE
CAPABILITY WITH TM 500 and 5000
TM 500 and TM 5000 Mainframes offer the unique
ability to have separate modular instruments
interconnected through the rear interface board
of each mainframe. For example, the rear trigger
output of a signal source can be interconnected
to the rear input of a counter for instant frequency
checks at the touch of a front-panel switch. Or, a
digital multimeter and power supply may be
interconnected to speed precise voltage set-ups
without any need to move test leads. Any module
can be internally connected thru the mainframe
and can also be externally interfaced out the
back panel.
Most TM 500 and TM 5000 Plug-in modules
contain a duplication of the front panel input and
output connections in the back. These interface
lines are built into the rear-edge circuit card
connector of each plug-in. Some modules also
have additional signal or control lines which are
present only at the back of the instrument. In
either case, different modules may be
interconnected by the user to reduce front panel
clutter or to perform functions not otherwise
available.
Mainframes can be interfaced a variety of ways.
A user can solder together the appropriate connector pins on a standard mainframe, or can
order the mainframe with the Option 02. The
Option 02 version of the mainframe comes
equipped with square pin connectors on the rear
interface circuit board and a special wire kit
consisting of standard wires and coaxial cables
with mating square pin receptacles. Option 02
also provides a rear-panel male connector, mating cable connectors, and one BNC connector
per plug-in compartment.
The square pin connectors eliminate the need to
hand-solder connections to the interface circuit
board, extending the life of the mainframes. The
remaining Option 02 components offer a variety
of interfacing alternatives limited only by the
user's ingenuity and imagination.
The TM 515 Mainframe is available with an Option
05 interface which includes everything in the
Option 02 except for the rear panel SO-pin male
connector, mating cable connector and the BNC
connectors.
Tektronix also makes a low-cost "do-it-yourself"
Rear Interface Modification Kit. It enables those
who don't need the full flexibility of factory installed interface pins at every connector to install
CABINET·TO·RACKMOUNT
CONVERSION KITS AND
MONITORS
Cabinet-to-rackmount conversion kit
equipped with slide-out assembly, required t~
rackmount two TM S03s side-by-side in a standard rack width.
Order 040-0616-02 ................................ $11 0
Cabinet-to-rackmount conversion kit
equipped with slide-out assembly, required t~
rackmount a single TM S03 in a standard rack
width . This includes securing hardware and a
blank front panel when only one instrument is
utilized.
Order 040-0617 -02 ..... .... ....... ...... ....... ... $150
Rackmount-to-cabinet conversion kit
equipped to convert a rackmount TM 503 to a
cabinet style.
Order 040-0618-01 ... ...... ............ ........ .... $55
Cabinet-to-rackmount conversion kit
equipped with slide-out assembly, required t~
rackmount a TM 503 and a 603, 603A, 604, 604A,
605, 606, 606A, 607, 607A, 608 or 624 in a standard rack width.
Order 040-0624-01 .... ......................... ..... $90
Cabinet-to-rackmount conversion kit
equipped with slide-out assembly, required t~
convert a TM 506 (cabinet style) to an RTM 506.
Order 040-0761-04 ................................ $120
Rackmount-to-cabinet conversion kit
equipped to convert an RTM S06 to cabinet styl~
TM 506.
Order 040-0762-00 .................................. $75
This Lab Cart is especially designed for rollabout
configuration combining TM 500 Instrumentation
with the Tektronix Oscilloscope of your choice. It
features pistol-grip tilt control and a large accessory drawer in the base. The top tray accepts any
TEKTRONIX 7000 Series, 5000 Series, or Portable
Oscilloscope. The MODEL 3 comes standard with
one lower shelf that will support either a TM 503
or TM 504 with plug-ins. Additional shelves are
available as optional accessories. Max capacity
of the lower shelf area is two TM 503s or TM 504s
stacked, or up to a TEKTRONIX 7000 Series Os:
cilloscope in size-with TM 500 packages placed
on the tray at your option. The power distribution
module at rear underside of the top tray provides
four power outlets and a 15 foot line cord.
International modification (Option 01) deletes
power distribution module.
TEK Lab Cart Model 3 .......................... $475
With Option 01 (International
Modification) .......•................................. _.. _.... _...... No Charge
Additional Lower Shelf,
Order 436-0132· 01 (TM 500 only) ........................ ......•.. . $35
Safety Belt to secure oscilloscopes or TM 500 to
top tray or lower shelves (not needed for 5000 or
7000 Series on top tray).
Order 346-0136-01 ... ... .... ..... ..... ..... ........ $23
TEK ACCESSORIES
TM 500 APPLICATION AND
CONSTRUCTION NOTES
The TM 500 product line is supported by an ongoing program to keep you informed of how to
achieve optimal performance and versatility from
your TM 500 Instruments. Tektronix' goal of providing you with solutions to difficult measurement
problems does not end with your purchase of
TM 500 Instruments.
Application Notes take you through the steps
necessary to solve complex problems, or to make
more useful measurements with your TM 500
instruments. Subjects include integration through
v to f conversion, generating delayed pulses, and
current sinking with power supply modules.
Construction Notes provide information necessary to build custom circuits using a TM 500 Blank
Plug-in Kit and standard components. These
notes are developed from the actual construction
of more common special circuits; they include
parts lists, schematics and other construction
details. Some of the available notes include:
power supply circuits, thermal true RMS converter, and analog multipliers
PLUG-IN STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
TM 500 CUSTOM PLUG-IN KITS
Single and double compartment sizes
A complete test and measurement set-up for
many typical jobs requires at least one
nonstandard item. Such items commonly include
relay circuits or manual switches for routing signals; test oscillators at pre-set frequencies for
alignment purposes and markers; digital logic circuits for sequencing, timing, and control; special
processors or converters such as log amps, multipliers, and analog-to-digital converters; and a variety of other system elements which are usually
not available or economical as complete commercial instruments. The construction and packaging
of these special items is always a problem, and
the sheet metal work and provision for necessary
power supplies often far exceed the cost of the
functional elements.
This is why the TM 500 line includes custom plugin kits. The kits provide perforated main circuit
boards which allow rapid construction and wiring
of circuits using both discrete components and
integrated circuits. Also included are top and bottom rails, side cover, front sub-panel, and a blank
dress panel, and the latch mechanism. An instruction sheet details the voltages and currents
available in the power module. Standard voltage
regulator ICs can be used to provide exact
voltages for most individual power supply requirements. The finished special-purpose circuitry or
instrument is physically compatible with other TM
500 Instrumentation.
Custom Plug-in Kit with Power Supply
(single compartment) 040-0803-02 ....... $90
Custom Plug-in Kit (single compartment)
040-0652-05 ............................................. $75
Custom Plug-in Kit (double compartment)
040-0754-07 ........................................... $100
Single Compartment without ECB
040-0821-03 ................................ ............ $60
TM 500 BLANK PANEL
When operating the TM 500 Instruments with less
than the full complement of plug-ins, the blank
plug-in panel can be used to cover unused
compartments.
Blank Plug-in Panel,
Order 016-0195-03 . ...... ...... ........ ........ .... $21
FRONT-PANEL CIRCUIT
BOARD ADAPTER KIT
PS 501-1 or PS 503A
Single Compartment with Power Supply
An electronic engineer or technician away from
his bench seldom has enough storage space for
probes, cables, "tees", accessories, and small
tools. The plug-in storage compartment is a useful adjunct to many rollabout and Travel Lab
configurations. If all five compartments in your
TM 515 Traveler Mainframe are not used for a
particular field application, add a plug-in storage
compartment for extra convenience. Even a
rackmount TM 500 installation might profit by
readily-available terminators or attenuators in a
presently unused compartment. Compatible with
all TM 500 Mainframes, 5000 Series Oscilloscope
Mainframes, and 203 and 204 SCOPE-MOBILE*
Cart plug-in storage bins; inside dimensions 25
cm L x 5.1 cm W x 10.6 cm H, (9 7/8 in L x 2 in W
x 4114 in H).
Order 016-0362-01 _____ ............................ $95
Now a blank plug-in kit complete with power supply parts and circuit board layout is available. A
single-wide compartment, this plug-in kit saves
set up time and build time as the power supply
circuitry is designed and kitted for you.
Specifically, the supplies parts are:
(1) A ground-referenced positive supply, capable
of + 7 V to +20 V at up to 400 mA. (Adjustment is centered at 15 V; change of resistor
values required for total 7-20 V range) .
(2) A ground-referenced negative supply, identi-
cal to supply No. 1 except for polarity.
(3) A ground-referenced supply nominally 5 V, not
adjustable, with current capability up to 1
ampere.
A series of TM 500 Construction Notes provide
direction for building custom circuits using the TM
500 Blank Plug-in Kits and standard components.
Among the construction notes available are: Suggested power supply circuits, thermal true RMS
converter:
The front-panel circuit-board kit is a convenient
way to mount small experimental circuits or fixtures right on the front of a TM 500 Power Supply.
Typical applications for the adapter are as a device tester (test fixture), educational demonstrator (especially ICs), and in temporary systems
functions, e.g., OR'ing and ANO'ing two signals.
This adapter will supplement the blank plug-in kit
for Simple or temporary applications.
The adapter kit provides a convenient platform
for building up circuits; its pin holes are pre-solder-flowed and some are interconnected. Oiscrete devices can be readily attached to the
adapter kit board, stored, and easily reattached
to the "banana jack" plugs on the face of the
power supply. Circuit clips for interconnected pin
holes are available from Tektronix. The adapter kit
is 2.5 inches wide.
Order 013-0152-00 ................................. $22
298
TEK
GENERAL PURPOSE
INSTRUMENTS
AM 501 AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
BOARD KIT
MANUAL (ONE SHOT) TRIGGER
GENERATOR
RG 501,
PG 501,
PROTECTIVE FRONT COVER
and
PG 505
The Manual (one shot) Trigger Generator is a self·
contained, battery'operated, handheld device for
manually generating a single pulse. This adapter
is used to start a pulse, ramp, sweep, or com·
plete sequence of events on instruments which
do not have a manual trigger button or where a
remote operation capability is desired, such as
some oscilloscopes and the FG SOl A, PG SOl , PG
505, and RG 501 .
The AM SOl Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit attaches to
the input and output terminal plugs on the front of
the AM SOl Operational Amplifier. The kit is
approximately 2.5 inches square. The kit is a pc
board which has six terminal studs for attachment
to the amplifier's banana jacks. This permits the
designer to build a circuit of resistors, capacitors,
and other components for use in conjunction with
the AM 501 's input, output, or feedback circuits.
With several boards, the AM SOl Op Amp circuit
can be changed instantly in configuration from
integrator to differentiator to amplifier.
An additional advantage of the kit is that it does
not interfere with the other connectors on the
face of the AM SOl .
Order 013-0146-00 ... " .. " .. " .................... $22
Type 1105 Battery Power Supply
The internal trigger generator circuitry eliminates
contact bounce, but wiU generate pulses as rapidly as the operator can manually cycle the
pushbutton.
The output pulse is nominally two milliseconds in
width and three volts in amplitude with a rapid
rise and fall. Output impedance is low (SO fI); the
pulse amplitude drops from about 3.6 to 1.8 volts
when changed from a high impedance to a 50 fI
termination. Both voltages decrease with battery
aging. The battery is a 5.4 V dry cell.
A snap·on front cover, molded of high impact
plastic, is available for the TM 503 (shown above),
TM 504, and TM 506 Mainframes. The cover adds
4.5 cm (1.75 inches) to the length of the TM 503,
TM 504, and TM 506 Mainframes, and clears the
longest knob project i ons on any of the
instruments.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 503 Front Panel Cover,
200-1566-00 """,,"""""""""""""""""" $14
TM 504 Front Panel Cover,
200-1727 -00 """"""""""""".,,"""""",,. $15
TM 506 Front Panel Cover,
200-1728-00 ." " """""""""""""""""",,. $18
MAINFRAME RETAINER BAR
Applications for the trigger generator also include
stepping or sequencing of digital systems, analog
control systems, mechanical devices, as well as
obtaining "single shot" operation from many types
and brands of instruments. Biological and physical experiments, where manual triggering is required as a part of the stimuli, are also common
applications.
Order 016-0597-00 """""""""""""""" $125
RAIN COVERS
The mainframe retainer bar modification kit
comes complete with the retainer bar, all necessary parts and instructions.
TM 500 Instruments may be operated with the
Type 1105 when suitable ac line power is not
available. The 1105 is rugged and portable, operating on internal batteries or an external dc
source. Operating time is dependent on the number and type of plug-ins being powered, and their
operating mode. The following table shows estimated operating time for a full power module in a
typical situation.
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
501 .......
503
504
506
515
........ .. ......................................... 5.0 hours
........................................ .. ........ . 1.6 hours
.................................. 1.3 hours
.... .. .... .. ...... .. . 0.9 hours
.......... 1 hour
ORDERING INFORMATION
1105 Battery Pack "" .. "." .. "." .... ,," .... $1240
Option 01 , 230 V operation ................................. No Charge
These soft, weather' proof, vinyl-coated Rain Covers come in sizes for TM 503 and TM 504 packages of instrumentation, and include adequate
space for protective front covers, as well. They
feature heavy-duty zippers that open from either
end, and include their own carrying handles, offset to compensate for the off-center balancing
point of TM 500 instrumentation packages. The
color is Tek blue .
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 504 Rain Cover
016-0621-00 """""""" """"""""""",,.,,. $45
TM 503 Rain Cover
016-0620-00 """"""."""",,.,,"",,"""""" $35
You may modify the TM 504 or RTM 506fTM 506
Mainframe: each has a separate kit. Initial installation requires replacement of an existing bottom
member of the mainframe with a new part supplied in the kit. Then, the retainer bar can be simply added or removed with four screws, accessible from the bottom of the mainframe.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 504-020-0548-00 """""" """""""" $45
TM 506 and RTM 506-020-0549-00 "". $50
TEK ACCESSORIES
TM 500 FLEXIBLE EXTENDER
CABLE
Designed to couple a TM 500 Plug-in with the
mainframe rear interface board connection. It
provides a completely flexible connecting point
outside the mainframe for plug-in operation during test or check-out.
Extender Cable, Order 067-0645-02 ___ . $125
RISE TIME LIMITER
HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE FOR
USE WITH DMMs
ACCESSORY POUCH
While the TM SOl , TM 503, TM 504 , and TM 506 Mainframes
were designed primarily for bench use, they are frequently carried away for service elsewhere. Taking along the probes, cables, terminators, and other accessories usually required can
then be a problem. The soft vinyl accessory pouch neatly
solves this problem ; sturdy snap-around straps let the pouch
be secured to the carrying handle of any TM 500 Mainframe or
Tektronix Oscilloscope, or the straps may be snapped together
to lorm a carrying handle for the pouch to be used independently. A convenient side zipper lets accessory items be removed or stored without removing the pouch from the mainframe handle. Dimensions == 9 1/4 in long x 5 3/4 in wide x 2 in
high.
Order 016-0351 -00
$25
The High Voltage Probe will measure de voltages
from 1 kV to 40 kV with an accuracy of 1% at 25 kV . The
division ratio is 1000: 1. Common uses Include measuring anode voltages on monitors or oscilloscopes.
This probe plugs directly into the front end of the multimeter.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage range
Input resistance
Division ratio
Overall accuracv
Upper limit accuracy
Lower limit accuracy
TM 500 CARRYING CASE
Input Z at meter
Order 010-0277-00 ...•.••.•..•................••.• $115
For use with the PG 502 Pulse Generator which
has a pulse rise and fall time of less than one
nanosecond. In some applications, such as TIL
logic where slower rise time is needed, this fast
pulse can be limited to six nanoseconds by using
the rise time limiter.
Rise Time Limiter, Order 015-0249-00 $100
P6420 Rf PROBE
Voltage Range - 5 V to 25 V RMS (70.7 V p-p).
Ac to Dc Transfer Ratio Accuracy - 0.5 V to 5 V RMS
± 10% (15 · to 3S · C). 5.0 V to 25 V RMS I S% (1S · C to
3S · C).
Frequency Response - 100 kHz to 300 MHz (I 0.5 dB), 50
kHz to 500 MHz ( I 1.5 dB), 10kHz to 1 GHz ( ± 3.0 dB).
Input Capacitance - ~ 3.7 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 42.4 V (peak ac + dc).
Temperature Range - Nonoperating: - SS · C to + 7S · C.
Operating : + 15 · to + 3S · C.
Length - Probe only 9.6 cm . Cable only 2 meters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
013·0097·0 1 1 TIP, probe. retractable (BO)
34 4-0046-00 2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
175 ·0849-00 1 LEAD, ground . 3 In (7 .5 cm) (BC)
175· 10 17-00 1 LEAD, ground . 6 In (13 cm) (BE)
166·0404-0 1 1 INSULATING SLEEVE, eleclrlcal (CH)
352 ·0351 ·00 1 HOLDER , probe
103-0090-00 1 ADAPTER, BNC female to dual banana (BN )
2 TIP, probe replaceable'
P6125 COUNTER PROBE 5X
These luggage-type carrying cases for TM 500 equipment are
molded of high strength glass-epoxy. The TM 503 model
weighs 12 pounds empty and measures 23 1/2 inches long by
8 1/2 inches thick by 15 1/2 inches high, including rubber feet ,
lockable latches, and handle. Inside, the resilient polyurethane
foam is molded to accept a TM 503 (with or without the protective front cover) plus either a spare TM 500 family module or a
200 Series Miniscope. A third compartment in the foam accepts miscellaneous cables, accessories, or small tools.
The TM 504 case has a molded foam Insert which will accept
fhe TM 504 (with or without the protective front cover) but has
no provisions for spare modules or tools. It is 61 .0 cm long x
21 .6 cm thick x 44.5 cm high, (24 in. long by 8.5 in. thick by
17.5 in. high) and weighs = 14 pounds empty.
50 0 PRECISION COAXIAL CABLE
change specifications)
175-1661-02 ...•....•.......•.•...........•......•.•..... $26
300
Attenuation -
5X .
Input Resislance - 5 Mil Input.
Capacilance - ~ 20 pF.
Bandwidlh - Dc to 200 MHz .
Voltage Raling - 250 V (dc + peak ac) derated to 3SV at 100
MHz .
Cable Lenglh - 1.5 meters.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 HOLDER, probe
1 TIP, retractable hook
• 1 TIP, IC lester
•• 2 TIPS, probe
344-0046-00 2 CLIPS, miniature, alligator
175-0124-01
1 LEAD, ground, 13 cm
175-0263-01
1 LEAD, ground, 8 cm
166-0404-01
1 SLEEVE, insulating
016-0521 -00 1 POUCH, accessory
'Available in packages of 10 (015-0201 -04) or 100
(015-0201-05) only .
"Available in packages of 10 only (206-0191-03).
352-0351 -00
013-0107-03
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6420 Rf Probe, 2 m Cable Included,
01 0-6420-03 .........••.•........... ..•............••. $120
For a 1 meter length cable, (does not
change specifications)
The P6125 is a Iow-capacitance, 5X attenuation passive probe
specially designed for use with counter/timers. It makes possible more accurate time interval measurements of high speed
logiC Signals. Five-times attenuation provides an optimum
match between the counter input characteristics and the voltage levels of all common logic families . The low input capacitance permits acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum loading of the circuits under test.
CHARACTERISTICS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Carrying Case for TM 503
016-0565-00 ...•..•..•.......••...•..•..••.........•.. $335
Carrying Case for TM 504
016-0608-00 ........ .......... .............•.•.•..•.•. $340
'Available In packaqe of 10 only , order 206-0230-03 (C R)
175-1661-00 ......•..•............•................••.... $26
For a 3 meter length Cable, (does not
lkV to 40 kV dc
1000 Mil
1000:1
20 kV to 30 kV 2%
Changes linear from 2% at 30
kV to 4% at 40 kV
Changes linear from 2% at 20
kV to 4% at 1 kV
10M2 required
For use with the PG 502 , PG 506, end SG 503. These instruments are internally calibrated for use with this 3 ft 50 !l coaxial
cable into a 50 Il load.
50
{l
Cable, Order 012-0482-00 .......•..... $25
P6125 Counter Probe, 5X, 1.5 m,
Order 010-6125-01 .... ........•••. ..•..••.......... $53
TEK
CURVE
TRACERS
CONTENTS
•
••
576 Curve Tracer System ......
172 Programmable Test Fixture ..
176 Pulsed High-Current Fixture
577 Curve Tracer System .
178 Linear IC Test Fixture
5CT1 N & 7Cn N Curve Tracer
Plug-Ins ..
302
304
............ 305
............. 306
..... 308
.. .. 309
Curve Tracers can deliver comprehensive
information about a multitude of semiconductor devices and integrated circuits ...
from two- and three-terminal devices
through the full range of linear integrated
circuits .. .from transistors and diodes to
optoisolators, thyristors, and operational
amplifiers.
These versatile measurement tools give you
more than pinpointed parameters. A curve
tracer can show you what happens between specified pOints in a quickly graphed
curve, thus providing the valuable performance data necessary for accurate design,
analysis, and evaluation .
If you are well acquainted with Curve
Tracers , you will find the Curve Tracer
System descriptions (p 302-310) helpful in
choosing the system that best meets your
requirements . If you would like to receive
a brochure, application notes, and other materials to learn more about Curve Tracers
and their measurement capabilities, please
use the reply card ; or, for faster action ,
contact a Tektronix Sales Engineer at the
Sales Office nearest you .
..,. ..
TRACER
SYSTEM
TEK CURVE
S,.nd.fd
Tell Filiur.
576
Tests Two- and Three- Terminal
Discrete Semiconductors
Power Capability up to 220 W
Convenient Scale Factor Readout
Other Test Fixtures for Testing Power
Devices and Semi-Automated Testing
The TEKTRONIX 576 Curve Tracer System continues to hold the title ·standard of the industry."
The 576 accepts three different test fixtures: the
Standard Test Rxture, 172 Programmable Test
Rxture (described on p 304), and the 176 Pulsed
High-Current Fixture (described on p 305). The
576 is an excellent general purpose curve tracer
system that performs well in applications where
high current testing is required .
With the Standard Test Rxture, the collector
supply of the 576 delivers up to 220 watts peak to
the device under test. The step generator can
deliver up to 2 A in both its current and voltage
modes of operation. Of course , with the 176, the
576 is capable of pulsed collector operation up to
200 amps peak.
One of the features that sets the 576 apart from
the 577 is the display area READ-OUT. Adjacent
to the 576's CRT are alphanumeric indicators of
vertical and horizontal deflection factors, step
amplitude, and BetaJdiv or gm/div. The Beta or
gm readout saves the operator from the
arithmetic usually necessary to arrive at these
parameters. The READ-OUT also provides a permanent record of major knob settings in 576 CRT
photographs.
302
Another unique feature of the 576 is the
ed Display Offset. Combining a
tion control and a display magnifier, the
Offset increases resolution and allows the opera
tor to make more precise measurements.
Other features of the 576 Curve Tracer
adjustable current limiting in the step npnp,'"""
either 300 I'S or 80 I'S pulse width in pulsed
operation, push buttons to check display zero
calibration, and illuminated graticule.
TEK
CURVE TRACER
SYSTEM
CHARACTERISTICS
COLLECTOR SUPPLY
Mode. - NORM : positive or negative full wave rectffied ac
(line frequency) : dc: positive or negative de: LEAKAGE : emitter
current rather than collector current measurements with an in ~
crease in the basic vertical deflection factor to , nAldlv.
Voltages - Peak open circuit voltages within + 35% and
- 5% of Indicated range.
Range
15 V
75 V
350 V
1500 V
Max Continuous
Peak Current
l OA
2A
0.5 A
0.1 A
~ 4A
~ IA
~ 0 . 2A
Peak Pulse
Mode Current
~20
A
Series resistance Is from 0.3 n to 6.5 Mn In 12 steps. all within
5% or 0.1 !l. Peak power limit setting: 0.1 W. 0.5 W. 2.2 W. 10
W. 50 W. 220 W.
Sa'ety Interlock - Protects operator from 75 V. 350 V. and
1500 V collector voltages.
STEP GENERATOR
Current Mode - Step/ollset amplitude range is 5 nAlmV/step
(with XO.l MULT) to 2 V/step. 1-2-5 sequence. Max current
(steps and aiding offset) is X20 AMPLITUDE setting . except
Xl0 (2 A) at 200 mAistep and XIS (1.5 A) at 100 mAistep. Max
voltage (steps and aiding offset) is at least 10 V. Max opposing
offset current is Xl0 AMPLITUDE switch setting or 10 rnA.
whichever is less . Max opposing voltage is limited at 1 V to 3
V.
Accuracy - Incremental : within 5%. between steps. within
10% with Xl .0 MULT. Absolute: within 2% of total output including offset . or 1% of AMPLITUDE setting. whichever is
greater. Ollset multiplier : 0 to Xl0 the AMPLITUDE setting.
continuously variable. Polarity AID(s) or OPPOSE(s) the step
polarity.
Step Rates - XO.5. Xl (NORM). and X2 the collector supply
rate. The collector supply rate is twice line frequency .
", 80
~s
or 300
~s
width. at NORM or XO.5
Step/Offset Polarity - The STEP GEN polarity is the same as
the COLLECTOR SUPPLY polarity. and positive in the ac position . Step polarity may be inverted by actuating the INVERT
pushbutton.
Step Family actuated).
REPETITIVE or SINGLE FAMILY (manually
Number of Steps -
Digitally selectable between 1 and 10.
As a percentage of highest on-screen
NORM and
DC MODES
Vert Collector
Current
Horlz Collector
Volts
Horlz Base Volts
LEAKAGE MODE
Vert Emiller
Cu rrent/dlv:
10 nA-2 mAId Iv
NORMAL
3%
3%
3%
OFFSET and
MAGNIFIED
w it h CENTERL INE
VALUE ' rom :
100-40 35-15
10-0
dlv
dlv
d lv
2%
3%
1 nA-200 IJ.A/dlv
(magnified)
5. 2. 1 nAldlv
2%
2%
3%
3%
4%
4%
2% ±
1 nA
30/0 ±
1 nA
40/0 ±
1 nA
50/0 ±
1 nA
Horlz Collector or
Base Volts with
Emiller Currentl
dlvof:
> IIJ.A
100. 10. or 1 nA
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Requirements - Power source : operates only with an
unbalanced-to-ground power source. For safe operation. the
power line neutral (white or 'identlfied' conductor) must be
connected to the instrument neutral (unlused). and the power
plug safety ground (green conductor) must return to ground
through a different path than the power line neutral. Voltage
Ranges: the quick-ehange line-voltage range selector accommodates 90 V ac to 136 V ac or 180 V ac to 272 V ac (six
positions), at 48 Hz to 66 Hz line frequency . Max power consumption is 30S W. stand by power is ",, 60 W.
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valid over an ambient temperature range of + 10 · C to + 40 · C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
200. 20. or 2 nA
VERT STEP
GEN POSITION
2%
3%
4%
3%
3% plus
25 mV!
vert dlv
3% plus
50 mV/
vert div
3% plus
125mV/
vert dlv
4%
3%
4%
5%
4%
3%
4%
5%
HORIZ STEP
GEN POSITION
NOT AP PLICA B LE
IS V
75 V
350 V
1500 V
Vertical-Collector
I IJ.A
I IJ.A
2IJ.A
5IJ.A
Vertical-Em Iller
InA
I nA
2 nA
5 nA
Horizontal-Base
5 mV
5 mV
5 mV
5 mV
Horizontal-Collector
S mV
5 mV
20 mV
200 mV
Calibrator (CAL) - Dc VOltage (accurate within 1.5%) provided to check and adjust vertical and horizontal gain.
Position Controls - Fixed 5 div increments within 0.1 div.
Continuous fine control over 5 div or less.
In
1S.0
29 .2
11.S
Dep th
S8.4
23.0
Weights
Sh ipping
, % or less or:
cm
38.1
Width
Ne t
Horizontal Deflection Factor - Collector volts: 50 mV/div to
200 V/div 12 steps (S mV/div with Xl0 magnification). Base
volts : 50 mV/div to 2 V/div. 6 steps (5 mV/div with Xl0 magnification). Step generator: 1 step/div.
RANGE
Dimensions
Heigh t
Vertical Dellection Factor - Collector current is 1 ~Aldiv to 2
Aldiv . 20 steps in 1-2-S sequence (0.1 ~Aldiv with Xl 0 magnification). Emitter current Is I nA/div to 2 mA/div. 20 steps in 1-25 sequence. Step generator is 1 step/div.
Displayed Noise -
De.crlptlon - A plug-in fixture wth two sets of S pin test
terminals. the EMITIER GROUNDED or BASE GROUNDED
switch. LEFT-OFF-RIGHT switch. STEP GEN OUTPUT EXT
BASE or EMITIER Input and the OPER ATOR PROTECTION
BOX. The test terminals accept either the 6 pin universal
adapters. 3 pin adapters. or the high-power transistor adapters
with KELVIN contacts.
4%
3% ±
1 nA
500. 50 . or 5 nA
Voltage Mode - Step/offset amplitude range is 5 mY/step
(with XO.l MULT) to 2 V/step. 1-2-5 sequence. Max voltage
(steps and aiding ollset) is X20 AMPLITUDE switch setting. 40
V max. Max current (steps and aiding offset) is at least 2 A at
10 V. derating linearly to 10 mA at 40 V. Short circuit current
limiting is 20 rnA. 100 rnA. 500 rnA + 100%. - 0%: 2 A + 50% .
- 0%. Max opposing ollset voltage : Xl0 AMPLITUDE switch
setting . Max opposing current : limited at 5 rnA to 20 rnA.
Pulsed Steps rates.
STANDARD TEST FIXTURE
DEFLECTION CONTROLS
DI.play Acc uracies value.
kg
Ib
32 .0
70.S
z 48 .S
Z1 07
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Transistor adapter (013-0098-02). FET adapter (01 3-0099-02).
T03 adapter (013-01 00-01). T066 adapter (01 3-01 01-00). axial
lead diode adapter (013-0111-00). stud diode adapter (0130110-00). Kelvin sensors lor large and small plastic transistors
(013-0138-01). and protective cover (337 -11 94-00).
ORDERING INFORMATION
576 Curve Tracer with Standard
Test Fixture .•.•.....•••.•••.•..•...........•........ $8775
The 576 Option 01 deletes the parameter readout module but
maintains provisions for insertion of the module (020-0031-00)
at any time.
Option 01 ................................................................. Sub 5650
Auto Scale-Factor Readout Module
020-0031-00 ....................................... .......................... 51500
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORD AND PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 Universal Euro 220 V/ 16A ................ No Charge
Option A2 UK 240 V / 13A .................. .................. No Charge
Option A3 Australian 240 V / 1 OA ........................ No Charge
Option A4 North American 240 V / ISA ............... No Charge
Display Offset - 21 calibrated positioning increments. vertically or horizontally. of 0.5 div or 5 div with Xl 0 MAGNIFIER .
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
CRT and READOUT
Camera - See Oscilloscope/Camera Adapter chart in Camera
section of this catalog.
CRT - 6.S in rectangular with parallax-free. iliuminated graticule in centimeters. The calibrated area is 10 cm vertical by 10
cm horizontal (12 cm usable horizontal) . P31 Phosphor normally supplied .
Readout - The readouts. adjacen t to CRT. are digital indica·
tors of the following parameters : PER VERT DIV from 1 nAidiv
to 2 Aldiv : PER HOR IZ DIV from 5 mV/dlv to 200 V/div : PER
STEP from 5 nA/step to 2 Alstep. S mAistep to 2 V/step: 13
(B ETA) or gm . PER DIV lrom 1 ~ to SOO k calculated from
CU RRENT/DIV . Xl0 MAG. STEP AMPLITUDE, and XO.l
MULT.
Test Set-up Chart - Package 01 250 .
Order 070-0970-01 .................................. ...... ................... S1 0
172 Test Fix ture
176 Test Fix ture .
Socket Adapters
.. See page 304
.... See page 305
See pages 310 & 311
TRACER
PROGRAMMABLE TEST FIXTURE
TEK CURVE
172
Semi-Automated Test Fixture
Tests up to 11 Parameters
Reduces Total Test Time
U IY
f I
r: ~
57.
M.,"".m.-.1
6»
dul
/-:::~
~
/(//
~
/
l-:=- ~
'"
Pr og'.mm.bl~
r . sl F •• lure
The 172 Programmable Test Rxture, when used
with the TEKTRONIX 576 Curve Tracer, permits
the operator to program a sequence of tests of
J FETs, transistors, and diodes.
The 172 can greatly reduce total test time in
applications when more than one measurement is
made on a batch of many devices. Without the
172 all devices in the batch must be repeatedly
inserted in the test fixture , once for every measurement. However, the 172 Programmable Test
Rxture performs as many as eleven different
tests on each device.
The 172 sequences through the various tests
either automatically or manually. A variable RATE
control is provided to set the test sequence at a
rate which is best for the operator. New operators
require more time per test, but with experience
they will want to test at a faster rate . A front-panel
switch or an optional foot switch advances the
test in the manual mode.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
Displav Accurlcies - The same as the 576 Curve Tracer
with its included Standard Test Fixture.
Vertical Dellection Factor - Tests 1 and 2 (Collector or Emitter Current): 1 1 .A to 2 Ndiv in 20 steps. Tests 3. 4. and 8. 9.
10. 11 (Collector or Breakdown Current): 1 .A to 0.5 Ndiv in
18 steps. Tests 5. 6. 7 (Leakage Current): 1 nA to 0.5 Ndiv in
27 steps. All steps are in a 1-2-5 sequence.
TESTS THAT CAN BE
PERFORMED ON:
J
Te.t
'1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X.tr
HFE,
FET.
V,
Veell ."
V,E
HFE,
Vce1utl
PROGRAMMABLE CAPABILITIES
Diode.
VF
l oss,
Roslonl
Same as " 3.
I CEO or ICES,
I CE. with
external short
or resistor
I Clo
IGSS
IEIO
I.
VII'ICEO or
VII. ICE. with
external resistor
VF
V .. CES
VII'ICIO BVGSS
V.
V II'IEIO
PEAK CURRENT up to 10 A PEAK VOLTS up to 350 V.
Horlz range is 100 mV/div to 2 V/dlv (other conditions same as Test 1) .
Base Crlve: 100 nA to 110 rnA . When testing J FETs the base terminal is
shorted to the emitter terminal.
Collector Sweep : three fixed ranges ; 2 V. 5 V, and 20 V peak. Short circuit
currents on these ranges are 1.5 A, 2 A , and 150 rnA , respectivelv .
Collector Sweep Voltage - At least 2 V open circuit. or 1.5 A
short circuit. at 100 mV/div and 200 mV/div. At least 5 V open
CirCUit. or 2 A short circuit . at 500 mV/div. At least 20 V open
circuit . or 150 mA short circuit. at 1 V/div and 2 V/div.
Current Supply Accuracy -
Voltage SupplV Accuracv - 1 V to 500 V, accurate within 3%
:!: 300 mV with at least 0.5 rnA compliance.
Test Displav Time Range (Automatic) - 300 ms or less to at
least 2 s continuously variable. Manual operation from a frontpanel switch or optional foot switch.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are val.
Id over an ambient temperature range of + 10· C to + 40 ·C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Same as #5.
Same as #5.
Current Supply: 100 nA to llmA dc for breakdown voltage measurements to
500 V. Up to 100 mA dc for breakdown voltage measurements to 50 V.
Same as #8.
Same as "8.
Same as #8.
0.1 IlA to 11 mA , accurate within
2% ± 30 nA with up to 500 V compliance. 10 mA to 110 rnA .
accurate within 2% ± 30 nA with up to 50 V compliance. Increments of current are: 0.1 .A (from 0.1 .A to 11 .A). 1 .A (from
10 .A to 110 .A). 1O.A (from 100 .A to 1.1 mAl. loo.A (from
1 rnA to 11 rnA) and 1 rnA (from 10 rnA to 110 rnA).
Voltage Supply: 1 V to 500 V dc . Leakage current measurements to 0.5 rnA .
The most sensitive deflection factor is 1 nA/div.
'All of the test conditions for Test 1 are controlled by the 576 front-panel controls . Test 2 has the same conditions
as for Test 1 except the horizontal amplifier is connected to the emitter-base terminals , and the horizontal dellection factor Is controlled by the programming card.
For the remain ing tests the onlv 576 controls that are functional are the Polaritv and CRT controls such as INTENSITY, FOCUS , CISPLAY OFFSET.
304
I10nlOnlal Dellection Flctor - Test 1: 0.05 V/div to 200
V/div in 12 steps. Test 2 (Base Voltage): 100 mV/div to 2 V/div
in 5 steps. Input Z for Test 2. at least 100 MHz at 100 mV/div
and 200 mV/div. 1 Mil (within 2%) at 0.5 V/div. 1 V/div. and 2
V/div. Tests 3 and 4 (Collector Voltage): 100 mV/div to 2 V/div
in 5 steps. Tests 5 through 11 (Breakdown or Leakage Voltage): 100 mV/div to 50 V/div in 9 steps. All steps are in a 1-2-5
sequence.
Height
wI cover
em
in
16.5
6.5
Width
19.8
7.8
Cepth
31 .5
12.4
Weights
kg
Ib
Nel
5.2
11.5
::::8.2
::::IB.O
Shipping
Included Accessories - One protective cover. five programming cards . 250 programming card pins. five CRT overlay limit
cards.
Order 172 Programmable Test Fixture $3665
PULSED HIGH CURRENT
CURVE TRACER FIXTURE
TEK
176
Tests Power Transistors
Tests up to 200 Amps in Pulsed Mode
1000 Watt Capability
571
dul
Puls.-d H~h · Currenl
Tesl F •• lure
The 176 Pulsed High-Current Fixture provides the
576 Curve Tracer with pulsed collector operation
to 200 amps peak and pulsed base steps to 20
amps peak. The step offset, when selected , is
also pulsed. The pulsed operating mode allows
many tests previously considered impossible. For
example, small signal transistors can be tested
under pulsed collector breakdown conditions
without overdissipation. The 176 Test Fixture fits
in place of the 576 Standard Test Fixture. The
collector pulse is slaved to the 576 in regard to
width and repetition rate.
The pulse width is selected by depressing the
300 II-S or 80 II-S pushbutton on the 576 Mainframe
(usually, 300 II-S should be selected). The rep rate
is automatically set when the 176 is inserted in
the mainframe. Rep rate is also dependent on
power-line frequency. The five highest VERTICAL
CURRENT/DIV (0.1 A/div to 2 A/div) of the 576
can be multiplied X10 by actuation of the XlO
VERT pushbutton on the 176. This feature enables viewing of up to a 200 amp peak display.
The five highest STEP GENERATOR AMPLITUDE
base current steps of the 576 (10 mA to 200 mAl
can be multiplied X10 by actuation of the X10
STEP pushbutton on the 176. This feature enables the pulsed base step generator on the 176
to provide up to a 20 amp base step (tenth step).
80th XlO VERT and XlO STEP pushbuttons provide inputs to the fiberoptic readout to display
actual values.
Width -
CHARACTERISTICS
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
COLLECTOR SUPPLY (PULSED)
A mbient Temperature - Performance characteristics are val Id over a temperature range of DoC to + 40 D C.
300 " s or 80 "s determined by 576.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Repetition Rate -
Power-hne frequency .
Po larity -
determined by 576 polarity con trol.
., or
Amplitude - Ranges are 15. 75. 350 V nominal. controlled by
MAX PEAK VOLTS SWitch on 576. Current (minimum available
al low line Into shorted load) IS 15 V range . 200 A : 75 V range .
40 A : 350 V range . 8 A .
Max Peak WaHs - Three Illuminated push buttons select 10.
100. tOOO W max peak power
Di mensi ons
He ight
Width
Dep th
We ights
Net
Sh i pp i ng
em
11.7
20 .1
29.0
kg
5 .8
8 .2
in
4.6
7 .9
11.4
Ib
12.8
18.0
STEP GENERATOR
Included Accessories - T036 adapter (013-0112-00):stud
diode adapter (013-0110-00) : protective shield (337 - 1194-00).
Current Ranges (Xl0 STEP selected ) - Step-Offset Amplitude Range IS 100 mA to 2 A . 5 steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Max
Current (Steps and Aiding Offset) IS X200 576 AMPLITU DE
seiling or 20 A . whichever IS less. Max Voltage (Steps and
Aiding Offset) IS at least 5 V up to lO A and 2 V up to 20 A.
Order 176 Pulsed High-Current
Fixture .. ................................................ $4145
576 Offset Multiplier setting
Step Rate -
0 to Xl00 576 AMPLITU DE SWitch
Power-hne frequency.
Pulsed Steps -
300 "s or 80 "s wide.
Step /Offset Polarity - The STEP GEN polarity IS the same as
the COLLECTOR SUPPLY polarity. Step polarity may be Inverted by actua ting the INVERT pushbutton.
Accuracy (Current steps includ ing offset) - Incremental IS
WIthin 50 0 between any two steps . Within 1 O ~O With XO.l STEP
MULT . Absolute IS wlthm 3°'0 of total output :t 1% of one step
or wlth,n 3°'0 of one step. whichever IS greater.
VERTIC AL AMPLIFIER
Dellection Factor (X 1 0 VERT selected) A/dlv . 5 steps In a 1-2-5 sequence.
1 A/dlv to 20
STORAGE AND NON-STORAGE
TRACER SYSTEMS
TEK CURVE
577
Test Two- and Three- Terminal
Discrete Semiconductors
Storage Capability
Power Capability up to 100 Watts
The 577 CUNe Tracer System, when used with
the 177 Standard Test Fixture, is a smaller and
lighter configuration that retains many of the
important features and performance of the 576.
The 577 also accepts the 178 Linear IC Test
Fixture. The major features that separate the 577
from the 576 are storage and the emphasis on
low current measurements.
306
The 577's storage CRT may be used to overlay
the characteristic CUNes of one device on top of
the stored characteristics of another. Dot displays
(generated during high current pulsed testing or
during very low current testing under dc conditions) can be transformed into complete characteristic CUNes by simply moving them across the
CRT while in the storage mode. A good example
of a dot display occurs in op amp testing because the open-loop 3 dB bandwidth of many op
amps is so low that the CUNes must be plotted
slowly. linear ICs such as op amps may be
tested with the 577 by using the 178 Linear IC
Test Fixture (see page 308).
In the 577/177 CUNe Tracer System several features facilitate low current measurements. They
include: small current sensing resistors (which
result in less capacitive looping), current sensing
that always takes place in the collector supply
lead (which permits measurements on three- terminal active devices at the lowest current ranges
and eliminates the need for a correction to the
horizontal deflection factor) , and a display filter
(which reduces vertical deflection noise).
Although the 577/177 Collector Supply has lower
power capability (the 576 can deliver approximately 2.2 times as much power to the device
under test), approximately the same test current
is available, 10 A continuous peaks at line frequency. The 577/177 provides its highest currents
at a lower voltage than does the 576.
TEK
STANDARD TEST FIXTURE
Other innovations in the 577/177 Curve Tracer are
an emitter-base breakdown position on the lead
selector switch, availability of approximately 95
steps from the step generator, an uncalibrated
bias supply, independent magnifiers that increase
resolution on either or both CRT axes, and a
beam finder.
CHARACTERISTICS
All characterlsllCS are for the 577 Curve Tracer Mainframe operating with a 177 Standard Test Fixture.
COLLECTOR SUPPLY
Vertical Dellection Factor - Collector curren t IS 2 nA/d,v to 2
A/dlv . 28 steps In 1-2-5 sequence (0.2 nAl dlv to 0.2 Al d,v With
Xl0 magnifica lion).
Horizontal Dellection Factor - Collector vol ts: 50 mV/d,v to
200 V/d,v . 12 steps In a t -2-5 sequence (5 mV/dlv to 20 V dlv
With XtO magnlflcallon). Base volts : 50 mV /d,v to 2 V/dlv . 6
steps In a 1-2-5 sequence (5 mV/dlv to 0 .2 V/dlv With XtO
magnification). Step generator: 1 step/div (0 .1 step/dlv With
Xl0 magnifica lion).
Automatic Scale Factor Readout - Change In deflection fa c~
tor IS IndICated by hghts behind the knob skirt when using Xl0
MAG
Automatic Positioning - Trace (or spot) IS automatically POSIlIoned when Collector SUPPlY polarity is changed when uSing
the 177.
Modes - Five modes of collector supply operation are selectable. These are: ac at line frequency . positive full wave rectified . negallve full wave rectified , positive dc. or negative dc .
Display Invert -
Voltage selected
Display Filler - Selectable low pass filter reduces vertical
nOise for easier high sensitivity measurements.
The vOltage is variable to the max peak volts
Max Peak Volts 6 .5 V
Open C ircuit
25 V
Continuous
Current, Peak
10 A
2.5 A
Peak Pulse
Current
20 A
SA
100 V
0.6 A
Single control Inverts display and repositions
trace.
400 V 1600 V
0 .15 A
0 .04 A
1.25 A 0.30 A
0 .08 A
Series Resistance - 14 values from 0.12 !l to 8 M!l. Coupling
of series reSistance and voltage controls maintains max peak
power to the deVice under test when changing voltage ranges .
Safety Interlock - Protects operator from 100, 400. and 1600
volt ranges . Momentary button provides for overriding
Left-Right Switch - Selects left or right test connections. Off
In center poSllion. Test connection area accepts all
TEKTRONIX Curve Tracer adapters and protective cover. KelVin connections are prOVided for emitter and collector
terminals
Looping Compensation - Reduces display loops due to test
adapter capacitance and some devICe capacitance.
Variable Voltage Supply - Continuously variable bias supply
Irom - 12 V to + 12 V. Source resistance IS 10 kll or less.
OTHER CHARACTERiSTICS
Power Requirements - 100, 110, 120 V ac or 200 . 220. 240
V ac. all within ' 10%. 50 to 60 Hz. 155 W max at 110 V ac
and 60 Hz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Transistor adapter for most bipolar transistors and some MOS
FETs (013-0098-02) axial lead diode adapter with Kelvin sensIng terminals (013-0111 -00), protective shield for test connection area (337-1194-00).
CRT
CRT - Rectangular 6.5 in With an 8 x 10 div (1.27 cm/dlv)
paralla)( -free Internal gratlcule. Two display modules are available for the 577. The 01 display unit has a spht-screen storage
CRT With phosphor Similar to Pl . The 02 display unll has a
nonstorage CRT with P31 Phosphor. Accelerating potential is
3.5 kV
Beam Finder cule area.
Compresses off-screen trace to Within grati-
Ambient Temperature - Performance characteristics are valId over an ambient temperature of + 10' C to + 40' C.
Interlock.
ORDERING INFORMATION
577/01 Storage Curve Tracer
Mainframe .........•.•.... _.......................... $4850
577/02 Nonstorage Curve Tracer
Mainframe ........................................... $4195
Option 10. 10 x 10 em Gratlcule; available w ith either
storage or nonstorage mainframe __ .... __...... __ . ___ .. __ .. _. Add $65
177 Standard Test Fixture ..•...........•.. $1000
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
577/01 or 577/02
STEP GENERATOR
Current Mode - Step amplitude range is 5 nA/step (with
STEP XO.' ) to 200 mA/step. in a 1-2-5 sequence. Available
current is at least 2 A on the highest amplitude setting with 5 V
or more comphance. For opposing offset , available current is at
least 10 mA with voltage limited between 1 V and 5 V.
Voltage Mode - Step amplitude range IS 5 mY/step (with
STEP XO. 1) to 2 V/step . In a 1-2-5 sequence. Current is limited
between 100 mA and 200 mAo For opposing offset, available
current IS at least' 0 mA (at 0 V) derating to 0 mA at 20 V.
Accuracy _. Incremental: within 2% between steps. Absolute :
Within 3% of total output or AMPLITUDE setting, whichever is
greater. When STEP XO.l is actuated the absolute step accuracy is 4%.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORiES
177
Dimensions
em
in
em
in
Height
50.3
19.8
10.2
4.0
Width
22.4
8 .8
20.1
7 .9
Depth
58.4
23 .0
15.2
6 .0
Cart - Tek Lab Cart, Model 3 (see page 345).
Order Model 3 .. __ .... ___.... _..... _.. ____ .. ___ ... __ .__.. ______ ............... $425
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Te.t Sat-up Chart - Package of 250
Order 070-1839-00 ... _..... _.. _........ _... _...... _... ____ __..... _.. _..... $7.50
Net
18.1
40
1.1
2.5
Shipping
22.7
50
2.7
6
Weight.
178 Linear Te.t Fixture; see following page for complete description .... _. ___... ___ .. __ ._. __ .. ____ ... __ .. __ .... ____ ..... _.. _.... $2500
Cemera - C-5C, see page 322 for complete description
_............ __ ...... _.. _........ __ ... _____ .. _... ___ ..... _.. ___ ..... _... ____ ... ___________ $500
Davlce Adepter Socket.: see page 310 for complete
description.
Note: When the 577 and t 77 are ordered together the" combined shipping weight is: domestic ~ 53 Ib or ~ 24 kg .
Step Rate - Selectable at Xl (SLOW), X2 (NORM), or X4
(FAST) hne frequency .
Pulsed Steps - Steps can be gated for a duration of ~ 300 ~s
for testing at low duty cycle.
Step/Oil set Polarity Step Generator polarity
polarity. and positive in
pendently Inverted with
from the test fixture.
With NORM POLARITY selected. the
is the same as the Collector Supply
the ac position. Polarity can be indeSTEP/OFFSET POLARITY control or
Ollset - The amplitude of the entire set of steps can be offset
in a continuously variable and calibrated manner to either AID
or OPPOSE steps. Max range of offset is 10 full-amplitude
steps.
Step Family -
Repetitive or single family.
Number of Steps - Selectable from 1 to 10 full-amplitude
steps. Selectable up to ~ 95 steps when using STEP XO.l
multiplier.
177 TEST FIXTURE
DEFLECTION CONTROLS
Display Accuracies value.
As a percentage of highest on-screen
DI.play Mode
Normal
Magnified
Vert Collector Current
3% ±1 nA
4% ±1 nA
Horiz Collector Voits
3%
4%
Horiz Base Volts
3%
4%
Horiz Step Gen
4%
5%
Device Lead Selection - Switch provides six different lead
configurations . Three positions for EMITIER GROUNDED
measurements proVide STEP GEN . OPEN (OR EXT). and
SHORT base terminal connections. Two positions for BASE
GROUNDED measurements provide STEP GEN and OPEN
(OR EXT) emitter terminal connections. One position provides
for EMITIER BASE BREAKDOWN or leakage measurements
up to 25 volts.
307
TRACER
LINEAR IC TEST FIXTURE
TEK CURVE
Collector Supply - The 25 V and 100 V ranges 01 the Collec·
lor Supply (located on 577 Malnlrame) are available to Ihe 178
Tesl F,xlure Supply oUlput IS localed on Ihe 178 Iront-end
178
panel and on the deVice card. Automatic positioning With sup-
Tests Single, Dual, or Quad:
Operational Amplifiers, Comparators
Differential Amplifiers, Regulators and more
ply polarlly IS Inoperative when uSing the 178 Test Fixture. (See
577/177 characlerlSllCS lor Collector Supply perfc>rmance.)
Step Generator - All Ihe capabllliles 01 the Slep Generalor
(Iocaled on 577 Malnlrame) are available to Ihe t78 Test Fix·
ture Generator output
IS
locateo on the 178 front-end panel
and on the deVice card. (See 577 /177 characterls"cs lor Step
Generator performance.)
DUT Supplies Disconn ec t -
A Single SWitch dlsconnecls all
power to the deVice under test : both plus and minus Power
Supplies . Colleclor Supply. and Step Generator.
Function Switch -
Selects vertical and hOrizontal deflection
Signals and connection 01 the test signal to the deVice under
l est.
Since linear ICs are typically tested under very
low current conditions, the 577/178 Curve Tracer
System is ideally suited to the task. The 178
Linear IC Test Fixture provides the necessary
accurate low current measurement capability,
test cards set up the measurement function , and
the 577's storage CRT allows the operator to
transform the dot display (usually seen under low
current dc conditions) into a complete character·
istic curve by slowly sweeping the dot across the
CRT while in the Storage Mode.
A 577/178 Curve Tracer System is composed of a
577 Mainframe, 178 Linear IC Test Fixture, appro·
priate test cards (choose from three op amp
cards and two regulator cards), and the proper
socket adapter (see page 310) that interfaces the
system to the device under test.
Test cards, which slide into the 178, define the
measurement function of the 178 Test Fixture.
Two families of test cards are available: op amp
cards and regulator cards. Op amp cards are
used for testing standard and special op amps,
comparators, differential amplifiers, video amplifi·
ers, etc. Regulator cards are used for testing
positive and negative three· terminal voltage regu·
lators.
OP AMP CARDS
The Standard Op Amp Card is designed to test
devices that require single or dual power sup·
plies, have two (differential) high· impedance in·
puts, and a single output. Common measure·
ments include: offset voltage, positive and
negative input current, cmrr, gain, positive and
negative psrr, positive and negative supply cur·
rent , and collector supply current.
The Hardwire Card is designed for those appli·
cations where there is an advantage in preparing
individual cards for specific devices so that they
may be quickly switched to accommodate a
change in the type of device under test. The
Hardwire Card also offers a greater degree of
freedom to the knowledgeable designer in testing
special devices.
The Multiple Op Amp Card allows the operator
to test up to four devices in a single package by
simply operating a four·position switch. The four·
position switch selects the op amp (in a multiple
op amp package) or the selection of a linear IC to
be tested. The measurements performed are the
same as those available with the Standard Op
Amp Card.
Socket Adapters for Op Amp Cards - The
device under test socket on the Standard and
Multiple Op Amp Cards accepts several types of
socket adapters using the Amphenol·Bames
adapter system. This system accepts most of the
standard package configurations (T05, DIP, flat
pack, etc). Sockets for these cards are shown on
page 310.
THREE·TERMINAL REGULATOR
TEST CARD CHARACTERISTICS
Device Under Test Input Supply
Input Voltag e - Two ranges 0·30 V and 0·60 V.
0·30 V IS Within ± 2% ~ 200 mV 01 dial seltlng . and 0·60 IS
Within ± 2.5% ± 300 mV of dial setting.
Regulation -
Within 200 mV.
REGULATOR CARDS
There are two types of Regulator Cards, positive
and negative. These cards are used primarily in
measuring parameters of three·terminal voltage
regulators. Parameters measured include: output
voltage, load regulation , line regulation and ripple
regulation , and quiescent and common terminal
current.
Input Sweep Frequency -
Socket Adapters for Regulator Cards Socket adapters for both positive and negative
three·terminal regulators are the same as the
Kelvin Sensing Adapters used on the standard
curve tracer (see page 310).
010 10 1.25 rnA .
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL
DEFLECTION
(1·2-5 Sequence)
NORMAL
MAGNIFIED
I nput Voltage or
D. I nput Voltage
10 ",V/div
to 50 mV/d iv
1 ",V/div
to 5 mV/div
Accuracy
I nput Current
3%
40/0
50 pA/div
to 0.2 mAId Iv
5 pA/div
to 20 ",Aldlv
300 "s Pulsed Current -
Dc 101kHz .
5 rnA to 2 A.
Short Duration DC Current (One minute)
Supply Voltage
0-10
10 - 20
20 - 40
40-60
Current
700 rnA
350 rnA
300 rnA
120mA
Device Under Test Current Load -
5 mA to 2 A Within ± 3%
Device Under Test Comparison Output Dc Voltage Ac cura·
cy - 0· '0 V range wllhln ~ 1% ~ 20 mV : 0·100 V range wllhln
± 10f0 ± 150 mV .
Dimension.
Height
Width
Depth
Weights
Net
Shipping
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
em
in
11.4
4.5
20 .1
7.9
19.8
7.8
kg
Ib
1.5
3.3
3 .6
8.0
Included Accessories - Dual·in·line 16 pin IC socket (t36.
0442.00). Standard Op Amp Card with cover and ten patch
cords (013·0149·01), Interchangeable nomenclature panel for
function SWitch (333·1770.00).
3% ±50 pA
4% ±50 pA
Power Supply
Current
0.1 ",A/dlv
to 50 mA/dlv
10 nA/dlv
to 5 mA/dlv
Accuracy
3% ±0.1 ",A
4% ±0.1 ",A
ORDERING INFORMATION
178 Linear IC Test Fixture ................. $2500
Coliector Supply
Current
1 nAldlv
to 50 mAldiv
0.1 nAldlv
to 5 mA/div
Standard Op Amp Card - (One included with 178)
013.0 149.0 1 ........................................................... ,....... $275
3% ±1 nA
4% ±1 nA
Accuracy
Accuracy
AccuracIes are a percentage of hIghest on-screen values .
Hardwlre Card
013·0150.01 ................................................................... $125
Power Supplies -
Multiple Op Amp Card (013·0155·00) .......................... $450
Posilive and negative supplies are adjust.
able from 0 to 30 V . available current 15 at least 150 rnA With
adluslable currenilimiling. The voltage 01 both supplies can be
adjusted from a stngle calibrated control : accuracy is within 2%
~ 100 mV . Negallve supply can be independently adjusted by
an uncahbrated control.
Sweep Generator - A sinUSOidal signal controls the outpul .
common·mode Input. or the power supply vollages 01 Ihe de·
vice under test. The Irequency IS adjustable Irom 0.01 Hz to 1
kHz . amplitude IS adjustable up to 30 V peak .
Source Resistance - For Input resistor pairs, selectable 50 I!
10 k~! , 20 k~l . and 50 kll. or external resistors may be used.
When the vertical deflection factor is in one of the less sensitive
posItions . 1 mV through 50 mV/div , the Input resistance values
are 550 !! greater
Load Resistance -
S'x selectable load reSistors, 100 I!. 1 k!!,
2 kU, 5 kH , 10 kU , 20 kil , and 50 kU , or external resistors may
be used.
308
Z ero - Single pushbutton provides a zero reference to the
CRT display and In certain functions , nulls out oft set voltage in
order to measure l:l Input V on the vertical display axis.
POlltlve Regulator Card
013.0147.00 ................................................................... $695
Negative Regulator Card
013·0148.00 ................................................................... $695
Standard Op Amp Card
Positive Regulator Card
CURVE TRACER PLUG-INS
FOR OSCILLOSCOPES
TEK
7CT1N
5CT1N
SCT1 Nand 7CT1 N
Tests Semiconductor Devices
to 0.5 W
10 nA/ div to 20 mA/div Vertical
Deflection Factors
0.5 V/div to 20 V/div Horizontal
Deflection Factors
Easy to Operate
7CT1N~
Curve Tracer
The 7CTl N Curve Tracer is a plug-in unit for use
in TEKTRONIX 7()()() Series Oscilloscope Systems
and the 5CT1N Curve Tracer is a plug-in unit for
use in TEKTRONIX 5000 Series Oscilloscope Systems. Both are for displaying characteristic
curves of small-signal semiconductor devices to
power levels up to 0.5 walls. The plug-ins operate
in a vertical compartment of the respective
mainframes. The 7CT1N also operates in the
horizontal compartments of the 7()()() Series Oscilloscope Systems.
CHARACTERISTICS
COLLECTOR /ORAIN SUPPLY
X1
X10
Horizontal
Volts/Div
0.5
Voltage Range
0- 7.5 V 0- 30 V
0- 75 V
0- 300 V
240 rnA
24 rnA
6 rnA
Maximum
Curr e nt
2
Max Open Circuit Voltage current . wlthm 30°'0
60 rnA
5
20
W ithin "" 20% Max short CircUi t
Series Resistance - Automatically selected with hOrizontal
V dlv sWllches Peak power IS 0.5 W or less depending upon
con trol settings.
High Voltage Warning - When the horizontal V/dlv sWItch IS
In the Xl 0 poSItion. a flashing warnIng light appears on the
front panellndlcahng that dangerous voltages may eXis t at the
lest termmals
STEP GENERATOR
Transistor Mode - Step amplitude range IS 1 .A/step to 1
mA/step. 1-2-5 sequence Max current (steps plus aIding offset) IS X 15 amplitude setllng . Max voltage (steps plus aIdIng
ollset) IS at least 13 V Max opposIng offset current IS at least
X5 amplItude setting
FET Mode - Step amplitude range IS 1 mY/step to 1 V/step.
1-2-5 sequence . Voltage amplitude (steps plus aiding offset) IS
X 15 amplitude settIng . 13 V max Source Impedance IS 1 k!l :t
1%
Accuracy -
Incremental. wlth,n 3° 0 between steps Absolute,
wIthin :t (300 , XO 3 amplitude settIng.)
Step Potarity - The step generator polarity IS the same as the
collector/drain supply In the tranSistor mode and opposing In
the FET mode
Number of Steps tween and 10
a
Selectable In one-step Increments be-
CU"VI T".CUI
____________
A
B
c
D
~
Curve Tracer
Offset - Selectable from 0 to 5 steps . Polarity aids or opposes the step polarity .
Vertical Deflection Factors - 10 nNdlv to 20 .Ndlv wIth the
- 1000 control actIVated. 10 .Ndlv to 20 mNdlv In the Xl
mode
Vertical Display Accuracy - Within S O~ In the X1 mode.
WithIn 5'1'0 ± 0 2 nA per dIsplayed horizontal V when In the
- 1000 mode
Horizontal Deflection Factors or 20 V
Selectable: 0.5 V. 2 V. 5 V.
5CT 1 N Horizontal Display Accuracy - WIthIn 5"0 plus the
deliectlon factor accuracy of the plug-In beIng driven. The plugIn would be a vertical or hOrizontal amplifier (such as the
TEKTRONIX 5000 Series Plug -Ins) wIth a 50 mV/dlv deflectIOn
lactor and an Input R of at least 50 kll and would be used In the
hOrizontal compar tment of the 5000 Senes Oscllioscope
Mainframe
7CT 1N Horizontal Display Accuracy - WIthIn 5% plus the
deflection factor accuracy of the plug-In beIng dnven The plugIn would be a vertical or honzontal amphfler (such as the
TEKTRONIX 7000 Series Plug-Ins) wIth a 100 mV/dlv defleclion factor and an Input R of at least 50 kll and would be used
In the honzontal compartment of the 7000 Senes OSCIlloscope
Mainframe
OTHER CHARACTERISTtCS
Ambient Temperature Id from O' C to + 50 · C.
Performance cha ractenshcs are val-
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
5CT1N
Dimensions
Length
7CT1N
em
In
em
In
14.5
30.5
12.0
36.8
Width
6.6
2.6
7.1
2.8
Height
12.7
5.0
12.7
5.0
Weight
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Net
0 .8
1.8
1.1
2.5
Shipping
1.8
4.0
2.7
6.0
Included Accessories - Tesl Adapter (013-0128-00) wIth
two sets of test terminals. one with lOS basmg and the other
wIth TOl8 baSing .
ORDERING INFORMATION
5CT1 N Curve Tracer ............................. $785
7CT1 N Curve Tracer ........................... $1305
E
3 PIN ADAPTERS
The following accessories may be used with any
of the TEKTRONIX Curve Tracer products. They
do not have Kelvin sensing contacts.
A. T05 or T018 Transistor AdapterOrdar (013-0128-00) ........................................................ $22
B. Blank Adapter - For mounting special sockets.
Order (013-0073-00) ........................................................ $18
C. T03 or TOSS Trenslstor Adapter Order (013·0070-01) ........................................................ $40
D. Diode Test Adapter - Holds axial-lead diodes.
Order (013-0072-00) ........................................................ $55
E. Diode Test Adapter - Magnetically hokls steet axial-lead
diodes.
Order (013-0079-00) ...................................................... $150
TRACER
SOCKET ADAPTERS
TEK CURVE
'r
••
B
A
B
A
..
C
• f','
(l)
w I> :;
i= i=
..:
US
-'
w
a: Zw
I~ l
I)"
\
e-- -----
..---v-
\
,/
v
I
/
I
J652
J6501
J6503
/
.. .
~~
/
/
. l(Tv ~
<:
/
400
350
~65
500
450
\
i\ \
1\
\ \
\
5 \
"'"~
~
I~
600
550
\
J650
/'
40
0
..---
r\\
..--- .-::::
,/
60
If)
CU~VE
'1"\
J6502
J6 12
20
-erE P,HOTOP C /'
:0.w
-- - --- -- - - --
-
- --
!"
700
650
-- - --
,
800
750
900
850
1000
1100
950
1050
WAVELENGTH-NANOMETERS
(All curve heights adjusted to 100% for clarity)
313
PHOTOMETER/
RADIOMETER
TEK DIGITAL
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
Ambient Temperature - Nonopera ting, - 50 ' C to
operating , - 15' C to + 40 · C.
Altitude -
Nonoperating , to 50,000 It ; operating , to 15,000 It
Humidity - Operating and storage, 5 cycles (120 hr) to 95%
relative humidity at 40 · C. Referen::ed to MIL· E-16400F.
Vibration - Operating, 15 minutes along each of the 3 major
axes at a total displacement of 0.025 in pop (4 g's) from 10 to
55 to 10Hz in 1 minute cycles. Hold for 3 minutes at 55 Hz. All
malor resonances must be above 55 Hz .
With probe and battery pack Installed.
In
Photometer/ Radiometer without Probes
J1 6
JIG
JIG
J16
115 V, 60 Hz Battery Charger ............................... $1060
Opt. 01 230 V, 50 Hz Battery Charger .......... No Charge
Opt. 03 11 5 V, GO Hz ... ,................................. No Charge
Opt. 04 230 V, 50 Hz ..................................... No Charge
tFor a J16 with metric readout , specify Option 02 in addition to
above ordering information . No additional charge. Option 02
probes are required for Option 02 JIG's.
J 16-TV Package - For TV color monitor set·up. The package
includes J16 Battery·Operated Photometer, J6502 Irradiance
Probe , Ught Occluder, Probe Extension Cable.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
ORDERING INFORMATION
+ 75' C;
cm
Heigh t
2,4
6 ,0
W idth
4 ,6
12,3
OrderJ16-TV for 115 V, GO Hz battery charger .......... $1670
'Refer to Readout Units of Probe Charcertistics chart.
Order J 16-TV Option 01
for 230 V, 50 Hz battery charger ....................................... NC
Length
8.0
20.3
Weights (epprox)
Ib
kg
Net
3.3
1.5
PROBES
Domestic Sh ipp i ng
5,0
2.3
10.0
4 ,5
Probe with Option 02 required for metric readout Option 02
JIGs. No additional charge.
Export·packed
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
For Battery Operated J16 shoulder strap, manual.
For Ac Operated J 16 manual.
For a J1G·TV with metric readout , specify Option 02 in addition
to above ordering information. No additional charge.
Actual spectral curve 01 any probe is available on initial order,
at additional cost of Option 05 ................................. Add $90
Battery pack , battery charger,
Ac power supply , shoulder strap,
J6501 Illuminance Probe .................. ...................... ........ $520
J6502 Irradiance Probe ................................................... $520
J6503 8 ' Luminance Probe ....................................... ..... $520
J6504 Uncorrected Probe ............................................... $490
J6505 LED Probe, includes LED adapter ....................... 5580
J6511 Illuminance Probe cosine corrected .................... $540
42 in Probe Extender Cable - Connects J16 and probe.
Order 012-0414-02 ........................................................ $100
Spare Battery Pack Order 016-0539-01 ............ ..................... ....................... $135
Cables up to 30 It in length ........ Available on special order.
Analog & BCD Output .................. Available on special order.
Light Occluder - For TV color monitor balancing.
Order 0 16-0305-00 .............................. ............................. $22
Filter Holder - Mounts one·inch diameter filters , of up to 3/8
Inch thickness, to probes (except J6511 , J6512, J6514, J6523).
Order 016-0527-00 ........................................................... $22
LED Adapter - Included with J6505Order 014-0047 -00 ...................... ..................................... $80
Ac Power Supply - Allows JIG to be used without batteries.
Order 119-0404-00 115 V, 60 Hz ......................... ........ 5200
Order 119-0404-01 230 V, 50 Hz ................................. $215
When ordering a battery pack for your ac·powered J16, also
order one of the chargers below.
Battery Charger - 115 V, GO Hz
Order 119-0375-02 .......................................................... 545
Battery Charger - 230 V, 60 Hz
Order 119-0375-03 ... .. ..................................................... $50
Within the basic limitations of the silicon sensors
and the J16 design, a number of modifications
are possible. Contact your local Tektronix Sales
Office or Representative regarding special appli·
cation requirements .
Please use the retum card to request data sheet and applica.
tion notes describing the use of the JIG.
J6512 Irradiance Probe .................................................. 5545
J6523 I ' Luminance Probe .......................................... $1500
• An additional decade of sensitivity is included and is usable if
the J 16 IS carefully zeroed and used at a relative stable
temperature.
to.OOOOI to 199.9 candelas when used with 014-0047-00 LED
adapter or at 3.8 in source-ta-sensor spacing. Luminous intensity readings 01 higher intensity light sources may be easily
made at correspondingly greater distances using the formula :
Footcandles x d' ~ candelas where d is the distance lrom the
source to the sensor in feet. (For metriC readings use lux x
d2 = candelas where d is distance from the source to the sensor
in meters .)
314
TEK
ACCESSORIES
CONTENTS
Cameras & Adapters ....
................ 316
Probes ...
......... 324
................... 338
Probe Accessories
Isolation Accessories .. ...... ............. . .......... 340
Carts .....................
....... 344
.......... 346
Adapters and Connectors
Digital Accessories ........................... .
346
...... 349
Mounting Accessories .............. .
Viewing Accessories ................. ..
. 350
-
"7
•
•
J
For accessory products, you can order direct by calling 800-547-1845. In Alaska, Hawaii and Oregon call collect (503) 627-5402 .
3 15
REFERENCE
TEK CAMERA
Choosing a
Tektronix
Camera ...
an overview of
Tektronix Camera
Families
A camera can be a key part of your measurement
system . It allows you to capture Single events and
document your results , and it helps you communicate your results with clarity and credibility. The
following pages give information to help you
select a camera well suited to your needs.
MOUNTING
The table on page 319 indicates the camera
adapters required for most Tektronix Instruments
and a few by other manufacturers. In some
cases, adapters are available from HewlettPackard or Dumont to mount Tektronix Cameras
to their instruments.
LENSES
Tektronix Camera lenses differ mainly in light
gathering ability, magnification, and field of view.
Speed The f-number of a lens inversely
signifies its aperture area and light gathering
ability. For example: the aperture area of an f/1.4
lens is four times that of an f/2.8 lens of the same
magnification and gathers four times the light.
The relative light gathering ability of all lenses
used in Tektronix Cameras is referenced to the
f/1.9, 0.85 magnification lens which is arbitrarily
rated at 1.0. For recording a stored or stable
recurrent CRT display, a lens as slow as the f/16
type used in the C-5C Camera is adequate.
However, to record a fast , dim , single-sweep
trace , you may need a lens as fast as the f/1.2
types used in the C-31B and C-51 Cameras.
Field of View The description for each
camera includes a statement of its field of view;
this signifies how large a CRT display the camera
can fully record . It is determined by the combined
effects of the magnification and angular field of
view of the lens, any field-limiting apertures in the
camera adapter, camera body, film holder, and
the image area of the film .
Magnification - Modern optical technology has
made possible wide-aperture, wide-angle, flatfield lenses with short focal length for more
compact cameras. To realize their inherent low
distortion, high resolution , and uniform focus,
these fixed focal length lenses must be used at
their design center magnification.
316
VIEWING
Operating such lenses at a different magnification tends to compromise their important performance characteristics. For this reason , most
Tektronix Cameras are designed for use at one
lens magnification . One exception is the C-30B
Camera which has a magnification range of 0.7 to
1.5 (at some increase in distortion at the magnification extremes) to accommodate several portable oscilloscopes that have displays ranging in
size from 3.8 x 6.3 cm to 8 x 10 cm.
Except for the C-30 Series, all Tektronix Cameras
have a viewing port which provides a binocular
view of the CRT. All Tektronix Cameras, except
the C-5C, are hinge mounted and can be swung
aside to allow a wide-angle view of the CRT. The
light-weight C-5C can easily be slipped off the
CRT bezel to view the CRT. The C-28 and C-50
Series Cameras have an off-axis viewing hood
that accommodates eyeglasses for a comfortable
binocular view of the CRT display while excluding
ambient light.
The rated magnification of a lens signifies its
image-to-object ratio .
FILMS
For maximum resolution , the lens should produce
the largest complete image possible within the
image area of the film . The film most widely used
for oscilloscope trace recording is Polaroid Type
107 pack film which has an image area of 73 x 95
mm . In most cases, the magnification is selected
to provide the largest possible complete image of
a particular display. An exception is in high writing
speed applications where a 0.5 magnification lens
is usually used to achieve higher writing speed by
concentrating the trace light in a smaller area of
the film .
The three types of backs used on Tektronix Cameras accommodate most of the films that are
used for CRT trace recording . These include
sheet films, roll films , and pack films .
Polaroid films are the most convenient to use.
They offer the advantages of development in seconds to a finished dry print with wide spectral
response , good resolution, and high sensitivity.
ASA ratings do not necessarily give a true indication of how a film will respond in CRT recording
due to the narrow spectral output range of most
phosphors and different spectral sensitivity of
various film types.
SHUTTERS
There are two types of shutters: mechanical and
electrical.
Many different types of Polaroid film are available
in rolls , packs, and 4 x 5 inch single-sheet packets. The types most used in oscilloscope and
monitor photography are types 107, 612, 47, 57,
084 and 667 .
Mechanical shuHers are simple to operate and
are economical. They are actuated by pressure
on a release mechanism.
Electrical shuHers permit remote , automatic,or
manual release and offer higher reliability. They
may be actuated by an insulated switch closure.
Technical assistance with Polaroid film and back
questions or problems is available directly from
The Polaroid Corporation . Call (800) 225-1618 toll
free within U.S.
The C-51 and C-53 electric shutters require + 15
V, normally supplied by a 7000 Series Oscilloscope. An optional battery pack is available for
situations where one of these cameras is used on
a non-7ooo Series instrument . These shutters can
be actuated by a switch closure to ground . The
C-28 Camera requires + 15 volts at 750 mA for
operation. The shutter may be actuated with
either a switch closure or TIL logic.
Manufacture of PolarOid 4 t a ROLL film , ASA 10.000. has been
discontinued . Polaroid 612 PACK film . ASA 20.000 _ is now
available for most high speed applications.
BLACK BODY COLOR STANDARD
All Tektronix Cameras are supplied with a standard black body finish .
MAXIMUM MAGNIFICATION TO RECORD ENTIRE SCREEN
SCREEN SIZE
Polaroid pack
and roll film
4x5
sheet film
6 x 7 cm format
roll film (70 mm ,
120, 220, etc.)
5 x 6.3 cm
7.2 x 9 cm
8 x 10 cm
9.76 x 12.2 cm
1.0
1.0
0.85
0.67
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.85 or less
1.0
0.67
0.67
not recommended
0.5 magnification is used for high speed recording , since reducing the size of image increases its
brightness.
CAMERA
REFERENCE
TEK
PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING SPEED
Photographic writing speed signifies the ability of
a particular oscilloscope/camera system to provide a useful photographic record of a fast singlesweep trace. It is stated as an oscilloscope
performance characteristic and is expressed in
cm/I-'s or cm/ns. It is designed to answer the
question , "What is the speed of the fastest singlesweep trace the system can record?" All statements of writing speed must specify the measurement conditions, including the CRT phosphor
and film used, and the definition of a readable
trace image.
Film fogging is a technique for increasing the
maximum sensitivity of photographic film by giving it a short exposure to dim, diffuse light. The
Tektronix Writing Speed Enhancer is designed to
fill this need.
Polaroid Type 107, 3()()0 speed pack film was exposed to the
single-trace display of a pulse waveform with a fast rising
leading edge too dim to produce a developable image.
The Enhancer installs in minutes, and can be
triggered in three ways ; by a pushbutton on the
control box; remotely , with a switch closure to
ground (such as provided by the camera-shutter
x sync switch); or by the oscilloscope-sweep +
gate.
Thus, the film can be fogged before, after, or
while the sweep occurs. The techniques are
respectively called pre fogging , post-fogging , and
simultaneous fogging . Of these modes, simultaneous fogging provides the greatest gain in
writing speed . Automatic , simUltaneous fogging is
easily achieved by triggering the Enhancer with
the oscilloscope-sweep + gate.
Film from the same paclc was exposed to the same single-trace
waveform and simultaneously to light from a Wrigitng Speed
Enhancer. The Enhancer light supplied the additional phOtons
needed at the weak film development centers formed by the dim
leading edge, to produce a visible Image of the entire waveform.
POLAROID FILM
RELATIVE FILM WRITING SPEED
ASA
Equivalent
Speed
Type
3.2
'Not available al thiS lime
•• P~a rold 612 PACK him, ASA 2Q,OCn IS now available With faster wri ting rate than prevIOUs 4 10 ROLL film Wnllng rate speclflca ftons are
nol comptete atihtSilme
--
The more commonly used films for each type of camera back are listed below.
POLAROID FILMS
CRT Recording Uses
Oevelopmen
Film
Type
ASA
Equivalent
Speed
611'
6t2-·
665
107
084"
667':
108·
668·
200
20.000
75
3000
3000
3000
75
75
42
47
46L
146L
200
3000
800
200'"
100
51
52
55
55 PIN
57
58'
320·"
115
Tunosten
400
Time
(Second.
at 75"F)
45
30
30
15
15
30
60
60
15
15
130
30
15
t5
Resolution
(Line Pairs/mm)
Repetitive Stored
Characteristics
PACK FILMS
Actual im~e .ize 7.3 cm x 9.5 cm.l3 1/4 x 4 1/4 i~
POSitive Print
20
Low Contrast, wide gray scale
POSitive Pnnt
20-25
HIQh Contrast
Neoatlve
160-180
M6Idum Contrast wide arav scale
X
X
Postltlve Print
20
Medium Contrast
X
X
POSitive Print
16
Medium Contrast
X
X
POSitive Pnnt
16
Medium Contrast
X
X
Positive Pnnt
15-17
Color Balanced for 5500' K
X
POSitive Pnnt
15-17
Color Balanced for ElectroniC Flash
X
ROLL FILM - Actual image .ize 7.3 x 9.5 cm.i3 1/4 x 41 /4 il1l146L and 146L are 6_2 x 8.3 cm
positive Pnnt
25-28
Medium Contrast wide gray scale
X
X
Positive Pnnt
Medium Contrast
20-22
X
X
X
X
POSitive Trans
35-40
Medium Contrast
PosItive Trans
40-50
H'9h Contrast. Blue Sensitive
X
Format
20
15
60
Single
Sweep
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
Positive PrJnt
POSitive Pnnt
PosItive PrJnt
50
3000
75
TV Type Scintilla- Graphics
(Gray lion Type AlphaScale) Medical Numeric
Neoatlva
POSitive PrJnt
Positive Pnnt
°No coating reqUired
"Preferred for OSCilloscope photography.
... Daylight rating.
SHEET FILMS
Actual Image .Ize 8.9 x 11.4 cm t4 x 5 i~
28-32
H'9h Contrast, Blue Sensitive
35-40
22-25
t60
20
15-17
lMedlum Contrast, Wide Qray scale
Medium Contrast, wlde.Jll"'!Y.scale
Medium Contrast
CoIOt'-Balanced to 55OO ' K
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A limited quantity of ROLL film camera backs IS available for
customers who Wish to use roll films listed above. Contact your
TektroniX Representative for information.
317
TEK
RECOMMENDED
CAMERAS
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
(Where two or more cameras are recommended, compare features and specs to optimize for your application.)
Single Shot
or
Low Rep Rate
Stored, Stable
or
Repretitive
453,453A,454, 454A, 485
C-31B
C-30B
455,465,465B,468,475,475A
C-31B
C-30B
C-534
C-30B
Oscilloscope or Display Device
7104,7313,7503,7504,7514, 7613, 7623A,
7633 , 7704A, 7904, R7903, 7834, 7844, 7854,
528 4, 544 4, T922R4, 602 4, 606 4, 606A4,
606B4, 607 4, 607A4, 492
C-51
Low
Cost
C-5C Opt 02
C-5C Opt 01
577,601 , 603, 603A,604,604A,605,608,
624,634, 1420 Series, 5100 Series,
5403/040,5403/041 , 5440,5444,
7403N, 7603, 7603N11S,
Telequipment 083
C-28"
C-59A
C-30B
C-5C
601,602,603,603A,604,604A,605, 606,
606A , 607 , 607A,608, 624, 634
C-28"
C-59A
C-5C Opt 01
432,434, 464,466
C-30B
C-5C Opt 02
T900,exceptT922R
C-5C Opt 03
2200 Series
C-5C Opt 04
2300 Series Field Service Oscilloscopes
C-5C""
308 Data Analyzer Field Service Instrument
C-5C""
305,314,326, 335,422,491,1502, 1503,
SC 502, SC 503, SC 504
C-31B
C-30B
503, 504, 530/540/550 Series, 575, 647, 647A
C-534
520A, 521A, 522A, 576, 5030, 5031 , 1480 Series
C-59A
600, 5100,5400, 7000 Series
C-5C Opt 01
502A,529,565
C-59A
C-30B
HP 5 in Round CRP
C-534
HP 8 x 10 cm rectangular CRT; except 1740A and
1741 A
C-53
C-30B
HP 1700 Series
C-30B
Philips 8 x 10 cm portables
C-534
C-5C Opt 01""
HP 1332A4, HP 1333A4, HP 1335A4
C-59A
C-30B
C-5C
"Note: The C-28 Camera is intended for, and particularly suited to, 600 Series OEM measurement applications.
Contact your Tektronix Representative for information.
"'Note: The C-5C can be hand held to obtain photo, but will not provide lab quality results.
'Graticule is not illuminated and will not photograph.
'Graticule is not illuminated and will not photograph except when CRT is in the stored mode.
'A corrector lens is required to increase camera 's field of view so that the full 8 x 10 cm CRT display area can be recorded . The Camera should be changed from standard to option 01 , to do this order
016·0301·01 for the standard C-30 or 016-0269-04 for the standard C-31 . These adapters include the adapter and corrector lens.
'C-51 and C-53 cameras require Battery Pack 016-0270-02 for power when not used with 7000 Series Oscilloscopes.
'Available from Hewlett-Packard . See HP catalogue for additional compatability information and prices .
• Only the C-5C and C-59A Cameras can entirely record the 6 1/2 inch CRT display without cropping.
'The C-59A is suitable lor the standard model Type 603 but It cannot photograph the non-illuminated graticule of the Option 01 Model.
8The C-59A also mounts directly onto the Type 604 but it cannot photograph the non-illuminated graticule of the standard model.
'Does not mount on scope, must be hand held.
,ORequires 016-0288-01 adapter and correclor lens.
Adapter part numbers for cameras are available upon request. Contact your local sales ollice for more information.
CAMERA ADAPTER PART NUMBERS & PRICES
016-0263-00
$70
70
016-0269-04"
85
016-0217-00
50
016-0295-01
55
016-0223-01
016-0224 -01
55
016-0299-00
70
016-0225-04
105
016-0301 -01'"
55
016-0226-01
016-0306-01t
70
80
016-0327-01
016-0228-01
165
85
016-0243-00
70
016-0342-00
225
016-0244-00
016-0357-01tt
17
70
016-0248-01
80
016-0358-01 ttt
17
016-0249-04 •
80
016-0359-01 tttt
17
318
'(Included with C-50 Series Cameras)
"(Adapter with lens included w ith C-31 B Opl 01 Cameras)
'''(Adapter with lenses included with C-30B Opt 01 Cameras)
t(lncluded with C-30B , C-31B Cameras)
tt(lncluded with C-5C and C-5C
see page 322
Opt 01 Cameras)
for extra
ttt(lncluded with C-5C Opt 03
viewing doors
Cameras)
and flash units
tttt(lncluded with C-5C Opt 02/
and Opt 04 Cameras)
CI2-CI9-CI3-C27- Pack Film Back
These cameras are no longer produceci by Tektronix . However
due to customer need for a Pack Film Back these are now
available. The Pack Film Back accepts to Polaroid Pack Film.
122-0671 -01 ................ ..........•....•................................... $210
Adapters
C12 to 7000 Series 016-0299-00
.............................. $70
C12 to 530, 540 , 550 Series 016-0226-01 ..............
$70
C12 to 560 Series rectangular CRTs 016-0217-00 ......... $70
CAMERA
ADAPTERS
TEK
CAMERA ADAPTER SELECTION GUIDE
ADAPTER PART NUMBER
C-SC
COSO Series
and C-28
C-30 Series
5284, 577,2 601 4, 6024, 603,6,7 604,6,8, 604A6,8, 605 4, 606 4, 606A4
607A4, 608 6, 624 6, 634 6, 1420 Series4, 5100 Series,1,6 5403/ 040,6,,4
5403/041 4, 54404,65441 4,65444 4,67104, 7313,2 7403N,6 7503, 7504,
7514, 7603,67603N11S, 7613, 7623A, 7633, 7704A, R7903, 7904, 7854
7834, 7844, T922R4, HP1332A4, HP1333A4, HP1335A4, TELEQUIPMENT
083 6, 492
016-0357-01
016-0249-04
016-0248-01
432,1 434,2 455, 464, 465B, 466, 468, 475, 475A
016-0359-01
T900 Series except T922R
016-0358-01
2200 Series
016-0359-01
308,92300 Series 9
016-0357 -01
OSCILLOSCOPE OR DISPLAY DEVICE
016-0269-03 3
422, 453, 453A, 454, 454A, 485, 491
016-0306-01
305, 314, 326, 335, 1502,1 SC 502,1 SC 503,2 SC 504
016-0327 -01
647, 647A
016-0223-01
529, 561A, 561B, 564A, 564B, 568
016-0224-01
016-0244-00
502A, 503, 504, 530 540/550 Series, 565, 575
016-0225-04
016-0243-00
520A, 521A, 522A
016-0295-01
1480 Series
016-0342-00
576, 5030, 5031
016-0288-01
HP 1700 Series except 1740A, 1741A, 1743A
HP 10106-A5
HP 8 x 10 cm Rectangular CRT1 except 1740A, 1743A
HP 10363-A5
01 6-0306-01
HP 1740A, 1741 A, 1743A (8 x 10 em)
HP 10377-A5
Philips 8 x 10 em Portables9
HP 5 in Round CRT1
016-0357 -01
016-0228-01
319
HIGH WRITING SPEED CAMERAS
PURPOSE CAMERAS
TEK GENERAL
The top of the line-C-SO Series.
The three C·50 Series Cameras are designed for
use with all TEKTRONIX 7000 Series
Oscilloscopes, and can be adapted to fit most
5000 Series Oscilloscopes and 600 Series Display
Components. Full selection of film backs , and
adjustable film and shutter speeds give you the
flexibility you need to best record your measurements. The photometer exposure aid, similar to
light meters used in conventional photography,
provides an easy way to approximate the correct
exposure for repetitive or stored traces. X sync
connectors allow the camera shutter to trigger
the event. And each camera's built -in viewing
tunnel lets you see what's on the display even
when the camera is in place.
All the C-50 Series Cameras can be ordered with
Polaroid pack, or the C-51 and C-59A can be
ordered with a Graflok-type 4 x 5 inch back. Both
backs can easily be removed and interchanged
without fogging the film .
CoSO Series Cameras have black body finish.
320
C-S1
C-S3
Fastest Writing Speed
General Purpose Medium Speed
Electronic-Actuated Shutter
Electronic-Controlled Shutter
Photometer Exposure Aid
Photometer Exposure Aid
Range-Finder Focusing
Range-Finder Focusing
Automatic Single-Sweep Control
Automatic Single-Sweep Control
This camera offers the fastest writing speed of
any Tektronix oscilloscope camera. The f/1.2 lens
shoots images at 0.5 magnification, clearly capturing fast transients or single sweeps, although
at some expense to image size. The C-51's
electric shutter can operate at speeds ranging
from 1/60 to 4 seconds, and offers time, and
single sweep modes by manual or remote control.
The single sweep mode, available only on the C51 and C-53 cameras, automatically opens and
closes the shutter as the trace sweeps the
screen. This can be especially beneficial for
single-shot measurements which cannot be
repeated .
The C-53, like the C-51 , provides an 8 x 10 cm
field of view when used with Polaroid pack or roll
film . Its f/ l .9 lens and 0.85 magnification , however, offer somewhat slower writing speed. This
camera 's electric shutter also offers speeds ranging from 1160 to 4 seconds, and can be operated
manually or remotely in time, or single sweep
mode. Range-finder focusing , a feature the C-53
shares with the C-51 and the C-59A, results in
sharp, focused pictures every time.
HIGH WRITING SPEED CAMERAS
GENERAL PURPOSE CAMERAS
TEK
ORDERING INFORMATION
"P" Models accept Polaroid pack film_
"Gil Models have Graflok type backs that
accept 4 x 5 in sheet film holders or roll film
holders.
C-51
C-51 G Camera ......... ............ ...••. ......... $1935
C-51P Camera ..................................... $1935
C-53
C-53G Camera •...•.•....••••..•••...••.•..••••... $1590
C-53P Camera .•...•••••.•...•.•..•..•••...•.•..••. $1590
C-59A
C-59AG Camera .•.•...•..•..•..••.••.•.•........• $1165
C-59AP Camera ..••...••..•..•..•..•.........•... $1165
C-59A
Low-Cost
Photometer Exposure Aid
Range-Finder Focusing
OPTIONAL CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Internal Battery Power
Mounting Adapter. -
For Larger CRT'S
If you need a camera with an expanded field of
view, the C-59A may be the answer. This camera
is designed for CRTs up to 6 1/2 inches, and has
a 10.2 x 12.7 cm field of view with Polaroid pack
film . It is the only camera for the 576 Curve
Tracer, and the only C-5O Series Camera for the
7603 Oscilloscope. The f/2.8 lens means slow
writing speed , but it also means economy. The C59A's mechanical shutter, operating between
1/50 and 1 second, also contributes to it slow
cost. Still, many of the features of the higherpriced C-5O Series Cameras are standard on the
C-59A: photo-meter exposure aid, range-finder
focusing , bulb and time operating modes, X sync
contacts, and film back interchangeability. An
optional Adapter FramelCorrector Lens expands
the field of view to fully cover the 6 1/2 inch CRT
and adjacent scale readout characters of the 576
Curve Tracer and 5030 Series Oscilloscopes. The
Corrector Lens reduces the effective magnification of the C-59A from 0.67 to 0.5 so it can record
the entire display on Polaroid 3 114 x 4 1/4 inch
film.
ADAPTER FRAME /CORRECTOR LENS
C-S9 CAMERAS
Expands the field of view of the C-59A to fully cover the 6 1/2in CRT and adlacent scale-readout characters of the 576 Curve
Tracer and 5030 Series scopes. The Corrector Lens reduces
the effective magnification of the C-59A to 0.5 so it can record
the entire display on Polaroid 3 1/4 x 4 1/4 in film .
Although the camera ' s photographic field is expanded to include the entire display. the view through the viewing tunnel is
not. However. all but the upper one-fourth of the display can be
vIewed via the viewing tunnel and the camera can be swung
aSide to allow a full view of the entire display.
For C-S9 Camera, Order 016-0288-01 ........ __...... _........ S120
PHYSICAL CHARACTERfSTICS
Dimensions
cm
in
cm
in
cm
in
Height
29 .2
11 .5
29 .2
11 .5
29.2
11 .5
Width
19.1
9 .8
19.1
7 .5
19.3
7 .7
Length
27.3
10.8
27 .3
10.8
27.3
10.8
kg
fb
kg
Ib
kg
Ib
Weight
(, )
C-S1
Order 016-0270-02 ......................................................... $275
Writing Speed Enhancer - Provides automatic controlled
film fogging to increase writing speed by about 3 times for 3000
ASA film and about 2 times for 10,000 ASA film . Installs in
minutes.
Writing Speed Enhancer for C-51 Camera.
Order 016·0279·01 ............. ........................................... $260
Writ ing Speed Enhancer for C-53 Camera.
Order 016 -0300·01 .......... .............................................. $290
WITH FILM BACK ORDfNARfLY USED
C-S9AP
C-S3P
C-S1 P
Net
4.3
9 .5
3.4
7.5
3.2
7.0
Shipping
6.8
15.0
5.4
12.0
5.0
11.0
Included Accessories - Focus Plate for Polaroid pack film
(387 -0893-021. or focusing screen integral with Grallok type
back ; mounting adapter for all 7000, 5000 . and small 600 Series (016-0249-04)
Writing Speed Enhancer for C-59A Camera.
Order 016·0290-01 ................ .. ...................... .... ............ $290
Polaroid Pack Film Back - Accepts Polaroid pack film . Included with -P- models.
Order 122·0926·01 ........................ ................................ $160
Grallok Type Film Back, 4 • 5 in - Accepts Polaroid 4 x 5 in
film holder. standard cut-film holders, film-pack adapters, rollfilm holders (except heavy motorized models). Included with
-G- models.
Order 122-0931-01 ........................................................ $215
Carrying Case - Holds a complete C-50 Series Camera with
extra film-backs and accessories.
Order 016·0177-00 ........................................................ $260
ACCESSORIES FOR GRAFLOK TYPE BACKS
(For C· S1 snd C-59A)
Here are a few of the film holders available for use with the
Grallok Backs to allow use of roll film , and Polaroid 4 x 5 in
film . Order these accessories from the manufacturer or from
your local camera store.
SUMMARY COMPARISON OF MAJOR CHARACTERISTICS
CAMERA
see table on page 319 .
Battery Pack - Provides an auxiliary + 15 V power source
for the C-50. C-51 , C-52 , and C-53 with oscilloscopes that
don 't provide camera power. A three-position mode switch on
the battery pack also allows the camera to be powered from a
7000 Series Oscilloscope or an external + 15 V source. Net
weight of pack . including batteries, is 1.2 lb. Batteries are not
included.
C-S3
C-59A
FEATURES
Fastest writing speed (at
expense of image size)
General purpose for 7000
Series with 8 x 10-cm CRTs··
Medium writing speed
General purpose low price.
For CRTs up to 6 1/2 in;
Slow writing speed
LENS SPEED
f/ 1.2
f/1 .9
fl2 .8
MAGNIFICATION
0.5
0.85
0.67
RELATIVE LfGHT
GATHERING ABILITY
3 .0
1.0
0.65
FIELD OF VIEW
8 x 10 cm with Polaroid
pack film
8 x 10 em with Polaroid
pack film
10.2 x 12.7 cm with Polaroid
pack film
SHUTTER
Electrically actuated, 4 to 1/60 s, plus Bulb
and Time. Provides x sync.
RH / 10 120 RoII· Film Holder - 10 exposures 2 1/4 x 2 3/4 in
for 4 x 5 in Grallok Backs (122-0736-01)
RH / 50 70 mm Holder - 50 exposure, 2 1/4 x 2 3/4 in, for 4 x 5
in Grallok Backs only. (122.0967-00)
Polaroid Land # 545 4 • 5 Film Holder - For Polaroid 4 x 5 in
Single Exposure Film Packels. (016·0201 -01)
Roll film holders are also manufactured by several other
companies.
Mechanically actuated 1 to
1/125 s. bulb and time
Provides x sync
The C-53 lens records the largest practical Image of an 8 x 10-cm CRT display on Polaroid pack film .
.-
321
LOW COST CAMERA
CAMERA
TEK OEM
C-5C
Easy to Use
Modular Versatility
Low Cost
Electric Shutter
Graticule Illumination
Improved Lens
The C·5C is a low·cost general·purpose camera
with Polaroid Pack·film back and a graticule
illuminator. It is lightweight, modular, and may be
assembled with one of three interchangeable
adapter hoods that fit most Tektronix
Oscilloscopes and small monitors.
All three adapter hoods have an opening in the
top for a lift·up viewing door or a Xenon flash unit
for illuminating the CRT graticule. The flash unit
has a flipdown viewing door.
Lens - Three element lens with improved focus
uniformity user changeable. 0.67 or 0.85 magnifi·
cation. The fixed f/16 aperture provides a wide
depth of field and eliminates need for adjustable
focus .
Recommended Film - Type 107, 3OOO·speed
pack film , type 612, 20,000 speed pack film.
C-28
Field of view - Changeable: 0.67 mag-9.8 x
12.2 cm, or 0.85 mag-8 x 10 cm.
Trapezoidal Distortion
Eliminated
Power Source -
Easy Operation
Body Color -
UL 544 Component
Recognition
(4) AA batteries, not included.
(Use Alkiline batteries.)
Black
Special pricing. terms and conditions are available to OEMS .
Contact your local TektroniX representative for complete
Information
ACCESSORIES
Adapter Hoods below)
(requires assembly with door or flash listed
Included with the C·5C and C5C Option 01 Cameras.
016·0357·01 ..................................................................... $17
Included with the C·5C Option 02 and 04 Camera.
016·0359·01 ..................................................................... $17
Included with the C·5C Option 03 Camera.
016·0358·01 ..................................................................... $17
Viewing Door - Fits all three adapter hoods. Mounting
screws included. Included with C·5C Opt 01 and Opt 02.
016· 0630·00 .................................................................. $6.00
The f/16 lens has a relatively low light·gathering
ability of 0.02 and is not recommended for
photographing single·sweep waveforms.
Flash Unit - Fits all three adapter hoods Mounting screws
included. InCluded with C·5C and C·5C Opt 03 and 04.
016· 0642·00 ... ................................................................ $135
Shutter - Electric with timed speeds from 0.1 to
5 seconds plus open shutter mode.
Dimensions
Graticule Illumination - Variable intensity Xe·
non flash , triggered by shutter opening, evenly
illuminates the CRT screen to back·light non·
illuminated graticules.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
cm
in
Height
Width
Length
Weights
~
14
16.8
25.7
5.5
6.6
10.1
kg
Ib
1.4
1.9
3
4.1
Adapter Hood (Included)
Part Number
016-0357-01
Flash Unit
Included
Yes
Price
$500
Weight
Net Shipping
Order
C·5C
For Use With
577 . 600 Series with unilluminated
graticule 1420 Series. 5100 Series
C·5C Opt 01
528. 600 Series wlo graticule.
or with illuminated graticule.
5400 Series . 7000 Series.
T922R . TELEQUIPMENT 083
016-0357-01
No
Sub $20
C-5C Opt 02
432 . 434 . 455. 464 . 4656. 465M . 466.
475 . 475A
016-0359-01
No
Sub $20
C·5C Opt 03
T900 Series except T922R
016-0358-01
Yes
NC
C·5C Opt 04
2200 Series
016-0359-01
Yes
NC
322
The C·28 is a high-quality recording camera for
systems displaying X·Y, Y·T or gray-scale images.
It is highly recommended for those using
TEKTRONIX 600 Series Display Monitors. It features an f/2.8 lens with user-changeable 0.67 and
0.85 magnification ratios to record images from 8
x 10 or 10 x 12 cm CRT's. Other magnification
ratios are also available as options.
The C-28 shutter is electronically controlled to
provide reliable, repeatable operation and to allow remote control by the user's system. Either a
TIL low logic level or a switch closure will actuate
the shutter. The C-28 has a highly rigid camera
body, allowing the use of heavier accessories
such as 70 and 90 mm motorized roll film backs
without "keystone" distortion or defocusing. The
Polaroid 3 1/4" x 4 1/4" film back is easily removed , leaving a Graflok·type interface for
Graflok·compatible accessories. The film back
can be rotated to allow prints to be pulled to the
left, to the right, or down-ward. Optional range·
finder focus lights allow quick focusing without
removing the film . The C·28 uses the same
mounting adapters as C-27 and C·SO Series. The
customer must provide a separate 15 V dc 7SO
mA power supply. A connector and an 18 inch
power·cable assembly is included.
TEK
COMPACT
HIGH PERFORMANCE CAMERAS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Both Models include Polaroid pack films
back.
C-30BP CAMERA .............................. .. $1245
$1430
C-31 BP CAMERA
OPTIONS
C· 30B Option 01 Expanded Field of View - 1/1.9. 0.8 magnificaliOn lens covers 8 x 10 cm CRT screen without vignetting.
Relative light-gathering ability is 0.9. Includes 016-0269-03
adapter lor 465 size CRT bezel and corrector lens and holder.
Recommended for-455 . 464 , 465. 465B. 466. 475, 475A.
Specify Option 0 1 .................................................... Add $40
C-31 B Option 01 , Expanded Field 01 View - 1/1.2. 0.5 magnification lens with relative light gathering ability of 2.9 covers
CRT screens up to 8 x 10 em. Includes 016-0269-03 adapter
for 465 size CRT bezel and corrector lens and holder. Recommended lor-455. 464. 465. 465B. 466, 475. 475A.
CHARACTERISTICS
ShutterSpeeds - l /50. 1/25 . 1/10. 1/5. 1/2. 1 sec. and 2 secs
wllhln 20%. B (bulb) and shuller OPEN position are also
provided.
Len Speed -
f 2.8 to f 16.
Magnification Ratio -
0.67 :1 and 0.85 :1 (interchangeable).
UL 544 Component Recognition medical/dental equipment.
For use in UL approved
Dimensions
Height -
Without viewing tunnel hood . 20.5 cm (8.06 in).
Width -
18.5 cm (7.25 in).
Length - 24 .6 cm (9 .7 in) max with Polaroid pack film lower.
mounting adapter, and focus set at max extension.
Body Color -
Black .
Environmental
Temperature Range 0° - 50 °C.
For specified performance:
Altitude - 4500 m (15.000 tt) operating 15.000 m (50.000 tt)
nonoperating .
Weight -
C-30B/C-31 B
Adaptable to Many Instrument Types
The C·30B and C-31B Cameras are primarily designed for use with the 400 Series Portable
Oscilloscopes, but are also adaptable to 8 x 10
cm CRT or smaller 7000, 5000, and 600 Series
instruments, and to some others. See chart on
page 319. The C·30B has variable magnification,
permitting it to make use of the entire photo
frame even with different CRT sizes. The C-31B is
designed for maximum writing speed (at the expense of image size).
Option 01 is designed to fit the 8 x 10 cm display
of the 455, 464, 465, 465B, 466, 475 and 475A.
The standard C-30B or C·318 fits the 485.
3.8 kg (8.5 Ib) with film pack and adapter.
Standard Accessori es removed .
Shown with viewing tunnel
6 pin connector and 18 in power and control cable assembly
131 -1794-00. Polaroid pack film holder 352-0505-01. viewing
tunnel and hood 122-0719-01 .
ORDERING INFORMATION
C-28 Camera ....................................... $1565
Option 01 with Focus Lights ... _............................... Add 555
Option 02 with Grallok Focus Screen and
Hood, 122-0510·00 and 122-0944-00 ................. Add $110
Option 03 without Polaroid Film Back
352-0505-01 ........................•..................................... Sub 550
Option 04 0.8 Magnification Only ........................... Add $45
Option 05 0.9 Magnification Only ........................... Add $45
Special priCing. terms and con ditions are available to
OEMs. Contact your local TektrOniX representative for com plete information.
Relative
Light
Gathering Field of
Ability
View
Magnifi-
Camera
Lens
Speed
C-30B
f/1 .9
0.7t0 1.5
1.0
a x 10 cm
C-31 B
f/ 1.3
0. 5
2.7
ax gcm
cation
Shutter - Mechanically actuated, with speeds
from 1 to 1/125 s plus bulb and time. Provides x
sync switch closure for arming oscilloscope single
sweep or initiating the event of interest.
Recommend For - 485. See page 319 for compatibility with other instruments. Also see Option
01.
Included Accessories - Split-image locusing plate for PolarOid pack back (387-0893·02); mounting adapter for 485 size
bezel (016-0306-01).
Option 06 Unity Magnification Only ........................ Add $45
Option 08 with 016·0249-04 Adapter for 600,
7000, and 5000 Series ............................................. Add $65
Specify Option 0 1 ....................................•............... Add $40
CONVERTING OPTION 01 MODEL TO STANDARD MODEL
Dimensions
Height
Width
Length
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
cm
13.6
19.1
24 .9
The Option 01 versions of the C-30B and C-31 B Cameras can
be converted to standard models by simply slipping off the Corrector Lens. removing the Adapter Frame, and adding an 0160306-01 Adapter. Please refer to page 319 for prices and
compatibility.
CONVERTING STANDARD MODEL TO OPTION 01 MODEL
A standard-model C-30B or C-31 B can be converted to an Option 01 model by means of the appropriate Adapter Frame/Cor.
rector Lens. 016-0301-01 for C-30B; 016-0269-04 for the C31B . Please refer to page 319 for prices and compatibility.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Mounting Adapters -
See page 319.
Writing Speed Enhancer - Increases effective film speed
about 3 times lor 3000 speed lilm. Installs in minutes.
Order 016·0284-01 ........................................................ $260
Polaroid Pack Film Back - Accepts Polaroid pack film . In·
cluded with ' P' models.
Order 122-0752-01 ............•........................................... $180
Grallok Type 4 x 5 in Back - Accepts Polaroid Land 4 x 5 in
film holders, standard cut film holders. filmpack adapters. roll
film holders (except heavy motorized roll film holders).
Order 016-0487·00 .................. ....................................... $230
Carrying Case - Molded high-impact plastiC case with polyurethane foam liners to protect your camera in transit. 18.5 x
14.5 x 8 in .
Order 016-0587·00 ......................................................... $105
X Sync Cable Order 012-0364-0 1 .......................................................... 520
C·30A Portra Lens - A slip-on auxiliary lens which extends
the locus distance 01 the camera so it can be used for off·
scope photography of scenes such as test set-ups. At a distance of 21 in the camera covers 19 x 21 in. Usable with either
the C-30B or C-30B Option 01 .
Order 0 16-0246-02 ........................................................... $30
in
5.4
7.5
9.8
Weight
ka
Ib
Net
Shipping
2.2
4.1
4.8
9.0
323
PROBES
TEK RECOMMENDED
Where higher frequencies (above 250 MHz) are
encountered, active FET probes which have high
Input resistance and low input capacitance
through their dynamic range should be used . For
50 systems , see adjacent selection chart of 50
II divider probes .
n
For rise time measurements , the interaction of the
probe capacitance with the source impedance is
of importance (RC time constant) . For best reo
suits , the capacitance should be kept minimal.
Typical probe specifications represent their reo
sponse to a 25
source environment.
n
FET PROBES
INPUT LIMITS
Rise time
Type
Attn Length"
P6046
IX
6.0
Dill/Amp
lOX
P6201
IX
6.0
FET
lOX
100X
2m
P6202A
lOX
FET
100X
50
n DIVIDER
Type
P60S6
P6057
Attn
lOX
100X
Package Number
010·0232·00 Std
010·6201·01 Std
010·6202·03 Std
W/Ol0·0384·00Atn
Loading
1 Mil 10 pF
10MIl 3 pF
100 kll 3 pF
1 Mil I .S pF
1 Mil I .S pF
10 Mil 2 pF
10 Mil 2 pF
PROBES-For use with 50
Length "
6.0
9.0
6.0
9.0
Package Number
01 0·6056-03 Std
010·6056-05
010·6057·03 Std
010·6057·05
in ns
3.S
0.4
0.7
0.7
Ma.
dc +
pk ac
:t 2S V
:t 2S0 V
:t l oo V
± 2oo V
± 2oo V
± 2oo V
± 2oo V
Linear
Dynamic
Range
:t S V
:t SO V
:t o.6 V
± 6V
± 60 V
±6 V
:t 60 V
Dc
Offset Read·
Range
Out
NO
:t S.6 V YES
± S6 V
:t 200 V
± SS V YES
± 2oo V NO
Page
328
327
327
n input amplifiers
Loading
500 II 1 pF
5 kll
0.1
INPUT LIMITS
Ma.
Linear
dc +
Dynamic
pk ac
Range
± 16 V
± 16 V
0.25
± 50 V
Rise Time
in ns
1 pF
± 50 V
Read·
Out
YES
YES
Page
328
328
Length In leet except where specified.
For measuring currents from dc to 1000 A. see
the adjacent selection chart for current probes .
Current probes can be used where low loading of
the circuit is necessary. Loading is typically in the
milliohm to low ohm range. Current probes can be
used for differential measurements, where the
probe measures the results of two opposing
currents In two conductors in the jaw of the
probe .
A current waveform may be very different from a
voltage waveform in a current·dependent circuit.
Measuring only the voltage will not show this
difference. To obtain the total picture , a measure·
ment of the current waveform is necessary .
CURRENT PROBES
Current/Div
Scope at
Band·
width
Hz to MHz
dc 50
10 mV/div
Type
lmAloSA
A6302 /
AM 503
0.5 20 20 mA 10 5 kA'
A6302 /
AM 503
with CT· S
A6303/
AM 503
dc 15 10 mA 1050 A
P6021
mA/mV
Passive
Term
CT·S/
134
P6022
120
12
60
38
120
20
12
ae
Amp
20
MAXIMUM CURRENT
ac
p.p
Derate
Amp
Below Above
40
1 MHz
40 k
20 Hz
Peak
Pulse
Amp
50
Page
1.2 kHz
50 k
277
329
20 kHz
500
0.000xl0 - ·
2 or 10
0.5
0.5
0.5xl0·l
0.5xl0·3
15
15
300 Hz
230 Hz
5 MHz
5 MHz
250
15
~O or 10 kA
20
0.5
2000
300 Hz
1.2 kHz
50 k
20
0.5
2000
230 Hz
1.2 kHz
15 k
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
9x 10·'
9xl0··
lxl0··
50xl0··
6
6
1.4
7
3 kHz
1.3 kHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
100
15
100
100
1 mA lolA"
20 ~O mA 10 1 kA"
100
200
277.
239
330
331
330
8.5 k 200
100 65
1 mA to lA"
134
CT·l
30 k 1000
CT·2
1.2 k 100
Scope at 10 mVl d,v
"Scope at 50 mVl d,v
lor 10
5 mV/mA
1 mV/mA
331
331
OTHER PROBES
Probe
P6048
P60S8A
Package Number
010·0215·00
010·0260·00
Function
Low Capacitance 1 pF. 1 kn
Temperature and
Voltage Probe
Temperalure Probe
Voltage Probe
HlQh Vollage Probe
P6430
P6104
40 kV
010·6430·00
010·6104·00
010·0277·00
P64S1
010·6451·03
P6401
010·6401·01
Data AcqUISition
Probe
LClQlc Probe
P6406
P6420
010·6406·01
010·6420·03
Word Recetgnlzer
RF Probe
P6601
010·6601 ·01
Temperature
P612S
324
pM
100
Passive
Term
Recommended Probes-For 7000 Series see
page 152, for 5000 Series see page 206, for 400
Series see the individual instrument description .
+
dc
0.1
Passive
Term
134
CT /S
SATURATION
Pulse
Dc
Amp· S
Amp
Product
20
100xl0··
010·6125·01
Probe
Digital Counter
/Timer Probe. 5X
At1enuation
Use
400 Senes
OM 501 . DM SOIA
7D13
DM 44.DM 502
465M
DM SOIA
DM 502A
7001
TIL
LClQic
308
DM SOIA
DM 502A
DM44
DM SOIA
DM 502A.7D13
DC 503A
DC504
DC 505 A
DC 508
DC 509
Page
328
233.326
326
66.326
66.326
348
66
300.327
256
264 .300
TEK
RECOMMENDED
PROBES
For amplitude measurements, the capacitance
and resistance of the probe form a voltage
divider with the circuit under test. For low frequency (about 5 MHz and below), the resistive
component is of primary importance in most
probes and should be at least two orders of
magnitude greater than the circuit source imped-
applications for 1 Mfl inputs.
ance. For higher frequencies (greater than about
30 MHz) , the importance of the capacitance
increases drastically and will become the prime
consideration.
Modular probes are an exciting new concept
In probe design. The P6101 , P6105, P6106,
P6107 , P6108, P6120 and P6149 Probes divide
into three modules (probe heads, cables, and
connector/compensation boxes).
For general-purpose use, passive voltage probes
offer a wide probe selection for a variety of
VOLTAGE PROBES FOR 1 MO INPUTS
MODULAR
Package
Number
Useful
BWMHz
Alten
Length·
PS10l
IX
1m
2m
3m
010-SI01-01
01 O-SI 01 -03
010-SI01-05
1 Mil
32.0 pF
54
78
PS105
lOX
1m
2m
3m
01 O-SI 05-01
01 O-SI 05-03
01 O-SI 05-05
10 Mil
10.5 pF
13.0
15.5
PS10S
lOX
1m
2m
3m
01 O-SI OS-OI
01 O-SI OS-03
01 O-SI 06-05
10 Mil
PS107
lOX
2m
01 O-SI 07-03
PS108
lOX
1m
2m
3m
PS120
lOX
P6125
PS149
Type
Loa ding
Dc
Mal
Scope C
in pF
Readout
Page
500 V
ANY
-
100
100
95
500 V
15 t047
YES
10.5 pF
13.0
15.5
300'
250
150
500 V
15 to 24
YES
10 Mil
13.0 pF
100'
500 V
15 to 47
YES
01 O-SI 08-01
01 O-SI 08-03
01 O-SI 08-05
10 Mil
10.5 pF
13.0
15.5
100
100
95
500 V
15 to 47
NO
1.5m
3m
010-SI20-01
010-SI20-01
10 Mfl
10 Mil
14.0 pF
17.0
SO
SO
500 V
500 V
15 to 47
NO
5X
1.5m
010-SI25-01
5 Mil
20.0 pF
200
250 V
15 to 33
NO
264 ,300
lOX
2m
010-SI49-03
10 Mil
15.5 of
50
500 V
20 to S2
NO
333
Dc
Mal
Scope C
in DF
SOO V
15 to 55
NO
15 to 55
NO
34
15.5
8
332
332
333
333
332
332
VOLTAGE PROBES for 1 MO Inputs
MONOLITHIC
TYDe
Alten
Length·
Package
Number
Useful
BWMHz
Loadina
Readout
Page
PSOOS
lOX
3.5
S
9
12
010-0127-01
01 0-01 SO-OO
010-014S-00
010-0148-00
10MI!
7.5 pF'
8.5
11
15
35
25
25
12
PS007
100X
3.5
S
9
12
010-0150-00
01 0-01 S5-00
010-0152-00
010-0154-00
10 Mil
2 pF'
2.2
2.4
2.S
25
20
15
13
PS008
lOX
3.5
010-0129-00
10 Mil
7.5 of
100
SOO V
12 to 47
NO
335
lOX
PS008
(EnVironmentahzed)
S.O
010-0129-01
100
SOO V
12 to 47
NO
334
PS009
100X
9
9
01 0-0170-00
010-02S4-01
120
100
1.5kV
12 to 47
NO
YES
335
PS010
lOX
PS015
1000X
10
010-0172-00
100 MI!
3 of
75
20 kV
12 to 47
NO
335
PS028
IX
3.5
S
9
12
010-0074-00
010-0075-00
010-007S-00
01 0-0077-00
1 Mil
50 pF
S7
90
112
17
10
7
4
600 V
ANY
YES
PS048
lOX
S
010-0215-00
1 kU
loF
100
20 V
15 to 20
NO
PS053B
lOX
3.5
S
9
010-S053- 11
01 0-S053-13
01 0-S053-15
10 Mil
9.5 pF
12.5
13.5
200
200
115
500 V
15 to 24
YES
PS055'
lOX
3.5
01 0-S055-0 1
1 Mil
10 pF
SO
500 V
20 to 47
YES
PSOSO'
lOX
3.5
S
010-S0S0-01
01 0-SOSO-03
10 Mil
7.5 pF'
8.5
35
25
SOO V
15 to 55
YES'
3.5
010-S0S2-11
YES
019-S0S2-13
lOX or IX
9
010-S0S2-15
100
8
100
S
95
4.5
15 to 47
S
13.5 pF
100
14
105
17
135
500 V
OX or IX
10 Mil
1 Mil
10 MI!
1 Mil
10 Mil
1 Mil
3.5
010-60S3-11
500 V
15 to 24
YES
S
010-S0S3-13
200
12
200
S
P60S2B lOX or IX
PSOS3B lOX or IX
lOX or IX
3.5
10 Mil
7.5 pF
Environmentalized - 50 ' C to + 150' C
10MI!
2.5 pF
2.5
334
1.5 kV
334
Furnished with S-5 . For other uses see PSI 05 or PS106.
10
1
10
1
Mil
Mil
Mil
MI!
11 .0 pF
80.0
14.0
105.0
33S
328
33S
33S
337
337
Length In feet except where specified .
1. To convert to uhf connectors , use adapter
103-0015-00.
3. Designed for use with scopes having
differential inputs.
S.Typically 300 MHz at probe tip with scope
bandwidth at least 325 MHz .
2. Rating varies with scopes haVing other
than 20 pF inputs.
4. Not compatible with CRT readout .
5. 25 11 source.
7. Trace identification button.
337
325
PROBES
TEK RECOMMENDED
INSTRUMENT
PROBES
PASSIVE
I
ACTIVE
INSTRUMENT
PROBES
CURRENT
7000 SERIES
PASSIVE
I
ACTIVE
CURRENT
TM 500 SERIES
7A11
Built in FET Probe
7A13
PS055
PS10l
PSOSO
PSOS2B
7A1SA
7A16A
AS302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
DC 508A
PS125
PS108
PS05S
PS015
PS009
PS105
PS02l
PS022
SC 501
SC 502
SC 503
PS10l
PS028
PS108
PS060
PSOS2B
PS007
P60l3A
P6015
PS02l
PS10l
PS105
PS062B
PS015
PSOO9
PS02l
PS022
SC 504
PS10l
PS108
P6062
PSOO9
P602l
PS022
PS10S
PS10l
PS063B
PS015
PS009
PS201
PS202
PS02l
PS022
AS302/AM 503
7A 18
PS10l
PS105
PSOS2B
PS015
PSOO9
PS202
PS02l
A6302/AM 503
7A19
PS05S
PS057
PS201
PS202
PS022
A6302/AM 503
AS303/AM503
7A2 2
PS10l
PS055
PSOSO
PSOS2B
7A24
PS05S
PS057
7A26
PS10l
PS10l
PS063B
7A29
PS05S
PS057
PS02l
A6302JAM 503
PS015
PS009
PS048
PS201
PS202
PS022
A6302/AM 503
AS303/AM 503
PS201
PS202
PS022
A6302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
PS201
PS202
A6302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
400 SERIES
485
PS10l
PS106
PS056
PS057
PS063B
PS015
P6009
P6048
PS201
PS202
P602l
PS022
A6302J AM 503
AS303/AM 503
47SA
475
P6l0l
PS10S
PSOS3B
PS015
PS009
P6048
PS201
P6202
PS02l
PS022
A6302/AM 503
A6303/AM 503
4658
465
468
PS10l
PS105
POS2B
P60l5
PS009
PS048
PS201
PS202
P602l
P6022
A6302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
46SM
PS10l
PS104
PS015
PSOO9
PS201
PS202
PS02l
P6022
AS302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
455
PS10l
PS105
PS062B
PS015
PS009
PS202
PS02l
P6022
A63021AM 503
A6303/AM 503
PS202
PS201
PS02l
PS022
AS302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
5000 SERIES
SA14N
PS10l
PS108
PSOS2B
PS015
PS007
PS120
A6302/AM 503
P602l
466
464
PS10l
PS105
PSOS2B
PS015
PS009
SA15N
PS10l
PS108
PS062B
PS015
PS007
PS120
A6302JAM 503
PS02l
434
PS120
SA18N
PS10l
PS108
PSOS2B
PS015
PS007
PS120
PS021
AS302/AM 503
PS10l
P6l08
PSOO9
PS015
SA2 1N
PS10l
PS055
PSOSO
SA22N
PS101
PS055
PSOSO
SA26
PS101
PSOSO
PS055
SA38
PS101
PS105
PSOS2B
5A45
5A48
300 SERIES
308
PS107
314
PS10l
PS149
P602l
PS022
A63021AM 503
A6303/AM 503
PS021
335
PS10l
PS149
PS015
PSOO9
PS120
PS021
PS022
A6302JAM 503
PS02l
PS022
A6302JAM 503
A6303/AM 503
326
PS10l
PS149
PS101
PS105
PSOS2B
PS015
PSOO9
PS120
PS02l
PS022
A6302/AM 503
PS02l
PS022
A63021AM 503
A6303/AM 503
323
PS10l
PS105
PSOS2B
PS015
PSOO9
PS120
PS02l
PS022
A6320/AM 503
PS10l
PS149
P602l
PS022
A6302J AM 503
A6303/AM 503
PS055
PSOSO
PS10l
PS028
PS02l
PS021
TM 500 SERIES
AM 502
AM 503
A6302
A6303
T93SA
T932A
T922R
T921
T9 12
PS10l
PS108
PSOS2B
PS009'
PS015
P6420
40 kV(Ol 0· 0277 .00)
2200 SERIES
DC
DC
DC
DC
PS125
PS108
'For T935A and T932A only
"For T932A and T9l2 only
"'For T922R . T92l and T9l2 only
326
P6404
PS451-05
T900 SERIES
OM S0 1A
OM S02A
OM 505
503A
504
505A
509
PS02l
PS022
A6302/ AM 503
A6303/AM 503
2213/22 15
PS120
PS120
PSOOS"
PS007'"
PS02l
PS022
AS302/AM 503
A6303/AM 503
TEK
P6201
RF AND FET
PROBES
P6202A
Dc to 900 MHz
6
6
ti
r
• I
•
• i•
Dc to 500 MHz
t lS
P6420
RF Probe
l
j
•
I
I
•
•
~
•
Unity Gain
Dc Offset
Two Plug-on Attenuator Heads that
Maintain Scope Readout Factor
High Input Impedance through Freq Range
Low Input Capacitance
Dc Offset
Ac-Dc Coupling Switch
The P6201 is an active (FET) probe providing
unity gain and dc to 900 MHz bandwidth. The
P6201 is the best general-purpose probe within
its voltage range from the standpoint of electrical
performance. Very low input capacitance permits
acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum loading of circuits under test while high
input resistance minimizes low frequency and dc
loading. Plug-on attenuator heads provide higher
input resistance and reduced input capacitance.
The probe derives its power from the probe
power jack on many Tek scopes or a 1101 power
supply.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to 900 MHz ( - 3 dB). Rise Time - 0.4 ns or
less. Probe Gain - 1X within 3%. Attenuator Accuracy <;; 4% with probe (10X and 100X). Input impedance - Probe
only. 100 kll within 1%, shunted by .. 3.0 pF. Attenuator heads
are 1 Mil within 1%. shunted by 1.5 pF or less.
Dynamic Signal Range - At least ± 600 mY ; extended to ± 6
V with 10X Attenuator; ± 60 V. Dc Offset Range - At least
- 5.6 to + 5.6 V without attenuator head. Effective offset is
extended by 10X and 100X attenuator heads to ± 56 V and
~ 200 V. respectively. Noise - 300 ~ V or less at output (measured tangentially). Maximum Input Voltage ± 100 V,
probe only ; ± 200 V with attenuator heads, derating with frequency. LF Response - 10 Hz or lower, - 3 dB, ac coupled;
10X attenuator extends Lf response to .. 1 Hz; with 100X attenuator. Lf response is .. 10Hz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1TIP, probe, retractable (BT)
013-0135-00
1 ATTENUATOR head 10X
010-0376-00
010-0377-00
1 ATTENUATOR head 100X
3 TIP, probe (CO)
206-0200-00
131-1302-00
1 CONTACT, ground (CG)
175-0848-02
1 LEAD, ground, 30 em (12 in) (BB)
103-0164-00
1 TIP, probe (CD)
1 CLIP, alligator (AU)
344-0046-00
166-0557-00
1 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CJ)
1 INSULATOR, ground contact (CT)
342-01 80-00
016-0156-02
1 CARRYING CASE
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6201 FET Probe, 010-6201-01 .......... $990
1101 Accessory Power Supply,
Powers up to four P6201 or P6202A Probes.
1101 ....... _.................. ..................................................... $515
Small Probe Size
With its standard Tektronix power connector the
P6202A can be used on any instrument which has
standard probe power. The very low input capaci·
tance of the probe permits acquisition of high frequency signals with a minimum loading of circuits
under test while the high input resistance mini·
mizes low frequency and dc loading.
The probe has a dc offset feature to offset any
dc component within the range of the control to
bring the signal into the dynamic range of the
probe.
The P6202A derives its power from the probe
power jack on many of Tek scopes or a 1101
power supply.
CHARACTERISTICS
Probe and (Opt 10X Attenuator Head):
Bandwidth - Dc to ", 500 MHz ( - 3dB). Rise Time - 0.7 ns
or less. Attenuation -10X within 4% (1OOX within 2% for Opt
10X Attenuator Head). Input Impedance - 10 Mil within 2%
shunted by ",,2 pF. Dynamic Range - 0 to ± 6 V. Dc Offset
Range - - 55 V to + 55 V (- 200 V to + 200 V for Opt 10X
Attenuator Head). Noise (Tangential) - 150 ~ V or less. Mal
Sa'e Input Voltage - 200 V dc + peak ac, derated with
frequency .
Opt Ac Coupling Cap:
Bandwidth - 16 Hz to ",500 MHz ( - 3 dB). Rise Time - 0.7
ns or less. Input Impedance - .. 4 pF. Max Safe Input Volt·
age - 200 V de + peak ac.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 TIP, probe, retractable (BO)
013-0097-01
1 HOLDER, probe
352-0351 -00
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
344-0046-00
175-0849-00
~ ~~~~y!j;fG~A~i cm (3 in) (BC)
016-0378-00
1 ADJUSTMENT TOOL, probe (CU)
003-0675-01
1 LEAD, ground, 13 em (6 in) (BE)
175-1017-00
2 TIP, probe, replaceable'
166-0404-01
1 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
'Available in package of 10 only. order 206-0230-03 (CA).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6202A FET Probe, 2 Meter Cable,
010-6202-03 .......................................... $530
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6202A 10X Attenuator,
010-0384-00 ..................................................................... $60
P6202A Ac Coupling Cap,
010-0360-00 .................................... ................................. $30
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339.
RF Probe
10kHz to 1 GHz Bandwidth
Dc V output/RMS of Sine input
The P6420 RF probe measures high frequency ac
voltage from 10 kHz to 1 GHz. It provides a dc
output voltage proportional to the RMS value of a
sinewave input.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Range - 0.5 V to 25 V AMS (70.7 V pop). Ac to Dc
Trans'er Ratio Accuracy - 0.5 V to 5 V AMS + 10% (15 · C
to 35 · C). 5.0 V to 25 V AMS ± 5% (15 · C to 35 · C). Frequency
Respon se - 100 kHz to 300 MHz ( ± 0.5 dB). 50 kHz to 500
MHz ( ± 1.5 dB). 10 kHz to 1 GHz ( ± 3.0 dB). Input Capacitance - .. 3.7 pF. Maximum Input Voltage - 42.4 V (peak
ac + de). Temperature Range - Nonoperating ; - 55 · C to
+ 75 · C. Operating; + 15· to + 35 · C. Length - Probe only
9.6 cm. Cable only 2 meters.
INCLUDe D AcceSSORIES
013-0097-01
1 TIP, probe, retractable (BO)
344-0046-00
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 LEAD, ground. 7.5 cm (3 in) (BC)
175-0849-00
1 LEAD, ground. 13 cm (6 in) (BE)
175-1017-00
1 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
166-0404-01
1 HOLDER, probe
352-0351 -00
1 ADAPTER, BNC female
103-0090-00
to dual banana(BN)
2 TIP, probe. replaceable '
'Available in package of 10 only , order 206-0230-03 (CA).
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6420 RF Probe, 2 m Cable Included,
010-6420-03 ................ .......................... $120
For a 1 meter length cable only, (does not
change specifications)
175- 1661-00) .......................................... $26
For a 3 meter length cable only, (does not
change specifications)
175-1661 -02 ............................................ $26
327
SPECIAL PURPOSE
TEK PROBES
P6048
P6056
P6057
Dc to 200 MHz 10X
II
I
•
Dc to 3.5 GHz 10X 500 f!
Dc to 100 MHz
Dc to 1.4 GHz 100X 5000 f!
I
I
I
P6046
•
•
..
• I.
1000: 1 Cmrr at 50 MHz
Low Capacitive Loading, 1 pF or Less
± 250 V Maximum Voltage with
10X Attenuator
Dual Probe Tips for Greater Cmrr
at High Frequencies
For 50 f! Wide Band Scopes
< 70 ps Probe to Probe Variation
Low Capacitance 1 pF- 1 kf!
Ac/dc Switch
The P6048 is a miniature low capacitance probe
for use with 1 Mfl 20 pF oscilloscopes. The probe
Input Impedance of . 1 kf! paralleled by 1 pF is
Intended for applications where capacitor loading
may distort the circuit waveforms. Ac or dc
coupling switch is available to extend the measurement range .
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - lOX . Input Resistance - 1 KII. Input Capacitance -1 pF or less. Maximum Input dc - 20 V; Ac 200 V.
Ac Low Frequency - 7 kHz or less. Bandwidth - (wilh 250
MHz oscilloscope wilh 1 M!!/20 pF input) 175 MHz. Typical
Probe Risetime - 1.95 ns.
Ot3-0085-00
Ot 3-0090-00
166-0404-01
166-0433-00
175-0124-01
175-0263-01
206-0114-00
344-0046-00
352-0090-00
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 TIP, probe, bayonet (BM)
1 TIP, probe, rectractable hook (BN)
2 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
1 INSULATING SLEEVE, ground lead (CI)
1 LEAD, ground, 13 cm (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground, 7.5 cm (3 in) (AV)
1 TIP, hook probe (CK)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 HOLDER, probe
Order P6048 10X Probe, 6 ft,
010-0215-00 _......................................... $175
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339.
328
The P60S6 is a miniature low-capacitance probe
for use with SO f! wide -band oscilloscopes .
Bandwidth is dc to 3.S GHz. This probe can also
be used with 50 f! sampling systems, with an appropriate BNC adapter. The P60S6 is equipped
with a special BNC connector that provides trace
identification and CRT READOUT information
when used with plug-in units and mainframes that
have these features . A convenient button on the
probe activates the trace identification function .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Rise nme
Input Z @ 1 GHz
Max Dc + Peak Ac
Derated Above
Max Peak @ 1 GHz
Max Peak Pulse
344-0046-00
206-0114-00
013-0085-00
214-0283-00
175-0249-00
P6056
< 100 ps
300 Il
16 V
800 MHz
9V
500 V < 1 ms
P6057
< 250 ps
1500 Il
50 V
500 MHz
21 V
500 V < 1 ms
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 TIP, hook probe (CK)
1 TIP, probe bayonet (BM)
1 CONTACT, electrocal (CS)
1 LEAD, ground, 7.5 cm (3 in) (AY)
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6056 10X, 50 {2 Probe, 6 ft. ,
010-6056-03 ......................... ...•... ....•..... $140
911, 010-6056-05 .. _....................... _._........................ _•..... $ 140
P6057 100X, 50 f! Probe, 6 ft,
010-6057-03 .......................................... $145
911, 010-6057-05 ............................................................ $145
The P6046 Differential Probe and P6046 Amplifier
Unit provide new measurement capabilities with
all Tektronix Oscilloscopes. The differential-signal
processing takes place in the probe itself, resulting in high common-mode signal rejection at higher frequencies. Differential probe-tip signal processing minimizes the measurement errors
caused by differences in probes, cable lengths,
and input attenuators.
CHARACTERISTICS
Cmrr - With deflection factors 01 1 mV/div to 20 mV/div : at
least 10,000 :1 alSO kHz, 5.000 :1 at 1 MHz, and 1,000:1 at 50
MHz. Common·mode Linear Dynamic Range - ± 5 V, ± 50
VWlth lOX attenuator. Bandwidth - Dc to 100 MHz (- 3 dB).
Rise Time - 3.5 ns or less. Dellection Factor Range - 1
mV/dlv to 200 mV/div in 8 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence,
accurate Within 3% (With an oscilloscope deflection factor of 10
mV /di~) . Input RC - 1 Mf! paralleled by 10 pF or less. Input
Coupling - Ac or dc, selected by a switch on the probe. Low
frequency response ac-coupled is - 3 dB at 20 Hz. 2 Hz with
lOX attenuator. Displayed Noise - 280 "V or less (tangentially measured). Maximum Input Voltage - ± 25 V (dc +
peak ac), ± 250 V With lOX attenuation, derated with frequency. Output Impedance - 50 f! through a BNC-connector. 50 Il
termination supplied with amplifier for use with 1 Mil systems.
Probe Cable - 6 It long . terminated with special nine-pin connector. Amplifier Power Requirements - lOW max 48 to
400 Hz. Factory wired for 105 V to 125 V ac (117 V ac n~minal)
opertalon. Transformer taps permit operation at 210 V to 250
V ac (234 V ac nominal).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
014-0029-00
1 HANGER ASSEMBLY
1 CABLE ASSY, RF (CW)
012-0076-00
011 -0049-01
1 TERMINATION, 50 Il (BJ)
1 CARRYING CASE
016-0111 -01
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6046 FET Differential Probe, Amplifier, and
Power Supply 010-0232-00 ................ $1490
W/o Amplifier and Power Supply, 010-0213-00 ......... $775
Power Supply with Amplifier 01 5-0106 -00 .................. $730
TEK
CURRENT PROBES
CURRENT PROBE AMPLIFIER
SUGGESTED MEASUREMENTS
A6303/ A6302
X-ray Tube Currents
The TEKTRONIX A6303 and A6302 are two current probes designed to be used with the AM 503
Current Probe Amplifier. any TM 500 Power Module and an oscilloscope.
SCR Currents
Power Supply Currents
Motor Start-Up Currents
Industrial Control Currents
Relay Currents
Common-Mode Rejection of DC and
AC Currents
Both probes make ac or dc coupled current
measurements simply by opening their sliding
jaws and placing them around the conductor
being tested. With their combination ac and dc
measurement capabilities. both can measure fast
transients. low frequency response , and dc levels
all at the same time. For differential or sum
measurements, just place the conductors in the
probe jaw in the proper phase.
The A6303, measures currents to 100A within the
frequency range of dc to 15 MHz. It features a
large 1 x 0.83 inch (2.5 x 2.1 cm) jaw opening to
accommodate large cables. Peak pulse measurements may be made to 500 A.
The A6302 measures currents to 20 A, 50 A peak,
within the frequency range of dc to 50 MHz. By
adding the CT-5 Current Probe, you can extend
the capabilities of the A6302 to a 5000 A/div
range (50,000 A peak).
A6303 Current Probe
100 A Ac and Dc Current Measurements
Dc to 15 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurements to 500 A
Ac or Dc Coupling
1 inch x 0.830 inch (2.5 x 2.1 cm)
Jaw Opening
Minimal Loading - 0.02 0 Insertion
Z at 1 MHz, 0.15 0 at 15 MHz.
Both the A6303 and the A6302 are used for
making SCR power supply, industrial control , and
motor start-up current measurements. The A6303
Is especially recommended for measuring the
current in X-ray tubes to insure compliance with
the performance standards of PL 90-602, the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968. Both are valuable measurement tools when
low loading is important, as when testing high
impedance pOints, or with current dependent
devices.
The A6303 or A6302 is connected to the AM 503
through a multi-pin connector. The AM 503 operates in any of the TM 500 Power Modules. It is
calibrated in 12 steps; the knob skirt is illuminated
to indicate current per division. Bandwidth can be
limited to 5 MHz to eliminate unwanted transients .
Both ac and dc coupling are provided. Ac coupling allows the measurement of low amplitude
signals on a high-level dc current. A front-panel
light warns of input currents above 100 A dc with
the A6303 or 20 A dc with the A6302. A push
button allows degaussing of probe when it is
removed from the circuit and locked in operating
position.
The output of the A6303/AM 503 can be displayed on any oscilloscope with at least a 50 MHz
bandwidth and 10 mV sensitivity, the A6302/AM
503 on a 75 MHz oscilloscope with 10 mV sensitivity to display the probe 's full bandpass. The AM
503 output can be plugged directly into a 50 n
recording instrument, or a 50 n termination which
is supplied .
A6302 Current Probe
20 A Ac and Dc Current Measurements
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurements to 50A,
50,000 A with the CT -5 Current Probe
Current Probe
Ac or Dc Coupling
Small Loading - 0.1 0 Insertion Z at MHz,
0.5 0 at 50 MHz.
A6302 CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to .. 50 MHz ( - 3 dB), .. 7 Hz to > 50 MHz
( 3 dB) ac coupled : the system's bandwidth may be limited to
~ 5 MHz with the AM 503 front panel switch .
Rise Time - 7 ns or less.
Maximum Current - 20A (dc + peak ac).
Maximum Peak Pulse Current - 50 A. Not to exceed 100
A.s.
Sensitivity - 1 mAldiv to 5 A/div within 3% (in calibrated
steps) into a 50 Ilload : Indicating device sensitivity 10 mV/div.
Insertion Impedance - 0.1 Il at 5 MHz, 0.5 n at SO MHz.
Maximum Voltage (bare conductor) - 500 V.
Maximum Conductor Size - 0.15 inch.
Cable Length - 2 meters.
Propagation Delay - ~ 30 ns.
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES
1 LEAD. elec, probe ground, 13 em
175-0124-01
(5 in) (AW)
175-0263-01
1 LEAD, elec, probe ground , 7.5 cm
(3 in) (AV)
344-0046-00
2 CLIPS, miniature alligator (AU)
ORDERING INFORMATION
A6303 Current Probe,
010-6303-01 .......................................... $845
A6302 Current Probe,
010-6302-01 .......................................... $440
AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier
(See page 277) ............................................. $875
F-5010P3 System (includes assembled
and tested A6303, AM 503
and TM 501) ............ ..................................
$2100
F-5010P2 System
(includes assembled
and tested A6302, AM 503
and TM 501) .................... .. .. .. .. ..................
$1675
AM 503 tNCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES
012-0057-01
011-0049-01
1 BNC CABLE, 50 n (cv)
1 BNC TERMINATION, SO
n (BJ)
The AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier requires one
of the TM 500 Series Power Modules listed below.
The number of plug-ins the module will accept is
designated by the last digit in the part number.
The optional interface allows connections between plug-ins to be made through the rear panel
of the power module . See page 296.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TM 501 Power Module ......................... $285
With Opt 02 Interface .............................................. Add $55
TM 503 Power Module .......................... $285
With Opt 02 Interface .............................................. Add $75
TM 504 Power Module .......................... $315
With Opt 02 Interface .............................. ...... ........ Add $100
TM 506 Power Module .......................... $440
With Opt 02 Interface ............................................ Add $150
RTM 506 Power Module
(rack mount version) ............................. $560
With Opt 02 Interface ............................................ Add $150
A6303 CHARACTERISTICS
TM 515 Traveler Mainframe ...... ........... $545
Bandwidth - Dc to .. 15 MHz ( - 3 dB), .. 7 Hz to .. 15 MHz
( - 3 dB) ac coupled. Bandwidth can be limited to "" 5 MHz with
AM 503 front-panel switch.
Rise Time - 23 ns or less.
Maximum Current - 100 A (dc + peak ac).
Maximum Peak Putse Current - 500 A. Not to exceed
10,000 A.s.
Sensitivity - 10 mA/div to 50 A/div within 3%, (in calibrated
steps) into 50 n load : indicating device (oscilloscope) sensitivity
10 mV/div.
Insertion Impedance - 0.02 II at 1 MHz, 0.15 n at 15 MHz.
Maximum Voltage (bare conductor) - 700 V.
Maximum Conductor Size - 0.830 inch (2.11 cm).
With Opt 05 Interface ...... ........................................ Add $75
With Opt 06 48·440 Hz Fan ................................... Add $150
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
CT· 5 Current Probe
Order 015-0189-01 ........................................................ 5980
CT -5 Opt 05 (w /o dc bucking coil)
Order 015·0189·00 ........................................................ $800
See page 331 for more information.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
016-0622-001 CARRYING CASE
~?Q
CURRENT PROBES
PROBE AMPLIFIER
TEK CURRENT
P6021
P6022
w/ Term
•
I
134
w/Term
Current Probe Amplifier
I
I
Use to Expand the Low Frequency
Capability and Sensitivity of
Either Probe
For General Purpose Applications
Small Size Suitable for Compact Circuitry
120 Hz to 60 MHz
935 Hz to 200 MHz
Clip-on Probe
Clip-on Probe
The individual units, P6021 , 134, and P6022 provide versatility in a user-assembled ac current
measurement system. These various components
can be assembled into a variety of performance
packages.
P6021 w/134
P6021 wlterm
P6022 w/134
P6022 wlterm
The P6201 and P6022 are ac current probes
designed for use with real time oscilloscopes.
Either probe, with passive termination or with the
amplifier, can be used with oscilloscopes having
input resistance of 1 MQ or greater. (Neither the
termination nor the amplifier is required to use the
P6021 Probe with the TEKTRONIX 5A21N Amplifier.) Both probes provide the facility for accurate
current measurements over a wide range of
frequencies without breaking the circuit under
test.
Just open the spring-loaded slide, place the conductor (up to 0.15 inch with P6021 and 0.1 inch
with P6022) in the probe slot , and release the
slide. No electrical connection is required .
The shielded probe head is not grounded when
the slide is in the open position, eliminating accidental grounding of the circuit under the test.
For general purpose applications, the P6021 offers wide-band performance with excellent lowfrequency characteristics. The extra-small size of
the P6022 makes it ideally suited for measuring
current in compact semiconductor circuits.
Both probes ' low-frequency capabilities and sensitivity can be expanded using the 134 Current
Probe Amplifier.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Probe with Passive Termination
Sensitivity
P6021
P6022
2 mA/mV or 10 mNmV ; selected by termination switch. Accuracy ::t 3% .
1 mNmV or 10 mNmV ; selected by termination sWitch. Accuracy ± 3% .
Probe with 134 Amplifier
134 Amplilier swltchable
in steps Irom 1 mNdiv to
1 Ndiv (with 50 mV/div
oscilloscope setting.
Accuracy ± 3%.
Bandwidtht
P6021
2 mNmV ... 450 Hz to 60 MHz
10 mNmV .. 120 Hz to 60 MHz
12 Hz to 38 MHz
Probe Only'
P6022
1 mNmV- .. 8.5 kHz to 130 MHz
10 mNmV-.. 935 Hz to 200 MHz
100 Hz to 65 MHz
Mal
P6021
15 A p-p sinew ave between 1.2 kHz
and 5 MHz at 2 mNmV; between 300
Hz and 5 MHz at 10 mNmV .
6 A pop Slnewave between 10kHz
and 10 MHz at 1 mA/mV ; between
3 kHz and 10 MHz at 10 mA/mV
15 A p-p sinewave between
230 Hz and 5 MHz
Current
(CW)
P6022
Mal
P6021
6 A p-p sinewave between
1.3 kHz and 10 MHz
1.3 kHz and 10 MHz
15A peak , not to exceed
Current
500 A-"s
15 A peak , not to exceed
P6022
100 A peak . not to exceed 9 A-"s
Mal dc
0.5 A
9 A-"s
Noise
... 150 "A
Max Voltage (bare conductor)
600 V (de + peak ae)
600 V (de + peak ae)
Net Weight
"" lib
"" Sib
tAli bandwidths stated are - 3d8
'To estimate the scope/probe system bandWidth 'rom the probe only bandwidth. use the relationship
(t,system)2 ~ (t ,scopeJ2
250 A peak , not to exceed 500 A-"s
t,x 8W ~ O. 35
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339.
330
The 134 is used to extend the measurement capabilities of the P6021 or P6022 Current Probe. A
CURRENT/DIV switch provides calibrated current
steps from 1 mAldiv to 1 Aldiv (with the oscilloscope or plug-in unit adjusted for a deflection factor of 50 mV/div) . A passive termination is not
required when using a 134 and a P6021 or P6022.
The 134 can also be used as an auxiliary voltage
amplifier by placing the CURRENT/DIV switch in
the VOLTS position.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES (P6021 and P6022)
175-0125-01
175-0263-01
344-0046-00
1 LEAD, ground, 13 cm (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground, 7.5 em (3 in) (AV)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6021
P6021 Current Probe and Term. 5 ft.
015-0140-02 .......................................... $295
9 It and Term, 015-0140-03 .......... __ .............................. $295
5 It wlo Term, 010-0237-02 ........................................... $250
91t wlo Term,
010-0244-02 .. ................................................................. $250
P6022
P6022 Current Probe and Term, 5 ft.
015-0135-00 .......................................... $325
91t and Term, 015-0135-01 ........................ _........ _........ $325
5 It wlo Term, 010-0238-00 _.............. _........................... $255
91t wlo Term,
010-0238-02 ........ _...................... _.................................. _ $255
134
134 Current Probe Amplifier,
015-0057-02 .......................................... $540
Included Accessories:
014-0029-00
012-0104-00
015-0058-01
1 HANGER assembly
1 CABLE assembly (eX)
1 POWER SUPPLY, 110 V
Opt 04,230 V ac, 015-0057-03 _..................................... $540
Included Accessories: Same as above, but with 230 V power
supply (015-0059-01).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
for P6021 , P6022, and 134
Calibrator Adapter, BNC, Order 013-0092-00 ............ _... $33
Carrying Case for P6021 or P6022, and a 134
Amplifier, Order 016-0087-01 ...... _.................................. $23
Passive Termination
For P6021 , Order 011 -0105-00 .................................... $105
ForP6022, Order 011-0106-00 .......... _........ _................. $1 15
TEK
CURRENT
PROBES
Probe Cable
The 010-0164-00 probe cable connects the CT-2
Transformer and the oscilloscope input . A 50 !l
termination is used with the probe cable for terminating the probe cable at the high impedance
input of the oscilloscope.
CHARACTERISTICS
CT-1
1 GHz Ac Current Probe for 50 !l Systems
Used with 50 !l Systems, or Wide Band Nonsampling Oscilloscopes Using a 50 n Term
CT-1 Permanently Inserted in 50 !l Circuit
Has Minimum Effect on the 50 !l Environment
Probe Cable
The 010-0133-00 probe cable is an
interconnecting cable for the CT-1, used between
the transformer and oscilloscope input. If several
CT-1 Transformers are in a circuit, the probe
cable can be used to monitor anyone of them.
The probe cable can be used with other testpoint connectors, such as Amphenol Series 27
Sub-Minax or Sealectro Sub-Miniature RF.
CHARACTERISTICS
Sensitivity - 1 mVlmA within 3% into a 50 II load. Decay
Time Constant - 160 ~s . '" by 1% per 1.25 ~s ; limit. 25 ~S.
Rise Time - 0.5 ns. Frequency Respon se - up to 100
MHz ; - 3 dB at 1.2 kHz. - 3 dB at 200 MHz. Insertion Impedance - 0.04 II shunted by .. 7 mH in series with 0.9 mH with
a 50 II termination; 0.08 \l shunted by .. 7 mH In series with
0.9 mH without a 50 II termination. CapaCitan ce Loading Typically 1.8 pF for a bare #16 gauge wire passing through the
CT -2 transformer; 0.7 pF for a #22 gauge wire. Maximum
Voltage of Circuit Under Te st - 1000 V (dc + peak ac).
Direct Current - Reduces the UR time constant by a factor of
2 at 175 mAoPulse Current Rating - 36 A peak. with a maximum amp-second product of 50 A ~S . RMS Current Rating 1.25 A maximum. Temperature Rating - 25 ' C to + 65 ' C.
Transformer Physical Dimensions - Same as CT- t . Probe
Cable Impedance - 50 11. Probe Cable Anenuation - 1X.
Cable Length - 42 in. Output Connector - BNC type.
Included Accessories:
010-0164'()()
1 CABLE, probe
011-(X)49-01
1 TERMINATION, 50 II (BJ)
ORDERING INFORMATION
CT-2 Plus Cable and Term,
015-0047-00 .......................................... $140
wl o Cable or Term, 015-0046-00 .... _............. __ ................ S85
Probe Cable, (010-0164·00) ........................................... S48
Sensitivity - 5 mVlmA within :t 3% Into a 50 II load. Decay
Time Constant - 6.35 ~s ... by 1% per 50 ns; limit. 1 ~s .
Rise Time - less than 350 ps. Frequency Response - 25
kHz to 1 GHz (- 3 dB). Insertion Impedance - 1 II shunted
by ~ 6 ~H with a 50 11 termination; 2 II shunted by .. 5 ~H
without a 50 11 termination. CapaCitance Loading - Typically
1.5 pF for bare #14 gauge wire passing through the CT-l
transformer; 0.6 pF for #20 gauge. Maximum Voltage of Circuit Under Test - 1000 V (dc plus peak ac) Direct Current Reduces the UR time constant by a factor of 2 at 75 mAo
Pulse Current Rating - 12 A peak . with a 50 II load. with a
maximum amp-second product of 1 A ~S . RMS Current Rating
- 450 mA maximum with a 50 11 load. Temperature Rating 2s ' C to :t 65 ' C. Transformer Physical Dimensions - 318 x
9116 x 1-13116 in; #6-32 x 114 in mounting stud . Probe Cable
Impedance - 50 II. Probe Cable Anenuatlon - IX. Cable
Length - 18 in. Output Connector - GR type.
ORDERING INFORMATION
CT-1 Current Transformer and Probe,
015-0041-00 _......................................... $130
CT- l Current Transformer (without Probe),
015-0040-00 ......... _........................................_____ ..... _...... __ S78
is not exceeded. The P6021 and 134 Current
Probe Amplifier may also be used for measurements at normal power line frequency and above.
(The P6022 and CT-S are not compatible with
each otheL) The CT-S has receptacles for current
probes in either 20:1 or 1000:1 step-down ratios.
The 1.5 inch square opening makes it possible to
clip onto large conductors without breaking the
circuit under test. The core and shield assembly
is insulated from the windings and the handle .
This allows measurements on bare conductors to
3000 V, and to 10 kV RMS when using high voltage bushing.
Use of dc bucking coil assembly allows up to 300
A of dc to be tolerated without appreciably degrading the measurements. This is very useful for
measuring ac signals riding on top of dc.
CT-5 CHARACTERISTICS
The following are characteristics of the CT -5 using either the
A63021AM 503 or P602t l 134 combina tions.
Rile Time is 17.5 ns or less. In.ertion Impedance Is 20 ~Il or
less at 60 Hz . increasing to 20 mil at 1 MHz. Current Range Is
20 mAidiv to 100 Al dlv with A63021AM 503. and 20 mAldlv to
20 Al dlv with P6021 1134 (20: 1 step down ratio); 1 Aldlv to 5
k Al div w ith A63021AM 503 . 1 Al dlv to 1 k Al dlv with
P6021 1134. (1000:1 step down ratiO). Accuracy is :t 4%. Max
Current Is t 000 A peak CW.· Amp-Sec product is 8 A-s. Max
Voltage of circuit test is 3000 V (bare conductor). Max Dc
Bucking Current is 300 mA to buck out 300 A dc (using dc
bucking cOil). Dimensions and weight - the length is t 0.5 in.
width Is 2.25 in. height is 9.5 In. net weight Is .. 4 lb.
• Max current 1.000 A peak from 20 Hz to 1.2 kHz derating fO
100 A peak at 1 MHz.
Included Accessories:
016-0191-03
1 CARRYING CASE
015-0194-00
t BUSHING, high voltage, 12 in
ORDERING INFORMATION
CT-5 Current Probe (includes Dc Bucking
Coil) 015-0189-01 ................................. $980
wl o Dc Bucking COli,
015-0189-00 ................................... __ .. __ .. _....... _............... S800
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Dc Bucking coli, 015-0190-00 ............................... _.. _... S240
High. Voltage Bushing, 4 It long, inside diameter
1 in, 0 15-0194-01 ........._................................... _._ .......... _. S40
CT -3 SIGNAL PICKOFF
Designed for use wit h hig h -frequency
oscilloscopes, the CT-3 Pickoff provides a convenient means of picking off a signal in a 50 !l system. Used with any of the Tektronix sampling instruments, the CT-3 provides the link for use as a
trigger source.
CT-5
Pulsed Currents to 50,000 A
20 mA per Division Sensitivity
Probe Cabte, 010-0 133-00 __ ........................... _...... _...... _.. S63
1.5 Inch Diameter Conductors
Measurements on Bare Conductors to 3000
V Nullifies Dc Effects to 300 A
The CT-S is a clip-on high-current transformer
which extends the measurement capability of
Tektronix Clip-on Current Probes. Maximum lowfrequency performance is obtained using the
A6302IAM 503 Dc Current Probe. Pulse current to
50,000 A may be measured using the P6021 and
passive termination, provided the 0.5 A-s rating
SenSitivity Is 10% of the vollage under test. into a 50 II load.
Decay Time Constant Is 4.5 ~S at 0 dc current. Rise Time Is
less than 0.4 ns. Frequency Response is 50 kHz to 875 MHz
at 0 dc current. Insertion Impedance with 50 II termination is 1
\I shunted by 4.5 ~H . 2\1 shunted by 4.5 ~ H without a 50 M
termination. Vswr is less than 1.2 at 1.5 GHz. Voltage Rating
at 0 V dc is 25 V RMS. 1 kV pulse peak . The Vs product is 100
V~s . If exceded . the UR decay will decay rapidly toward zero.
CT-3 Signal Pickoff, Order 017-0061-00 ..................... S130
CT-2
CT-S CURRENT MEASUREMENT COMBINATIONS
Current Div
Scope Set
100 MHz Ac Current Probe
Use with Oscilloscopes up to 100 MHz BW
Insulated Case for Limited Space
Applications
Several CT -2 Transformers Can Be Used in
the Circuit and Monitored by One Cable
Product
CT · 51A63021AM 503
CT-SIP6021 1134
CT -SIP602 11Term
10 mVl div
20mAt05kA
400 mA to 100 A
50 mVl dlv
20 mAtolkA
2A to 500 A
Bandwidth
0.5 Hz to 20 MHz
12 Hz to 20 MHz
120 Hz to 20 MHz
A-I
Product
0.1
0.5
0.5
M.. Current
RMS
700 A
700 A
700 A
Peak Pulse
50 kA
15 kA
50 kA
331
MODULAR
PROBES
TEK PASSIVE
1m
P6120
,•
Dc to 60 MHz
P61 0 1
P61 05
P6108
Dc to 34 MHz 1 X
•
I
1
1
•
,
,
Modular, Snap-Together Parts
Low Cost
The P6120 miniature 10X passive probe, a continuation of the modular design concept , offers
good performance at a very attractive price. It
performs particularly well in combination with
2200-Series Oscilloscopes. The probe is designed
to be repairable and employs a replaceable compensation box, cable , and probe head, with the
ground attached by a shielded-pin receptacle in
the probe head. User comfort and safety are
enhanced by the probe head shape. Two cable
lengths are available: 1.5 and 3.0 meters. All
modular probe accessories fit the P6120.
The probe is also designed to allow use of the
optional push on/pull off Ie Grabber Tip that
greatly facilitates attachment in congested circuit
areas such as DIP leads and mUlti-pin connectors.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc to 60 MHz ( - 3dS). Rise Time - < 5.9 ns.
Aftenuation (System) - lOX ± 2% (with oscilloscope resistance 01 1 Mil ± 1%). Input Resistance (Probe) - 9.0 Mil
1- 1% senes resistor. Input Resistance (System) 10 M fl
j 1%. Input Capacitance 14 pF with 1.5 meter cable. 17 pF
with 3.0 meter cable. Maximum Input Voltage (Ac /Dc Coupled) - 500 V (dc + peak ac) to 3 MHz. derated to 70 V (dc +
peak ac) at 50 MHz. Compensation Range - 23 pF to 51 pF.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
016-0521 -00
1 POUCH, Accessory (not shown)
013-0107-04
1 TIP, Retractable (8S)
166-0404-01
1 SLEEVE, Insulating (CH)
334 -2794-02
2 BAND, Marker (Silver-Gray) (not shown)
195-0950-00
1 GROUND LEAD, 25-cm (10-in)
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6120 10X Voltage Probe and Accessories:
I .S-meter cable 010-6120-01 """ """"_" " _"""""""" "" $7S.
Optional Tip, Probe with Actuator (tC Grabber):
013-0191 -00 """"""" " ".""""." " """ _" __ """ __ "" _" ,,,, _,,,,,, $10
332
Dc to 100 MHz 10X
A
Simplified, Faster Maintenance
and Repairs
High Fidelity Signal Acqu isition
at Low Cost
Rugged for Greater Reliability
Available in Three Lengths
Modular parts snap together
•
1
A ,
A
A
I
500 V Maximum Voltage
Dc to 100 MHz 10X with Readout
,
•
Modular probes are an exciting new concept in
probe design . The P6101 , P6105, P6106, P6107 ,
P6108, P6120 and P6149 Probes divide into three
modules (probe heads , cables , and
connector/com- pensation boxes). The modules
snap together making maintenance and repair
less expensive, faster, and much easier. Snap-on
replacement modules eliminate soldering irons
and tools, and modular probes do not have to be
sent in to be repaired because spare modules
can be ordered and stocked. Strain relief and
modular component design make these probes
rugged for greater reliability.
The P6101 , P6105, P6106, and P6108 are available in three color-coded lengths - blue for one
meter, yellow for two meters, and red for three
meters. (The P6149 and P6107 are two meters
long.) These probes may be used to acquire high
fidelity signal from low source-impedance circuits.
Tektronix Modular Probes are designed for specific Tektronix Instruments, but may be purchased as options for all Tektronix Oscilloscopes
with 1 Mfl and appropriate pF inputs as indicated
in the chart. The P6106 is standard with the 475A
and 475 oscilloscopes.
For modular probe replacement parts, see
page 338_
TEK
P6106
P6107
Dc to 300 MHz 10X with readout
~
I
•
•
I
1
•
•
•
The P6101 is a 1X, 1 Mil probe. The P6105,
P6106, P6107, and P6108 are 10X, 10 Mil probes.
With oscilloscopes that are equipped with vertical
scale or CRT readout , the P6105 and P6106 will
automatically scale the readout by a factor of 10.
This makes mental calculations unnecessary.
Also ground level can be determined on the
display by actuating a button on the probe head,
without having to return to the oscilloscope.
I
I
0
I
The P6105 IS standard with the TEKTRONIX 434,
455, 465B, and rackmount oscilloscopes. And the
P6 108 is standard with the T932A and T935A
oscilloscopes.
Dc to 100 MHz 10X
0
P6149Dc to 50 MHz 10X with readout
I
•
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
All probes, except as noted
013-0107-03 1 TIP, retractable hook (8S)
1 SLEEVE, insulating (CH)
166-0404-01
175-0124-01
1 LEAD, ground, 13 cm (AW)
175-0125-01
1 LEAD. ground , 30 cm (AX)
P6101 , P6105, P6108, P6149 only
175-0263-01
1 LEAD, ground , 7.5 cm P6106 only (AV)
2 TIPS, probe
3 PRo MARKER BANDS, (black, white, and
silver gray) All except P6149 (not shown)
2 PRoMARKER BANDS, (gray . and silver
gray) P6149 (not shown)
344-0046-00 2 CLIPS, miniature, alligator (AU)
352-0351 -00 1 PROBE HOLDER
016-0521 -00 1 POUCH, accessory (not shown)
" Avallable In packages of 10 only, 206-0191 -03. (eM)
•Available in packages of 9 sets of different colors01 6-0633-00 .
Type Attenuation Length
P6101
IX
1m
2m
3m
Loading
1 Mil
32 pF
54 pF
78 pF
P6105
lOX
1m
2m
3m
010-6105-01
01 0-61 05-03
01 0-6105-05
10M!!
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
P6106
lOX
1m
2m
3m
2m
1m
2m
3m
010-6106-01
010-6106-03
010-6106-05
10 Mil
010-6107 -03
010-6108-01
010-6 108-03
010-6108-05
10 M!l
10 M!l
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
13.0 of
10.5 pF
13.0 pF
15.5 pF
P6107
P6108
lOX
lOX
P6t49
lOX
2m
010-6t49-03
10 M!!
15.5 pF
' Max Input Voltage IS 500 V de + peak ae to 300 kHz derated to 20 Vat
' Max Input Voltage IS 500 V de + peak ae to 1.7 MHz derated to 2 7 Vat
JMax Input Voltage IS 500 V de + peak ae to 1. 7 MHz derated to 30 Vat
'Max tnput Voltage IS 500 V de + peak ae to 1.7 MHz derated to 70 Vat
'Seope bandwidth must be 325 MHz.
Useful
BW MHl
34
15.5
8
100
100
95
Dc
Max
500 V'
v'
151047
YE S
300'
250
150
500 V'
15 to 24
YE S
tOO
100
100
95
500
500
v'
v'
14 to 47
15 to 47
YES
NO
50
30 MHz.
100 MHz.
50 MHz.
100 MHz.
500
v'
20 to 62
NO
500
Scope
in pF
ANY
I
,
I
•
•
1
I
•
The P6149 features a right angle BNC connector.
This can be useful when bench space is limited .
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6101, 1X Probe, 2 m,
010·6101·03 ......... ,.................................. $60
1 m, 010-6 101 -01 .................... ........ ............. ............ ..... . $60
3 m, 010-6101 -05 .............................. ...... ...... .................. S60
P6105, 10X Probe, 2m,
010·6105·03 .......................................... $100
1 m, 010· 6105·0 1 .......................................................... S100
3 m, 010-6 105·05 ........ ...... ............................................. S l oo
P6106, 10X Probe, 2 m,
010·6106·03 ................. ......................... $124
CHARACTERISTICS
Package
Number
010-610 1-01
010-6101 -03
010-6101 -05
~
Readout
-
1 m, 010-6106· 01 ............ .. _.... ........................ .. .. ...... ..... $124
3 m, 010-6106-05 ........ ................................................... $124
P6107, 10X Probe, 2 m,
010·6107·03 .......................................... $105
P6108, 10X Probe, 2 m,
01 0· 61 08·03 ....... ........... ........ ...... ............ $90
1 m, 010-6108-0 1 .................................. .......................... S90
3 m, 010-6108-05 ............................................................. $90
P6149, 10X Probe, 2 m,
010·6149·03 ................. ......... .................. $95
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339.
333
MONOLITHIC
PROBES
TEK PASSIVE
P6006
and
P6007
CHARACTERISTICS
Probes
I •
1
1
Attenuation - 10X. Input Resistance - 10 MO. Input Ca pacitance - 7.5 pF for 3 .5 II probe cable when used with an
inslrumenl having 20 pF inpul capacilance; 8.5 pF for 6 It version : 11 pF for 9 It version; 13 pF for 12 It version. Bandwidth
- Dc to 35 MHz for 3.5 ft version. Voltage Rating - 600 V
dc. as peak or dc and ac peak combined . p op voltage derating
is necessary for cw frequencies higher than 5.7 MHz when
working into a 20 pF input. or higher than 3 .6 MHz when working into a 47 pF input.
013-0071 -00
134-0013-00
175-0124-01
175-0125-01
206-0015-00
206-0105-00
34 4-0046-00
352-0090-00
P6008
Probes
't I t:
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 TIP, prode. retractable hook (AD)
1 PLUG, tip. bana (AF)
1 LEAD, ground. 13 em (5 In) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground, 30 cm (12 in) (AX)
1 TIP, probe (0.055 In dial (AH)
1 TIP, probe. hook (AM)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 HOLDER, probe
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6006 10X Probe, 6 ft,
010-0160-00 ............................................ $80
3.5 It BNC, 010-0127·00 .................................................. S80
9 It BNC, 010-0146 -00 ..................................................... S80
12 It BNC, 010·0148·00 .................................................. S80
P6007
P6008(Environmental) 10X 100 MHz
Dc to 25 MHz 100X
- 50 · C to
+ 150 · C
Low Capacitance Loading
The P6007 is a low input capacitance, high-voltage (1 .5 kV) probe. It can be compensated to
match all Tektronix Plug-ins and Oscilloscopes
with nominal input capacitances of 15 pF to 55 pF
and input resistance of 1 Mfl. The P6007 is similar
to the photo of the P6006.
CHARACTERISTICS
P6006
Dc to 35 MHz 10X
Low Cost
The P6006 is a general-purpose probe. It can be
compensated to match all Tektronix Plug-ins and
Oscilloscopes with nominal input capacitances of
15 pF to 55 pF and input resistance of 1 Mfl. This
probe is more rugged and has a higher voltage
rating than the miniature probes.
Attenuation - tOOX . Input Resistance - 10 MH. Input Capacitance - 2.0 pF for 3.5 II prabe cable when used with an
instrument having 20 pF input capacitance ; 2.2 pF for lhe S It
version : 2.4 pF for the 9 II version : 2.S pF for the 12 II version.
Bandwidth - Dc to 25 MHz. Volatge Rating - 1.5 kV de or
ac RMS . 4.2 kV as pop. p op voltage derating is necessary for
cw frequenCies higher than 200 kHz . At 20 MHz, the maximum
allOwable pop voltage is 2 kV . Above 10 MHz , additional derating IS required depending on the input capacitance of the instrument used .
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Same as for PS006.
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6007 100X Probe, 6 ft,
010-0165-00 ............................................ $95
3.5 It, 010·0150· 00 .......................................................... S95
9 It, 010-0152-00 .. ...................................................... ..... S95
12 ft , 010·0154· 00 ......................................................... .. S95
334
The P6008 Environmental Probe is designed to
operate over - sooC to + 150°C for the probe
body and cable; the compensation box operates
from - 15°C to + 55°C. It is designed for use
with Tektronix dc to 100 MHz Oscilloscopes. The
probe can be compensated to match Tektroni
Plug-ins and Oscilloscopes with nominal input ca
pacitance of 12 pF to 47 pF and input resistanc
to 1 Mfl .
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - lOX . Input Re al.tance - 10 Mil. Input Ca
pacltance - ~ 7.5pF when used wilh an instrumenl having
20 pF input capacitance. Bandwidth - Dc to 100 MHz. Volt
age Rating - SOD V dc. ac peak . or dc and ac peak combined
p op voltage derating is necessary for cw frequencies highe
than 20 MHz . At 40 MHz. the maximum allowable pop voltag
is 300 V.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
134-0013-00
344 -0045-00
175-0525-00
352·0090-00
1 PLUG, tip. banana (AF)
1 CLIP, alligator (AT)
1 LEAD. ground. 30 cm (12 inXBD)
1 TIP. probe. retractable hook (A E)
Order P6008 Environmental 10X Probe, 6 ft,
010-0129-01 .......................................... $195
TEK
MONOLITHIC
PASSIVE PROBES
P600S (Non-Environmental) 10X 100 MHz
P6009
Dc to 120 MHz 100X
P6015 40 kV
1000X
1
•
,
•
~~
~
High Voltage Probe
Measure Up to 40 kV Peak Pulse
Up to 20 kV Dc
Low Capacitance
Dc to 120 MHz
The P6008 Non-Environmental Probe is designed
for use with Tektronix dc to 100 MHz
Oscilloscopes. This 10X attenuation probe can be
compensated to match plug -ins and
oscilloscopes with input capacitances of 8 pF to
50 pF and input resistance of 1 Mf!.
The P6OO8 (Non-Environmental) is similar to the
photo of the P6008 (Environmental).
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - lOX . Input Resistance - 10 Mil. Input Capacitance - :::. 7.5 pF when used with an instrument having a
20 pF input capacitance. Bandwidth - Dc to 100 MHz. Voltage Rating - 600 V de. ac peak . or de and ac peak combined .
pop Voltage derating is necessary for cw frequencies higher
than 20 MHz. At 40 MHz. the maximum allowable p-p Voltage
is 300 v.
134-0013-00
344-0046-00
175-0125-01
175-0124-01
175-0263-01
352-0068-00
013-0071 -00
206-0060-00
206-0105-00
206-0015-00
013-0052-00
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 PLUG, tip. banana (AF)
1 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 LEAD, ground, 30 em (12 in) (AX)
1 LEAD, ground, 13 em (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground, 7.5 em (3 in) (AV)
1 HOLDER, probe
1 TIP, probe, retractable hook (AD)
1 TIP, probe,(0.080 in dial (AI)
1 TIP, probe, hook (AM)
1 TIP, probe, (0.055 in dial (AH)
1 TIP, probe, retractable hocl (AA)
Order P6008 Non-Environmental 10X Probe,
3.5 ft,
010-0129-01 " •...... " .•..••..•.••.••••.••..• " ...... $195
Low CBpacitance - 2,5 pF
100X Attenuation
The P6OO9 is a low input capacitance, high-voltage (1 .5 kV) probe designed for use with
Tektronix dc to 150 MHz Oscilloscopes. The
probe can be compensated to match Tektronix
Plug-ins and Oscilloscopes with nominal input
capacitances of 12 pF to 47 pF and input resistance of 1 Mf!.
A version of the P6009 is equipped with a special
BNC connector that provides CRT READOUT information when used with plug-in units and
mainframes that have these features . The
readout connector is not compatible with most
standard non-readout BNC connectors.
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - 100• . Input Resistance - 10 Mfl. Input Ca:::0: 2.5 pF when used with instrument having 20
pF Input capacitance. Bandwidth - Dc to t 20 MHz. Voltage
Rating - 1.5 kV de or ac RMS, 4 kV ac p-p. pop voltage
derating is necessary for cw frequencies higher than 200 kHz.
At 40 MHz . the maximum allowable p-p voltage is 425 V.
paCitance -
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
175-0125-01 1 LEAD, ground, 30 em (12 in) (AX)
175-0t24-01 1 LEAD, ground, t3 em (5 in) (AW)
175-0263-01 1 LEAD, ground, 7.5 em (3 in) (AV)
013-0071-001 TIP, probe, retractable hook (AD)
013-0052-00 1 TIP, probe, retractable hock (AA)
344-0046-002 CLIP, alligator (AU)
206-0060-00 1 TIP, probe. (0.080 in dial (AI)
206-0105-00 1 TIP, probe, hook (AM)
134-0013-00 1 PLUG, tip, banana (AF)
206-0015-00 1 TIP, probe (0.055 in dial (AH)
352-0090-00 1 HOLDER, probe
Order P6009 100X Probe, 9 ft, w /Readout,
010-0264-01 ...................................•...•.. $150
wl o Readout,
0 10-0170-00 ....................... ,.. ,........................................ $ 1 50
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339
+ Peak
Ac
1000X Attenuation
75 MHz Useful Bandwidth
For 1 Mf! Inputs
The P6015 provides 1000X attenuation for oscilloscope measurements up to 40 kV peak. Voltage
or duty cycle derating is necessary for rf voltages
at frequencies over 100 kHz , or in temperatures
above 25°C.
The probe can be compensated for instruments
with nominal input capacitance
of 12 pF to 47 pF.
CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Rating - 40 kV peak pulse : 20 kV de or RMS continuous at 25' C. pop VOltage derating is necessary for cw frequencies higher than 100 kHz or in temperatures above 25 ' C.
At 10 MHz the ma.imum allowable p-p voltage is 13 kV. Attenuation - 1000• . Inpul Rellstance - 100 Mil. Inpul Capacilance - ~ 3 pF. Probe Rise Time - = 4 ns. Temperalure Range - 10' C to 55 ' C. Cable Lenglh - 10 ft.
015-0049-00
344-0005-00
352-0056-00
252-0120-00
016-0128-02
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 COMPENSATING BOX, BNC
1 CLIP, alligator (AS)
1 PROBE HOLDER
1 CAN, high-voltage dielectric fluid (BH)
1 CARRYING CASE
Order P6015 1000X Probe, 10 ft cable,
010-0172-00 "" .. """"" """" """"" ,, .. ,," $555
MONOLITHIC
PROBES
TEK PASSIVE
P6028
Dc to 17 MHz 1X
P60538
P6055
Dc to 250 MHz 10X
20,000:1 Cmrr 10X
••
I
1
•
I
I
•
•
•
I
I
Low Cmrr
Low Capacitance
Miniature
Dc - 60 MHz
Fast Rise Time
Dc to 17 MHz 1X
General Purpose
The P6028 is a general-purpose 1X voltage probe
designed for use with Tektronix Oscilloscopes
that have BNC input connectors.
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - 1X. Inpul Resistance - 1 Mil, Instrument input R included. Input Capacitance - 30 pF for 3.5 It probe
cable ; 47 pF for 61t version ; 70 pF for 9 ft version ; 92 pF for 12
It version, instrument capaCitance excluded. FOf total Input ca pacitance of the system, add input C of instrument. Probe Rise
Time - ~ 10 ns. Bandwidth - Dc to 17 MHz. Vottage Rating - 600 v dc or ac p-p. pop voltage derating is necessary for
cw frequencies higher than 1 MHz . At 10 MHz, the maximum
allowable pop vOltage is 60 V.
175-0125-01
352-0068-00
344-0046-00
013-0071 -00
134-0013-00
206-0105-00
206-0060-00
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 LEAD, ground, 30 cm (12 in)( AX )
1 HOLDER, probe, molded
1 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 TIP, probe, retractable hook (AD)
1 PLUG, tip, banana (A F)
1 TIP, probe, hook (AM )
1 TIP, probe, 0.080 in dia (AI)
ORDERING INFORMATiON
P6028 1 X Probe, 6 ft,
010-0075-00 ,""_" ___ " __ "",,""_.,, .•• ,,.,,"",,. $48
The P6053B is a miniature fast-rise 10X probe de·
signed for Tektronix Instruments having a nominal
input capacitance of 15 to 24 pF. The probe has a
pushbutton for actuating the trace·identify function of the oscilloscope mainframe and readout
capability.
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - lOX . Input Resistance - 10 Mil. Input Ca pacitance - 9.5 pF with 3.5 It probe, 12.5 pF with 6 It verSion, 13.5 pF with 9 ft version. Bandwidth (with 225 MHz or
greater oscilloscope - '" 200 MHz for 3.5 and 6 ft versions,
< 115 MHz lor the 9 ft version. Voltage Rating 500 V (de +
peak ac). Peak voltage derating is necessary for cw frequencies higher than 5 MHz. At 10 MHz , the max allowable peak
voltage is 275 V; 23 Vat 100 MHz. 18 V at 150 MHz.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
013-0107-03
352-0351 -00
206-0114-00
013-0085-00
1 TIP, probe, retractable (8 S)
1 HOLDER, probe
1 TIP, hook probe, (CK)
1 TIP, probe, bayonet (8M)
175-0124-01
175·0263-01
344-0046-00
166-0404-01
1 LEAD, ground , 13 em (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground , 7.5 em (3 in) (AV)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
2 INSULATING SLEEVE, eleclrical (CH)
3.5 ft, 010-0074-00 ................................................... Add $48
9 It, 010-0076-00 ...................................................... Add $48
3.5 It, 010-6053-11 ................................................ Add $140
12 ft, 010-0071-00 .. ............................... ............ ...... Add $48
9 ft, 010-6053- 15 ....................... ............................ Add $140
336
Cmrr - 20,000: 1 from de to 1 kHz derating to 100: 1 at 20
MHz . Attenuation - Adjustable to lOX. Input Resistance 1 M!I i 0.5%. Input Capacitance - « 10 pF when used with
Instrument that has 20 pF input capacitance; 12.5 pF when
used with instrument that has 47 pF input capacitance. Maximum Useful Bandwidth - 60 MHz. Typical Probe Rise Time
- 5.8 ns. Maximum Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac) lrom dc
to 12 MHz . p op voltage derates to 100 V at 70 MHz.
Trace Identity Function for scopes with CAT Readout
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6053B 10X Probe, 6 ft,
010-6053-13 .. """" •. """ .. " .. " .. " .. ,, ........ $140
Included Accessories with double alpha
codes are pictured on pages 338 and 339.
The P6055 is a miniature, low-capacitance, 10X
probe designed for use with Tektronix Differential
Amplifiers having nominal input capacitances
from 20 pF to 47 pF. The attenuation ratio is adjustable to 10X to compensate for differences in
input resistance of the amplifier (the amplifier input resistance must be 1 Mfl ± 2%). A special
locking type readout connector allows the probe
to be used with instruments with or without
readout capability.
When two P6055 Probes are used to drive the
two inputs of a differential amplifier, the ability to
change the attenuation ratio of one probe versus
the other is helpful in maintaining the cmrr of the
system .
CHARACTERISTICS
013-0107-03
003-0675-01
175-0124-01
175-1256-00
175-0125-01
206-0114-00
344-0046-00
166-0404-01
352-0090-00
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 TIP, probe, retractable (8S)
1 ADJUSTABLE TOOL, probe (CU)
1 LEAD, ground, 13 em (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, electrical, 13 em (6 in) (8G)
1 LEAD, ground, 30 em (12 in) (AX)
1 TIP, hook probe, (CK)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
2 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
1 HOLDER, probe
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6055 lOX Differential Probe, 3.5 ft,
010-6055-01 .... " .. " " .... " .. " .. " .. " ..... "" ... $220
Matched Pair of P6055
015-0437-00 .... " .. "" ...................... "" .... $400
MONOLITHIC
PASSIVE PROBES
TEK
P6060
P6062B
Dc to 35 MHz lOX
g •1
n.
j
I
I
,
I i 1
I
Dc to 100 MHz
P6063B
,
I i 1
I
Dc to 200 MHz
•
•
I
I
Precision Attenuation
1 X - 10X Selectable Attenuation
1 X - lOX Selectable Attenuation
Dc - 35 MHz
Switch on Probe Body
Switch on Probe Body
The P6060 is a precision passive probe with lOX
attenuation, for use with Tektronix low and midfrequency oscilloscopes used in differential applications. The precise attenuation also provides
greater accuracy for single-ended input applications, such as amplitude measurements with a
differential comparator. The probe can be compensated for use with any amplifier input having a
nominal input capacitance of 15 to 55 pF and
input resistance of 1 Mr!.
The P6062B is a passive dual attenuation probe
designed for Tektronix Oscilloscopes with
bandwidths to 100 MHz. A sliding switch on the
probe body selects lX or lOX attenuation. The
probe provides readout coding and a pushbutton
for actuating a ground reference in the lX or lOX
position . The ground reference can be used as a
means of trace identification for a multitrace display, The P6062B can be compensated with instruments having a nominal input capacitance of
15 to 47 pF. The lX position of the probe allows
the use of the full instrument sensitivity. This is
valuable when evaluating small signals of 10 MHz
or less. The lX-lOX switch allows the user to
switch in and out a decade of sensitivity without
returning to the oscilloscope. The user may also
arbitrarily switch from lX to lOX in order to evaluate the effects of loading by the oscilloscope.
CHARACTERISTICS
The P6063B is a fast-rise dual attenuation , passive probe designed for Tektronix Oscilloscopes
with bandwidths greater than 100 MHz. A sliding
switch on the probe body selects lX or lOX at tenuation. The probe provides readout coding
and a pushbutton for actuating a ground reference in the lX or lOX position. The ground reference can be used as a means of trace identification for a multi trace display. The P6063B can be
compensated with instruments having a nominal
input capaci tance of 15 to 24 pF
The BNC-type connector utilizes a special
grounding clip to shift the deflection factor indicator to lOX normal reading in 500Q-Series
Oscilloscopes.
CHARACTERISTICS
Allenuation lOX . Accuracy when used wilh a 1 Mfl
± 0.15% Inslrument input will be within ± 0.4%. When used
With a 1 Mil ± 2% instrument input the accuracy will be wllhin
! 2%. Input Resistance 10 Mil within ± 0.25% within a 1
Mil ± 0.15% instrument input ; 10 Mfl within ± O.4% when used
With a 1 Mil ± 2% instrument input. Input Capacitance , 6.0 pF for 3.5 It probe cable when used with Instrument havIng 15 pF Input capacitance; ~ 7.7 pF with 6 It version ; ~ 9 . 5
pF With 3.5 ft verSion when used with 55 pF instruments;
, 11 .5 pF for 6 fl version. Cmrr (Probe Pair) - At least 400: 1
(with 5A20N or 5A21 N) dc to 30 kHz. Bandwidth - at least 35
MHz with 3.5 It probe (with scope bandwidth of at least 60
MHz); 25 MHz with 6 It probe. Maximum Input Voltage - 600
V dc plus peak ac. pop derating is necessary for cw frequencies
higher than 3 MHz. Maximum input voltage at 50 MHz is 50 V.
INCLUDED ACCESSORtES
206-0060-00 1 TIP, probe 0.080 (AI)
344-0046-00 2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
134-0013-00 1 PLUG, tip, banana (AF)
175-0125-01 1 LEAD, ground. 30 cm (12 in) (AX)
175-0124-01 1 LEAD, ground , 13 cm (5 in) (AW)
206-0105-00 1 TIP, probe. hook (AM)
206-0015-00 1 TIP, probe. (0.055 in dial (AH)
013-0071 -00 1 TtP, probe, retractable hook (AD)
352-0090-00 1 HOLDER,probe
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6060 lOX Probe. 6 H.
010-6060-03 ......... _.................................. $78
3.5 II, Order 010-6060-01 ............................................... $78
Allenualion - lOX and IX . Input Resistance - IX position.
1 Mil; lOX position. 10 Mil ± 0.5%. oscilloscope input resistance must be 1 Mil within 2%. Input Capacitance - 3.5 It
probe cable is 100 pF in the 1X posilion. 13.5 pF in the lOX
posllion ; 6 fl version is 105 pF in the IX poSition, and 14 pF in
the lOX poSition. 9 It probe cable IS 135 pF in the 1X poSition
and 17 pF In the lOX poSition. Bandwidth - lOX probe IS at
least 100 MHz for the 3.5 fl and 6 It version; 95 MHz for the 9
fl verSion when used with a 100 MHz Oscilloscope. IX probe is
at least 8 MHz for the 3.5 It verSion, at least 6 MHz for the 6 It
verSion and at least 4.5 MHz for the 9 It version. Voltage Rating (10X Position) - 500 V (dc + peak ac derated with frequency and oscilloscope input coupling). 1X position. 100 V (dc
-+ peak ac derated with frequency).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
352-0351 -00 1 HOLDER, probe.
206-0114-00 1 TIP, hook probe (CK)
013-0107-03 1 TIP, probe, retractable (8S)
175-0124-01 1 LEAD, ground . 13 cm (5 In) (AW)
175-0125-01 1 LEAD, ground . 30 cm (12 in) (AX)
344 -0046-00 2 CLtP, alligator (AU)
166-0404-01 1 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
016-0521 -00 1 POUCH, accessory
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6062B Switchable Attenuation Probe. 6 H.
010-6062-13 ...... _...... _.......... _................. $150
3.5 ft, 010-6062-11 ........................................................ $150
9 ft, 010-6062 -15 ........................................................... $150
The 1X position of the probe allows the use of the
full instrument sensitivity. This is valuable when
evaluating small signals of 10 MHz or less. The
lX-lOX switch allows the user to switch in and out
a decade of sensitivity without returning to the
oscilloscope. The user may also arbitrarily switch
from lX to lOX in order to evaluate the effects of
loading by the oscilloscope.
CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - lOX and 1X. Input Resistance - 1 X poSitIon .
1 MIl. lOX poSition. 10 Mil ± 0.5%. oscilloscope Input resistance must be 1 Mil within 2% . Input Capacitance - 3.5 fl
probe cable IS 80 pF In the 1X poSition. 11 pF in the lOX POSItion ; 6 fl verSion is 105 pF in the IX poSition, and 14 pF in the
lOX poSition. Bandwidth - lOX probe (3.5 It and 6 It vers ions)
IS at least 200 MHz when used with an OSCilloscope with a
bandwidth .> 225 MHz. 1X probe for the 3.5 It version is at
least 12 MHz and for the 6 It version at least 6 MHz. Voltage
Rating - 500 v (de + peak ac derated with frequency .
352-0351 -00
206-0114-00
013-0107-03
175-0124-01
175-0125-01
344-0046-00
166-0404 -01
016-0521-00
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
1 HOLDER , probe
1 TIP, hook probe (CK)
1 TIP, probe. retractable (8S)
1 LEAD, ground . 13 cm (5 in) (AW)
1 LEAD, ground , 30 cm (12 in) (AX)
2 CLIP, alligator (AU)
1 INSULATING SLEEVE, electrical (CH)
1 POUCH, accessory
ORDERING INFORMATION
P6063B Switchable Attenuation Probe. 6 H.
010-6063-13 .......................................... $180
3.511,010-6063-11 ................................... ..................... $180
337
ACCESSORIES
TEK PROBE
Probe Ground Leads
Modular Probe
Replacement
Parts
-
AY
175-0249-00
.
AV
za:c
175-0263-01
Length
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
Probe
P6101
P6105'
P6106'
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
2 Meter
1 Meter
2 Meter
3 Meter
2 Meter
P6107
P6108
P6149
Probe Head
206-0223-00
$18
206-0223-00
$18
206-0223-00
$18
$43
206-0216-00
206-0217 -00
$43
206-0218-00
$43
$43
206-0216-00
206-0217-00
$43
206-0218-00
$43
$43
206-0217-00
$37
206-0224-00
$37
206-0225-00
$37
206-0226-00
206-0234-00
$34
Probe Cable
175-1661 -00
175-1661-01
175-1661-02
175-1661 -00
175-1661-01
175-1661-02
175-1661-00
175-1661 -01
175-1661-02
175-1661-00
175-1661 -00
175-1661 -01
175-1661-02
175-1661 -01
•
Compensator/Connector
103-0189-00
$18
$18
103-0189-00
103-0189-00
$18
206-0219-00
$42
206-0220-00
$42
$42
206-0221 -00
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
$26
206-0237-00
206-0238-00
206-0239-00
206-0247-00
206-0227-00
206-0228-00
206-0229-00
206-0235-00
BC
175-0849-01
AZ
175-0848-00
$60
$65
$65
BE
$40
$39
$42
$42
:::
175-1017-00
BG
-:
J&
$45
175-1256-00
• The BNC Connector with readout may be replaced with 131 -1799-01
#6-32 Probe Tips and Accessories
The following tips and adapters can be used on all Tektronix Probes that accept a
#6-32 screw-on tip, including the P6006, P6007, P6008, P6009, P6028 , and P6060
Probes.
AB
AC
AA
AP
AK
CODE
All.
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
338
AS
AT
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Bayonet ground assembly .... ...................
.. ........ 013-0052-00
Probe tiP to BNC ad~pter
.......... 013-0054-00
Probe tip to BNC adapter (lor P6028) .........
.. ....... 013-0056-00
Probe retractable hook tip ......
.. ........... 013-0071 -00
Probe retractable hook tip ....
...... .. ............. .. ....... 013-0071 -01
Probe banana tip ........
. ............ 134-0013-00
Probe ground cover (lor P6009) .................................. 166-0428-00
Probe straight tip (0.055 in dial ...............
.. ....... 206-0015-00
Probe spring tip (0.080 in dial ...................
.. ... 206-0060-00
Probe spring tip (accepts .065 In dla pin)
.... 206-0061 -00
Probe calibration tip (0.063 in dial ..
.. ........ 206-0100-00
Probe long straight tip (0.032 in dial .. .
.. ............. 206-0104-00
Probe hook up ................................................ ............. 206-0105-00
Probe pin tip (accepts 0.025 in IBM 5LT in) ................. 206-0134-03
Probe ground lead adapter (#6-32 to 0.025 in
square pin closing ...... .... .. ...... .... .. .......... .... .. ................. 206-0137-01
Probe spring tip (accepts 0.068 in dia pin)
.. .. .. 206-0168-00
Probe right angle hook tip .... .
.. .... 206-0185-00
IC tesl tip ..........
.. ........ 206-0203-00
All igator clip ..
.. .. 344-0005-00
Alligator clip ..........
.. ....................... ..... 344-0045-00
Minature alligator clip ...........
.. ........ 344-0046-00
AD
AU
PRICE
$ 6.50
16.00
17.00
3.00
3.00
.70
1.25
.70
1.50
1.00
10.00
1.00
1.00
4.00
1.75
2.25
1.30
1.25
3.60
1.25
1.25
LENGTH
(In)
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AV
Ground lead '
Ground lead'
Ground lead' ....
.. .. .. .............. ..
Ground lead lor 5-3A. P6056, P6057 .
Ground leads lor P6054 . P6075 .. ..
711.11 . and P6201
.................................... ..
AW
AX
AY
AZ
BA
BB
BC
AR
AE
3
5
12
3
3
12
Ground leads lor P6202 and P6420
3
6
PART
NUMBER
175-0263-01
175-0124-01
175-0125-01
175-0249-00
175-0848-00
175-0848-01
175-0848-02
175-0849-00
175-0849-01
175-0925-00
175-1017-00
175-1018-00
175-1256-00
252-0120-00
12
Ground lead lor P6008 Environmental
BD
6
Ground leads lor 5-311.. P6202, ....
BE
12
and P6420
BF
BG
Ground lead lor P6055 ...... ...................... ........ .. ..
6
BH
High-voltage dielectric lIuld ............................ ..
'For the P6053B. P6054A, P6075A, P6101 , P6105, P6106,
P6108. P6149, and other probes requiring clip-on ground
leads.
CABLE MARKER SETS (Not Pictured)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
For 1/8 in dia cable
......................
.. 016-0130-00
For 3/16 in dia cable ........................................................ ............ .. ...... . 016-0127-00
For mOdular cable . .. ................
.. .... .. .............. . 016-0633-00
PRICE
$2.00
2.00
2.00
3.75
1.50
1.60
1.60
5.50
5.50
3.50
3.00
3.00
4.50
4.50
PRICE
56.00
6.00
3.75
TEK
Slip-on Probe Tips and Adapters
The following tips and adapters are designed for
use with Tektronix Miniature Probes and accept a
slip-on tip.
I
BJ
BO
CZ
I
BL
BR
BU
BV
DB
CY
BM
BN
BO
BP
II
BZ
CJ
CB
CP
,
CK
DA
CODE
BI
BJ
BK
BL
BM
BN
BO
BP
BO
BR
BS
BT
BU
BV
BW
BX
BY
BZ
CA
CB
CC
BW
BX
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Probe tip extractor ......................................
003-0825-00
Termination, 50 II .. ......................................
011-0049-01
. ..... 013-0084-01
Probe tip to BNC adapter for all probes .....
Probe tip to BNC adapter for all, except P6202 ...... . ... 013-0084-02
Bayonet ground assembly .... .. ... .. ...
.. 013-0085-00
Retractable hook tip (for P6010 and P6048) ................. 013-0090-00
Retractable hook tip (for S-3A, P6202 ,
and P6420) ......
....................... .. ...... 013-0097-01
Retractable hook tip (for all modular probes) ........ ....... 013-0105-00
Retractable hook tip (for 7All and P6401) .................. 013-0106-00
Retractable hook tip (for 211, 212 , 213, 214, 221) ..... . 013-0107-02
Retractable hook tip (for P6053B, P6055, P6062B,
P6063B, P6101, P6105, P6106, P6108,
and P6149) .................................................................. 013-0107-03
Retractable probe tip (for P6201 only) .................
013-0135-00
Probe tip to BNC adapter (for P6201 only) ......... . ........ 013-0145-00
Miniature probe tip cover, IC tester,
Pael 250 ns.
Filter continuously
Trigger Output (BNC and Trig Out Square· Pin) HI Level - ;;. 2.2 V (1 .1 V into 50 !lload).
LO Level -
", 0.6 V.
Output Impedance -
50 II.
Expansion Output Level - Standard ECL level terminated at expansion in.
put of next module.
Delay from probe tip to expansion output BNC -
Accommodates all Logic Families
Max 19.5 ns. tYPiCal 15.5 ns. min 9.0 ns.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Carrying Case (A) ...................................... 016·0451 · 00
Pouch, Accessory (B) ................................ 016·0537-00
Cable Assembly, 50 Il BNC (C) ................ 012-0482-00
Lead, Electrical (D) .................................... 195-0277-00
21 Tip, Probe: Microcircuit Test (E) ................. 206-0222-00
1 Dc Power Cord (F) ..................................... 012-0848-00
2 Lead Set, 10-Wlde (G) .............................. 012-0747-00
Power Cord, 125 V ac ............................... 161 -0066-00
Fuse, 0.4 A Slow-Blow .............................. 159-0031 -00
Fuse, 0.2 A Slow-Blow .............................. 159-0044-00
Synchronous Qualified Clock
and Level Modes
Glitch Filter
The A6701 18 Bit Word Recognizer provides
easy·to'use, uniquely configurable gate emulated
triggering for digital troubleshooting. Besides con·
ventional AND word recognition , the A6701 can
be configured to provide NAND, OR, NOR or a
combination of user·defined logic triggering. Both
synchronous and asynchronous modes are pro·
vided along with such features as WORD·WORD
selecllon, threshold voltage selection and glitch
filter . In the synchronous mode, you may select
either a level or qualified clock output.
ORDERING INFORMATION
A6701 18 Bit Word Recognizer (with accessories and power supply) ._................ $1485
A670 1 Option 01 18 Bit Word Recognizer (with accessori es, without power supply) Note: Requires A6701 above for
36 bits parallel word recognition ........................... Sub $325
015-0356-00 Power Supply ........................................... $375
CHARACTERISTICS
CONTROL POD
tnput RC -
1 Mil paralleled by 5 pF.
Threshold Voltage -
POWER SUPPLY
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The separate power supply module can power two 18 Bit word
recognizer pods.
TTL -
Fixed at 1.4 V.
VAR -
:t 12V.
Line VOltage is selected by changing the line voltage selector
card to operate on 115 V system or 230 V system.
Minimum Input Swing - 500 mV pop ( :t 2% of threshold volt·
age) or less centered about the threshold voltage.
Frequency -
Maximum Clock Rate -
Operating Temperature -
1·18 channels-50 MHz.
48·440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption -
29 W.
103· 0209· 00 1>645 1 to GPIB .......................................... $ 180
015· 0339·00 Dip Clip, Low profile (40 Pin) .................... $40
of whether a logic pulse has or has not occurred
can be obtained in a "store" mode.
Max Safe Input -
Power may be obtained from the unit under test
or any 5 V supply.
Max Safe Strobe Input -
Two bright lights in the probe tip indicate condi·
tion of the logic signal.
Order P6401 5 ft Probe (010-6401-01)
CHARACTERISTICS
0 V to + 0.7 V :t 0.125 V.
348
012-0655·01 Lead Set, 40 CM (10 Leads) .................... $40
0 15· 0330·00 Dip Clip, Low Profile (16 Pin) ................... $35
O' C to 50· C.
Low State Input Voltage Range -
The small, lightweight, hand· held P6401 indicates
the state of logic levels in TIL, DTl, or any other
system with threshold between 0.7 and 2.15 volts.
A strobe input can be used to detect the coinci·
dence of logic signals at two pOints. An indication
0 12-0209-00 Lead Set With Hook Tip,
40 CM (1 0 Leads) .......................................................... $31 5
012· 0655·02 Lead Set, 20 CM ( 10 Leads) .................... $70
Clock Input - Minimum clock pulse width 1·18 channels-l 0
ns high , 10 ns low.
P6401 Logic Probe
0 12-0800·00 P6451 to 10-Wide Connector ................... $30
High State Input Voltage Range -
2.175 V :t o.125 V to Vcc.
Minimum Recognizable Pulse Width Impedance -
~
IOns.
7.5 kll paralleled by ", 6 pF.
Minimum Circuit Resi stance for Open Circuit Indication -
10 kll.
:t 150 V (dc or RMS).
Minimum Recognizable Strobe Pulse Width Strobe Input Impedance -
20 ns.
:t 30 V (dc or RMS).
5.6 kll within 20%.
Includes : Hook Tip (206·0114·00)
Strobe Lead (175-0958-01)
Sirobe Lead (175.0958.00)
Probe Tip to 0.025 in square pin adapter
(206·0137·01)
White Plug (348-0023.00)
2 Alligator Clips (344-0046.00)
Accessory Pouch (016-0537·00)
$135
ACCESSORIES
TEK MOUNTING
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
H
E
Q
PAOOUCT
In
em
R"3"
53
13.5
em
In
em
18.0
457
1.6
4 ,0
163
41.4
18
162
41.1
'4 .2
483
AF
c
T
AN
In
em
In
em
In
em
4.6
3.5
6.9
20 .4
51 8
11 .0
27.9
18
.. 6
3.5
69
19.3
49 .0
10.9
277
7.9
20 1
2.1
1.1
5 .'
2.8
3.5
89
21.1
53 .6
11 .9
30.2
85
216
1.8
4.6
246
625
1.8
4.6
33.3
84.6
15.3
369
10 .7
272
16.5
470
25.2
R5100N . R5'00'
5.3
13.5
17.'
19.0
Rno.·
7.0
17.8
22.4
56 .9
2.3
58
5.3
13.5
22 .3
56.6
20
51
In
em
In
em
In
5 .3
13.5
7.9
20 .1
9.6
24..
8.B
17 .3
9 .3
23 .6
6 .8
17.3
9.3
23.6
6 .6
17.3
5.3
13.5
7.0
17 I!I
6' .0
5 .3
13.5
7.0
17.8
25.3
64.3
5 .3
17.8
R7313" , R7603" ,
R7613" . R7623·
R78"·
7.0
17.8
2' .6
56 .6
2.3
56
R7903'
5.3
13.5
22.5
57.2
2.3
5.&
1.75
....
R7912·
5 .3
13.5
26.9
68 .3
1.8
4,8
26.9
68.3
5.3
13.5
7912AO
7 .0
17 .6
26.0
66.0
us
5.0
30.7
76.0
8 .9
17.5
RTM506
5.25
13.3
1&.9
46.0
1.82
4.7
5.25
133
17 .0
43 .2
T922R
5.2
13.2
016--0115-02
5.3
13.5
1.7
4.3
0 .3
0 .8
5.3
13.5
.. 6
5 ,2
132
5.25
13.3
5.3
13.5
24 .2
5 .2
61.5
13.2
016-0268-00
5.3
13.5
19.8
SO.3
1.8
04()..0551-01
14.0
35.6
22 .'
56.9
0 .6
, 5
30.9
78 .5
21.5
54 .6
1.9
4.6
31 .3
79.5
48 .5
0.7
1.6
46.5
0.7
1.8
1.1
2.6
1.8
4.6
24.6
525
5 .25
13.3
1.1
2.6
1.8
4.6
24.6
62 .5
5.3
13.5
0 .7
1.8
5 .3
13.5
0 .3
0.6
5.25
13.3
7.1
180
6.6
16.8
0'0-0600-00
5.25
13.3
18.3
04Q..06Q1-00
5.25
13.3
16.3
0' 0-0616-02
040-0617-02
5.3
5.3
13.5
13.5
' 37-0031-00
8.6
22 .4
18.5
41.9
18.3
46.5
'37-0071-00
7.0
17.6
13.4
34.0
I ..
3 .6
437-0126-01
S.3
13.5
22.3
56 .5
2 .0
51
25.2
6' .0
' These instruments mount with sliding tracks to a standard 19-inch wide rack. Rear support for sliding tracks is required, such as
an enclosed rack.
For 7000 Series Plug-in Unit s - Holds 6 plug-in units. for
mounting in a 19 in rack, 5.25 in high.
Order 437-0 126-03
$680
uu.uuu.UUu.u_uu.u . u.uuuuuu.u.Uuuu
REAR -SUPPORT CRADLES
For rackmounting the 7000 Series Oscilloscopes in a standard
19 in wide rack. Rack adapter includes sl~t assemblies.
7000 Series mask finish is light gray.
For 7704A, 71 04 , 7834 and 7854. rack height is 15.75 in. rack
depth is 21.38 in, shipping weight is = 41 lb.
u . u . u . u u u u . u u u . u •• u u u u . u u u _ u u u . u u
~
r~ ---------------
--- ~~
1. ____ .. _ .. ___.. _... ____
~
~
D.
T
L -_ _ _ _.....J'--I
DIMENSIONS EXCLUSIVE OF PLUG-IN UNITS AND PROBES
Symbol
Definition
H
L
F
G
E
RF
RR
T
C
Height of front panel.
Rack front to rearmost permanent fixture
excluding cables.
Back of front panel to foremost protrusion.
Bottom of front panel to horizontal plane
of rotation.
Maximum forward clearance with Instrument
out and horizontal.
Front radius of rotation.
Rear radius of rotation.
Rack front to pivot point.
Cabinet height.
BLANK PANEL
STORAGE CABINETS
RACK ADAPTERS
Order 040-0611-01
~ , ~
'------!-----------1
,"
,~..
:::::::3
' T'
.. T------------....... ---1 =:::::r:::
Provide rear support for rackmount instruments with sl~t
assemblies. when mounted in a 19 in backless rack. Shipping
weight is .. 3 lb.
For R561B, R564B, and R647A .
Order 040-0344-00
$45
uuu.u.uu.uuu.u.uuu.u.uuu.UUuUuuu.u
Blenk Penel - When operating the 500017000 Series Mainframes or the TM 500 or 2600 Series Generators with less than
a full complement of plug-Ins, the blank panel may be used to
cover an unused compartment. The panel for the 7000 Series
IS also good for EMC Shielding.
7000 Series. 2600 Series, Order 016-0155-00
5000 Series, Order 016-0452-00
TM 500 Series, Order 016-0195-03
BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS
uuuuuuu
u _ u . u u u _ u . U U U U U u __ u u u .
uuu.uuu.u u
uuuuu.u.
$40
$15
$21
$700
For 7704 and 7904, rack height is 15.75 in, rack depth is 21.75
in. shipping weight is = 41 lb.
Order 040-0554-01
$700
CRADLE MOUNTS
u u . u u u u u u ____ u u _____ u u u . u u u u u u _ u _ u u
For 455 and 465M . includes cradle mount, rack height 7 in,
rack depth 18.75 in.
Order 040-0825-01
uu.UuUUuu.uuuUuuuUuUuuu.uuuuuu
$320
For rackmounting 7000 Series cabinet-type oscilloscopes in a
standard 19 in wide rack . Cradle mount consists of a cradle (or
-shelf' ) Without slide-out assemblies and a mask to fit over the
regular Instrument panel. 7000 Series mask finish is light gray.
For 7704A, rack height is 15.75 in. rack depth is 22 in. Shipping
weight IS ~ 16 lb.
Order 040-0560-00
$385
uuuu.uuuu.u.uUuu.uu.u.uuuu.uuu.u.
Blank Plug-In Chassis - Available for all Tektronix Mainframes . The 7000 Series provides a printed circuit board. plugin frame. and securing hardware. The 560 Series, I-Series, and
Letter Series plug-in chassis have an interconnecting plug, securing hardware and plug-in frame .
7000 Series. Order 040-0553-01
5000 Series. Order 040-0818-03
TM 500 Series. Order 040-0652-05
560 Series, Order 040-0245-00 ...
u u u _ u u U u u u _ u _____ u u _ . __
u_uu._u.uu.uuuuuu_u_u
uuuuu.uuuuuuu.u.u
u.uu.uuuu.uuuuu .. u.u
$130
$105
$ 75
$ 125
For 468, and OM versions of other 400 Series Oscilloscopes.
Order 016-0675-00
u.UUUuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu.u.uuuuuu
$300
349
VIEWING
TEK ACCESSORIES
CATHODE ·RAY TUBE LIGHT FILTERS
PART
INSTRUMENTCOLOR
NUMBER
PRICE
314335
Blue
378-2016-01
200 Series
Blue
378-0691 ·00
1.10
455
Blue
337· 2122·00
4.15
465.465B.475,
464.466
Blue
Clear
Smoke..gray filter
337· 1674-00
337. 1674-01
337· 1674-07
4.00
4.00
4.00
540,550 Senes
565,575
Smoke-grayt
Green
Blue
Amber
378-0567-00
378-0568-00
378·0569-00
378-0570·00
7.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
018-0001-01
$1.80
CRT MESH FILTERS
Polarized Viewers - For Tektronix older 5 inch oscillosoopes.
The viewers reduce troublesome reflections and glare under
high ambient light conditions.
The mesh filter Improves display contrast for oscilloscope view·
ing under high ambient light conditions.
Aectangular Viewer. order 016-0039-00 .......................... S60
Plastic Aound Viewer. order 016-0053-00 ....................... $38
529,561 B,567
568
Smoke-grayt
378-0560·00
4.00
A fine metal screen with a matte black surlace is utilized to
reduce light reflections. Although light transmission from the
CAT is reduced to approximately 28%. the high attenuation of
external reflections allows viewing Iow.intensity displays in
room light or other bright surroundings.
Viewing Hood - For Tektronix older 5 inch round oscilloscopes. Includes molded rubber eyepiece and separate tubular
light shield.
Order 016-0001-01 ........................................................ $100
576
Bluet
Amber
378-0616-00
378-0616-01
3.85
5.00
603,604
Clear (603t)
Green
Amber
Blue
Gray
Graticule
I (8xl0 div)
337-1440-00
337-1440-01
337-1440-02
337-1440·03
337-1440-04
331 -0303-00
2.50
2.80
3.50
3.50
4.50
5.00
605,606,607
Blue
Amber
Graticule
Clear Shield
Grayt
Graticule
I (8xl0 div)
337-1674· 00
337-1674-05
337-1674-10
337· 1674-13
337·1 674-06
331 -0391 -00
4.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
4.00
4.00
608
Amber
Green
Graticulet
378-0704·00
378-0705-00
337·2126-02
5.00
5.00
8.00
7904 ,7844
7313,7700
Series ,7613
7623
Bluet
378-0625· 00
Amber
378-0625-01
Gray
378-0625-02
Green
378-0625-03
Gray Tv Graticule
CCIA
378-0625·05
Gray Tv Graticule
NTSC
378-0625-06
Clear Shield
With Spectrum Analyzer
Graticule
337· 1159-02
3.50
4.00
3.50
3.75
The mesh filter also serves as an erne filter . Installed on the
Instrument. the metal frame of the filter is grounded. providing
effective filtering of the erne spectrum.
INSTRUMENT'
PART NUMBEA
PRICE
3t4, 326. 335
37~00
$27
432, 434
378-0682·00
$33
422. 491. 453A. 454A.
485
378·0648-00
$22
465. 465B. 475. 464.
466. 434
378-0726-01
$45
Collapsible Viewing Hood - For oscilloscopes with rectangu·
lar CATs. Blue vinyl material. folds Hat for convenient storage.
7400. 7603
378-0696-00
$50
7500.7700.7800.7900
Series and 7613.7623
7633
For 422. 453A. 454A . 485. 491 .
order 016-0082-00 ........................................................... $15
378-0600.00
$50
'For both cabinet and racl-J Moonbae-Dong
Seoul
Phone: (2)7 12-843312179
Telex : K24283 MYOUNG
Cable: MYOUNGC RP
Phone: (2)792-7791 /2.3.4
Telex : K24179 INCOMS
Cable: COMPUTER CENTER SEOUL
MALAYSIA
MeComb Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
NO. 2 Lorang 1316A
(P.O . Box 24)
Pet.linG Jay. , Sel.ngor
Phone: 773455
Telex : 784-37605
Cable: MECOMB Petallng Jaya
MEXICO
Tektronix S.A. de C.V.
Kansas 67
Colonia Napoles
Mexico 18. D.F.
Phone: (905)667-0904/0854/0827
NEW ZEALAND
McLean Information
Technology Ltd.
103-105 Felton Mathew Avenue
Glen Innes
P.O . Box 18-065
Auckland 6
Phone: 587-037
Telex: NZ 2763 KOSFY
Cable: KOSFY . New Zeland
5th Floor. Westbrook House
181 Willis Street
(P.O. Box 496)
Wellington 1
Phone: 851-450844-425
TfNeK : NZ 3053 KOSFY
PAKISTAN
Pak-Land Corporation
Central Commercial Area
Iqbal Road
P.E.C.H. SocIety
Karachi-29
Phone: 437315 . 438084
Cab6e: PAKLANO , Karachi
PANAMA
Executive Marketing
Corp.
Apartado 4929
Panama 5
Phone: 64-9354 . 64-9851
Telex : 328-3483
Cable : MARKETING PA , Panama
PERU
Importaciones y
Representaciones
Electronicas S.A.
(IRE Ingenieros)
Avda. Frankhn O. Roosevelt 105
EdiflOO Rimae
Lima
Phone: 28-66-50
Telex : 334-25663
Cable: IREI NG. Uma
PHILIPPINES
Philippine ElectroniC
Industries, Inc.
3rd Floor, Rose Industries Bdg .
"_51.
Pa.ig, Metro Manila
(P.O . BoK 498, Makatl CommerCIal
Cenler)
Maketl, Rizel 3' 16
Phone: 693-1630
Telex : (722)43109 PEl PM
Cable: PHILECTRON . Manila
SINGAPORE
MeComb
10-12, Jalan Kilang
Singapore 0315
Redhllllndustrial Estate
(P.O. Box 46.
Alexandra Post Office)
Singapore 9115
Phone: 2713333
Telex : RS-23178
Cable: M ECOMB. Singapore
SRI LANKA
Stewart Roche Limited
G.P.O. Box 61
Colombo
Phone: 25846. 25847 . 25848
Telex : 1307 COLUM BO AlB ROCHES
CE 1307
SURINAM
Wong Sang Tsoi & Co.
20-24 Dominestraat
(P.O. Box 163)
Paramaribo
Phone: 73511 . 751 87. 72154 . 76369
Cable : SANGTSOICO. Paramaribo
THAILAND
Dynamic Supply
Engineering R.O.P.
12 Sol Pasana 1, Ekamai
Sukhumvit 63
Bangkok 11
Phone: 392-6532 . 5313
391 - 9571
Telex . 82455 DYNASUP-TH
Cable: Oynasuppty
URUGUAY
Coasin Uruguaya S.R.L.
Casilla de Correa No. 1400
Correa Central
Montevideo
Phone: 20 39 13. 29 31 95
Cable: COAUR . Montevideo
VENEZUELA
Equilab, C.A.
Torre KlM 6 - PISO
AvenidB Romuk> Gallegos
Santa Eduvigis
IApartado 60497)
Careus 107
Phone: 283. 1166 (5 I.nes)
Telex: 21860 EOUIX
Cable: EOUILAB . Caracas
Areas Not Listed, Contact:
Tektronix, Inc.
Expon Markeling
P.O. Box 1700
Beaverton, Oregon 97075
U.S.A .
Phone: (503)644--0161
Telex : 910--467-6708
Cable: TEKTRONIX
AFRICA, EUROPE,
MIDDLE EAST
AFRICA
Rohde & Schwarz Eng.
& Sales Co. Ltd.
P.O. Box 46658
Kenya, Nairobi
Phone : (2)26615.26386
Telex : 22030 ENGSALES
Cable: ENGSALES
ALGERIA
Sales:
Tektronix Limited
P.O. Box 36
Guernsey. Channel Islands
144 Bd Salah Bouakoulr
Algiers
Phone : 6 1.50.99 and 6' .50.24
Telex : 53733 TEKNY DZ
ANGOLA
Tecnidata
Representacoes
Tecnicas e
Electronica Aplicada
Lda
Rua Soaedade de Geografla
21-21A
Calxa Postal 1619
Luanda
Phone: 32025-32309
Telex : 30 19 TECDATA AN
AUSTRIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnlelthnergasse 20
A-1 100 Vienna
Phone: Vienna (222) 62 61 41
Telex : Vienna 13933
BELGIUM
Tektronix nvl sa
Mercure Centre
Rue de la Fusee 100
1130 BNseUe.
Phone: 021720.80.20
Te6ex : 26713
Cable : TEKBEL
BULGARIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnlelthnergasse 20, A-liDO
Vienna, Austria
Phone: Vienna 62 61 41
Telex : V)8fma 13933
CZECHOSLOVAKIA
Rohde & SchwarzTektronix Ges.m.b.H.
Sonnleithnergasse 20. A- 1100
Vienna, Austria
Phone: Vienna 62 6141
Tetex : Vienna 13933
DENMARK
Tektronix AI S
Her1ev Hovedgade
Post Box 575
DK-2730 Hertey
Phone : (02) 84 56 22
Telex: 35239 Tekas dk
EAST AFRICA (Kenya,
Tanzania and Uganda)
Engineering & Sales Co.,
Ltd.
Bankhouse, MOl Avenue
(P.O. Box 46658)
Na irobi, Kenya
Phone: 26815. 26386
Telex : 22030 ENGSALES
Cable: ENGSALES Nalrot>
EGYPT
Giza Systems
Engineering Company
P.O. BoK 1913
2 Medan EI Mesaha
Dokkl
Cairo
Phone: 841200. 849399 . 849200
Telex : 92096 EKA UN
93644 ALKAN UN
FEDERAL REPUBLIC
OF GERMANY
Tektronix GmbH
Ernst-Reuter-Platz 3 5/ 11
0-1000 Bertin- West 10
Phone: (030) 313908 1
Te4ex : 185804
Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Berlin
Tektronix GmbH
SchoenhauS8f Strasse 62 64
0 - 5000 Cologne 51
Phone : (221)375081
Telex: 8885541
Grosse Bergstrasse 213-217
0-2000 Hamburg 50
Phone: (040) 38 01 91
Telex : 213749
Cable:
ROHDESCHWARZ Hamburg
Herzogstrasse 61
6078 Neu-Isenburg
Phone: (06102)3136
Telex: 04185641
Kriegsstrasse 39
0-7500 Kartsruhe 1
Phone: (0721)2 79 81
Telex : 7 825 301
Cable:
ROHDESCHWARZ Karlsruhe
Sedanstrasse 13-17
0-5000 Koln 1
Phone : (0221) 77 22- 1
Telex : 888-5417
Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Koin
Ehrenbreitsleinefstrasse 36
8000 Munchen 50
Phone : (089)14 85-1
Telex: 522953
Cable :
ROHDESCHWARZVERTRIEB
Donaustrasse 36
0-8500 Numberg 60
Phone: (0911)646081
Telex : 0626255
OSaka Ohbayashl BUilding
3-37 Kyobashi, Hlgask~u
O•• k. 540
Phone: (06)947-0321
Technisches Buro
Plieninger Strasse 150
7000 Stuttgart 80
Phone : (07 11) 72 20 39
Telex : 0725533
FINLAND
Tektronix OI Y
Lann Kyostin tie 4.
SF-00650 Helllnki 65
Phone: 0-722 400
Telex : 12-3435 TEKOY SF
TEK
6025 103 A S1reel
Edmonton, Alberta
T6H 2J7
Phooe: (403)434-9466
T.lex : 037- 2795
FRANCE
Tektronix
JORDAN
Consult- Tel
Protea Medical Services
Pvt Ltd.
Z.I de COurtaboe
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date : 2013:09:21 08:36:36-08:00
Modify Date : 2013:09:21 12:38:22-07:00
Metadata Date : 2013:09:21 12:38:22-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:479ff977-f874-4744-b4bc-9dbdf9cab8b1
Instance ID : uuid:753dcddf-3d3a-bc4a-a03b-cec88c5ba7a7
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 374
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools